Service Manual

iR C3100 Series

Sep 8 2007

Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.

Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.

Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.

Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.

COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Introduction

Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:

Symbol

Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.

Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams,
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow
indicates the
direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in
supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors
used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the
DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be
able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."

Contents

Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 System Construction ..................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 Overview of the Delivery Accessories System Configuration.................................................................................. 1- 1
1.1.2 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 1 ....................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.3 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 2 ....................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.1.4 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 3 ....................................................................................................... 1- 3
1.1.5 Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration ................................................................................. 1- 3
1.1.6 Reader Heater System Configuration...................................................................................................................... 1- 4
1.1.7 Cassette Heater System Configuration 1 ................................................................................................................ 1- 5
1.1.8 Cassette Heater System Configuration 2 ................................................................................................................ 1- 6
1.1.9 Side Deck Heater System Configuration ................................................................................................................. 1- 6
1.1.10 System configuration of Accessory for Print/Transmission.................................................................................... 1- 8
1.1.11 Functions/Required Accessories List..................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.1.12 System configuration of Accessory for Print/Transmission.................................................................................... 1- 9
1.1.13 Functions/Required Accessories List................................................................................................................... 1- 10
1.1.14 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration .................................................................................... 1- 11
1.1.15 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories................................................................................................... 1- 11

1.2 Product Specifications ..............................................................................................................................1- 12

1.2.1 Names of Parts...................................................................................................................................................... 1- 12
1.2.1.1 External View ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 12
1.2.1.2 Cross Section......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 13

1.2.2 Using the Machine................................................................................................................................................. 1- 14

1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 14
1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch ..................................................................................................... 1- 15
1.2.2.3 Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 16

1.2.3 User Mode Items ................................................................................................................................................... 1- 17

1.2.3.1 Common Settings .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 17
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings........................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 18
1.2.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning....................................................................................................................................................... 1- 18
1.2.3.4 Printing Various Reports ........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 19
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings ........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 19
1.2.3.6 Copy Function Settings.......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 19
1.2.3.7 Common Transmission Function Settings ............................................................................................................................. 1- 20
1.2.3.8 Box Function Settings ............................................................................................................................................................ 1- 20
1.2.3.9 Printer Function Setting ......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 20
1.2.3.10 Address List Settings ........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 21

1.2.4 User Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 1- 21

1.2.4.1 Cleaning................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 21
1.2.4.2 Inspection............................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 22

1.2.5 Safety .................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 23

1.2.5.1 CDRH Regulations................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 23
1.2.5.2 Handling the Laser Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 23
1.2.5.3 Safety of the Laser Light ........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 24
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 24

1.2.6 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 24

1.2.6.1 System and Functions ........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 24
1.2.6.2 Others .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 25

1.2.7 Function List .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 25

1.2.7.1 First Copy Time...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 25
1.2.7.2 Print speed............................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 26
1.2.7.3 Print speed............................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 27
1.2.7.4 Types of Paper....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 29

Contents

Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks .................................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation ..............................................................................................................................2- 1
2.1.2 Selecting the Site of Installation...............................................................................................................................2- 5
2.1.3 Selecting the Site of Installation.............................................................................................................................2- 10
2.1.4 Making Checks Before Starting the Work ..............................................................................................................2- 12
2.1.5 Check to Make Before Installation .........................................................................................................................2- 15
2.1.6 Check to Make Before Installation .........................................................................................................................2- 16
2.1.7 Check to Make Before Installation .........................................................................................................................2- 18

2.2 Unpacking and Installation ....................................................................................................................... 2- 20

2.2.1 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power .................................................................................................2- 20
2.2.2 Settings When Mounting the Finisher ....................................................................................................................2- 20
2.2.3 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials......................................................................................................2- 21
2.2.4 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power .................................................................................................2- 22
2.2.5 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials......................................................................................................2- 22
2.2.6 Installing the Drum Unit..........................................................................................................................................2- 22
2.2.7 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials......................................................................................................2- 24
2.2.8 Installing the Drum Unit..........................................................................................................................................2- 25
2.2.9 Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing Assembly.......................................................................................2- 27
2.2.10 Installing the Drum Unit........................................................................................................................................2- 29
2.2.11 Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing Assembly .....................................................................................2- 31
2.2.12 Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly ...........................................................................................................2- 32
2.2.13 Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing Assembly .....................................................................................2- 35
2.2.14 Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly ...........................................................................................................2- 37
2.2.15 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly ...........................................................................................................2- 39
2.2.16 Mounting the Yellow Developing Assembly .........................................................................................................2- 41
2.2.17 Mounting the Magenta Developing Assembly......................................................................................................2- 42
2.2.18 After Mounting the Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................2- 42
2.2.19 Fixing the Machine in Place .................................................................................................................................2- 43
2.2.20 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly ...........................................................................................................2- 43
2.2.21 Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly ...........................................................................................................2- 45
2.2.22 Connecting the Cable...........................................................................................................................................2- 47
2.2.23 Connecting the Cable...........................................................................................................................................2- 48
2.2.24 Mounting the Yellow Developing Assembly .........................................................................................................2- 48
2.2.25 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly ...........................................................................................................2- 49
2.2.26 Setting Up the Cassette .......................................................................................................................................2- 51
2.2.27 Mounting the Magenta Developing Assembly......................................................................................................2- 51
2.2.28 Mounting the Yellow Developing Assembly .........................................................................................................2- 51
2.2.29 Mounting the Toner Cartridge ..............................................................................................................................2- 52
2.2.30 After Mounting the Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................2- 53
2.2.31 Mounting the Magenta Developing Assembly......................................................................................................2- 54
2.2.32 Making Initial Settings for the Developing Assembly ...........................................................................................2- 54
2.2.33 Fixing the Machine in Place .................................................................................................................................2- 55
2.2.34 After Mounting the Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................2- 55
2.2.35 Initializing the Drum Unit ......................................................................................................................................2- 56
2.2.36 Fixing the Machine in Place .................................................................................................................................2- 56
2.2.37 Connecting the Cable...........................................................................................................................................2- 57
2.2.38 Connecting the Cable...........................................................................................................................................2- 57
2.2.39 Automatic Gradation Correction...........................................................................................................................2- 58
2.2.40 Setting Up the Cassette .......................................................................................................................................2- 58
2.2.41 Setting Up the Cassette .......................................................................................................................................2- 58
2.2.42 Mounting the Toner Cartridge ..............................................................................................................................2- 59
2.2.43 Mounting the Toner Cartridge ..............................................................................................................................2- 61
2.2.44 Adjusting the Image Position................................................................................................................................2- 63
2.2.45 Making Initial Settings for the Developing Assembly ...........................................................................................2- 65

Contents

2.2.46 Making Initial Settings for the Developing Assembly ........................................................................................... 2- 66

2.2.47 Initializing the Drum Unit...................................................................................................................................... 2- 66
2.2.48 Initializing the Drum Unit...................................................................................................................................... 2- 66
2.2.49 Others .................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 66
2.2.50 Automatic Gradation Correction .......................................................................................................................... 2- 67
2.2.51 Automatic Gradation Correction .......................................................................................................................... 2- 67
2.2.52 Adjusting the Image Position ............................................................................................................................... 2- 68
2.2.53 Adjusting the Image Position ............................................................................................................................... 2- 70
2.2.54 Attaching Other Parts .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 72
2.2.55 Attaching Other Parts .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 73
2.2.56 When the Machine is Not Connecting to the Network ......................................................................................... 2- 74

2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network .................................................................................................2- 74

2.3.1 Checking the Connection to the Network .............................................................................................................. 2- 74
2.3.2 Checking the Connection to the Network .............................................................................................................. 2- 74
2.3.3 Checking the Connection to the Network .............................................................................................................. 2- 75
2.3.4 Using PING............................................................................................................................................................ 2- 75
2.3.5 Using PING............................................................................................................................................................ 2- 75
2.3.6 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address..................................................................................................... 2- 76
2.3.7 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address..................................................................................................... 2- 76
2.3.8 Using PING............................................................................................................................................................ 2- 76
2.3.9 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address..................................................................................................... 2- 76

2.4 Troubleshooting the Network....................................................................................................................2- 77

2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network................................................................................................................................. 2- 77
2.4.2 Troubleshooting the Network................................................................................................................................. 2- 77
2.4.3 Troubleshooting the Network................................................................................................................................. 2- 77
2.4.4 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address .......................................................................................................... 2- 77
2.4.5 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address .......................................................................................................... 2- 77
2.4.6 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address .......................................................................................................... 2- 77
2.4.7 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address ....................................................................................................... 2- 77
2.4.8 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address ....................................................................................................... 2- 78
2.4.9 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address ....................................................................................................... 2- 78

2.5 Checking the Images/Operations .............................................................................................................2- 78

2.5.1 Checking the Images............................................................................................................................................. 2- 78
2.5.2 Checking the Images............................................................................................................................................. 2- 78
2.5.3 Checking the Images............................................................................................................................................. 2- 79

2.6 Relocating the Machine ............................................................................................................................2- 79

2.6.1 Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 2- 79
2.6.2 Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 2- 80
2.6.3 Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 2- 80

2.7 Installing the Copy Tray ............................................................................................................................2- 80

2.7.1 Points to Note at Installation.................................................................................................................................. 2- 80
2.7.2 Checking the Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 80
2.7.3 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................ 2- 81
2.7.4 Installation Procedure............................................................................................................................................ 2- 81

2.8 Installing the Card Reader ........................................................................................................................2- 82

2.8.1 Points to Note ........................................................................................................................................................ 2- 82
2.8.2 Points to Note ........................................................................................................................................................ 2- 82
2.8.3 Checking the Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 82
2.8.4 Checking the Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 82
2.8.5 Installation ............................................................................................................................................................. 2- 83
2.8.6 Installation ............................................................................................................................................................. 2- 85
2.8.7 Using with NetSpot Accountant (NSA) .................................................................................................................. 2- 87
2.8.8 Points to Note at Installation.................................................................................................................................. 2- 87
2.8.9 Checking the Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 88
2.8.10 Turning Off the Host Machine.............................................................................................................................. 2- 88

Contents

2.8.11 Installation Procedure ..........................................................................................................................................2- 89

2.8.12 Installation Procedure in the imageWARE Accounting Manager (hereinafter referred to iWAM) Environment ...2- 91

2.9 Installing the NE Controller-A1 ................................................................................................................. 2- 91

2.9.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1...............................................................................................................................2- 91
2.9.2 Installing the NE Controller-A1...............................................................................................................................2- 98

2.10 Installing the Original Tray ...................................................................................................................... 2- 99

2.10.1 Checking the Contents.........................................................................................................................................2- 99
2.10.2 Installation Procedure ........................................................................................................................................2- 100

2.11 Installing the Key Switch Unit ............................................................................................................... 2- 101

2.11.1 Checking the Contents.......................................................................................................................................2- 101
2.11.2 Checking the Contents.......................................................................................................................................2- 101
2.11.3 Installation ..........................................................................................................................................................2- 101
2.11.4 Installation ..........................................................................................................................................................2- 104
2.11.5 Making Checks After Installation........................................................................................................................2- 106
2.11.6 Making Checks After Installation........................................................................................................................2- 106
2.11.7 Checking the Contents.......................................................................................................................................2- 106
2.11.8 Turning Off the Host Machine ............................................................................................................................2- 107
2.11.9 Installation Procedure ........................................................................................................................................2- 107
2.11.10 Checking After Installation................................................................................................................................2- 109

2.12 Installing the Reader Heater ................................................................................................................. 2- 109

2.12.1 Checking the Contents.......................................................................................................................................2- 109
2.12.2 Checking the Contents.......................................................................................................................................2- 110
2.12.3 Installation ..........................................................................................................................................................2- 111
2.12.4 Installation ..........................................................................................................................................................2- 114
2.12.5 Checking the Contents.......................................................................................................................................2- 116
2.12.6 Turning Off the Host Machine ............................................................................................................................2- 116
2.12.7 Installation ..........................................................................................................................................................2- 116

2.13 Installing the Cassette Heater .............................................................................................................. 2- 118

2.13.1 Checking the Parts.............................................................................................................................................2- 118
2.13.2 Turning Off the Host Machine ............................................................................................................................2- 119
2.13.3 Installation Procedure (Heater PCB)..................................................................................................................2- 120
2.13.4 Installation Procedure (Cassette Heater Attachment)........................................................................................2- 123
2.13.5 Installation Procedure (Cassette Heater) ...........................................................................................................2- 126
2.13.6 After Installation .................................................................................................................................................2- 129

2.14 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit .......................................................................................................... 2- 130

2.14.1 Checking Items in the Package..........................................................................................................................2- 130
2.14.2 Turning Off the Host Machine ............................................................................................................................2- 130
2.14.3 Installation Procedure .......................................................................................................................................2- 131
2.14.4 Checking the Contents.......................................................................................................................................2- 137
2.14.5 Turning Off the Host Machine ............................................................................................................................2- 138
2.14.6 Installation Procedure ........................................................................................................................................2- 138

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

3.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.1 Functional construction ............................................................................................................................................3- 1
3.1.2 Connections Among Major PCBs ............................................................................................................................3- 1
3.1.3 Connections Among Major PCBs ............................................................................................................................3- 3
3.1.4 DC Controller PCB...................................................................................................................................................3- 4

3.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 3- 4

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ...........................................................................................................3- 4
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (full color) ........................................................................................3- 5
3.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (mono color)....................................................................................3- 6

Chapter 4 Main Controller

Contents

4.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................4- 1

4.1.1 Construction and Functions..................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.2 Functional Construction........................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.3 Functional Construction........................................................................................................................................... 4- 3

4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry........................................................................................................4- 4

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB (main)..................................................................................................................................... 4- 4
4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (main)..................................................................................................................................... 4- 6
4.2.3 Main Controller PCB (main)..................................................................................................................................... 4- 7
4.2.4 Main Controller PCB (main)..................................................................................................................................... 4- 8
4.2.5 Main Controller PCB (main)..................................................................................................................................... 4- 8
4.2.6 Main Controller PCB (sub)....................................................................................................................................... 4- 9
4.2.7 Expansion Bus PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 10
4.2.8 SRAM PCB............................................................................................................................................................ 4- 10
4.2.9 SRAM PCB............................................................................................................................................................ 4- 11
4.2.10 HDD ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 11

4.3 Start-Up Sequence ...................................................................................................................................4- 13

4.3.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 4- 13
4.3.2 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 4- 14
4.3.3 Start-Up Sequence ................................................................................................................................................ 4- 14
4.3.4 Start-Up Sequence ................................................................................................................................................ 4- 15

4.4 Actions when HDD Error...........................................................................................................................4- 17

4.4.1 E602 in Detail ........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 17
4.4.2 E602 in Detail (iR C3170/C2570, iR C3180/C2580 Series) .................................................................................. 4- 20

4.5 Image Processing .....................................................................................................................................4- 23

4.5.1 Construction of Image Processing Modules .......................................................................................................... 4- 23
4.5.2 Reader Input Image Processing ............................................................................................................................ 4- 24
4.5.3 Compression, Decompression, and Edit Processing Blocks................................................................................. 4- 25
4.5.4 Printer Output Image Processing .......................................................................................................................... 4- 25
4.5.5 Construction of Image Processing Modules .......................................................................................................... 4- 26
4.5.6 Reader Input Image Processing ............................................................................................................................ 4- 28
4.5.7 Compression, Decompression, and Edit Processing Blocks................................................................................. 4- 28
4.5.8 Printer Output Image Processing .......................................................................................................................... 4- 29
4.5.9 Outline of the Flow of Image Processing............................................................................................................... 4- 29
4.5.10 Construction of the Image Processing Module .................................................................................................... 4- 30
4.5.11 Compression/Decompression and Editing Blocks ............................................................................................... 4- 30
4.5.12 Printer Output Image Processing......................................................................................................................... 4- 31

4.6 Flow of Image Data ..................................................................................................................................4- 32

4.6.1 Flow of Image Data (copier function)..................................................................................................................... 4- 32
4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions .............................................................................................................. 4- 33
4.6.3 Flow of Image Data (Box function) ........................................................................................................................ 4- 33
4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions .................................................................................................................. 4- 34
4.6.5 Flow of Image Data (SEND function) .................................................................................................................... 4- 34
4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for SEND Functions............................................................................................................... 4- 35
4.6.7 Flow of Image Data (fax transmission) .................................................................................................................. 4- 35
4.6.8 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions ............................................................................................ 4- 36
4.6.9 Image Data Flow for Fax Reception Functions ..................................................................................................... 4- 36
4.6.10 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions................................................................................................ 4- 37
4.6.11 Flow of Image Data (PDL function)...................................................................................................................... 4- 37
4.6.12 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions................................................................................................................ 4- 38
4.6.13 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions ............................................................................................................ 4- 38
4.6.14 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions................................................................................................................. 4- 39
4.6.15 Flow of Image Data for SEND Functions............................................................................................................. 4- 39
4.6.16 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions .......................................................................................... 4- 40
4.6.17 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions................................................................................................ 4- 40
4.6.18 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions................................................................................................................ 4- 41

Contents

4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................. 4- 41

4.7.1 Controller Box ........................................................................................................................................................4- 41
4.7.1.1 Removing the Controller Box ................................................................................................................................................. 4- 41
4.7.1.2 Before Removing Controller Box ........................................................................................................................................... 4- 42
4.7.1.3 Before Removing Controller Box ........................................................................................................................................... 4- 42
4.7.1.4 Removing Controller Box ....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 43

4.7.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ...................................................................................................................................4- 44

4.7.2.1 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (main) ...................................................................................................................... 4- 44
4.7.2.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)............................................................................................................................ 4- 44
4.7.2.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) ................................................................................................................... 4- 45
4.7.2.4 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (main) ...................................................................................................................... 4- 45
4.7.2.5 Removing Main Controller PCB (main).................................................................................................................................. 4- 45
4.7.2.6 Removing Main Controller PCB (main).................................................................................................................................. 4- 46
4.7.2.7 After Replacing Main Controller PCB (main) ......................................................................................................................... 4- 48
4.7.2.8 After Replacing Main Controller PCB (main) ......................................................................................................................... 4- 48

4.7.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) .....................................................................................................................................4- 48

4.7.3.1 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (sub) ........................................................................................................................ 4- 48
4.7.3.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub).............................................................................................................................. 4- 48
4.7.3.3 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (sub) ........................................................................................................................ 4- 48
4.7.3.4 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub-R-A) ............................................................................................................................ 4- 48
4.7.3.5 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub PE-A) .......................................................................................................................... 4- 49
4.7.3.6 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub PE-A) .......................................................................................................................... 4- 49
4.7.3.7 Removing Relay PCB (Gu-short)........................................................................................................................................... 4- 49
4.7.3.8 Removing Relay PCB (Gu-short)........................................................................................................................................... 4- 49
4.7.3.9 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub SJ-A) ........................................................................................................................... 4- 49
4.7.3.10 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub SJ-A) ......................................................................................................................... 4- 49
4.7.3.11 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) ................................................................................................................ 4- 50
4.7.3.12 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) ................................................................................................................ 4- 50

4.7.4 Expansion Bus PCB...............................................................................................................................................4- 50

4.7.4.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right) ........................................................................................................................................... 4- 50
4.7.4.2 Removing the SRAM Board................................................................................................................................................... 4- 50
4.7.4.3 Removing the Expansion Bus PCB ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 50
4.7.4.4 After Replacing the Expansion Bus PCB ............................................................................................................................... 4- 51

4.7.5 SRAM PCB ............................................................................................................................................................4- 51

4.7.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right) ........................................................................................................................................... 4- 51
4.7.5.2 Removing the SRAM Board................................................................................................................................................... 4- 51
4.7.5.3 After Replacing the SRAM Board .......................................................................................................................................... 4- 51

4.7.6 UFR Board .............................................................................................................................................................4- 51

4.7.6.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right) ........................................................................................................................................... 4- 51
4.7.6.2 Removing the UFR Board...................................................................................................................................................... 4- 52

4.7.7 Ethernet Board.......................................................................................................................................................4- 52

4.7.7.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right) ........................................................................................................................................... 4- 52
4.7.7.2 Removing the Ethernet Board................................................................................................................................................ 4- 52

4.7.8 HDD .......................................................................................................................................................................4- 52

4.7.8.1 Making a Backup of Data (reference only)............................................................................................................................. 4- 52
4.7.8.2 Handling HDD ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4- 53
4.7.8.3 Before Removing HDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 53
4.7.8.4 Removing the HDD ................................................................................................................................................................ 4- 54
4.7.8.5 After Replacing the HDD........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 54
4.7.8.6 Before Removing HDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 54
4.7.8.7 Removing HDD ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 54
4.7.8.8 After Replacing HDD.............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 55

4.7.9 Controller Fan ........................................................................................................................................................4- 55

4.7.9.1 Before Removing Controller Fan ........................................................................................................................................... 4- 55
4.7.9.2 Removing Controller Fan ....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 55

Chapter 5 Original Exposure System

5.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ...............................................................................................5- 1

Contents

5.1.2 Major Components .................................................................................................................................................. 5- 1

5.1.3 Construction of the Control System......................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB............................................................................................................................................ 5- 3

5.2 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................5- 4

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On........................................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode, 1 original) ......................... 5- 5
5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode, 1 original) .......................... 5- 5

5.3 Various Control Mechanisms......................................................................................................................5- 6

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System..................................................................................................................... 5- 6
5.3.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 6
5.3.1.2 Reader Motor Control .............................................................................................................................................................. 5- 6

5.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ................................................................................................................................... 5- 7

5.3.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 7
5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) .......................................................................................................... 5- 8

5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 9

5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction.......................................................................................................... 5- 9
5.3.3.2 Changing the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction ........................................................................................................... 5- 9

5.3.4 Controlling the Scanning Lamp ............................................................................................................................... 5- 9

5.3.4.1 Scanning Lamp ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 9
5.3.4.2 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 9
5.3.4.3 Activation Control................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 10
5.3.4.4 Error Detection....................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 10

5.3.5 Detecting the Size of Originals .............................................................................................................................. 5- 10

5.3.5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 10
5.3.5.2 Points of Original Size Detection ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 10
5.3.5.3 Overview of Detection Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 11

5.3.6 Dirt Sensor Control ................................................................................................................................................ 5- 13

5.3.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 13

5.3.7 Image Processing.................................................................................................................................................. 5- 15

5.3.7.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 15
5.3.7.2 Driving the CCD ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 16
5.3.7.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction for the CCD Output................................................................................................... 5- 16
5.3.7.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 16
5.3.7.5 Shading Correction (outline) .................................................................................................................................................. 5- 17
5.3.7.6 Shading Correction ................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 17
5.3.7.7 Shading Adjustment............................................................................................................................................................... 5- 17

5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................................5- 17

5.4.1 Copyboard Glass................................................................................................................................................... 5- 17
5.4.1.1 Detaching Copyboard Glass .................................................................................................................................................. 5- 17
5.4.1.2 After Replacing Copyboard Glass.......................................................................................................................................... 5- 17
5.4.1.3 Detaching ADF Reading Glass .............................................................................................................................................. 5- 18
5.4.1.4 After Replacing ADF Reading Glass ..................................................................................................................................... 5- 18

5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB.......................................................................................................................................... 5- 18

5.4.2.1 Before Replacing Reader Controller PCB.............................................................................................................................. 5- 18
5.4.2.2 Before Detaching Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................. 5- 18
5.4.2.3 Detaching Reader Controller PCB ......................................................................................................................................... 5- 18
5.4.2.4 After Replacing Reader Controller PCB................................................................................................................................. 5- 20

5.4.3 Inverter PCB .......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 21

5.4.3.1 Before Detaching Inverter PCB.............................................................................................................................................. 5- 21
5.4.3.2 Detaching Inverter PCB ......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 21

5.4.4 Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................................................................... 5- 21

5.4.4.1 Removing Scanner Motor ...................................................................................................................................................... 5- 21

5.4.5 Contact Sensor...................................................................................................................................................... 5- 21

5.4.5.1 Before Detaching Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ..................................................................................................................... 5- 21
5.4.5.2 Detaching Contact Image Sensor (CIS)................................................................................................................................. 5- 21
5.4.5.3 After Replacing Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ........................................................................................................................ 5- 22

5.4.6 Original Cover Sensor ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 22

5.4.6.1 Detaching Copyboard Cover Sensor (front/rear) ................................................................................................................... 5- 22

5.4.7 Contact Sensor HP Sensor ................................................................................................................................... 5- 23

Contents

5.4.7.1 Before Detaching Contact Sensor HP Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 5- 23

5.4.7.2 Detaching Contact Sensor HP Sensor................................................................................................................................... 5- 23

5.4.8 Original Sensor ......................................................................................................................................................5- 23

5.4.8.1 Before Detaching Document Size Sensor (AB/INCH-configuration)...................................................................................... 5- 23
5.4.8.2 Detaching Document Size Sensor (AB/INCH-configuration) ................................................................................................. 5- 23

5.4.9 Reader Heater (option) ..........................................................................................................................................5- 24

5.4.9.1 Detaching Reader Heater (right)............................................................................................................................................ 5- 24
5.4.9.2 Detaching Reader Heater (left) .............................................................................................................................................. 5- 24

Chapter 6 Laser Exposure

6.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ...............................................................................................6- 1
6.1.2 Major Components...................................................................................................................................................6- 1
6.1.3 Construction of the Control System .........................................................................................................................6- 2

6.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 6- 3

6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations ................................................................................................................................6- 3

6.3 Various Control........................................................................................................................................... 6- 4

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing ...................................................................................................................6- 4
6.3.1.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................... 6- 4
6.3.1.2 Main Scanning Synchronization Control .................................................................................................................................. 6- 5
6.3.1.3 Sub Scanning Direction Write Start Position Control ............................................................................................................... 6- 6

6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light.....................................................................................................................6- 6

6.3.2.1 APC Control ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6- 6
6.3.2.2 PWM Control............................................................................................................................................................................ 6- 6

6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor .......................................................................................................................6- 6

6.3.3.1 Laser Scanner Motor Control................................................................................................................................................... 6- 6

6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter ...................................................................................................................................6- 7

6.3.4.1 Laser Shutter Control............................................................................................................................................................... 6- 7

6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................... 6- 8

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit ..................................................................................................................................................6- 8
6.4.1.1 Before Removing Laser Scanner Unit ..................................................................................................................................... 6- 8
6.4.1.2 Removing Laser Scanner Unit ................................................................................................................................................. 6- 8
6.4.1.3 After Replacing Laser Scanner Unit......................................................................................................................................... 6- 9

6.4.2 Dust-Proofing Glass Cleaning Pad ..........................................................................................................................6- 9

6.4.2.1 Detaching Dust-Blocking Glass Cleaning Pad......................................................................................................................... 6- 9

Chapter 7 Image Formation

7.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System........................................................................................................7- 1
7.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System ...............................................................................................7- 2
7.1.3 Specifications of the Charging System ....................................................................................................................7- 2

7.2 Image Formation Process .......................................................................................................................... 7- 4

7.2.1 Image Formation Process (outline)..........................................................................................................................7- 4
7.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation)...........................................................................................................7- 5
7.2.3 2-Side Placement Control ........................................................................................................................................7- 6

7.3 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 7- 6

7.3.1 Power-On.................................................................................................................................................................7- 6
7.3.2 Copying/Printing (normal speed) .............................................................................................................................7- 7
7.3.3 Copying/Printing (half-speed) ..................................................................................................................................7- 8
7.3.4 Copying/Printing a Mix of Color and Black-and-White Originals..............................................................................7- 8

7.4 Image Stabilization Control ........................................................................................................................ 7- 8

7.4.1 Outline of Image Stabilization Control......................................................................................................................7- 8
7.4.2 Timing of Image Stabilization Control ......................................................................................................................7- 9
7.4.3 ATR Control ...........................................................................................................................................................7- 10
7.4.4 Drum Film Thickness Detection Control ................................................................................................................7- 12

Contents

7.4.5 Development Contrast Control .............................................................................................................................. 7- 12

7.4.6 ATVC Control ........................................................................................................................................................ 7- 13
7.4.7 PASCAL Control (image gradation density correction) ......................................................................................... 7- 13
7.4.8 Development Gradation Density Correction Control ............................................................................................. 7- 14
7.4.9 Auto Gradation Correction Function ...................................................................................................................... 7- 14

7.5 Drum Unit .................................................................................................................................................7- 14

7.5.1 Drum Unit .............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 14
7.5.1.1 Construction of the Drum Unit................................................................................................................................................ 7- 14
7.5.1.2 Charging Bias Control............................................................................................................................................................ 7- 15
7.5.1.3 Drum Cleaning ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 16
7.5.1.4 Drum Unit Drive Path ............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 16

7.6 Developing Rotary ....................................................................................................................................7- 17

7.6.1 Construction of the Developing Rotary.................................................................................................................. 7- 17
7.6.2 Developing Rotary Control .................................................................................................................................... 7- 18
7.6.3 Developing Assembly Drive Path .......................................................................................................................... 7- 19

7.7 Developing Unit ........................................................................................................................................7- 20

7.7.1 Construction of the Developing Unit ...................................................................................................................... 7- 20
7.7.2 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh control) .......................................................................................................... 7- 21
7.7.3 Developing Bias Control ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 23

7.8 Toner Container........................................................................................................................................7- 23

7.8.1 Construction of the Toner Cartridge ...................................................................................................................... 7- 23
7.8.2 Toner Level Detection Control............................................................................................................................... 7- 24
7.8.3 Toner Supply Control............................................................................................................................................. 7- 25

7.9 Transfer Device ........................................................................................................................................7- 26

7.9.1 Construction of the Transfer Assembly ................................................................................................................. 7- 26
7.9.2 ITB Home Position Detection Control.................................................................................................................... 7- 27
7.9.3 Transfer Bias Control............................................................................................................................................. 7- 28
7.9.4 Cleaning the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)....................................................................................................... 7- 29
7.9.5 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller .................................................................................................. 7- 30
7.9.6 ITB Waste Toner Collection Mechanism ............................................................................................................... 7- 30
7.9.7 Transfer Assembly Drive Path............................................................................................................................... 7- 31
7.9.8 Transfer Assembly Swing Control ......................................................................................................................... 7- 32
7.9.9 Transfer Assembly Swing Control ......................................................................................................................... 7- 33
7.9.10 Separation ........................................................................................................................................................... 7- 34

7.10 Parts Replacement Procedure................................................................................................................7- 35

7.10.1 Drum Unit............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 35
7.10.1.1 Removing Drum Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 7- 35
7.10.1.2 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................... 7- 36
7.10.1.3 After Replacing Drum Unit ................................................................................................................................................... 7- 36

7.10.2 Development Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 7- 37

7.10.2.1 Finisher-P1 in Use................................................................................................................................................................ 7- 37
7.10.2.2 Before Removing Developing Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 7- 37
7.10.2.3 Removing Developing Unit................................................................................................................................................... 7- 37
7.10.2.4 Points to Note When Attaching Developing Unit.................................................................................................................. 7- 39
7.10.2.5 After Replacing Developing Unit (Y/M/C)............................................................................................................................. 7- 39
7.10.2.6 After Replacing Developing Unit (Bk)................................................................................................................................... 7- 39

7.10.3 Rotary Upper Cover............................................................................................................................................. 7- 39

7.10.3.1 Detaching Rotary Upper Cover ............................................................................................................................................ 7- 39
7.10.3.2 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................... 7- 40

7.10.4 Rotary Lower Cover............................................................................................................................................. 7- 40

7.10.4.1 Before Detaching Rotary Lower Cover ................................................................................................................................ 7- 40
7.10.4.2 Detaching Rotary Lower Cover ............................................................................................................................................ 7- 40

7.10.5 ITB Cleaning Unit................................................................................................................................................. 7- 40

7.10.5.1 Preparing for the Removal of ITB Cleaning Unit .................................................................................................................. 7- 40
7.10.5.2 Removing the Delivery Tray................................................................................................................................................. 7- 41
7.10.5.3 Removing the Delivery Tray Lower Cover ........................................................................................................................... 7- 41
7.10.5.4 Removing the ITB Waste Toner Unit ................................................................................................................................... 7- 41

Contents

7.10.5.5 Before Removing ITB Cleaning Unit .................................................................................................................................... 7- 41

7.10.5.6 Removing ITB Cleaning Unit................................................................................................................................................ 7- 41
7.10.5.7 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................................... 7- 42

7.10.6 ITB Waste Toner Unit...........................................................................................................................................7- 43

7.10.6.1 Removing ITB Waste Toner Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 7- 43

7.10.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit ...................................................................................................................................7- 44

7.10.7.1 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB Unit) ...................................................................................................... 7- 44
7.10.7.2 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB Unit) ...................................................................................................... 7- 44
7.10.7.3 Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit) .................................................................................................................. 7- 44
7.10.7.4 Points to Note When Attaching Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB Unit) ................................................................................. 7- 46
7.10.7.5 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................... 7- 47
7.10.7.6 After Replacing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB Unit) ......................................................................................................... 7- 47

7.10.8 ITB Waste Toner Detection Unit ..........................................................................................................................7- 47

7.10.8.1 Before Removing ITB Waste Toner Detection Unit.............................................................................................................. 7- 47
7.10.8.2 Removing ITB Waste Toner Detection Unit ......................................................................................................................... 7- 47

7.10.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt....................................................................................................................................7- 47

7.10.9.1 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB).............................................................................................................. 7- 47
7.10.9.2 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB).............................................................................................................. 7- 48
7.10.9.3 Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) ......................................................................................................................... 7- 48
7.10.9.4 Points to Note When Attaching Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)......................................................................................... 7- 50
7.10.9.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit .............................................................................................................................. 7- 51
7.10.9.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................... 7- 51
7.10.9.7 After Replacing ITB .............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 52

7.10.10 ITB Home Position Sensor PCB.........................................................................................................................7- 52

7.10.10.1 Before Removing ITB Home Position Sensor PCB............................................................................................................ 7- 52
7.10.10.2 Before Removing ITB Home Position Sensor PCB............................................................................................................ 7- 52
7.10.10.3 Removing ITB Home Position Sensor PCB ....................................................................................................................... 7- 53
7.10.10.4 Points to Note When Attaching ITB.................................................................................................................................... 7- 53
7.10.10.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit ............................................................................................................................ 7- 54
7.10.10.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ......................................................................................................................... 7- 55

7.10.11 Primary Transfer Roller ......................................................................................................................................7- 55

7.10.11.1 Before Removing Primary Transfer Roller ......................................................................................................................... 7- 55
7.10.11.2 Before Removing Primary Transfer Roller ......................................................................................................................... 7- 55
7.10.11.3 Removing Primary Transfer Roller ..................................................................................................................................... 7- 56
7.10.11.4 Points to Note When Attaching ITB.................................................................................................................................... 7- 56
7.10.11.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit ............................................................................................................................ 7- 57
7.10.11.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ......................................................................................................................... 7- 58
7.10.11.7 After Replacing Primary Transfer Roller............................................................................................................................. 7- 58

7.10.12 Secondary Transfer External Roller ...................................................................................................................7- 58

7.10.12.1 Removing Secondary Transfer Outer Roller ...................................................................................................................... 7- 58
7.10.12.2 Points to Note When Attaching Secondary Transfer Outer Roller ..................................................................................... 7- 58
7.10.12.3 When Replacing Secondary Transfer Outer Roller ............................................................................................................ 7- 59

7.10.13 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller ....................................................................................................................7- 59

7.10.13.1 Before Removing Secondary Transfer Inner Roller ........................................................................................................... 7- 59
7.10.13.2 Before Removing Secondary Transfer Inner Roller ........................................................................................................... 7- 60
7.10.13.3 Removing Secondary Transfer Inner Roller ....................................................................................................................... 7- 60
7.10.13.4 Points to Note When Attaching ITB.................................................................................................................................... 7- 61
7.10.13.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit ............................................................................................................................ 7- 62
7.10.13.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ......................................................................................................................... 7- 63

7.10.14 ITB Cleaning Blade ............................................................................................................................................7- 63

7.10.14.1 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 63
7.10.14.2 Before Removing ITB Cleaning Blade................................................................................................................................ 7- 64
7.10.14.3 Removing ITB Cleaning Blade ........................................................................................................................................... 7- 64
7.10.14.4 When Replacing ITB Cleaning Blade ................................................................................................................................. 7- 65
7.10.14.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................................. 7- 65

7.10.15 ITB Fan...............................................................................................................................................................7- 66

7.10.15.1 Before Removing ITB Duct Fan ......................................................................................................................................... 7- 66
7.10.15.2 Removing ITB Duct Fan ..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 66

7.10.16 Separator Eliminator...........................................................................................................................................7- 67

7.10.16.1 Removing Separation Static Eliminator.............................................................................................................................. 7- 67

Contents

7.10.17 ATR Sensor Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 7- 67

7.10.17.1 Before Removing ATR Sensor Unit.................................................................................................................................... 7- 67
7.10.17.2 Removing ATR Sensor Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 67

7.10.18 Environment Sensor PCB .................................................................................................................................. 7- 68

7.10.18.1 Before Removing Environment Sensor PCB...................................................................................................................... 7- 68
7.10.18.2 Before Removing Environment Sensor PCB...................................................................................................................... 7- 68
7.10.18.3 Removing Environment Sensor PCB ................................................................................................................................. 7- 68
7.10.18.4 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ......................................................................................................................... 7- 68

7.10.19 Patch Image Sensor .......................................................................................................................................... 7- 69

7.10.19.1 Before Removing Patch Image Read Sensor .................................................................................................................... 7- 69
7.10.19.2 Before Removing Patch Image Read Sensor .................................................................................................................... 7- 69
7.10.19.3 Removing Patch Image Read Sensor ................................................................................................................................ 7- 69
7.10.19.4 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ......................................................................................................................... 7- 70

Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System

8.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................8- 1
8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ............................................................................................... 8- 1
8.1.2 Major Divisions of the Machine................................................................................................................................ 8- 1
8.1.3 Arrangement of the Rollers...................................................................................................................................... 8- 2
8.1.4 Paper Paths (printer on its own) .............................................................................................................................. 8- 3
8.1.5 Paper Paths (w/ Inner 2-Way Tray-C1) ................................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.1.6 Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-P1) .................................................................................................................................. 8- 5
8.1.7 Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2) .................................................................................................. 8- 5
8.1.8 Arrangement of Sensors.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 6
8.1.9 Arrangement of Clutches and Solenoids ................................................................................................................. 8- 7
8.1.10 Drive Transmission Routes.................................................................................................................................... 8- 7

8.2 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................8- 8

8.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On........................................................................................................... 8- 8
8.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key................................................................. 8- 8
8.2.3 Increase in Speed.................................................................................................................................................... 8- 9

8.3 Detecting Jams .........................................................................................................................................8- 11

8.3.1 Delay Jams............................................................................................................................................................ 8- 11
8.3.1.1 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly ............................................................................................................... 8- 11
8.3.1.2 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly......................................................................................................................... 8- 11

8.3.2 Stationary Jams..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 12

8.3.2.1 Common Stationary Jam ....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 12
8.3.2.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On.................................................................................................................................................. 8- 12

8.3.3 Other Jams ............................................................................................................................................................ 8- 12

8.3.3.1 Wrong Size Jam..................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 12
8.3.3.2 Wrong Material Jam............................................................................................................................................................... 8- 13
8.3.3.3 Cover Open Jam.................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 13

8.4 Cassette ...................................................................................................................................................8- 13

8.4.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 13
8.4.2 Identifying the Paper Size...................................................................................................................................... 8- 13
8.4.3 Setting Up the Universal Cassette......................................................................................................................... 8- 15
8.4.4 Paper Level Sensor ............................................................................................................................................... 8- 15

8.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ..............................................................................................................................8- 17

8.5.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 17
8.5.2 Basic Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................................. 8- 18

8.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit .........................................................................................................................8- 18

8.6.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 18
8.6.2 Basic Sequence of Operation................................................................................................................................ 8- 19
8.6.3 Identifying the Paper Size...................................................................................................................................... 8- 19
8.6.4 Paper Retaining Mechanism ................................................................................................................................. 8- 20
8.6.5 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 21
8.6.6 Basic Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................................. 8- 22

Contents

8.6.7 Identifying the Paper Size ......................................................................................................................................8- 22

8.6.8 Paper Retaining Mechanism..................................................................................................................................8- 23

8.7 Registration Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 24

8.7.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................8- 24
8.7.2 Controlling the Horizontal Registration ..................................................................................................................8- 25

8.8 Duplex Feeding Unit ................................................................................................................................. 8- 25

8.8.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................8- 25
8.8.2 Sequence of Image Formation...............................................................................................................................8- 27
8.8.3 Flow of Paper (wo/ Delivery Option) ......................................................................................................................8- 27
8.8.4 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -internal delivery)..............................................................................................8- 32
8.8.5 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -external delivery).............................................................................................8- 36

8.9 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................. 8- 39

8.9.1 Pickup Unit 1..........................................................................................................................................................8- 39
8.9.1.1 Before Removing Pickup Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 8- 39
8.9.1.2 Before Removing Pickup Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 8- 39
8.9.1.3 Removing Pickup Unit 1......................................................................................................................................................... 8- 39

8.9.2 Pickup Unit 2..........................................................................................................................................................8- 39

8.9.2.1 Before Removing Pickup Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 8- 39
8.9.2.2 Removing Pickup Unit 2......................................................................................................................................................... 8- 39

8.9.3 Sensor Mounting Plate...........................................................................................................................................8- 40

8.9.3.1 Before Removing Sensor Base.............................................................................................................................................. 8- 40
8.9.3.2 Before Removing Sensor Base.............................................................................................................................................. 8- 40
8.9.3.3 Removing Sensor Base ......................................................................................................................................................... 8- 40
8.9.3.4 Attaching Sensor Base .......................................................................................................................................................... 8- 40

8.9.4 Pickup Roller..........................................................................................................................................................8- 41

8.9.4.1 Removing Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller ........................................................................................................ 8- 41

8.9.5 Feed Roller ............................................................................................................................................................8- 41

8.9.5.1 Removing Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller ........................................................................................................ 8- 41

8.9.6 Separation Roller ...................................................................................................................................................8- 41

8.9.6.1 Removing Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller ........................................................................................................ 8- 41

8.9.7 Cassette Pickup Motor 1........................................................................................................................................8- 41

8.9.7.1 Removing Cassette Pickup Motor 1....................................................................................................................................... 8- 41

8.9.8 Cassette Pickup Motor 2........................................................................................................................................8- 42

8.9.8.1 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Motor 2 ........................................................................................................................... 8- 42
8.9.8.2 Removing Cassette Pickup Motor 2....................................................................................................................................... 8- 42

8.9.9 Cassette Size Detection Sensor ............................................................................................................................8- 42

8.9.9.1 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor................................................................................................................................ 8- 42
8.9.9.2 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor................................................................................................................................ 8- 42
8.9.9.3 Removing Cassette Size Sensor ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 42

8.9.10 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ..............................................................................................................................8- 43

8.9.10.1 Before Removing Cassette Retry Paper Sensor.................................................................................................................. 8- 43
8.9.10.2 Before Removing Cassette Retry Paper Sensor.................................................................................................................. 8- 43
8.9.10.3 Removing Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 8- 43

8.9.11 Cassette Paper Sensor ........................................................................................................................................8- 43

8.9.11.1 Before Removing Cassette Paper Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 8- 43
8.9.11.2 Before Removing Cassette Paper Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 8- 43
8.9.11.3 Removing Cassette Paper Sensor....................................................................................................................................... 8- 43

8.9.12 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) .....................................................................................................................8- 43

8.9.12.1 Before Removing Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ........................................................................................................ 8- 43
8.9.12.2 Before Removing Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ........................................................................................................ 8- 44
8.9.12.3 Removing Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) .................................................................................................................... 8- 44

8.9.13 Slide Resistor .......................................................................................................................................................8- 44

8.9.13.1 Before Removing Slide Resistor .......................................................................................................................................... 8- 44
8.9.13.2 Before Removing Slide Resistor .......................................................................................................................................... 8- 44
8.9.13.3 Removing Slide Resistor...................................................................................................................................................... 8- 44

8.9.14 Cassette Pickup Solenoid ....................................................................................................................................8- 44

8.9.14.1 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Solenoid ....................................................................................................................... 8- 44
8.9.14.2 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Solenoid ....................................................................................................................... 8- 44
8.9.14.3 Removing Cassette Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................................................................... 8- 44

Contents

8.9.15 Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB........................................................................................................................ 8- 45

8.9.15.1 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB ........................................................................................................... 8- 45
8.9.15.2 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB ........................................................................................................... 8- 45
8.9.15.3 Removing Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB....................................................................................................................... 8- 45

8.9.16 Manual Feed Pickup Clutch................................................................................................................................. 8- 45

8.9.16.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Clutch .................................................................................................................... 8- 45
8.9.16.2 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Clutch ................................................................................................................................ 8- 45
8.9.16.3 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Clutch ................................................................................................................................ 8- 46

8.9.17 Manual Feed Tray Unit ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 46

8.9.17.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit............................................................................................................................ 8- 46
8.9.17.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit............................................................................................................................ 8- 46
8.9.17.3 Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 46
8.9.17.4 Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 46

8.9.18 Manual Feed Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 8- 47

8.9.18.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Unit .................................................................................................................................... 8- 47
8.9.18.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Unit .................................................................................................................................... 8- 47
8.9.18.3 Removing Manual Feed Unit................................................................................................................................................ 8- 47
8.9.18.4 Removing Manual Feed Unit................................................................................................................................................ 8- 47

8.9.19 Manual Pickup Roller........................................................................................................................................... 8- 48

8.9.19.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller ..................................................................................................................... 8- 48
8.9.19.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller ..................................................................................................................... 8- 48
8.9.19.3 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller................................................................................................................................. 8- 48
8.9.19.4 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller................................................................................................................................. 8- 48

8.9.20 Manual Feed Separation Pad .............................................................................................................................. 8- 49

8.9.20.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Separation Pad.................................................................................................................. 8- 49
8.9.20.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Separation Pad.................................................................................................................. 8- 49
8.9.20.3 Removing Manual Feed Separation Pad ............................................................................................................................. 8- 49

8.9.21 Transparency Sensor (Front/Rear)...................................................................................................................... 8- 49

8.9.21.1 Before Removing Transparency Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 8- 49
8.9.21.2 Before Removing Transparency Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 8- 50
8.9.21.3 Removing Transparency Sensor.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 50

8.9.22 Registration Sensor ............................................................................................................................................. 8- 50

8.9.22.1 Before Removing Registration Sensor................................................................................................................................. 8- 50
8.9.22.2 Before Removing Registration Sensor................................................................................................................................. 8- 50
8.9.22.3 Removing Registration Sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 51

8.9.23 Registration Clutch .............................................................................................................................................. 8- 52

8.9.23.1 Removing Registration Clutch.............................................................................................................................................. 8- 52

8.9.24 Pickup Vertical Path Roller .................................................................................................................................. 8- 52

8.9.24.1 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2........................................................................................................................................ 8- 52
8.9.24.2 Removing the Sensor Base ................................................................................................................................................. 8- 52
8.9.24.3 Before Removing Vertical Path Roller.................................................................................................................................. 8- 52
8.9.24.4 Before Removing Vertical Path Roller.................................................................................................................................. 8- 52
8.9.24.5 Removing Vertical Path Roller ............................................................................................................................................. 8- 53

8.9.25 Duplex Feed Roller 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 53

8.9.25.1 Before Removing Duplex Feed Roller 2............................................................................................................................... 8- 53
8.9.25.2 Before Removing Duplex Feed Roller 2............................................................................................................................... 8- 53
8.9.25.3 Removing Duplex Feed Roller 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 8- 53

8.9.26 Duplex Feed Sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 53

8.9.26.1 Before Removing Duplex Feed Sensor................................................................................................................................ 8- 53
8.9.26.2 Before Removing Duplex Feed Sensor................................................................................................................................ 8- 53
8.9.26.3 Removing Duplex Feed Sensor ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 54

8.9.27 Duplex Feed Clutch ............................................................................................................................................. 8- 54

8.9.27.1 Before Removing Duplex Feed Clutch................................................................................................................................. 8- 54
8.9.27.2 Before Removing Duplex Feed Clutch................................................................................................................................. 8- 54
8.9.27.3 Removing Duplex Feed Clutch ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 54

8.9.28 Delivery Assembly 1 ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 54

8.9.28.1 Before Removing Delivery Unit 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 54
8.9.28.2 Before Removing Delivery Unit 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 54
8.9.28.3 Removing Delivery Unit 1..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 55

8.9.29 Delivery Drive Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 8- 55

Contents

8.9.29.1 Before Removing Delivery Drive Unit................................................................................................................................... 8- 55

8.9.29.2 Before Removing Delivery Drive Unit................................................................................................................................... 8- 55
8.9.29.3 Removing Delivery Drive Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 8- 55

Chapter 9 Fixing System

9.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ...............................................................................................9- 1
9.1.2 Major Components...................................................................................................................................................9- 1
9.1.3 Construction of the Control System .........................................................................................................................9- 3

9.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 9- 3

9.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On .....................................................................................................................9- 3
9.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations During Printing........................................................................................................9- 4

9.3 Various Control Mechanisms ..................................................................................................................... 9- 4

9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller ...............................................................................................................9- 4
9.3.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9- 4
9.3.1.2 Speed Control According to Paper Type ................................................................................................................................. 9- 5

9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature ...............................................................................................................9- 6

9.3.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9- 6
9.3.2.2 At Power-On ............................................................................................................................................................................ 9- 6
9.3.2.3 At a Standby State ................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.3.2.4 At Time of Printing ................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.3.2.5 Return Sequence ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 9

9.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper ..............................................................................................................................9- 9

9.3.3.1 Detection of the Passage of Paper .......................................................................................................................................... 9- 9

9.4 Protective Functions ................................................................................................................................. 9- 10

9.4.1 Detecting Overheating by the Main Thermistor (TH1) ...........................................................................................9- 10
9.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Sub Thermistor (TH2).............................................................................................9- 10
9.4.3 Detecting Overheating in Relation to a Triac Short-Circuit ....................................................................................9- 11
9.4.4 Detecting Overheating by the Thermal Switch (TP1).............................................................................................9- 11
9.4.5 Detecting Overheating of the Heat Retention Heater (H3) ....................................................................................9- 12
9.4.6 Error .......................................................................................................................................................................9- 12

9.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................. 9- 13

9.5.1 Fixing Unit ..............................................................................................................................................................9- 13
9.5.1.1 Before Removing Fixing Assembly ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 13
9.5.1.2 Before Removing Fixing Assembly ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 13
9.5.1.3 Removing Fixing Assembly.................................................................................................................................................... 9- 13

9.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame ...............................................................................................................................................9- 13

9.5.2.1 Before Removing the Fixing Upper Frame ............................................................................................................................ 9- 13
9.5.2.2 Before Removing the Fixing Upper Frame ............................................................................................................................ 9- 13
9.5.2.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 13
9.5.2.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable ........................................................................................................... 9- 14

9.5.3 Fixing Roller ...........................................................................................................................................................9- 14

9.5.3.1 Before Removing the Fixing Roller ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 14
9.5.3.2 Before Removing the Fixing Roller ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 14
9.5.3.3 Removing the Fixing Roller.................................................................................................................................................... 9- 14
9.5.3.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable ........................................................................................................... 9- 16

9.5.4 Pressure Roller ......................................................................................................................................................9- 17

9.5.4.1 Before Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller......................................................................................................................... 9- 17
9.5.4.2 Before Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller......................................................................................................................... 9- 17
9.5.4.3 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller .................................................................................................................................... 9- 17
9.5.4.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable ........................................................................................................... 9- 18

9.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor ..........................................................................................................................................9- 19

9.5.5.1 Before Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor........................................................................................................................ 9- 19
9.5.5.2 Before Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor........................................................................................................................ 9- 19
9.5.5.3 Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor ................................................................................................................................... 9- 19
9.5.5.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Main Thermistor................................................................................................... 9- 19

9.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor............................................................................................................................................9- 20

9.5.6.1 Before Removing the Fixing Sub Thermistor ......................................................................................................................... 9- 20

Contents

9.5.6.2 Before Removing the Fixing Sub Thermistor ......................................................................................................................... 9- 20

9.5.6.3 Removing the Fixing Sub Thermistor..................................................................................................................................... 9- 20
9.5.6.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Sub Thermistor .................................................................................................... 9- 20

9.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch ........................................................................................................................................... 9- 20

9.5.7.1 Before Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch......................................................................................................................... 9- 20
9.5.7.2 Before Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch......................................................................................................................... 9- 20
9.5.7.3 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch .................................................................................................................................... 9- 21
9.5.7.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal Switch.................................................................................................... 9- 21

9.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater................................................................................................................... 9- 21

9.5.8.1 Before Removing the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ................................................................................... 9- 21
9.5.8.2 Before Removing the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ................................................................................... 9- 21
9.5.8.3 Removing the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater............................................................................................... 9- 22
9.5.8.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable ........................................................................................................... 9- 22

9.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater ................................................................................................................................ 9- 22

9.5.9.1 Before Removing the Fixing Heat Retention Heater.............................................................................................................. 9- 22
9.5.9.2 Before Removing the Fixing Heat Retention Heater.............................................................................................................. 9- 23
9.5.9.3 Removing the Fixing Heat Retention Heater ......................................................................................................................... 9- 23

9.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide................................................................................................................................................. 9- 24

9.5.10.1 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide .............................................................................................................................. 9- 24
9.5.10.2 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide .............................................................................................................................. 9- 24
9.5.10.3 Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide .......................................................................................................................................... 9- 24
9.5.10.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable ......................................................................................................... 9- 25

9.5.11 Fixing Delivery Guide........................................................................................................................................... 9- 25

9.5.11.1 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Guide ........................................................................................................................ 9- 25
9.5.11.2 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Guide ........................................................................................................................ 9- 25
9.5.11.3 Removing the Fixing Delivery Guide.................................................................................................................................... 9- 25

9.5.12 Fixing Inlet Sensor ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 26

9.5.12.1 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor............................................................................................................................. 9- 26
9.5.12.2 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor............................................................................................................................. 9- 26
9.5.12.3 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 26
9.5.12.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable ......................................................................................................... 9- 27

9.5.13 Fixing Delivery Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 9- 27

9.5.13.1 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor ...................................................................................................................... 9- 27
9.5.13.2 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor ...................................................................................................................... 9- 27
9.5.13.3 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 9- 27

Chapter 10 Externals and Controls

10.1 Control Panel ..........................................................................................................................................10- 1
10.1.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 1
10.1.2 LCD Processing................................................................................................................................................... 10- 1
10.1.3 Adjusting the LCD Screen Contrast..................................................................................................................... 10- 1
10.1.4 Control Panel CPU .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 1

10.2 Counters .................................................................................................................................................10- 1

10.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 1
10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count............................................................................................................................ 10- 3

10.3 Fans ........................................................................................................................................................10- 3

10.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 3
10.3.2 2-Speed Control................................................................................................................................................... 10- 3
10.3.3 Sequence of Operations ...................................................................................................................................... 10- 4

10.4 Power Supply..........................................................................................................................................10- 4

10.4.1 Power Supply....................................................................................................................................................... 10- 4
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer ............................................................................................................................ 10- 4
10.4.1.2 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer ............................................................................................................................ 10- 5
10.4.1.3 Route of Power to the Reader Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 10- 6
10.4.1.4 Timing of Supplying Power to the Reader Unit .................................................................................................................... 10- 7
10.4.1.5 Routes of Power to various Options..................................................................................................................................... 10- 7

10.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB.............................................................................................................. 10- 8

10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB ........................................................................................................... 10- 8

Contents

10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB.............................................................................................................. 10- 8

10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the Options Power Supply PCB................................................................................................................. 10- 8
10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the Non-Interruptive Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................... 10- 8

10.4.3 Protection Function ..............................................................................................................................................10- 9

10.4.3.1 Protective Functions............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 9

10.4.4 Backup Battery.....................................................................................................................................................10- 9

10.4.4.1 Backup Battery..................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 9

10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function.......................................................................................................................................10- 9

10.4.5.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 9
10.4.5.2 Power Supply and Heater Control...................................................................................................................................... 10- 10
10.4.5.3 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 11
10.4.5.4 Power Supply and Heater Control...................................................................................................................................... 10- 12
10.4.5.5 SNMP setup ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 14

10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ............................................................................................................. 10- 17

10.5.1 External Covers..................................................................................................................................................10- 17
10.5.1.1 Right Cover (Upper Rear) .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 17
10.5.1.2 Right Cover (Lower Rear) .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 17
10.5.1.3 Right Cover (Lower Front).................................................................................................................................................. 10- 17
10.5.1.4 Support Cover .................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 17
10.5.1.5 Support Cover (Right) ........................................................................................................................................................ 10- 18
10.5.1.6 Upper Left Cover................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 18
10.5.1.7 Left Lower Cover................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 18
10.5.1.8 Left Rear Cover (Upper)..................................................................................................................................................... 10- 18
10.5.1.9 Rear Cover......................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 19
10.5.1.10 Rear Right Cover.............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 19
10.5.1.11 Toner Replacement Cover ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 19
10.5.1.12 Reader Front Cover.......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 19
10.5.1.13 Reader Rear Cover .......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 20
10.5.1.14 Delivery Cover.................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 20

10.5.2 Main Drive Assembly .........................................................................................................................................10- 21

10.5.2.1 Before Removing Main Drive Assembly............................................................................................................................. 10- 21
10.5.2.2 Removing Main Drive Assembly ........................................................................................................................................ 10- 21

10.5.3 Option Power Supply Assembly.........................................................................................................................10- 22

10.5.3.1 Before Removing Option Power Supply Assembly ............................................................................................................ 10- 22
10.5.3.2 Before Removing Option Power Supply Assembly ............................................................................................................ 10- 22
10.5.3.3 Removing Option Power Supply Assembly........................................................................................................................ 10- 22

10.5.4 Controller Power Supply Unit .............................................................................................................................10- 22

10.5.4.1 Before Removing Controller Power Supply Unit ................................................................................................................ 10- 22
10.5.4.2 Before Removing Controller Power Supply Unit ................................................................................................................ 10- 22
10.5.4.3 Removing Controller Power Supply Unit............................................................................................................................ 10- 22

10.5.5 Printer Power Supply Unit ..................................................................................................................................10- 23

10.5.5.1 Before Removing Printer Power Supply Unit ..................................................................................................................... 10- 23
10.5.5.2 Before Removing Printer Power Supply Unit ..................................................................................................................... 10- 23
10.5.5.3 Removing Printer Power Supply Unit................................................................................................................................. 10- 23

10.5.6 Control Panel .....................................................................................................................................................10- 23

10.5.6.1 Removing Control Panel .................................................................................................................................................... 10- 23

10.5.7 Control Panel LCD Unit......................................................................................................................................10- 24

10.5.7.1 Before Removing Control Panel LCD ................................................................................................................................ 10- 24
10.5.7.2 Removing Control Panel LCD ............................................................................................................................................ 10- 24

10.5.8 DC Controller PCB .............................................................................................................................................10- 24

10.5.8.1 Removing DC Controller PCB............................................................................................................................................ 10- 24
10.5.8.2 When Replacing DC Controller PCB.................................................................................................................................. 10- 25

10.5.9 All-Night Power Supply PCB ..............................................................................................................................10- 25

10.5.9.1 Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB............................................................................................................................. 10- 25

10.5.10 Leakage Breaker ..............................................................................................................................................10- 25

10.5.10.1 Removing Leakage Breaker............................................................................................................................................. 10- 25

10.5.11 HVT PCB..........................................................................................................................................................10- 26

10.5.11.1 Before Removing HVT PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 10- 26
10.5.11.2 Before Removing HVT PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 10- 26
10.5.11.3 Removing HVT PCB......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 26

Contents

10.5.11.4 When Replacing HVT PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 27

10.5.12 High-Voltage Sub PCB .................................................................................................................................... 10- 27

10.5.12.1 Before Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB........................................................................................................................ 10- 27
10.5.12.2 Before Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB........................................................................................................................ 10- 27
10.5.12.3 Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB ................................................................................................................................... 10- 27

10.5.13 Control Panel CPU PCB .................................................................................................................................. 10- 27

10.5.13.1 Before Removing Control Panel CPU PCB...................................................................................................................... 10- 27
10.5.13.2 Removing Control Panel CPU PCB ................................................................................................................................. 10- 27

10.5.14 Control Panel Key Switch PCB ........................................................................................................................ 10- 27

10.5.14.1 Before Removing Control Panel KEY PCB ...................................................................................................................... 10- 27
10.5.14.2 Removing Control Panel KEY PCB.................................................................................................................................. 10- 28

10.5.15 Control Panel Inverter PCB.............................................................................................................................. 10- 28

10.5.15.1 Before Removing Control Panel Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................. 10- 28
10.5.15.2 Removing Control Panel Inverter PCB............................................................................................................................. 10- 28

10.5.16 Main Power Switch .......................................................................................................................................... 10- 28

10.5.16.1 Before Removing Main Power Switch .............................................................................................................................. 10- 28
10.5.16.2 Removing Main Power Switch.......................................................................................................................................... 10- 29

10.5.17 Front Cover Open/Closed Detecting Switch .................................................................................................... 10- 29

10.5.17.1 Before Removing Front Cover Switch .............................................................................................................................. 10- 29
10.5.17.2 Removing Front Cover Switch.......................................................................................................................................... 10- 29

10.5.18 ITB Fan ............................................................................................................................................................ 10- 30

10.5.18.1 Before Removing ITB Duct Fan ....................................................................................................................................... 10- 30
10.5.18.2 Removing ITB Duct Fan ................................................................................................................................................... 10- 30

10.5.19 Toner Intake Fan.............................................................................................................................................. 10- 30

10.5.19.1 Before Removing Toner Suction Fan ............................................................................................................................... 10- 30
10.5.19.2 Removing Toner Suction Fan........................................................................................................................................... 10- 30

10.5.20 Machine Heat Discharge Fan .......................................................................................................................... 10- 31

10.5.20.1 Before Removing Heat Exhaust Fan................................................................................................................................ 10- 31
10.5.20.2 Before Removing Heat Exhaust Fan................................................................................................................................ 10- 31
10.5.20.3 Removing Heat Exhaust Fan ........................................................................................................................................... 10- 31
10.5.20.4 Routing Heat Exhaust Fan Harness................................................................................................................................. 10- 31

10.5.21 Toner Intake Fan Filter..................................................................................................................................... 10- 31

10.5.21.1 Removing Toner Suction Fan Filter.................................................................................................................................. 10- 31

10.5.22 Motor of Main Drive Assembly ......................................................................................................................... 10- 32

10.5.22.1 Before Removing Main Drive Motor ................................................................................................................................. 10- 32
10.5.22.2 Removing Main Drive Motor............................................................................................................................................. 10- 32
10.5.22.3 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Motor .................................................................................................................... 10- 32

10.5.23 Right Door........................................................................................................................................................ 10- 32

10.5.23.1 Detaching Right Door ....................................................................................................................................................... 10- 32
10.5.23.2 Before Opening Right Door .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 33
10.5.23.3 Opening Right Door.......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 33

10.5.24 Cautions in Handling the Left Stay................................................................................................................... 10- 34

10.5.24.1 Points to Note When Handling Left Stay .......................................................................................................................... 10- 34

Chapter 11 MEAP
11.1 MEAP......................................................................................................................................................11- 1
11.1.1 Checking the Operating Environment.................................................................................................................. 11- 1
11.1.2 Setting Up the Network........................................................................................................................................ 11- 4
11.1.3 Setting the method to login to SMS ..................................................................................................................... 11- 5
11.1.4 Login to SMS ....................................................................................................................................................... 11- 8
11.1.5 Checking Application List................................................................................................................................... 11- 10
11.1.6 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application ....................................................................................................... 11- 11
11.1.7 Checking the Platform Information .................................................................................................................... 11- 12
11.1.8 MEAP Specifications ......................................................................................................................................... 11- 13
11.1.9 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS................................................................. 11- 15
11.1.10 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application .................................................................................. 11- 15
11.1.11 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................... 11- 16
11.1.12 Reference (Application System Information) ................................................................................................... 11- 16

Contents

11.1.13 Installing an Application....................................................................................................................................11- 17

11.1.14 MEAP Enterprise Service Manager..................................................................................................................11- 19
11.1.15 Adding a License File .......................................................................................................................................11- 20
11.1.16 Disabling a License File (suspending a license) ..............................................................................................11- 22
11.1.17 Downloading/Removing an Invalidated License File........................................................................................11- 24
11.1.18 Reusable license ..............................................................................................................................................11- 26
11.1.19 License for forwarding ......................................................................................................................................11- 26
11.1.20 Uninstalling an Application ...............................................................................................................................11- 29
11.1.21 Changing Login Services .................................................................................................................................11- 30
11.1.22 MEAP Counter .................................................................................................................................................11- 34
11.1.23 Initializing the Password...................................................................................................................................11- 35
11.1.24 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area
with the Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool)..........................................................................................11- 36
11.1.25 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive .........................................................................................................................11- 37
11.1.26 MEAP Safe Mode.............................................................................................................................................11- 38
11.1.27 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) ............................................................................................11- 39
11.1.28 Reference material ...........................................................................................................................................11- 42
11.1.29 Option for exclusive individual measure...........................................................................................................11- 43
11.1.30 Construction of the MEAP Platform..................................................................................................................11- 44

Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection

12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts.................................................................................................................... 12- 1
12.1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................12- 1
12.1.2 Reader Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................12- 1
12.1.3 Printer Unit ...........................................................................................................................................................12- 1

12.2 Durables and Consumables ................................................................................................................... 12- 1

12.2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................12- 1
12.2.2 Reader Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................12- 1
12.2.3 Printer Unit ...........................................................................................................................................................12- 1

12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ................................................................................................... 12- 2

12.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure .................................................................................................................12- 2
12.3.2 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (reader unit) ...........................................................................................12- 3
12.3.3 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (printer unit)............................................................................................12- 3
12.3.4 Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing Work ......................................................................................................12- 8

12.4 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................. 12- 9

12.4.1 Cleaning the Primary Charging Roller..................................................................................................................12- 9

Chapter 13 Standards and Adjustments

13.1 Image Adjustments ................................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.1 Standards for Image Position...............................................................................................................................13- 1
13.1.2 Checking the Image Position ...............................................................................................................................13- 1
13.1.3 Cassette ...............................................................................................................................................................13- 2
13.1.4 Manual Feed Tray ................................................................................................................................................13- 3
13.1.5 Side Paper Deck ..................................................................................................................................................13- 4

13.2 Scanning System.................................................................................................................................... 13- 4

13.2.1 After Replacing CIS..............................................................................................................................................13- 4
13.2.2 After Replacing Copyboard Glass........................................................................................................................13- 5
13.2.3 After Replacing ADF Reading Glass....................................................................................................................13- 5
13.2.4 After Replacing Reader Controller PCB or After Initializing the RAM ..................................................................13- 5

13.3 Laser Exposure System ......................................................................................................................... 13- 6

13.3.1 After Replacing Laser Scanner Unit.....................................................................................................................13- 6

13.4 Image Formation System ....................................................................................................................... 13- 6

13.4.1 After Replacing Intermediate Transfer Unit..........................................................................................................13- 6
13.4.2 After Replacing Intermediate Transfer Belt ..........................................................................................................13- 6

Contents

13.4.3 After Replacing Primary Transfer Roller .............................................................................................................. 13- 6

13.4.4 After Replacing Drum Unit ................................................................................................................................... 13- 6
13.4.5 After Replacing Developing Unit (Y/M/C) ............................................................................................................ 13- 7
13.4.6 After Replacing Developing Unit (Bk) .................................................................................................................. 13- 7
13.4.7 After Replacing Secondary Transfer Outer Roller ............................................................................................... 13- 7
13.4.8 How to replace the primary transfer roller holder................................................................................................. 13- 7

13.5 Fixing System .........................................................................................................................................13- 8

13.5.1 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit..................................................................................................................... 13- 8
13.5.2 After Replacing the Fixing Unit ............................................................................................................................ 13- 8
13.5.3 After Replacing the Fixing Roller ......................................................................................................................... 13- 8
13.5.4 Nip Adjustment .................................................................................................................................................... 13- 8
13.5.5 Point to Note About the Position of the Fixing Main Thermistor .......................................................................... 13- 9
13.5.6 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Sub Thermistor.................................................................................... 13- 9
13.5.7 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal Switch ................................................................................. 13- 10

13.6 Electrical Components ..........................................................................................................................13- 10

13.6.1 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ...................................................................................................... 13- 10
13.6.2 After Replacing DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................... 13- 11
13.6.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) ............................................................................................... 13- 11
13.6.4 After Replacing the SRAM Board ...................................................................................................................... 13- 11
13.6.5 After Replacing the HDD ................................................................................................................................... 13- 12
13.6.6 When Replacing HVT PCB................................................................................................................................ 13- 12

13.7 Pickup/Feeding System ........................................................................................................................13- 12

13.7.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Pickup Cassette .................................................... 13- 12
13.7.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit............................................................ 13- 13
13.7.3 Adjust the Horizontal Registration for the Manual Feed Tray ............................................................................ 13- 14
13.7.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value.......................................................................................................... 13- 14

Chapter 14 Correcting Faulty Images

14.1 Making lnitial Checks ..............................................................................................................................14- 1
14.1.1 Checking the Site Environment ........................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.2 Checking the Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 14- 1
14.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ....................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.4 Checking the Durables ........................................................................................................................................ 14- 1
14.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts........................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks .......................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.7 Others .................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 2

14.2 Test Print ................................................................................................................................................14- 2

14.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 14- 2
14.2.2 Test Print TYPE ................................................................................................................................................... 14- 2
14.2.3 Selecting Test Print TYPE ................................................................................................................................... 14- 2
14.2.4 16-Gradation (TYPE=4) ....................................................................................................................................... 14- 3
14.2.5 Full Page Halftone (TYPE=5) .............................................................................................................................. 14- 3
14.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) ..................................................................................................................................................... 14- 4
14.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripes (TYPE=10) ................................................................................................................ 14- 4
14.2.8 64-Gradation (TYPE=12) ..................................................................................................................................... 14- 5
14.2.9 Full Color 16-Gradation (TYPE=14)..................................................................................................................... 14- 5

14.3 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................14- 6

14.3.1 Symptoms............................................................................................................................................................ 14- 6
14.3.1.1 Symptoms ............................................................................................................................................................................ 14- 6

14.3.2 Image Faults ........................................................................................................................................................ 14- 6

14.3.2.1 Blank Image ......................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 6
14.3.2.2 Light Image / Weak Density ................................................................................................................................................. 14- 7
14.3.2.3 Foggy Image ........................................................................................................................................................................ 14- 8
14.3.2.4 Out of Focus......................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 8
14.3.2.5 Partially Blank/Streaked ..................................................................................................................................................... 14- 10

Contents

14.3.2.6 Smudged/Streaked ............................................................................................................................................................ 14- 15

14.3.2.7 Ghost / Memory.................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 20
14.3.2.8 Poor Finxing ....................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 20
14.3.2.9 Faulty Color Reproduction ................................................................................................................................................. 14- 21
14.3.2.10 Stretching/Shrinking ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 21

14.3.3 Faulty Feeding ...................................................................................................................................................14- 22

14.3.3.1 Skew Feed ......................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 22
14.3.3.2 Fold/Rip.............................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 23

14.3.4 Malfunction.........................................................................................................................................................14- 23
14.3.4.1 No Power ........................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 23
14.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related........................................................................................................................................................ 14- 24
14.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................................... 14- 25
14.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection.............................................................................................................................................. 14- 25
14.3.4.5 Noise .................................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 30
14.3.4.6 User Warning Message...................................................................................................................................................... 14- 32
14.3.4.7 Other Defect....................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 34
14.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment................................................................................................................................................ 14- 35

14.3.5 Printing/scanning................................................................................................................................................14- 35
14.3.5.1 No Output........................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 35
14.3.5.2 Installation Failure .............................................................................................................................................................. 14- 36
14.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result ......................................................................................................................................... 14- 36

14.3.6 Network ..............................................................................................................................................................14- 37

14.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure.................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 37
14.3.6.2 Connection Problem........................................................................................................................................................... 14- 37

14.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related .................................................................................................................................14- 37

14.3.7.1 Transmission Problem ....................................................................................................................................................... 14- 37
14.3.7.2 Reception Problem............................................................................................................................................................. 14- 39
14.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect ................................................................................................................................................... 14- 39
14.3.7.4 Setting/Registration Defect ................................................................................................................................................ 14- 40

14.3.8 Jam (Main Unit)..................................................................................................................................................14- 40

14.3.8.1 0105 Jam Code: Because multifeed sensor flag is detached ............................................................................................ 14- 40
14.3.8.2 010C JAM CODE: 2nd side of duplex print is jammed because of duplex inlet sensor coming off ................................... 14- 40
14.3.8.3 0111 Jam Code: Because of deformed connector pin of buffer pass unit ......................................................................... 14- 41
14.3.8.4 Jam Immediately After Pickup (heavy paper, envelope, postcard) .................................................................................... 14- 41
14.3.8.5 0202/0105 Jam Code: Always occur in front of registration roller when picking up A4-size paper from cassette 2 .......... 14- 41
14.3.8.6 0A06 Jam Code: Because claw of fixing inlet sensor (PS25) is freed ............................................................................... 14- 41
14.3.8.7 0A0B JAM CODE occurred upon installation of Inner 2way Tray-C1 ................................................................................ 14- 41
14.3.8.8 0B00/0B01 Jam Code: Supplementary descriptions.......................................................................................................... 14- 42
14.3.8.9 0D91 JAM CODE: Occurred at all cassettes upon installation .......................................................................................... 14- 42
14.3.8.10 0D91/0105 Jam Code: At all paper cassettes and stack bypass ..................................................................................... 14- 42
14.3.8.11 Pickup Faults (pickup from the side paper deck) ............................................................................................................. 14- 42
14.3.8.12 Delivery Delay Jam (label sheet)...................................................................................................................................... 14- 42
14.3.8.13 Pickup Stationary Jam...................................................................................................................................................... 14- 43

14.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder) ....................................................................................................................................14- 43

14.3.9.1 0094 Jam Code: Because of poor contact of Delivery Sensor (PI4) connector in DADF-L1 ............................................. 14- 43

14.3.10 Error Code........................................................................................................................................................14- 44

14.3.10.1 E004-0001 Error Code: Displayed after opening/closing front panel ............................................................................... 14- 44
14.3.10.2 E010-0002 Error Code: Protection sheet for developing cylinder was not removed upon installation............................. 14- 44
14.3.10.3 E070-0003 Error Code: Because grounding spring for registration hard roller is deformed ............................................ 14- 44
14.3.10.4 E014-0001 Error Code: Because fixing roller is deformed ............................................................................................... 14- 44
14.3.10.5 E014-0001 Error Code: Because fixing motor (M11) is faulty .......................................................................................... 14- 44
14.3.10.6 E020 Error Code: Occurred upon installation because developer failed to be filled inside developing ass'y .................. 14- 44
14.3.10.7 E020 Error Code and Toner scattering inside machine: Because wrong screw is used for fixing developing ass'y........ 14- 44
14.3.10.8 E020-01A8 Error Code: Machine performs adjustments each time outputting copy, finally resulting in E020-01A8 ....... 14- 45
14.3.10.9 E020-0XA2/E020-0XA8 Error Code ................................................................................................................................. 14- 45
14.3.10.10 E020-0XA0/E020-0XA1/E020-0XA9 Error Code............................................................................................................ 14- 45
14.3.10.11 E021-000x Error Code: Developing rotary does not rotate and abnormal noise comes from motor.............................. 14- 45
14.3.10.12 E021-0003 Error Code: Occurs during copy, not upon FAX reception but output becomes yellow ............................... 14- 46
14.3.10.13 E026-0x01 Error Code / Message [Remaining toner is low.] / Toner scattering inside machine.................................... 14- 46
14.3.10.14 E067-0100 Error Code: Because tension spring for Primary Transfer Roller comes off ................................................ 14- 46
14.3.10.15 E067-0100 Error Code: Because of condensation upon installation .............................................................................. 14- 46

Contents

14.3.10.16 E067-0100 Error Code: Troubleshooting upon error code indication ............................................................................. 14- 46
14.3.10.17 E070-0003 Error Code: Improper ground of ITB tension roller shaft in ITB unit............................................................. 14- 46
14.3.10.18 E070-0003 Error Code: Because ITB-HP sensor (PS19) is soiled................................................................................. 14- 47
14.3.10.19 E070-0003 Error Code: ITB HP sticker is soiled ............................................................................................................ 14- 47
14.3.10.20 E070-0001 Error Code: Because tension arm (front/rear) of ITB is broken ................................................................... 14- 47
14.3.10.21 E100 / E110 Error Code: Occurred because J328 connector on DC Controller PCB was not securely fitted ............... 14- 47
14.3.10.22 E110 Error Code: Error occurred at the time when paper was delivered to transfer unit ............................................... 14- 47
14.3.10.23 E225-0001 Error Code: Scanning lamp came on........................................................................................................... 14- 47
14.3.10.24 E315-0010/0034/0038 Error Code: Occurred during PCFAX transmission, then host machine rebooted..................... 14- 47
14.3.10.25 E351-0000 Error Code: Occasionally occurs while host machine is being energized.................................................... 14- 48
14.3.10.26 E400-0002 Error Code: Because ADF Controller PCB is faulty ..................................................................................... 14- 48
14.3.10.27 E500 (Finisher-P1) ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 48
14.3.10.28 E505 (Finisher-P1) ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 48
14.3.10.29 E514 (Finisher-P1) ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 48
14.3.10.30 E530 (Finisher-P1) ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 49
14.3.10.31 E531 (Finisher-P1) ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 49
14.3.10.32 E532 (Finisher-P1) ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 49
14.3.10.33 E532-8002 Error Code: Because staple connecting assembly cable has open-circuit, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2 ... 1450
14.3.10.34 E535 (Finisher-P1) ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 50
14.3.10.35 E537 (Finisher-P1) ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 50
14.3.10.36 E540 (Finisher-P1) ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 50
14.3.10.37 E540-8003 Error Code: Occurs when Upper Tray ascends because of Back End Assist Plate coming off................... 14- 51
14.3.10.38 E540-0003 Error Code: Saddle Finisher-Q2 .................................................................................................................. 14- 51
14.3.10.39 E542 Error Code: Saddle Delivery Tray of Saddle Finisher-Q2 not completely latched ................................................ 14- 51
14.3.10.40 E577 (Finisher-P1) ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 52
14.3.10.41 E602-0001 Error Code: Ticktack sound is heard upon start-up and then the error code is displayed ........................... 14- 53
14.3.10.42 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after HD-CLEAR .................................................................................................... 14- 53
14.3.10.43 E602-0402 Error Code: Recovered after HD-CLEAR .................................................................................................... 14- 53
14.3.10.44 E602-0111 Error Code ................................................................................................................................................... 14- 53
14.3.10.45 E602-0113 Error Code: Because of faulty HDD ............................................................................................................. 14- 54
14.3.10.46 E674-0001 Error Code: Because J1210 connector is not securely fitted on Main Controller PCB (Main) ..................... 14- 54
14.3.10.47 E732-0001 Error Code: Reader Controller PCB is faulty ............................................................................................... 14- 54
14.3.10.48 E732-0001 Error Code: iRC3100 locks up during copying............................................................................................. 14- 54
14.3.10.49 E732-0001 Error Code: Because of poor contact of SDRAM......................................................................................... 14- 54
14.3.10.50 E733-0001 Error Code: Occurs after progress bar is filled completely .......................................................................... 14- 54
14.3.10.51 E747-8702 / E747-00FF Error Code: Scanning lamp keeps lighting up at its home position when making a copy ....... 14- 55
14.3.10.52 E747-0031 Error Code: Half of image becomes blank when printing list in user mode ................................................. 14- 55
14.3.10.53 E803-0002 Error Code: Front Door Switch (SW3) is faulty ............................................................................................ 14- 55
14.3.10.54 E803-0001/E227-0004 Error Code: Poor soldering on Printer Power Supply PCB ....................................................... 14- 55

14.3.11 FAX # Code ..................................................................................................................................................... 14- 55

14.3.11.1 #751 Fax Error Code: Occurs occasionally when sending to PC..................................................................................... 14- 55

14.3.12 FAX ## Code ................................................................................................................................................... 14- 55

14.3.12.1 ##100 FAX Error Code: Occurs frequently when sending to a specific party .................................................................. 14- 55

14.3.13 Specifications-Related FAQ............................................................................................................................. 14- 56

14.3.13.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications...................................................................................................................................... 14- 56
14.3.13.2 FAQ on Send Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 14- 71
14.3.13.3 FAQ on UFR Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 14- 74
14.3.13.4 FAQ on PS Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 14- 76
14.3.13.5 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications ......................................................................................................................................... 14- 76
14.3.13.6 FAQ on I-FAX Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 14- 79
14.3.13.7 FAQ on Remote UI Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 14- 80
14.3.13.8 FAQ on iR (Color) Network ScanGear Specifications ...................................................................................................... 14- 82

14.4 Outline of Electrical Components..........................................................................................................14- 82

14.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid.................................................................................................................................................. 14- 82
14.4.1.1 Clutch/Solenoid Table ........................................................................................................................................................ 14- 82
14.4.1.2 Clutch/Solenoid Table ........................................................................................................................................................ 14- 83

14.4.2 Motor.................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 84

14.4.2.1 Motor Table ........................................................................................................................................................................ 14- 84

14.4.3 Fan..................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 86

14.4.3.1 Fan Table ........................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 86

Contents

14.4.3.2 Fan Table ........................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 87

14.4.4 Sensor................................................................................................................................................................14- 88
14.4.4.1 Sensor Table...................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 88

14.4.5 Switch.................................................................................................................................................................14- 91
14.4.5.1 Switch Table....................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 91
14.4.5.2 Switch Table....................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 92

14.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ..............................................................................................................................14- 93

14.4.6.1 Lamp. Heaters, and Others Table...................................................................................................................................... 14- 93
14.4.6.2 Lamp. Heaters, and Others Table...................................................................................................................................... 14- 95

14.4.7 PCBs ..................................................................................................................................................................14- 97

14.4.7.1 PCBs Table ........................................................................................................................................................................ 14- 97
14.4.7.2 PCBs Table ........................................................................................................................................................................ 14- 99
14.4.7.3 PCBs Table ...................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 102

14.4.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB.............................................14- 104
14.4.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emiting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB.............................................................. 14- 104
14.4.8.2 Points to Note about the Leakage Breaker ...................................................................................................................... 14- 104
14.4.8.3 Main Controller PCB (main) ............................................................................................................................................. 14- 104
14.4.8.4 Main Controller PCB (main) ............................................................................................................................................. 14- 105
14.4.8.5 Main Controller PCB (sub PE-A)...................................................................................................................................... 14- 106
14.4.8.6 Main Controller PCB (sub SJ-A) ...................................................................................................................................... 14- 106
14.4.8.7 Main Controller PCB (sub R-A) ........................................................................................................................................ 14- 107
14.4.8.8 Main Controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A) ............................................................................................................................ 14- 107
14.4.8.9 DC Controller PCB ........................................................................................................................................................... 14- 107
14.4.8.10 DC Controller PCB ......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 108
14.4.8.11 High-Voltage Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................................... 14- 109

Chapter 15 Self Diagnosis

15.1 Error Code Table .................................................................................................................................... 15- 1
15.1.1 Error Code............................................................................................................................................................15- 1

15.2 Error Code Details .................................................................................................................................. 15- 2

15.2.1 Error Code Details Table......................................................................................................................................15- 2
15.2.2 E602 in Detail (iR C3100 Series) .......................................................................................................................15- 17
15.2.3 E602 in Detail (iR C3170/C2570 Series)............................................................................................................15- 20

15.3 Error Codes (SEND) ............................................................................................................................. 15- 22

15.3.1 Self-Diagnostic Display ......................................................................................................................................15- 22
15.3.2 List of Error Codes without Messages ...............................................................................................................15- 23

15.4 Jam Codes ........................................................................................................................................... 15- 28

15.4.1 Jam Code (printer unit) ......................................................................................................................................15- 28
15.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related)................................................................................................................................15- 28
15.4.3 Jam Code (ADF-related) ....................................................................................................................................15- 29

15.5 Alarm Codes ......................................................................................................................................... 15- 29

15.5.1 Alarm Code ........................................................................................................................................................15- 29

Chapter 16 Service Mode

16.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 16- 1
16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ..............................................................................................................................16- 1
16.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ....................................................................................................................16- 1
16.1.3 Exiting service modes ..........................................................................................................................................16- 2
16.1.4 Backing Up Service Mode....................................................................................................................................16- 2
16.1.5 Initial Screen ........................................................................................................................................................16- 3
16.1.6 Main/intermediate Item Screen ............................................................................................................................16- 3
16.1.7 Sub- Item Screen .................................................................................................................................................16- 3

16.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) ............................................................................................................ 16- 4

16.2.1 COPIER ...............................................................................................................................................................16- 4
16.2.1.1 COPIER Table ..................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 4

16.2.2 FEEDER.............................................................................................................................................................16- 10

Contents

16.2.2.1 FEEDER Table................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 10

16.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode) ..........................................................................................................................16- 10

16.3.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 16- 10
16.3.2 <DC-CON> ........................................................................................................................................................ 16- 11
16.3.3 <R-CON>........................................................................................................................................................... 16- 13
16.3.4 <FEEDER> ........................................................................................................................................................ 16- 13
16.3.5 <SORTER>........................................................................................................................................................ 16- 14
16.3.6 <MN-CONT> (iR C3100 Series) ........................................................................................................................ 16- 18
16.3.7 <MN-CONT> (iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series) ............................................................................................. 16- 19

16.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode).................................................................................................................16- 20

16.4.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 16- 20
16.4.1.1 COPIER Table ................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 20

16.4.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................................ 16- 29

16.4.2.1 FEEDER Table................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 29

16.4.3 SORTER............................................................................................................................................................ 16- 29

16.4.3.1 SORTER Table .................................................................................................................................................................. 16- 29

16.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode).............................................................................................16- 29

16.5.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 16- 29
16.5.1.1 COPIER Table ................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 29

16.5.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................................ 16- 38

16.5.2.1 FEEDER Table................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 38

16.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) .......................................................................................................16- 38

16.6.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 16- 38
16.6.1.1 COPIER Table ................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 38
16.6.1.2 Software Counter Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 16- 61

16.6.2 SORTER............................................................................................................................................................ 16- 68

16.6.2.1 SORTER Table .................................................................................................................................................................. 16- 68

16.6.3 BOARD .............................................................................................................................................................. 16- 68

16.6.3.1 BOARD Table .................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 68

16.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ........................................................................................................................16- 68

16.7.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 16- 68
16.7.1.1 COPIER Table ................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 68

16.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ..................................................................................................................16- 70

16.8.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 16- 70
16.8.1.1 COPIER Table ................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 70

Chapter 17 Upgrading
17.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................17- 1
17.1.1 Outline of the Version Upgrade ........................................................................................................................... 17- 1
17.1.2 Overview of Upgrading Work............................................................................................................................... 17- 1
17.1.3 Outline of the Functions and Operations ............................................................................................................. 17- 2
17.1.4 Upgrading Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 17- 5
17.1.5 Function/Operation Overview ............................................................................................................................. 17- 6
17.1.6 Points to Note at Time of Downloading ............................................................................................................... 17- 9
17.1.7 Outline of the Service Support Tool..................................................................................................................... 17- 9
17.1.8 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use ..................................................................................... 17- 12

17.2 Making Preparations .............................................................................................................................17- 15

17.2.1 Registering the System software ....................................................................................................................... 17- 15
17.2.2 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)......................................................................................... 17- 18
17.2.3 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB) .................................................................................................... 17- 21
17.2.4 Making connections ........................................................................................................................................... 17- 24
17.2.5 Making Connections (SST in use) ..................................................................................................................... 17- 28
17.2.6 Making Connections (USB device in use) ......................................................................................................... 17- 30
17.2.7 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)......................................................................................... 17- 30
17.2.8 Installing the System Software (SST -> USB) ................................................................................................... 17- 32
17.2.9 Making Connections (SST in use) ..................................................................................................................... 17- 34

Contents

17.2.10 Making Connections (USB device in use) ........................................................................................................17- 35

17.3 Formatting the HDD.............................................................................................................................. 17- 35

17.3.1 Formatting All Partitions .....................................................................................................................................17- 35
17.3.2 Formatting the HDD for All Partition...................................................................................................................17- 36
17.3.3 Formatting Selected Partitions ...........................................................................................................................17- 37
17.3.4 Formatting the HDD for Selected Partitions .......................................................................................................17- 38
17.3.5 Formatting Procedure ........................................................................................................................................17- 40
17.3.6 Formatting Procedure ........................................................................................................................................17- 45
17.3.7 Formatting All Partitions .....................................................................................................................................17- 46
17.3.8 Formatting Selected Partitions ...........................................................................................................................17- 47
17.3.9 Formatting the Partitions ....................................................................................................................................17- 48

17.4 Downloading System Software............................................................................................................. 17- 49

17.4.1 Batch Downloading ............................................................................................................................................17- 49
17.4.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 49
17.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 49
17.4.1.3 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 52
17.4.1.4 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 52

17.4.2 Downloading the System Software (Single).......................................................................................................17- 57

17.4.2.1 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 57

17.4.3 Downloading the System Software ....................................................................................................................17- 60

17.4.3.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 60
17.4.3.2 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 60
17.4.3.3 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 61
17.4.3.4 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 65

17.4.4 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module ...................................................................................................17- 69

17.4.4.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 69
17.4.4.2 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 71
17.4.4.3 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 72
17.4.4.4 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 77

17.4.5 Downloading the SDICT.....................................................................................................................................17- 78

17.4.5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 78
17.4.5.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 78

17.4.6 Downloading the MEAPCONT ...........................................................................................................................17- 78

17.4.6.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 78
17.4.6.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 78

17.4.7 Downloading the KEY ........................................................................................................................................17- 78

17.4.7.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 78
17.4.7.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 78

17.4.8 Downloading the TTS.........................................................................................................................................17- 78

17.4.8.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 78
17.4.8.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 78

17.4.9 Downloading the BROWSER.............................................................................................................................17- 79

17.4.9.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 79
17.4.9.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 17- 79

17.4.10 Downloading the BOOT Software ....................................................................................................................17- 80

17.4.10.1 Outline .............................................................................................................................................................................. 17- 80
17.4.10.2 Outline .............................................................................................................................................................................. 17- 80
17.4.10.3 Downloading Procedure .................................................................................................................................................. 17- 81
17.4.10.4 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 17- 86

17.4.11 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software......................................................................................................17- 88

17.4.11.1 Outline .............................................................................................................................................................................. 17- 88
17.4.11.2 Outline .............................................................................................................................................................................. 17- 88
17.4.11.3 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 17- 90
17.4.11.4 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 17- 95

17.4.12 Downloading the FAX Software .......................................................................................................................17- 95

17.4.12.1 Outline .............................................................................................................................................................................. 17- 95
17.4.12.2 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 17- 96
17.4.12.3 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 100
17.4.12.4 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................................................. 17- 102

Contents

17.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data .........................................................................................17- 102

17.5.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................. 17- 102
17.5.2 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................. 17- 103
17.5.3 Uploading Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 17- 103
17.5.4 Downloading Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 17- 107
17.5.5 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................. 17- 107
17.5.6 Uploading Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 17- 108
17.5.7 Downloading Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 17- 110
17.5.8 Uploading Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 17- 111
17.5.9 Downloading Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 17- 116

17.6 Version Upgrade using USB ...............................................................................................................17- 120

17.6.1 Overview of Menus and Functions .................................................................................................................. 17- 120
17.6.2 Points to Note .................................................................................................................................................. 17- 121
17.6.3 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto) ........................................................................................... 17- 122
17.6.4 Downloading the System Software (Confirmation execution when version is downed the same version) ...... 17- 122
17.6.5 Downloading the System Software (all overwriting) ........................................................................................ 17- 123
17.6.6 Formatting the HDD......................................................................................................................................... 17- 124
17.6.7 Other Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 17- 125
17.6.8 Overview of Menus and Functions .................................................................................................................. 17- 127
17.6.9 Points to Note .................................................................................................................................................. 17- 128
17.6.10 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto) ......................................................................................... 17- 129
17.6.11 Downloading the System Software (auto or selective) .................................................................................. 17- 129
17.6.12 Downloading the System Software (overwriting) ........................................................................................... 17- 130
17.6.13 Formatting the HDD ....................................................................................................................................... 17- 132
17.6.14 Other Functions ............................................................................................................................................. 17- 132

Chapter 18 Service Tools

18.1 Service Tools ..........................................................................................................................................18- 1
18.1.1 Special Tools ....................................................................................................................................................... 18- 1
18.1.2 Solvents and Oils................................................................................................................................................. 18- 2

Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction

Contents

Contents
1.1 System Construction ......................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Overview of the Delivery Accessories System Configuration .................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 1 .......................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.3 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 2 .......................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.4 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 3 .......................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.5 Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration.................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.6 Reader Heater System Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.1.7 Cassette Heater System Configuration 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.1.8 Cassette Heater System Configuration 2 ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.1.9 Side Deck Heater System Configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.1.10 System configuration of Accessory for Print/Transmission ...................................................................................................... 1-8
1.1.11 Functions/Required Accessories List......................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.1.12 System configuration of Accessory for Print/Transmission ...................................................................................................... 1-9
1.1.13 Functions/Required Accessories List....................................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.1.14 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration....................................................................................................... 1-11
1.1.15 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories...................................................................................................................... 1-11

1.2 Product Specifications..................................................................................................................................................1-12

1.2.1 Names of Parts ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.1.1 External View................................................................................................................................................................................................1-12
1.2.1.2 Cross Section.................................................................................................................................................................................................1-13

1.2.2 Using the Machine ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-14

1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch.......................................................................................................................................................................1-14
1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch..........................................................................................................................1-15
1.2.2.3 Control Panel.................................................................................................................................................................................................1-16

1.2.3 User Mode Items........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-17

1.2.3.1 Common Settings ..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-17
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings ...............................................................................................................................................................................................1-18
1.2.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning ..............................................................................................................................................................................1-18
1.2.3.4 Printing Various Reports...............................................................................................................................................................................1-19
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings................................................................................................................................................................................1-19
1.2.3.6 Copy Function Settings .................................................................................................................................................................................1-19
1.2.3.7 Common Transmission Function Settings ....................................................................................................................................................1-20
1.2.3.8 Box Function Settings ...................................................................................................................................................................................1-20
1.2.3.9 Printer Function Setting ................................................................................................................................................................................1-20
1.2.3.10 Address List Settings...................................................................................................................................................................................1-21

1.2.4 User Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-21

1.2.4.1 Cleaning ........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-21
1.2.4.2 Inspection ......................................................................................................................................................................................................1-22

1.2.5 Safety ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-23

1.2.5.1 CDRH Regulations........................................................................................................................................................................................1-23
1.2.5.2 Handling the Laser Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................1-23
1.2.5.3 Safety of the Laser Light...............................................................................................................................................................................1-24
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-24

1.2.6 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-24

1.2.6.1 System and Functions ...................................................................................................................................................................................1-24
1.2.6.2 Others ............................................................................................................................................................................................................1-25

1.2.7 Function List .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-25

1.2.7.1 First Copy Time ............................................................................................................................................................................................1-25
1.2.7.2 Print speed .....................................................................................................................................................................................................1-26
1.2.7.3 Print speed .....................................................................................................................................................................................................1-27
1.2.7.4 Types of Paper...............................................................................................................................................................................................1-29

Chapter 1

1.1 System Construction

1.1.1 Overview of the Delivery Accessories System Configuration
0002-0763

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's delivery accessories may be configured into any of the following 3 patterns.
- if a large volume of paper must be dealt with or multiple types of processing (e.g., stapling, punching) are needed, delivery accessories configuration 1
- if no more than a stapling level of processing is needed, delivery accessories system configuration 2
- if no more than a sorting level (3-output) of processing is needed, delivery accessories system configuration 3
See the diagrams of individual constructions that follow.

1.1.2 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 1

0001-2267

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram of the system configurations:

[6]

[6a]

[1]
[1a]
[4a]

[5]
[3a]
[4]
[7]
[3]

[2a]

[2]
F-1-1

T-1-1
[1]

Finisher-Q1
[1a]
(marketing scheduled for August 2003)

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Finisher-Q1
- Installing the Buffer Path 4
- Installing the Relay Delivery Assembly 5

[2]

Saddle Finisher-Q2
[2a]
(marketing scheduled for August 2003)

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Saddle Finisher-Q2
- Installing the Buffer Path
- Installing the Relay Delivery Assembly
- Installing the Saddle (for Q2)

[3]

Punch Unit

[3a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Punch Unit

[4]

Buffer Path

[4a]

Installation Sheet

[5]

Relay Delivery Assembly

(for Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher Q2)

[6]

Accessories Power Supply-P1 (if 120/ [6a]

230 V, standard; needed for installation
of 1 thorough 5)

[7]

Buffer Path Unit-C1

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Accessories Power Supply-P1

1-1

Chapter 1

The following is a list of functions and accessories needed to make use of these functions:
T-1-2
Function

Accessories

- 2-output delivery
- stapling

Finisher-Q1 or Saddle Finisher-Q2

Accessories Power Supply-P1
Buffer Path Unit-C1

T-1-3
Function

Accessories

- 3-output delivery
- stapling

Finisher-Q1 or Saddle Finisher-Q2

Accessories Power Supply-P1
Buffer Path Unit-C1

T-1-4
Function

Accessories

- saddling

Saddle Finisher-Q2
Accessories Power Supply-P1
Buffer Path Unit-C1

T-1-5
Function

Accessories

- punching

Finisher-Q1 or Saddle Finisher-Q2

Accessories Power Supply-P1
Buffer Path Unit-C1
Punch Unit

1.1.3 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 2

0001-2278

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram of the system configuration:

[3]
[4]

[3a]

[4a]
[2]

[1a]

[1]
F-1-2

1-2

[5]

Chapter 1

T-1-6
[1]

Finisher Block

[1a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Finisher-P1
- Installing the Relay Delivery Assembly 2

[2]

Relay Delivery Assembly (for Finisher-P1)

[3]

Copy Tray-J1

[3a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Copy Tray-J1

[4]

Accessories Power Supply-P1 (if 120/230 V, [4a]

standard; needed for installation of 1 or 2)

[5]

Finisher-P1

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Accessories Power Supply-P1

1.1.4 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 3

0001-2281

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram of the system configuration:

[3a]

[3]

[2a]

[2]

[1]
F-1-3

T-1-7
[1]

Internal Delivery Tray

[2]

Inner 2-Way Tray-C1 (power supplied by [2a]

printer unit, does not require Accessories
Power Supply-P1)

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Inner 2-Way Tray-C1
- Installing the Inner Delivery Tray

[3]

Copy Tray-J1

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Copy Tray-J1

[3a]

1.1.5 Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration

0001-2282

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram of the system configuration:

1-3

Chapter 1

[1a]
[2]
[1]

[9a]

[4a]

[3a]

[5]

[9]

[4]

[3]

[8a]

[8]

[6a]

[6]

[7]
F-1-4

T-1-8
[1]

DADF-L1

[1a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the ADF-L1

[2]

Platen Cover Type-H1

[3]

Original Holder-J1

[3a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Original Holder-J1

[4]

Side Paper Deck-Q1

[4a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Side Paper Deck-Q1

[5]

Card Reader-B1, Card Reader Mounting KitB1

[6]

2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1

[6a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1

[7]

Envelope Cassette-C1 (100V)

[8]

Envelope Cassette Attachment-C1 (115/200V) [8a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Envelope Cassette Attachment-C1

[9]

Accessories Power Supply-P1 (if 120/230V, [9a]

standard; required for Side Paper Deck-Q1 4)

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Accessories Power Supply-P1

1.1.6 Reader Heater System Configuration

0001-2285

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram of the system configuration:

1-4

Chapter 1

[1]

[2a]

[2]
F-1-5

T-1-9
[1]

Reader Heater Unit-B1

[2]

Heater PCB-B1

[2a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Heater PCB
- Installing the Cassettes Heater Unit-24
(mounting to printer unit)
- Reader Heater Unit-B1

1.1.7 Cassette Heater System Configuration 1

0001-2286

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram of the system configuration:

[1]

[2]
[2a]
F-1-6

1-5

Chapter 1
T-1-10
[1]

Cassette Heater Unit-24

(installation to the printer unit indicated)
(requires Heater PCB-B1 for operation)

[2]

Heater PCB-B1

[2a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Heater PCB-B1
- Installing the Cassette Heater Unit-24
(installation to the printer unit)
- Installing the Reader Heater Unit-B1

1.1.8 Cassette Heater System Configuration 2

0001-2284

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram of the system configuration:

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1a]

[3a]

F-1-7

T-1-11
[1]

Heater PCB-B1

[1a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Heater PCB-B1
- Installing the Cassette Heater Unit-24
(installation to printer unit)
- Installing the Reader Unit-BL

[2]

Cassette Heater Unit-24

(installation to cassette pedestal indicated)
(requires Heater PCB-B1 and Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1 for operation)

[3]

Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1

[3a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1
- Installing the Cassette Heater Unit-25
- Installing the Cassette Heater Unit-24
(installation to cassette pedestal)

1.1.9 Side Deck Heater System Configuration

0001-5918

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram of the system configuration:

1-6

Chapter 1

[1]

[3]

[1a]

[3a]

[2]
F-1-8

T-1-12
[1]

Heater PCB-B1

[1a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Heater PCB-B1
- Installing the Cassette Hater Unit-24
(installation to printer unit)
- Installing the Reader Unit-B1

[2]

Cassette Heater Unit-25

(requires heater PCB-B1 and Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1 for operation)

[3]

Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1

[3a]

Installation Procedure
- Installing the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1
- Installing the Cassette Unit-25
- Installing the Cassette Heater Unit-24
(installation to cassette pedestal)

1-7

Chapter 1

1.1.10 System configuration of Accessory for Print/Transmission

0009-8571

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3180C

The system configuration is described below.

[17]

[10]

[16]

[11]

[15]

[7]

[14]

[4]

[13]

[3]

[6]

[1]
[12]

[2]

[8]
[5]

[9]
F-1-9

[1] Color UFR II Printer Kit-D1(P Boot ROM)

[2] Color Multi-PDL Printer Kit-D1(N Boot ROM)
[3] Direct Printing Kit-D1
[4] Barcode Printing Kit-A1(License)
[5] Color Network Printer Unit-F1
[6] Security Expansion Board-E1
[7] iR Security Kit-A2(License)[Existing]
[8] iR 256MB Expansion RAM-C1
[9] iR 512MB Expansion RAM-C1
[10] Voice Guidance Kit-A2
[11] Remote Operator's Software Kit-A1(License)
[12] Super G3 FAX Board-S1
[13] Color Universal Send Kit-D1(License)
[14] PDF High Compression Kit-A(License)
[15] Universal Send PDF Encryption Kit-B1(License)
[16] Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit-A1(License)
[17] Web Access Software-B1(License)

1.1.11 Functions/Required Accessories List

0010-2765

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3180C

Functions/Required Accessories List
Product
Function

UFR II Print function

Bar-code Print function

Y
Y

Y
Y

Y
PS Print server function
HDD Encryption + Complete Wipe out
function

1-8

UFR II/PCL/PS Print function

PDF Direct Print function

Y
Y

Chapter 1
Product
Function

Voice guidance function

Remote operation function

G3 Fax one line function

Product notation:

Particulars:

A: Color UFR II Printer Kit-D1

S:

B: Color Multi-PDL Printer Kit-D1

Y:

Optional

C: Direct Printing Kit-D1

N:

Exclusive

D: Barcode Printing Kit-A1

->:

Upwardly-compatible

Standard

E: Color Network Printer Unit-F1

F: Security Expansion Board-E1
G: iR Security Kit-A2
H: iR 256MB Expansion RAM-C1
I:

iR 512MB Expansion RAM-C1

J:

Voice Guidance Kit-A2

K: Remote Operator's Software Kit-A1

L: Super G3 FAX Board-S1

Functions/Required Accessories List

Function

Required accessory

Send function

Color Universal Send Kit-D1

High-compression PDF generation

function

PDF High Compression Kit-A1+iR 256MB Expansion

RAM-C1

Encrypted PDF generation function

Color Universal Send Kit-D1+Universal Send PDF

Encryption Kit-B1

Searchable PDF generation function

PDF High Compression Kit-A1+iR 256MB Expansion

RAM-C1+Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit-A1

Web browser function (Display)

Web Access Software-B1+iR 256MB Expansion RAMC1

Web browser function (Contents print)

Web Access Software-B1+iR 256MB Expansion RAMC1+Color UFR II Printer Kit-D1

Web browser function (Contents/PDF

print)

Color UFR II Printer Kit-D1+Direct Printing Kit-D1+iR

512MB Expansion RAM-C1+Web Access Software-B1

Remarks

Color Multi-PDL Printer Kit-D1+iR 512MB Expansion

RAM-C1+Web Access Software-B1
Secure print expansion function
(Encrypted)

Color UFR II Printer Kit-D1 or Color Multi-PDL Printer

Kit-D1+iR 512MB Expansion RAM-C1+Encrypted
Printing Software-A2

*: The iR256MB Expansion RAM-C1 is required for high-compression PDF expansion.

1.1.12 System configuration of Accessory for Print/Transmission

0009-8574

iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180Ci

The system configuration is described below.

1-9

Chapter 1

[5]

[12]

[8]

[11]

[6]

[10]

[4]

[9]

[1]

[3]

[7]

[2]
F-1-10

[1] Barcode Printing Kit-A1(License)

[2] Color Network Printer Unit-F1
[3] Security Expansion Board-E1
[4] iR Security Kit-A2(License)[Existing]
[5] Voice Guidance Kit-A2
[6] Remote Operator's Software Kit-A1(License)
[7] Super G3 FAX Board-S1
[8] Color Universal Send Kit-D1(License)
[9] PDF High Compression Kit-A(License)
[10] Universal Send PDF Encryption Kit-B1(License)
[11] Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit-A1(License)
[12] Web Access Software-B1(License)

1.1.13 Functions/Required Accessories List

0010-2766

iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180Ci

Functions/Required Accessories List
Product

Function

UFR II/PCL/PS Print function

Bar-code Print function

PDF Direct Print function

PS Print server function

HDD Encryption + Complete Wipe out function

Voice guidance function

Remote operation function

G3 Fax one line function

1-10

Particulars:

A: Color Multi-PDL Printer Kit-D1

S:

Standard

B: Direct Printing Kit-D1

Y:

Optional

C: Barcode Printing Kit-A1

N:

Exclusive

D: Color Network Printer Unit-F1

->:

Upwardly-compatible

Security Expansion Board-E1

F:

iR Security Kit-A2

Y
Y

Product notation:

E:

Chapter 1
Product notation:

Particulars:

G: iR 512MB Expansion RAM-C1

H: Voice Guidance Kit-A2
I:

Remote Operator's Software Kit-A1

J:

Super G3 FAX Board-S1

Functions/Required Accessories List

Function

Required Accessories

High-compression PDF generation function

PDF High Compression Kit-A1

Encrypted PDF generation function

Universal Send PDF Encryption Kit-B1

Searchable PDF generation function

PDF High Compression Kit-A1+Universal Send Searchable PDF

Kit-A1

Web browser function (Contents/PDF print)

Web Access Software-B1

Secure print expansion function (Encrypted)

Encrypted Printing Software-A2

1.1.14 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration

0001-2288

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The following is a diagram of the system configuration:

[9]

[10]

[1]

[4]

[5]

[3]

[6]

[2]

[7]

[8]

F-1-11

[1] Super G3 Fax Board-N1 (standard if iR C3100F)

[2] Ethernet Board (standard)
[3] UFR Board or Open Interface Board
[4] USB Interface Board-A2 or TokenRing Board-TB84
[5] Image Conversion Board-A1
[6] PS Print Server Unit-D1
[7] PDL Expansion Kit-B1 (LIPS; boot ROM for LIPS model: 100 V model only)
[8] Color iR 256 MB Expansion RAM (optional for 100-V model or standard for 120/230-V model)
[9] SEND Function Expansion CIP/CIU (dongle for functional expansion)
[10] iR Security Kit AIP/AIU (dongle for functional expansion)

1.1.15 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories

0001-2319

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

1-11

Chapter 1
The following is a table of functions expected of printing/transmitting accessories:
T-1-13
UFR
Printer/
Scanner
Kit-B1
GDI-UFR
printing

yes*

SEND
function

Faxing

SEND
Expansion
Kit-CIP/
CIU

Image
Conversion
Board-A1

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

Local printing yes*

USB
Interface
Board-A2

Super G3
Fax BoardN1

The following is a brief explanation of the functions expected of the accessories; for details, see the chapters that follow:
- UFR Printer/Scanner-B1
adds the GDI-UFR printing function and a scanning function in combination with ScanGear.
- SEND Function Expansion CIU-CIP/CIU
adds a transmission function; the setup work calls for a PC, requiring the selection of CIP (parallel port) or CIU (USB port) depending on the type of connection
offered by the PC.
- Image Conversion Board-A1
needed when a transmission/fax function is added.
- USB Interface Board-A2
adds a printing function by connection to a PC in a local configuration (USB); requires a UFR board.
- Super G3 Fax Board-N1
adds the G3 fax function.

1.2 Product Specifications

1.2.1 Names of Parts
1.2.1.1 External View
0001-2293

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

[2]

[3]

[1]

[4]
[5]

[16]

[6]
[7]
[8]
[15]
[9]
[10]

[14]

[11]
[13]

[12]
F-1-12

[1] ADF reading glass retainer

[2] Copyboard cover
[3] Reader cover (front)
[4] Control panel
[5] Support cover (right)
[6] Support cover
[7] Delivery tray right cover
[8] Delivery tray
[9] Delivery tray lower cover
[10] Front cover
[11] Cassette 1
[12] Cassette 2
[13] Left cover (lower)
[14] Left cover
[15] Left cover (rear)
[16] Delivery tray rear cover

1-12

Chapter 1

[17]

[18]

[19]
[27]
[20]
[26]

[25]

[24]
[23]

[22]

[21]
F-1-13

[17] Reader cover (right)

[18] Copyboard glass
[19] Reader cover (rear)
[20] Rear cover (right)
[21] Rear cover (left)
[22] Right cover (lower rear)
[23] Right cover (upper rear)
[24] Manual feed pickup tray
[25] Right cover (lower front)
[26] Right door unit
[27] Right cover (upper)

1.2.1.2 Cross Section

0001-2297

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1-13

Chapter 1

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

[5] [6] [7]

[8]

[9] [10]

[45]

[11]

[44]
[12]
[43]
[13]
[42]

[14]

[41]

[15]

[40]

[16]

[39]

[17]

[38]

[18]

[37]

[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]

[36]

[23]
[24]

[35]

[25]
[34]

[26]
[27]
[28]
[33]

[32] [31] [30] [29]

F-1-14

T-1-14
[1]

CIS unit

[23]

Feed roller (cassette 1)

[2]

ADF reading glass

[24]

Separation roller (cassette 1)

[3]

Copyboard glass

[25]

Vertical path roller 2

[4]

Intermediate transfer belt cleaner unit

[26]

Feed roller (cassette 2)

[5]

Patch sensor unit

[27]

Separation roller (cassette 2)

[6]

Intermediate transfer unit

[28]

Pickup roller (cassette 2)

[7]

Intermediate transfer belt

[29]

Brush roller

[8]

Primary transfer roller

[30]

Photosensitive drum

[9]

Intermediate transfer belt fan duct

[31]

Primary charging roller

[10]

Delivery roller

[32]

Drum unit

[11]

Fixing outlet roller

[33]

Laser scanner unit

[12]

Fixing roller

[34]

Dust-blocking sheet
Toner receptacle

[13]

Pressure roller

[35]

[14]

Duplex feed roller 1

[36]

Toner cartridge (M)

[15]

Secondary transfer inside roller

[37]

Developing assembly (M)

[16]

Secondary transfer external roller

[38]

ATR sensor

[17]

Duplex feed roller 2

[39]

Developing assembly (Y)

[18]

Secondary transfer outside roller releasing arm

[40]

Toner cartridge (Y)

[19]

Registration roller

[41]

Toner cartridge (C)

[20]

Manual feed pickup roller

[42]

Fax unit

[21]

Pickup roller (cassette 1)

[43]

Developing assembly (C)

[22]

Vertical path roller 1

[44]

Developing assembly (Bk)

[45]

Toner cartridge (Bk)

1.2.2 Using the Machine

1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch
0001-2299

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1-14

Chapter 1

The machine has 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. Normally, the machine goes on when its main power switch is turned on,
i.e., when it is not in power save mode, low power mode, or sleep mode.

F-1-15

[1] Control panel power switch

[2] Main power lamp
[3] Main power switch

Never turn off the power while the progress bar is indicated. The HDD is being accessed, and turning off the power can well damage the HDD (E602).

F-1-16

1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch
0001-2302

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
Be sure always to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power switch.

While Printing to the Printer/Receiving a Fax

Be sure that the Start/Memory lamp on the control panel is off when operating the main power switch. (Turning off the main power switch can result in the loss
of the data being processed.)

1-15

Chapter 1

Stop
Start

0
Clear

C
Start/Memory Error

Main Power

F-1-17

When Downloading Is Under Way

Never turn off the main power switch/control panel power switch while downloading is under way. (Turning off the main power switch while downloading is
under way can cause the machine operation to fail.)

ON

/O

FF

F-1-18

1.2.2.3 Control Panel

0001-2304

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1-16

Chapter 1

F-1-19

T-1-15
[1] Reset key

[10] Start/Memory lamp

[2] Keypad

[11] Clear key

[3] Power Save key

[12] ID key

[4] Control panel power switch

[13] Contrast dial

[5] Counter Check key

[14] Additional Function key

[6] Stop key

[15] Help key

[7] Start key

[16] Touch pen

[8] Main power lamp

[17] Touch panel

[9] Error lamp

1.2.3 User Mode Items

1.2.3.1 Common Settings
0001-2305

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Factory Settings
T-1-16
Mode

Description

initial settings

initial function: *copy/transmit/box/MEAP

system initial screen: on/*off
priority on system device: *on/off

post-auto clear function

*return/do not return

buzzer

input sound: *on/off

invalid input sound: on/*off
replenish pre-warning sound: on/off
warning sound: *on/off
job end sound: *on/off
residual original alert sound: on/*off

paper level message display

*ON/OFF

priority on text/photo with black-and-while

selected for auto color selection

text/*photo

inch input

enable/disable inch input

(on/*off; on if 230V model)

cassette auto selection

for copy, off for manual, on for others

for printer, on for all
for box, off for manual, on for others
for fax, off for manual, on for others

1-17

Chapter 1
Mode

Description
for copy, off for manual, on for others

envelope cassette selection

ENV.1/ENV.2

paper type selection

yes

save power mode

-10%, -25%, -50%, no return

power consumption in sleep

*low/high

special tray selection

for tray A, copy/box/fax/printer/others

may be tray A, B, or C

LTRR/STMT original distinction

manual/*on if LTRR/on if STMT

special tray selection (w/ finisher; fax

reception)

yes

output priority

copy: *1/2/3
printer: 1/*2/3
box: 1/2/*3
fax reception: 1/2/*3
others: 1/2/*3

manual feed envelope selection

on/*off (in Japanese model; outside Japan, always on)

manual feed paper standard mode selection

on (paper size/paper type)/*off

local print standard mode

paper selection: auto paper/cassette 1 thorough 5

number of prints: *1 to 2000
sort: sort/group/staple sort/*shift sort/shift group/rotation sort/
rotation group/punch hole/Z-fold
double-sided print: on (left/right, top/bottom)/*off
post-print file deletion: on/*off
file merge: on/*off

display language switch-over

ON/*OFF

scan color reversal

ON/*OFF

job-to-job shift

*ON/OFF

cleaning alert for original reading area

* ON/OFF

JPEG compression rate for remote scan

high/*medium/low

gamma value for remote scan

1.0, 1.4, *1.8, 2.2

function control mode

*ON/OFF

common settings initialization

initialize?: yes/no

1.2.3.2 Timer Settings

0001-2306

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Factory Settings
T-1-17
Mode

Description

date/time

by time zone/daylight saving *off

auto sleep time

10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min; *1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4 hr

auto clear rime

0=disable;1, *2, ---, 9 min (in 1-min increments)

weekly timer

00:00 to 23:59 from Sunday to Saturday (in 1-min increments)

low power mode shift interval

10, *15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min; 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4 hr

1.2.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning

0001-2308

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Factory Settings
T-1-18
Mode

Description

zoom fine tuning

XY independent; -1.0 to +1.0% (in 0.1% increments)/*0%

middle bind staple edging (w/finisher)

Start key

middle bind position change (w/finisher)

size: A3, 11x17/B4/A4R, LTRR

auto gradation correction

no display
full correction (text printing to read start x 3 times)
quick correction (no test printing)

density correction

copy/transmit, 9 steps each (at time of shipment, set to 5)

copy box/black-and-white transmit/color transmit, 9 steps each (at
shipment, set to 5)

1-18

machine inside cleaning

Start key

feeder cleaning

Start key

Chapter 1
Mode

Description

toner replacement without prompt

black/yellow/magenta/cyan

1.2.3.4 Printing Various Reports

0001-2309

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Factory Settings
T-1-19
Mode

Description

Transmit (in keeping with specifications)

transmission result report: *only if error/on/off

communications control report

auto printing after every 100 communications: *on/off

original indication: *on/off

printing at specified time: on/*off
time specification

*00:00 to 23:59
transmission/reception separation: (toggle) on/*off

fax (in keeping with specifications)

fax transmission result report: *only if error/on/off

fax communications control report

auto printing after every 40 communications: *on/off

original indication: *on/off

printing at specified time: on/*off
time specification: *00:00 to 23:59
transmission/reception separation: (toggle) on/*off
fax reception result report

only if error: /ON/*OFF

fax box reception report

*ON/OFF

list print (transmission)

address list: list print

user data list (transmission)

print user data list?: yes/no

user data list (fax)

user data list: print user data list? yes/no

user data list (network)

user data list: print user data list? yes/no

1.2.3.5 System Control Settings

0001-2322

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-1-20
Mode

Description

system administrator information

by ID, address

group ID

ON/*OFF

communications control setting

by e-mail/fax/box

remote user interface

*ON/OFF

restrictions on address list

ID/access No.: on/*off

device information setting

by device name/site of installation

network setting

(TCP/IP) on/*off; various information

(Net Ware) on/*off; various information
(Apple Talk) on/*off; individual phases
(SMB) on/*off; various information
(SNMP) *on/off; various information
(special report) *ON/OFF
(spool function) ON/*OFF
(start-up time) *5 sec; 0 to 300 sec
(Ethernet driver) auto detection: *on/off; or others
(e-mail/I fax) SMTP: *on/off; POP: *on/off; others

1.2.3.6 Copy Function Settings

0001-2323

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-1-21
Mode

Description

preference key 1

*no setting (settings include magnification, sorter, page

separation)

preference key 2

*no setting (settings include magnification, sorter, page

separation)

priority of image orientation

ON/*OFF

copy wait time

ON/*OFF

auto vertical/horizontal rotation

*ON/OFF

standard mode change

set/initialize

copy function initialization

yes/no

1-19

Chapter 1

1.2.3.7 Common Transmission Function Settings

0001-2324

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-1-22
Mode

Description

common transmission function

setting

sender registration (99 max.)

user abbreviation (various choices)
FTP transmission selection (on/*off)
error file clear (*on/off)
JPEG compression rate (high/*medium/low)
transfer error processing (always print/save/*off)
number of retries (*3; may be 0 through 5)
transmission function change (read: 150x150; file: TIFF/JPEG; others)
routine task registration (M1 to M9)
PDF image level (data/*plain/image quality; text mode: on/*off)
transmission screen (*default/one-touch/new)
source (indicate/*do not indicate)
color transmission gamma (1.0/1.4/1.8/*2.2)
transmission function initialization (yes/no)

common reception function

setting

cassette selection (all; *on/off)

image reduction (on/*off)
reception information (attach/*do not attach)
2-on-1 (on/*off)

fax basic registration

user telephone number (input accepted)

line type (*20 pps/10 pps/push-tone)
volume control (alarm sound, communication sound)

fax transmission function setting

ECM (*on/off)
pause length (*2 sec; 1 through 15 sec)
auto redial (*on/off)

fax reception function setting

ECM (*ON/OFF)

1.2.3.8 Box Function Settings

0001-2325

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-1-23
Mode
box setting

Description
user box setup/register (99 max.)
read setup (register/initialize)
fax box setup/register (49 max.)

1.2.3.9 Printer Function Setting

0001-2327

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-1-24
Mode

Description

settings

number of copies (1 to 2000; *1)

simplex/duplex (double-sided/*single-sided)
save blank paper (*yes/no)
pickup (size: A4; type: plain; do not replace)
print adjustment (super smooth; toner density for individual colors; save toner)
page layout (bind lengthwise, margin 0; -30 to +30 mm; horizontal correction 0/
vertical correction 0; -50- to +50 mm)
error skip (yes/*no)
print deletion interval (*1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 24 hr)
time-out (*15 sec/disabled; may be varied between 5 and 300)
RIP (yes/*no)
sort (*no/rotation sort/rotation group)
transparency interleaf (*no/blank paper interleaf/printed paper interleaf)
printer operation mode (*auto; or from 6 other choices)
emulation (*no; from other 4 choices)
auto switch-over (LIPS/ESC-P/15577/HP-GL; all)
color mode (*auto/full color/monochrome)

1-20

Chapter 1
Mode

Description
gradation (*standard/zoom 1/zoom 2; *yes apply to graphics; *yes apply to image)
halftone selection (text: resolution/gradation/*error diffusion; graphics: resolution/
gradation/error diffusion; image: resolution/error/error diffusion)
printer initialize (yes/no)
LIPS/emulation (12 items)

utility

printer initialize (yes/no)

1.2.3.10 Address List Settings

0001-2330

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-1-25
Mode

Description

address registration

individual items

address list name registration

address list from 1 to 10; individual items

one-touch button registration

#001 to #200; individual items

1.2.4 User Maintenance

1.2.4.1 Cleaning
0001-2332

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Copyboard Glass and Back of Copyboard Cover (Platen Cover Type H)
Advise the user to be sure to clean the surface of the copyboard glass and the back of the copyboard cover at least once a once.
Cleaning Procedure
Wipe the surface of the copyboard glass [1] and the back of the copyboard cover (white plate) [2] with a cloth moistened with mild detergent (well wrung); then,
dry wipe them.

F-1-20

F-1-21

1-21

Chapter 1

1.2.4.2 Inspection
0001-2334

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Checking the Operation of the Leakage Breaker
Advise the user to be sure to check the leakage breaker at least once or twice a month and keep a record of checks.
Inspection Procedure
1) Turn on the main power switch.
2) Press the test button [1] of the breaker with the tip of a ball-point pen [2].
3) Check to see that the breaker switch shifts to the OFF side and the power goes off.

F-1-22

4) Turn off the main power switch.

5) Shift the breaker switch [1] to the ON side.

F-1-23

If the breaker switch stops between ON and OFF sides, shift it back to the OFF side first and then shift it to the ON side.

F-1-24

F-1-25

6) Turn on the main power switch.

1-22

Chapter 1

1.2.5 Safety
1.2.5.1 CDRH Regulations
0001-2337

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976.
These regulations apply to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products not certified under the regulations is banned
within the Untied States. The label shown here indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required on all laser products that are soled
in the United States.

F-1-26

A different description may be used for a different product.

1.2.5.2 Handling the Laser Unit

0001-2338

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

If you must service the area around the machine's laser unit, be sure to take full care to avoid exposure to laser light: do not insert a tool (e.g., screwdriver or those
with a high reflectance) into the laser path; also, remove watches, rings, and the like before starting the work, as they reflect laser light.
The machine's laser light is red in color, and an appropriate label ([1] to [4]) is attached to all covers that can reflect laser light. Keep also in mind that the machine's
laser unit cannot be adjusted in the field.
[1]

[2]

F-1-27

1-23

Chapter 1

[3]

[4]

F-1-28

1.2.5.3 Safety of the Laser Light

0001-2336

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Laser light can prove to be hazardous to the human body. The machine's laser unit is fully enclosed in a protective housing and external covers so that its light will
not escape outside as long as the machine is used normally.

1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner

0001-2339

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1. About Toner
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.

Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.

2. Toner on Clothing or Skin

- If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it off with water.
- Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth.
- Do not bring toner into contact with plastic material. It tends to react easily.

1.2.6 Product Specifications

1.2.6.1 System and Functions
0001-6142

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1-24

Body

Desktop

Photosensitive medium

OPC (62 mm in diameter)

Exposure method

by laser

Charging method

by charging roller

Development method (mono)

by dry, 2-component toner

Development method (color)

by dry, 2-component toner

Cassette pickup method

separation retard (center reference)

Multifeeder pickup method

simplified duplex method (center reference)

Transfer method

by intermediate belt

Transfer method (primary

transfer)

by transfer roller

Chapter 1
Transfer method (secondary
transfer)

by transfer roller

Separation method

by curvature + static eliminator

Drum cleaning method

by cleaning blade

Trasnsfer cleaning method

by cleaning blade

Fixing method

Fixing method

Delivery method

face-down

Warm-up time

6 min or less (at power-on)

Toner type

non-magnetic, negative (S toner; for both mono and full color)

Print area

maximum imaging area: 305 x 450.5 mm; guaranteed maximum imaging

area: 300 x 450.5 mm

Copying resolution

600 x 600 dpi

Printing resolution

600 x 600 dpi

Duplex method

tray-less duplexing

Toner level detection function

yes

Cassette capacity

550 sheets (of 80 g/m2 paper)

Multifeeder tray capacity

50 sheets (of 80 g/m2 paper)

Non-image width (leading edge)

2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm (single-/double-sided)

Non-image width (left/right)

2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm mm (single-sided left/double-sided left)

Image margin (leading edge)

2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm mm (single-sided); 2.5 -2.0, +2.0 mm (double-sided)

Image margin (left/right)

2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm mm (single-sided, left edge); 2.5 -2.0, +2.0mm

(double-sided, left side)

Image margin (trailing edge)

4 mm (single-sided; reference only); 4 mm (double-sided, reference

only)

Energy save mode

yes (saving at -10%, -25%, -50%; no return time; shift to low-power

mode after specific period of time)

Low-power mode

yes (fixing assembly remains on; shifts to sleep mode after specific
period of time)

Sleep mode

yes

Option

See sections on system configurations.

1.2.6.2 Others
0001-6594

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Operating environment
(temperature range)

See "Selecting the site".

Operating environment
(humidity range)

See "Selecting the site".

Operating environment
(atmospheric pressure)

810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 atm)

Noise

During printing: 71dB or less (BK)

(4C)
During standby: 50dB or less

Power consumption

Maximum: 1185W
During standby: 281.1W
During continuous
printing: 706.92W (BK)
During continuous printing: 526.26W (4C)

Ozone

Maximum: 0.02ppm or less

Dimensions

Width (W): 565mm

Weight

Main unit: 86.2kg (cartridge not included)

During printing: 73dB or less

Average: 0.01ppm or less

Depth (D): 755mm

Height (H): 754mm

1.2.7 Function List

1.2.7.1 First Copy Time
0002-1152

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-1-26
Single-sided
Full color

Bk mono

A4 plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2)

Cassette as source

23.9

A4 heavy paper (106 to 163 g/m2)

37.6

23.2

Manual feed tray as source

37.6

1-25

Chapter 1
Single-sided
Full color

Bk mono
(unit: sec)

1.2.7.2 Print speed

0002-1153

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-1-27
B/W
One-sided

Pick-up

Paper

Plain
Cassette paper(64 to
105g/m2)

Cassette

Heavy
paper(106
to 163 g/
m2)

Transparen
Cassette
cy

Cassette

Multifeed

1-26

Envelope

Plain
paper(64 to
105g/m2)

Size

No. 1/2
delivery

No. 3
delivery

Color
Two-sided

One-sided

Two-sided

No. 1/2 No. 3 No. 1/2 No. 3

No. 1/2
No. 3 deliver deliver deliver delive
delivery delivery
y
y
y
ry

A4

31.8

9.5

12.9

4.3

3.5

3.5

1.7

A5R

16

9.5

7.9

4.3

3.5

3.5

1.7
1.7

B5

31.8

9.5

12.9

4.3

3.5

3.5

B5R

16

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

A4R

16

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7
1.7

B4

16

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

A3

16

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

STMTR

16

9.5

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7
1.7

LTR

31.8

9.5

12.9

4.3

3.5

3.5

LTRR

16

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

LGL

16

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

LDR

16

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

12x18

15

5.5

4.2

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

A4

4.5

3.2

A5R

4.5

3.2

B5

4.5

3.2

B5R

2.2

1.6

A4R

2.2

1.6

B4

2.2

1.6

A3

2.2

1.6

STMTR

4.5

3.2

LTR

4.5

3.2

LTRR

2.2

1.6

LGL

2.2

1.6

LDR

2.2

1.6

12x18

2.2

1.6

A4

3.2

A4R

1.6

LTR

3.2

LTRR

1.6

Monarch

3.4

1.9

COM10

2.2

1.6

ISO-B5

2.2

1.6

ISO-C5

2.2

1.6

Youkai 4
go

2.2

1.6

DL

2.2

1.6

A4

22.8

9.5

3.5

3.5

A5R

14.2

5.6

3.5

3.5

B5

22.8

9.5

3.5

3.5

B5R

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

A4R

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

B4

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

A3

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

STMTR

14.2

5.6

3.5

3.5

LTR

22.8

9.5

3.5

3.5

LTRR

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

LGL

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

LDR

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

12x18

14.0

5.5

3.1

3.1

320x450

14.0

3.1

Chapter 1
B/W

Color

One-sided

Pick-up

Multifeed

Multifeed

Multifeed

Paper

Heavy
paper (106
to 163 g/
m2)

Transparen
cy

Envelope

Two-sided

One-sided

Two-sided

No. 1/2 No. 3 No. 1/2 No. 3

No. 1/2
No. 3 deliver deliver deliver delive
delivery delivery
y
y
y
ry

Size

No. 1/2
delivery

No. 3
delivery

Post card

3.4

1.9

A4

3.4

1.9

A5R

3.4

1.9

B5

3.4

1.9

B5R

2.2

1.6

A4R

2.2

1.6

B4

2.2

1.6

A3

2.2

1.6

STMTR

3.4

1.9

LTR

3.4

1.9

LTRR

2.2

1.6

LGL

2.2

1.6

LDR

2.2

1.6

12x18

2.2

1.6

320x450

2.2

1.6

A4

1.9

A4R

1.6

LTR

1.9

LTRR

1.6

Monarch

3.4

1.9

COM10

2.2

1.6

ISO-B5

2.2

1.6

ISO-C5

2.2

1.6

Youkei 4
go

2.2

1.6

DL

2.2

1.6

Multifeed

Irregular
form

Longstrip

10

A4

31.8

9.5

12.9

9.5

3.5

3.5

1.7

Deck

Plain
paper(64 to
105g/m2)

LTR

31.8

9.5

12.9

9.5

3.5

3.5

1.7

(unit: sheet/ min.)

1.2.7.3 Print speed

0009-8267

iR C2570 / iR C2570i
T-1-28
B/W
One-sided

Pick-up

Cassette

Paper

Plain paper(64 to
105g/m2)

Size

Color
Two-sided

One-sided

Two-sided

No. 1/
No.
No. 1/2 No. 3 No. 1/2 No. 3
2
No. 3
1/2 No. 3
deliver deliv deliver delive delive deliver deliv deliv
y
ery
y
ry
ry
y
ery
ery

A4

25.8

9.5

12.9

4.3

3.5

3.5

1.7

A5R

13

9.5

7.9

4.3

3.5

3.5

1.7
1.7

B5

25.8

9.5

12.9

4.3

3.5

3.5

B5R

13

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

A4R

13

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7
1.7

B4

13

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

A3

13

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

STMTR

13

9.5

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

LTR

25.8

9.5

12.9

4.3

3.5

3.5

1.7

LTRR

13

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

LGL

13

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

LDR

13

5.6

7.9

3.1

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

12x18

13

5.5

4.2

3.5

3.5

1.7

1.7

1-27

Chapter 1
B/W
One-sided

Pick-up

Cassette

Cassette

Cassette

Multi-feed

Multi-feed

Multi-feed

1-28

Paper

Heavy paper(106
to 163 g/m2)

Transparency

Envelope

Plain paper(64 to
105g/m2)

Heavy paper (106

to 163 g/m2)

Transparency

Size

Color
Two-sided

One-sided

Two-sided

No. 1/
No.
No. 1/2 No. 3 No. 1/2 No. 3
2
No. 3
1/2 No. 3
deliver deliv deliver delive delive deliver deliv deliv
y
ery
y
ry
ry
y
ery
ery

A4

4.5

3.2

A5R

4.5

3.2

B5

4.5

3.2

B5R

2.2

1.6

A4R

2.2

1.6

B4

2.2

1.6

A3

2.2

1.6

STMTR

4.5

3.2

LTR

4.5

3.2

LTRR

2.2

1.6

LGL

2.2

1.6

LDR

2.2

1.6

12x18

2.2

1.6

A4

3.2

A4R

1.6

LTR

3.2

LTRR

1.6

Monarch

3.4

1.9

COM10

2.2

1.6

ISO-B5

2.2

1.6

ISO-C5

2.2

1.6

Youkai 4
go

2.2

1.6

DL

2.2

1.6

A4

22.8

9.5

3.5

3.5

A5R

14.2

5.6

3.5

3.5

B5

22.8

9.5

3.5

3.5

B5R

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

A4R

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

B4

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

A3

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

STMTR

14.2

5.6

3.5

3.5

LTR

22.8

9.5

3.5

3.5

LTRR

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

LGL

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

LDR

14.2

5.6

3.1

3.1

12x18

14

5.5

3.1

3.1

320x450

14

3.1

Post card

3.4

1.9

A4

3.4

1.9

A5R

3.4

1.9

B5

3.4

1.9

B5R

2.2

1.6

A4R

2.2

1.6

B4

2.2

1.6

A3

2.2

1.6

STMTR

3.4

1.9

LTR

3.4

1.9

LTRR

2.2

1.6

LGL

2.2

1.6

LDR

2.2

1.6

12x18

2.2

1.6

320x450

2.2

1.6

A4

1.9

A4R

1.6

LTR

1.9

LTRR

1.6

Chapter 1
B/W
One-sided

Pick-up

Paper

Multi-feed

Envelope

Color
Two-sided

One-sided

Two-sided

No. 1/
No.
No. 1/2 No. 3 No. 1/2 No. 3
2
No. 3
1/2 No. 3
deliver deliv deliver delive delive deliver deliv deliv
y
ery
y
ry
ry
y
ery
ery

Size
Monarch

3.4

1.9

COM10

2.2

1.6

ISO-B5

2.2

1.6

1.6

ISO-C5

2.2

Youkei 4
go

2.2

1.6

DL

2.2

1.6

Multi-feed

Irregular form

Long-strip

10

Deck

Plain paper(64 to
105g/m2)

A4

25.8

9.5

12.9

9.5

3.5

3.5

1.7

LTR

25.8

9.5

12.9

9.5

3.5

3.5

1.7

(unit: sheet/ min.)

1.2.7.4 Types of Paper

0002-1154

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-1-29
Source
Type

Plain paper, eco paper, recycled

paper

Size

A3, B4, A4R, LDR, LGL,

LTRR
A4, LTR
B5, EXE
A5R, STMTR
B5R
A5, STMT, SRA3
12"x 18"

Special
paper

Heavy paper

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,

B5RLDR, LGL, LTR,
LTRRSRA3, 12"x 18"

Transparency

A4, LTR

Postcard

Postcard A6R modified;

double-postcard A5/A5R
modified

4-plane postcard

A4/A4R modified

Label paper

A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR

3-hole paper

same as plain paper

Tracing paper

A3, B4, A4

Envelope

Com10, Monarch, DL,

ISO-C5ISO-B5, YOKEI
No. 4

Manual feed
tray

Cassette

Side paper deckQ1

yes

yes

no

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

yes

yes

no

yes

yes

no

yes

no

no

yes

yes

no

yes

yes

no

yes

yes

no

yes

no

no

yes

no

no

yes

no

no

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

yes

yes

no

1-29

Chapter 2 Installation

Contents

Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks........................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Selecting the Site of Installation .................................................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.1.3 Selecting the Site of Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.1.4 Making Checks Before Starting the Work................................................................................................................................. 2-12
2.1.5 Check to Make Before Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 2-15
2.1.6 Check to Make Before Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 2-16
2.1.7 Check to Make Before Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 2-18

2.2 Unpacking and Installation ..........................................................................................................................................2-20

2.2.1 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power ................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.2.2 Settings When Mounting the Finisher ....................................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.2.3 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials ........................................................................................................................ 2-21
2.2.4 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power ................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.2.5 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials ........................................................................................................................ 2-22
2.2.6 Installing the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-22
2.2.7 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials ........................................................................................................................ 2-24
2.2.8 Installing the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-25
2.2.9 Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing Assembly......................................................................................................... 2-27
2.2.10 Installing the Drum Unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-29
2.2.11 Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing Assembly....................................................................................................... 2-31
2.2.12 Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly.............................................................................................................................. 2-32
2.2.13 Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing Assembly....................................................................................................... 2-35
2.2.14 Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly.............................................................................................................................. 2-37
2.2.15 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 2-39
2.2.16 Mounting the Yellow Developing Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.2.17 Mounting the Magenta Developing Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 2-42
2.2.18 After Mounting the Developing Assembly.............................................................................................................................. 2-42
2.2.19 Fixing the Machine in Place .................................................................................................................................................... 2-43
2.2.20 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 2-43
2.2.21 Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly.............................................................................................................................. 2-45
2.2.22 Connecting the Cable ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-47
2.2.23 Connecting the Cable ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-48
2.2.24 Mounting the Yellow Developing Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 2-48
2.2.25 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 2-49
2.2.26 Setting Up the Cassette ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-51
2.2.27 Mounting the Magenta Developing Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 2-51
2.2.28 Mounting the Yellow Developing Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 2-51
2.2.29 Mounting the Toner Cartridge ................................................................................................................................................. 2-52
2.2.30 After Mounting the Developing Assembly.............................................................................................................................. 2-53
2.2.31 Mounting the Magenta Developing Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 2-54
2.2.32 Making Initial Settings for the Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................ 2-54
2.2.33 Fixing the Machine in Place .................................................................................................................................................... 2-55
2.2.34 After Mounting the Developing Assembly.............................................................................................................................. 2-55
2.2.35 Initializing the Drum Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 2-56
2.2.36 Fixing the Machine in Place .................................................................................................................................................... 2-56
2.2.37 Connecting the Cable ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-57
2.2.38 Connecting the Cable ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-57
2.2.39 Automatic Gradation Correction.............................................................................................................................................. 2-58
2.2.40 Setting Up the Cassette ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-58
2.2.41 Setting Up the Cassette ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-58

Contents

2.2.42 Mounting the Toner Cartridge ................................................................................................................................................. 2-59

2.2.43 Mounting the Toner Cartridge ................................................................................................................................................. 2-61
2.2.44 Adjusting the Image Position................................................................................................................................................... 2-63
2.2.45 Making Initial Settings for the Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................ 2-65
2.2.46 Making Initial Settings for the Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................ 2-66
2.2.47 Initializing the Drum Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 2-66
2.2.48 Initializing the Drum Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 2-66
2.2.49 Others....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-66
2.2.50 Automatic Gradation Correction.............................................................................................................................................. 2-67
2.2.51 Automatic Gradation Correction.............................................................................................................................................. 2-67
2.2.52 Adjusting the Image Position................................................................................................................................................... 2-68
2.2.53 Adjusting the Image Position................................................................................................................................................... 2-70
2.2.54 Attaching Other Parts............................................................................................................................................................... 2-72
2.2.55 Attaching Other Parts............................................................................................................................................................... 2-73
2.2.56 When the Machine is Not Connecting to the Network ............................................................................................................ 2-74

2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ................................................................................................................... 2-74

2.3.1 Checking the Connection to the Network.................................................................................................................................. 2-74
2.3.2 Checking the Connection to the Network.................................................................................................................................. 2-74
2.3.3 Checking the Connection to the Network.................................................................................................................................. 2-75
2.3.4 Using PING................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-75
2.3.5 Using PING................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-75
2.3.6 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address......................................................................................................................... 2-76
2.3.7 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address......................................................................................................................... 2-76
2.3.8 Using PING................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-76
2.3.9 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address......................................................................................................................... 2-76

2.4 Troubleshooting the Network...................................................................................................................................... 2-77

2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network .................................................................................................................................................... 2-77
2.4.2 Troubleshooting the Network .................................................................................................................................................... 2-77
2.4.3 Troubleshooting the Network .................................................................................................................................................... 2-77
2.4.4 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address.............................................................................................................................. 2-77
2.4.5 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address.............................................................................................................................. 2-77
2.4.6 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address.............................................................................................................................. 2-77
2.4.7 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address ........................................................................................................................... 2-77
2.4.8 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address ........................................................................................................................... 2-78
2.4.9 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address ........................................................................................................................... 2-78

2.5 Checking the Images/Operations................................................................................................................................. 2-78

2.5.1 Checking the Images.................................................................................................................................................................. 2-78
2.5.2 Checking the Images.................................................................................................................................................................. 2-78
2.5.3 Checking the Images.................................................................................................................................................................. 2-79

2.6 Relocating the Machine............................................................................................................................................... 2-79

2.6.1 Relocating the Machine ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-79
2.6.2 Relocating the Machine ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-80
2.6.3 Relocating the Machine ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-80

2.7 Installing the Copy Tray.............................................................................................................................................. 2-80

2.7.1 Points to Note at Installation...................................................................................................................................................... 2-80
2.7.2 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-80
2.7.3 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................................... 2-81
2.7.4 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-81

2.8 Installing the Card Reader ........................................................................................................................................... 2-82

2.8.1 Points to Note............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-82
2.8.2 Points to Note............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-82
2.8.3 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-82
2.8.4 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-82
2.8.5 Installation.................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-83
2.8.6 Installation.................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-85

Contents

2.8.7 Using with NetSpot Accountant (NSA)..................................................................................................................................... 2-87

2.8.8 Points to Note at Installation...................................................................................................................................................... 2-87
2.8.9 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-88
2.8.10 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................................. 2-88
2.8.11 Installation Procedure .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-89
2.8.12 Installation Procedure in the imageWARE Accounting Manager (hereinafter referred to iWAM) Environment .................. 2-91

2.9 Installing the NE Controller-A1...................................................................................................................................2-91

2.9.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1................................................................................................................................................. 2-91
2.9.2 Installing the NE Controller-A1................................................................................................................................................. 2-98

2.10 Installing the Original Tray........................................................................................................................................2-99

2.10.1 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-99
2.10.2 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-100

2.11 Installing the Key Switch Unit.................................................................................................................................2-101

2.11.1 Checking the Contents ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-101
2.11.2 Checking the Contents ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-101
2.11.3 Installation.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-101
2.11.4 Installation.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-104
2.11.5 Making Checks After Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 2-106
2.11.6 Making Checks After Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 2-106
2.11.7 Checking the Contents ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-106
2.11.8 Turning Off the Host Machine............................................................................................................................................... 2-107
2.11.9 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-107
2.11.10 Checking After Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 2-109

2.12 Installing the Reader Heater.....................................................................................................................................2-109

2.12.1 Checking the Contents ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-109
2.12.2 Checking the Contents ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-110
2.12.3 Installation.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-111
2.12.4 Installation.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-114
2.12.5 Checking the Contents ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-116
2.12.6 Turning Off the Host Machine............................................................................................................................................... 2-116
2.12.7 Installation.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-116

2.13 Installing the Cassette Heater...................................................................................................................................2-118

2.13.1 Checking the Parts ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-118
2.13.2 Turning Off the Host Machine............................................................................................................................................... 2-119
2.13.3 Installation Procedure (Heater PCB) ..................................................................................................................................... 2-120
2.13.4 Installation Procedure (Cassette Heater Attachment) ............................................................................................................ 2-123
2.13.5 Installation Procedure (Cassette Heater)................................................................................................................................ 2-126
2.13.6 After Installation .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-129

2.14 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit............................................................................................................................2-130

2.14.1 Checking Items in the Package .............................................................................................................................................. 2-130
2.14.2 Turning Off the Host Machine............................................................................................................................................... 2-130
2.14.3 Installation Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-131
2.14.4 Checking the Contents ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-137
2.14.5 Turning Off the Host Machine............................................................................................................................................... 2-138
2.14.6 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-138

Chapter 2

2.1 Making Pre-Checks

2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation
0001-7300

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
Select the site of installation against the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's before delivery of the machine:
1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for exclusive use by the machine.
2) The environment of the room must be as indicated in the following diagram, and the machine must not be installed near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier,
or refrigerator:

Humidity (%RH)

80
75
60

40

25
20
10
0
(32)

10
(50)

15
(59)

20
(68)

27.5 30
(81.5)(86)

Temperature
F-2-1

3) The machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas.
If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains to the window.
4) The room must be well ventilated. (The level of ozone generated by the machine in use will not affect the individuals around it. However, some may find its
odor to be unpleasant, as when working in a poorly ventilated room.)
5) The floor of the machine must be level so that the feet of the machine will remain in contact and the machine will remain level.
6) The machine must be at least 10 cm away from any wall, permitting unobstructed use.

500 mm min.

1035mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238 mm

100 mm min.

F-2-2

Without a Finisher or Side Paper Deck-P1 Installed

2-1

Chapter 2

500 mm min.

1228mm

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

500 mm min.

F-2-3

With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 Installed

500 mm min.

1228.5mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-4

With the Finisher-P1 Installed

500 mm min.

1422mm

500 mm min.

F-2-5

With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 and Finisher-P1 Installed

2-2

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

Chapter 2

500 mm min.

1683mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-6

With the Finisher-Q1 Installed

500 mm min.

1787mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-7

With the Saddle Finisher-Q2 Installed

500 mm min.

1876mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-8

With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 and Finisher-Q1 Installed

2-3

Chapter 2

500 mm min.

1980mm

500 mm min.

F-2-9

With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 and Saddle Finisher-Q2 Installed

500 mm min.

1790mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-10

With the Finisher-Q1 and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/PI Installed

500 mm min.

1894mm

500 mm min.

F-2-11

With he Saddle Finisher -Q2 and Paper Deck Unit-L1/M1/N1/PI Installed

2-4

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

Chapter 2

500 mm min.

1983mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-12

With the Side Paper Deck-Q1, Finisher-Q1, and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1 Installed

500 mm min.

2087mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-13

With the Side Paper Deck-Q1, Saddle Finisher-Q2, and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1 Installed
7) The machine must be placed in a well ventilated area. It is important to make sure, however, that the machine is not near the air vent (for suction) of the room.

2.1.2 Selecting the Site of Installation

0009-9440

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Select the site of installation against the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's before delivery of the machine:
1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for exclusive use by the machine.
2) The environment of the room must be as indicated in the following diagram, and the machine must not be installed near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier,
or refrigerator:

2-5

Chapter 2

(%RH)
100
90

[C]

85
[B]
75
70

[A]

50

25
20
15
10
5
0

10

15

7.5

20

25
23

30
27.5

40 (degC)

35
32.5

F-2-14

<Assured environmental zone>

[A]: A zone. All quality standard items are satisfied.
[B]: B zone. Some quality standard items are inferior to those in A zone or not satisfied.
[C]: C zone. Copying operation is performed normally without any safety issues, malfunction, and errors in display.
3) The machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas.
If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains to the window.
4) The room must be well ventilated. (The level of ozone generated by the machine in use will not affect the individuals around it. However, some may find its odor
to be unpleasant, as when working in a poorly ventilated room.)
5) The floor of the machine must be level so that the feet of the machine will remain in contact and the machine will remain level.
6) The machine must be at least 10 cm away from any wall, permitting unobstructed use.
Without a Finisher or Side Paper Deck-P1 Installed

500 mm min.

1035mm

F-2-15

2-6

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238 mm

100 mm min.

Chapter 2
With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 Installed

500 mm min.

1228mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-16

With the Finisher-P1 Installed

500 mm min.

1228.5mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-17

With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 and Finisher-P1 Installed

500 mm min.

1422mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-18

2-7

Chapter 2
With the Finisher-Q1 Installed

500 mm min.

1683mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-19

With the Saddle Finisher-Q2 Installed

500 mm min.

1787mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-20

With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 and Finisher-Q1 Installed

500 mm min.

1876mm
F-2-21

2-8

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

Chapter 2
With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 and Saddle Finisher-Q2 Installed

1980mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

500 mm min.
F-2-22

With the Finisher-Q1 and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/PI Installed

500 mm min.

1790mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-23

With he Saddle Finisher -Q2 and Paper Deck Unit-L1/M1/N1/PI Installed

500 mm min.

1894mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-24

2-9

Chapter 2
With the Side Paper Deck-Q1, Finisher-Q1, and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1 Installed

500 mm min.

1983mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-25

With the Side Paper Deck-Q1, Saddle Finisher-Q2, and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1 Installed

500 mm min.

2087mm

500 mm min.

500 mm min.

1238mm

100 mm min.

F-2-26

7) The machine must be placed in a well ventilated area. It is important to make sure, however, that the machine is not near the air vent (for suction) of the room.

2.1.3 Selecting the Site of Installation

0017-2776

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Select the site of installation against the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's before delivery of the host machine:
1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for exclusive use by the host machine.

2-10

Chapter 2

(%RH)
100
90

[C]

85
[B]
75
70

[A]

50

25
20
15
10
5
0

10
7.5

15

20

25
23

30
27.5

35

40 (degC)

32.5

F-2-27

<Assured environmental zone>

[A]: A zone. All quality standard items are satisfied.
[B]: B zone. Some quality standard items are inferior to those in A zone or not satisfied.
[C]: C zone. Copying operation is performed normally without any safety issues, malfunction, and errors in display.
2) The host machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas.
If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains to the window.
3) The room must be well ventilated. (The level of ozone generated by the host machine in use will not affect the individuals around it. However, some may find
its odor to be unpleasant, as when working in a poorly ventilated room.)
4) The floor of the host machine must be level so that the feet of the host machine will remain in contact and the host machine will remain level.
5) The host machine must be at least 100 mm away from any wall, permitting unobstructed use.
No option is attached.

500mm or more

1,035mm

500mm or more

500mm or more

1,238mm

100mm or more

F-2-28

2-11

Chapter 2
With the DADF-L1/Finisher-P1/Paper Deck-Q1 Installed

1,228mm
1,431mm

500mm or more

500mm or more

500mm or more

1,238mm

100mm or more

F-2-29

With the DADF-L1/Saddle Finisher-AE2/Puncher Unit-L1/Buffer Pass Unit-C1/Paper Deck-Q1 Installed

2,071mm
2,178mm

500mm or more

500mm or more

500mm or more

1,238mm

100mm or more

F-2-30

6) The host machine must be placed in a well ventilated area. It is important to make sure, however, that the host machine is not near the air vent (for suction) of
the room.

2.1.4 Making Checks Before Starting the Work

0001-7575

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1-1 Points to Note
Keep the following in mind concerning the installation of the machine:
1) If you are moving the machine from a cold to warm place for installation, the machine can suffer condensation, causing image faults. If such is the case, leave
the machine alone unpacked for at least 2 hr so that it is fully used to the temperature of the room before installation.
(The term "condensation" refers to the droplets of water on a metal surface when it is brought in from a cold to warm place, caused by rapid cooling of the vapor
in the atmosphere by the cold metal.)
2) The machine weighs about 100 kg (max.; including the DADF). Be sure to work in a group of 4 persons or more when lifting it.
1-2 Recording the Service Mode Settings
Be sure to record the service mode settings as instructed herein as part of the installation work. At the end of the work, check to be sure that the record shows all
settings.
T-2-1

<Service Mode Label>

initial screen

Level 1 item

Level 2 item

Level 3 item
REF-Y
REF-M

COPIER

ADJUST

DENS

REF-C
SGNL-Y
SGNL-M
SGNL-C

T-2-2

2-12

Check

Chapter 2
<Drum Counter Reading Label>
Initial screen

Level 1 item

Level 2 item

Level 3 item

COPIER

ADJUST

HV-PRI

DR-I-INT

Check

1-3 Checking the Contents

It is important that you send back the QR Sheet that comes with the machine. Regardless of the presence/absence of a fault in the machine, be sure to fill it out and
fax it as soon as possible. If there is a missing item, indicate its number in the QR Sheet. If there is a fault in he external appearance, indicate it also in the QR Sheet
by referring to the following diagram.

F-2-31
T-2-3
[1] Drum unit

1 pc.

[12] Service book case

1 pc.

[2] Toner cartridge (black)

1 pc.

[13] Cassette size label

2 pc.
*

[14] Size label (small; only for model w/

DADF)

1 pc.
*

[3] Toner cartridge (cyan, magenta,

yellow)
[4] Developing assembly (black)
[5] Developing assembly (cyan,
magenta, yellow)

1 pc. each
1 pc.
1 pc. each

[15] Wire saddle

3 pc.

[16] Stamp (only for model w/ fax

function)

1 pc.

[6] Lower right over

1 pc.

[17] Modular cable (only if equipped

with fax function)

1 pc.
*

[7] Adjusting screw

2 pc.

[18] Grounding cord (100V model only)

1 pc.
*

[8] Developing assembly fixing

screw (stepped)

4 pc.

[19] QR sheet (100V model only)

1 pc.
*

[9] Drum unit fixing screw (M4x20;

white)

2 pc.

[20] Service book (100V model only)

1 pc.
*

[10] Reader communication cable

1 pc.
*

[11] Touch pen

1 pc.

*: packed inside the cassette.

2-13

Chapter 2
Memo:
The developing assembly fixing screws (stepped) may come together with or separately with their collars. If latter, be user to put the screws with collars before use.
Check the documentation and CDs against the following table:
T-2-4
iR C3100

iR C3100F

iR C3100N

iR C3100i

User's manual

Documentation

yes

yes

yes

yes

Copy/Box Guide

yes

yes

yes

Transmission/Fax Guide

yes

yes

UFR/LIPS Printer Guide

yes

yes

yes

Remote UI Guide

yes

yes

yes

yes

Network Guide

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

iR C3100i

License Agreement

yes

T-2-5
iR C3100F

iR C3100N

UFR User Software CD-ROM

CD-ROM

iR C3100

yes

yes

yes

Color Network ScanGear CD-ROM

yes

yes

yes

LIPS IV User Software CD-ROM

yes

NetSpot Resource Downloader CD

yes

FAX Driver Software CD-ROM

yes

yes

Emulation Manual CD

yes

Reference:
The term "CD" refers to the CD-ROM itself.
The term "CD-ROM Unit" refers to a unit consisting of CD ROM and documentation.
The Use's Manual and the CDs are packed inside the cassette.
1-4 External View
[2]

[3]

[1]

[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]

[16]

[8]
[15]
[9]
[14]

[10]

[11]
[13]
[12]
F-2-32
T-2-6

2-14

[1]

ADF reading glass retainer

[9]

Delivery tray lower cover

[2]

DADF (for model w/ DADF only)

[10]

Front cover

[3]

Reader cover (front)

[11]

Cassette 1

[4]

Control panel

[12]

Cassette 2

[5]

Support cover (right)

[13]

Left cove (lower)

[6]

Support cover

[14]

Left cover

[7]

Delivery tray right cover

[15]

Left cover (rear)

[8]

Delivery tray

[16]

Delivery tray rear cover

Chapter 2

[17]

[18]

[19]
[27]
[20]
[26]

[25]

[24]
[23]

[22]

[21]
F-2-33
T-2-7

[17]

Reader cover (right)

[23]

[18]

Copyboard glass

[24]

Right cover (upper right)

Manual feed tray

[19]

Reader cover (rear)

[25]

Right cover (lower front)

[20]

Rear cover (right)

[26]

Right door unit

[21]

Rear cover (left)

[27]

Right cover (upper)

[22]

Right cover (lower rear)

2.1.5 Check to Make Before Installation

0017-2778

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1-1 Points to Make Before Installation
Be sure to go through the following before starting the work:
1) If you are installing the host machine after moving it from a cold to warm location, be sure to leave the host machine unpacked for at least 2 hours so that the
host machine is fully used to the site temperature, thus avoiding image faults caused by condensation. (The term "condensation" refers to the formation of droplets of water on the surface of a metal object brought in from a cold to warm place, i.e., as the result of the rapid cooling of the moisture (vapor) around the object.)
2) The host machine weighs a maximum of about 86.2Kg. Be sure to work in a group of 4 persons when lifting it.
1-2 Recording the Service Mode Settings
Be sure to record the following service mode items as part of the installation work. Fill in the blanks as instructed herein, and be sure all these blanks have been
filled at the end of the installation work:
T-2-8

<Service Label>
Initial screen

Level 1 item

Level 2 item

Level 3 item

Check

REF-Y
REF-M
COPIER

ADJUST

DENS

REF-C
SGNL-Y
SGNL-M
SGNL-C

T-2-9

<Drum Counter Label>

Initial screen

Level 1 item

Level 2 item

Level 3 item

COPIER

ADJUST

HV-PRI

DR-I-INT

Check

1-3 Checking the Contents

Check to be sure that none of the following contents is missing:

2-15

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[6]

[3]

[7]

[4]

[5]

[9]

[8]

[10]

[11]

Also, all literary, musical, artistic

Immigration papers, Badges
The following may
YOU MAY BE COMMITTING
and typographical works are
or insignia
A CRIMINAL OFFENCE
not be copied:
Also, all Whilst
literary,certain
musical, artistic FOR WHICH
or other certificates
YOU
Immigration
papers, Badgescopyrighted.
Themoney,
following
may Bonds
YOU MAY
BEMAY
COMMITTING
Paper
vouchers
reproduction
of copyright
workare
and typographical
works
BE PROSECUTED.
of indebteness
or insignia
A CRIMINAL OFFENCE
may be
permitted for
`faircertain
dealing
not be Instruments
copied:
Negotiable
copyrighted.
Whilst
Internal
Revenue
Stamps
Bonds
or other
certificates
FOR WHICH YOU MAY
eg., for
research,
private
study
or
Also, all
literary,
musical,
Immigration
papers, Badges
Paper
vouchers
reproduction
of
copyright
work artistic
Themoney,
following
may
MAY
This list
aYOU
guide
onlyBE COMMITTING
Certificates
of
Deposit,
BE is
PROSECUTED.
of indebteness
(cancelled
uncancelled)
for the
purpose
of criticism
or
and
typographical
works
are
ororinsignia
may
be
permitted
for `fair
dealing
CRIMINAL OFFENCE
and is not aAcomplete
Negotiable
Passports
not beInstruments
copied: Cheques
review,
reproduction
of
a orlisting. You FOR
or
drafts
by
Internal
Revenue
Stamps
copyrighted.
Whilststudy
certain
eg.,generally
for
research,
private
Bonds
ordrawn
other
certificates
YOU MAY
should
take only
Also,
all
literary,
musical,
artistic
Immigration
papers,
Badges
This list
is aWHICH
guide
Government
Service
or vouchers
Certificates
offollowing
Deposit,
Paper
money,
The
may
YOU
MAY BE COMMITTING
copyrighted
item
is notof
permitted
reproduction
of
copyright
work
Governmental
agencies
(cancelled
or uncancelled)
Legal Limitations of
for the
purpose
criticism
or
PROSECUTED.
of indebteness
legalare
advice
if in
doubt.
and
typographical
works
or insignia
and
is BE
not
aany
complete
A
CRIMINAL OFFENCE
themay
permission
of thefor `fair
drafts
drawn
by be Instruments
be
permitted
dealing
Passports
Licences
and
Registrations
Colour Copier Usage
Negotiable
review,
generally
reproduction
a
not
copied:
Cheques
or drafts
drawn
bywithout
copyrighted.
Whilstof
certain
Internal
Revenue
Stamps
You should
take YOU MAY
or other
certificates
copyright
owner.
FOR
WHICH
eg., for
research,
study
orlisting.This
agencies
Government
Service
or documents
FU5-8208
copyrighted
item
is not private
permitted
for Bonds
motor
vehicles
Governmental
agencies
Legal Limitations of Governmental
Paper
money,
vouchers
is a
guide
only
reproduction
copyright
Certificates
of Deposit,
legal advicelist
if in
any
doubt.
(cancelled
or
uncancelled) without
BE
PROSECUTED.
of indebteness
forthe
the
purpose ofofof
criticism
or work
permission
the for `fair
draftsPassports
drawn
by
and is not a complete
Licences
and Registrations
may
be permitted
dealing
Colour Copier Usage
Negotiable
Instruments
review,
generally
reproduction
of
a
Cheques
or
drafts
drawn
by
Internal
Revenue
Stamps
owner.
Governmental
agencies
You should
take
eg., foritem
research,
study orlisting.This
FU5-8208
for motor vehicles copyright
Government
Service
ordocuments
is not private
permitted
list
guide
only
Governmental
Legal Limitations of
Certificates
of Deposit,
(cancelledagencies
or uncancelled) copyrighted
if is
in aany
doubt.
forthe
thepermission
purpose ofofcriticism
or legal advice
without
the
draftsPassports
drawn by
and is not a complete
Licences
and Registrations
Colour Copier Usage
review,
generally reproduction of a
Cheques
or drafts drawn bycopyright
owner.
listing. You should
take
Governmental
agencies
FU5-8208
for motor
vehicles
Government
Service ordocuments
copyrighted item is not permitted
Governmental
agencies
Legal Limitations of
legal advice if in any doubt.
without the permission of the
drafts drawn by
Licences and Registrations
Colour Copier Usage
Governmental agencies
FU5-8208
documents for motor vehicles copyright owner.

[12]

[13]

[14]

[15]

[16]

F-2-34
[1]

Drum unit

1 pc.

[2]

Developing assembly (Bk)

[3]

Developing assembly (Y/M/C)

1 pc. each

[4]

Lower right cover(lower)

1 pc.
1 pc.

[5]

Service book case

1 pc.

[6]

Reader communications cable

1 pc.

[7]*

Power cable

1 pc.

[8]

Wire saddle

3 pc.

[9]

Adjusting screw (M6X10)

2 pc.

[10]

Developing assembly fixing stepped screw (M4X5)

4 pc.

[11]

Screw (Binding; M4X20; white)

2 pc.

[12]

Touch pen

1 pc.

[13]

Cassette size label

2 pc.

[14]

Dial label

1 pc.

[15]

Do not copy label

4 pc.

[16]

Shut-down warning label

1 pc.

* Use the correct power code to mach the location/area of installation.

Make sure not to leave unused power code at the site.

MEMO:
The developing assembly fixing stepped screw may come in 2 pieces: collar and shank; if so, be sure to put them together.

Check the documentation and CD against the following table:

T-2-10
iR C3180C

iR C3180Ci

Tutorial CD (E/F/S)

yes

yes

Tutorial CD (G/I)

yes

yes

Users Guide (E/F/G/I/S)

yes

yes

Manual CD (UKE)

yes

yes

Manual CD (F/I/G/S)

yes

yes

Software lisence agreement (JEFIG)

yes

yes

MEAP Admin. CD (E)

yes

yes

UFR II/PCL/PS CD (E)

no

yes

UFRII/PCLDriver/Utility CD

no

yes

iW MC CD (E/F/G/I/S)

no

yes

N/W Quick Start Guide (E)

no

yes

Release Note (E/F/I/G)

no

yes

Caution sheet for developing assembly install

yes

yes

2.1.6 Check to Make Before Installation

0004-6602

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1-1 Points to Make Before Installation
Be sure to go through the following before starting the work:
1) If you are installing the machine after moving it from a cold to warm location, be sure to leave the machine unpacked for at least 2 hours so that the machine is
fully used to the site temperature, thus avoiding image faults caused by condensation. (The term "condensation" refers to the formation of droplets of water on
the surface of a metal object brought in from a cold to warm place, i.e., as the result of the rapid cooling of the moisture (vapor) around the object.)
2) The machine weighs a maximum of about 65 kg/ 143.3lb. Be sure to work in a group of 4 persons when lifting it.

2-16

Chapter 2
1-2 Recording the Service Mode Settings
Be sure to record the following service mode items as part of the installation work. Fill in the blanks as instructed herein, and be sure all these blanks have been
filled at the end of the installation work:
T-2-11

<Service Label>
Initial screen

Level 1 item

Level 2 item

Level 3 item

Check

REF-Y
REF-M
COPIER

ADJUST

REF-C

DENS

SGNL-Y
SGNL-M
SGNL-C

T-2-12

<Drum Counter Label>

Initial screen

Level 1 item

Level 2 item

Level 3 item

COPIER

ADJUST

HV-PRI

DR-I-INT

Check

1-3 Checking the Contents

Check to be sure that none of the following contents is missing:

F-2-35
T-2-13
[1] Drum unit

1pc

[2] Developing assembly (black)

1pc

[10] Service book case

1pc each

[11] Cassette size label

[3] Developing assembly (cyan,

magenta, yellow)

[9] Touch pen

1pc
1pc
2pc

2-17

Chapter 2
[4] Lower right cover

1pc

[12] Dial label

[5] Adjusting screw

2pc

[13] Wire saddle

[6] Developing assembly fixing

stepped screw

4pc

[14] Do Not Copy label

Drum unit fixing screw (M4x20;

[7] white)

2pc

[15]

[8] Reader communications cable

1pc

[16] Key switch unit (not in EUR model)

Power cable

1pc
3pc
4pc
1pc
1pc

Memo
The developing assembly fixing stepped screw may come in 2 pieces: collar and shank; if so, be sure to put them together.
Check the documentation and CD against the following table:
T-2-14
iR C3100 230V
Operators manual: Reference guide
Operators manual:Copying and Mail Box Guide
Operators manual CD-ROM: NW/RUI guide
Software lisence agreement(JEFIG)

T-2-15
iR C3100C 230V EUR
Operators manual: User's Guide
Operators manual CD-ROM (Ref,Copy/Box)
Operators manual CD-ROM (NW/RUI)
License agreement for software (JEFIG)

T-2-16
iR C3100N 230V
Operators manual: Reference guide
Operators manual: Copying and Mail Box Guide
Operators manual CD-ROM:NW/RUI
Network Quick Start Guide
UFR Driver/Utility CD-ROM
ScanGear CD
User Manual CD-ROM: printer guide
Release Note
Software lisence agreement

T-2-17
iR C3100CN 230V EUR
Operators manual: User's Guide
Network Quick Start Guide
User Manual CD-ROM: Printer Guide
Operators manual: CD-ROM Ref,Copy/Box)
Operators manual CD-ROM: NW/RUI guide
UFR/PS/PCL Driver/Utility CD-ROM
ScanGear CD
Software lisence agreement
Release Note

2.1.7 Check to Make Before Installation

0009-9451

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1-1 Points to Make Before Installation
Be sure to go through the following before starting the work:

2-18

Chapter 2
1) If you are installing the machine after moving it from a cold to warm location, be sure to leave the machine unpacked for at least 2 hours so that the machine is
fully used to the site temperature, thus avoiding image faults caused by condensation. (The term "condensation" refers to the formation of droplets of water on
the surface of a metal object brought in from a cold to warm place, i.e., as the result of the rapid cooling of the moisture (vapor) around the object.)
2) The machine weighs a maximum of about 65 kg/ 143.3lb. Be sure to work in a group of 4 persons when lifting it.
1-2 Recording the Service Mode Settings
Be sure to record the following service mode items as part of the installation work. Fill in the blanks as instructed herein, and be sure all these blanks have been
filled at the end of the installation work:
T-2-18

<Service Label>
Initial screen

Level 1 item

Level 2 item

Level 3 item

Check

REF-Y
REF-M
COPIER

ADJUST

DENS

REF-C
SGNL-Y
SGNL-M
SGNL-C

T-2-19

<Drum Counter Label>

Initial screen

Level 1 item

Level 2 item

Level 3 item

COPIER

ADJUST

HV-PRI

DR-I-INT

Check

1-3 Checking the Contents

Check to be sure that none of the following contents is missing:

F-2-36
T-2-20
[1]

Drum unit

1 pc

[9]

Touch pen

1 pc

2-19

Chapter 2
Developing assembly
(black)

1 pc

[10]

Service book case

Developing assembly
(cyan, magenta, yellow)

1 pc
each

[11]

Cassette size label

pc
* Use the1 correct
power cord to mach the location/area of installation.
Make sure not to leave unused power cord at the site.
2 pc

Lower right cover

1 pc

[12]

Shut-down warning label

1 pc MEMO:

Adjusting screw (M6X10)

2 pc

[13]

Wire saddle

3 pc and shank; if so, be sure to put them together.

Developing assembly fixing stepped

screw (M4X5)

4 pc

[14]

Do Not Copy label

1 pc

Drum unit fixing screw

(M4X20; white)

2 pc

[15]*

Power cable

1 pc

Reader communications cable

1 pc

The developing assembly fixing stepped screw may come in 2 pieces: collar
Check the documentation and CD against the following table:
T-2-21

iR C3170

iR C2570

iR C3170i

iR C2570i

Manual CD-ROM (Ref, Copy, Box, RUI, NW, Oth.)

yes

yes

yes

yes

Users Guide

yes

yes

yes

yes

License agreement for software

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

Sending and Facsimile Guide CD-ROM

Sending and Facsimile Guide
MEAP Admin. CD-ROM

yes

yes

UFR II/PCL/PS User Software CD-ROM

yes

yes

N/W ScanGear CD-ROM

yes

yes

UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Guide CD-ROM

yes

yes

N/W Quick Start Guide

yes

yes

Release Note
Caution sheet for developing assembly install

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

2.2 Unpacking and Installation

[1]

2.2.1 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power

0010-2733

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

ON

/OF

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in
strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk:
1. Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more.
2. Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off.
3. Turn off the main power switch.
4. Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

[2]

[3]

[4]

F-2-37

2.2.2 Settings When Mounting the Finisher

0017-9577

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
When mounting a saddle finisher-AE2/Finisher-AE1, be sure to make settings in the following Service Mode:
- Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC > set '4' for STPL-LMT
(default is '3').
- Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION > set '0' for BLNK-SW (default
is '1').

2-20

Chapter 2

2.2.3 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials

0009-9456

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Unpack the machine, and remove the plastic covering.
- If you are installing a pedestal together with the machine, unpack it also.
2) If you are installing the machine on a Cassette Pedestal, open the right
door [1] of the pedestal.
3) Working as a group of 4 persons, hold the grips [2], and place the machine
on the pedestal.

F-2-40

8) Slide the cassette 1 and 2 back in.

9) Remove the optical system fixing screw [1] from the outside of the reader
unit right cover. (Store away the screw for possible future relocation of
the machine.)

F-2-38

The machine weighs as much as 100 kg (including the DADF). Be sure always to work as a group of 4 persons when lifting it.
MEMO:
When placing the machine on a cassette pedestal, be sure to match the 2 positioning pins [1] found on the top surface of the pedestal against the holes
found in the base of the machine.
F-2-41

10) Open the right door.

11) Remove the 2 fixing assembly releasing rolls [1]. One roll is set on front
side, another one roll is set rear side.

When removing the fixing assembly releasing roll, be sure not to force down
the jam guide [2] of the fixing assembly. Otherwise, the force can damage
the jam guide of the fixing assembly.

F-2-39

4) Close the right door of the pedestal (in the case of the 2-Cassette Pedestal).
5) Remove the fixing tape/fixing material from the individual parts.
- front door
- right door
- manual feed assembly
- cassette 1/2
- inside of cassette 1/2
- DADF (if found)
- copyboard glass
F-2-42

Go through steps 6) through 8) only if you are installing the machine on a 2Cassette Pedestal.
6) Push the cassette releasing button, and remove the cassettes 1 and 2.
7) Join the machine and the pedestal using a screw [1]. The screw comes with
the 2-Cassette Pedestal.

F-2-43

12) Close the right door.

2-21

Chapter 2

2.2.4 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power

0017-2782

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

8) Slide the cassette 1 and 2 back in.

9) Remove the optical system fixing screw [1] from the outside of the reader
unit right cover. (Store away the screw for possible future relocation of
the machine.)

How to Turn Off the Main Power

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following steps
to protect the hard disk:
1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2) Follow the instructions on the shutdown sequence screen to let the main
power switch be ready to turn off.
3) Turn off the power switch.
4) Disconnect the power plug.

2.2.5 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials

0001-7766

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Unpack the machine, and remove the plastic covering.
- If you are installing a pedestal together with the machine, unpack it also.
2) If you are installing the machine on a Cassette Pedestal-Y1, open the right
door [1] of the pedestal.
3) Working as a group of 4 persons, hold the grips [2], and place the machine
on the pedestal.

F-2-46

10) Open the right door.

11) Remove the 2 fixing assembly releasing rolls [1]. One roll is set on front
side, another one roll is set rear side.

When removing the fixing assembly releasing roll, be sure not to force
down the jam guide [2] of the fixing assembly. Otherwise, the force can
damage the jam guide of the fixing assembly.

F-2-44

The machine weighs as much as 100 kg (including the DADF). Be sure

always to work as a group of 4 persons when lifting it.
Memo:
When placing the machine on a cassette pedestal, be sure to match the 2 positioning pins [1] found on the top surface of the pedestal against the holes
found in the base of the machine.

F-2-47

F-2-48

12) Close the right door.

F-2-45

4) Close the right door of the pedestal (in the case of the 2-Cassette PedestalY1).
5) Remove the fixing tape/fixing material from the individual parts.
- front door
- right door
- manual feed assembly
- cassette 1/2
- inside of cassette 1/2
- DADF (if found)
- copyboard glass
6) Push the cassette releasing button, and remove the cassettes 1 and 2.
Go through steps 6) through 8) only if you are installing the machine on
a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1.
7) Join the machine and the pedestal using a screw [1]. The screw comes with
the 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1.

2-22

2.2.6 Installing the Drum Unit

0009-9457

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the ITB releasing lever fixing screw (M3X20; black) [1].

Chapter 2

F-2-49

3) Remove the wrapping from the drum unit.

- Be sure to remove the drum protective sheet.
- The drum counter reading recording label comes with the drum protective sheet. Use it for the next step (i.e., initializing the drum unit).

F-2-53

Do not dry wipe the area. Otherwise, static charges will build up to attract
dust.

F-2-50

4) Remove the 2 charging roller releasing rolls [1] of the drum unit.

MEMO:
The laser light moves through the area between [1] and [2] of the figure to
reach the photosensitive drum. The presence of dust in the area will block
some of the light, thus causing white lines in the images.
6) Turn the ITB releasing lever [1] clockwise until it becomes locked, thereby releasing the ITB.

F-2-51

Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum in the
drum unit.
5) Check to see if there is a build-up of dust in the area [1] of the drum unit
and the area [2] of the optical hood. As needed, clean the areas with a
cloth moistened with water.

F-2-54

A protrusion is found on the back of the ITB releasing lever [1]. The ITB releasing lever becomes locked in place when it is turned until the protrusion
has ridden over the stopper [2].

F-2-52

F-2-55

The photosensitive drum [1] and the ITB [2] are in contact, and turning the
ITB releasing lever clockwise will cause the releasing member [3] (operating
in conjunction with the lever) to push up the ITB [2], thereby moving the ITB
[2] away from the photosensitive drum [1].

2-23

Chapter 2

[2]

[1]

[3]

F-2-59

2.2.7 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials

0017-2783

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Unpack the host machine, and remove the plastic covering.
- If you are installing a cassette pedestal together with the host machine,
unpack it also.
2) If you are installing the host machine on a cassette pedestal, open the right
door [1] of the cassette pedestal.
F-2-56

At this time, the ITB is slack temporarily. If left as it is for a long time, however, the ITB can suffer deformation. Be sure to limit the time during which
the ITB remains slack.

MEMO:
When placing the host machine on a cassette pedestal, be sure to match the
2 positioning pins [1] found on the top surface of the cassette pedestal
against the holes found in the base of the host machine.

7) Fit the drum unit [1] in the machine.

[2]

When fitting the drum unit in the machine, be sure to hold it level and move
it until it butts against the rear of the machine. If moved at an angle, the photosensitive drum can interfere with components inside the machine to damage them.

[1]
F-2-60

The host machine weighs as much as 94.7 kg (including the DADF). Be sure
always to work as a group of 4 persons when lifting it.

F-2-57

8) Turn the ITB releasing lever counterclockwise.

9) Fix the ITB releasing lever in place using the ITB releasing lever fixing
screw (M3X20; black) [1].

3) Hold the 4 grips [1] of the host machine; then, match the left and right corners of the front side of the host machine against that of the cassette pedestal and place the machine onto the cassette pedestal.

F-2-61
F-2-58

10) Fix the drum unit in place using the 2 drum unit fixing screws (M4X20;
white) [1].

2-24

Chapter 2

F-2-64

10) Open the right door.

11) Remove the 2 fixing assembly releasing rolls [1]. One roll is set on front
side, another one roll is set rear side.

When removing the fixing assembly releasing roll, be sure not to force
down the jam guide [2] of the fixing assembly. Otherwise, the force can
damage the jam guide of the fixing assembly.

F-2-62

4) Close the right door of the cassette pedestal (in the case of the cassette pedestal).
5) Remove the fixing tape/fixing material from the individual parts.
- front door
- right door
- manual feed assembly
- cassette 1/2
- inside of cassette 1/2
- DADF (if found)
- copyboard glass

Go through steps 6) through 8) only if you are installing the host machine
on a 2-cassette pedestal.

F-2-65

6) Push the cassette releasing button, and remove the cassettes 1 and 2.
7) Join the host machine and the cassette pedestal using a screw [1]. The
screw comes with the cassette pedestal.

F-2-66

12) Close the right door.

F-2-63

8) Slide the cassette 1 and 2 back in.

9) Remove the optical system fixing screw [1] from the outside of the reader
unit right cover. (Store away the screw for possible future relocation of
the host machine.)

2.2.8 Installing the Drum Unit

0001-7796

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the ITB releasing lever fixing screw (M3x20; black) [1].

2-25

Chapter 2

F-2-67

3) Remove the wrapping from the drum unit.

- Be sure to remove the drum protective sheet.
- The drum counter reading recording label comes with the drum protective sheet. Use it for the next step (i.e., initializing the drum unit).

F-2-71

Do not dry wipe the area. Otherwise, static charges will build up to attract dust.

F-2-68

4) Remove the 2 charging roller releasing rolls [1] of the drum unit.

Memo:
The laser light moves through the area between [1] and [2] of the figure to
reach the photosensitive drum. The presence of dust in the area will block
some of the light, thus causing white lines in the images.
6) Turn the ITB releasing lever [1] clockwise until it becomes locked, thereby releasing the ITB.

F-2-69

Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum in

the drum unit.
5) Check to see if there is a build-up of dust in the area [1] of the drum unit
and the area [2] of the optical hood. As needed, clean the areas with a
cloth moistened with water.

F-2-72

A protrusion is found on the back of the ITB releasing lever [1]. The ITB
releasing lever becomes locked in place when it is turned until the protrusion has ridden over the stopper [2].

F-2-70

F-2-73

The photosensitive drum [1] and the ITB [2] are in contact, and turning
the ITB releasing lever clockwise will cause the releasing member [3]
(operating in conjunction with the lever) to push up the ITB [2], thereby
moving the ITB [2] away from the photosensitive drum [1].

2-26

Chapter 2

[2]

[1]

[3]

F-2-77

2.2.9 Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing

Assembly
0009-9458

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

When turning the rotary by hand, take care not to touch the rotating area.
F-2-74

At this time, the ITB is slack temporarily. If left as it is for a long time, however, the ITB can suffer deformation. Be sure to limit the time during which
the ITB remains slack.
7) Fit the drum unit [1] in the machine.
When fitting the drum unit in the machine, be sure to hold it level and
move it until it butts against the rear of the machine. If moved at an angle,
the photosensitive drum can interfere with components inside the machine to damage them.

1) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and detach the delivery tray [2].

1. Take care not to damage the transfer belt by the rib found on the back
of the delivery tray.
2. Take care not to hit the delivery sensor flag against the tray to break it.
3. Detaching the delivery tray will expose the ITB. If you must detach it
for the work, be sure to take full care not to touch the belt.

F-2-78
F-2-75

2) Open the toner cartridge access cover [1].

8) Fix the drum unit in place using the 2 drum unit fixing screws (M4x20;
white) [1].

F-2-79

3) Remove the rotary lock fixing [1] (1 self-tapping screw).

F-2-76

9) Turn the ITB releasing lever counterclockwise.

10) Fix the ITB releasing lever in place using the ITB releasing lever fixing
screw (M3x20; black) [1].

2-27

Chapter 2

F-2-80

4) Remove the delivery tray lower cover [1] (1 screw [2]).

F-2-84

Take care not to touch the ITB while detaching the part.
9) Turn the rotary to the point of replacement for the cyan developing assembly as follows:
MEMO:
A colored marking [1] is used to identify the point of replacement for cyan,
yellow, and magenta. There is no label, however, for the black developing
assembly.

F-2-81

5) Remove the waste toner bottle retainer [1]. (1 TP screw [2])

6) Detach the waste toner bottle [3].

F-2-85

9-1) While unlocking the rotary using a screwdriver [1], turn the rotary
[2] counterclockwise by hand until it is near the point of
replacement for cyan.

F-2-82

7) Close the toner cartridge access cover [1].

F-2-86

MEMO: Positioning a Screwdriver

To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole [1]).
F-2-83

8) Remove the protective plate [1]. (1 screw [2])

2-28

Chapter 2

F-2-87

F-2-90

9-2) Fix the rotary in place to the front side plate using the rotary fixing
[1]. Be sure that the marking UP of the rotary fixing [1] faces
upward. The rotary fixing is the one removed in the foregoing step
"Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing Assembly."

3) Remove the wrapping from the drum unit.

- Be sure to remove the drum protective sheet.
- The drum counter reading recording label comes with the drum
protective sheet. Use it for the next step (i.e., initializing the drum unit).

F-2-91

4) Remove the 2 charging roller releasing rolls [1] of the drum unit.

Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum in

the drum unit.

F-2-88

F-2-92

5) Check to see if there is a build-up of dust in the area [1] of the drum unit
and the area [2] of the optical hood. As needed, clean the areas with a
cloth moistened with water.

- Do not dry wipe the area. Otherwise, static charges will build up to attract
dust.
- The laser light moves through the area between [1] and [2] of the figure to
reach the photosensitive drum. The presence of dust in the area will block
some of the light, thus causing white lines in the images.

F-2-89

Mount the developing assemblies strictly in the following order:

1. cyan
2. black
3. yellow
4. magenta
Otherwise, the weight of the rotary can cause it to rotate unexpectedly.

2.2.10 Installing the Drum Unit

0017-2784

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the ITB releasing lever fixing screw [1].

F-2-93

2-29

Chapter 2

[2]

[1]

[3]

F-2-94

6) Turn the ITB releasing lever [1] clockwise until it becomes locked, thereby releasing the ITB.

At this time, the ITB is slack temporarily. If left as it is for a long time,
however, the ITB can suffer deformation. Be sure to limit the time during
which the ITB remains slack.

7) Fit the drum unit [1] in the host machine.

When fitting the drum unit in the host machine, be sure to hold it level and
move it until it butts against the rear of the host machine. If moved at an
angle, the photosensitive drum can interfere with components inside the
host machine to damage them.

F-2-95

A protrusion is found on the back of the ITB releasing lever [1]. The ITB
releasing lever becomes locked in place when it is turned until the
protrusion has ridden over the stopper [2].

F-2-96

8) Turn the ITB releasing lever counterclockwise.

9) Fix the ITB releasing lever in place using the ITB releasing lever fixing
screw [1].

The photosensitive drum [1] and the ITB [2] are in contact, and turning the
ITB releasing lever clockwise will cause the releasing member [3]
(operating in conjunction with the lever) to push up the ITB [2], thereby
moving the ITB [2] away from the photosensitive drum [1].

F-2-97

10) Secure the drum unit [1].

- 2 screws (binding; M4X20; white) [2]

2-30

Chapter 2

F-2-101

4) Remove the delivery tray lower cover [1] (1 screw [2]).

F-2-98

2.2.11 Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing

Assembly
0001-7798

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

When turning the rotary by hand, take care not to touch the rotating area.
1) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and detach the delivery tray [2].

1. Take care not to damage the transfer belt by the rib found on the back
of the delivery tray.
2. Take care not to hit the delivery sensor flag against the tray to break it.
3. Detaching the delivery tray will expose the ITB. If you must detach it
for the work, be sure to take full care not to touch the belt.

F-2-102

5) Remove the waste toner bottle retainer [1]. (1 TP screw [2])

6) Detach the waste toner bottle [3].

F-2-103
F-2-99

7) Close the toner cartridge access cover[1].

2) Open the toner cartridge access cover [1].

F-2-100

3) Remove the rotary lock fixing [1] (1 self-tapping screw).

F-2-104

8) Remove the protective plate [1]. (1 screw [2])

2-31

Chapter 2

F-2-105

Take care not to touch the ITB while detaching the part.
9) Turn the rotary to the point of replacement for the cyan developing assembly as follows:

F-2-108

9-2) Fix the rotary in place to the front side plate using the rotary fixing [1].
Be sure that the marking UP of the rotary fixing [1] faces upward. The rotary fixing is the one removed in the foregoing step "Preparing for the
Mounting of the Developing Assembly."

Memo:
A colored marking is used to identify the point of replacement for cyan, yellow, and magenta. There is no label, however, for the black developing assembly.

F-2-109

F-2-106

9-1) While unlocking the rotary using a screwdriver [1], turn the rotary [2]
counterclockwise by hand until it is near the point of replacement for cyan.

F-2-110

Mount the developing assemblies strictly in the following order:

1. cyan
2. black
3. yellow
4. magenta
Otherwise, the weight of the rotary can cause it to rotate unexpectedly.
F-2-107

2.2.12 Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly

0009-9459

Memo
Positioning a Screwdriver
To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole).

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Make a cut in the package bag of the cyan developing assembly with scissors, and take out the developing assembly.
MEMO:
To check the color of the toner inside a developing assembly, refer to the
color of the label attached to the front of the developing assembly.
The packaging bag is transparent; be user to check the color of the label [1]
before opening it.

2-32

Chapter 2

F-2-111

2) Remove the tape [1] used on the toner shutter.

F-2-114

4) Remove the protective sheet [1] used to cover the developing cylinder.

F-2-115

F-2-112

3) Check to see that the toner shutter [1] is fitted all the way in the direction
of the arrow in the figure. Otherwise, move it in the direction of the arrow
unit it stops.
- if the butting is not adequate, the toner cartridge may not settle in
place.
- if the butting is not adequate, toner leakage may occur.

5) Hold the cyan developing assembly [1] as shown in the figure.

F-2-116

Do not touch the sleeve surface.

6) Fit the cyan developing assembly [1] in the rotary.
- Be sure to set the rear of the developing assembly at an angle.
MEMO:
Fit the gear and the protrusion of the developing assembly in the hole of the
rotary flange (rear).
F-2-113

2-33

Chapter 2
screw (M4X5) [1] (screw hole [2]).

F-2-120

F-2-117

- Set the front of the developing assembly in the rotary.

When fitting the developing assembly, take care not to bring the developing
assembly into contact with the rotary fixing. Otherwise, the rotary fixing can
become displaced.
MEMO:
Fit the protrusion of the developing assembly in the hole of the rotary flange
(front). For a better view of the protrusion of the developing assembly, stand
to the left of the machine's front.

F-2-121

MEMO:
If the developing assembly fixing stepped screw came separately with its
collar, be sure to put them together before use.
8) Check to make sure there is play of about 1.5 to 2 mm in up/down and
right/left directions of the cyan developing assembly [1]. If not, the developing assembly fixing stepped screw may be failing to force the developing assembly correctly. Loosen the developing assembly fixing stepped
screw once, and tighten it back.

F-2-122

9) Remove the rotary fixing [1].

F-2-118

F-2-119

F-2-123

7) While pushing the cyan developing assembly in the direction of the arrow
A, fix it in place using the included developing assembly fixing stepped

10) While freeing the rotary lock with a screwdriver [1] or the like, turn the

2-34

Chapter 2
rotary [2] counterclockwise by hand until a click is heard; then, fix it in
place (for black). (The black developing assembly may be fixed in place
without the rotary lock fixing.)
1. Take care not to damage the transfer belt by the rib found on the back of
the delivery tray.
2. Take care not to hit the delivery sensor flag against the tray to break it.
3. Detaching the delivery tray will expose the ITB. If you must detach it for
the work, be sure to take full care not to touch the belt.

F-2-124

MEMO: Positioning a Screwdriver

To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole [1]).

F-2-127

2) Open the toner cartridge access cover [1].

F-2-125

Check the position of the screw hole [1] used to secure the black developing
assembly to see if the rotary is locked correctly in position in relation to the
black developing assembly. If not, start over.

F-2-128

3) Remove the rotary lock fixing [1].

- 1 screw [2]

F-2-129

4) Remove the delivery tray lower cover [1].

- 1 screw [2]
F-2-126

2.2.13 Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing

Assembly
0017-2806

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and detach the delivery tray [2].

2-35

Chapter 2

F-2-130

5) Remove the waste toner bottle retainer [1].

- 1 screw [2]
6) Detach the waste toner bottle [3].

9-1) While unlocking the rotary using a screwdrivers [1], turn the rotary
[2] counterclockwise by hand until it is near the point of
replacement for cyan.
MEMO: Positioning a Screwdriver
To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole [3]).

F-2-131

7) Close the toner cartridge access cover.

8) Remove the protective plate [1].
- 1 screw [2]

Take care not to touch the ITB while detaching the part.

F-2-133

9-2) Fix the rotary in place to the front side plate using the rotary fixing
[1]. Be sure that the marking UP of the rotary fixing [1] faces
upward. The rotary fixing is the one removed in the foregoing step
"Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing Assembly."
- Fit the protrusion [A] of the front side plate into the hole [B] of
the rotary lock fixture, and also fit the rotary [C] into the groove [D]
of the rotary lock fixture.

[1]
F-2-132

9) Turn the rotary to the point of replacement for the cyan developing assembly as follows:

When turning the rotary by hand, take care not to touch the rotating area.

[C]

[D]

MEMO:
A colored marking [1] is used to identify the point of replacement for cyan,
yellow, and magenta. There is no label, however, for the black developing
assembly.

[A]

[B]
F-2-134

2-36

Chapter 2

Mount the developing assemblies strictly in the following order:

1. cyan
2. black
3. yellow
4. magenta
Otherwise, the weight of the rotary can cause it to rotate unexpectedly.

2.2.14 Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly

0001-7838

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Make a cut in the package bag of the cyan developing assembly with scissors, and take out the developing assembly.
Memo:
To check the color of the toner inside a developing assembly, refer to the
color of the label attached to the front of the developing assembly.
The packaging bag is transparent; be user to check the color of the label [1]
before opening it.

F-2-137

F-2-135

2) Remove the tape [1] used on the toner shutter.

F-2-138

4) Remove the protective sheet [1] used to cover the developing cylinder.

F-2-136

3) Check to see that the toner shutter [1] is fitted all the way in the direction
of the arrow in the figure. Otherwise, move it in the direction of the arrow
unit it stops.

F-2-139

5) Hold the cyan developing assembly [1] as shown in the figure.

- if the butting is not adequate, the toner cartridge may not settle in place.
- if the butting is not adequate, toner leakage may occur.

F-2-140

Do not touch the sleeve surface.

2-37

Chapter 2
6) Fit the cyan developing assembly [1] in the rotary.
- Be sure to set the rear of the developing assembly at an angle.
Memo:
Fit the gear and the protrusion of the developing assembly in the hole of the
rotary flange (rear).

F-2-143

7) While pushing the cyan developing assembly in the direction of the arrow
A, fix it in place using the included developing assembly fixing stepped
screw [1] (screw hole [2]).

F-2-141

- Set the front of the developing assembly in the rotary.

F-2-144

When fitting the developing assembly, take care not to bring the developing assembly into contact with the rotary fixing. Otherwise, the rotary
fixing can become displaced.
Memo:
Fit the protrusion of the developing assembly in the hole of the rotary flange
(front). For a better view of the protrusion of the developing assembly, stand
to the left of the machine's front.

F-2-145

Memo:
If the developing assembly fixing stepped screw came separately with its
collar, be sure to put them together before use.
8) Check to make sure there is play of about 1.5 to 2 mm in up/down and
right/left directions of the cyan developing assembly [1]. If not, the developing assembly fixing stepped screw may be failing to force the developing assembly correctly. Loosen the developing assembly fixing stepped
screw once, and tighten it back.

F-2-142

F-2-146

9) Remove the rotary fixing.

10) While freeing the rotary lock using a screwdriver [1], turn the rotary [2]

2-38

Chapter 2
counterclockwise by hand until it is near the point of replacement for
black.

F-2-150

F-2-147

Memo
Positioning a Screwdriver
To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole).

3) Check to make sure that the toner shutter [1] is fully butted in the direction
of the arrows. If not, move the toner shutter [1] in the direction of the arrow until it is fully butted.
- if the butting is not adequate, the toner cartridge may not settle in
place.
- if the butting is not adequate, toner leakage may occur.
- if the butting is not adequate, collection of waste toner (from auto
carrier refresh) may fail, or the feedscrew/ sleeve used to move the
toner may fail.

F-2-148

11) You need not use the rotary fixing to fix the rotary in place at the point
of replacement for black; simply remove the screwdriver so that it will
lock into place on its own. (In other word, the black developing assembly
does not need a rotary fixing.)
Check the position of the screw hole used to secure the black developing
assembly to see if the rotary is locked correctly in position in relation to
the black developing assembly. If not, start over.

F-2-151

F-2-152

4) Remove the protective sheet [1] used to cover the developing cylinder.
F-2-149

2.2.15 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly

0002-5229

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Cut the packaging bag of the black developing assembly with scissors, and
take out the developing assembly.
2) Remove the tape [1] used on the toner shutter.

2-39

Chapter 2

F-2-153

5) Hold the black developing assembly [1] as shown.

Take care not to touch the cylinder surface.
F-2-156

F-2-157
F-2-154

6) Fit the black developing assembly [1] in the rotary.

- Set the rear of the developing assembly in the rotary at an angle.

7) While pushing the developing assembly in the direction of the arrow A,

fix it in place using the included black developing assembly fixing screw
[1] (screw hole [2]).

Memo:
Fit the gar and the protrusion of the developing assembly in the hole of the
rotary flange (rear).

F-2-158

F-2-155

- Set the front of the developing assembly in the rotary.

Memo:
Fit the protrusion of the developing assembly into the hole of the rotary
flange (front).
F-2-159

Memo:
If the developing assembly fixing screw came separately with its collar, be
sure to put them together before use.
8) Check to see if there is play of about 1.5 to 2 mm in up/down and left/right

2-40

Chapter 2
directions of the black developing assembly [1]. If not, the developing assembly fixing screw may not be pushing the developing assembly correctly. Loosen the developing assembly fixing stepped screw once, and
tighten it back.

F-2-164

2.2.16 Mounting the Yellow Developing Assembly

0002-5232

F-2-160

9) While freeing the rotary using a screwdriver [1], turn the rotary [2] counterclockwise by hand until it is near the point of replacement for yellow.

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
Perform steps 1) through 9) shown for installing the cyan developing assembly for the yellow developing assembly.
Thereafter, perform the following steps to fix the rotary in place for magenta:
1) While keeping the rotary unlocked using a screwdriver [1], turn the rotary
counterclockwise by hand so that it is positioned near the point of magenta replacement.

F-2-161

Memo
Positioning a Screwdriver
To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole).

F-2-165

Memo
Positioning a Screwdriver
To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole).

F-2-162

10) Fix the rotary in place to the front plate using the rotary fixing [1]. Be
sure that the marking "UP" on the rotary fixing [1] faces upward.
F-2-166

2) Fix the rotary in place to the front plate using the rotary lock fixing [1]. Be
sure that the UP marking on the rotary lock fixing [1] faces upward.

F-2-163

2-41

Chapter 2
Take care not to touch the ITB while attaching the part.
3) Fit the waste toner bottle [3].
4) Fit the waste toner bottle retainer [1]. (1 TP screw [2])

F-2-167

F-2-171

5) Mount the delivery tray lower cover [1]. (1 screw [2])

F-2-168

2.2.17 Mounting the Magenta Developing Assembly

0002-5247

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
Perform steps 1) through 9) under "Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly" for the magenta developing assembly.

2.2.18 After Mounting the Developing Assembly

0002-5249

F-2-172

6) Close the toner cartridge access cover.

7) Mount the delivery tray [2], and tighten the 2 screws [1].

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Open the toner cartridge access cover [1], and fit the rotary fixing [2]. (1
self-tapping screw).

F-2-173
F-2-169

2) Fit the protective plate [1]. (1 screw [2])

F-2-170

2-42

Be sure that the delivery tray [1] covers the rib area [2] of the delivery
tray lower cover.

Chapter 2

F-2-174

F-2-177

8) Close the front cover.

2.2.19 Fixing the Machine in Place

0001-8288

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
- If a Pedestal Is Used
1) Move the machine to its permanent position, and fix it in place using the
4 adjusters of the pedestal.
- If No Pedestal Is Used
1) Take out the cassettes 1 and 2, and temporarily tighten the adjusting screw
[1] on the base plate of the machine (with the foot of the adjusting screw
lightly in contact).

3) Check to make sure that the toner shutter [1] is fully butted in the direction
of the arrows. If not, move the toner shutter [1] in the direction of the arrow until it is fully butted.
- if the butting is not adequate, the toner cartridge may not settle in
place.
- if the butting is not adequate, toner leakage may occur.
- if the butting is not adequate, collection of waste toner (from auto
carrier refresh) may fail, or the feedscrew/ sleeve used to move the
toner may fail.

F-2-178
F-2-175

2) Check the table or the floor to see that the machine will not wobble; if it
does, tighten the adjusting screw to stop it as follows:
- if it moves in the direction of the arrow A, tighten the screw on the
right in the figure.
- if it moves in the direction of the arrow B, tightened the screw on the
left in the

[B]

[A]

[A]
[B]

F-2-179

4) Remove the protective sheet [1] used to cover the developing cylinder.

F-2-176

4) Put back the cassettes 1 and 2.

2.2.20 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly

0009-9462

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Cut the packaging bag of the black developing assembly with scissors, and
take out the developing assembly.
2) Remove the tape [1] used on the toner shutter.

2-43

Chapter 2

F-2-180

5) Hold the black developing assembly [1] as shown.

Take care not to touch the cylinder surface.

F-2-183

F-2-184
F-2-181

6) Fit the black developing assembly [1] in the rotary.

- Set the rear of the developing assembly in the rotary at an angle.

7) While pushing the developing assembly in the direction of the arrow A,

fix it in place using the included black developing assembly fixing screw
(M4X5) [1] (screw hole [2]).

MEMO:
Fit the gar and the protrusion of the developing assembly in the hole of the
rotary flange (rear).

F-2-185

F-2-182

- Set the front of the developing assembly in the rotary.

MEMO:
Fit the protrusion of the developing assembly into the hole of the rotary
flange (front).

F-2-186

MEMO:
If the developing assembly fixing screw came separately with its collar, be
sure to put them together before use.
8) Check to see if there is play of about 1.5 to 2 mm in up/down and left/right

2-44

Chapter 2
directions of the black developing assembly [1]. If not, the developing assembly fixing screw may not be pushing the developing assembly correctly. Loosen the developing assembly fixing stepped screw once, and
tighten it back.

F-2-191

2.2.21 Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly

0017-2813

F-2-187

9) While freeing the rotary lock with a screwdriver [1] or the like, turn the
rotary [2] counterclockwise by hand so that it is near the yellow position.

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Make a cut in the package bag of the cyan developing assembly with scissors, and take out the developing assembly.
MEMO:
To check the color of the toner inside a developing assembly, refer to the
color of the label attached to the front of the developing assembly.
The packaging bag is transparent; be user to check the color of the label [1]
before opening it.

F-2-188

MEMO: Positioning a Screwdriver

To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole [1]).
2) Remove the drying agent.
3) Remove the tape [1] used on the toner shutter.

F-2-189

10) Fix the rotary in place to the front plate using the rotary fixing [1]. Be
sure that the marking "UP" on the rotary fixing [1] faces upward.

F-2-192

4) Check to see that the toner shutter [1] is fitted all the way in the direction
of the arrow in the figure. Otherwise, move it in the direction of the arrow
unit it stops.
- if the butting is not adequate, the toner cartridge may not settle in place.
- if the butting is not adequate, toner leakage may occur.

F-2-190

2-45

Chapter 2

[D]

[1]

[B]

[C]

[A]
F-2-196

<Front side>
- Fit the protrusion [A] of the cyan developing assembly into the hole [B]
of the rotary flange (front).

When fitting the developing assembly, take care not to bring the developing
assembly into contact with the rotary fixing. Otherwise, the rotary fixing can
become displaced.

F-2-193

5) Remove the protective sheet [1] used to cover the developing cylinder.

MEMO:
Fit the protrusion of the developing assembly in the hole of the rotary flange
(front). For a better view of the protrusion of the developing assembly,
stand to the left of the host machine's front.

[B]

[A]
F-2-194

6) Hold the cyan developing assembly [1] as shown in the figure.

F-2-197
Do not touch the developing cylinder [2].

8) Secure the cyan developing assembly [1] while pushing it in the direction
of the arrow.
- 1 developing assembly fixing stepped screw (M4X5) [2]

Do not touch the developing cylinder [3].

MEMO:
If the developing assembly fixing stepped screw came separately with its
collar, be sure to put them together before use.

F-2-195

7) Fit the cyan developing assembly [1] in the rotary.

<Rear side>
- Fit the 2 gears [A] of the cyan developing assembly into the holes of the
rotary flange (rear) [B].
- Fit the 2 protrusions [C] of the cyan developing assembly into the holes
of the rotary flange (rear) [D].

2-46

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[3]

2.2.22 Connecting the Cable

0001-7929

F-2-198

9) Check to make sure there is play of about 1.5 to 2 mm in up/down and

right/left directions of the cyan developing assembly [1]. If not, the developing assembly fixing stepped screw may be failing to force the developing assembly correctly. Loosen the developing assembly fixing stepped
screw once, and tighten it back.

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Connect the machine to the ground using the grounding wire.

F-2-201

F-2-199

10) Remove the rotary fixing.

11) While freeing the rotary lock with a screwdriver [1] or the like, turn the
rotary [2] counterclockwise by hand until a click is heard; then, fix it in
place (for black). (The black developing assembly may be fixed in place
without the rotary lock fixing.)
MEMO: Positioning a Screwdriver
To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole [3])

Ground
a. grounding terminal of the power outlet
b. grounding terminal prepared according to regulations

1. Be sure that the grounding is appropriately done. Otherwise, the leakage breaker may fail to operate.
2. Check to see that the open/close lever of the leakage breaker is on the
ON side.
2) Fit the 3 wire saddles [1] to the rear cover (right) of the printer unit.
3)Fit the reader communication cable [2] to the reader printer. Bundle the cable using the wire saddles as shown, and be sure to push the connectors
on both ends of the cable until a click is felt.

[1]
F-2-200

F-2-202

Check the position of the screw hole [1] used to secure the black developing
assembly to see if the rotary is locked correctly in position in relation to the
black developing assembly. If not, start over.

2-47

Chapter 2

[2]

[2]

F-2-203

F-2-206

4) If you are installing a cassette pedestal, remove the lattice connector cover, and fit the lattice connector [1] of the cassette pedestal to the machine.

3) If you are installing a cassette pedestal, remove the lattice connector cover, and fit the lattice connector [1] of the cassette pedestal to the machine.

F-2-204

F-2-207

5) Connect the power plug to the power outlet.

4) Connect the power plug to the power outlet.

1. Power supply voltage shall be +/-10% of the rating.

2. The amperage of the power supply must be as rated.
3. Before connecting the power plug, check to be sure that the main power
switch is off.

1. Power supply voltage shall be +/-10% of the rating.

2. The amperage of the power supply must be as rated.
3. Before connecting the power plug, check to be sure that the main power
switch is off.

6) Turn on the main power switch.

- The machine issues a message to indicate that it is loading programs.
- The machine issues a message to indicate that its printer is getting ready
for a job.
- In about 6 min, the machine issues a message to indicate that it is checking the network settings.
- Be sure to set up the cassette before the machine completes its warm-up
period. (For instructions, see "Setting Up the Cassette.")

5) Turn on the main power switch.

- The machine issues a message to indicate that it is loading programs.
- The machine issues a message to indicate that its printer is getting ready
for a job.
- In about 6 min, the machine issues a message to indicate that it is checking the network settings.
- Be sure to set up the cassette before the machine completes its warm-up
period. (For instructions, see "Setting Up the Cassette.")

2.2.23 Connecting the Cable

2.2.24 Mounting the Yellow Developing Assembly

0005-5443

0009-9465

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Fit the 3 wire saddles [1] to the rear cover (right) of the printer unit.

Perform steps 1) through 9) shown for installing the cyan developing assembly for the yellow developing assembly.
Thereafter, perform the following steps to fix the rotary in place for magenta:
1) While keeping the rotary unlocked using a screwdriver [1], turn the rotary
counterclockwise by hand so that it is positioned near the point of magenta replacement.

[1]
F-2-205

2)Fit the reader communication cable [2] to the reader printer. Bundle the cable using the wire saddles as shown, and be sure to push the connectors
on both ends of the cable until a click is felt.

2-48

F-2-208

Chapter 2
MEMO: Positioning a Screwdriver
To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole [1]).

F-2-212

F-2-209

2) Fix the rotary in place to the front plate using the rotary lock fixing [1]. Be
sure that the UP marking on the rotary lock fixing [1] faces upward.

4) Check to make sure that the toner shutter [1] is fully butted in the direction
of the arrows. If not, move the toner shutter [1] in the direction of the arrow until it is fully butted.
- if the butting is not adequate, the toner cartridge may not settle in place.
- if the butting is not adequate, toner leakage may occur.
- if the butting is not adequate, collection of waste toner (from auto carrier
refresh) may fail, or the feedscrew/ sleeve used to move the toner may
fail.

F-2-210

F-2-211

F-2-213

2.2.25 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly

5) Remove the protective sheet [1] used to cover the developing cylinder.
0017-2831

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Make a cut in the package bag of the black developing assembly with scissors, and take out the developing assembly.
2) Remove the drying agent.
3) Remove the tape [1] used on the toner shutter.

F-2-214

6) Hold the black developing assembly [1] as shown in the figure.

Do not touch the developing cylinder [2].

2-49

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[3]
F-2-215

7) Fit the black developing assembly [1] in the rotary.

<Rear side>
- Fit the 2 gears [A] of the black developing assembly into the holes of the
rotary flange (rear) [B].
- Fit the 2 protrusions [C] of the black developing assembly into the holes
of the rotary flange (rear) [D].

F-2-218

9) Check to see if there is play of about 1.5 to 2 mm in up/down and left/right

directions of the black developing assembly [1]. If not, the developing assembly fixing screw may not be pushing the developing assembly correctly. Loosen the developing assembly fixing stepped screw once, and
tighten it back.

[D]

[1]

[B]

F-2-219

[C]

10) While freeing the rotary lock with a screwdriver [1] or the like, turn the
rotary [2] counterclockwise by hand so that it is near the yellow position.

[A]
F-2-216

<Front side>
- Fit the protrusion [A] of the black developing assembly into the hole [B]
of the rotary flange (front).

MEMO: Positioning a Screwdriver

To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole [3]).

[B]

[A]

F-2-217

8) Secure the black developing assembly [1] while pushing it in the direction
of the arrow.
- 1 developing assembly fixing stepped screw (M4X5) [2]

Do not touch the developing cylinder [3].

MEMO:
If the developing assembly fixing stepped screw came separately with its
collar, be sure to put them together before use.

2-50

F-2-220

11) Fix the rotary in place to the front plate using the rotary fixing [1]. Be
sure that the marking "UP" on the rotary fixing [1] faces upward.
- Fit the protrusion [A] of the front side plate into the hole [B] of the rotary
lock fixture, and also fit the rotary [C] into the groove [D] of the rotary
lock fixture.

Chapter 2

[1]

[1]
[C]

F-2-224

[D]

7) Deposit paper in the cassette; then, slide in the cassette.

8) Perform the same for the other cassette.
9) If a cassette pedestal is used, set it by referring to its Installation Procedure.

2.2.27 Mounting the Magenta Developing Assembly

0009-9466

iR C2570 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[A]

Perform steps 1) through 9) under "Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly" for the magenta developing assembly.

[B]

2.2.28 Mounting the Yellow Developing Assembly

F-2-221

0017-2836

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

2.2.26 Setting Up the Cassette

0001-7937

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Press the cassette release button, and slide out the cassette to the front.
2) Check the type of paper that the user uses, check to see that the size configuration switch [1] of the cassette is set to the paper size. As necessary,
change the switch position.
3) Set the paper size dial [1] to suit the size of the paper in question.

Perform steps 1) through 10) shown for installing the cyan developing assembly for the yellow developing assembly.
Thereafter, perform the following steps to fix the rotary in place for magenta:
1) While keeping the rotary unlocked using a screwdriver [1], turn the rotary
counterclockwise by hand so that it is positioned near the point of magenta replacement.
MEMO: Positioning a Screwdriver
To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a screwdriver by positioning it as
follows (2/3 of the angular hole [3]).

F-2-222

4) Pick the lever [1] of the side guide plate, and move the side guide plate to
the desired position.
5) Push the trailing edge guide plate [2] to the right to detach. Mach the trailing edge guide plate against a specific size index found on the cassette
bottom.

F-2-225

2) Fix the rotary in place to the front plate using the rotary fixing [1]. Be sure
that the marking "UP" on the rotary fixing [1] faces upward.
- Fit the protrusion [A] of the front side plate into the hole [B] of the rotary
lock fixture, and also fit the rotary [C] into the groove [D] of the rotary
lock fixture.

F-2-223

6) Attach the cassette size label [1] that matches the selected size of paper to
the front of the cassette.

2-51

Chapter 2

OK!

[1]

F-2-228

3-3) Hold the toner cartridge as shown with both your hands, and move it to
and for about 5 times so as to turn over the toner inside it.
[C]

[A]

[D]

[B]
F-2-226
F-2-229

2.2.29 Mounting the Toner Cartridge

0001-7943

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

When moving the toner cartridge, take care not to touch the shutter area
or turn the knob; otherwise, the toner may start to leak.

If the developing rotary fails to stop at an appropriate position and thus

prevents mounting of a toner cartridge, move it as follows before attempting to set the toner cartridge:
1) Check to see that the screen indicates [ready].
2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DEV-DR-Y/M/C/K (select the desired color).
3) Check to see that the message has changed from [service] to [ready];
then, open the front cover and the toner cartridge access cover, and mount
the toner cartridge in question.
1) Take out the toner cartridge from its packaging bag.
2) When the machine has completed its warm-up period, start service mode
by pressing the Additional Function key, the 2 and 8 keys at the same
time, and then the Additional Function key once again.
3) Mount the yellow toner cartridge as follows:
3-1) Make the following selections: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DEVDR-Y. Then, check to see that the screen indicates [ready], and press
[OK]. Check to see that the developing rotary moves to the point of replacement for the yellow toner cartridge.

F-2-230

3-4) Keep the toner cartridge so that its side with 2 arrows face upward; then,
fit it into the machine in the direction of the arrow.

F-2-231
F-2-227

3-2) Check to see that the screen indicates [OK!] and [ready]; then, open the
front cover and the toner cartridge access cover.

2-52

When fitting the toner cartridge into the printer unit, be sure that the
guide [1] of the toner cartridge is inside the bend on the rail [2] of the rotary assembly.
Check to be sure that the guide [1] of the toner cartridge has not ridden
over the rail [2] of the rotary when it is fitted into the printer unit; otherwise, the machine may suffer leakage of toner.

Chapter 2

[2]

[1]
F-2-234

6-4) With the side of the toner cartridge indicating 2 arrows facing upward,
slide the cartridge in the direction of the arrow.

OK

NG

F-2-232

3-5) Turn the knob of the toner cartridge clockwise until it stops.

F-2-235

6-5) Turn the knob of the toner cartridge clockwise (from UNLOCK position
to LOCK position) until it stops.

F-2-233

3-6) Close the toner cartridge access cover and the front cover.
4) Fit the magenta toner cartridge as follows:
4-1) Wait until the screen indicates [ready].
4-2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DEV-DR-M. See that the developing rotary moves to
the point of replacement for the magenta toner cartridge.
4-3) Check to see that the screen shows [OK!] and [ready]; then, mount the
magenta toner cartridge as you did the yellow toner cartridge.
5) Mount the cyan toner cartridge as follows:
5-1) Wait until the screen indicates [ready].
5-2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]; COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DEV-DR-C. See that the developing rotary moves to
the point of replacement for the cyan toner cartridge.
5-3) Check to see that the screen indicates [OK!] and [ready]; then, mount
the cyan toner cartridge as you did the yellow toner cartridge.
6) Mount the black toner cartridge as follows:

ck

Lo

lock
Un

F-2-236

After turning the toner cartridge knob, check to see that the triangle
marking of the toner cartridge knob is positioned against LOCK; otherwise, the machine can suffer leakage of toner.

OK

Memo:
You need not shake the black toner cartridge before mounting it.

NG sample

6-1) Wait until the screen indicates [ready].

6-2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DEV-DR-K. See that the developing rotary moves to
the point of replacement for the black toner cartridge.
6-3) See that the screen indicates [OK!] and [ready]; then, open the front cover and the toner cartridge access cover.
When the toner cartridge access cover is opened, the rotary [1] may not
be at the point of cartridge replacement; if such is the case, turn it counterclockwise until the rotary is locked in position so that the black toner
cartridge may be fitted in place.

F-2-237

7) Close the toner cartridge access cover.

8) Close the front cover.

2.2.30 After Mounting the Developing Assembly

0009-9467

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Open the toner cartridge access cover [1], and fit the rotary fixing [2]. (1
self-tapping screw).

2-53

Chapter 2

F-2-238

2) Fit the protective plate [1]. (1 screw [2])

F-2-242

Be sure that the delivery tray [1] covers the rib area [2] of the delivery tray
lower cover.

F-2-239

Take care not to touch the ITB while attaching the part.
3) Fit the waste toner bottle [1].
4) Fit the waste toner bottle retainer [2]. (1 TP screw [3])
F-2-243

8) Close the front cover.

2.2.31 Mounting the Magenta Developing Assembly

0017-2839

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Perform steps 1) through 10) under "Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly" for the magenta developing assembly.

2.2.32 Making Initial Settings for the Developing

Assembly
0001-7998

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

F-2-240

If you want to use service mode from this point on, be sure to check to
see that the screen indicates [ready] before doing so.

5) Mount the delivery tray lower cover [1]. (1 screw [2])

F-2-241

6) Close the toner cartridge access cover.

7) Mount the delivery tray [2], and tighten the 2 screws [1].

2-54

1) Execute stirring of the developer.

- Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>STIR-4.
- When done, the machine indicates [OK!]. (in about 2 min)
2) Make ATR initial settings.
- Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-3.
- When done, the machine indicates [OK!]. (in about 40 sec)
3) Open the front cover.
4) Record the result of the following on the service label: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>IN-3. Be sure that the following 6 items have been
noted:
- for ADJ>DENS>REF-Y of the label, record the value of COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>REF-Y.
- for ADJ>DNES>REF-M of the label, record the value of COPIER>ADJUST>DENS-REF-M.
- for ADF>DENS>REF-C of the label, record the value of COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>REF-C.
- for ADJ>DENS>SGNL-Y of the label, record the value of COPIER>ADJUST>DENS-Y.
- for ADJ>DENS>SGNL-M of the label, record the value of COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>SGNL-M.
- for ADJ>DENS>SGNL-C of the label, record the value of COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>SGNL-C.
5) Close the front cover.

Chapter 2
6) Supply toner to the developing assembly.
- Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>SPLY-H-4.
- When done, the machine indicates [OK!]. (in bout 1 min)

2.2.33 Fixing the Machine in Place

0009-9469

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

- If a Pedestal Is Used
1) Move the machine to its permanent position, and fix it in place using the
4 adjusters of the pedestal.

F-2-247

2) Fit the protective plate [1].

- 1 screw [2]

Take care not to touch the ITB while attaching the part.

[1]

[1]
F-2-244

- If No Pedestal Is Used
1) Take out the cassettes 1 and 2, and temporarily tighten the 2 adjusting
screw [1] on the base plate of the machine (with the foot of the adjusting
screw lightly in contact).

F-2-248

3) Fit the waste toner bottle [1].

4) Fit the waste toner bottle retainer [2].
- 1 screw [3]

F-2-245

2) Check the table or the floor to see that the machine will not wobble; if it
does, adjust the adjusting screw to stop it as follows:
- if it moves in the direction of the arrow A, tighten the screw on the
right in the figure.
- if it moves in the direction of the arrow B, tightened the screw on the
left in the

[B]

[A]

[A]

F-2-249

[B]

5) Mount the delivery tray lower cover [1].

- 1 screw [2]

F-2-246

4) Put back the cassettes 1 and 2.

2.2.34 After Mounting the Developing Assembly

0017-2841

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the toner cartridge access cover, and fit the rotary fixing [1].
- 1 screw [2]
F-2-250

6) Close the toner cartridge access cover.

7) Mount the delivery tray [1], and tighten the 2 screws [2].

2-55

Chapter 2

F-2-253

8) Close the front cover.

F-2-251

2.2.36 Fixing the Machine in Place

0017-2849

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Be sure that the rib area [1] of the delivery tray lower cover is outside of the
delivery tray [2].

<If a Cassette Pedestal Is Used>

1) Move the host machine to its permanent position, and fix it in place using
the 4 adjusters [1] of the cassette pedestal.

[1]

[1]
F-2-254

<If No Cassette Pedestal Is Used>

1) Take out the cassettes 1 and 2, and temporarily tighten the 2 adjusting
screw (M6X10) [1] on the base plate of the host machine (with the foot
of the adjusting screw lightly in contact).

8) Close the front cover.

2.2.35 Initializing the Drum Unit

0001-8272

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Initialize the drum unit by making the following selections and pressing
[OK]:
- COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DRM-LIFE
The machine flashes [active] on its screen while it executes initialization,
which takes about 1 min.
Do not press any of the keys, open the door, or turn off the power switch
while initialization is under way (while [active] is flashing); otherwise, go
back to step 1) and start over.
2) When initialization is done, check to see that the value of the following is
'0%':
- COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>DRM-LIFE
Otherwise, go back to step 2) and start over.
3) Record the value of the following service mode item in the Remarks column of the drum counter label
- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DR-I-INT
4) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.
5) Record the date and the counter reading to the drum counter label.

F-2-252

6) Open the front cover.

7) Attach the drum counter label to the front of the drum unit.

2-56

F-2-255

2) Check the table or the floor to see that the host machine will not wobble;
if it does, adjust the adjusting screw to stop it as follows:
- if it moves in the direction of the arrow A, tighten the screw on the right
in the figure.
- if it moves in the direction of the arrow B, tightened the screw on the left
in the figure.

Chapter 2

[B]

[A]

[A]
[B]

F-2-259

4) Connect the power plug to the power outlet.

F-2-256

3) Put back the cassettes 1 and 2.

2.2.37 Connecting the Cable

0009-9471

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Use the correct power cord to mach the location/area of installation. Make
sure not to leave unused power cord at the site.

1) Fit the 3 wire saddles [1] to the rear cover (right) of the printer unit.
1. Power supply voltage shall be +/-10% of the rating.
2. The amperage of the power supply must be as rated.
3. Before connecting the power plug, check to be sure that the main power
switch is off.
5) Turn on the main power switch.
- The machine issues a message to indicate that it is loading programs.
- The machine issues a message to indicate that its printer is getting
ready for a job.
- In about 6 min, the engine will enter a standby state.
- Be sure to set up the cassette before the machine completes its warmup period. (For instructions, see "Setting Up the Cassette.")

2.2.38 Connecting the Cable

0017-2854

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Fit the 3 wire saddles [1] to the rear cover (right) of the printer unit.
[1]
F-2-257

2) Fit the reader unit communications cable [1] in place between the reader
unit and the printer unit. Fix the cable in place as shown using the wire
saddles, and connect the connectors on both ends until a click is felt.
[1]

[1]
F-2-260

2) Fit the reader communications cable [1] in place between the reader unit
and the printer unit. Fix the cable in place as shown using the wire saddles, and connect the connectors on both ends until a click is felt.
[1]
F-2-258

3) If you are installing a cassette pedestal, remove the lattice connector cover, and fit the lattice connector [1] of the cassette pedestal to the machine.

F-2-261

2-57

Chapter 2
3) If you are installing a cassette pedestal, remove the lattice connector cover, and fit the lattice connector [1] of the cassette pedestal to the host machine.

the copyboard glass.

16) Press the Reset key once to end user mode.

2.2.40 Setting Up the Cassette

0009-9472

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Press the cassette release button, and slide out the cassette to the front.
2) Check the type of paper that the user uses, check to see that the size configuration switch [1] of the cassette is set to the paper size. As necessary,
change the switch position.
3) Set the paper size dial [1] to suit the size of the paper in question.

F-2-262

4) Connect one end of the power cord to the host machine and the other end
to the power outlet.

Use the correct power code to mach the location/area of installation. Make
sure not to leave unused power code at the site.
F-2-263

4) Pick the lever [1] of the side guide plate, and move the side guide plate to
the desired position.
5) Shift down the rear guide plate [2] to the right to detach. Adjust the rear
guide plate to suit the appropriate size indicated on the base of the cassette.

1. Power supply voltage shall be +/-15% of the rating.

2. The amperage of the power supply must be as rated.
3. Before connecting the power plug, check to be sure that the main power
switch is off.

5) Turn on the main power switch.

- The host machine issues a message to indicate that it is loading
programs.
- The host machine issues a message to indicate that its printer is getting
ready for a job.
- In about 6 min, the engine will enter a standby state.
- Be sure to set up the cassette before the host machine completes its
warm-up period. (For instructions, see "Setting Up the Cassette.")

2.2.39 Automatic Gradation Correction

0001-8292

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

If the machine is not equipped with a copyboard cover, fit the copyboard
cover to it. If you are installing a DADF, perform the steps up to A.
"DADF" under 2. "Installation" of the DADF-L1 Installation Procedure.
1) Clean the machine's copyboard glass.
2) Place A3, A4, 11x17, or LTR paper in the cassette. (See the instructions
on how to set up the cassette.)
3) Press the Additional Function key.
4) Make the following selections: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction>full correction>test print 1.
- The test print 1 will be printed out.
5) Place the printout of the test print 1 on the copyboard glass as instructed
on the control panel screen.
6) Close the copyboard cover/ DADF.
7) Press [start to read].
- The machine reads the printout of the test print 1.
- When a message appears prompting you to remove the test print,
remove the printout of the test print 1 from the copyboard glass.
8) Press [test print 2].
- The machine prints out the test print 2.
9) Place the printout of the test print 2 on the copyboard glass as instructed
on the control panel scan.
10) Close the copyboard cover/ DADF.
11) Press [start to read].
- The machine reads the print out of the test print 2.
- When a message appears promoting you to remove the test print,
remove the printout of the test print 2 from the copyboard glass.
12) Press [test print 3].
- The machine prints the test print 3.
13) Place the printout of the test print 3 on the copyboard glass as instructed
on the control panel screen.
14) Close the copyboard cover/ DADF.

F-2-264

6) Attach the cassette size label [1] that matches the selected size of paper to
the front of the cassette.

[1]
F-2-265

7) Deposit paper in the cassette; then, slide in the cassette.

8) Perform the same for the other cassette.
9) If a cassette pedestal is used, set it by referring to its Installation Procedure.

2.2.41 Setting Up the Cassette

0017-2859

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
15) Press [start to read].
- The machine reads the printout of the test print 3.
- The machine issues a message to indicate that it has completed full
correction. In response, remove the printout of the test print 3 form

2-58

1) Attach the dial label to the cassette detection dial as follows:

Attach the label by selecting the appropriate one (AB or Inch).
2) Press the cassette release button, and slide out the cassette to the front.

Chapter 2
3) Turn the dial [2] so that the label position index [1] of the size detection
dial turns up.

[2]

F-2-269

[1]
F-2-266

4) From the right side of the label position index, attach the dial label [1] by
winding to the size detection dial [2].

9) Pick the lever [1] of the side guide plate, and move the side guide plate to
the desired position.
10) Shift down the rear guide plate [2] to the right to detach. Adjust the rear
guide plate to suit the appropriate size indicated on the base of the cassette.

Make sure to attach the dial label [1] to fit the edges of the 2 directions [3]
of the arrow.

[1]

F-2-270

[3]

11) Attach the cassette size label [1] that matches the selected size of paper
to the front of the cassette.
[1]

[2]
F-2-267

5) Attach the AB/Inch label [1] of the dial label.

6) Set the size configuration switch [2] of the size detection cam to AB or
Inch.

[1]
F-2-271

12) Deposit paper in the cassette; then, slide in the cassette.

13) Perform the same for the other cassette.
14) If a cassette pedestal is used, set it by referring to its Installation Procedure.

2.2.42 Mounting the Toner Cartridge

0009-9474

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

F-2-268

7) Check the type of paper that the user uses, check to see that the size configuration switch [1] of the cassette is set to the paper size. As necessary,
change the switch position.
8) Set the paper size dial [2] to suit the size of the paper in question.

If the developing rotary fails to stop at an appropriate position and thus prevents mounting of a toner cartridge, move it as follows before attempting to
set the toner cartridge:
1) Check to see that the screen indicates <READY>.
2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DEV-DR-Y/M/C/K (select the desired color).
3) Check to see that the message has changed from <SERVICE> to
<READY>; then, open the front cover and the toner cartridge access cover, and mount the toner cartridge in question.
1) Take out the toner cartridge from its packaging bag.
2) When the machine has completed its warm-up period, start service mode

2-59

Chapter 2
by pressing the Additional Function key, the 2 and 8 keys at the same
time, and then the Additional Function key once again.
3) Mount the yellow toner cartridge as follows:
3-1) Make the following selections: COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P >
DEV-DR-Y. Then, check to see that the screen indicates
<READY>, and press [OK]. Check to see that the developing
rotary moves to the point of replacement for the yellow toner
cartridge.

F-2-276

F-2-272

3-2) Check to see that the screen indicates [OK!] and <READY>; then,
open the front cover and the toner cartridge access cover.

When fitting the toner cartridge into the printer unit, be sure that the guide
[1] of the toner cartridge is inside the bend on the rail [2] of the rotary assembly.
Check to be sure that the guide [1] of the toner cartridge has not ridden over
the rail [2] of the rotary when it is fitted into the printer unit; otherwise, the
machine may suffer leakage of toner.

OK!

F-2-273

3-3) Hold the toner cartridge as shown with both your hands, and move it
to and for about 5 times so as to turn over the toner inside it.

[2]

[1]

OK

NG
F-2-277

3-5) Turn the knob of the toner cartridge clockwise until it stops.
F-2-274

When moving the toner cartridge, take care not to touch the shutter area or
turn the knob; otherwise, the toner may start to leak.

F-2-278

F-2-275

3-4) Keep the toner cartridge so that its side with 2 arrows face upward;
then, fit it into the machine in the direction of the arrow.

2-60

3-6) Close the toner cartridge access cover and the front cover.
4) Fit the magenta toner cartridge as follows:
4-1) Wait until the screen indicates <READY>.
4-2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER >
FUNCTION > MISC-P > DEV-DR-M. See that the developing
rotary moves to the point of replacement for the magenta toner
cartridge.
4-3) Check to see that the screen shows [OK!] and <READY>; then,
mount the magenta toner cartridge as you did the yellow toner
cartridge.
5) Mount the cyan toner cartridge as follows:
5-1) Wait until the screen indicates <READY>.
5-2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]; COPIER >
FUNCTION > MISC-P > DEV-DR-C. See that the developing
rotary moves to the point of replacement for the cyan toner
cartridge.
5-3) Check to see that the screen indicates [OK!] and <READY>; then,
mount the cyan toner cartridge as you did the yellow toner
cartridge.
6) Mount the black toner cartridge as follows:

Chapter 2
MEMO:
You need not shake the black toner cartridge before mounting

OK

NG sample

6-1) Wait until the screen indicates <READY>.

6-2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER >
FUNCTION > MISC-P > DEV-DR-K. See that the developing
rotary moves to the point of replacement for the black toner
cartridge.
6-3) See that the screen indicates [OK!] and <READY>; then, open the
front cover and the toner cartridge access cover.

When the toner cartridge access cover is opened, the rotary [1] may not be at
the point of cartridge replacement; if such is the case, turn it counterclockwise until the rotary is locked in position so that the black toner cartridge
may be fitted in place.

F-2-282

7) Close the toner cartridge access cover.

8) Close the front cover.

2.2.43 Mounting the Toner Cartridge

0017-2860

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

If the developing rotary fails to stop at an appropriate position and thus

prevents mounting of a toner cartridge, move it as follows before attempting
to set the toner cartridge:
1) Check to see that the screen indicates <READY>.
2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER > FUNCTION
> MISC-P > DEV-DR-Y/M/C/K (select the desired color).
3) Check to see that the message has changed from <SERVICE> to
<READY>; then, open the front cover and the toner cartridge access cover,
and mount the toner cartridge in question.

F-2-279

6-4) With the side of the toner cartridge indicating 2 arrows facing
upward, slide the cartridge in the direction of the arrow.

1) Take out the toner cartridge from its packaging bag.

2) When the host machine has completed its warm-up period, start service
mode.
3) Mount the yellow toner cartridge as follows:
3-1) Make the following selections: COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P >
DEV-DR-Y. Then, check to see that the screen indicates
<READY>, and press [OK]. Check to see that the developing
rotary moves to the point of replacement for the yellow toner
cartridge.

F-2-280

6-5) Turn the knob of the toner cartridge clockwise (from UNLOCK
position to LOCK position) until it stops.
F-2-283

3-2) Check to see that the screen indicates [OK!] and <READY>; then,
open the front cover and the toner cartridge access cover.
ck

Lo

lock

Un

F-2-281

OK!

After turning the toner cartridge knob, check to see that the triangle marking
of the toner cartridge knob is positioned against LOCK; otherwise, the machine can suffer leakage of toner.
F-2-284

3-3) Hold the toner cartridge as shown with both your hands, and move it
to and for about 5 times so as to turn over the toner inside it.

2-61

Chapter 2

F-2-285

[2]

[1]

When moving the toner cartridge, take care not to touch the shutter area or
turn the knob; otherwise, the toner may start to leak.

3-5) Turn the knob of the toner cartridge clockwise until it stops.

3-4) Keep the toner cartridge so that its side with 2 arrows face upward;
then, fit it into the host machine in the direction of the arrow.

F-2-287

F-2-286

When fitting the toner cartridge into the printer unit, be sure that the guide
[1] of the toner cartridge is inside the bend on the rail [2] of the rotary
assembly.
Check to be sure that the guide [1] of the toner cartridge has not ridden over
the rail [2] of the rotary when it is fitted into the printer unit; otherwise, the
host machine may suffer leakage of toner.

3-6) Close the toner cartridge access cover and the front cover.
4) Fit the magenta toner cartridge as follows:
4-1) Wait until the screen indicates <READY>.
4-2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER >
FUNCTION > MISC-P > DEV-DR-M. See that the developing
rotary moves to the point of replacement for the magenta toner
cartridge.
4-3) Check to see that the screen shows [OK!] and <READY>; then,
mount the magenta toner cartridge as you did the yellow toner
cartridge.
5) Mount the cyan toner cartridge as follows:
5-1) Wait until the screen indicates <READY>.
5-2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]; COPIER >
FUNCTION > MISC-P > DEV-DR-C. See that the developing
rotary moves to the point of replacement for the cyan toner
cartridge.
5-3) Check to see that the screen indicates [OK!] and <READY>; then,
mount the cyan toner cartridge as you did the yellow toner
cartridge.
6) Mount the black toner cartridge as follows:
MEMO:
You need not shake the black toner cartridge before mounting

6-1) Wait until the screen indicates <READY>.

6-2) Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER >
FUNCTION > MISC-P > DEV-DR-K. See that the developing
rotary moves to the point of replacement for the black toner
cartridge.
6-3) See that the screen indicates [OK!] and <READY>; then, open the
front cover and the toner cartridge access cover.

When the toner cartridge access cover is opened, the rotary [1] may not be
at the point of cartridge replacement; if such is the case, turn it
counterclockwise until the rotary is locked in position so that the black toner
cartridge may be fitted in place.

2-62

Chapter 2

()

(+)

0
2
4
6
8
10

6-4) With the side of the toner cartridge indicating 2 arrows facing
upward, slide the cartridge in the direction of the arrow.

2.51.5mm
F-2-290

- If the value for the cassette 1 or 2 is not as indicated, make the following
adjustments:
2) If a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1 is used, open its right door [1].
3) Open the lower right cover [2]; then, remove the 2 screws [3], and detach
the cover (lower front) [3].

F-2-288

6-5) Turn the knob of the toner cartridge clockwise (from UNLOCK
position to LOCK position) until it stops.

ck

Lo

[2]

lock

Un

[3]

[1]

F-2-291

F-2-289

4) Slide out the cassettes 1 and 2.

5) Check the index position [1] on the adjusting plate.
After turning the toner cartridge knob, check to see that the triangle marking
of the toner cartridge knob is positioned against LOCK; otherwise, the host
machine can suffer leakage of toner.

F-2-292

- Making Adjustments for the Cassette 1

6) Free the 2 claws [2], and pull the grip (right front) [1] in the direction of
the arrow to detach.
7) Close the toner cartridge access cover.
8) Close the front cover.

2.2.44 Adjusting the Image Position

0001-8326

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1. Adjusting the Margin (1st side; mechanical adjustment)
1) Make a copy using the cassettes 1 and 2 as the source of paper; then, check
to see that the margin on the front side is 2. +/-1.5 mm.

2-63

Chapter 2

()

(+)

0
2
4
6
8
10

F-2-293

2.52.0mm

7) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the adjusting plate [1].

8) By referring to the index you took note of in step 5), move the adjusting
plate back and forth. Moving it toward the rear of the machine will increase the margin on the image front.

F-2-296

2) If the margin is as indicated, change the adjustment value of the horizontal

registration for the 2nd side for the cassette 1.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C1RE
An increase by '1' will decrease the margin on the front side by 0.1 mm.
3) Enter the adjustment value for the horizontal registration of the 2nd side
for the cassette 1 as the adjustment value for the horizontal registration of
the 2nd side of the cassette 2.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C2RE
4) Make a copy using the cassette 2 as the source of paper; then, check to
make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 +/-2 mm.
5) If the value is not as indicated, change the adjustment value of the 2nd side
for the cassette 2.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C2RE
An increase by '1' (for DJ-C2RE) will decrease the horizontal registration
on the front side by 0.1 mm.
6) Record the new values on the service label.
- ADJ-C1RE
- ADJ-C2RE
7) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

F-2-294

9) Tighten the fixing screw.

10) Slide in the cassette 1.
11) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then, check to
see that the margin in the image front direction is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
12) Mount back the grip (front right).
13) Mount back the machine's front right cover.

3. Adjusting the Margin for the Manual Feed Tray (1st side; mechanical adjustment)
1) Place paper in the manual feed tray. For instructions, see the label attached
to the manual feed tray.
2) Make a copy using the manual feed tray as the source of paper; then, check
to make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

- Making Adjustments to the Cassette 2

6) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the adjusting plate [1].
7) By referring to the index you took note of in step 5), move the adjusting
plate back and forth. Moving it toward the rear of the machine will increase the margin on the image front side.

()

(+)

0
2
4
6
8
10

2.51.5mm
F-2-297

F-2-295

8) Tighten the fixing screw.

9) Slide back the cassette 2.
10) Make a copy using the cassette 2 as the source of paper; then, check to
see that the margin in the image front direction is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
11) Mount back the machine's right front cover.

2. Adjusting the Margin (2nd side)

1) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then, check to
make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.

2-64

- If the value is not as indicated, make the following adjustments:

3) Remove the paper from the manual feed tray.
4) Loosen the fixing screw [1] of the manual feed tray upper cover.
5) With reference to the value you took note of in step 2), move the manual
feed upper cover back and forth. Moving it toward the rear of the machine
will increase the margin on the front side.

Chapter 2
3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.
- REGIST

6. Adjusting the Margin Along the Leading Edge (2nd side)

- Make a double-sided copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then,
check to see if the margin along the image leading edge for the 2nd side
(L) is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm. If not, make adjustments as follows:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>RG-REFE.
2) Change the setting, and make adjustments. (A change of '1' will cause a
shift of 0.1 mm, with a higher setting moving the image toward the leading edge.)
L1

F-2-298

6) Tighten the fixing screw of the manual feed tray upper cover.
7) Place paper in the manual feed tray.
8) Make a copy; then, check to make sure that the margin on the image front
side is 2.0 +/-1.5 mm.

4. Adjusting the Margin (manual feed tray; 2nd side)

1) Make a double-sided copy using the manual feed tray as the source of paper; then, check to make sure that the margin on the front side for the 2nd
side is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.

()

(+)

Image

An increase in RG-REFE will shift

the image toward the leading edge of
paper (toward the trailing edge of feed).
F-2-301

3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.

- RG-REFE

0
2

7. Correcting the Shading Position

If the output image made in copyboard cover mode has a line, go through the
following:

1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S.

2) Change the setting to change the shading position:
- Try +5, +10, -5, or -10 to look for the best position (where the standard
white plate is free of scratches and dirt).

6
8
10

2.52.0mm
F-2-299

2) If the value is not as indicated, change the horizontal registration adjustment value for the 2nd side for the manual feed tray.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-MFRE
An increase by '1'(ADJ-MFRE) will decrease the margin on the front side
by 0.1 mm.
3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.
- ADJ-MFRE
4) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

5. Adjusting the Margin Along the Leading Edge (1st side)

- Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then, check to make
sure that the margin along the image leading edge (L1) is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
If not, make adjustments as follows:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST.
2) Change the setting to make adjustments. (A change of '1' will cause a shift
of 0.1 mm, with a higher value moving the image toward the leading
edge.)
L1

Image

An increase in REGIST will shift the image

toward the leading edge of the paper.

2.2.45 Making Initial Settings for the Developing

Assembly
0009-9476

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

If you want to use service mode from this point on, be sure to check to see
that the screen indicates <READY> before doing so.
1) Execute stirring of the developer.
- Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER > FUNCTION
> INSTALL > STIR-4.
- When done, the machine indicates [OK!]. (in about 2 min)
2) Make ATR initial settings.
- Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER > FUNCTION
> INSTALL > INIT-3.
- When done, the machine indicates [OK!]. (in about 40 sec)
3) Open the front cover.
4) Record the result of the following on the service label: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > IN-3. Be sure that the following 6 items have been
noted:
- for ADJ > DENS > REF-Y of the label, record the value of COPIER >
ADJUST > DENS > REF-Y.
- for ADJ > DNES > REF-M of the label, record the value of COPIER >
ADJUST > DENS > REF-M.
- for ADF > DENS > REF-C of the label, record the value of COPIER >
ADJUST > DENS > REF-C.
- for ADJ > DENS > SGNL-Y of the label, record the value of COPIER
> ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-Y.
- for ADJ > DENS > SGNL-M of the label, record the value of COPIER
> ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-M.
- for ADJ > DENS > SGNL-C of the label, record the value of COPIER
> ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-C.
5) Close the front cover.
6) Supply toner to the developing assembly.
- Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER > FUNCTION
> INSTALL > SPLY-H-4.
- When done, the machine indicates [OK!]. (in bout 1 min)

F-2-300

2-65

Chapter 2

2.2.46 Making Initial Settings for the Developing

Assembly
0017-2877

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

If you want to use service mode from this point on, be sure to check to see
that the screen indicates <READY> before doing so.

1) Execute stirring of the developer.

- Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER > FUNCTION
> INSTALL > STIR-4.
- When done, the host machine indicates [OK!]. (in about 2 min)
2) Make ATR initial settings.
- Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER > FUNCTION
> INSTALL > INIT-3.
- When done, the host machine indicates [OK!]. (in about 40 sec)
3) Open the front cover.
4) Record the result of the following on the service label: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INIT-3. Be sure that the following 6 items have been
noted:
- for ADJ > DENS > REF-Y of the label, record the value of COPIER >
ADJUST > DENS > REF-Y.
- for ADJ > DNES > REF-M of the label, record the value of COPIER >
ADJUST > DENS > REF-M.
- for ADF > DENS > REF-C of the label, record the value of COPIER >
ADJUST > DENS > REF-C.
- for ADJ > DENS > SGNL-Y of the label, record the value of COPIER
> ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-Y.
- for ADJ > DENS > SGNL-M of the label, record the value of COPIER
> ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-M.
- for ADJ > DENS > SGNL-C of the label, record the value of COPIER
> ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-C.
5) Close the front cover.
6) Supply toner to the developing assembly.
- Make the following selections, and press [OK]: COPIER > FUNCTION
> INSTALL > SPLY-H-4.
- When done, the host machine indicates [OK!]. (in bout 1 min)

2.2.47 Initializing the Drum Unit

0009-9482

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Initialize the drum unit by making the following selections and pressing
[OK]:
- COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > DRM-LIFE
The machine flashes [ACTIVE] on its screen while it executes
initialization, which takes about 1 min.

F-2-303

8) Close the front cover.

2.2.48 Initializing the Drum Unit

0017-2880

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Initialize the drum unit by making the following selections and pressing
[OK]:
- COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > DRM-LIFE
The host machine flashes [ACTIVE] on its screen while it executes
initialization, which takes about 1 min.

Do not press any of the keys, open the door, or turn off the power switch
while initialization is under way (while [ACTIVE] is flashing); otherwise,
go back to step 1) and start over.

2) When initialization is done, check to see that the value of the following is
'0%':
- COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > DRM-LIFE
Otherwise, go back to step 1) and start over.
3) Record the value of the following service mode item in the Remarks column of the drum counter label
- COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DR-I-INT
4) Exit service mode.
5) Record the date and the counter reading to the drum counter label.

F-2-304

Do not press any of the keys, open the door, or turn off the power switch
while initialization is under way (while [ACTIVE] is flashing); otherwise, go
back to step 1) and start over.

6) Open the front cover.

7) Attach the drum counter label [1] to the front of the drum unit.

2) When initialization is done, check to see that the value of the following is
'0%':
- COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > DRM-LIFE
Otherwise, go back to step 1) and start over.
3) Record the value of the following service mode item in the Remarks column of the drum counter label
- COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DR-I-INT
4) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.
5) Record the date and the counter reading to the drum counter label.

F-2-302

6) Open the front cover.

7) Attach the drum counter label [1] to the front of the drum unit.

F-2-305

8) Close the front cover.

2.2.49 Others
0004-7404

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1.Service Book Case
1) Peel off the double-sided adhesive tape from the ribbed side of the service
book case [1], and attach the case to the pedestal bottom plate.

2-66

Chapter 2

[1]

F-2-306

Areas to Avoid:
- inside the machine (i.e., behind the front cover)
- over the louver
- over the grip

F-2-309

2.2.50 Automatic Gradation Correction

Memo:
If no pedestal is used, attach the case to the left cover.

0009-9483

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

2. Touch Pen
1) Fit the touch pen [1] to the control panel.

If the machine is not equipped with a copyboard cover, fit the copyboard
cover to it. If you are installing a DADF, perform the steps up to A. "DADF"
under 2. "Installation" of the DADF-L1 Installation Procedure.

F-2-307

1) Clean the machine's copyboard glass.

2) Place A3, A4, 11X17, or LTR paper in the cassette. (See the instructions
on how to set up the cassette.)
3) Press the Additional Function key.
4) Make the following selections: adjust/clean > auto gradation correction >
full correction > test print 1.
- The test print 1 will be printed out.
5) Place the printout of the test print 1 on the copyboard glass as instructed
on the control panel screen.
6) Close the copyboard cover/ DADF.
7) Press [start to read].
- The machine reads the printout of the test print 1.
- When a message appears prompting you to remove the test print, remove
the printout of the test print 1 from the copyboard glass.
8) Press [test print 2].
- The machine prints out the test print 2.
9) Place the printout of the test print 2 on the copyboard glass as instructed
on the control panel scan.
10) Close the copyboard cover/ DADF.
11) Press [start to read].
- The machine reads the print out of the test print 2.
- When a message appears promoting you to remove the test print, remove
the printout of the test print 2 from the copyboard glass.
12) Press [test print 3].
- The machine prints the test print 3.
13) Place the printout of the test print 3 on the copyboard glass as instructed
on the control panel screen.
14) Close the copyboard cover/ DADF.
15) Press [start to read].
- The machine reads the printout of the test print 3.
- The machine issues a message to indicate that it has completed full
correction. In response, remove the printout of the test print 3 form the
copyboard glass.
16) Press the Reset key once to end user mode.

3. Lower Right Cover

1) Mount the lower right cover [1].
(Perform this step if you are installing the machine on a pedestal other
than a Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1.)

2.2.51 Automatic Gradation Correction

0017-2885

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-2-308

4. Do Not Copy Label

If the host machine is not equipped with a platen cover, fit the platen cover
to it. If you are installing a DADF, perform the steps up to A. "DADF"
under 2. "Installation" of the DADF Installation Procedure.

1) Select the Do Not Copy label [1] of the appropriate language, and attach
it to the reader cover (front) as indicated in the figure.
1) Clean the host machine's copyboard glass.
2) Place either of A3, A4, 11X17, or LTR paper in the cassette (See the instructions on cassette setting).
3) Make the following selections: Additional Functions key > [Adjustment/
cleaning] > [Auto Gradation Adjustment] > [Full Adjust] > [Test Print 1].
- The test print 1 will be printed out.
4) Place the printout of the test print 1 on the copyboard glass as instructed

2-67

Chapter 2
on the control panel screen.
5) Close the platen cover/ DADF.
6) Press [Start Scan].
- The host machine reads the printout of the test print 1.
- When a message appears prompting you to remove the test print, remove
the printout of the test print 1 from the copyboard glass.
7) Press [Test Print 2].
- The host machine prints out the test print 2.
8) Place the printout of the test print 2 on the copyboard glass as instructed
on the control panel scan.
9) Close the platen cover/ DADF.
10) Press [Start Scan].
- The host machine reads the print out of the test print 2.
- When a message appears promoting you to remove the test print, remove
the printout of the test print 2 from the copyboard glass.
11) Press [Test Print 3].
- The machine prints the test print 3.
12) Place the printout of the test print 3 on the copyboard glass as instructed
on the control panel screen.
13) Close the platen cover/ DADF.
14) Press [Start Scan].
- The host machine reads the printout of the test print 3.
- The host machine issues a message to indicate that it has completed full
correction. In response, remove the printout of the test print 3 form the
copyboard glass.
15) Exit from the Additional Functions screen.

F-2-312

- Making Adjustments for the Cassette 1

6) Free the 2 claws [1], and pull the grip (right front) [2] in the direction of
the arrow to detach.

2.2.52 Adjusting the Image Position

0009-9485

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1. Adjusting the Margin (1st side; mechanical adjustment)
1) Make a copy using the cassettes 1 and 2 as the source of paper; then, check
to see that the margin on the front side is 2. +/-1.5 mm.

()

(+)
F-2-313

7) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the adjusting plate [1].

8) By referring to the index you took note of in step 5), move the adjusting
plate back and forth. Moving it toward the rear of the machine will increase the margin on the image front.

0
2
4
6
8
10

2.51.5mm
F-2-310

- If the value for the cassette 1 or 2 is not as indicated, make the following
adjustments:
2) If a 2-Cassette Pedestal is used, open its right door [1].
3) Open the right cover (lower middle) [2]; then, remove the 2 screws [3],
and detach the right cover (lower front) [3].

F-2-314

9) Tighten the fixing screw.

10) Slide in the cassette 1.
11) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then, check to
see that the margin in the image front direction is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
12) Mount back the grip (front right).
13) Mount back the machine's right cover (lower front).
- Making Adjustments to the Cassette 2
6) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the adjusting plate [1].
7) By referring to the index you took note of in step 5), move the adjusting
plate back and forth. Moving it toward the rear of the machine will increase the margin on the image front side.
[2]
[3]
F-2-311

4) Slide out the cassettes 1 and 2.

5) Check the index position [1] on the adjusting plate.

2-68

[1]

Chapter 2

()

(+)

0
2
4
6
8
10
F-2-315

8) Tighten the fixing screw.

9) Slide back the cassette 2.
10) Make a copy using the cassette 2 as the source of paper; then, check to
see that the margin in the image front direction is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
11) Mount back the machine's right cover (lower front).
2. Adjusting the Margin (2nd side)
1) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then, check to
make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.

()

2.51.5mm
F-2-317

- If the value is not as indicated, make the following adjustments:

3) Remove the paper from the manual feed tray.
4) Loosen the 2 fixing screws [1] on the manual feed tray upper cover.
5) With reference to the value you took note of in step 2), move the manual
feed upper cover [2] back and forth. Moving it toward the rear of the machine will increase the margin on the front side.

(+)

0
2
4
6
8
10

F-2-318

2.52.0mm
F-2-316

2) If the margin is as indicated, change the adjustment value of the horizontal

registration for the 2nd side for the cassette 1.
- COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1RE
An increase by '1' will decrease the margin on the front side by 0.1
mm.
3) Enter the adjustment value for the horizontal registration of the 2nd side
for the cassette 1 as the adjustment value for the horizontal registration of
the 2nd side of the cassette 2.
- COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2RE
4) Make a copy using the cassette 2 as the source of paper; then, check to
make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 +/-2 mm.
5) If the value is not as indicated, change the adjustment value of the 2nd side
for the cassette 2.
- COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2RE
An increase by '1' (for DJ-C2RE) will decrease the horizontal
registration on the front side by 0.1 mm.
6) Record the new values on the service label.
- ADJ-C1RE
- ADJ-C2RE
7) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

6) Tighten the fixing screw of the manual feed tray upper cover.
7) Place paper in the manual feed tray.
8) Make a copy; then, check to make sure that the margin on the image front
side is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
4. Adjusting the Margin (manual feed tray; 2nd side)
1) Make a double-sided copy using the manual feed tray as the source of paper; then, check to make sure that the margin on the front side for the 2nd
side is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.

()

(+)

0
2
4
6

3. Adjusting the Margin for the Manual Feed Tray (1st side; mechanical
adjustment)
1) Place paper in the manual feed tray. For instructions, see the label attached
to the manual feed tray.
2) Make a copy using the manual feed tray as the source of paper; then, check
to make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

8
10

2.52.0mm
F-2-319

2) If the value is not as indicated, change the horizontal registration adjustment value for the 2nd side for the manual feed tray.
- COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-MFRE
An increase by '1'(ADJ-MFRE) will decrease the margin on the front
side by 0.1 mm.
3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.
- ADJ-MFRE
4) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.
5. Adjusting the Margin Along the Leading Edge (1st side)
- Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then, check to make
sure that the margin along the image leading edge (L1) is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

2-69

Chapter 2
If not, make adjustments as follows:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > ADJUST >
FEED-ADJ > REGIST.
2) Change the setting to make adjustments. (A change of '1' will cause a shift
of 0.1 mm, with a higher value moving the image toward the leading
edge.)

()

L1

(+)

0
2
4
6
8
10

Image

2.51.5mm
F-2-322

An increase in REGIST will shift the image

toward the leading edge of the paper.

<If the value for the cassette 1 or 2 is not as indicated, make the following
adjustments>
1) If a cassette pedestal is used, open its right door [1].
2) Open the right cover (lower middle) [2], and then detach the right cover
(lower front) [3].
- 2 screws [4]

F-2-320

3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.

- REGIST
6. Adjusting the Margin Along the Leading Edge (2nd side)
- Make a double-sided copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then,
check to see if the margin along the image leading edge for the 2nd side
(L) is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm. If not, make adjustments as follows:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > ADJUST >
FEED-ADJ > RG-REFE.
2) Change the setting, and make adjustments. (A change of '1' will cause a
shift of 0.1 mm, with a higher setting moving the image toward the leading edge.)

[2]

[1]

L1

[3]
[4]

F-2-323

Image

3) Slide out the cassettes 1 and 2.

4) Check the index position [1] on the adjusting plate.

An increase in RG-REFE will shift

the image toward the leading edge of
paper (toward the trailing edge of feed).
F-2-321

3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.

- RG-REFE
7. Correcting the Shading Position
If the output image made in copyboard cover mode has a line, go through the
following:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > ADJUST >
ADJ-XY > ADJ-S.
2) Change the setting to change the shading position:
- Try +5, +10, -5, or -10 to look for the best position (where the standard
white plate is free of scratches and dirt).

2.2.53 Adjusting the Image Position

F-2-324

<A. Making Adjustments for the Cassette 1>

A-1) Free the 2 claws [1], and pull the grip (right front) [2] in the direction
of the arrow to detach.

0017-2890

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1. Adjusting the Margin (1st side; mechanical adjustment)
1) Make a copy using the cassettes 1 and 2 as the source of paper; then, check
to see that the margin on the front side is 2. +/-1.5 mm.

F-2-325

A-2) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the adjusting plate [1].

2-70

Chapter 2
A-3) By referring to the index you took note of in step 4), move the adjusting
plate back and forth. Moving it toward the rear of the host machine
will increase the margin on the image front.

F-2-326

A-4) Tighten the fixing screw.

A-5) Slide in the cassette 1.
A-6) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then, check to
see that the margin in the image front direction is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
A-7) Mount back the grip (front right).
A-8) Mount back the host machine's right cover (lower front).
A-9) Close the right cover (lower middle) and the right door of the cassette
pedestal.
< B. Making Adjustments to the Cassette 2>
B-1) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the adjusting plate [1].
B-2) By referring to the index you took note of in step 4), move the adjusting
plate back and forth. Moving it toward the rear of the host machine
will increase the margin on the image front side.

registration for the 2nd side for the cassette 1.

- COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1RE
An increase by '1' will decrease the margin on the front side by 0.1 mm.
3) Enter the adjustment value for the horizontal registration of the 2nd side
for the cassette 1 as the adjustment value for the horizontal registration of
the 2nd side of the cassette 2.
- COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2RE
4) Make a copy using the cassette 2 as the source of paper; then, check to
make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.
5) If the value is not as indicated, change the adjustment value of the 2nd side
for the cassette 2.
- COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2RE
An increase by '1' (for DJ-C2RE) will decrease the horizontal
registration on the front side by 0.1 mm.
6) Record the new values on the service label.
- ADJ-C1RE
- ADJ-C2RE
7) Exit service mode.
3. Adjusting the Margin for the Manual Feed Tray (1st side; mechanical
adjustment)
1) Place paper in the manual feed tray. For instructions, see the label attached
to the manual feed tray.
2) Make a copy using the manual feed tray as the source of paper; then, check
to make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

()

(+)

0
2
4
6
8
10

2.51.5mm
F-2-329

<If the value is not as indicated, make the following adjustments>

3) Remove the paper from the manual feed tray.
4) Slide the side guide plate [1] in the direction of the arrow.

F-2-327

B-3) Tighten the fixing screw.

B-4) Slide back the cassette 2.
B-5) Make a copy using the cassette 2 as the source of paper; then, check to
see that the margin in the image front direction is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
B-6) Mount back the host machine's right cover (lower front).
B-7) Close the right cover (lower middle) and the right door of the cassette
pedestal.
2. Adjusting the Margin (2nd side)
1) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then, check to
make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.

()

[1]
F-2-330

5) Loosen the 2 fixing screws [1] on the manual feed tray upper cover.
6) With reference to the value you took note of in step 2), move the manual
feed upper cover [2] back and forth. Moving it toward the rear of the host
machine will increase the margin on the front side.

[1]

(+)

0
2
4
6

[2]
8
10

F-2-331

2.52.0mm
F-2-328

7) Tighten the fixing screw of the manual feed tray upper cover.
8) Place paper in the manual feed tray.
9) Make a copy; then, check to make sure that the margin on the image front
side is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

2) If the margin is as indicated, change the adjustment value of the horizontal

2-71

Chapter 2

4. Adjusting the Margin (manual feed tray; 2nd side)

1) Make a double-sided copy using the manual feed tray as the source of paper; then, check to make sure that the margin on the front side for the 2nd
side is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.

()

(+)

- An increase in RG-REFE will shift the image toward the leading edge
of paper (toward the trailing edge of feed).
3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.
- RG-REFE

0
2

7. Correcting the Shading Position

If the output image made in platen cover mode has a line, go through the following:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > ADJUST >
ADJ-XY > ADJ-S.
2) Change the setting to change the shading position:
- Try +5, +10, -5, or -10 to look for the best position (where the standard
white plate is free of scratches and dirt).

2.2.54 Attaching Other Parts

0009-9491

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1.Service Book Case

1) Peel off the double-sided adhesive tape from the ribbed side of the service
book case [1], and attach the case to the pedestal bottom plate.

8
10

2.52.0mm
F-2-332

2) If the value is not as indicated, change the horizontal registration adjustment value for the 2nd side for the manual feed tray.
- COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-MFRE
An increase by '1'(ADJ-MFRE) will decrease the margin on the front
side by 0.1 mm.
3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.
- ADJ-MFRE
4) Exit service mode.
5. Adjusting the Margin Along the Leading Edge (1st side)
Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then, check to
make sure that the margin along the image leading edge (L1) is 2.5 +/-1.5
mm. If not, make adjustments as follows:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > ADJUST >
FEED-ADJ > REGIST.
2) Change the setting to make adjustments. (A change of '1' will cause a shift
of 0.1 mm, with a higher value moving the image toward the leading
edge.)
L1

F-2-335

Areas to Avoid:
- inside the machine (i.e., behind the front cover)
- over the louver
- over the grip
MEMO:
If no pedestal is used, attach the case to the left cover.
3. Lower Right Cover
1) Fit the touch pen [1] to the control panel.

image

F-2-333

- An increase in REGIST will shift the image toward the leading edge of
the paper.
3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.
- REGIST
6. Adjusting the Margin Along the Leading Edge (2nd side)
Make a double-sided copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper;
then, check to see if the margin along the image leading edge for the 2nd
side (L) is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm. If not, make adjustments as follows:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > ADJUST >
FEED-ADJ > RG-REFE.
2) Change the setting, and make adjustments. (A change of '1' will cause a
shift of 0.1 mm, with a higher setting moving the image toward the leading edge.)
L1

image

F-2-334

2-72

F-2-336

3. Lower Right Cover

1) Mount the lower right cover [1].
(Perform this step if you are installing the machine on a pedestal other
than a Cassette Feeding Unit.)

Chapter 2

F-2-337

F-2-340

4. Do Not Copy Label

1) Select the Do Not Copy label [1] of the appropriate language, and attach
it to the reader cover (front) as indicated in the figure.
[1]

Do not attach the service book case to any of the following:

- inside the host machine (behind the front cover)
- area that covers the louver
- area that covers the grip portion

MEMO:
If no cassette pedestal is used, attach the book case to the left cover of the
host machine.

2. Touch Pen
1) Fit the touch pen [1] to the control panel.

F-2-338

5. Shut-Down Warning Label

1) Attach the Shut-Down warning label [1] of the appropriate language to the
right cover (rear) of the machine (i.e.,. on the left inside [2] of the main
power supply.).

[1]
F-2-341

3. Lower Right Cover (Lower)

1) Mount the lower right cover [1].
(Perform this step if you are installing the host machine on a cassette
pedestal other than a Cassette Feeding Unit.)

[2]

[1]
F-2-339

2.2.55 Attaching Other Parts

0017-2924

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1. Service Book Case
1) Peel off the double-sided adhesive tape from the rib area of the service
book case [1], and attach the case to the bottom plate of the cassette pedestal.
F-2-342

4. Do Not Copy Label

1) Select the Do Not Copy label [1] of the appropriate language, and attach
it to the reader cover (front) as indicated in the figure.

2-73

Chapter 2

[1]

F-2-343

5. Shut-Down Warning Label

1) Attach the Shut-Down warning label [1] of the appropriate language to the right cover (rear) of the machine (i.e.,. on the left inside [2] of the main power supply.).

[2]

[1]
F-2-344

2.2.56 When the Machine is Not Connecting to the Network

0005-3940

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
MEMO;
A message 'check the network connection' is displayed on the control panel
when the machine is not connecting to the network. Set the value to '0' to
hide.
Service Mode (level 2) to select the following: COPIER > OPTION >
BODY > NWERR-SW

2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network

2.3.1 Checking the Connection to the Network
0000-8240

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

Perform the following work only if the machine is equipped with printer functions:
If the user's network is in a TCP/IP environment, use the PING function to make sure that the Ethernet PCB has been installed properly and all network settings
have been made properly.
If the user's network is in an IPX/SPX or AppleTalk environment, this check is not needed.

2.3.2 Checking the Connection to the Network

0009-9495

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Perform the following work only if the machine is equipped with printer functions:
1) Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more
2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off.
3) Turn off the main power switch.
4) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on its main power switch.
5) Inform the system administrator of the site that the installation work is complete, and ask him/her to make network settings.

2-74

Chapter 2

You must select 'On' for the following user mode item before making network settings:
System Settings > Network Settings > Change Settings/Display Connection Confirm.
6) When network settings have appropriately been made, turn off and then back on the main power as described in steps 1) through 3) above so that the new settings
are valid.

2.3.3 Checking the Connection to the Network

0017-2939

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Perform the following work only if the machine is equipped with printer
functions:

1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off.
3) Turn off the main power switch.
4) Connect the network cable to the host machine, and turn on its main power switch.
5) Inform the system administrator of the site that the installation work is complete, and ask him/her to make network settings.

You must select 'On' for the following Additional Fanction item before
making network settings:
[System Settings] > [Network Settings] > [Change Settings/Display
Connection Confirm].

6) When network settings have appropriately been made, turn off and then back on the main power as described in steps 1) through 3) above so that the new settings
are valid.

2.3.4 Using PING

0009-9497

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to a network:

If the user's network environment is based on TCP/IP, use the PING function to see that the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A) has been correctly mounted
and the network settings have been correctly made. If the user's network environment is based on IPX/SPX or AppleTalk, on the other hand, you need not make a
PING-based check.
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > TEST > NETWORK > PING.
2) Enter the IP address using the keypad on the control panel, and press the OK key.
3) Press the Start key.
- If the PING check is successful, the machine will indicate 'OK'; otherwise, it will indicate 'NG'.

<READY >

< 1/1 >

<NETWORK>
PING

0.

0.

Result(OK/NG)

0.

IP address input

+/-

OK

F-2-345

2.3.5 Using PING

0017-2943

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to a

network:
If the user's network environment is based on TCP/IP, use the PING
function to see that the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A) has been
correctly mounted and the network settings have been correctly made. If the
user's network environment is based on IPX/SPX or AppleTalk, on the other
hand, you need not make a PING-based check.

1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > TEST > NETWORK > PING.

2-75

Chapter 2
2) Enter the IP address using the keypad on the control panel, and press the OK key.
3) Press the Start key.
- If the PING check is successful, the machine will indicate 'OK'; otherwise, it will indicate 'NG'.

Result(OK/NG)

<READY >

< 1/1 >

<NETWORK>
PING

0.

0.

0.

IP address input

+/-

OK

F-2-346

2.3.6 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address

0009-9499

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

You can execute PING using a remote host address, thereby checking the connection to the network.
The term "remote address" refers to the IP address of a PC terminal connected to and operating in a TCP/IP network environment to which the machine belongs.
1) Inform the system administrator that you will be checking the connection to the network using PING.
2) Check with the system administrator to find out the remote host address.
3) Enter the remote host address you obtained in PING.
4) If the indication is 'OK", the machine is correctly connected to the network.
5) If the indication is 'NG", the machine is not correctly connected to the network. Go through the following troubleshooting steps:

2.3.7 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address

0017-2944

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
You can execute PING using a remote host address, thereby checking the connection to the network.
The term "remote address" refers to the IP address of a PC terminal
connected to and operating in a TCP/IP network environment to which the
machine belongs.

1) Inform the system administrator that you will be checking the connection to the network using PING.
2) Check with the system administrator to find out the remote host address.
3) Enter the remote host address you obtained in PING.
4) If the indication is 'OK', the machine is correctly connected to the network.
5) If the indication is 'NG', the machine is not correctly connected to the network. Go through the following troubleshooting steps:

2.3.8 Using PING

0000-4373

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to a network:

If the user's network environment is based on TCP/IP, use the PING function to see that the Ethernet PCB has been correctly mounted and the network settings have
been correctly made. If the user's network environment is based on IPX/SPX or AppleTalk, on the other hand, you need not make a PING-based check.
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING.
2) Enter the IP address using the keypad on the control panel, and press the OK key.
3) Press the Start key.
- If the PING check is successful, the machine will indicate 'OK'; otherwise, it will indicate 'NG'.

<READY >

< 1/1 >

<NETWORK>
PING

0.

Result(OK/NG)

0.

0.

IP address input

+/-

OK

F-2-347

2.3.9 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address

0000-4374

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
You can execute PING using a remote host address, thereby checking the connection to the network.
The term "remote address" refers to the IP address of a PC terminal connected to and operating in a TCP/IP network environment to which the machine belongs.

2-76

Chapter 2
1) Inform the system administrator that you will be checking the connection to the network using PING.
2) Check with the system administrator to find out the remote host address.
3) Enter the remote host address you obtained in PING.
4) If the indication is 'OK", the machine is correctly connected to the network.
5) If the indication is 'NG", the machine is not correctly connected to the network. Go through the following troubleshooting steps:

2.4 Troubleshooting the Network

2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network
0000-4375

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to the network:
If the connection to the network is not correct, you may suspect the following:
a. poor connection between the network and the Ethernet PCB
b. wrong TCP/IP setting on the machine
c. faulty Ethernet PCB or poorly mounted PCB
d. faulty user network

2.4.2 Troubleshooting the Network

0009-9501

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to the network:
If the connection to the network is not correct, you may suspect the following:
a. poor connection between the network and the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A)
b. wrong TCP/IP setting on the machine
c. faulty main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A) or poorly mounted PCB
d. faulty user network

2.4.3 Troubleshooting the Network

0017-2945

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to the

network:

If the connection to the network is not correct, you may suspect the following:
a. poor connection between the network and the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A)
b. wrong TCP/IP setting on the machine
c. faulty main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A) or poorly mounted PCB
d. faulty user network

2.4.4 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address

0009-9503

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

A loopback address returns before it reaches the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A); therefore, executing PING using a loopback address will enable you to
find out whether the TCP/IP settings of the machine are correct.
1) Enter the loopback address (127.0.0.1) to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', check the TCP/IP settings of the machine once again, and then execute PING once again.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', check the local host address.

2.4.5 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address

0017-2946

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
A loopback address returns before it reaches the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A); therefore, executing PING using a loopback address will enable you to
find out whether the TCP/IP settings of the machine are correct.
1) Enter the loopback address (127.0.0.1) to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', check the TCP/IP settings of the machine once again, and then execute PING once again.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', check the local host address.

2.4.6 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address

0000-8237

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
A loopback address returns before it reaches the network PCB; therefore, executing PING using a loopback address will enable you to find out whether the TCP/
IP settings of the machine are correct.
1) Enter the loopback address (127.0.0.1) to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', check the TCP/IP settings of the machine once again, and then execute PING once again.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', check the local host address.

2.4.7 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address

0009-9504

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The local host address is the IP address of the machine; therefore, executing PING using the local host address, which returns after it has reached the main controller
PCB (sub LANBAR-A), enables you to find out if the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A) is good or not.
1) Enter the IP address of the machine to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', make the following checks/corrections, and execute PING once again.
a. faulty IP address of the machine: check with the system administrator to find out if the IP address (and its settings) assigned to the machine is correct.

2-77

Chapter 2
b. poor connection of the network PC: check the connectors associated with the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A).
c. faulty main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A): replace the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A).
- if the machine indicates 'OK', suspect a fault in the user's network environment. Report to the system administrator, ask for corrective action.

2.4.8 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address

0017-2947

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The local host address is the IP address of the machine; therefore, executing PING using the local host address, which returns after it has reached the main controller
PCB (sub LANBAR-A), enables you to find out if the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A) is good or not.
1) Enter the IP address of the machine to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', make the following checks/corrections, and execute PING once again.
a. faulty IP address of the machine: check with the system administrator to find out if the IP address (and its settings) assigned to the machine is correct.
b. poor connection of the network PC: check the connectors associated with the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A).
c. faulty main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A): replace the main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A).
- if the machine indicates 'OK', suspect a fault in the user's network environment. Report to the system administrator, ask for corrective action.

2.4.9 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address

0000-8238

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The local host address is the IP address of the machine; therefore, executing PING using the local host address, which returns after it has reached the network PCB,
enables you to find out if the network PCB is good or not.
1) Enter the IP address of the machine to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', make the following checks/corrections, and execute PING once again.
a. faulty IP address of the machine: check with the system administrator to find out if the IP address (and its settings) assigned to the machine is correct.
b. poor connection of the network PC: check the connectors associated with the network PCB.
c. faulty network PCB: replace the network PCB.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', suspect a fault in the user's network environment. Report to the system administrator, ask for corrective action.

2.5 Checking the Images/Operations

2.5.1 Checking the Images
0001-8222

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Place the test chart on the copyboard glass, and make copies using the individual cassettes as the source of paper. then, check the images.
- check to see that the machine does not produce any abnormal noise.
- check to see that the images are produced correctly at different magnifications.
- check to see that the machine produces as many copies as specified normally.
2) Make settings (Additional Function ; e.g., date, time) to suit the needs of the user.
3) Start service mode.
- press the Additional Function key, press the 2 and 8 keys at the same time, press the Additional Function key once gain.
4) Make the user-related settings to suit the needs of the user (COPIER>OPTION>USER).
5) Print out test prints in service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT).
6) Put away the printed test print [1] in the service book case.

F-2-348

7) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

8) Clean up the area around the machine, and fill out the service book.

2.5.2 Checking the Images

0017-2950

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Place the test chart on the copyboard glass, and make copies using the individual cassettes as the source of paper. then, check the images.
- check to see that the host machine does not produce any abnormal noise.
- check to see that the images are produced correctly at different magnifications.
- check to see that the machine produces as many copies as specified normally.
2) Make settings (Additional Function ; e.g., date, time) to suit the needs of the user.
3) Start service mode.
4) Make the user-related settings to suit the needs of the user (COPIER > OPTION > USER).
5) Print out test prints in service mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT).
6) Put away the printed test print [1] in the service book case.

2-78

Chapter 2

F-2-349

7) Exit service mode.

8) Clean up the area around the machine, and fill out the service book.

2.5.3 Checking the Images

0009-8688

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Place the test chart on the copyboard glass, and make copies using the individual cassettes as the source of paper. then, check the images.
- check to see that the machine does not produce any abnormal noise.
- check to see that the images are produced correctly at different magnifications.
- check to see that the machine produces as many copies as specified normally.
2) Make settings (Additional Function ; e.g., date, time) to suit the needs of the user.
3) Start service mode.
- press the Additional Function key, press the 2 and 8 keys at the same time, press the Additional Function key once gain.
4) Make the user-related settings to suit the needs of the user (COPIER > OPTION > USER).
5) Print out test prints in service mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT).
6) Put away the printed test print [1] in the service book case.

F-2-350

7) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

8) Clean up the area around the machine, and fill out the service book.

2.6 Relocating the Machine

2.6.1 Relocating the Machine
0001-7304

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
If you need to relocate the machine after installation by truck or other means of transportation, be sure to perform the following work in advance:
If you want to move the machine intact with its pedestal, be sure not to use the machine's grips; otherwise, the machine will come off the pedestal as when it is
moved over a step. Be sure to lift the pedestal.
1) Fix the scanner in place using the scanner fixing screw [1] that has been set aside from the time of installation.

F-2-351

2) Put paper on the copyboard glass.

2-79

Chapter 2
3) Remove all toner cartridges and developing assembly so that the developing rotary will not rotate in response to vibration occurring in transit.

2.6.2 Relocating the Machine

0017-2951

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
If you need to relocate the host machine after installation by truck or other means of transportation, be sure to perform the following work in advance:

If you want to move the host machine intact with its cassette pedestal, be
sure not to use the host machine's grips; otherwise, the host machine will
come off the cassette pedestal as when it is moved over a step. Be sure to
lift the cassette pedestal.

1) Fix the scanner in place using the scanner fixing screw [1] that has been set aside from the time of installation.

F-2-352

2) Put paper on the copyboard glass.

3) Remove all toner cartridges and developing assembly so that the developing rotary will not rotate in response to vibration occurring in transit.

2.6.3 Relocating the Machine

0009-8690

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

If you need to relocate the machine after installation by truck or other means of transportation, be sure to perform the following work in advance:

If you want to move the machine intact with its pedestal, be sure not to use the machine's grips; otherwise, the machine will come off the pedestal as when it is
moved over a step. Be sure to lift the pedestal.
1) Fix the scanner in place using the scanner fixing screw [1] that has been set aside from the time of installation.

F-2-353

2) Put paper on the copyboard glass.

3) Remove all toner cartridges and developing assembly so that the developing rotary will not rotate in response to vibration occurring in transit.

2.7 Installing the Copy Tray

2.7.1 Points to Note at Installation
0017-3076

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Be sure to check if the Finisher P1 or the Inner 2 Way Tray C1 has been
installed before starting to install this tray.

2.7.2 Checking the Contents

0017-3078

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
<Copy Tray-J1>

2-80

Chapter 2

[1]

F-2-354
[1]

Delivery tray

1 pc.

2.7.3 Turning Off the Host Machine

0017-3079

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

How to Turn Off the Main Power

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following steps
to protect the hard disk:
1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2) Follow the instructions on the shutdown sequence screen to let the main
power switch be ready to turn off.
3) Turn off the power switch.
4) Disconnect the power plug.

2.7.4 Installation Procedure

0017-3080

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Release the 2 claws [1] of the delivery cover with a flat-blade screwdrivers to detach the delivery cover [2] (be sure to keep the detached delivery cover).

[2]

[1]

F-2-355

2) Fitting the 2 protrusions [1] at the both edges of the tray to the holes, attach the tray [2].

[1]

[1]

[2]

F-2-356

3) Connect the power plug to the outlet.

4) Turn on the main power switch.
5) Check that the host machine status is in stand-by mode before entering the service mode.
6) Select the followings to register '1': COPIER > OPTION > ACC > OUT-TRAY

2-81

Chapter 2
7) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch according to the shutdown sequence.
8) Check to see the following menu items are added: Additional Functions key > [Common Settings] > [Delivery Tray Setting]
9) Select either tray B or C to copy, and perform test copy.
10) Check to see that the copy is delivered to the copy tray.
11) According to user's request, reset the tray.

2.8 Installing the Card Reader

2.8.1 Points to Note
0001-2860

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

You will need a Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1 to install the Card Reader-C1.

2.8.2 Points to Note

0009-8692

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

You will need a Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1 to install the Card Reader-C1.

2.8.3 Checking the Contents

0001-2898

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Card Reader-C1>
[1] Card Reader-C1
1 pc
[2] Screw (RS tightening; M4x10) 1 pc.
[3] Toothed washer
1 pc.
[1]

[2]

[3]

F-2-357

<Card Reader Mounting Kit-B>

[1] Card reader base 1 pc.
[2] Relay harness
1 pc.
[3] TP screw (M4x25) 1 pc.
[4] TP screw (M4x8) 1 pc.
[5] Toothed washer 2 pc.

F-2-358

2.8.4 Checking the Contents

0009-8693

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Card Reader-C1>
[1] Card Reader-C1
1 pc
[2] Screw (RS tightening; M4X10) 1 pc.

2-82

Chapter 2
[3] Toothed washer

1 pc.
[1]

[2]

[3]

F-2-359

<Card Reader Mounting Kit-B>

[1] Card reader base 1 pc.
[2] Relay harness
1 pc.
[3] TP screw (M4X25) 1 pc.
[4] TP screw (M4X8) 1 pc.
[5] Toothed washer 2 pc.

F-2-360

2.8.5 Installation
0001-2930

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

When you have installed the Card Reader-C1, enter the numbers of the cards to be used in service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD); otherwise, the reader will not recognize cards upon insertion.
1) Turn off the control panel power switch.
2) Turn off the main power switch.
3) Disconnect the power cable (from the power outlet) [3].

ON

/O

FF

[1] OFF

[2] OFF

[3] Disconnect.

F-2-361

2-83

Chapter 2
4) Disconnect the reader power cable [1].
5) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the rear right cover [3].

F-2-362

6) Remove the face plate [2] of the rear right cover using nippers or the like.

F-2-363

7) Connect the relay cable [1] to the machines' connector assembly.

F-2-364

8) Mount the rear right cover using 4 screws.

9) Mount the card Reader-C1 [1] and the card reader base [2] using the included TP screw (M4x8) [4] together with its washer [3].

F-2-365

10) Route the relay cable [2] through the wire saddle.

2-84

Chapter 2

F-2-366

11) Connect the machine's cable [1] to the relay cable [2] of the Card Reader-C1.
[1]

[2]

F-2-367

12) Taking care so that that the harness will not be trapped, mount the card Reader-C1 [1] using a TP screw (M4x25) [3] together with its washer [2].

F-2-368

13) Connect the power cable to the power outlet, and turn on the power. Check to see that the machine has entered a standby state, and start service mode.
14) Enter the numbers of the cards to be used in service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD).
- Enter the lowest number of the card numbers the user is planning to use.
- As many as 1000 cards may be used (starting with the number you have entered).
15) Turn off the control panel power switch.
16) Turn off and then on the main power switch.

2.8.6 Installation
0009-8695

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

When you have installed the Card Reader-C1, enter the numbers of the cards to be used in service mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD); otherwise,
the reader will not recognize cards upon insertion.

Turning Off the Main Power

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the shut-down sequence. When ready, turn the power back on.
1) Disconnect the reader power cable [1].
2) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the rear right cover [3].

2-85

Chapter 2

F-2-369

3) Remove the face plate [2] of the rear right cover using nippers or the like.

F-2-370

4) Connect the relay cable [1] to the machines' connector assembly [2].

F-2-371

5) Mount the rear right cover using 4 screws.

6) Mount the card Reader-C1 [1] and the card reader base [2] using the included TP screw (M4X8) [4] together with its washer [3].

F-2-372

7) Route the relay cable [2] through the wire saddle [1].

2-86

Chapter 2

F-2-373

8) Connect the machine's cable [1] to the relay cable [2] of the Card Reader-C1.
[1]

[2]

F-2-374

9) Taking care so that that the harness will not be trapped, mount the card Reader-C1 [1] using a TP screw (M4X25) [3] together with its washer [2].

F-2-375

10) Connect the power cable to the power outlet, and turn on the power. Check to see that the machine has entered a standby state, and start service mode.
11) Enter the numbers of the cards to be used in service mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD).
- Enter the lowest number of the card numbers the user is planning to use.
- As many as 1000 cards may be used (starting with the number you have entered).
12) Go through the shut-down sequence to turn off the main power switch; then, turn it back on.

2.8.7 Using with NetSpot Accountant (NSA)

0001-9160

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control settings>group ID control>count control; then, check to see IDs 00000001 thorough
00001000 have been created (i.e., if you entered '1' as the first number in service mode): COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD).
2) Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control settings>network settings>TCP/IP settings>IP address; then set up the following: IP address, gateway address, subnet mask.
Take care. If you fail to register [system control group] and [system control ID No.], you will not be able to perform 'register card to device' as part of NSA
setup work.
3) Under [system administrator info] of Additional Function, enter any number for [system control group] and [system control ID No.].
4) Turn off the control panel switch.
5) Turn off and then on the main power switch.

2.8.8 Points to Note at Installation

0017-2954

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

2-87

Chapter 2

To install the card reader-C1, the card reader mounting kit-B1 is necessary.

2.8.9 Checking the Contents

0017-2957

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
<Card Reader-C1>
[2]

[3]

[1]

F-2-376
[1]

Card reader

[2]*

Screw (RS tightening; M4X10)

1 pc.
1 pc.

[3]*

Toothed washer

1 pc.

* not used in this machine.

<Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1>

[1]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[4]

F-2-377
[1]

Card reader base plate

1 pc.

[2]

Relay harness

1 pc.

[3]

Screw (TP; M4X25)

1 pc.

[4]

Screw (TP; M4X8)

1 pc.

[5]

Toothed washer

2 pc.

2.8.10 Turning Off the Host Machine

0017-2962

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

2-88

Chapter 2

How to Turn Off the Main Power

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following steps
to protect the hard disk:
1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2) Follow the instructions on the shutdown sequence screen to let the main
power switch be ready to turn off.
3) Turn off the power switch.
4) Disconnect the power plug.

2.8.11 Installation Procedure

0017-2959

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

When you have installed the Card Reader-C1, enter the numbers of the cards
to be used in service mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD);
otherwise, the reader will not recognize cards upon insertion.

1) Disconnect the reader power cable [1].

2) Detach the rear right cover [2].
- 4 screws [3]

F-2-378

3) Remove the blanking area [2] of the rear right cover [1] using nippers or the like.
[2]

[1]

F-2-379

4) Connect the relay cable [1] to the connector area [2] of the host machine.

F-2-380

5) Mount the rear right cover.

6) Mount the card reader [1] and the card reader base [2].
- 1 toothed washer [3]
- 1 screw (TP; M4X8) [4]

2-89

Chapter 2

F-2-381

7) Fix the relay cable [1] of the card reader in place.

- 1 edge saddle [2]
- 1 wire saddle [3]

[2]
[1]
[3]

F-2-382

8) Connect the relay cable [1] that is connected in the step 4) with the relay cable [2] of the card reader.

[1]

[2]
F-2-383

9) Fit the 2 bosses [1] to attach the card reader [2].

- 1 toothed washer [3]
- 1 screw (TP; M4X25) [4]

Take care not to nip the harness.

2-90

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

F-2-384

10) Connect the power plug to the outlet.

11) Turn on the main power switch.
12) Enter the card number (1 through 2001) to use by selecting the following in service mode of host machine:
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD
- Enter the smallest number among the cards used by user
- 1000 cards from the input number are usable
12) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch according to the shutdown sequence.
16) Insert the usable card (that is registered to use) to check that it is standby state.

2.8.12 Installation Procedure in the imageWARE Accounting Manager (hereinafter referred to iWAM) Environment
0017-3113

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Check to see that 'ID00000001 to ID00001000' have been created in Additional Functions key > [System Settings] > [Dept. ID Management] > [Register Dept.
ID/Password] / [Page Totals]' (In the case of entering '1' as the first number in 'Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD')
2) Press Reset key to exit from Additional Functions.
3) Select: Additional Functions key > [System Settings] > [Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] > [IP Address Settings], and make settings of
[IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Gateway Address] suitable for the user's environment.
4) Press Reset key to exit from Additional Functions screen.
5)

Be sure that without selecting: Additional Functions key > [System

Settings] > [System Manager Settings] and then registering [System
Manager ID] and [System Password], 'Card Registration to the Device'
cannot be executed in the iWAM settings.

Select: Additional Functions key > [System Settings] > [System Manager Settings], and then enter given numbers for [System Manager ID] and [System
Password].
6) Press Reset key to exit from Additional Functions screen.
7) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch according to the shutdown sequence.

2.9 Installing the NE Controller-A1

2.9.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1
0001-2145

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
If you want to install an NE controller-A1 to the machine, be sure to observe the following:
1. follow the laws and regulations of the country in question.
2. check to see that the host machine has properly been installed.
3. check to see that the host machine's power plug is disconnected.
4. identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
5. prepare the unit setup data on the PC at the service station.
1) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the upper cover [1] of the unit.

2-91

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[2]

F-2-385

2) Connect the connector [3] of the power supply to the connector [4] of the unit.
[4]

[3]

F-2-386

3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the face plate [2] of the host machine's upper cover.

F-2-387

4) Remove the wire saddle [3], and detach the cable [4] of the unit.

F-2-388

5) Connect the cable [5] of the unit to the connector [6] of the host machine's DC controller.

2-92

Chapter 2

F-2-389

6) Fix the unit [7] in place to the host machine's rear cover using 4 screws [8]. (Use the screws that come with the unit.)

F-2-390

7) Remove the slack from the cable lying between the host machine and the unit; bundle the excess length of cable, and fix it in place using the harness band [9].

[1]

F-2-391

8) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch [10] on the PCB to ON (SW2-4 so that the communication between the unit and the host machine will be in IPC mode).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[10]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

BAT1

SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW4
2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-392

9) If IC6 [11] is found on the PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch [12] (SW2-7) to ON; otherwise, shift it to OFF.

2-93

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Chapter 2

[12]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

6
BAT1
1

SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW4
2
IC6

CN4

[11]

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-393

If IC6 [11] is not found, there is no need to mount one.

If you are mounting a ROM (IC6) [11] for upgrading the unit or replacing the ROM, be sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch [12] to ON (SW2-7).
10) Set the bits of the DIP switch [13] (SW3) on the PCB as indicated:

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[13]

6
BAT1
1

SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW4
2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-394

T-2-22
Notation

SW3-1

Setting

see right

SW3-2

SW3-1

SW3-2

Description

OFF

OFF

set the modem signal transmission level to -16 dBm.

ON

OFF

set the modem signal transmission level to -14 dBm.

OFF

ON

set the modem signal transmission level to -12 dBm.

ON

ON

set the modem signal transmission level to -10 dBm.

SW3-3

OFF

set to OFF at all times.

SW3-4

ON

set the line of the unit to push pulse.

OFF

set the line of the unit to dial pulse.

ON

set the dial pulse speed to 20 PPS.

SW3-5

OFF
SW3-6

set the dial pulse speed to 10 PPS.

not used

11) Connect the power supply to the power plug; then, check to see that LED1 [14] on the PCB (green) comes on.

2-94

Chapter 2

[14]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-395

12) Initialize the RAM of the unit.

See the bits of the DIP switch [15] (SW2) of the PCB as indicated; then, press the push switch [16] (SW4) so that LED5 [17] (red) goes on.
T-2-23
bits of SW2

Setting

SW2-1

OFF

SW2-2

OFF

SW2-3

ON

SW2-4

ON

SW2-5
SW2-6

OFF

SW2-7

See step 9).

SW2-8

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[15]

OFF

[17]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6
BAT1
1

SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW4

[16]

IC6

2
CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-396

13) When LED5 [17] (red) has come on, set the bits of the DIP switch [15] (SW2) on the PCB as indicated, and press the push switch [16] (SW4) so that LED5
[17] (red) goes off to indicate that RAM has been initialized.
T-2-24
bits of SW2

Setting

SW2-1

OFF

SW2-2

OFF

2-95

Chapter 2
bits of SW2

Setting

SW2-3

OFF

SW2-4

ON

SW2-5
SW2-6

ON

SW2-7

See step 9).

SW-8

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[15]

OFF

[17]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2

BAT1

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3

SW2
SW4

[16]

IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-397

14) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch [18] (SW2-6) on the PCB to OFF.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[18]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

BAT1

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3

SW2
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-398

15) Connect the telephone line to the unit.

If the unit is to be used on its own, connect the modular jack cable to the connector [19] (LINE) of the unit.
If the extension function of the unit is to be used, connect the existing telephone or fax to the connector [20] (TEL) of the unit, and connect the telephone line
to the other connector [19] (LINE) of the unit.

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1
SW3

SW4
2

IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

[20] [19]
F-2-399

2-96

Chapter 2

16) Call the service station, and ask for initial setup work for the unit. (In response to an incoming call, LED4 (red) [21] of the unit will come on.)
LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

[21]
CN3

CN2

F-2-400

17) Call the service station, and check to find out if the initial setup work for the unit has ended. If the work failed, go back to RAM initialization, and go through
steps 11) through 13).

Be sure to find out if the settings of the unit are correct by contacting the service station.

18) Check to find out if a call may be placed using the unit to the PC located at the service station.
Press the push switch [16] (SW4) of the PCB. In response, LED6 [22] (red) will go on; it goes off when the transmission is done, and starts to flash if it fails.
A press on the push switch (SW4) [16] while LED6 [22] is flashing will initiate transmission for a second time.
A press on the push switch (SW1) [23] while LED6 [22] is flashing will cancel the ongoing transmission by the unit.
LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

[22]

SW3
SW4

[16]

IC6

SW1

CN4

[23]
CN3

CN2

F-2-401

19) Check to see that the communication between the unit and its host machine is normal.
Connect the host machine's power plug, and turn on the power switch; then, see that LED2 [2] (orange) flashes.
[24]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1
SW3

SW4
2

IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-402

20) Press the host machine's Start key, and check to see that LED3 [25] (pink) flashes each time delivery takes place.

2-97

Chapter 2

[25]

LED1 LED2 LED3

2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW3
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

F-2-403

21) Attach the Switch Settings label [26] to the upper cover; then, record the individual switch settings.
22) Mount the upper cover [1] in place with 2 screws [2]. When doing so, be sure that heat cable of the power supply is secured by the cable guide inside and is not
trapped by the upper cover [1].
[2]
[26]
[1]
[2]

F-2-404

2.9.2 Installing the NE Controller-A1

0009-8697

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The following are installation steps specific to iR C2570/C3170 series.

Refer to the Installation Manual included with the NE controller-A1 for various settings, operations check, and points to note.
1) Remove the upper cover of the controller (refer to the Installation Manual).
2) Connect the AC adapter plug to the controller (refer to the Installation Manual).
3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the blanking plate [2] of the rear upper cover.

[2]
F-2-405

4) Remove the wire saddle [1], and detach the cable [2] of the unit.

2-98

[1]

Chapter 2

F-2-406

5) Draw out the cable [1] for the controller, and connect it to the controller cable [2].

[1]
[2]

F-2-407

6) Attach the controller [1] to the rear upper cover with the 4 screws [2]. (Use the screws included with the NE controller-A1.)

[1]

[2]

F-2-408

7) Take up the slack from the cable connecting the host machine and the controller; bundle the excess length on the controller side, and fix it in place using a harness
guide [1].

[1]

F-2-409

8) Refer to the Installation Manual for the NE controller-A1, and make various settings and check operations.

2.10 Installing the Original Tray

2.10.1 Checking the Contents
0017-3114

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
<Document Tray-J1>

2-99

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

F-2-410
[1]

Document Tray

1 pc.

[2]*

washer

2 pc.

[3]

stepped screw (RS tightening)

2 pc.

[4]*

stepped screw (M4)

2 pc.

* do not use with the host machine.

2.10.2 Installation Procedure

0017-3115

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the 2 face seals [1].
[1]

F-2-411

2) Tighten 2 stepped screws (RS tightening) [1] to the upper right cover of the host machine.
A: In the case that the card reader is not attached to the host machine
[1]

F-2-412

B: In the case that the card reader is attached to the host machine

2-100

Chapter 2

[1]

F-2-413

3) Set the cut-offs [2] of the support plate on the Document Tray [1] with the stepped screws [3].
[1]

[3]

[2]

[2]
F-2-414

2.11 Installing the Key Switch Unit

2.11.1 Checking the Contents
0000-8761

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
Key Switch Unit-A1
[1] Key Switch Unit
1 PC.
[2] Control key
1 pc.
[3] Binding screw (M4x6) 1 pc.

2.11.2 Checking the Contents

0009-8699

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Key Switch Unit-A1
[1] Key Switch Unit
1 PC.
[2] Control key
1 pc.
[3] Binding screw (M4X6) 1 pc.
[1]

[2]

[3]

F-2-415

2.11.3 Installation
0000-8762

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

Before stating the work, be sure to go through the following on the host machine in strict order:
1. turn off the control panel power switch.
2. turn off the main power switch.
3. disconnect the power cable (from the power outlet).

2-101

Chapter 2

ON

/O

FF

[1] OFF

[3] Disconnect.

[2] OFF

F-2-416

1) Remove the 3 wire saddles [1].

2) Disconnect the connector [2], and detach the reader communication cable [3].

F-2-417

3) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2].
[2]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

F-2-418

4) Disconnect the reader power cable [1].

5) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the rear right cover [3].

2-102

Chapter 2

F-2-419

6) Remove the screw [2], and detach the bracket [1] from the key switch.

F-2-420

7) Mount the key switch unit [2] to the key switch breaker [1] using the included screw [3] (M4x6).

F-2-421

8) Mount the key switch bracket [1] with a screw [2].

F-2-422

9) Connect the connector [1] of the key switch unit.

2-103

Chapter 2

F-2-423

10) Remove the face plate [2] from the rear right cover [1] using nippers.

F-2-424

11) Mount the rear cover of the host machine using 9 screws.
12) Mount the rear right cover using 4 screws.
13) Fit the reader communications cable.
14) Fit the reader power cable.
15) Fit the power cable (for the power outlet).
16) Turn on the main power switch.

2.11.4 Installation
0009-8700

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Turning Off the Main Power

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the shut-down sequence. When ready, turn the power back on.
1) Remove the wire saddle [1].
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [2] of the reader unit communications cable.
[2]

[1]
F-2-425

3) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2].

2-104

[2]

Chapter 2

[2]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
F-2-426

4) Disconnect the reader power cable [1].

5) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the rear right cover [3].

F-2-427

6) Remove the screw [2], and detach the bracket [1] from the key switch.

F-2-428

7) Mount the key switch unit [2] to the key switch breaker [1] using the included screw [3] (M4X6).

F-2-429

8) Mount the key switch bracket [1] with a screw [2].

2-105

Chapter 2

F-2-430

9) Connect the connector of the key switch unit and the connector [1] of the engine side.

F-2-431

10) Remove the face plate [2] from the rear right cover [1] using nippers.

F-2-432

11) Mount the rear cover of the host machine using 9 screws.
12) Mount the rear right cover using 4 screws.
13) Fit the reader communications cable.
14) Fit the reader power cable.
15) Fit the power cable (for the power outlet).
16) Turn on the main power switch.

2.11.5 Making Checks After Installation

0000-8764

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Start service mode.
2) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>KEY.
3) Turn off the control panel power switch.
4) Turn off and then on the main power.
5) Check to see that the message "set the control key" has appeared.
6) Fit the key to the key switch unit.

2.11.6 Making Checks After Installation

0009-8701

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Start service mode.
2) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > KEY.
3) Go through the shut-down sequence to turn off the main power; thereafter, turn it back on.
4) Check to see that the message "set the control key" has appeared.
5) Fit the key into the key switch unit.

2.11.7 Checking the Contents

0017-2970

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
<Key Switch Unit-A2>

2-106

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[3]

F-2-433
[1]

Key switch unit

1 pc.

[2]

Control key

1 pc.

[3]

Screw (binding; M4X6)

1 pc.

2.11.8 Turning Off the Host Machine

0017-2971

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

How to Turn Off the Main Power

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following steps
to protect the hard disk:
1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2) Follow the instructions on the shutdown sequence screen to let the main
power switch be ready to turn off.
3) Turn off the power switch.
4) Disconnect the power plug.

2.11.9 Installation Procedure

0017-2973

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Free the reader power cable [2] from the wire saddle [1].
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [3] of the reader communication cable.
[3]

[2]
[1]

[3]

F-2-434

3) Detach the rear cover [1].

- 9 screws [2]

2-107

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]
[2]

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-2-435

4) Detach the reader power cable [1].

5) Detach the right rear cover [2].
- 4 screws [3]

F-2-436

6) Detach the key switch bracket [1].

- 1 screw [2]

[1]

[2]

F-2-437

7) Fix the key switch unit [2] to the key switch bracket [1].
- 1 screw (binding; M4X6) [3]

[2]

[1]
[3]
F-2-438

8) Fix the key switch bracket [1].

- 1 screw [2] (Screw removed in the step 6))

2-108

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

F-2-439

9) Connect the connector [1] of the key switch unit to the connector [2] of the host machine.

F-2-440

10) Remove the blanking area [2] of the right rear cover [1] with nippers.
[2]

[1]

F-2-441

11) Attach the right rear cover.

12) Attach the rear cover.
13) Connect the reader communication cable.
14) Connect the reader power cable.
15) Secure the reader power cable with the wire saddle.
16) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
17) Turn on the main power switch.

2.11.10 Checking After Installation

0017-2974

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Enter the service mode.
2) Select COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > KEY, register '1'.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch according to the shutdown sequence.
4) Check the display 'Please set the control key'.
5) Insert the key into the key switch unit and rotate it, check if the display in the step 4) disappears.

2.12 Installing the Reader Heater

2.12.1 Checking the Contents
0000-9880

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

2-109

Chapter 2

F-2-442
T-2-25
[1]

Reader Heater

2 pc.

[2]

Clamp

3 pc.

[3]

Screw (BindingG M4X6)

2 pc.

2.12.2 Checking the Contents

0009-8702

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

2-110

Chapter 2

F-2-443
T-2-26
[1]

Reader Heater

2 pc.

[2]

Clamp

3 pc.

[3]

Screw (BindingG M4X6)

2 pc.

2.12.3 Installation
0000-9957

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

Thee are 2 locations for the heaters. Any of the 2 heaters may be used for any of the locations.

Before starting the work, be sure to go through the following on the host machine in strict order:
1. turn off the control panel power switch.
2. turn off the main power switch.
3. disconnect the power cable (from the power outlet).

2-111

Chapter 2

ON

/O

FF

[1] OFF

[2] OFF

[3] Disconnect.

F-2-444

1) Open the copyboard cover/ADF.

2) Remove the 2 screws, and detach the glass retainer (right) [2].
3) Remove the copyboard glass (for copyboard cover) [3].
4) Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the glass retainer (left) [5].
5) Remove the copyboard glass (for ADF) [6].

F-2-445

When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the glass surface and the white plate on its back. (The presence of dirt will cause a black line in the
images.)
6) Mount the clamp [1].
7) Fix the heater [3] in place using a screw [2].
8) Fit the connector [4] of the heater, and fix the harness of the heater in place using the clamp [1].

2-112

Chapter 2

F-2-446

Points to Note When Routing the Harness

Check to see that the harness [1] is in contact with the reader base plate.
If not, hold the harness [1] down with your hand to keep it in contact with the reader base plate.

F-2-447

9) Pull the drive belt (front side) [1] to the right to move the contact sensor unit [2] to the center.

F-2-448

10) Peel off the protective sheet [1], and fit the 2 clamps [2]. (Keep the protective sheet peeled until step 12).)
11) Fix the heater [4] in place using a screw [3].
12) Fit the connector [5] of the heater in place, and fit the harness of the heater to the clamp [2].

2-113

Chapter 2

F-2-449

13) Put back the protective sheet.

14) Mount the copyboard glass (for DF) and the copyboard glass (for copyboard cover).
15) Mount the glass retainer (let, right) using 2 screws each.
16) Connect the power cable.

2.12.4 Installation
0009-8703

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Thee are 2 locations for the heaters. Any of the 2 heaters may be used for any of the locations.

To operate the reader heater, a Heater PCB-C1 must first be installed.

Turning Off the Main Power

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the shut-down sequence. When ready, turn the power back on.
1) Open the copyboard cover/ADF.
2) Remove the 2 screws, and detach the glass retainer (right) [2].
3) Remove the copyboard glass (for copyboard cover) [3].
4) Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the glass retainer (left) [5].
5) Remove the copyboard glass (for ADF) [6].

F-2-450

When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the glass surface and the white plate on its back. (The presence of dirt will cause a black line in the
images.)
6) Mount the clamp [1].
7) Fix the heater [3] in place using a screw [2].
8) Fit the connector [4] of the heater, and fix the harness of the heater in place using the clamp [1].

2-114

Chapter 2

F-2-451

Points to Note When Routing the Harness

Check to see that the harness [1] is in contact with the reader base plate.
If not, hold the harness [1] down with your hand to keep it in contact with the reader base plate.

F-2-452

9) Pull the drive belt (front side) [1] to the right to move the contact sensor unit [2] to the center.

F-2-453

10) Peel off the protective sheet [1], and fit the 2 clamps [2]. (Keep the protective sheet peeled until step 12).)
11) Fix the heater [4] in place using a screw [3].
12) Fit the connector [5] of the heater in place, and fit the harness of the heater to the clamp [2].

2-115

Chapter 2

F-2-454

13) Put back the protective sheet.

14) Mount the copyboard glass (for DF) and the copyboard glass (for copyboard cover).
15) Mount the glass retainer (let, right) using 2 screws each.
16) Connect the power cable.

2.12.5 Checking the Contents

0017-6276

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Prepare the following parts because each part of the reader heater is assigned as service part.
[1]
[2]

[3]

F-2-455
No.

Name

Part No.

Qty.

[1]

PLATE HEATER-S 230V

FK2-0228-000

2 pc.

[2]

Wire saddle

WT2-0507-000

3 pc.

[3]

Screw (Binding;M4X6)

XB3-6400-805

2 pc.

2.12.6 Turning Off the Host Machine

0017-8846

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

How to Turn Off the Main Power

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following steps
to protect the hard disk:
1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2) Follow the instructions on the shutdown sequence screen to let the main
power switch be ready to turn off.
3) Turn off the power switch.
4) Disconnect the power plug.

2.12.7 Installation
0017-6285

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Thee are 2 locations for the heaters. Any of the 2 heaters may be used for
any of the locations.

1) Open the copyboard cover/DADF.

2-116

Chapter 2
2) Remove the glass retainer (right) [1].
- 2 screws[2]
3) Remove the copyboard glass (for copyboard cover) [3].
4) Remove the glass retainer (left) [4].
- 2 screws[5]
5) Remove the copyboard glass (for DADF) [6].

F-2-456

When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the glass surface
and the white plate on its back. (The presence of dirt will cause a black line
in the images.)

6) Attach the wire saddle [1].

7) Attach the plate heaters [2].
- 1 Screw (Binding;M4X6)[3]
8) Attach the connector [4] of the heater, secure the harness of the heater in the wire saddle [1].

F-2-457

Points to Note When Routing the Harness

Check to see that the harness [1] is in contact with the reader base plate.
If not, hold the harness [1] down with your hand to keep it in contact with
the reader base plate.

9) Pull the drive belt (front side) [1] to the right to move the contact sensor unit [2] to the center.

2-117

Chapter 2

F-2-458

10) Peel off the protective sheet [1], and fit the 2 wire saddle [2].
(Keep the protective sheet peeled until step 12).)
11) Attach the plate heaters [3].
- 1 Screw (Binding;M4X6)[4]
12) Attach the connector [5] of the heater, secure the harness of the heater in the 2 wire saddles [2].

F-2-459

13) Put back the protective sheet.

14) Mount the copyboard glass (for DADF) and the copyboard glass (for copyboard cover).
15) Mount the glass retainer (let, right) using 2 screws each.
16) Close the copyboard cover/DADF.
17) Connect the power cable.

2.13 Installing the Cassette Heater

2.13.1 Checking the Parts
0017-8573

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Prepare the following parts because each part of the Cassette Heater is assigned as service part.
<Heater PCB>

F-2-460
T-2-27
No.

Name

Part No.

[1]

Heater PCB

FM2-0388-000

1 pc.

[2]*

Plastic film sheet

FC5-6899-000

1 pc.

[3]

Screw (TP; M3X6)

XB6-7300-607

1 pc.

[4]

Ferrite core

WE8-5689-000

1 pc.

* To use for the installation of the Cassette Heater.

2-118

Qty.

Chapter 2
<Cassette Heater Attachment>
[1]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[3]

[6]

[7]

F-2-461
T-2-28
No.

Name

Part No.

Qty.

[1]

power code base unit

FM2-0139-000

1 pc.

[2]

Environment heater outlet

FM2-0273-000

1 pc.

[3]

Power cord

FH2-7041-000

1 pc.

[4]

Plug cover

FC7-7138-000

1 pc.

[5]*

Plastic film sheet

FC5-6899-000

1 pc.

[6]

Screw (TP; M3X6)

XB6-7300-607

4 pc.

[7]

Power supply label

FU5-8018-000

1 pc.

* To use for the installation of the Cassette Heater.

<Cassette Heater>

[1]

[2]

F-2-462
T-2-29
No.

Name

Part No.

Qty.

[1]

Heater unit

FH7-4742-000

1 pc.

[2]

Screw (binding; M4X4)

XB1-2400-407

1 pc.

2.13.2 Turning Off the Host Machine

0017-3141

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

2-119

Chapter 2

How to Turn Off the Main Power

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following steps
to protect the hard disk:
1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2) Follow the instructions on the shutdown sequence screen to let the main
power switch be ready to turn off.
3) Turn off the power switch.
4) Disconnect the power plug.

2.13.3 Installation Procedure (Heater PCB)

0017-8574

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Free the reader power cable [2] from the wire saddle [1].
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [3] of the reader communication cable.
[3]

[2]
[1]
F-2-463

3) Disconnect the lattice connector [1].

F-2-464

4) Detach the rear cover [1].

- 9 screws [2]

2-120

[3]

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]
[2]

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-2-465

5) Open the right cover (middle lower) [1] and right door [2] of the cassette pedestal, and then detach the right cover (lower rear) [3].
- 2 screws [4]

F-2-466

6) Remove the blanking area [2] from the removed right cover (rear lower) [1] using nippers.

F-2-467

7) Free the cable of the 2P connector [1] from the edge saddle [2].

Be sure to shut the wire saddle [2].

8) Free the connector of the cable [4] from the edge saddle [3].

Check to make sure that the cable [4] is routed through the edge saddle [3].

2-121

Chapter 2

F-2-468

9) Free the 2 cables [1].

- 2 wire saddles [2]

F-2-469

10) Close the 2 wire saddles opened in step 9).

11) Mount the heater PCB [1].
- 1 Screw (TP; M3X6) [2]

Be sure that the claw [3] of the heater PCB is hooked on the side plate.

F-2-470

12) Route the cable of the 2P connector [1] through the edge saddle [2].
13) Insert the following connectors into the heater PCB.
- 1 2P connector [1]
- 2 3P connectors [3]
- 1 4P connector [4]

2-122

Chapter 2

F-2-471

14) Attach the ferrite core [1] to the cable [2].

F-2-472
MEMO:
When installing the cassette heater Attachment simultaneously, skip the
step 15) and later.
Go on to step 5) at "installation procedure (cassette heater Attachment)".

15) Mount the right cover (rear lower).

16) Close the right cover (middle lower) and right door of the cassette pedestal.
17) Mount the rear cover.
18) Insert the connector of the reader communication cable.
19) Secure the reader power cable with the wire saddle.

2.13.4 Installation Procedure (Cassette Heater Attachment)

0017-8576

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

You will need to install a Heater PCB in advance before making use of the
Cassette Heater Attachment.

1) Free the reader power cable [2] from the wire saddle [1].
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [3] of the reader communication cable.
[3]

[2]
[1]

[3]

F-2-473

3) Disconnect the lattice connector [1].

2-123

Chapter 2

F-2-474

4) Detach the rear cover [1].

- 9 screws [2]
5) Detach the face plate [3] of the rear cover [1]. (Removed face plate and screw will not be used.)
- 1 screw [4]
[1]

[2]

[2]

[3]

[4]
F-2-475

6) Mount the environment heater outlet [1] using a screw [2]; then, connect the connector [3] to the heater power supply PCB.

F-2-476

7) Detach the rear cover [1] of the cassette pedestal.

- 4 screws [2]

2-124

Chapter 2

F-2-477

8) Remove the blanking area [2] of the rear cover [1] of the cassette pedestal using nippers.
[1]

[2]

F-2-478

9) Insert the connector of the power code base unit [1] into the connector [2] at the host machine.
10) Hook the hook of the power code base unit [1] in the 2 holes [3] at the host machine to secure the power code base unit [1].
- 2 screws (TP; M3X6) [4]

F-2-479

F-2-480

11) Mount the rear cover of the cassette pedestal.

12) Mount the rear cover.
13) Connect the reader communication cable.
14) Secure the reader power cable with the wire saddle.
15) Connect the lattice connector to the host machine.
16) Using the power cable [1], connect the cassette pedestal power cord base unit to the host machine.
17) Attach the power supply label [2].

2-125

Chapter 2

F-2-481

18) Attach the plug cover [1] on the power code [2].
- 1 screw [3] (use the screw that was removed in the step 5)
- 1 screw (TP; M3X6) [4]
[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

F-2-482

2.13.5 Installation Procedure (Cassette Heater)

0017-8577

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1. Mounting to the cassette of the host machine

To operate the Cassette Heater Unit, the Heater PCB needs to be mounted.

1) Pull out the cassette 1 and 2.

[1]

F-2-483

2) While removing the hook by inserting the part indicated as [1] from the front side of the host machine with a flat blade screwdriver, detach the connector cover [2].

2-126

Chapter 2

F-2-484

3) Fit the 3 hooks [2] of the heater unit [1] to the slit of the base plate to match the hole positions.

In the case of mounting the heater unit, make sure to check that the 3 hooks
[2] are tightly fitted and there is no jiggle.

F-2-485

4) Mount the heater unit [1] with the screw (binding; M4X4) [2], and connect the connector [3].

F-2-486

5) Attach the connector cover [1].

6) Attach the plastic film [2] (for protecting the AC cable) over the cable [3] to fit the end of the connector cover [A] and the end of the rear side of the host machine
[B].

2-127

Chapter 2

F-2-487

7) Put back the cassette 1 and 2.

2. Mounting to the cassette pedestal side

To operate the Cassette Heater Unit, the Heater PCB and Cassette Heater
Attachment needs to be mounted.

1) Pull out the cassette 3 and 4.

2) While removing the hook by inserting the part indicated as [1] from the front side of the host machine with a flat blade screwdriver, detach the connector cover [2].

F-2-488

3) Fit the 3 hooks [2] of the heater unit [1] to the slit of the base plate to match the hole positions.

In the case of mounting the heater unit, make sure to check that the 3 hooks
[2] are tightly fitted and there is no jiggle.

F-2-489

4) Mount the heater unit [1] with the screw (binding; M4X4) [2], and connect the connector [3].

2-128

Chapter 2

F-2-490

5) Attach the connector cover [1].

6) Attach the plastic film [2] (for protecting the AC cable) over the cable [3] to fit the end of the connector cover [A] and the end of the rear side of the host machine
[B].

F-2-491

7) Put back the cassette 3 and 4.

2.13.6 After Installation

0017-3159

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Check to be sure that the switch on the heater PCB is off.
2) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
3) Turn on the main power switch.
4) Turn on the switch [1] of the heater PCB.

[1]

F-2-492

2-129

Chapter 2

2.14 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit

2.14.1 Checking Items in the Package
0011-0278

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[1]

[2]

[7]

[3]

[9]

[8]

[16]

[11]

[10]

[5]

[4]

[12]

[13]

[6]

[14]

[15]

[17]
F-2-493

[1]

Speaker unit (upper)

1 pc.

[2]

Speaker unit (lower)

1 pc.

[3]

Cable (1300mm)

1 pc.

[4]*

Cable (1850mm)

1 pc.

[5]

Cord guide (3 cord guide to be used)

7 pc.

[6]

Voice Guidance Board

1 pc.

[7]*

Voice Guidance Board Face Plate

1 pc.

[8]

Voice Guidance Board Face Plate

1 pc.

[9]

Binding screw (M3X6)

2 pc.

[10]

Binding screw (M4X6)

1 pc.

[11]*

Binding screw (M4X40)

2 pc.

[12]

Binding screw (M3X16)

1 pc.

[13]

Binding screw (M4X16)

1 pc.

[14]

Ferrite core

1 pc.

[15]

Clamp

1 pc.

[16]

Users Guide

1 pc.

[17]

User Manual CD-ROM

1 pc.

*Not to be used for this machine

2.14.2 Turning Off the Host Machine

0011-0279

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Turning Off the Main Power

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk:
[1] Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more.
[2] Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off.

2-130

Chapter 2
[3] Turn off the main power switch.
[4] Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

2.14.3 Installation Procedure

0011-0254

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1. A point to keep in mind at installation

When you install this kit on the iR main body, keep in mind that some machines require the addition of memory.
For further information, refer to 'Specification' > 'System configuration'.
2. Installation Procedure
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the reader communication cable and the DADF cable [2].
MEMO:
For the model without the DADF, disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the reader communication cable.

[2]

[1]

[1]
F-2-494

2) Unscrew 10 screws [1] and detach the rear left cover [2].
[1]

[1]

[2]

[1]
[1]
F-2-495

3) Unscrew 16 screws [1] and detach the controller box cover [2].

2-131

Chapter 2

[1]

[1]

[1]

[2]

[1]
F-2-496

4) Unscrew 2 screws [1] and detach the blanking plate [2].

[1]

[2]
F-2-497

5) Mount the facing plate [2] to the voice board [1] by 2 binding screws (M3X6) [3].

[3]

[2]

[1]

F-2-498

6) The slide switch SW1 found on the voice guidance board is set to 33 MHz at time of shipment; be sure to set it to 66 MHz for use on this machine.
Checking the slide switch SW1 on the voice guidance board
The slide switch (SW1) on the Voice Guidance Board-A1 is provided as a means of switching frequencies (33 MHz/66 MHz) to suit the transfer speed of the PCI
bus. It is important for the switch setting to suit the transfer speed so that the voice will be free of interruption.
For the machine, 66MHz is the correct position of the switch.

2-132

Chapter 2

66MHz

F-2-499

7) Fit the voice board [1] in place, and fix it in place using the 2 screws [2] removed in step 4).

Be sure that the PCB is perpendicular to the connector.

[1]

F-2-500

[2]

[1]

F-2-501

8) Mount the controller box cover and the rear left cover.
9) Plug the leader cable and DADF cable.
10) Remove a screw [1] and the blanking plate [2] of the upper right cover.
MEMO:
The screws removed at step above are not supposed to be used.

2-133

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

F-2-502

11) Mount the speaker unit (lower) [1] to the upper right cover of the host machine with 2 binding screws (M3X16 [2] and M4X16 [3]).

[1]

[2]
[3]
F-2-503

12) Mount the speaker unit (upper) [1] to the speaker unit (lower) mounted at step 11) and secure it with a binding screw (M4X6) [2] from under the lower unit.

[1]

[2]
F-2-504

13) Take off the cover [1] from the code guide.
[1]

F-2-505

14) Peel off the released paper of the code guide [1] and affix it to the host machine as shown in the figure.
A: When a card reader is not mounted on the iR host machine
The right side -- 2 places
The rear -------- 1 place

2-134

Chapter 2

[1]
[1]
F-2-506

B: When a card reader is mounted on the iR host machine

The right side --- 1 place
The rear --------- 1 place

[1]
[1]
F-2-507

15) Plug the cable [2] into the speaker unit [1].
[1]

[2]

F-2-508

16) Run the cable [1] through the code guide [2] and mount the code guide cover [4].

Be sure to remove all the slack out of the cable.

Ensure that the cable [1] passes under the reader power cable [3].
A: When a card reader is not mounted on the iR host machine

2-135

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]
[4]
F-2-509

B: When a card reader is mounted on the iR host machine

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]
[1]

[4]

F-2-510

17) Mount the clamp [1] on the rear left cover.

[1]

F-2-511

18) Run the cable [1] through 4 clamps [2] to secure.

Be sure to remove all the slack out of the cable.

[1]

[2]

F-2-512

2-136

Chapter 2
19) Mount the ferrite core [1] to the cable.
Ensure that the length of [2] is 50mm or shorter.

[1]

[2]
F-2-513

20) Plug the cable [1] in the terminal of voice board.

[2]

[1]

F-2-514

21) Plug the power cable (for receptacle) of the iR host machine into a receptacle.
22) Turn on the main power switch.
23) Check if the voice board has been recognized.
service mode
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS > PCI1
If 'voice board' is indicated for PCI1, the board is correctly recognized by the machine.
3. Making Settings After Installation
To make use of the Voice Guidance Kit-A2 after turning on the host machine, you need to make the following settings in Additional Function:
Additional Function > System Setting > Voice Guide Manegement > Use Voice Guide.
1) Select [ON].
2) Press [OK].
default : OFF
4. Checking the Operation
- To Enable
1) Hold down the Reset key 3 sec or more.
2) See that the copy count on the screen is enclosed in red, indicating 'Voice Guidance' is ready for use.
- To Disable
1) Hold down the Reset key for 3 sec or more.

2.14.4 Checking the Contents

0017-2979

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
<Voice Guidance Kit-B1>

2-137

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[7]

[8]

[3]

[9]

[5]

[4]

[11]

[10]

[12]

[13]

[6]

[14]

[15]

F-2-515
[1]

Speaker unit (upper)

1 pc.

[2]

Speaker unit (lower)

1 pc.

[3]

Cable (1300mm)

1 pc.

[4]*

Cable (1850mm)

1 pc.

[5]

Cord guide (3 cord guide to be used)

7 pc.

[6]

Voice Guidance Board

1 pc.

[7]*

Voice Guidance Board Face Plate

1 pc.

[8]

Voice Guidance Board Face Plate

1 pc.
1 pc.

[9]

Screw (Binding; M3X6)

2 pc.

[10]

Screw (Binding; M4X6)

[11]*

Screw (Binding; M4X40)

2 pc.

[12]

Screw (Binding; M3X16)

1 pc.

[13]

Screw (Binding; M4X16)

1 pc.

[14]

Ferrite core

1 pc.

[15]

Wire saddle

1 pc.

*Not to be used for this machine

Check the documentation and CD against the following:

Users Guide
User Manual CD

2.14.5 Turning Off the Host Machine

0017-2980

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

How to Turn Off the Main Power

When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following steps to protect the hard disk:
1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2) Follow the instructions on the shutdown sequence screen to let the main power switch be ready to turn off.
3) Turn off the power switch.
4) Disconnect the power plug.

2.14.6 Installation Procedure

0017-2981

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1. A point to keep in mind at installation

When you install this kit on the host machine, keep in mind that some machines require the addition of memory.
For further information, refer to 'Specification' > 'System configuration'.

2. Installation Procedure
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the reader communication cable and the DADF cable [2].
MEMO:
For the model without the DADF, disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the reader communication cable.

2-138

Chapter 2

[2]

[1]

[1]
F-2-516

2) Detach the rear left cover [1].

- 10 screws [2]
[2]

[2]

[1]

[2]
[2]
F-2-517

3) Detach the controller box cover [1].

- 16 screws [2]

2-139

Chapter 2

[2]

[2]

[2]

[1]

[2]
F-2-518

4) Detach the blanking plate [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[2]

[1]
F-2-519

5) Mount the voice guidance board face plate [2] to the voice guidance board [1].
- 2 screws (binding; M3X6) [3]

[3]

[2]

[1]

F-2-520

6) The slide switch SW1 found on the voice guidance board is set to 33 MHz at time of shipment; be sure to set it to 66 MHz for use on this machine.
Checking the slide switch SW1 on the voice guidance board
The slide switch (SW1) on the voice guidance board is provided as a means of switching frequencies (33 MHz/66 MHz) to suit the transfer speed of the PCI bus. It
is important for the switch setting to suit the transfer speed so that the voice will be free of interruption.
For the equipment, 66MHz is the correct position of the switch.

2-140

Chapter 2

66MHz

F-2-521

7) Fit the voice guidance board [1] in place, and fix it in place using the 2 screws [2] removed in step 4).

Be sure that the PCB is perpendicular to the connector.

[2]

[1]
F-2-522

8) Mount the controller box cover and the rear left cover.
9) Plug the leader cable and DADF cable.
10) Remove a screw [1] and the blanking plate [2] of the upper right cover.
MEMO:
The screws removed at step above are not supposed to be used.

[1]

[2]

F-2-523

11) Mount the speaker unit (lower) [1] to the upper right cover of the host machine.
- 1 screw (binding; M3X16) [2]
- 1 screw (binding; M4X16) [3]

2-141

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]
[3]
F-2-524

12) Mount the speaker unit (upper) [1] to the speaker unit (lower) mounted at step 11) and secure it with a binding screw (M4X6) [2] from under the lower unit.

[1]

[2]
F-2-525

13) Take off the cover [1] from the code guide.
[1]

F-2-526

14) Peel off the released paper of the code guide [1] and affix it to the host machine as shown in the figure.
A: When a card reader is not mounted on the host machine
The right side -- 2 places
The rear -------- 1 place

[1]
[1]
F-2-527

2-142

Chapter 2
B: When a card reader is mounted on the host machine
The right side --- 1 place
The rear --------- 1 place

[1]
[1]
F-2-528

15) Connect the cable [2] into the speaker unit [1].
[1]

[2]

F-2-529

16) Run the cable [1] through the code guide [2] and mount the code guide cover [3].

Be sure to remove all the slack out of the cable.

Ensure that the cable [1] passes under the reader power cable [4].

A: When a card reader is not mounted on the host machine

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]
[3]
F-2-530

B: When a card reader is mounted on the host machine

2-143

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]
[1]

[3]

F-2-531

17) Mount the wire saddle [1] on the rear left cover.

[1]

F-2-532

18) Run the cable [1] through 4 wire saddles [2] to secure.

Be sure to remove all the slack out of the cable.

[1]

[2]

F-2-533

19) Mount the ferrite core [1] to the cable.

Ensure that the length of [2] is 50mm or shorter.

[1]

[2]
F-2-534

20) Connect the cable [1] in the terminal of voice board.

2-144

Chapter 2

[2]

[1]

F-2-535

21) Connect the power plug to the outlet.

22) Turn on the main power switch.
23) Check if the voice board has been recognized.
service mode
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS > PCI1
If 'voice board' is indicated for PCI1, the board is correctly recognized by the host machine.
3. Making Settings After Installation
To make use of the Voice Guidance Kit-A2 after turning on the host machine, you need to make the following settings in Additional Function:
Additional Function key > [System Setting] > [Voice Guide Manegement] > [Use Voice Guide].
1) Select [ON].
2) Press [OK].
default : OFF
4. Checking the Operation
<To Enable>
1) Hold down the Reset key 3 sec or more.
2) See that the copy count on the screen is enclosed in red, indicating 'Voice Guidance' is ready for use.
<To Disable>
1) Hold down the Reset key for 3 sec or more.

2-145

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Contents

Contents
3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Functional construction................................................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.2 Connections Among Major PCBs................................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.3 Connections Among Major PCBs................................................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.1.4 DC Controller PCB ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-4

3.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................3-4

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ................................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (full color) ........................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (mono color)........................................................................................................ 3-6

Chapter 3

3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Functional construction
0001-4573

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional blocks: general control block, original exposure block, reader control block, printer control block,
laser exposure block, image formation block, pickup/feed block, and fixing/delivery block. For detailed discussions of individual functions, see the chapters that
follow.
[B]
[C] R-CON
[G]
[1]

[A]
MN-CON
[2]

[9]

[F]

[8]
[6]
[3]
[5]

[D]
DC-CON

[7]
[4]

[E]

[10]

[H]

[11]

[12]

F-3-1
[A] General Control System
main controller PCB
[B] Original Exposure System
[C] Reader Unit Controller System
reader controller PCB
[D] Printer Unit Control System
DC controller PCB

[1] HDD
[2] Accessories PCB
[3] Photosensitive drum
[4] Charging
[5] Development
[6] Primary transfer
[7] Secondary transfer/Separation

[E] Laser Exposure System

[8] Fixing

[F] Image Formation System

[9] Delivery/Reversal/Duplexing

[G] Fixing/Delivery System

[H] Pickup/Feed System

[10] Pickup
[11] Cassette 1
[12] Cassette 2

3.1.2 Connections Among Major PCBs

0001-4576

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The following is a diagram showing connections among individual PCBs:

3-1

Chapter 3

Reader unit
J512

J5018

[2]

[1]
J501
J502
J6801
J6802

Printer unit

J1110
J1111

[16]

J113

[3]

[15]

J1

[5]
[4]

J2069

J601

J511
J1212A
J1212B

J327

J329

J301 J1204

J1302

[7]
J1303
J321A

[6]

[8]

J1102

J325
J323
J324
J325

J326A
J326B
J323

J1201
J1202
J1203

J501
J502
J506
J507

J1

[9]

[10]
J211
J222
J251

J640

J218

J647

[12]

J203
J210

[11]

J302 J250
J303 J254

J205

[17]

[14]

[13]

J2080

J2081

J2078

J2079

J2076

[18]
[19]

F-3-2
T-3-1
[1]

Reader controller PCB

[11]

AC driver PCB

[2]

CIS inverter PCB

[12]

Accessories power supply PCB

[3]

Control panel CPU PCB

[13]

Printer power supply PCB

[4]

Control panel inverter PCB

[14]

Controller power supply PCB

[5]

Keypad PCB

[15]

BD PCB

[6]

Main control PCB (main)

[16]

Laser driver PCB

[7]

Main controller PCB (sub)

[17]

Cassette size relay PCB

[8]

DC controller PCB

[18]

Upper cassette size PCB

[9]

High-voltage PCB (main)

[19]

Lower cassette size PCB

[10]

High-voltage PCB (sub)

Memo:
The arrows in the diagram indicate PCB connections, not the direction of signals.

3-2

J217
J252
J253

J212

Chapter 3

3.1.3 Connections Among Major PCBs

0010-4223

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram showing connections among individual PCBs:

Reader unit
J5018

J512

[2]

[1]
J501
J502
J6801
J6802

Printer unit

[5]

J1110
J1111

[21]
J601
J6693
J6692

J1204

J301

J4001

[7]

J1009

J3001

[10]

J1011

[12]
J321A

J2000

[8]

J1008

J5001
J325

[11]

J1013

[6]
J326A
J326B
J323

J1010

J1201
J1202
J1203

J501
J502
J506

J1

J507

[14]

[13]

J211
J222
J251
J640

J647

[16]

J203

J210

J205
J2222

[15]
J2080

J2081

J2078

J2079

J2076

[22]

[4]

[9]
J3003

J323
J324
J325

J1

J1212A
J1212B

J1006

J327

J113

J511

J2069

J329

[19]

[3]

[20]

J218

J302 J250
J303 J254

J217
J252
J253

[18]
J212

[17]

[23]
[24]

F-3-3
[1]

Reader controller PCB

[13]

High-voltage PCB (main)

[2]

CIS inverter PCB

[14]

High-voltage PCB (sub)

[3]

Control panel CPU PCB

[15]

AC driver PCB

[4]

Control panel inverter PCB

[16]

Accessories power supply PCB

[5]

Keypad PCB

[17]

Printer power supply PCB

[6]

Main control PCB (main)

[18]

Controller power supply PCB

[7]

Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A)

[19]

All-night power supply PCB

[8]

Main controller PCB (sub LANBAR-C)

[20]

BD PCB

[9]

Main controller PCB (sub R-A)

[21]

Laser driver PCB

[10]

Main controller PCB (sub PE-A)

[22]

Cassette size relay PCB

[11]

Main controller PCB (sub GU-SHORT)

[23]

Upper cassette size PCB

[12]

DC controller PCB

[24]

Lower cassette size PCB

Memo:
The arrows in the diagram indicate PCB connections, not the direction of signals.

3-3

Chapter 3

3.1.4 DC Controller PCB

0001-4577

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's DC controller PCB has the following functional construction:
J308

J306 J304
J305 J303

J403
J309

BAT1

J307

J310
J311

J301

IC16
IC18

IC19

J312
J313
IC23

J314

J422

J315
J316

IC31
J318

IC30
IC37

J317
J319
J421
J320

J321

J329
J420
J327 J328

J322

J323 J324

J325

J326

+3V +24V
+5V
+13V

F-3-4
T-3-2
BAT1:

battery for SRAM (IC18) backup

IC23:

CPU (equipped with boot ROM)

IC31:

reset IC

IC16:

flash ROM (holds system software)

IC18:

SRAM (retains settings data, e.g., service mode settings)

IC19,30:

used for clutch control, solenoid control, fan control

IC37:

used for high-voltage control, fixing control, motor control, image control, PWM control (for
laser/high voltage)

3.2 Basic Sequence

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On
0001-4578

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-3-3
Period

Description

WMUP (warm-up)

the drive system is at rest; lasts until the fixing roller reaches 50 degrees Celcius.

SREADY (scanner ready)

from when shading correction ends to when the Start key is pressed or the main
power switch is turned off.

WMUPR (warm-up rotation) the drive system goes on; lasts until the fixing roller reaches 190 degrees Celcius.
PSTBY (printer standby)

3-4

the machine is ready to accept a copy/print request signal.

Chapter 3

Shading correction

Main power
switch ON

STBY

SREADY

Reader motor
(M501)
Scanning lamp
(LA1)
HP sensor
(PS501)
Shading
position*1

Shading position
Shading position*1

Shading correction

- scanning lamp intensity

stabilization control
- gain adjustment

: forward
: reverse

Main power
switch ON

WMUP

WMUPR

PSTBY

360 sec (approx.)

Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retention heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M11)

190 degrees

*3

*2

185 degrees

*2
Repeats ON/OFF

50 degrees

Drum/ITB motor
(M9)
Developing rotary
motor (M8)
Developing cylinder
clutch (CL3)

300 sec *4

C Bk

*5

Auto adjustment

480 sec

Rotates, stops during auto adjustment

*6

F-3-5

*1: if the copyboard cover (ADF) is "open," stands by at point of original size detection.
*2: uses the main or sub heater to perform temperature control (to 190 degrees Celcius) depending on the difference in the readings of the main thermistor (TH1)
and the sub thermistor (TH2).
*3: if the temperature at a the start of the warm-up period is less than 170 degrees Celcius, turns off the main heater; if 170 degrees Celcius or higher, turns on
the main heater.
*4: executes half-speed rotation if printing does not start at the end of the warm-up period.
*5: omits the sequence if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 50 degrees Celcius or higher at the start of the warm-up period.
*6: as a rule, executes (image stabilization control during auto adjustment) only if the surface temperature of the fixing roller at the start of the warm-up period
is less than 50 degrees Celcius.
- ATR correction control
- drum film thickness detection control
- primary transfer ATVC control
- development gradation density correction control

3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (full color)

0001-4579

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Full color, A4, 1 copy, Cassette 1
T-3-4
Period

Description

PSTBY (print standby)

when the machine is ready to accept a copy/print request signal.

PINTR (initial rotation)

from when a print request signal is received to when an image signal is generated.

PRINT

from when all toner has been transferred to paper and the paper is delivered.

LSTR (last rotation)

from when the paper has been delivered to when all drive has been stopped.

3-5

Chapter 3

Start key
ON
PSTBY
Laser scanner
motor (M1)
Image reguest
signal (PVREQ)

PINTR
[1]

PRINT

Laser activation
Drum/ITB motor
(M9)
Primary
charging bias
Developing
rotary motor (M8)

PSTBY

Bk

[1]

[3]

[2]
Y

Developing bias
Primary
transfer bias
Secondary
transfer bias
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL1)
Registration
clutch (CL2)
Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub heater
(H2)
Fixing heat
retention
heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M11)

LSTR

M
Y

C
M

Bk
C

[4]
Bk
[5]

[8]

[6]

[9]

[7]

[10]

[11]

[10]

[10]

[11]

[10]

[12]

F-3-6

[1] stabilizes the rotation.

[2] makes the following moves: rotary HP>Bk point of development>Y point of development (1st color).
[3] moves to rotary HP.
[4] holds toner/carrier on the developing cylinder.
[5] transfers to paper.
[6] cleans the secondary transfer outside roller.
[7] picks up paper from the cassette.
[8] executes pre-registration.
[9] executes registration.
[10]controls to 190 degrees Celcius.
[11]controls to 193 degrees Celcius.
[12]executes half-speed rotation (to increase temperature of the pressure roller).

3.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (mono color)

0001-4580

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Mono, A4, 2 copies, Cassette 1
T-3-5

3-6

Period

Description

PSTBY (print standby)

whine the machine is ready to accept a copy/print request signal.

PINTR (initial rotation)

from when a print request signal has been received to when an image signal is
generated.

PRINT

from when all toner has been transferred to paper to when the paper is delivered.

LSTR (last rotation)

from when the paper has been delivered to when all drive is stopped.

Chapter 3

Start key
ON
PSTBY
Laser scanner
motor (M1)
Image request
signal (PVREQ)
Laser activation
Drum/ITB motor
(M9)
Primary
charging bias
Development
rotary motor (M8)

PINTR
[1]

PRINT

LSTR

[1]

[3]

[2]

[4]

Developing bias
Primary
transfer bias
Secondary
transfer bias
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL1)
Registration
clutch (CL2)
Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retention
heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M11)

PSTBY

[5]
[8]

[9]

[5]
[8]

[7]

[6]

[9]

[7]

[10]

[11]

[10]

[10]

[11]

[10]

[12]

F-3-7

[1] stabilizes the rotation.

[2] makes the following moves: rotary HP>point of Bk development
[3] moves to rotary HP.
[4] retains toner/carrier on the developing cylinder.
[5] transfers to paper.
[6] executes secondary transfer outside roller cleaning.
[7] picks up paper from the cassette.
[8] executes pre-registration.
[9] executes registration.
[10]controls to 190 degrees Celcius.
[11]controls to 193 degrees Celcius.
[12]performs half-speed rotation (to increase the temperature of the pressure roller).

3-7

Chapter 4 Main Controller

Contents

Contents
4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Construction and Functions ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 4-3

4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry .........................................................................................................................4-4

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.3 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.4 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.5 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.6 Main Controller PCB (sub) .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.7 Expansion Bus PCB................................................................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.8 SRAM PCB................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-10
4.2.9 SRAM PCB................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.2.10 HDD ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-11

4.3 Start-Up Sequence........................................................................................................................................................4-13

4.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.3.2 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.3.3 Start-Up Sequence ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.3.4 Start-Up Sequence ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-15

4.4 Actions when HDD Error ............................................................................................................................................4-17

4.4.1 E602 in Detail ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-17
4.4.2 E602 in Detail (iR C3170/C2570, iR C3180/C2580 Series) ..................................................................................................... 4-20

4.5 Image Processing .........................................................................................................................................................4-23

4.5.1 Construction of Image Processing Modules .............................................................................................................................. 4-23
4.5.2 Reader Input Image Processing ................................................................................................................................................. 4-24
4.5.3 Compression, Decompression, and Edit Processing Blocks...................................................................................................... 4-25
4.5.4 Printer Output Image Processing ............................................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.5.5 Construction of Image Processing Modules .............................................................................................................................. 4-26
4.5.6 Reader Input Image Processing ................................................................................................................................................. 4-28
4.5.7 Compression, Decompression, and Edit Processing Blocks...................................................................................................... 4-28
4.5.8 Printer Output Image Processing ............................................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.5.9 Outline of the Flow of Image Processing .................................................................................................................................. 4-29
4.5.10 Construction of the Image Processing Module ........................................................................................................................ 4-30
4.5.11 Compression/Decompression and Editing Blocks................................................................................................................... 4-30
4.5.12 Printer Output Image Processing ............................................................................................................................................. 4-31

4.6 Flow of Image Data......................................................................................................................................................4-32

4.6.1 Flow of Image Data (copier function) ....................................................................................................................................... 4-32
4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions ................................................................................................................................. 4-33
4.6.3 Flow of Image Data (Box function)........................................................................................................................................... 4-33
4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.6.5 Flow of Image Data (SEND function) ....................................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for SEND Functions.................................................................................................................................. 4-35
4.6.7 Flow of Image Data (fax transmission) ..................................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.6.8 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions ............................................................................................................... 4-36
4.6.9 Image Data Flow for Fax Reception Functions ......................................................................................................................... 4-36
4.6.10 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions................................................................................................................... 4-37
4.6.11 Flow of Image Data (PDL function) ........................................................................................................................................ 4-37
4.6.12 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions .................................................................................................................................. 4-38
4.6.13 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions ............................................................................................................................... 4-38

Contents

4.6.14 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions ................................................................................................................................... 4-39

4.6.15 Flow of Image Data for SEND Functions................................................................................................................................ 4-39
4.6.16 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions ............................................................................................................. 4-40
4.6.17 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions................................................................................................................... 4-40
4.6.18 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions .................................................................................................................................. 4-41

4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 4-41

4.7.1 Controller Box ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-41
4.7.1.1 Removing the Controller Box....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-41
4.7.1.2 Before Removing Controller Box................................................................................................................................................................. 4-42
4.7.1.3 Before Removing Controller Box................................................................................................................................................................. 4-42
4.7.1.4 Removing Controller Box............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-43

4.7.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-44

4.7.2.1 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (main)........................................................................................................................................... 4-44
4.7.2.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)................................................................................................................................................. 4-44
4.7.2.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)........................................................................................................................................ 4-45
4.7.2.4 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (main)........................................................................................................................................... 4-45
4.7.2.5 Removing Main Controller PCB (main)....................................................................................................................................................... 4-45
4.7.2.6 Removing Main Controller PCB (main)....................................................................................................................................................... 4-46
4.7.2.7 After Replacing Main Controller PCB (main).............................................................................................................................................. 4-48
4.7.2.8 After Replacing Main Controller PCB (main).............................................................................................................................................. 4-48

4.7.3 Main Controller PCB (sub)........................................................................................................................................................ 4-48

4.7.3.1 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (sub) ............................................................................................................................................. 4-48
4.7.3.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ................................................................................................................................................... 4-48
4.7.3.3 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (sub) ............................................................................................................................................. 4-48
4.7.3.4 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub-R-A) ................................................................................................................................................. 4-48
4.7.3.5 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub PE-A) ............................................................................................................................................... 4-49
4.7.3.6 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub PE-A) ............................................................................................................................................... 4-49
4.7.3.7 Removing Relay PCB (Gu-short) ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-49
4.7.3.8 Removing Relay PCB (Gu-short) ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-49
4.7.3.9 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub SJ-A) ................................................................................................................................................ 4-49
4.7.3.10 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub SJ-A) .............................................................................................................................................. 4-49
4.7.3.11 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) ................................................................................................................................... 4-50
4.7.3.12 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) ................................................................................................................................... 4-50

4.7.4 Expansion Bus PCB................................................................................................................................................................... 4-50

4.7.4.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right) ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-50
4.7.4.2 Removing the SRAM Board......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-50
4.7.4.3 Removing the Expansion Bus PCB .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-50
4.7.4.4 After Replacing the Expansion Bus PCB ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-51

4.7.5 SRAM PCB................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-51

4.7.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right) ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-51
4.7.5.2 Removing the SRAM Board......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-51
4.7.5.3 After Replacing the SRAM Board................................................................................................................................................................ 4-51

4.7.6 UFR Board ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-51

4.7.6.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right) ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-51
4.7.6.2 Removing the UFR Board ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-52

4.7.7 Ethernet Board ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-52

4.7.7.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right) ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-52
4.7.7.2 Removing the Ethernet Board....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-52

4.7.8 HDD........................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-52

4.7.8.1 Making a Backup of Data (reference only) .................................................................................................................................................. 4-52
4.7.8.2 Handling HDD .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-53
4.7.8.3 Before Removing HDD ................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-53
4.7.8.4 Removing the HDD ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-54
4.7.8.5 After Replacing the HDD ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-54
4.7.8.6 Before Removing HDD ................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-54
4.7.8.7 Removing HDD ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-54
4.7.8.8 After Replacing HDD ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-55

4.7.9 Controller Fan ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-55

4.7.9.1 Before Removing Controller Fan ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-55
4.7.9.2 Removing Controller Fan ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-55

Chapter 4

4.1 Construction
4.1.1 Construction and Functions
0000-7710

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The machine's main controller block consists of the following components and provides the functions indicated:
T-4-1
Item

Description

Main controller PCB (main)

controls the system, controls the memory, controls

image processing for output to the printer

Main controller PCB (sub)

processes images from the reader unit

Expansion bus PCB

serves as the interface for the color LCD controller, card

reader, etc.

SRAM PCB

retains service mode settings and HDD control

information

Image memory (SRAM)

retains image data temporarily

Boot ROM

stores programs used for booting

HDD

stores system software, retains image data for Box/fax

functions

Memory control

Reader unit

SRAM
PCB

Expansion
bus PCB
Main controller
PCB (sub)

DC controller PCB

Main controller
PCB (main)
Reader input
image processing

BOOT ROM

HDD
- system control
- printer output
image processing
Printer unit

Image memory
(SDRAM)

F-4-1

4.1.2 Functional Construction

0009-8259

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The main controller block of the device has the following functions and mechanisms:

4-1

Chapter 4
T-4-2

4-2

PCB

Description

[1]

Main controller PCB (main)

system control, memory control, printer

output image processing control

[2]

Main controller PCB (sub R-A)

color space conversion, rotation for

electronic sorting, binary processing,
resolution conversion

[3]

Main controller PCB (sub PE-A) image processing for printer output (color
space compression, background removal,
LOG conversion, direct mapping, color
balance, zoom fine adjustment, gradation
conversion, screen processing, framing,
add-on)

[4]

Rely PCB (Gu-short)

bus connection (when EFI controller not

connected)

main controller PCB (sub O-A)

EFI controller connection

[5]

Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A)

scanner interface, scanner image

processing (resolution conversion, image
rotation, compression/expansion)

[6]

Main controller PCB (sub LAN- LAN connection, HDD controller, HDD
bar-A)
power supply

[7]

SRAM PCB

SRAM mount

DDRSDRAM

DDR-SDRAM

program-related data retention, image data

retention

BOOT ROM BOOT ROM

boot program retention

HDD

system software storage, image data

storage, Box/fax function image data
retention

HDD

Chapter 4

[B]

HDD

[8]

[7] BOOT ROM

F-4-2
T-4-3
[A]

Reader unit

[B]

DC controller PCB

[C]

Printer unit

4.1.3 Functional Construction

0017-6638

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The main controller block of the device has the following functions and mechanisms:
T-4-4
PCB

Description

[1]

Main controller PCB (main)

system control, memory control, printer

output image processing control, color
space conversion, rotation for electronic
sorting, binary processing, resolution
conversion

[2]

Main controller PCB (sub PE-A) image processing for printer output (color
space compression, background removal,
LOG conversion, direct mapping, color
balance, zoom fine adjustment, gradation
conversion, screen processing, framing,
add-on)

[3]

Rely PCB (Gu-short)

bus connection (when EFI controller not

connected)

main controller PCB (sub O-A)

EFI controller connection

Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A)

scanner interface, scanner image

processing (resolution conversion, image
rotation, compression/expansion)

[4]

4-3

Chapter 4
PCB

Description

[5]

Main controller PCB (sub LAN- LAN connection, HDD controller, HDD
bar-A)
power supply

[6]

SRAM PCB

SRAM mount

[7]

DDR-SDRAM

program-related data retention, image data

retention

BOOT ROM BOOT ROM

boot program retention

HDD

system software storage, image data

storage, Box/fax function image data
retention

HDD

[B]

HDD

[7]

[6] BOOT ROM

F-4-3
T-4-5
[A]

Reader unit

[B]

DC controller PCB

[C]

Printer unit

4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB (main)
0002-0606

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The following shows the major control functions of the main controller PCB (main) grouped according to jack/IC:

4-4

Chapter 4

J1101
J1102

IC31

J1103
J1104
J1105
IC35
J1106
IC15

HDD0

IC9

IC12

IC23

IC3
IC2

J1112
J1107

J1108
F-4-4
T-4-6
Jack No.

Description

J1101

expansion bus PCB slot

J1102

main controller PCB (sub) connection slot

J1103

image conversion board connection slot

J1104

USB interface board/TokenRing connection slot

J1105

UFR board/OPEN I/F board connection slot

J1106

Ethernet board connection slot

J1107

image memory (SDRAM, 512 MB; standard)

J1108

image memory (SDRAM, 256 MB; optional for 100-V model or standard for 120/230-V model)

J1112

boot ROM connection slot

HDD0

hard disk connection connector

IC No.

Description

IC9

controls the processing of images coming from IC12 for output to the printer.

IC12

controls image input/output functions, image rotation function, resolution conversion function, and binary processing function.

T-4-7

4-5

Chapter 4
IC No.

Description

IC15

controls the conversion of 4-bit serial image data coming from IC9 into 8-bit parallel image data; keeps track of video count.

IC23

CPU: system control

raster JPEG compression/decompression
network controller
PCI bus controller
ROM/RAM controller
serial communication controller

IC31

I/O processing of signals

IC35

HDD controller

4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (main)

0010-1786

iR C3170
The following show the major jacks found on the main controller PCB (main):

J1008
J1009
J1010
J1011
J1012
J1013

IC10

IC11

J1003

IC2

IC1
J1024

J1034
J1001

J1002
F-4-5
T-4-8

4-6

J No.

Description

J1001

image memory (512 MB DDR-SDRAM standard)

J1002

image memory (512 MB or 256 MB DDR-SRAM optional)

J1034

boot ROM connection slot

J1003

SRAM PCB connection slot

J1009

main controller PCB (sub R-A) connection slot

J1008

main controller (sub PE-A) connection slot

Chapter 4
J No.

Description

J1010

main controller PCB (sub O-A, optional) connection slot, or relay PCB (Gu-short) connection slot

J1011

main controller board (sub SJ-A) connection slot

J1012

Optional board connection slot

J1013

main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) connection slot

J1026

reserved

4.2.3 Main Controller PCB (main)

0010-1787

iR C3170i / iR C2570i
The following show the major jacks found on the main controller PCB (main):

J1008
J1009
J1010
J1011
J1012
J1013

IC10

IC11

J1003

IC2

IC1
J1024

J1034
J1001

J1002
F-4-6
T-4-9
J No.

Description

J1001

image memory (512 MB DDR-SDRAM standard)

J1002

image memory (512 MB DDR-SDRAM standard)

J1034

boot ROM connection slot

J1003

SRAM PCB connection slot

J1009

main controller PCB (sub R-A) connection slot

J1008

main controller (sub PE-A) connection slot

J1010

main controller PCB (sub O-A, optional) connection slot, or relay PCB (Gu-short) connection slot

J1011

main controller board (sub SJ-A) connection slot

J1012

Optional board connection slot

J1013

main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) connection slot

J1026

reserved

4-7

Chapter 4

4.2.4 Main Controller PCB (main)

0017-6673

iR C3180C
The following show the major jacks found on the main controller PCB (main):

J1008
J1010
J1011
J1012
J1013

IC10

IC11

J1003

IC2

IC1
J1024

J1034
J1001

J1002
F-4-7
T-4-10
J No.

Description

J1001

image memory (512 MB DDR-SDRAM standard)

J1002

image memory (512 MB or 256 MB DDR-SRAM optional)

J1034

boot ROM connection slot

J1003

SRAM PCB connection slot

J1008

main controller (sub PE-A) connection slot

J1010

relay PCB (Gu-short) connection slot

J1011

main controller board (sub SJ-A) connection slot

J1012

Optional board connection slot

J1013

main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) connection slot

J1026

reserved

4.2.5 Main Controller PCB (main)

0017-6674

iR C3180Ci
The following show the major jacks found on the main controller PCB (main):

4-8

Chapter 4

J1008
J1010
J1011
J1012
J1013

IC10

IC11

J1003

IC2

IC1
J1024

J1034
J1001

J1002
F-4-8
T-4-11
J No.

Description

J1001

image memory (512 MB DDR-SDRAM standard)

J1002

image memory (512 MB DDR-SDRAM standard)

J1034

boot ROM connection slot

J1003

SRAM PCB connection slot

J1008

main controller (sub PE-A) connection slot

J1010

relay PCB (Gu-short) connection slot

J1011

main controller board (sub SJ-A) connection slot

J1012

Optional board connection slot

J1013

main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) connection slot

J1026

reserved

4.2.6 Main Controller PCB (sub)

0002-0688

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The following shows the major functions of the main controller PCB (sub) grouped according to jack/IC:

J1302

IC17

IC15

F-4-9
T-4-12
Jack No.

Description

J1302

connector for reader unit communication

4-9

Chapter 4
Jack No.

Description

IC No.

Description

IC15

controls image processing of input image data from the reader unit.

IC17

controls indication of images read by the scanner.

T-4-13

4.2.7 Expansion Bus PCB

0002-0689

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

J1403

The following shows the major functions of the expansion bus PCB grouped according to jack/IC:

IC8
IC10

IC12

F-4-10
T-4-14
Jack No.

Description

J1403

connector for the SRAM PCB.

IC No.

Description

IC8

LCD controller

IC10

NE controller, coin vendor, interface ASIC for card reader connection

BAT

backup battery for SRAM

T-4-15

4.2.8 SRAM PCB

0002-0690

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The following is a discussion of the major control functions of the SRAM indicated with reference to ICs:

Face

Back

IC3

IC2
BAT1
IC1
F-4-11

4-10

Chapter 4
T-4-16
IC No.

Description

IC1,2,3 (SRAM)

retains control information on the image data stored on the HDD; retains service mode settings data and Additional Function settings data

4.2.9 SRAM PCB

0010-1700

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The following shows the principal control mechanisms of the SRAM PCB according to IC:
Face

BAT1

F-4-12

Back

IC2

IC1
F-4-13
T-4-17
IC No.

Description

IC1,2(SRAM)

stores the following: control information on the image data stored on the HDD, service
mode settings data, user mode settings data

4.2.10 HDD
0001-9933

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The HDD is formatted so that there are 9 partitions (blocks) with specific tasks assigned to them:
T-4-18
Partition

Description

DOSDEV

retains multipurpose data

FSTDEV

retains image data

DOSDEV2

retains thumbnail display data for image data

FSTPDEV

retains image data

DOSDEV3

retains multi-purpose files (e.g., PDL spool)

PDLDEV

retains PDL-related files (font, registered form, ICC profile, PDL function color correction
information file)

DOSDEV4

retains user data (address books, transfer settings)

BOOTDEV

retains system software

DOSDEV5

for future expansion

4-11

Chapter 4

DOSDEV
FSTDEV

HDD

DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5

F-4-14

The machine's system software consists of the following:

T-4-19

4-12

System software

Description

Location

Remarks

System

system model (controls

comprehensive system functions)

HDD (BOOTDEV)

Language

language module (controls LCD)

HDD (BOOTDEV)

RUI

language module (controls remote

UI)

HDD (BOOTDEV)

Boot

starts up the machine

boot ROM

DIMM

G3FAX

controls G3 fax

G3 fax board

DIMM

Dcon

controls the DC controller

DC control PCB

soldered flash
ROM

Rcon

controls the reader controller

reader controller PCB

soldered flash
ROM

Chapter 4

RCON

Reader unit

DCON
Main controller PCB (main)
DC controller PCB

G3 Fax unit
BOOT

HDD

G3FAX

SYSTEM
Language
RUI
BOOTDEV

F-4-15

4.3 Start-Up Sequence

4.3.1 Overview
0000-7737

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The system software used to control the operation of the machine is stored on the HDD.
When the machine is started up, the CPU on the main controller PCB reads the system software from the HDD into the image memory (SDRAM) of the main
controller PCB for use as instructed by the boot program of the boot ROM.
The following screen remains on the control panel white the CPU is reading the system memory from the HDD into the image memory (SDRAM), with the bar
indicating the progress of the startup sequence.

Progress bar
F-4-16

Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated. The CPU is accessing the HDD, and turning off the power can cause a fault (E602) on the HDD.

4-13

Chapter 4

4.3.2 Overview
0010-1069

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The system software used to control the operation of the machine is stored on the HDD.
When the machine is started up, the CPU on the main controller PCB reads the system software from the HDD into the image memory (DDR-SDRAM) of the main
controller PCB for use as instructed by the boot program of the boot ROM.
The following screen remains on the control panel white the CPU is reading the system memory from the HDD into the image memory (DDR-SDRAM), with the
bar indicating the progress of the startup sequence.

Progress bar
F-4-17

Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated. The CPU is accessing the HDD, and turning off the power can cause a fault (E602) on the
HDD.

4.3.3 Start-Up Sequence

0010-1074

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Start-Up Sequence
<Boot Program Area>
- Boot Program (interval 1)
The boot program is executed by the CPU on the main controller PCB when the main power switch is turned on, making checks on the image memory (DDRSDRAM) and the HDD condition.
An error code will be indicated if a fault is detected. If the check ends normally, the control program is read from the HDD to the memory.
<Control Program Area>
- Control Program 1 (interval 2)
1. The individual devices (i.e., hardware components on the controller PCB) are checked and initialized.
2. If the engine was not previously turned off appropriately (i.e., by performing its shut-down sequence), the system files are repaired as necessary. (The engine
may need an extra time when starting up.)
3. The individual program modules are initialized.
- Control Program 2 (interval 3)
1. The individual software modules are initialized, and the printer and screen configurations are established.
2. The start-up sequence ends when the printer and scanner are correctly recognized. Otherwise, an error code (E732/E733) will be indicated at the end of a connection time-out.
The engine becomes ready to accept a job when the start-up sequence ends normally. (Its control panel displays the control screen, and the Start key LED changes
from red to green.)

2
F-4-18

4-14

Chapter 4

System
software

CPU

HDD
ROM
Main controller PCB (main)
: access to the program at time of execution.
: flow of system program operations.
F-4-19

CPU

HDD

ROM

: access to the program at time of execution.

F-4-20

4.3.4 Start-Up Sequence

0000-7741

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1. Boot ROM Area
a. Self-Diagnostic Program (interval 1)
When the main power switch is turned on, the CPU of the main controller PCB runs a self-diagnostic program, which checks the condition of the image memory
(SDRAM) and the HDD. If a fault is found, the machine will indicate its presence by an error code.
b. Boot Program (interval 2)
When the self-diagnostic program ends normally, the CPU on the main controller PCB executes the boot program to read the system software from the HDD, writing
it to the system area of the image memory (SDRAM).
2. Image Memory (SDRAM) Area> (interval 3)

4-15

Chapter 4

The machine initializes its various parts using the system software written into memory by the boot program (i.e., I/F settings for the main controller).
When all ends normally, the machine becomes ready for a job (indicating the Operation screen on the control panel, and changing the Start LED key from red to
green).

F-4-21

- Self diagnosis program being executed

Image memory (SDRAM)

System area

Image data
area

CPU

HDD
Self diagnosis
program

Boot program

BootROM
Main controller PCB (main)
: access to program at time of execution.
F-4-22

4-16

Chapter 4

- Boot Program in Execution

Image memory (SDRAM)

System area

Image data
area

System
software

CPU

Self
diagnosis
program

Boot
program

HDD

Boot ROM
Main controller PCB (main)
: access to program at time of execution
: flow of system program
F-4-23

4.4 Actions when HDD Error

4.4.1 E602 in Detail
0002-3236

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
If the machine suffers a fault associated with E602-xxyy, it calls for different remedial actions as identified by the sub code.

if E602-xxyy is indicated, be sure always to turn off and then on the machine (so that it will run auto recovery sequence).
T-4-20
xx

Partition

yy

Description

00

HDD as a whole

01

The machine cannot recognize the HDD. The machine cannot find BOOTDEV at time of startup.
Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the 2 types of cables (power, IDE) connecting to the
HDD; then, turn on the power.
When doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if the power is supplied.

02

NG

The machine cannot find the system software for the CPU of the main controller (main) in BOOT DEV.

Remedy:

E
03

NG

The machine detects a read error sector while it is reading data from BOOTDEV.

Remedy:

NG

NG

4-17

Chapter 4
xx

Partition

yy

Description

06

The machine cannot find the system software for the CPU of the main controller (sub) in BOOTDEV.

Remedy:
NG

E
07

The machine cannot find an appropriate ICCProfile in BOOTDEV/PDLDEV.

Remedy:
NG

T-4-21
xx

Partition

yy

Description

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
FF

DOSDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5
not identified

01, 02

The machine has encountered a read error or a file system error while starting up.
Remedy:
NG

NG

if xxyy is 0701, 0702.

Remedy:
Ask the user to use the RUI to collect address book data, transfer settings, and user mode
NG

data.

NG

if xxyy is 0801, 0802.

Remedy:

NG

NG

NG

if xxyy is FF01, FF02.

Remedy:

A
03

NG

The machine has encountered an HDD contact fault or, operating system error.
Remedy:
Turn off the main power, and check the 2 types of cable (power, IDE) connecting to the HDD; then, turn on the main
power.
While doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if power is supplied.

11,21

NG

NG

The machine has encountered an HDD contact fault.

Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the 2 types of cable (power, IDE) connecting to the HDD; then,turn on
the power.
While doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if the power is supplied.

4-18

NG

Chapter 4
xx

Partition

yy

Description

13,25

The machine has encountered a read error.

Remedy:

NG

NG

NG

NG

if xxyy is 0713, 0725.

Remedy:

NG

if xxyy is 0813, 0825.

Remedy:

NG

10,12,14,2 The machine has encountered a system error or a packet data error.
2,23,
24
Remedy:

NG

A:
1) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to perform: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HDCHECK*.
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
B:
1) Find the appropriate CHK-TYPE from the table 'HDD Format' ; then, make the followingselections, and type: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to perform: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR.
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
C:
1)** Start up the machine in normal mode (i.e., turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 7 keys ; then, make the following selections, and press the OK key:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD).
2) Perform formatting of DOSDEV4 using the Service Support Tool.
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
D:
1) Replace the main controller (main) board.
2) Remove the image memory (SDRAM) and the boot ROM from the previous board, and attach them on the new board.
E:
1)** Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the power while pressing the 2 and 8 keys).
2) Format the HDD (ALL) using the Service Support Tool, and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
F:
1)** Replace the HDD, and start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while pressing the 2 and 8 keys).
2) Format the HDD (ALL) using the Service Support Tool, and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
G:
1) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to perform: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR.
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
H:
1) Turn off the main power; then, turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 9 keys (so that the machine will automatically start its remedial program*, turning
the control panel solid black).
2) When done (i.e., when the control panel turns white), turn off and then on the main power.

If the machine does not run its remedial program in response to the foregoing step, go to E.
I:
1) Find the appropriate CHK-TYPE in the table "HDD Format"; then, make the following selections and enter CHK-TYPE.
2) Make the selections, and press the OK key to perform: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK*.
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
J:
1) Make the following selections, and enter '4': OPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to perform: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK (1 to 5 min).
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
* Takes about 30 to 50 min.
** As necessary, ask the user to use the RUI to collect address book data, transfer settings, and user mode settings.

4-19

Chapter 4
T-4-22
HDD Format
Partition

CHK-TYPE

Typical data item deleted

DOSDEV

all relating to images (reservation, Box, fax); mode memory, routine task button

FSTDEV

DOSDEV2

FSTPDEV

DOSDEV3

PDL spool

PDLDEV

PDL-related file (font, registration form, ICCProfile)

DOSDEV4

user data (address book, transfer settings), system software

BOOTDEV

DOSDEV5

non specific

4.4.2 E602 in Detail (iR C3170/C2570, iR C3180/C2580 Series)

0010-1663

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<E602-XXYY>
- XX= '00'

4-20

Chapter 4

XX

YY

Description

Remedy

The HDD is not recognized.

- Turn off the power, and check the HDD cable for
disconnection; then, turn the
power back on.
- Turn on the power, and put your ear or finger against the HDD
to see if the disk inside it is rotating.
- Check if the HDD is run from 5 volt / 12 volt mains.
- Replace the HDD, and then re-install the system.
- Replace the main controller PCB.

The system software for the

main CPU is absent.
At start-up, the start-up partition
(BOOTDEV) is not found.

- Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the

SST; then, re-install the system software, and turn off and then
on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and then re-install the system.

An interrupt has been detected

during writing to BootDevice.

Remedy differs according to an error code screen.

01

02

<The error code screen is black and white>

- Turn off the power, and then back on while pressing 1 and 9 at
a time.
With this operation, recovery of the writing discontinuation
sector will start automatically (the screen is black at this time).
Progress of the recovery is displayed on the screen while the
writing discontinuation sector is being recovered, and the screen
becomes white when the recovery is completed. Then, turn off
and back on the power.
- Start up in safe mode. Execute full formatting using the STT,
and re-install the system. Then, turn off and back on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system.

00

03

<The error core screen is normal (spanner mark)>

- Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HD-CHECK; turn off and back
on the power.
- Start up in safe mode. Execute full formatting using the STT,
and re-install the system. Then, turn off and back on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system.
06

When the system for sub-CPU

is not found:

- Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the

SST; then, re-install the system software, and turn off and then
on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and then re-install the system.

07

When ICC profile is not found: - Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the
SST; then, re-install the system software, and turn off and then
on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and then re-install the system.

08

When the PS Kanji font does

not exist.

- Re-install the system.

- XX= '01 to FF'

4-21

Chapter 4

XX

YY
At start-up

XX

CHKTYPE

Partition

Description

03

05

During operation

00,01,02, 11,2
04
1

Remedy
FSTDEV

compressed image data

(e.g., Box)

IMG_MNG

file management table,

profile

03

FSTCDEV

job archiving (chasing)

04

THUMDEV

Thumbnail

05

APL_GEN

general data

06

TMP_GEN

general data (temporary

file)

07

TMP_FAX

for fax (temporary file)

08

TMP_PSS

for PDL spool

(temporary file)

PDLDEV

PDL related files

01
02

09

10

BOOTDEV

11

APL_MEAP

12

APL_SEND

13

BOOTDEV2

FF

Not
identified

*1

firmware (system,
MEAP, key, certificate,
PDF dictionary, RUI
content, audio
dictionary)

13,2 10,12,14,2
5
2,23,24
Remedy

*5

*9

*3

*8

*1

*5

*2

*6

Firmware (BOOTDEV)
Back-up

*3

*8

full check on HDD for

faulty sector and
recovery

*4

*7

*10

*11

*12

MEAP application

YY

address book, filter

Description

*1

*2

- Ask the user to download the address book data using a remote UI.
- Set CHK-TYPE to the appropriate device number, execute HDCHECK, turn off the
power, and turn it back on.
- Start download mode, and execute full formatting using the SST;
thereafter, turn off and then back on the power.

03

*3

The recovery operation for the boot partition necessarily requires

the use of the SST in safe mode.
- Set '0' for CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CHECK; thereafter, turn
off and then back on the power.
- Start download mode, and execute full formatting and re-install the
system software; thereafter, turn off and then back on the power.

*4

- Set '0' to CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and
then back on the power.
- Execute HD-CLEAR by setting '1', '2', '3', and '5' to CHK-type;
then, turn off and then back on the power.
A file system error has
occurred.

*5

*6
05

4-22

Remedy

An ongoing write operation - Set CHK-TYPE to the appropriate device number, execute HDis interrupted (at start-up). CHECK, turn off the
power, and turn it back on.
- Type in CHK-TYPE that corresponds to the partition in question,
and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power.

- Type in CHK-TYPE corresponding to the partition in question,

and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

The machine does not permit execution of HD-CLEAR in service

mode (to prevent loss of partition information such as address book
and filter data).
- Ask the user to download the address book data using a remote UI.
- Start download mode from service mode; then, execute full
formatting using
the SST, and re-install the system software. Thereafter, turn off and
then back on the power.

*7

- Execute HD-CLEAR by setting "1', '2', '3', and '5' to CHK-TYPE;

then, turn off and then back on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

*8

Recovery operation for the Boot partition necessarily requires the

use of the SST in safe mode.
- Start in safe mode, and execute full formatting in the SST, and reinstall the system software. Thereafter, turn off and then on the
power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

Chapter 4
YY

*9

00
01
02
04

*10

11
21

Description

Remedy

There is poor contact for the - Check the cables and power cord for disconnection.
HDD, or there is a system - Start up in safe mode; then, execute full formatting using the SST,
error.
and re-install the system software. Thereafter, turn off and then back
on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

There is poor connection of - Check the cable and the power connectors for disconnection.
the HDD.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

A write operation has been

suspended.

*11

13
25

*12

10
12
14
22
23
24

It is highly possible that document data in boxes on HDD is

damaged.
- Set CHK-TYPE to the appropriate device number, execute HDCHECK, turn off the
power, and turn it back on.
- Set CHK-TYPE to the appropriate device number, execute HDCLEAR, turn off the
power, and turn it back on.
(For BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2, or APL_SEND, re-format using
SST, and re-install the system.)
- Replace HDD, and then re-install the system.

There is a system error or a - Start up in safe mode; then, execute full formatting using the SST,
packet data error.
and re-install the system software. Thereafter, turn off and then back
on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

4.5 Image Processing

4.5.1 Construction of Image Processing Modules
0009-9775

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The device uses a main controller (main) and other 4 types of main controllers (sub) to process image data. The modules associated with image processing are as
follows:
[A]

[B]

HDD
[D]

[C]

DDR-SDRAM

F-4-24
T-4-23
PCB

[1]

Description

system control, memory control, printer

Main controller PCB (main) output image processing control

4-23

Chapter 4
PCB

Description

[2]

color space conversion, resolution conversion,

Main controller PCB (sub R- binary processing, image merge, image shift,
A)
rotation, compression expansion

[3]

Main controller PCB (sub

PE-A)

printer output image processing (color space

compression, background removal, LGO
conversion, direct mapping, color balance,
zoom fine-adjustment, gradation conversion,
screen processing, framing, add-on)

[4]

Main controller PCB (sub

SJ-A)

scanner interface, scanner image processing

(resolution conversion, image rotation,
compression expansion)

[5]

Main controller PCB (sub

LAN-bar-A)

LAN connection, HDD controller, HDD

power supply, USB-Host, USB-Device

[A]

Reader unit

[B]

Reader controller PCB

[C]

Main controller PCB (main)

[D]

DC controller PCB

4.5.2 Reader Input Image Processing

0000-7750

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The image data (RGB data) collected by the contact image sensor is processed by the main controller PCB (sub SJ-A, sub R-A, sub PE-A).

4-24

Chapter 4

Reader unit
RGB

24
Main controller PCB
(sub SJ-A, sub R-A,
sub PE-A)

RGB phase correction

Processing taking the place

of conventional masking.
Executes color correction
for the CCD RGB filters.

Input gamma correction

Input direct mapping

- Edge enhancement
- Smoothing

If mono-color mode,
only Bk signals hereafter.

- See-though prevention (BE)

- Bk generation
(mono-color mode)

- Framing
- Blanking
- Frame erasing
CMYK

Main controller PCB (main)

F-4-25

4.5.3 Compression, Decompression, and Edit Processing Blocks

0009-9786

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The main controller PCB processes data for compression, decompression, and editing.

Reader unit
RGB
Main controller PCB
(main + sub)

24

4 Image area signal

JPEG
compression
JPEG
decompression

Resolution conversion
Magnification processing
Rotation

PDL input
IC1

Color conversion
JPEG
compression

PC

Binary processing

JPEG decompression
DDR-SDRAM

HDD

F-4-26

4.5.4 Printer Output Image Processing

0009-9789

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

4-25

Chapter 4
The main controller processes the image data arriving from the reader unit for output to the printer unit.
Reader unit

RGB

Here, the Bk signal is generated

if an ACS session identifies the
original as being black-and-white.
(Otherwise, it is let through.)

In color mode, the Bk signal

is generated here.

24

Main controller PCB

(main + sub (R-A)/
(sub PE-A)
RGB

24

Image area
signal

- Background removal
- Bk generation
RGB->CMY conversion
Output direct mapping

For the text area,

UCR processing is executed.

A correction LUT is prepared

as part of PASCAL control.

CMYK
- F value adjustment
- Color balance correction
Output gamma correction
Optimum screen selection
Smoothing
- Framing
- Blanking
CMYK

To DC controller PCB

Y,M,C,Bk

32

Image area
signal

- Image data
serial/parallel conversion
- Video count

F-4-27

4.5.5 Construction of Image Processing Modules

0017-6683

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The device uses a main controller (main) and other 3 types of main controllers (sub) to process image data. The modules associated with image processing are as
follows:

4-26

Chapter 4

[A]

[B]

HDD
[D]

[C]

DDR-SDRAM

F-4-28
T-4-24
PCB

Description

[1]

system control, memory control, printer

output image processing control, color space
conversion, resolution conversion, binary
processing, image merge, image shift,
Main controller PCB (main) rotation, compression expansion

[2]

Main controller PCB (sub

PE-A)

printer output image processing (color space

compression, background removal, LGO
conversion, direct mapping, color balance,
zoom fine-adjustment, gradation conversion,
screen processing, framing, add-on)

[3]

Main controller PCB (sub

SJ-A)

scanner interface, scanner image processing

(resolution conversion, image rotation,
compression expansion)

[4]

Main controller PCB (sub

LAN-bar-C)

LAN connection, HDD controller, HDD

power supply, USB-Host, USB-Device

[A]

Reader unit

[B]

Reader controller PCB

[C]

Main controller PCB (main)

[D]

DC controller PCB

4-27

Chapter 4

4.5.6 Reader Input Image Processing

0017-6685

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The image data (RGB data) collected by the contact image sensor is processed by the main controller PCB (sub SJ-A, sub PE-A).
Reader unit
RGB

24
Main controller PCB
(sub SJ-A, sub PE-A)

RGB phase correction

Processing taking the place

of conventional masking.
Executes color correction
for the CCD RGB filters.

Input gamma correction

Input direct mapping

- Edge enhancement
- Smoothing

If mono-color mode,
only Bk signals hereafter.

- See-though prevention (BE)

- Bk generation
(mono-color mode)

- Framing
- Blanking
- Frame erasing
CMYK

Main controller PCB (main)

F-4-29

4.5.7 Compression, Decompression, and Edit Processing Blocks

0017-6687

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The main controller PCB processes data for compression, decompression, and editing.

Reader unit
RGB
Main controller PCB
(main + sub)

24

4 Image area signal

JPEG
compression
JPEG
decompression

Resolution conversion
Magnification processing
Rotation

PDL input
IC1

Color conversion
JPEG
compression

PC

Binary processing

JPEG decompression
DDR-SDRAM

HDD

F-4-30

4-28

Chapter 4

4.5.8 Printer Output Image Processing

0017-6688

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The main controller processes the image data arriving from the reader unit for output to the printer unit.
Reader unit

RGB

24

Main controller PCB

(main / (sub PE-A)
Here, the Bk signal is generated
if an ACS session identifies the
original as being black-and-white.
(Otherwise, it is let through.)

In color mode, the Bk signal

is generated here.

RGB

24

Image area
signal

- Background removal
- Bk generation
RGB->CMY conversion
Output direct mapping

For the text area,

UCR processing is executed.

A correction LUT is prepared

as part of PASCAL control.

CMYK
- F value adjustment
- Color balance correction
Output gamma correction
Optimum screen selection
Smoothing
- Framing
- Blanking
CMYK

To DC controller PCB

Y,M,C,Bk

32

Image area
signal

- Image data
serial/parallel conversion
- Video count

F-4-31

4.5.9 Outline of the Flow of Image Processing

0000-7745

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

The machine processes images as follows using its various functions:

4-29

Chapter 4

Another iR machine
Original

A
Copying

Scanning

Image data

Printing

- SEND
- FAX
- PullScan
- E-Mail
- PDL Print
- BOX

PC
F-4-32

4.5.10 Construction of the Image Processing Module

0000-7749

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The machine's major image processing is handled by the main controller PCB (main), and the following modules are associated with the work:

Reader unit

Reader controller PCB

Reader input image

processing block

SRAM
PCB

Processes image data

read by the reader unit.

Expansion bus PCB

IC15

Main controller
PCB (sub)

Converts 4-bit serial

image data into 8-bit parallel
image data;controls video count.

- CPU
DC controller PCB
- controls communications
- controls memory access

SDRAM

- image memory
- temporarily stores program

IC15

IC9

IC23

IC12
Main controller
PCB (main)

Processes image data

from IC12 for output
to the printer.

Controls image
input/output.

HDD

F-4-33

4.5.11 Compression/Decompression and Editing Blocks

0000-7753

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
IC12 is used to compress/decompress and edit various data.

4-30

Chapter 4

Reader unit
RGB

24

Main controller PCB (sub)

RGB

24

4-image area signal

Main controller PCB (main)

IC9
Y M C Bk
IC12

PDL input

JPEG
compression

JPEG
decompression

PC

Resolution
conversion/
magnification

Rotation
IC23
Color conversion

JPEG compression

Binary processing

JPEG
decompression

SDRAM

HDD

for fax transmission

F-4-34

4.5.12 Printer Output Image Processing

0000-7754

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
Main controller PCB processes image data from the Reader unit for output to the printer.

4-31

Chapter 4

Reader unit

24

RGB
Main controller PCB (sub)

If ACS identifies the original

as being black-and-white,
the machine generates
the Bk signal here.
(Otherwise, the data is
let to pass through the block.)

If color mode is selected,

the Bk signal is generated here.

RGB

24

RGB

24

area signal

Main controller
PCB (man)

area signal

- background removal (AE)

- Bk generation
RGB-to-CMY conversion
output direct mapping

The text area is subjected

to UCR processing.

The correction LUT is prepared

as part of PASCAL control.

CMYK
- F value adjustment
- color balance correction
output gamma correction
Best screen selection
Smoothing
- framing
- blanking
Y,M,C,Bk

To DC controller
PCB

Y,M,C,Bk

24

area signal

- image data serial/

parallel conversion
- video count

F-4-35

4.6 Flow of Image Data

4.6.1 Flow of Image Data (copier function)
0000-7755

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

4-32

Chapter 4

Reader unit
24

RGB

Main controller
PCB (sub)
RGB

image area signal

24

Main controller PCB (main)

DC controller PCB

JPEG
compression

Magnification

Rotation
JPEG
decompression

Color conversion

SDRAM
HDD
F-4-36

4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions

0009-9805

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The following shows the flow of image data when a copier function is being used:

Reader unit
Main controller PCB
(main) + (sub R-A) +
(sub PE-A)
RGB
DC controller PCB

JPEG
decompression
JPEG
compression

24

Image signal

Magnification
Rotation
Color conversion

DDR-SDRAM
HDD
F-4-37

4.6.3 Flow of Image Data (Box function)

0000-7757

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

4-33

Chapter 4

Reader unit
24

RGB

Main controller
PCB (sub)
RGB

24

image area signal

Main controller PCB (main)

DC controller PCB

Decompression
conversion

JPEG
decompression
JPEG
compression

Rotation

SDRAM
HDD
F-4-38

4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions

0009-9807

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The following shows the flow of image data when a Box function is being used:
Reader unit
Main controller PCB
(main) + (sub SJ-A) +
(sub R-A) + (sub PE-A)

RGB
DC controller PCB

24

Image area signal

JPEG
decompression

Resolution
conversion

JPEG
compression

Rotation

DDR-SDRAM
HDD
F-4-39

4.6.5 Flow of Image Data (SEND function)

0000-7760

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

4-34

Chapter 4

Reader unit
RGB

24

Main controller
PCB (sub)
RGB

image area signal

24

Main controller PCB (main)

Resolution
conversion

JPEG
decompression

for B/Wimage

Binary
processing

Rotation
JPEG
compression

MMR
compression

HDD
SDRAM

Image conversion board

Ethernet board
F-4-40

4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for SEND Functions

0009-9808

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The following shows the flow of image data when a SEND function is used:
Reader unit
Main controller PCB
(main) + (sub SJ-A) +
(sub R-A) + (sub PE-A)

RGB

For
black-and-white
image

24

Image signal

JPEG decompression

Resolution conversion

JPEG compression

Rotation

Binary processing
MMR compression
HDD

DDR-SDRAM

Main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A)

F-4-41

4.6.7 Flow of Image Data (fax transmission)

0000-7764

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The following shows the flow of image data when fax transmission functions are used:

4-35

Chapter 4

Reader unit
24

RGB

Main controller
PCB (sub)
image area signal

RGB
Main controller PCB (main)
JPEG
compression

Resolution
conversion

JPEG
decompression

Rotation

MMR
compression

Binary
processing
HDD

SDRAM

Image conversion board

Fax board
F-4-42

4.6.8 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions

0009-9812

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The following shows the flow of image data when a fax transmission function is being used:
Reader unit

Main controller PCB

(main) + (sub SJ-A) +
(sub R-A) + (sub PE-A))

Image area signal

RGB
JPEG compression

Resolution conversion

JPEG decompression Rotation

MMR compression

Binary processing

HDD
SDRAM

Fax unit

F-4-43

4.6.9 Image Data Flow for Fax Reception Functions

0000-7766

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

4-36

Chapter 4

DC controller PCB

Main controller PCB (main)

Resolution
conversion
Rotation

HDD
SDRAM

Image conversion board

Fax board
F-4-44

4.6.10 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions

0009-9816

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The following shows the flow of image data when a fax reception function is being used:
DC controller PCB

Main controller PCB

(main + sub)
Resolution conversion
Rotation

HDD
SDRAM

Fax unit
F-4-45

4.6.11 Flow of Image Data (PDL function)

0000-7770

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

4-37

Chapter 4

Display list data

GDI-UFR
Reader unit
LIPS data
LIPS

RGB

Main controller
PCB (sub)
CMYK

PS

PS pint server
unit*1
RGB

PS data

Open interface
board*1
RGB

CMYK

UFR board

Printer output image processing block

Main controller
PCB (main)

DC controller
PCB

IC9

IC12
JPEG compression
IC23
JPEG compression

SDRAM

HDD
F-4-46

4.6.12 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions

0009-9817

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The following shows the flow of image data when a PDL function is being used:
Direct Print
Expansion Kit-D1

RGB

LIPS data

RGB

LIPS V/PS Expansion Kit-D1

PS Print Server
Unit-E1

PS data

CMYK

PS

JPEGTIFF/PDF

DISPLAY LIST data

LIPS LX

Main controller PCB

(sub LAN-bar-A)

Main controller PCB

(sub 0-A)

Main controller PCB (main + sub)

DC controller PCB
JPEG compression
JPEG decompression

DDR-SDRAM
HDD

F-4-47

4.6.13 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions

0017-6699

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

4-38

Chapter 4

The following shows the flow of image data when a copier function is being used:

Reader unit
Main controller PCB
(main) + (sub PE-A)

RGB
DC controller PCB

JPEG
decompression
JPEG
compression

24

Image signal

Magnification
Rotation
Color conversion

DDR-SDRAM
HDD
F-4-48

4.6.14 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions

0017-6700

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The following shows the flow of image data when a Box function is being used:
Reader unit
Main controller PCB
(main) + (sub SJ-A) +
(sub PE-A)

RGB
DC controller PCB

24

Image area signal

JPEG
decompression

Resolution
conversion

JPEG
compression

Rotation

DDR-SDRAM
HDD
F-4-49

4.6.15 Flow of Image Data for SEND Functions

0017-6701

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The following shows the flow of image data when a SEND function is used:

4-39

Chapter 4

Reader unit
Main controller PCB
(main) + (sub SJ-A) +
(sub PE-A)

RGB

For
black-and-white
image

24

Image signal

JPEG decompression

Resolution conversion

JPEG compression

Rotation

Binary processing
MMR compression
HDD

DDR-SDRAM

Main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A)

F-4-50

4.6.16 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions

0017-6702

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The following shows the flow of image data when a fax transmission function is being used:
Reader unit

Main controller PCB

(main) + (sub SJ-A) +
(sub PE-A))

Image area signal

RGB
JPEG compression

Resolution conversion

JPEG decompression Rotation

MMR compression

Binary processing

HDD
SDRAM

Fax unit

F-4-51

4.6.17 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions

0017-6703

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The following shows the flow of image data when a fax reception function is being used:

4-40

Chapter 4

DC controller PCB

Main controller PCB

(main + sub)
Resolution conversion
Rotation

HDD
SDRAM
F-4-54

2) Free the wire saddle [1], and slide the DC controller PCB base [2] in the
direction of the arrow.
Fit the removed screw in the hole [3]; then, temporarily fix the DC controller PCB base [2] in place.

Fax unit
F-4-52

4.6.18 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions

0017-6704

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The following shows the flow of image data when a PDL function is being
used:
Direct Print
Expansion Kit-D1

RGB

LIPS data

RGB

LIPS V/PS Expansion Kit-D1

PS Print Server
Unit-E1

PS data

CMYK

PS

JPEGTIFF/PDF

DISPLAY LIST data

LIPS LX

F-4-55

Main controller PCB

(sub LAN-bar-A)

Main controller PCB

(sub 0-A)

3) Disconnect the 10 connectors [1] of the main controller PCB; then, remove the 8 wire saddles.
If a fax unit is installed, you will have to disconnect 12 connectors in the
case of a Japanese model or 11 connectors in the case of a non-Japanese
model.

Main controller PCB (main + sub)

DC controller PCB
JPEG compression
JPEG decompression

DDR-SDRAM
HDD

F-4-53

4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure

F-4-56

4.7.1 Controller Box

4.7.1.1 Removing the Controller Box
0000-9917

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Remove the 7 screws [1].
Free the DC controller PCB base [2]. (You need not detach it.)

4-41

Chapter 4

F-4-57

4) Remove the 7 screws, and detach the controller box [2].

F-4-61

4.7.1.2 Before Removing Controller Box

0017-5437

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the controller box cover [2].
- 9 screws [1]

F-4-58

F-4-62

3) Detach the rear left cover (upper). (page 10-18)[Detaching Rear Left
Cover (Upper)]
4) Remove the controller fan. (page 4-55)[Removing Controller Fan]
F-4-59

4.7.1.3 Before Removing Controller Box

0017-7656

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the controller box cover [2].
- 16 screws [1]
[2]

[1]

[1]
F-4-60

[1]

If a fax unit is installed, you will find a connector [1] on the modular
PCB found behind the controller box. Be sure to disconnect this connector before detaching the controller box from the machine.

[1]
F-4-63

3) Detach the rear left cover (upper). (page 10-18)[Detaching Rear Left
Cover (Upper)]
4) Remove the controller fan. (page 4-55)[Removing Controller Fan]

4-42

Chapter 4

4.7.1.4 Removing Controller Box

0010-1379

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1) Remove the 7 screws [1] found at the DC controller PCB base.

Free the DC controller PCB mount [2]; need not remove it.

F-4-67

5) Remove the controller box [2].

- 7 screws [1]

F-4-64

2) Detach the wire saddle [1] and slide the DC controller PCB base [2] in the
direction of the arrow.
3) Fit the removed screw with the hole [3] and temporally fix the DC controller PCB base [2] in place.

F-4-68

F-4-65

4) Disconnect the 11 connectors [1] of the main controller PCB (main) and
free the cable from the 6 wire saddles [2].

F-4-69

When FAX is installed, there are 13 connectors (JPN) or 10 connectors

(other than JPN).

F-4-70
MEMO:
If the FAX is installed, remove the 3 screws [1] and detach the modular
board fixing plate [2].

F-4-66

4-43

Chapter 4

4.7.2 Main Controller PCB (main)

4.7.2.1 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (main)
0017-5440

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the controller box cover [2].
- 9 screws [1]

F-4-73

3) Disconnect the connector [1] of the controller fan.

F-4-74

4) Remove the boot ROM [1] and the image memory (SDRAM) [2].
F-4-71

3) Detach the rear left cover (upper). (page 10-18)[Detaching Rear Left
Cover (Upper)]

4.7.2.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)

0000-8109

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Remove the 7 screws.
Free the DC controller PCB base [2]. (You need not detach it.)

F-4-75

5) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

F-4-72

2) Free the wire saddle [1], and slide the DC controller PCB base [2] in the
direction of the arrow.
Fit the removed screw in the hole [3], and temporarily fix the DC controller PCB base in place.

F-4-76

6) Remove the screws [1] [3] [5] [7], 3 pc. each; then, detach the following:
- expansion bus PCB [2]

4-44

Chapter 4
- main controller PCB (sub) [4]
- UFR board [6]
- Ethernet board [8]

F-4-80
F-4-77

7) Disconnect the 10 connectors [1], and remove the 8 screws [2]; then, slide
the main controller PCB (main) [3] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
If a fax unit is installed, you will have to disconnect 12 connectors [1] in
the case of a Japanese model or 11 connectors in the case of a non-Japanese model.

F-4-81

4.7.2.4 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (main)

0017-7657

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
F-4-78

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the controller box cover [2].
- 16 screws [1]
[2]

[1]

[1]
[1]
F-4-79

4.7.2.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)

0000-8110

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
When you have mounted the main controller PCB (main), be sure to mount
the PCBs you may have removed before starting the work:
[1] Boot ROM
[2] Image memory (SDRAM)
[3] Expansion bus PCB
[4] Main controller PCB (sub)
[5] UFR board
[6] Ethernet board

[1]
F-4-82

3) Detach the rear left cover (upper). (page 10-18)[Detaching Rear Left
Cover (Upper)]

4.7.2.5 Removing Main Controller PCB (main)

0010-0461

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove the 7 screws found at the DC controller PCB base.

Free the DC controller PCB base [2]; need not remove it.

4-45

Chapter 4

F-4-87
F-4-83

2) Detach the wire saddle [1] and slide the DC controller PCB base [2] in the
direction of the arrow.
3) Fit the removed screw with the hole [3] and temporally fix the DC controller PCB base [2] in place.

7) Remove the following 5 PCBs from the main controller PCB (main).
- Main controller PCB (sub R-A)
- Main controller PCB (sub PE-A)
- Relay PCB (Gu-short)
- Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A)
- Main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A)

F-4-88

8) Lift the main controller PCB (main) and remove it.

- All connectors [1]
- 8 screws [2]

F-4-84

4) Disconnect the connector [1] of the controller fan.

F-4-89

F-4-85

5) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the main controller PCB (sub LANbar-A).

F-4-90

4.7.2.6 Removing Main Controller PCB (main)

F-4-86

0017-7140

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

6) Remove the 10 screws [1] at the side of the controller box.

1) Remove the 7 screws found at the DC controller PCB base.

4-46

Chapter 4

Free the DC controller PCB base [2]; need not remove it.

F-4-94

6) Remove the 8 screws [1] at the side of the controller box.

F-4-91

2) Detach the wire saddle [1] and slide the DC controller PCB base [2] in the
direction of the arrow.
3) Fit the removed screw with the hole [3] and temporally fix the DC controller PCB base [2] in place.
[1]

[1]

F-4-95

7) Remove the following 4 PCBs from the main controller PCB (main).
- Main controller PCB (sub PE-A)
- Relay PCB (Gu-short)
- Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A)
- Main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A)

[1]

F-4-92

4) Disconnect the connector [1] of the controller fan.

F-4-96

8) Remove the HDD [2].

- 4 screws [1]

[1]
[1]
[2]

F-4-93

5) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the main controller PCB (sub LANbar-A).

[1]
F-4-97

9) Remove the following 4 parts:

- 1 SRAM [1]
- 1 Boot ROM [2]
- 2 SDRAMs [3]

4-47

Chapter 4

[2]
[3]

[3]
[1]
F-4-98

10) Remove the main controller PCB (main) [2].

- 15 connectors
- 8 screws [1]
F-4-100

[1]

3) Detach the rear left cover (upper). (page 10-18)[Detaching Rear Left
Cover (Upper)]

4.7.3.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub)

0000-8112

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[1]

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main controller PCB (sub) [2].

[1]

[2]
F-4-99

4.7.2.7 After Replacing Main Controller PCB (main)

0010-0465

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

After replacing the main controller PCB (main), be sure to put back all the
PCBs so far removed.
- Boot ROM
- Image memory (DDR-SDRAM)
- Main controller PCB (sub R-A)
- Main controller PCB (sub PE-A)
- Relay PCB (Gu-short)
- Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A)
- Main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A)
- HDD

F-4-101

4.7.3.3 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (sub)

0017-7658

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear right cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Right Cover]
2) Detach the controller box cover [2].
- 16 screws [1]

4.7.2.8 After Replacing Main Controller PCB (main)

[2]

[1]

0017-7141

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
After replacing the main controller PCB (main), be sure to put back all the
PCBs so far removed.
- Boot ROM
- Image memory (DDR-SDRAM)
- Main controller PCB (sub PE-A)
- Relay PCB (Gu-short)
- Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A)
- Main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A)
- HDD

[1]
[1]

4.7.3 Main Controller PCB (sub)

4.7.3.1 Before Removing Main Controller PCB (sub)
0017-5442

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the rear right cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Right Cover]
2) Detach the controller box cover [2].
- 9 screws [1]

[1]
F-4-102

3) Detach the rear left cover (upper). (page 10-18)[Detaching Rear Left
Cover (Upper)]

4.7.3.4 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub-R-A)

0010-1308

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove the main controller PCB (sub R-A) [2].
- 2 screws [1]

4-48

Chapter 4

F-4-106
F-4-103

4.7.3.8 Removing Relay PCB (Gu-short)

0017-7662

4.7.3.5 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub PE-A)

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
0010-1371

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove relay PCB (Gu-short) [2].

- 2 screws [1]

1) Remove the main controller PCB (sub PE-A) [2].

- 2 screws [1]

[1]

[2]

F-4-107

4.7.3.9 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub SJ-A)

F-4-104

0010-1372

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

4.7.3.6 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub PE-A)

0017-7661

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1) Remove the main controller PCB (sub SJ-A) [2].

- 2 screws [1]

1) Remove the main controller PCB (sub PE-A) [2].

- 2 screws [1]
[1]

[2]

F-4-108

4.7.3.10 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub SJ-A)

0017-7663

F-4-105

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

4.7.3.7 Removing Relay PCB (Gu-short)

0010-1322

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove the main controller PCB (sub SJ-A) [2].

- 2 screws [1]

1) Remove relay PCB (Gu-short) [2].

- 2 screws [1]

4-49

Chapter 4

[1]

[1]

[2]

F-4-109

4.7.3.11 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A)

0010-1373

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[1]

F-4-112

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

2) Remove the main controller PCB (sub LAN-ber-A) [3].
- 2 screws [2]

2) Remove the rear cover (right) [1]. (9 screws [3])

[2]

[1]

[2]

[2]

F-4-110

F-4-113

4.7.3.12 Removing Main Controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A)

0017-7664

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

4.7.4.2 Removing the SRAM Board

0002-0214

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

2) Remove the main controller PCB (sub LANber-C) [3].
- 2 screws [2]

1) Free the 2 locks [1], and detach the SRAM board [2].

[2]

[3]

[1]
F-4-114

F-4-111

4.7.4.3 Removing the Expansion Bus PCB

4.7.4 Expansion Bus PCB

0000-9926

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

4.7.4.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right)

0002-4092

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the DDIS cable.

4-50

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the expansion bus PCB [2].

Chapter 4

[2]

[1]

[2]

F-4-115

4.7.4.4 After Replacing the Expansion Bus PCB

[2]

0000-9929

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

F-4-118

Mount the SRAM PCB [1] removed for the old extension bus PCB to the extension bus PCB [2] you have newly mounted.

4.7.5.2 Removing the SRAM Board

0000-8114

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Free the 2 locks [1], and detach the SRAM board [2].

F-4-116

F-4-119

4.7.5 SRAM PCB

4.7.5.3 After Replacing the SRAM Board

4.7.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right)

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

0000-8115

0002-4093

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the DDIS cable.
- Inform the user that replacing the SRAM board will cause all image data
in Box to be lost. Be sure to obtain the user's consent before starting the
work.
- Be sure that the SRAM board you are using is a new one.
The machine will be likely to malfunction if you use a RAM that has
been used in a different printer unit.

[1]

1) Replace the SRAM board, and turn on the main power. (The machine will
perform automatic initialization.)
2) See that the machine indicates the message "Turn On the Power Switch on
the Right Side" on its control panel. Turn off and then on the power.
3) Initialize the RAM.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>MN-CON
Make the foregoing selections, and press the OK key.

4.7.6 UFR Board

4.7.6.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right)
0002-4098

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[1]

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the DDIS cable.

F-4-117

2) Remove the rear cover (right) [1]. (9 screws [3])

4-51

Chapter 4

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

F-4-120

F-4-123

2) Remove the rear cover (right) [1]. (9 screws [3])

2) Remove the rear cover (right) [1]. (9 screws [3])

[2]

[2]

[1]

[1]

[2]

[2]

[2]

[2]

F-4-121

F-4-124

4.7.6.2 Removing the UFR Board

4.7.7.2 Removing the Ethernet Board

0002-0137

0000-8206

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the UFR board [2].

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the Ethernet board [2].

F-4-122

F-4-125

4.7.7 Ethernet Board

4.7.8 HDD

4.7.7.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right)

4.7.8.1 Making a Backup of Data (reference only)

0002-4094
0010-3252

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the DDIS cable.

Before replacing HDD, be sure to back up the user data.

The following is a procedure to back up each data.
Making a Backup Using Import/ Export Function from Remove UI
Making a Backup of Address Book
MEMO:
All the address book data is included in the transfer settings when exporting
the transfer settings. There is no need back up the address book unless
specific address book is needed.

1) Enter the following URL to access remove UI.

4-52

Chapter 4
http://[IP address of a device]/
2) Click the additional function mode and select [import/export] from the
displayed menu.
When the system administrator ID and password is set, dialog box that
asks the username and password is displayed. Enter the system administrator ID for username and password, then click [OK].
3) Click [address book].
4) After choosing the file format in which to save the address book and the
file, click [start export].
5) Specify the location to save the files by following the instruction on a
screen.
Be sure to use a name that can be readily recognized at import.
Exporting Transfer Settings
1) Enter the following URL to access remote UI.
http://[IP address for a device]/
2) Click the additional function mode and select [import/export] from the
displayed menu.
When the system administrator ID and password is set, dialog box that
asks the username and password is displayed. Enter the system administrator ID for username and password, then click [OK].
3) Click [transfer settings].
4) After clicking [export], click [start export].
5) Select the location to save the files by following the instruction on the
screen.
Exporting Additional Function Mode
1) Enter the following URL to access remote UI.
http://[IP address for a device]/
2) Click the additional function mode and select [import/export] from the
displayed menu.
When the system administrator ID and password is set, dialog box that
asks the username and password is displayed. Enter the system administrator ID for username and password, then click [OK].
3) Click [additional function mode].
4) After clicking [export], click [start export].
5) Select the location to save the files by following the instruction on the
screen.
Making a Backup Using Device Information Distribution Function
When same type multiple iR devices connected to a network are installed
and, in addition, they have the same device information distribution function,
select one of them as a host device and register the recipients for device information distribution so that enables to synchronize the settings to the other
devices by distributing the information.
For details, see the device information distribution function section in the
Reference Guide.
1) Making the host device settings (distributing side).
Register the recipients of the device information by following settings.
Select: Additional function mode > system control settings > device information distribution settings > recipient
2) Registering the recipient by manual or automatic search.
If using automatic search, press [OK] after selecting the target recipients
from the search result.
3) Checking the setting status of the device information.
Check the setting status of the devices from the host device to make sure
that they are ready for distribution.
4) Making the manual distribution settings.
Make sure the recipient devices are not used from the network or local UI
before performing.
5) Select: additional function mode > system control settings > device information distribution settings > manual distribution
Select the target items from the following and enable it (ON): additional
function mode settings, department ID and address book. Then press
[Next].
If selecting address book, transfer settings and routine job button settings
are also distributed other than address book.
6) After selecting the recipient, press [start manual distribution].
Device information is distributed to the specified recipients. After distribution is completed, check the distribution result.

If system management ID is set, the device cannot receive the information

using device information distribution function. Temporally delete the
system administrator ID on the recipient device and register again after
receiving the information.

Making a Backup of MEAP Application

When MEAP application is installed, the data or license held by MEAP will
be deleted.
If MEAP application is not installed, need not to consider it.
If MEAP application has a backup function, backup the MEAP-specific data
using the function.
As for a license, all the applications must be finished from SMS (Service
Management Service) and a license must be invalidated and invalid license
file must be downloaded.

MEAP backup function using SST

The data backed up using MEAPback of the SST before enabling security
kit must not be returned to the iR machine after the implementation of the
security kit. Likewise, the data backed up after the implementation of a
security kit will not be valid on an iR machine where a security kit is not
enabled.
In other words, the security kit implementation conditions must be the same
before and after backup. MEAP backup function cannot be used to backup
when installing the Kit).
Reinstalling MEAP Application
Although a backup of MEAP application can be made, it cannot be
reinstalled once the Kit is enabled.

The following is a procedure for stopping the MEAP application, invalidating the license and downloading the invalid license file.
See the MEAP SMS administrator guide for more information.
Stop MEAP application, invalidate a license, download/uninstall the
invalid license file
1) Enter the following URL and access SMS.
http://[IP address of a device]:8000/sms/
If a user changed a password for SMS, get a user to enter the password or
get a user to change the password after security operation is enabled.
Default password is "MeapSmsLogin".
2) At application list page, select the corresponding radio button for the application to be stopped and click [disable].
3) Click the application whose license has already been installed and go to
the application/license information page.
4) Click [license management] and click [invalid].
Click [OK] when a screen asks to invalidate a license.
5) From [Download/delete] at the invalid license file, click [download].
Select the location to save the files by following the instruction on a
screen. To identify the application to which the invalid file corresponds,
use a recognizable name.
After downloading the invalid license file into PC, click [delete].
Click [OK] when a screen asks to delete a license.
6) Back to the application list screen and select the corresponding radio button for the application to be uninstalled and click [uninstall].
Click [OK] when a screen asks to uninstall an application.
If there are several applications, repeat the steps from 1 to 6.
User authentication information registered using SDL (Simple Device
Login)
If the login application for MEAP is changed to SDL, user authentication information must be backed up as following steps.
1) Enter the following URL.
http://[IP address for device]:8000/sdl/
2) Login with a user name and a password that is registered as administrator
with SDL.
The following is a default administrator name.
Username: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [User management].
4) Tick [select all] and click [export].
5) Leave the file format and the character code as default and click [start].
6) Select the location to save the files by following the instruction on the
screen and click [save].

Data not permitting backup

Backup cannot be made for the data saved in a box, unsent document or
image synthesis data; therefore, these types of data will be lost.
Be sure to consult with a user about the data not permitting backup and
perform the countermeasure such as printing out the information etc. as
needed.
See the warning items at installation for more information about the data not
permitting backup.

4.7.8.2 Handling HDD

0002-0209

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- When removing the HDD, be sure to protect it against static destruction.

- Be sure to keep the HDD free of impact.

4.7.8.3 Before Removing HDD

0017-5445

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the controller box cover [2].
- 9 screws [1]

4-53

Chapter 4

F-4-126

4.7.8.4 Removing the HDD

0000-8117

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Remove the 6 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then, detach
the HDD unit [3].

HDD, you must also download the card data used by the NSA once again;
otherwise, you will not be able to make use of statistical management
functions of the NSA.
You will first have to format the HDD and download the system software
as for 1 above; thereafter, you need to perform additional steps:
1) Format the HDD.
2) Download the system software.
3) Make the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD
4) Enter a card number.
5) Turn off and then on the machine's main power.
Enter the number of the first card of those to be used for group control,
and press the OK key. (For instance, if the group will be using numbers
between 1 through 1000, enter '1'.)
6) Make a check.
Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control
settings>group ID control>count control; then, check to make sure the
following IDs are made ready: ID00000001 through ID00001000.
7) Set the appropriate addresses.
Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control
settings>network settings>TCP/IP settings>IP address. Then, set the
following addresses: IP address, gateway address, subnet mask.
8) Enter a number.
Make the following selections in Additional Function, and enter a
number: system administrator information settings>system control group
ID/system control ID No.
9) Turn off and then on the machine's main power.

Unless you set up the system control ID and the system control ID No., you
will not be able to register a card to the machine while using NSA.
10) Download the card ID.
Keep the machine in a standby state, and download the card ID through
the NSA.
11) Check the count control.
Make the following selections in Additional Function to bring up the
Count Control screen: system control settings>group ID control; then,
check to see that only the ID data you have downloaded are indicated.
12) Check to see that the operation is normal.
Using a user card that has been registered to the NSA, make copies; then,
check that the number of copies you have made are associated with the
card you have used in the machine.

4.7.8.6 Before Removing HDD

0017-7659

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the controller box cover [2].
- 16 screws [1]

F-4-127

2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the HDD from the HDD unit.

[2]

[1]

[1]
[1]

F-4-128

4.7.8.5 After Replacing the HDD

[1]
0000-8121

F-4-129

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1. If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Not Used
1) Format the HDD.
Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while
holding down the 2 and 8 keys).
Using the SST's HD formatting function, perform formatting of all
partitions. (For details, see the instructions on how to upgrade the
machine.)
2) Download the system software.
Using the SST, download the system, language, and RUI files.
It may take about 5 min for the machine to start up after a download
session.
2. If a Card Reader and NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Are Used
A card ID used by the NSA exists on the HDD. If you have replaced the

4-54

4.7.8.7 Removing HDD

0010-0501

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1) Remove the HDD unit [3] from the host machine.
- 2 connectors [1]
- 6 screws [2]

Be sure not to drop the washer or fastener.

Chapter 4
Cover (Upper)]

4.7.9.2 Removing Controller Fan

0000-8235

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the controller fan [3].
- 1 connector at the host machine side [1]
- 2 screws [2]

F-4-130

2) Detach the cover [2].

- 4 screws [1]

F-4-133

F-4-131

3) Remove the cable [1] and the flat cable [2].

4) Remove the HDD [4] from the HDD unit.
- 4 screws [3]

F-4-132

4.7.8.8 After Replacing HDD

0010-0502

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1) Formating HDD
Start up the machine in SafeMode. (Turn ON the machine while holding
down 2 + 8 keys).
Using the SST's HD formatting function, execute full partition
formatting. (For details, see the chapter on upgrading.)
2) Downloading the System Software Using SST, download the system,
Language, and RUI files.
It may take approximate 5 minutes for the device to start up after
downloading.

4.7.9 Controller Fan

4.7.9.1 Before Removing Controller Fan
0017-5451

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear right cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Right Cover]
2) Detach the rear left cover (upper). (page 10-18)[Detaching Rear Left

4-55

Chapter 5 Original Exposure System

Contents

Contents
5.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-3

5.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................5-4

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ................................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode, 1 original)............................................... 5-5
5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode, 1 original)............................................... 5-5

5.3 Various Control Mechanisms.........................................................................................................................................5-6

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System ........................................................................................................................................ 5-6
5.3.1.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-6
5.3.1.2 Reader Motor Control .....................................................................................................................................................................................5-6

5.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-7

5.3.2.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-7
5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) .................................................................................................................................5-8

5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction................................................................................................................................................................ 5-9

5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction ..............................................................................................................................5-9
5.3.3.2 Changing the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction ................................................................................................................................5-9

5.3.4 Controlling the Scanning Lamp ................................................................................................................................................... 5-9

5.3.4.1 Scanning Lamp................................................................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.3.4.2 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.3.4.3 Activation Control.........................................................................................................................................................................................5-10
5.3.4.4 Error Detection..............................................................................................................................................................................................5-10

5.3.5 Detecting the Size of Originals .................................................................................................................................................. 5-10

5.3.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................5-10
5.3.5.2 Points of Original Size Detection..................................................................................................................................................................5-10
5.3.5.3 Overview of Detection Operation .................................................................................................................................................................5-11

5.3.6 Dirt Sensor Control .................................................................................................................................................................... 5-13

5.3.6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................5-13

5.3.7 Image Processing ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15

5.3.7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................5-15
5.3.7.2 Driving the CCD ...........................................................................................................................................................................................5-16
5.3.7.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction for the CCD Output ........................................................................................................................5-16
5.3.7.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output.............................................................................................................................................................5-16
5.3.7.5 Shading Correction (outline).........................................................................................................................................................................5-17
5.3.7.6 Shading Correction........................................................................................................................................................................................5-17
5.3.7.7 Shading Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................................................................5-17

5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................................................5-17

5.4.1 Copyboard Glass ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-17
5.4.1.1 Detaching Copyboard Glass..........................................................................................................................................................................5-17
5.4.1.2 After Replacing Copyboard Glass ................................................................................................................................................................5-17
5.4.1.3 Detaching ADF Reading Glass .....................................................................................................................................................................5-18
5.4.1.4 After Replacing ADF Reading Glass ...........................................................................................................................................................5-18

5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB .............................................................................................................................................................. 5-18

5.4.2.1 Before Replacing Reader Controller PCB ....................................................................................................................................................5-18
5.4.2.2 Before Detaching Reader Controller PCB ....................................................................................................................................................5-18
5.4.2.3 Detaching Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................5-18
5.4.2.4 After Replacing Reader Controller PCB.......................................................................................................................................................5-20

5.4.3 Inverter PCB .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-21

5.4.3.1 Before Detaching Inverter PCB ....................................................................................................................................................................5-21
5.4.3.2 Detaching Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................................................................................5-21

5.4.4 Scanner Motor............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-21

Contents

5.4.4.1 Removing Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-21

5.4.5 Contact Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................................... 5-21

5.4.5.1 Before Detaching Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ............................................................................................................................................ 5-21
5.4.5.2 Detaching Contact Image Sensor (CIS)........................................................................................................................................................ 5-21
5.4.5.3 After Replacing Contact Image Sensor (CIS)............................................................................................................................................... 5-22

5.4.6 Original Cover Sensor................................................................................................................................................................ 5-22

5.4.6.1 Detaching Copyboard Cover Sensor (front/rear).......................................................................................................................................... 5-22

5.4.7 Contact Sensor HP Sensor ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-23

5.4.7.1 Before Detaching Contact Sensor HP Sensor............................................................................................................................................... 5-23
5.4.7.2 Detaching Contact Sensor HP Sensor........................................................................................................................................................... 5-23

5.4.8 Original Sensor .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-23

5.4.8.1 Before Detaching Document Size Sensor (AB/INCH-configuration).......................................................................................................... 5-23
5.4.8.2 Detaching Document Size Sensor (AB/INCH-configuration)...................................................................................................................... 5-23

5.4.9 Reader Heater (option)............................................................................................................................................................... 5-24

5.4.9.1 Detaching Reader Heater (right)................................................................................................................................................................... 5-24
5.4.9.2 Detaching Reader Heater (left) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-24

Chapter 5

5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions
0000-7715

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following are the major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions associated with the original exposure system:
T-5-1
Item

Description

Source of light

Xenon lamp (white)

Scan

in book mode: scan by a moving contact image sensor (CIS)

in ADF mode: scan by a stationary contact image sensor (CIS; stream

reading)
Reading resolution

600 dpi (main scanning direction) x 600 dpi (sub scanning direction)

Number of gradations

256

Productivity (w/ ADF in use)

28 ipm (single-sided, A4/LTR)

Carriage position detection

by contact image sensor (CIS) HP sensor (PS501)

Magnification

25% to 400%
in main scanning direction: image processing by the main control PCB
(main)

in sub scanning direction: image processing by the main controller PCB

(main)

Lens

rod lens array

CCD

number of lines: 3 (RGB)

Number of pixels: 7488
maximum reading width: 310 mm

CIS drive control

by reader motor (M501)

Scanning lamp activation control

[1] by inverter circuit

[2] error detection

Original size identification

[1] Book Mode

main scanning direction:

by contact image sensor (CIS)

sub scanning mode:

by reflection sensor (AB/Inch)

[2] ADF mode

main scanning direction:

by slide guide in ADF

sub scanning direction:

by photo sensor in ADF

5.1.2 Major Components

0000-7724

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The original exposure system consists of the following major components:

5-1

Chapter 5

Original sensor 2
Reamer motor (M501)
Original sensor 1
Reader controller PCB
Reader heater*1

Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(rear: PS503)

Copyboard cover
Open/closed sensor
(front: PS502)
Reader heater*1
Inverter PCB
CIS HP sensor
(PS501)

Contact image
sensor (CIS)

*1: accessories settings (100/230V model only)

F-5-1
T-5-2
Item

Notation

Contact image sensor (CIS)

Description
xenon lamp (2 pc. of 2400 lx)

Reader motor

M501

pulse motor (carriage drive control)

CIS HP sensor

PS501

photointerrupter (CIS home position detection)

Copyboard cover open/closed

sensor

PS502/PS503

photointerrupter (copyboard cover state (open/

closed) detection)

(PS502)

sub scanning direction by angle of copyboard cover

(lamp ON)
copyboard cove/ADF: 25 deg (approx.)

(PS503)

main scanning direction by angle of copyboard cover

(about 17 deg )

Original sensor 1

---

original size detection (AB)

Original sensor 2

---

original size detection (Inch)

5.1.3 Construction of the Control System

0000-7730

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The control system of the original is constructed as follows:

5-2

Chapter 5

Reader motor drive control

Reader motor (M501)
Rear controller PCB
Scanning lamp activation control

To ADF
To printer
(main controller)

J5
/5 03
04

To printer
1
J5
1

1
J5

J5
1

J5
0

J5
01
J5
05 J5
0

To ADF

0
J5
6

J5

01

J5

01

Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(rear: PS503)

Inverter PCB

Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
CIS HP
(front: PS502)
sensor (PS501)

CIS
CIS control
Image signal

F-5-2

5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB

0000-7731

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following shows the functional construction of the reader controller PCB:

DC24V
DC15V
DC5V
DC3.3V

J500

J502

J501

J504

J505
IC505

J503

IC501
IC513
IC514

IC515
IC517

J506
IC521

IC519
CPU

J510
IC520

IC522

J512

J508

J511

F-5-3
T-5-3
Jack

Description

J500

used to supply power to the ADF.

J501

used for power from the machine (printer unit).

J502

used for communication with the machine (printer unit).

J503

used for communication with the ADF.

J504

used for communication with the ADF.

5-3

Chapter 5
Jack

Description

J505

used for connection to the main motor.

J506

used for connection with the original cover open/closed sensor, CIS HP sensor.

J510

used for connection with the contact image sensor (CIS).

J511

used for connection with the original size sensor (AB/Inch).

J512

used for connection with the inverter PCB.

T-5-4
IC

Description

IC501

reader motor driver

IC505

image data parallel/serial conversion

IC513

EEPROM (backup of service mode settings)

IC514

EEPROM (backup of service mode settings)

IC515

image processing (shading correction)

IC517

A/D converter

IC519

CPU (boot program storage)

IC520

system software storage (flash ROM)

IC521

A/D converter

IC522

A/D converter

5.2 Basic Sequence

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On
0000-7733

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Main power switch

ON

Shading correction

SREADY

STBY

Reader motor
(M501)
Scanning lamp
(LA1)
CIS HP sensor
(PS501)
Shading
position *1

Shading
position

shading
position *1

CIS output offset correction

- scanning lamp intensity stabilization

- CIS output gain adjustment

: forward
: reverse

*1: if the copyboard cover/ADF is 'open', corresponds to the point of original size detection

F-5-4
CIS HP
sensor

HP

Shading
position

Original
leading
edge

Original size
detection
position

*1

1. Check CIS position

2. shading adjustment

3. move to standby position

*1

*1:only if the copyboard cover/ADF is 'open'

F-5-5

5-4

Chapter 5

5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode, 1 original)
0000-7734

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Not if within 1 min
of previous operation
Shading correction
Start key
ON
STBY

SCFW

SCRW

STBY

Reader motor
(M501)
Scanning lamp
CIS HP sensor
(PS501)
Shading
position*1

Shading
position*1

Original
trailing edge

Copyboard glass
start position
Shading
position

: forward
: reverse
*1: if the copyboard cover/ADF is 'open', corresponds to the point of original size detection

F-5-6
CIS HP
sensor

Copyboard glass read

HP
start position

Shading
position

Original Original size

leading
detection
edge
position

*1

*2
1. Check CIS position

original
trailing
edge

*2

2. After shading correction,

move to start position
3. Scan original
*1
4. Mode to standby position

*1: shifts only if the copyboard cover (ADF) is 'open'

*2: only if 1 min or more passed from previous operation.

F-5-7

5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode, 1 original)
0001-4991

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Shading correction
Start key
ON
STBY

SREADY

SCRW

SCFW

STBY

Reader motor
(M501)
Scanning lamp
CIS HP sensor
(PS501)
Shading
position

Shading
position

Stream reading
start position

Original
trailing edge

Shading
position

Shading
position

: forward
: reverse

F-5-8

5-5

Chapter 5

CIS HP
sensor

Stream reading
start position

Copyboard glass reading

start position
HP

Shading
potion

*1
1. Check CIS position

*1

2. Scan original

*1:only if 1 min or more passed since previous operation

F-5-9

5.3 Various Control Mechanisms

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System
5.3.1.1 Overview
0000-7735

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following components are associated with the scanner drive system:

Reader motor

Reader control PCB

Carriage drive belt

[1]

Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(PS503)

Sensor
light-blocking
plate
(reverse)

[3]
[2]

(reverse)

copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(PS502)

Carriage
Contact image
sensor (CIS

CIS HP sensor
Guide shaft
F-5-10

[1] Reader Motor (M501) Drive Signal

used to turn on/off the motor and change its direction/speed of rotation.
[2] Contact Image Sensor (CIS) Home Position sennsaor (PS501) Detection Signal
used to indicate that the contact image sensor (CIS) is in home position,
[3] Copyboard Cover Sensor (front, PS502; rear, PS503) Detection Sugnal
used to indicate the state (open/closed) of the copyboard cover.
used to turn on/off the motor and change its direction/speed of rotation.
[2] Contact Image Sensor (CIS) HP Sensor (PS501) Detection Signal
used to indicate that the contact image sensor (CIS) is in home position.
[3] Copyboard Cover Sensor (front, PS502; rear, PS503) Detection Signal
Used to indicate the state (open/closed) of the copyboard cover.

5.3.1.2 Reader Motor Control

0000-7738

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

5-6

Chapter 5
The reader motor driver turns on/off the reader motor and controls its direction/speed of rotation.

Reader control PCB

3.3V

+5V +24V

OPT_MCK
CCW
MD_POW

CPU

Motor
driver

M_ENABLE
RETURN
M_VREF

J505
1
2
3
4

B*
B
A
A*

M501

F-5-11

<Memo>
The machine uses any of the following scan speeds according to selected mode:
T-5-5
Function

Mode

Scan speed

Copy

full color mode

118 mm/sec

black-and-white mode

118 mm/sec

full-color mode (originals other than of 300 dpi or lower;

320x450m 12"x18")

236 mm/sec

full-color mode (originals of 300 dpi or lower; 320x450,

12"x18")

118 mm/sec

black-and-white mode

236 mm/sec

SEND

a. Moving Forward to Scan an Image

when scanning the image, the machine controls the contact image sensor (CIS) by controlling the motor as follows:

Start position

Original
trailing edge

Original leading edge

Accelerated

Stop

Normal speed

Decelerated

[3]

[4]

Travel
speed
[1]

[2]

Travel distance
[1] acceleration area: accelerates to a speed suited to the selected mode.
[2] margin area: drives to ensure a specific speed.
[3] image read area: scans an image at a specific speed.
[4] deceleration area: after the trailing edge of the image, decelerates and stops.

F-5-12

b. Moving in Reverse After an Image Scan

The machine maintains a specific speed (147 mm/sec) to move the contact image sensor (CIS) to shading position after making an image scan.

5.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS)

5.3.2.1 Overview
0001-3293

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine uses a contact image sensor (CIS) to read images, line-by line.
T-5-6
Item

Description

Scanning lamp

used to illuminate originals.

5-7

Chapter 5
Item

Description

Rod lens array

used to collect light reflected by originals.

CCD array

used to collect reflected light coming through a rod lens array.

Image reading line

Copyboard glass

Scanning lamps

(scan direction)
Rod lens array

Scanning lamps
CCD array

CCD
F-5-13

5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor (CIS)

0002-1329

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The contact image sensor (CIS) read images in keeping with the following flow of analog image processing:
uses a rod lens array to collect light reflected by the original.
-> receives light using a CCD array.
-> uses the CCD array to turn the light into an electrical signal (photo conversion), thus preparing output.
The machine's CCD array consists of 16 channels (units) in total. Each of these channels is equipped with an output correction table, and generates image signals
after gain correction on input intensity signals.

5-8

Chapter 5

Ideal output characteristics

CCD channel (x 16)

Output

Actual output
characteristics

ci
rc
ui
t

D
riv
er

14

13

14

14
15
16

16

15

16

15

ls
ixe

p
68

13

12

13

12

11

12

11

10

11

10

10

Input

F-5-14

If any of the following occurs, be sure to execute the following service mode item to correct the output among the channels:
- there is a difference in the output of the image density among channels after replacement of the contact image sensor (CIS).
- the CCD-LUT setting is not 0 after replacement of the reader controller PCB.
<Service Mode>
- setting CIS unit gain correction data
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CCD-LUT
CCD Gain Fine Correction
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ2
(making adjustments using a D-10 chart)

5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction
5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction
0000-7742

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Book mode, ADF in use
The machine reads the original in main scanning direction at 100%; any change needed in magnification is made by processing data on the main controller PCB
(main).

5.3.3.2 Changing the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction

0000-7756

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Book mode, ADF in use
The machine reads the original in sub scanning direction at 100%; any change needed in magnification is made by processing data on the main controller PCB
(main).

5.3.4 Controlling the Scanning Lamp

5.3.4.1 Scanning Lamp
0000-7763

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's scanning lamp is a xenon lamp, in which xenon gas is sealed inside a tube. Along the glass tube are 2 electrodes, while the inside the glass tube is
coated with phosphorous material. When a high-frequency voltage is applied to the electrodes, electrons occur within the gas, thus causing the phosphorous material
to emit light.

Electrode

Electrode

Fluorescent
medium

Opening
Glass tube

Electrode

Electrode
F-5-15

5.3.4.2 Overview
0000-7759

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

5-9

Chapter 5

The scanning lamp is controlled for the following, and is composed of the items indicated:
- activation/de-activation
- error detection
CIS
Inverter PCB

Xenon tube
1
2
3

J5018
1
2
3
4

Activation
control circuit

Reader controller PCB

J5015
J512
GND
3
1
LANP_ON
2
2
14.5V
1
3

CPU

F-5-16

5.3.4.3 Activation Control

0000-7765

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The scanning lamp is turned on/off using the drive signal (LAMP_ON) generated by the CPU of the reader controller PCB. In response to the signal, the inverter
PCB uses the drive voltage (+16 V) from the reader controller PCB to generate high-frequency voltage in the activation control circuit to turn on the xenon lamp.

5.3.4.4 Error Detection

0000-7768

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

An error in the intensity of the lamp is checked against the presence/absence of a fault when the lamp is initially tuned on (e.g., at time of shading correction).
E225 (CIS intensity error)
- fault in the inverter PCB
- fault in the reader controller PCB
- fault in the contact image sensor (CIS)
- fault in the flexible cable (poor contact)

5.3.5 Detecting the Size of Originals

5.3.5.1 Overview
0000-7771

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine identifies the size of an original based on the measurements it takes of the light reflected by the original at specific points of the CCD (inside the CIS)
and the output of the reflection sensor.
main scanning direction: CCD (4 points for AB; 3 points for Inch)
sub scanning direction: reflection photosensor (1 point for AB; 1 point for Inch)
1) External Light Search (main scanning direction only)
While keeping the scanning lamp on, the machine measures the level of light at specific points of the CCD for main scanning direction.
2) Detecting the Sensor Output Level
The machine turns on the scanning lamp, and measures the CCD levels at individual points of detection in main scanning direction.
The machine also turns on the reflection photosensor and measures its output for sub scanning direction.
The machine identifies the size of the original based on the resulting combination of the measurement and the output.

5.3.5.2 Points of Original Size Detection

0000-7775

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The length in main scanning direction is measured by checking the intensify of light at specific points while moving the contact image sensor (CIS) to a point 30
mm from the leading edge of the original. The length in sub scanning direction, on the other hand, is measured by means of the sensors mounted to the following
locations:

5-10

Chapter 5

AB-Configuration
Sub scanning direction

Main scanning direction

Butting point

Index plate

Original sensor 1

Point of original
detection 1

B5R

Point of original
A5
detection 2
Point of original
detection 3
Point of original
detection 4

A4R
B5

B4
A3

A4

Original size detection position

30mm

Inch-Configuration
Sub scanning direction
Index plate

Main scanning direction

Butting point

Original sensor 2

Point of original
detection 1

STMT-R

Point of original
detection 2

LTR-R

Point of original
detection 3

LGL

LTR

11"

17"

Original size detection position

30mm

F-5-17

5.3.5.3 Overview of Detection Operation

0000-7776

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Book Mode
1 original (A4R), copyboard cover (or ADF) closed
1. Standby
CIS: in home position
xenon lamp: off
original sensor: off
CIS

Original sensor

Copyboard cover
Reader unit

point of detection 1
point of detection 2
point of detection 3
point of detection 4
point of detection 5
Copyboard glass

CIS HP

F-5-18

2. Copyboard Cover Opened

CIS: moves to point of original detection
xenon lamp: off
original sensor: off

5-11

Chapter 5

Original sensor

(External light)

1
2
3
4
5
Original size detection position

F-5-19

3. Copyboard Cover Closed (15 deg C or more, less than 25 deg C )

a. External Light Detection
The machine executes an external light search.

Original sensor

25
(External light)

1
2
3
4
5

Original(A4R)

Original size detection position

F-5-20

b. Size Detection in Sub Scanning Direction

The copyboard cover sensor identifies a "closed" state.
CIS: at point of original detection
xenon lamp: off
original sensor: on

Original sensor
1
2
3
4
5

25

Original(A4R)

Original size detection position

F-5-21

4. Copyboard Cover Closed (less than 15 deg C)

c. Size Detection in Main Scanning Direction
The machine turns on the xenon lamp inside the CIS, and uses the CCD inside the CIS to check the reflected light.
CIS: at point of original detection
xenon lamp: on
original sensor: on

Original sensor

15

1
2
3
4
5

Original(A4R)

Original size detection position

F-5-22

5. Copyboard Cover Fully Closed

After the copyboard cover sensor has identified a "closed" state, the machine checks for a change in the output level of the original sensor (CCD point of
detection) for 3 sec. If there is no change in the level of output, the machine identifies the condition to indicate the presence of an original.
The machine uses combinations of changes in the levels of 6 locations to identify the size of the original:

Original sensor
1
2
3
4
5

Original(A4R)

Original size detection position

F-5-23

6. Standby (in wait for a press on the Start key)

CIS: moves to home position
xenon lamp: off
original sensor: off

5-12

Chapter 5

Copyboard glass
CIS HP

F-5-24

AB-Configuration
Original
size

Inch-Configuration
3

Original
size

Original
5 sensor1

A3

11"X17"

A4

LTR

B4

LGL

B5

LTR-R

A4R

STMT-R

A5

No original

Original
3 sensor2

B5R
No original

: Change absent
: Change present

F-5-25

5.3.6 Dirt Sensor Control

5.3.6.1 Overview
0001-4990

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

When reading an original, the machine changes the point of reading or corrects image data in reference to the presence/absence of dust on the stream reading glass/
ADF platen roller, thereby avoiding the effects of dust on images. The machine executes this control only when the ADF is used and, in addition, when it is closed.
<Timing of Control>
- at the end of a job
- between sheets (each time a sheet is read)
- at the start of a job (only if any of the following is met)
/first job after power-on
/presence of dust at all points of detection at the end of the previous job
/failure of dust detection at the end of the previous job (e.g., the ADF is opened)

Main power
switch
ON
WMUPR

Start key
ON
STBY

1st
SCAN

2nd
SCAN

Dust detection control

Dust detection control
Dust detection control
F-5-26

<Particulars of Control>
- At the End of a Job (dust detection)
The contact image sensor (CIS) checks the light reflected by the platen roller of the ADF at a point of reading to find out the presence/absence of dust. If the
presence of dust is detected, the contact image sensor moves to the next candidate point (2 times max.; A -> B -> C; B -> C -> A; or C -> A -> B).
The point identified will be used as the point of reading for the next job.

- For the control at the end of a job, the sensor will never move to point D.
- For the control at the end of a job, a message prompting cleaning of the glass surface will be indicated if an original is placed in the ADF while the presence
of dust has been detected at all points (A, B, C). The Start key is disabled until the message is cleared.

- At the Start of a Job (dust avoidance)

The same detection mechanism as used at the end of a job is executed; if the presence of dust is detected at all points (A, B, C), the sensor is moved to point D for
reading operation.
If the control is at the end of a job that takes place at point D, it will be after moving the sensor to point D.

5-13

Chapter 5

At end of job

Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3

At start of job

F-5-27

- Between Sheets
The contact image sensor (CIS) is not moved for detection of dust.
The machine undertakes reading at a point determined by control executed at the end of a job or at the start of a job; if the presence of dust is identified, the machine
executes image correction.
T-5-7
Location

5-14

Image
Gain correction against
correction
reference position

reading reference location

yes

no

point about 0.5 mm toward roller inside from reference

position

yes

no

point about 1.0 mm toward roller inside from reference

position

yes

no

point about 4.0 mm toward roller outside from reference

position (no dust detection)

no

yes

Chapter 5

Platen roller
0.5mm

0.5mm

A B C

Stream
reading
glass

Lens
Contact image sensor (CIS)

Scanning lamp

F-5-28

<Service Mode>
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DST-POS (level 1)
- use it to set an original reading position when the ADF is in use.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L1 (level 1)
- use it to adjust the dust reading detection level for between sheets.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L2 (level 1)
- use it to adjust the dust reading detection level for the end of a job.

5.3.7 Image Processing

5.3.7.1 Overview
0001-4976

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The image processing system has the following major specifications and functions:
T-5-8
- CCD

Number of lines: 3 (RGB, 1 line each)

Number of pixels: 7488
Size of pixel: 42.3 um

- Shading Correction

Shading correction; executed for each job

Shading adjustment: executed in service mode

Contact image
sensor (CIS)

Reader controller PCB

Analog image processing block

Digital image processing block

CCD
Analog image
processing

A/D
conversion

Shading processing

Controller block

F-5-29

The PCB used by the image processing system has the following functions:
T-5-9
- Reader Controller PCB

drives the CCD, performs analog image processing, performs A/D

conversion, performs shading correction

5-15

Chapter 5
The machine processes images using its reader controller PCB line by line, and the processing consists in the following;
1. Analog Image Processing
- drives the CCD
- performs gain correction and offset correction for the CCD output
- performs A/D conversion for the CCD output
2. Digital image Processing
- performs shading correction

Contact image sensor (CIS)

CCD (RGB, 1 line each)

Reader controller PCB

Even-numbered Odd-numbered
pixel
pixel
SCD control
signal
CCD drive control

Analog
image signal

Analog
image processing

- gain correction
- offset correction

EEP-ROM

Line correction
data

Evennumbered
pixel

CPU

Target
value

SRAM
A/D
conversion

Oddnumbered
pixel

Digital
image signal

Digital
image signal

Shading
correction

10

J203

CCD/AP circuit
F-5-30

5.3.7.2 Driving the CCD

0001-4979

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's CCD sensor is a linear image sensor that consists of 3 lines (RGB, 1 line each), and it is composed of 7488-pixel photocells. The signals generated
through photo conversion at the light-receiving segment are sent as analog signals according to pixels in the order of G, B, and R.

CCD16

CCD15

CCD14

CCD13

CCD2

CCD1

Single analog
shift register

output
G B R G B R G B R G B ......
F-5-31

5.3.7.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction for the CCD Output
0001-4980

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The analog video signal from the CCD is subjected to gain correction (in which the rate of amplification is corrected to a specific level) and offset correction (in
which the output voltage in the absence of incident light is also corrected to a specific level).

5.3.7.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output

0001-4981

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The analog signal after correction is then converted into 8-bit digital signals that comply with the individual levels of pixel voltage by the A/D converter.

5-16

Chapter 5

5.3.7.5 Shading Correction (outline)

0001-4983

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
An original of even density does not necessarily mean uniform CCD output
because of the following factors:
1. variation in the sensitivity of each pixel of the CCD
2. uneven intensity across the rod lens array
3. difference in intensity of light between the center and ends of the scanning lamp
4. deterioration of the scanning lamp
The machine performs shading correction to correct any discrepancy in the
output of the CCD. It performs shading correction at power-on and or for
each job.

When detaching the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the glass surface
and the standard white plate.
The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images. If dirt is
found, clean it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

5.3.7.6 Shading Correction

0001-4985

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The machine executes shading correction for each scan of the original. It
measures the density of the standard white plate, and compares the measurement against the target value stored in the shading correction circuit; the machine then sets up the difference as the shading correction value, and uses it
to correct any variation among CCD pixel when scanning the originals, thus
evening out the image density levels.

CCD output

Characteristics
after correction
Characteristics
before correction

Target value
Measurement

White

Original density
Standard while plate
F-5-32

5.3.7.7 Shading Adjustment

0001-4984

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The machine measures the density of the standard while plate, and uses the
result as density data. The data is then subjected to computation to obtain the
target value for use during shading correction.

5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure

5.4.1.2 After Replacing Copyboard Glass

0002-4562

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

5.4.1 Copyboard Glass

5.4.1.1 Detaching Copyboard Glass
0000-8289

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).
2) Detach the glass retainer [2].
- 2 screws [1]
3) Detach the copyboard glass [3].

1) Enter the value indicated by the bar code found at the upper right on the
copyboard glass (copyboard cover) using the following service mode.
(standard white plate white level data X, Y, Z)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Z

F-5-33

5-17

Chapter 5

5.4.1.4 After Replacing ADF Reading Glass

0002-4567

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Enter the value indicated by the bar code found on the ADF reading glass using the following service mode item. (offset value against color displacement
caused by stream reading glass)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DF-RG

002

DF-RG

W-PLT-X

W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y

F-5-37

F-5-34

2) Enter the value indicated by the bar code found at the upper left of the
copyboard glass (copyboard cover) using the following service mode
item. (offset value against color displacement caused by copyboard glass)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> BOOK-RG

5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB

5.4.2.1 Before Replacing Reader Controller PCB
0002-3678

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

If an ADF is used, be sure to execute P-PRINT of service mode to obtain its

printout:
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT

5.4.2.2 Before Detaching Reader Controller PCB

0017-5604

-04

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the reader rear cover. (page 10-20)[Detaching Reader Rear Cover]
2) Detach the copyboard glass. (page 5-17)[Detaching Copyboard Glass]

BOOK-RG

F-5-35

5.4.2.3 Detaching Reader Controller PCB

0000-8305

5.4.1.3 Detaching ADF Reading Glass

0000-8298

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the cover.

1) Open the copyboard glass (or ADF).

2) Detach the glass retainer [2].
- 2 screws [1]
3) Detach the ADF reading glass [3].

F-5-38

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the flat cable [2].

F-5-36

When detaching the ADF reading glass, take care not to touch the glass
surface.
The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images. If dirt is
found, be sure to clean it using lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

5-18

Chapter 5
6) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

F-5-39

3) Detach the cover [2].

- 8 screws [1]

F-5-43

7) Detach the cover [2].

- 6 screws [1]

F-5-44
F-5-40

8) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and free the cable from the edge saddle
[2].

4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and detach the 4 wire saddles [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws [3].

F-5-45
F-5-41

9) Pull out the reader controller PCB base.

- 2 screws [1]

5) Go to the back of the machine, and free the cable from the 5 wire saddles
[1]; then, disconnect the connector [2].

F-5-42

5-19

Chapter 5
- offset value against color displacement for ADF reading glass
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DF-RG

BOOK-RG

DF-RG

F-5-46

10) Detach the reader controller PCB [2].

- 9 screws [1]
W- P LT- X

W- P LT- Z
W- P LT- Y
F-5-48

- service label (behind reader unit left cover) values

- CIS read position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
- main scanning direction position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
- shading position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
- sub scanning direction color displacement correction
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG
- main/sub scanning direction MTF value
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG,SG
- auto gradation correction target value
COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL>OFST-P-Y,M,C,K

If the value of the following was not 0 before the replacement of the reader
controller PCB:
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> CCD-LUT.
Set a value other than '0' once again, and make the following adjustments
using the D-10 Chart.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> LUT-ADJ2

F-5-47

5.4.2.4 After Replacing Reader Controller PCB

0002-4571

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Before replacing the reader controller PCB, be sure to generate the latest PPRINT printout.
In the case that you are initializing the RAM of the reader
controller without replacing the PCB
Using the SST, upload the R-CON backup data; after initializing the RAM,
download the data, thus eliminating the need for the following adjustment.

Reader Unit-Related Adjustment

1) Using the SST, download the latest system software (R-CON).
2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION>
CLEAR> R-CON; then, press the OK key to initialize the RAM. Thereafter, turn off and then on the main power.
3) Enter the appropriate values using the following service mode items:
- standard white plate white level data
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X,Y,Z
- offset value against color displacement for copyboard glass (copyboard
cover)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> BOOK-RG

5-20

ADF-Related Adjustment

The machine keeps ADF-related service mode data in the RAM of the
reader controller; as such, you will have to make the appropriate
adjustments if you have replaced the reader controller or initialized the
RAM.

1) Enter the values indicated in the P-PRINT printout you have previously
generated using the following service mode:
- main scanning direction position adjustment (stream reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF
- original stop position adjustment
FEEDER>ADJUST>DOCST
- original feed speed (magnification) adjustment
FEEDER>ADJUST>LA-SPEED
2) Make adjustments using the following items:
- tray width adjustment
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-A4
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-A5R
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-LTR
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-LTRR
- CIS read position adjustment (stream reading)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS
- white level adjustment
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD>DF-WLVL1

Chapter 5

5.4.4 Scanner Motor

COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD>DF-WLVL2

3) When you have finished the foregoing adjustments, put the P-PRINT
printout [1] you have previously generated in the service book cassette to
replace the old P-PRINT printout.

5.4.4.1 Removing Scanner Motor

0000-8316

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the reader rear cover. (page 10-20)[Detaching Reader Rear Cover]
2) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, disconnect the connector [2], and then detach the 2 wire saddles [3].

F-5-49

5.4.3 Inverter PCB

5.4.3.1 Before Detaching Inverter PCB
0017-5608

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the reader rear cover. (page 10-20)[Detaching Reader Rear Cover]
2) Detach the copyboard glass. (page 5-17)[Detaching Copyboard Glass]

F-5-52

3) Remove the scanner motor [2].

- 1 spring [1]

5.4.3.2 Detaching Inverter PCB

0000-8315

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 2 screws [2].

F-5-53

5.4.5 Contact Sensor

5.4.5.1 Before Detaching Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
0017-5612

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the reader front cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Reader Front
Cover]
2) Detach the reader rear cover. (page 10-20)[Detaching Reader Rear Cover]
3) Detach the copyboard glass. (page 5-17)[Detaching Copyboard Glass]
F-5-50

2) While freeing the 3 hooks [1], detach the inverter PCB [2].

5.4.5.2 Detaching Contact Image Sensor (CIS)

0000-8407

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] is where it is indicated in the figure.

F-5-51

5-21

Chapter 5

F-5-54

2) Detach the plate [2].

- 2 screws [1]

Points to Note At Installation

Be sure to attach the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] to the machine after
inserting the flat cable [1].
F-5-55

3) Detach the contact image sensor (CIS).

- 1 connector [1]
- 1 cable clip [2]
- 1 flat cable [3]

5.4.5.3 After Replacing Contact Image Sensor (CIS)

0002-4560

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Be sure to enter the values indicated on the CIS label attached to the contact
image sensor (CIS) using the following service mode items:
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> CCDU-RG
(offset value against color displacement caused by CIS)
F-5-56

COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-MG

(MTF correction value for main scanning direction)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-SG
(MTF correction value for sub scanning direction)

When detaching the contact image sensor (CIS), take care not to touch the
xenon lamp and the lens.

5-22

Chapter 5

5.4.7 Contact Sensor HP Sensor

5.4.7.1 Before Detaching Contact Sensor HP Sensor
0017-5616

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the copyboard glass. (page 5-17)[Detaching Copyboard Glass]
2) Detach the ADF reading glass. (page 5-18)[Detaching ADF Reading
Glass]

5.4.7.2 Detaching Contact Sensor HP Sensor

0000-8404

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

-012

72

1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] will move where it is shown in the figure.

70

CCDU-RG

MTF-SG
MTF-MG
F-5-57

Also, be sure to update the values indicated on the service label attached behind the reader left cover by the values indicated on the CIS label.
MEMO:
The machine is not shipped out of the factory with the CIS label attached to
it.

5.4.6 Original Cover Sensor

5.4.6.1 Detaching Copyboard Cover Sensor (front/rear)

F-5-60
0000-8322

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

2) Detach the CIS HP sensor [3].

- 1 connector [1]
- 1 claw [2] at the rear side (pushing inside)

1) Detach the reader rear cover. (page 10-20)[Detaching Reader Rear Cover]
2) Remove the sensor base [3].
- 2 connectors [1]
- 1 screw [2]

F-5-58

F-5-61

3) Remove the 2 sensors [1] from the sensor base.

Points to Note At Installation
After replacing the sensor, pull the drive belt (rear) [1] in the direction of the
arrow so that the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] is returned to the farthest
left.

F-5-59

5-23

Chapter 5

5.4.8 Original Sensor

5.4.8.1 Before Detaching Document Size Sensor (AB/
INCH-configuration)
0017-5617

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the reader rear cover. (page 10-20)[Detaching Reader Rear Cover]
2) Detach the copyboard glass. (page 5-17)[Detaching Copyboard Glass]

5.4.8.2 Detaching Document Size Sensor (AB/INCHconfiguration)

0000-8323

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the cover.

F-5-65

5.4.9 Reader Heater (option)

5.4.9.1 Detaching Reader Heater (right)
0000-8325

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-5-62

1) Detach the copyboard glass. (page 5-17)[Detaching Copyboard Glass]

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable from the wire saddle [2].
3) Detach the reader heater (right) [4].
- 1 screw [3]

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the flat cable [2].

F-5-63

3) Detach the cover [2].

- 8 screws [1]

F-5-66

5.4.9.2 Detaching Reader Heater (left)

0000-8326

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the ADF reading glass. (page 5-18)[Detaching ADF Reading
Glass]
2) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] will move where it is indicated in the figure.

F-5-64

4) Detach the document size sensor [2].

- 1 hook [1]
F-5-67

3) Remove the protective sheet [1], disconnect the connector [2] and free the
cable form the wire saddle [3].
4) Detach the reader heater (left) [5].

5-24

Chapter 5
- 1 screw [4]

F-5-68

Points to Note At Installation

After replacing the sensor, pull the drive belt (rear) [1] in the direction of the
arrow so that the contact image sensor is returned to the farthest left.

5-25

Chapter 6 Laser Exposure

Contents

Contents
6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................6-3

6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-3

6.3 Various Control..............................................................................................................................................................6-4

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing..................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.1.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Unit.................................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.3.1.2 Main Scanning Synchronization Control ........................................................................................................................................................6-5
6.3.1.3 Sub Scanning Direction Write Start Position Control.....................................................................................................................................6-6

6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ...................................................................................................................................... 6-6

6.3.2.1 APC Control....................................................................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.2.2 PWM Control ..................................................................................................................................................................................................6-6

6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor .......................................................................................................................................... 6-6

6.3.3.1 Laser Scanner Motor Control..........................................................................................................................................................................6-6

6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter....................................................................................................................................................... 6-7

6.3.4.1 Laser Shutter Control ......................................................................................................................................................................................6-7

6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure.........................................................................................................................................6-8

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.4.1.1 Before Removing Laser Scanner Unit ............................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.4.1.2 Removing Laser Scanner Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.4.1.3 After Replacing Laser Scanner Unit ...............................................................................................................................................................6-9

6.4.2 Dust-Proofing Glass Cleaning Pad .............................................................................................................................................. 6-9

6.4.2.1 Detaching Dust-Blocking Glass Cleaning Pad ...............................................................................................................................................6-9

Chapter 6

6.1 Construction
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions
0000-9254

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-6-1
Laser Light
Wave length

785 to 800p nm (infrared)

Output

5 mW

Number of beams

T-6-2
Scanner Motor
Type of motor

DC brushless

Revolution

16000 rpm (approx.)

Type of bearing

Oil

T-6-3
Polygon Mirror
Number of facets

T-6-4
Control Mechanisms
Synchronization

In main scanning direction

In sub scanning direction (write start position)

Intensity control

APC control
PWM control

Others

Laser activation
Laser scanner motor control
Laser shutter control

6.1.2 Major Components

0000-7915

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

6-1

Chapter 6

[1]

[3]

[5]

[2]

[4]
F-6-1
T-6-5

Name

Description

[1] Laser unit

generates laser light.

[2] Polygon mirror

scans the laser beam in main scanning direction.

[3] BD mirror

directs the laser beam in the direction of the BD PCB.

[4] BD PCB

generates the BD signal.

[5] Laser mirror

(reflecting mirror)

reflects the laser beam in the direction of the photosensitive drum.

6.1.3 Construction of the Control System

0000-7916

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The laser exposure system is primarily controlled by the ASIC (IC37) mounted on the DC controller PCB.

6-2

Chapter 6

[3]

[4]

[1]
[5]

J328

J327

J301

ASIC
(IC37)

Video

J1204

J329

[2]

MN-CON

DC-CON
J320

J308

[6]
[7]

[8]
F-6-2

[1] Laser activation control

[2] Main scanning synchronization control
[3] APC control
[4] PWM control
[5] Laser scanner motor control
[6] Laser shutter control
[7] Intermediate transfer belt home position sensor
[8] Front cover/right door

6.2 Basic Sequence

6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations
0000-7919

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The laser scanner motor starts to rotate in response to a press on the Start key (or a print request signal). The machine then turns on the laser unit as soon as the laser
scanner motor reaches its target speed of rotation. Thereafter, when the machine becomes ready for the formation of images, the printer unit generates the image
request signals for individual colors (PVREQ-Y, -M, -C, -K), and the machine turns on the laser units of the individual colors according to these signals.

6-3

Chapter 6

Print request signal

(Start key ON)
PSTBY

Laser scanner
motor

Image formation
ready timing
PINTR

Acceleration
interval

PRINT

LSTR

Phase control
interval

PSTBY
Deceleration
interval

ITB home
position signal
PVREQ signal
(Y, M, C, K)

M
Y

Laser

C
M

K
C

BD *1

Laser A
BD detection/APC
control activation

Laser A
image for
1 line

BD detection/APC
control activation
Laser B
APC control activation

*1:The BD signal is generated with reference to the laser light;

the BD sensor of the BD PCB receives light from laser B only, not receiving light from laser B.

F-6-3

The timing at which the machine generates the PVREQ signal differs according to print mode/process speed.
- Mono/Normal Speed
The machine generates the PVREQ signal as specified as soon as it becomes ready for the formation of images regardless of the ITB home position signal (ITB
HP signal).
- Full Color/Normal Speed
The machine generates the PVREQ signal of individual colors with reference to the ITB HP signal so that the write start position in sub scanning direction is
correct for the image to be drawn on the intermediate transfer belt.
- Full Color/Normal Speed
The machine generates the PVREQ signal of individual colors with reference to the ITB HP signal so that the write start position in sub scanning direction is
correct for the image to be drawn on the intermediate transfer belt.

6.3 Various Control

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
6.3.1.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Unit
0000-7921

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The laser unit is turned on and off based on combinations of laser control signals (CTL0, 1, 2) coming from the DC controller PCB.
T-6-6
Laser control signal

6-4

Laser status

CTL2

CTL1

CTL0

Laser A

Laser B

OFF

OFF

video signal input enable

video signal input enable

ON (all ON; for factory)

OFF (all OFF; bias current application)

OFF (all OFF; bias current application) ON (all ON; for factory)

ON (all ON; for factory)

ON (all ON; for factory)

ON (for APC)

OFF (all OFF; bias current application)

OFF (all OFF; bias current application) ON (for APC control)

OFF (all OFF; bias current application) OFF (all OFF; bias current application)

J329

CTL0
CTL1
CTL2

Chapter 6

DC-CON

F-6-4

6.3.1.2 Main Scanning Synchronization Control

0000-7922

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

BD

The synchronization in main scanning direction is performed with reference to the BD sync signal.
The BD sync signal may be the BD sync signal for laser A or for laser B, generated by the DC controller PCB based on the BD signal generated by the BD PCB
after detecting the light from laser A.
The image data written to line memory (FIFO A, FIFO B) is read using the read enable signal (RE_A, RE_B) generated from the BD sync signal (BD_A, BD_B);
then, the data is modulated to PWM data and forwarded to the laser driver PCB.

J329

J327

PWM
BD_A

[2]

FIFO
A

BD_B
RE_B

FIFO
B

Video

J1204

RE_A

J301

[1]

MN-CON

ASIC (IC37)
DC-CON
F-6-5

[1] Sync circuit

[2] Delay circuit
FIFO A/B: line memory
BD_A/B: BD sync signal
RE_A/B: read enable signal

6-5

Chapter 6

Memo
Generation of the BD Signal
The BD sensor mounted on the BD PCB receives the light from the laser A only, not receiving the light from laser B; the BD signal is generated based on the
light of laser A.

6.3.1.3 Sub Scanning Direction Write Start Position Control

0000-7923

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

In full-color mode, the write start position in sub scanning direction is controlled so that the colors of the images to be drawn on the intermediate transfer belt will
be correctly matched.
The speed of rotation of the laser scanner motor is fine-tuned, thereby synchronizing the phase of the BD signal with the PVREQ signal (image request signal) to
synchronize the write start position of each color in sub scanning direction.
This control mechanism is executed between when the ITB HP signal is detected and when the PVREQ signal is transmitted.
Print request
signal (Star key ON)
PSTBY

Image formation
ready timing

PINTR

PRINT

LSTR

PSTBY

Laser scanner
motor
ITB home
position signal
PVREQ signal
(Y, M, C, K)

M
Y

Laser

C
M

K
C

ITB home
position signal
PVREQ signal
Phase control interval
BD signal
Here, the phase of the BD signal is adjusted
to synchronize with the PVREQ signal.

F-6-6

E100 (BD detection error)

-0001 when the laser scanner motor is starting up, the speed lock signal is not detected within a specific period of time.
-0002 while the laser scanner motor is rotating at a stable speed, the speed lock signal cannot be detected.
-0003 while the laser scanner motor is rotating at a stable speed, the phase lock signal cannot be detected.
-0004 while the laser scanner motor is starting up, the phase lock signal is not detected within a specific period of time.

6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light

6.3.2.1 APC Control
0000-7924

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine monitors the laser light arriving at the photodiode of the laser driver PCB so as to make sure that the intensity of the light is always appropriate.

6.3.2.2 PWM Control

0000-7925

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

A single pixel is divided by 16, and the laser unit is activated in any of 16 settings to suit the image data (PWM data) in question.

1 pixel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
F-6-7

6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor

6.3.3.1 Laser Scanner Motor Control
0000-7927

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine controls the speed of rotation of the laser scanner motor with reference to the laser scanner motor rotation speed signal (FG signal) from when the
motor starts up until it reaches a specific speed of rotation. When it reaches a specific speed of rotation, the machine refers to the BD signal to control the speed so
that the BD cycle and the laser scanner motor rotation cycle are of the same phase.
The speed of rotation of the laser scanner motor is controlled by means of the acceleration signal (ACC signal) and the deceleration signal (DEC signal).

6-6

BD

ACC
DEC
FG

Chapter 6

J327

J328

[1]

ASIC(IC37)
DC-CON
F-6-8

[1] Motor control block

E110 (laser scanner motor error)

-0001 while the laser scanner motor is starting up, it fails to reach a specific target speed within a specific period of time.

6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter

6.3.4.1 Laser Shutter Control
0000-7928

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

When the front cover is opened, the laser shutter link operating in conjunction with the front cover lifts the laser shutter, which in turn blocks the optical path of the
laser light.
The machine turns off the laser scanner motor and the laser output as soon as it detects that the front cover or the right door has been opened.

6-7

Chapter 6

6.4.1.2 Removing Laser Scanner Unit

[1]

0000-9265

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the anti-vibration plate [2].
- 6 screws [1]

[2]

F-6-11

2) Pull out the dust-blocking sheet [1] to the front to detach.

D
[3]

OPEN
[1]

[3]

[1]

[2]
F-6-12

F-6-9

3) Free the cable from the 3 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 3 connectors
[2].

Laser Shutter Control

1. Laser shutter
2. Laser shutter link (operates in conjunction with front cover)
3. Laser unit

6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit
6.4.1.1 Before Removing Laser Scanner Unit
0017-5619

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the upper left cover. (page 10-18)[Detaching Upper Left Cover]
2) Remove the left grip (front) [2].
- 2 screws [1]
F-6-13

4) Detach the laser scanner unit fixing plate [2].

- 1 screw [1]

F-6-10
F-6-14

6-8

Chapter 6
5) Lift the laser scanner unit [1], and free the 4 bosses [2]; then, pull it to the
front to detach.

F-6-17

F-6-15

Take care not to touch the element on the laser drive PCB [2] or the dustblocking glass [1] (laser exposure area) of the laser scanner unit.
Also, take care not to hit the laser drive PCB [2] against the machine.

6.4.1.3 After Replacing Laser Scanner Unit

0001-6204

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Enter the values indicated on the label attached to the laser scanner unit using
the following service mode item:
COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LA-DELAY

6.4.2 Dust-Proofing Glass Cleaning Pad

6.4.2.1 Detaching Dust-Blocking Glass Cleaning Pad
0002-2972

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the front cover.
2) Pull out the dust-blocking glass cleaning tool [1] to the front to detach.

F-6-16

3) Detach the dust-blocking glass cleaning pad [2].

- 1 claw [1]

6-9

Chapter 7 Image Formation

Contents

Contents
7.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System ........................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System ................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 Specifications of the Charging System ........................................................................................................................................ 7-2

7.2 Image Formation Process...............................................................................................................................................7-4

7.2.1 Image Formation Process (outline) .............................................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) .............................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.2.3 2-Side Placement Control ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-6

7.3 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................7-6

7.3.1 Power-On ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.2 Copying/Printing (normal speed)................................................................................................................................................. 7-7
7.3.3 Copying/Printing (half-speed) ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.3.4 Copying/Printing a Mix of Color and Black-and-White Originals.............................................................................................. 7-8

7.4 Image Stabilization Control ...........................................................................................................................................7-8

7.4.1 Outline of Image Stabilization Control........................................................................................................................................ 7-8
7.4.2 Timing of Image Stabilization Control ........................................................................................................................................ 7-9
7.4.3 ATR Control .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-10
7.4.4 Drum Film Thickness Detection Control................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4.5 Development Contrast Control .................................................................................................................................................. 7-12
7.4.6 ATVC Control ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.4.7 PASCAL Control (image gradation density correction)............................................................................................................ 7-13
7.4.8 Development Gradation Density Correction Control ................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.4.9 Auto Gradation Correction Function ......................................................................................................................................... 7-14

7.5 Drum Unit ....................................................................................................................................................................7-14

7.5.1 Drum Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-14
7.5.1.1 Construction of the Drum Unit .....................................................................................................................................................................7-14
7.5.1.2 Charging Bias Control...................................................................................................................................................................................7-15
7.5.1.3 Drum Cleaning ..............................................................................................................................................................................................7-16
7.5.1.4 Drum Unit Drive Path ...................................................................................................................................................................................7-16

7.6 Developing Rotary .......................................................................................................................................................7-17

7.6.1 Construction of the Developing Rotary ..................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7.6.2 Developing Rotary Control........................................................................................................................................................ 7-18
7.6.3 Developing Assembly Drive Path.............................................................................................................................................. 7-19

7.7 Developing Unit...........................................................................................................................................................7-20

7.7.1 Construction of the Developing Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.7.2 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh control) ............................................................................................................................ 7-21
7.7.3 Developing Bias Control............................................................................................................................................................ 7-23

7.8 Toner Container ...........................................................................................................................................................7-23

7.8.1 Construction of the Toner Cartridge .......................................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.8.2 Toner Level Detection Control .................................................................................................................................................. 7-24
7.8.3 Toner Supply Control ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-25

7.9 Transfer Device............................................................................................................................................................7-26

7.9.1 Construction of the Transfer Assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.9.2 ITB Home Position Detection Control ...................................................................................................................................... 7-27
7.9.3 Transfer Bias Control................................................................................................................................................................. 7-28
7.9.4 Cleaning the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB).......................................................................................................................... 7-29
7.9.5 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller ...................................................................................................................... 7-30
7.9.6 ITB Waste Toner Collection Mechanism .................................................................................................................................. 7-30
7.9.7 Transfer Assembly Drive Path................................................................................................................................................... 7-31
7.9.8 Transfer Assembly Swing Control............................................................................................................................................. 7-32

Contents

7.9.9 Transfer Assembly Swing Control............................................................................................................................................. 7-33

7.9.10 Separation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-34

7.10 Parts Replacement Procedure.................................................................................................................................... 7-35

7.10.1 Drum Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-35
7.10.1.1 Removing Drum Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-35
7.10.1.2 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit................................................................................................................................................ 7-36
7.10.1.3 After Replacing Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-36

7.10.2 Development Unit.................................................................................................................................................................... 7-37

7.10.2.1 Finisher-P1 in Use ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-37
7.10.2.2 Before Removing Developing Unit ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-37
7.10.2.3 Removing Developing Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-37
7.10.2.4 Points to Note When Attaching Developing Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 7-39
7.10.2.5 After Replacing Developing Unit (Y/M/C) ................................................................................................................................................ 7-39
7.10.2.6 After Replacing Developing Unit (Bk)....................................................................................................................................................... 7-39

7.10.3 Rotary Upper Cover................................................................................................................................................................. 7-39

7.10.3.1 Detaching Rotary Upper Cover .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-39
7.10.3.2 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit................................................................................................................................................ 7-40

7.10.4 Rotary Lower Cover ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-40

7.10.4.1 Before Detaching Rotary Lower Cover ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-40
7.10.4.2 Detaching Rotary Lower Cover .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-40

7.10.5 ITB Cleaning Unit.................................................................................................................................................................... 7-40

7.10.5.1 Preparing for the Removal of ITB Cleaning Unit....................................................................................................................................... 7-40
7.10.5.2 Removing the Delivery Tray ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.10.5.3 Removing the Delivery Tray Lower Cover ................................................................................................................................................ 7-41
7.10.5.4 Removing the ITB Waste Toner Unit......................................................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.10.5.5 Before Removing ITB Cleaning Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.10.5.6 Removing ITB Cleaning Unit..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.10.5.7 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Cleaning Unit ................................................................................................................................... 7-42

7.10.6 ITB Waste Toner Unit ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-43

7.10.6.1 Removing ITB Waste Toner Unit............................................................................................................................................................... 7-43

7.10.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit....................................................................................................................................................... 7-44

7.10.7.1 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB Unit).......................................................................................................................... 7-44
7.10.7.2 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB Unit).......................................................................................................................... 7-44
7.10.7.3 Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)....................................................................................................................................... 7-44
7.10.7.4 Points to Note When Attaching Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB Unit) .................................................................................................... 7-46
7.10.7.5 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit................................................................................................................................................ 7-47
7.10.7.6 After Replacing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB Unit)............................................................................................................................. 7-47

7.10.8 ITB Waste Toner Detection Unit............................................................................................................................................. 7-47

7.10.8.1 Before Removing ITB Waste Toner Detection Unit .................................................................................................................................. 7-47
7.10.8.2 Removing ITB Waste Toner Detection Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 7-47

7.10.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-47

7.10.9.1 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) .................................................................................................................................. 7-47
7.10.9.2 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) .................................................................................................................................. 7-48
7.10.9.3 Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) .............................................................................................................................................. 7-48
7.10.9.4 Points to Note When Attaching Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)............................................................................................................. 7-50
7.10.9.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit................................................................................................................................................... 7-51
7.10.9.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit................................................................................................................................................ 7-51
7.10.9.7 After Replacing ITB ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-52

7.10.10 ITB Home Position Sensor PCB............................................................................................................................................ 7-52

7.10.10.1 Before Removing ITB Home Position Sensor PCB ................................................................................................................................. 7-52
7.10.10.2 Before Removing ITB Home Position Sensor PCB ................................................................................................................................. 7-52
7.10.10.3 Removing ITB Home Position Sensor PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 7-53
7.10.10.4 Points to Note When Attaching ITB......................................................................................................................................................... 7-53
7.10.10.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit................................................................................................................................................. 7-54
7.10.10.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 7-55

7.10.11 Primary Transfer Roller ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-55

7.10.11.1 Before Removing Primary Transfer Roller .............................................................................................................................................. 7-55
7.10.11.2 Before Removing Primary Transfer Roller .............................................................................................................................................. 7-55
7.10.11.3 Removing Primary Transfer Roller .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-56
7.10.11.4 Points to Note When Attaching ITB......................................................................................................................................................... 7-56

Contents

7.10.11.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit .................................................................................................................................................7-57

7.10.11.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ..............................................................................................................................................7-58
7.10.11.7 After Replacing Primary Transfer Roller..................................................................................................................................................7-58

7.10.12 Secondary Transfer External Roller....................................................................................................................................... 7-58

7.10.12.1 Removing Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.............................................................................................................................................7-58
7.10.12.2 Points to Note When Attaching Secondary Transfer Outer Roller ...........................................................................................................7-58
7.10.12.3 When Replacing Secondary Transfer Outer Roller ..................................................................................................................................7-59

7.10.13 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller........................................................................................................................................ 7-59

7.10.13.1 Before Removing Secondary Transfer Inner Roller .................................................................................................................................7-59
7.10.13.2 Before Removing Secondary Transfer Inner Roller .................................................................................................................................7-60
7.10.13.3 Removing Secondary Transfer Inner Roller .............................................................................................................................................7-60
7.10.13.4 Points to Note When Attaching ITB .........................................................................................................................................................7-61
7.10.13.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit .................................................................................................................................................7-62
7.10.13.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ..............................................................................................................................................7-63

7.10.14 ITB Cleaning Blade ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-63

7.10.14.1 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit .............................................................................................................................................................7-63
7.10.14.2 Before Removing ITB Cleaning Blade .....................................................................................................................................................7-64
7.10.14.3 Removing ITB Cleaning Blade.................................................................................................................................................................7-64
7.10.14.4 When Replacing ITB Cleaning Blade.......................................................................................................................................................7-65
7.10.14.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Cleaning Unit..................................................................................................................................7-65

7.10.15 ITB Fan .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-66

7.10.15.1 Before Removing ITB Duct Fan ...............................................................................................................................................................7-66
7.10.15.2 Removing ITB Duct Fan ...........................................................................................................................................................................7-66

7.10.16 Separator Eliminator .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-67

7.10.16.1 Removing Separation Static Eliminator....................................................................................................................................................7-67

7.10.17 ATR Sensor Unit.................................................................................................................................................................... 7-67

7.10.17.1 Before Removing ATR Sensor Unit .........................................................................................................................................................7-67
7.10.17.2 Removing ATR Sensor Unit .....................................................................................................................................................................7-67

7.10.18 Environment Sensor PCB ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-68

7.10.18.1 Before Removing Environment Sensor PCB............................................................................................................................................7-68
7.10.18.2 Before Removing Environment Sensor PCB............................................................................................................................................7-68
7.10.18.3 Removing Environment Sensor PCB........................................................................................................................................................7-68
7.10.18.4 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ..............................................................................................................................................7-68

7.10.19 Patch Image Sensor................................................................................................................................................................ 7-69

7.10.19.1 Before Removing Patch Image Read Sensor ............................................................................................................................................7-69
7.10.19.2 Before Removing Patch Image Read Sensor ............................................................................................................................................7-69
7.10.19.3 Removing Patch Image Read Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................7-69
7.10.19.4 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit ..............................................................................................................................................7-70

Chapter 7

7.1 Construction
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System
0000-9261

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-7-1
Drum Unit
Photosensitive drum
Drum type

OPC

Drum diameter

62 mm

Cleaning mechanism

cleaning blade
brush roller

process speed

137 mm/sec

Primary charging assembly

Charging method

roller charging

Charging roller diameter

14 mm

Cleaning mechanism

none

T-7-2
Developing Unit
Developing cylinder diameter

20 mm

Development method

dry, 2-component

Toner

non-magnetic negative (S toner)

Toner level detection (to ensure a

specific level)

video count data, patch image

density measurement

Starter

comes filled

T-7-3
Toner Cartridge
Toner level detection
Toner detection

path image density measurement

Toner level indication

toner supply amount (video

count data, patch image density
measurement)

Toner amount

Y: 170 g
M: 170 g
C: 170 g
Bk: 635 g
(including about 95 g of carrier)

T-7-4
Intermediate transfer assembly
Construction

intermediate transfer belt (ITB)

Drive method

from drum/ITB motor through

gears

(ITB)

Feed speed
Plain paper

137 mm/sec

Thick paper, postcard, transparency*1

68.5 mm/sec

Cleaning mechanism

Cleaning blade

*1: in the case of full color mode, 68.5 mm/sec; of mono color mode, 137 mm/sec.

T-7-5
Image stabilization control
ATR control

corrects toner density (supply

amount)

7-1

Chapter 7
Image stabilization control
Drum film thickness detection control

corrects development contrast

Development contrast control

determines appropriate primary

charging DC bias and developing
DC bias

ATVC control

ensures good transfer

PASCAL control

corrects image gradation density

characteristics

development gradation density

correction control

corrects development gradation

density characteristics

7.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System

0000-7829

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

[8]

[16]

[4]

[12]

[13]
[7]

[14]
[11]

[6]

[15]

[10]

[5]

[9]

[1]

[3]

[2]
F-7-1

[1] Photosensitive drum

[2] Primary charging roller
[3] Drum unit
[4] Developing unit (Bk)
[5] Developing unit (Y)
[6] Developing unit (M)
[7] Developing unit (C)
[8] Toner cartridge (Bk)
[9] Toner cartridge (Y)
[10]Toner cartridge (M)
[11]Toner cartridge (C)
[12]Intermediate transfer unit (ITB unit)
[13]Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
[14]Primary transfer roller
[15]Secondary transfer outside roller
[16]ITB cleaning unit

7.1.3 Specifications of the Charging System

0000-7830

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

7-2

Chapter 7
T-7-6
Primary charging bias
Charging method

roller charging

Charging target

photosensitive drum

AC component use range

1500 to 2000 V

DC component use range

0 to -800 V

DC component voltage correction factor

environment sensor output (temperature, humidity), drum

film thickness detection current value

T-7-7
Developing bias
AC component use range

1500 Vp-p (fixed)

DC component use range

-200 to -900 V

DC component voltage correction factor

Environment sensor output value (temperature/humidity),

drum film thickness detection current value

T-7-8
Primary transfer bias
Transfer method

Roller transfer

Transfer target

Intermediate transfer belt

DC component use range

0 to 1200 V

Voltage correction factor

environment sensor output value (temperature, humidity),

print mode (full color, mono color), color

T-7-9
Secondary transfer bias
Transfer method

roller transfer

Transfer target

paper

DC component use range

-4000 to +6500 V

Voltage correction factor

environment sensor output value (temperature, humidity),

print mode (full color, mono color), pickup mode (singlesided, double-sided), paper type

7-3

Chapter 7

[2]

[3]

0V

620V

-280V

1500Vp-p

0V

[4]

[1]
780V

0V
-450V

0V

1500Vp-p
F-7-2

- Full color, Plain paper, Normal temperature/humidity, Single-sided, Yellow, New drum unit (reference only)
[1] Primary charging
[2] Development
[3] Primary transfer
[4] Secondary transfer

7.2 Image Formation Process

7.2.1 Image Formation Process (outline)
0000-7834

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

7-4

Chapter 7

Delivery
[8]
Fixing

[6]

[4]
BK

[3]

[7]
[5]

[2]
[1]
Registration

Pickup

F-7-3
T-7-10
Item

Description

[1] Primary charging

charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to an even layer of negative

potential.

[2] Laser exposure

forms a static image on the drum.

[3] Development

turns the static image on the drum into a visible image.

[4] Primary transfer

transfers the image from the drum to the ITB. (if full color, individually
for Y, M, C, and K)

[5] Secondary transfer

transfers the image from the ITB to paper.

[6] Separation

separates paper from the ITB.

[7] Drum cleaning

removes toner from the drum.

[8] ITB cleaning

removes toner from the ITB.

Memo:
The machine does not perform pre-exposure. It removes charges from the drum by applying a specific level of AC bias to the primary charging roller during initial
multiple rotation.

7.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation)

0000-7845

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

7-5

Chapter 7

[2]

[6]

[1]

[3]

[4]
[5]
F-7-4

[1] Using the difference in potential between the drum surface and the developing sleeve, the machine causes the toner to move to the static image of the drum,
turning it into a visible image.
[2] Using the bias voltage applied to the primary transfer roller, the machine transfers the toner from the drum to the ITB.
[3] Using the bias voltage applied to the secondary transfer outside roller, the machine transfers the toner from the ITB to the paper.
[4] Using the brush roller, the machine stirs up the toner remaining on the drum (not having moved to the ITB), thus decreasing its bond to the drum.
[5] Using the cleaning blade positioned in contact with the drum, the machine scrapes off the residual toner from the drum.
[6] Bringing the ITB cleaning blade in contact with the ITB, the machine scrapes off the toner remaining on the ITB.

7.2.3 2-Side Placement Control

0000-9344

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine uses the paper placement control mechanism to increase productivity.
In principle, when full color copies are made or when thick paper is used to generate multiple output, the machine forms images for 2 output sides on its ITB.*1
The machine uses the ITB HP signal when forming images for both 1st and 2nd sides.
<Particulars of Control>
EX: Full color, Plain paper, A4, 2 copies
The machine forms 4-color (YMCBk) images on its ITB in the following sequence:
*2

*2

*2

*2

ITB HP signal

PVREQ signal
T-Y1 T-Y2
Y1

T-M1 T-M2
Y2

T-C1 T-C2

M1

M2

C1

T-Bk1 T-Bk2
C2

Bk1

Bk2

Image on ITB
Length of 1 ITB cycle

Length of 1 ITB cycle

Length of 1 ITB cycle

Length of 1 ITB cycle

F-7-5

T-Y1/M1/C1/Bk1: time from when the ITB HP signal is detected to when the PVREQ signal for the 1st side is sent.
T-Y2/M2/C2/Bk2: time from when the ITB HP signal is detected to when the PVREQ signal is sent.
*1 The machine uses the 1-side placement mechanism for the following, as they do not permit the use of the 2-side placement mechanism:
- there is a delay in the transmission of the image data for the 2nd side from the main controller.
- the length of the paper in sub scanning direction is in excess of 216 mm.
- the manual feed tray is used as the source of paper.
- the No. 3 delivery slot is used for delivery.
- the first 2nd or the last 2nd copy is being handled in duplex mode.
- envelopes are used.
*2: the HP signal is ignored in this interval.

7.3 Basic Sequence

7.3.1 Power-On
0000-9343

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine goes thorough the following sequence of operations when its main power switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less
than 50 deg C (as in the morning, when the machine is turned on after being left alone for a long time).
<Characteristics>
- immediately after the start of the sequence, the machine checks the home position of the developing rotary and removes charges from the drum surface.

7-6

Chapter 7
- stirs up the developer inside the individual developing units (colors), and deposits an even coating of developer on the developing cylinder.
- the machine takes about 360 sec from when the main power switch is turned on to when it enters a standby state.
- the machine executes the following image stabilization control mechanisms while warm-up rotation is taking place:
ATR correction control, drum film thickness detection control, primary transfer ATVC control, developing gradation density correction control
Main power
switch
ON

WMUPR
Primary charging
bias (DC)
Primary charging
bias (AC)
Developing cylinder
clutch (CL3)

PSTBY

CNTR
Drum film thickness detection

Charge removal from drum

Bk

Stirring developer

Toner supply
Developing
bias (DC)
Developing
bias (AC)
Developing rotary
motor
Main motor
(M2)
Primary transfer
bias
ITB cleaning
clutch (CL8)
Drum/ITB motor
(M9)

Rotation, suspension during automatic adjustment

Primary transfer ATVC
Bk
Blade in contact

*1

Y M C Bk
Blade in contact

Blade not in contact

Secondary toner bias

Secondary transfer
outside roller swing
clutch (CL9)
Patch image reader
sensor (PS23)
ATR sensor
(PS27)

Roller in contact

Y M C Bk

Y M CBk
YMC

*1

ATR control

Development gradation density correction control

F-7-6

*1: in about 30 sec after the machine enters a standby state, it causes the secondary transfer outside roller to move away from the ITB.
<if the main power switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 50 deg C or more>
- the machine does not stir the developer.
- in principle, the machine does not execute image stability control; however, it executes development gradation density correction if any of the following conditions exists:
- there has been a significant change in the environment since the previous execution of the developing gradation density correction mechanism.
- the cumulative number of copies has reached 200 if full color or 1000 if mono color.
- the machine takes about 11 to 60 sec from when the main power switch is turned on to when it enters a standby state.

7.3.2 Copying/Printing (normal speed)

0000-9346

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Full color, Plain paper, A4, 2 copies
<Characteristics>
- in the case of multiple output, the machine forms images for 2 sides of the same color on the ITB in succession. (2-side placement)
- while an image is on the ITB, the machine keeps the ITB cleaning blade and the secondary transfer outside roller from the ITB.
Start key
ON
PSTBY

PINTR

ITB HP signal
Drum /ITB motor
Stabilized rotation
(M9)
Primary charging
bias (DC)
Primary charging
bias (AC)
Developing rotary
motor (M8)
*1
Developing bias
Y
(DC)
Developing bias
Y
(AC)
Developing cylinder
clutch (CL3)
Primary transfer
Y1
bias
Secondary transfer outside
roller swing clutch (CL9)
Secondary transfer
Secondary transfer ATVC
bias
ITB cleaning clutch
ITB cleaning
(CL8)
Main motor
(M2)

PRINT

LSTR

Bk

Bk

Y2

Bk1

PSTBY

*1

Bk2
*2

1st copy 2nd copy

Secondary transfer outside

roller cleaning
ITB cleaning
*2

F-7-7

*1: the machine applies a specific level of bias so as to prevent adhesion of toner and carrier form the developing cylinder to the drum.
*2: the machine moves the secondary transfer roller from the ITB 30 sec after it has entered a standby state.
<Mono Color Copying/Printing>
- the machine always uses the 1-side placement mechanism (as there is no need for depositing images of different colors on the ITB, i.e., the image formed on
the ITB is immediately transferred to paper).

7-7

Chapter 7
- the machine keeps the ITB cleaning blade and the secondary transfer outside roller in contact with the ITB at all times (even while an image is being formed
on the ITB.

7.3.3 Copying/Printing (half-speed)

0001-4757

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Full color, Thick paper, Postcard, Transparency, A4, 1 copy
<Characteristics>
- after forming an image on the ITB (all colors), the machine slows down the drum/ITB motor until they rotate at half its normal speed before it starts transfer
operation.
Start key
ON
PSTBY

PINTR

PRINT

LSTR

PSTBY

ITB HP signal
Drum/ITB motor
Stabilized rotation
(M9)
Primary charging
bias (DC)
Primary charging
bias (AC)
Developing rotary
motor (M8)
*2
Developing bias
Y
(DC)
Developing bias
Y
(AC)
Developing cylinder
Y
clutch (CL3)
Primary transfer
Y
bias
Secondary transfer
outside roller swing
clutch CL9)
Secondary transfer Secondary transfer ATVC
bias
ITB cleaning clutch
ITB cleaning
(CL8)

Half-speed rotation
*1

Bk

*2

Bk
Bk
Bk

*3
Secondary transfer
outside roller cleaning
IITB cleaning

Main motor (M2)

*3

F-7-8

*1: while the drum/ITB motor is rotating at a low speed, the machine applies a specific primary charging bias so as to prevent the toner on the ITB from returning
to the drum.
*2: the machine applies a specific level of developing bias so that the toner and carrier on the developing cylinder will not adhere to the drum.
*3: the machine moves the secondary transfer outside roller from the ITB about 30 sec after it has entered a standby state.
<Mono Color Copying/Printing>
- Unlike when using normal speed, the machine forms images for 2 sides on the ITB in succession to increase the productivity of making multiple copies/prints.
(2-side placement)

7.3.4 Copying/Printing a Mix of Color and Black-and-White Originals

0000-9349

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine does not use special processing for the sequence it uses to make copies/prints of a mix of color and black-and-white originals; in other words, its
operation is the same as the operation it uses to make copies/prints of color only or black-and-while only originals.

7.4 Image Stabilization Control

7.4.1 Outline of Image Stabilization Control
0000-7851

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

As changes occur in the environment or as more and more copies/prints are made, the machine can start to suffer unstable production of images. To ensure stable
production of images, the machine is designed to perform the following control mechanisms:
T-7-11
Particulars of control

7-8

[1] ATR control (video count, patch image density

measurement)

enables accommodation of changes in toner density/toner

consumption (determines toner supply amount)

[2] Drum film thickness detection control

corrects development contrast

[3] Developing contrast control

determines optimum primary charging DC bias,

developing DC bias

[4] ATVC control

corrects transfer bias

[5] PASCAL control/development gradation

correction control

accommodates changes in image gradation (corrects image

density table)

Chapter 7

MN-CON
-LUT
[5]

[1]

[2], [3]

[4]

F-7-9

7.4.2 Timing of Image Stabilization Control

0001-6270

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

At Power-On
<Characteristics>
- in principle, the machine executes image stabilization control only when the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 50 deg C. However, it executes
development gradation density correction control if any of the following conditions exist when the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 50 deg C or more:
- there has been a significant change in the environment since the execution of the previous development gradation correction control.
- the cumulative number of copies has reached 200 if full color or 1000 if mono color.
- when the cover is opened/closed, toner cartridge is replaced, or return is made from a jam state, the machine executes image stabilization control if the surface
temperature of the fixing roller is less than 50 deg C at the time.
- the machine takes about 127 sec to complete the execution.
Main power
switch ON

STBY

WMUPR

ATR control *1

Drum film
thickness
detection
control

Primary transfer
ATVC control

Development
graduation
density
correction control

F-7-10

*1: corrects the patch density target value (ATR sensor), corrects the toner supply amount (patch image read sensor).
The following is a table of times taken by automatic control, including image stabilization control.
T-7-12
Operation

Time (approx.)

Power-on/Cover open/close if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 50 deg C about 258 sec
if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 50 deg C or more about 11 sec
Return from jam state

if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 50 deg C about 263 sec
if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 50 deg C or higher about 24 sec

Toner cartridge replacement if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 50 deg C about 319 sec
if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 50 deg C or more about 75 sec

7-9

Chapter 7
Operation

Time (approx.)

Return from low-power mode

about 11 sec

In Response to a Press on the Start Key (mono color)

Start key
ON

STBY

PRINT

INTR
1st
PRINT

LSTR
200th
PRINT

80th
PRINT

secondary transfer
ATVC control

ATR control *1

secondary transfer
ATVC control *2

F-7-11

*1: corrects the toner supply amount; executes every 80 copies of 6 % originals (about 11 sec).
*2: executes every 200 copies (small size; about 6 sec).
In Response to a Press on the Start Key (full color)
Start key
ON

STBY

PRINT

INTR

LSTR

50th
PRINT

1st
PRINT
secondary transfer
ATVC control

- ATR control *1
- secondary transfer ATVC control *2

F-7-12

*1: corrects the patch density target value; executes every 50 copies (about 25 sec).
*2: executes every 50 copies (small size; about 6 sec)
During Last Rotation
PRINT

LSTR

STBY

Last
PRINT
ATR control*1

Primary transfer
ATVC control*2

ATR control*3

F-7-13

*1: the cumulative copies/prints made since the previous execution of ATR control (correction of the toner supply amount based on the patch image density measurement) has reached 48 (Bk only; about 11 sec).
*2: there has been a significant change in the environment (about 40 sec).
*3: the cumulative number of copies/prints made since the previous execution of ATR control (correction of the density target value based on the measurement
of the developer density on the developing cylinder) has reached 40 for full color (Y, M, C only; about 25 sec).

7.4.3 ATR Control

0000-7855

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine executes ATR control to keep the density (ratio of toner/carrier) inside the developing unit to a specific level, which otherwise would change over time.
<Particulars of Control>
The machine is not equipped with a means (sensor) of directly measuring the level of toner inside the developing unit. In its place, the machine forecasts the consumption of toner with reference to video count data to make up for the consumption of toner. The toner supply amount computed from the video count data is
corrected at such times as programmed: the machine uses the difference in potential between the primary charging bias and the developing bias to form a patch
density on the photosensitive drum. It reads the density of the patch using the patch image read sensor, and compares the result against the density target value to
increase or decrease the toner supply amount. If the density of the patch image changes because of changes in the developer characteristics, the machine will not
be able to keep the density of the developer inside the developing unit to a specific level, which would cause the toner to move astray inside the machine or carrier
to stick to the drum. To prevent such a problem, the machine corrects the density target value at such times as programmed, thereby keeping the density of developer
inside the developing unit to a specific level. (In the case of Y, M, or C, the machine uses the density of the developer measured by the ATR sensor; in the case of
Bk, on the other and, the machine corrects the density target value based on the reading of the counter designed for the developing unit (Bk; i.e., how may sheets
have moved past it).

7-10

Chapter 7

[1]

C
Bk

M
Y

[2]

[3]

F-7-14

[1] Patch image read sensor

[2] ATR sensor
[3] ATR sensor shutter
Flow of ATR Control
Basic Control
Video count data

Correction of Density Target

<Conditions Prompting>
Bk:
the cumulative number of pages
(image formations) produced since
installation has reached a specific
number.
Y/M/C:the cumulative number of pages
(image formations) produced in
full-color mode has reached a
specific number.

Correction of Toner Supply Amount

<Conditions Prompting>
- the supply amount has reached
a specific value.
- the number of pages
(image formations) has reached
a specific value.

Computes the toner supply

amount from the video
count data.

Bk: Selects a density target with reference

to the number of pages (image formations)
since installation
Y/M/C: Determines a density target correction
value with reference to the initial density and
the developer density on the developing
cylinder (measured by the ATR sensor)

Density target

Measures the patch image

density.
(patch image read sensor)

Computes a corrective value

for the toner supply amount
based on the density target
and the density measurement.

Determines the toner

supply amount.

Toner supply operation

F-7-15

7-11

Chapter 7
These individual measurements may be checked in service mode.
T-7-13
Item

Description

Optimum value

COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS
DENS-Y/M/C/K

Use it to check the discrepancy of the patch image density from -25 to +25
the target value. (%) [patch image read sensor]

P-SENS-P

Use it to check the background measurement taken of the

400 to 600
photosensitive drum. (P wave; positive reflection component) [P
wave; patch image read sensor]

SGNL-Y/M/C

Use it to check the measurement of the developer density on the 225 to 863
developing cylinder. [ATR sensor]

REF-Y/M/C

Use it to check the reference signal value of the developer

density on the developing cylinder. (direct light from LED)
[ATR sensor]

464 to 560

COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
SGNL-Y/M/C

Use it to check the initial setting of the developer density on the 336 to 752
developing cylinder. [ATR sensor]

REF-Y/M/C

Use it to check the initial reference signal value of the developer 464 to 560
density on the developing cylinder. (direct light from LED)
[ATR sensor]

Memo:
Checking the Soiling of the Window
When the window of the light-emitting/receiving segment of the patch image read sensor becomes soiled with stray toner, the machine will not be able to accurately
measure the density of the patch image. To avoid the problem, the machine checks the patch image read sensor for soiling. While initial multiple rotation is under
way, the machine measures the light from the surface of the drum without depositing any toner on it (drum background measurement); it will assume that the window is soiled if the measurement is lower than a specific level (COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS>P-SENS-P), thus indicating an error code (E020-0081) and stopping
its operation.
Although the machine does not check the ATR sensor for soiling, the sensor is equipped with a shutter to prevent soiling; the shutter opens only when the ATR
sensor measures the developer density on the developing cylinder and remains closed at other times.

7.4.4 Drum Film Thickness Detection Control

0001-5930

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

As more and more copies are made, the film thickness of the photosensitive drum decreases; to make up for the decrease in the film thickness and, thus to correct
the development contrast, the machine checks the film thickness with reference to the current flowing over the drum surface to determine the development contrast
correction value.
<Particulars of Control>
1. using a specific level of charging AC bias, the machine removes charges from the drum surface.
2. the machine applies a specific level of charging DC bias to the primary charging roller, and measures the current flowing in response (i.e., current flowing
over the drum surface) using the high-voltage PCB.
3. the machine communicates the detected current level to the DC controller PCB, and finds out the thickness of the drum film from the current level.
4. the machine determines the development contrast correction value based on the film thickness of the drum.
<Timing of Control>
See "Timing of Image Stabilization Control>

7.4.5 Development Contrast Control

0000-7856

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine executes development contrast control to ensure a stable level of image density free of the effects of the development characteristics, which change
according to the deterioration of the photosensitive drum and changes in the environment.
<Particulars of Control>
1. The machine sets up the development contrast potential (Vcont') and fogging removal potential (Vback) in keeping with the temperature/humidity inside the
machine (readings of the environment sensor).
2. The machine corrects Vcont' and Vcont according to the film thickness of the drum (current flowing through the primary charging roller) it has measured
during initial multiple rotation.
3. The machine determines the primary charging DC bias (Vp) and the developing DC bias (Vdc) to suit Vcont/Vback and the drum surface potential characteristics curve (VD-VL).

7-12

Chapter 7

VD

Vback

Vdc
Vcont'
Vcont

VL

Vp
F-7-16

VD: drum dark area potential.

VL: drum light area potential (potential of area exposed by laser light).

7.4.6 ATVC Control

0000-7857

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine executes ATVC control to determine an optimum transfer voltage it uses when it transfers toner from the photosensitive drum to the ITB and from
the ITB to paper. It prepares a transfer voltage-current table so that the current occurring at time of transfer is as close as possible to the target transfer current.
T-7-14
Primary transfer ATVC
Start-up timing

- during initial multiple rotation executed if the surface temperature of the fixing
roller is less than 50 deg C when the main power switch is turned on.
- during last rotation if there has been a rapid change in the environment since the
previous execution of ATVC.

Particulars of control

starts up
executes image formation sequence (mono color mode)
applies a specific voltage to the primary transfer roller, and measures the current
that occurs in response; then, using the measurement, it prepares a primary transfer
contrast voltage-current table (for mono color mode).
executes image formation sequence (full color mode)
applies a specific voltage to the primary transfer roller, and measures the current
that occurs in response; then, using the measurement, it prepares a primary transfer
contrast voltage-current table (full color mode).

Factors determining target

transfer current value

environment sensor output, print mode (mono, full), color

T-7-15
Secondary transfer ATVC
Timing of start-up

- during initial rotation

- between sheets after the number of prints (image formation) has reached a
specific number

Particulars of control

starts up
applies a specific voltage to the secondary transfer outside roller, and measures the
current that occurs in response: then, prepares a secondary transfer voltage-current
table.

Factors determining target

transfer current value

environment sensor output, print mode (mono, full), paper type

7.4.7 PASCAL Control (image gradation density correction)

0001-2313

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

7-13

Chapter 7

The machine executes PASCAL control to ensure stable gradation density characteristics of images. It corrects the characteristics that otherwise would tend to
change as a result of changes in the environment and deterioration of the photosensitive drum.
It reads a gradation pattern (64-gradation) of a test print using its reader unit to prepare an image density correction table.
starts up
generates a text pattern (3 types, stored in the main controller) automatically.
reads the test pattern print-out placed in the reader unit.
prepares an image correction table A.
<Timing of Control>
- as needed (when 'Full Adjust' is under way under auto gradation correction in Additional Function)

7.4.8 Development Gradation Density Correction Control

0001-2314

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine executes development gradation density correction so that the gradation density characteristics of images formed on the drum are stable against the
changes that otherwise would occur because of changes in the environment and the deterioration of the environment.
The machine reads the patch image pattern (YMCK; 9 gradations each) formed on the photosensitive drum using the patch image read sensor, and prepares an image
density correction table.
starts up
using the patch image read sensor, measures the light reflected by the surface of the drum.
forms a patch image pattern on the drum drawn from patterns stored in the main controller (without toner in the patch image)
using the patch image read sensor, measures the density of the patch image pattern.
prepares an image correction table B or C.
<Timing of Control>
- as needed (while 'Full Adjust' or 'Quick Adjust' under auto gradation correction is under way in Additional Function
- automatic

7.4.9 Auto Gradation Correction Function

0001-2882

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine corrects the mage density correction table so as to obtain an ideal set of gradation characteristics. It executes the control in response to a command
sent in Additional Function.
Image density
Actual gradation
characteristics

1.45

Ideal gradation
characteristics

255

Relationship between laser output and image density

F-7-17

The machine permits the selection of 'Full Adjust' or 'Quick Adjust' for Additional Function auto gradation correction. In full or quick mode of correction, the
machine combines PASCAL control and development gradation density correction control for execution.
<Particulars of Control>
Full Adjust
1. using the density data of the gradation pattern in the test pattern collected by the reader unit, prepares an image correction table A. (PASCAL control)
2. from the density data of the gradation pattern on the drum read by the patch image read sensor, prepares an image correction table B.
Quick Adjust
1. using the density data of the gradation pattern on the drum read by the patch image read sensor, prepares an image correction table C.
2. using the image correction table B and the image correction table C, corrects the image correction table A.

7.5 Drum Unit

7.5.1 Drum Unit
7.5.1.1 Construction of the Drum Unit
0000-9350

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

7-14

Chapter 7

T-7-16
Component

Description

[1]

Photosensitive drum

forms a static (latent) image using laser light.

[2]

Brush roller

stirs up the toner remaining on the drum from previous

transfer to the ITB, thereby reducing its adhesion to the
drum.

[3]

Waste toner collection case

collects toner scarped off by the cleaning blade.

[4]

Cleaning blade (polyurethane rubber)

scrapes off and removes the toner remaining on the drum

from previous transfer to the ITB.

[5]

Primary charging roller

charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to an even

layer of negative potential.

[1]

[2]

[5]

[4]
[3]

F-7-18

7.5.1.2 Charging Bias Control

0000-9352

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

AC component: output by constant current control.
DC component: output in keeping with the output of the environment sensor (temperature, humidity) and the drum film thickness current value.

ITB

[1]
CHG-OUT

HV

J506

J505

J501
CHGIMONITOR

24V

CHGDCPWM
CHGACPWM

DC-CON

J323

J326A

F-7-19

[1] Primary charging roller

CHGDCPWM: PWM signal for charging DC

7-15

Chapter 7
CHGACPWM: PWM signal for charging AC
CHG-OUT: charging bias output signal
CHGIMONITOR: charging current detection signal

7.5.1.3 Drum Cleaning

0000-9353

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine uses a cleaning blade to clean its photosensitive drum.
T-7-17
Component

Description

[1]

Brush roller

stirs up the toner on the drum, thereby reducing its

adhesion to the drum.

[2]

Cleaning blade (polyurethane rubber)

remains in contact with the drum at all times, and scrapes

off residual toner from the drum.

[3]

Waste toner case

collects toner scarped off by the cleaning blade.

[1]

[2]
[3]

F-7-20

If the application of primary charging bias lasts too long (e.g., because of continuous copying/printing), the byproduct of discharge (ozone oxides) occurring in the
primary charging assembly will build up on the drum surface, temporarily increasing the friction between the photosensitive drum surface and the cleaning blade,
which ultimately warps the cleaning blade and lowers the cleaning performance. To prevent such a problem, the machine executes idle rotation of the drum, in
which the byproduct of discharge is removed. While the machine rotates the drum idly, it indicates the message "Drum Cleaning Under Way" on its control panel.
<Timing of Start-up and Duration>
- while copying/printing is under way (about 150 sec) after the number of copies/prints made in succession has reached 800 images*1.
- during last rotation (about 180 sec max.*2)
*1: in the case of mono color, 800 copies; of full color, 200 copies.
*2: rotates the drum idly for a shorter or longer period of time according to the number of copies/prints.
Start key
ON

STBY

INTR

PRINT
1st
PRINT

200th
PRINT

LSTR
201th
PRINT

"Drum Cleaning Under Way"

(about 150 sec)

400th
PRINT
"Drum Cleaning Under Way"
(about 180 sec)

F-7-21

- Full color, Plain paper, A4, 400 copies

7.5.1.4 Drum Unit Drive Path

0000-9351

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-7-18

[1]

7-16

Component

Source of drive

Photosensitive drum

drum/ITB motor (M9)

Chapter 7
Component

Source of drive

[2]

Brush roller

drum/ITB motor through gears

[3]

Primary charging roller

photosensitive drum (linked to drum)

DC-CON
J311A

ITB
M9

[1]

[2]

[3]

F-7-22

7.6 Developing Rotary

7.6.1 Construction of the Developing Rotary
0001-5033

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The developing assembly consists of a developing rotary and 4 toner cartridges (YMCBk); the rotary in turn is equipped with 4 developing units YMCBk.
The developing rotary rotates counterclockwise to move the developing unit to the point of development (where the drum cylinder comes face to face with the drum)
at time of development.

7-17

Chapter 7

[1]
[9]
[4]
[5]

[8]

[6]

[3]

[2]

[7]

F-7-23

[1] Developing rotary

[2] Developing unit (Y)
[3] Developing unit (M)
[4] Developing unit (C)
[5] Developing unit (Bk)
[6] Toner cartridge (Y)
[7] Toner cartridge (M)
[8] Toner cartridge (C)
[9] Toner cartridge (Bk)

7.6.2 Developing Rotary Control

0001-5034

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The developing rotary is controlled with reference to the rotary home position, which is where the developing rotary is rotated by 30 deg after the rotary HP sensor
has detected the passage of the HP detecting sensor flag mounted to the circumference of the developing rotary. The machine uses this position to move the individual developing units to the point of development (where the developing cylinder comes face to face with the drum) and to the point of cartridge replacement and
point of developer density measurement (where the YMC developing cylinder comes face to face with the ATR sensor).
- Developing Rotary Home Position

[3]

[3]

Bk

M
[3]

[3]

Y
[1]
[2]
F-7-24

[1] Rotary HP sensor

[2] HP detection sensor flag

7-18

Chapter 7
[3] Developing position detecting sensor flag
- Basic Sequence of Operations of the Developing Rotary (at power-on)
Main power switch
ON
Developing
rotary motor (M8)
Rotary HP
sensor (PS24)
Developing
cylinder clutch (CL3)

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

WMUPR
[5]

STBY

CNTR
[7]

[6]

[8]

Bk

[9]

[10]

F-7-25

[1] rotation for detection of rotary HP

[2] move from rotary HP to point of Bk development
[3] move from point of Bk development to point of Y development
[4] move from point of Y development to point of M development
[5] move from point of M development to point of C development
[6] move from point of C development to point of Bk development
[7] rotation during image stabilization control
[8] ATR control
[9] primary transfer ATVC
[10]development gradation density correction
- Basic Sequence of Operations (developing rotary; full color)
Start key
ON
STBY
Developing
rotary motor (M8)
Rotary HP
sensor (PS24)
Developing
cylinder clutch (CL3)

INTR
[1] [2]

PRINT
[4]

[3]

LSTR
[6]

[5]

Bk

F-7-26

[1] move from rotary HP to point of Bk development

[2] move from point of Bk development to point of Y development
[3] move from point of Y development to point of M development
[4] move from point of M development to point of C development
[5] move from point of C development to point of Bk development
[6] move from point of Bk development to rotary HP
- Basic Sequence of Operations (developing rotary; mono color)
Start key
ON
STBY
Developing
rotary motor (M8)
Rotary HP
sensor(PS24)
Developing
cylinder clutch (CL3)

INTR
[1]

PRINT

LSTR
[2]

Bk

F-7-27

[1] move from rotary HP to point of Bk development

[2] move from point of Bk development to rotary HP

E021 (developing rotary rotation error)

1. the rotary HP sensor flag cannot be detected.
2. the sensor flag length detected during rotation is too long or too short.
3. the development sensor flag is not detected when the rotary stops at a point of development.

7.6.3 Developing Assembly Drive Path

0001-5035

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-7-19
Component

Source of drive

Remarks

[1]

Developing rotary

rotary motor (M8)

uses the rotary home position to control

the drive of the developing rotary.

[2]

Developing cylinder

main motor (M2)

driven when the clutch (CL3) goes on.

[3]

Developer stirring screw

main motor (M2)

driven when the clutch (CL3) goes on.

[4]

Toner feed screw

main motor (M2)

driven when the clutch (CL7) goes on.

7-19

Chapter 7

DC-CON
J311B

J313

J311A

M8

M2

CL7

CL3

ITB
Bk

[2]

C
[4]
Y
[3]
M
[1]

F-7-28

7.7 Developing Unit

7.7.1 Construction of the Developing Unit
0000-9308

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's developing units differ between the Bk unit and the Y/M/C unit; while the former (Bk) is equipped with a waste carrier collection unit, the later (Y/
M/C) is not.
T-7-20
Component

Description

[1]

Developing cylinder

retains developer (toner/carrier).

[2]

Developing blade

forms an even layer of developer on the developing cylinder.

[3]

Toner buffer assembly

retains toner from the toner cassette temporarily.

[4]

Toner feedscrew

feeds toner from the buffer assembly to the developing chamber.

[5]

Developer stirring screw

stirs up the developer and supplies it to the developing cylinder.

[6]

Waste carrier collection unit

collects waste toner*1.

*1: Bk developing unit only.

7-20

Chapter 7

[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[6]

[4]

[5]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[5]
F-7-29

7.7.2 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh control)

0000-9312

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine uses the ACR control mechanism to enable longer use of carrier in the Bk developing unit.
The machine supplies developer (toner/carrier) from the Bk cartridge and, at the same time, collects the waste toner from the developing unit to the waste carrier
collection chamber inside the toner cartridge.
<Descriptions of Mechanism>
1) As more and more developer is supplied from the toner cartridge, the amount of developer inside the developing unit increases.
2) The increase in the amount of developer is collected by the waste carrier collection unit while it is circulated inside the developing unit. Most of the developer
being collected at this time consists of used (waste) carrier.
3) When the developing rotary rotates, the waste carrier falls on its own weight and is colleted inside the waste carrier collection chamber in the toner cartridge.

7-21

Chapter 7

[2]

[1]

BK

BK

F-7-30

[1] Waste carrier collection unit (inside developing unit)

[2] Waste carrier collection chamber (inside toner cartridge)

<Control Details/Start-up Timing/Time Required>

When the amount of toner supply reaches its specified level in monochrome mode, ACR control is executed in last rotation or while copying/ printing.
a. In last rotation
Any of ACR Control No. 1 to No.3 is executed according to the amount of toner supplied during one copy/print operation.
Start key
ON

STBY

Last PRINT

LSTR

STBY

ACR Control (No.1)

Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)

Developing
cylinder
rotation *2

Developing
rotary
rotation
(1 rotation)

ACR Control (No.2)

Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)

ATR
Control *1

Developing
rotary
rotation
(1 rotation)

Developing
cylinder
rotation *2

Developing
rotary
rotation
(1 rotation)

Developing
cylinder
rotation *2

Developing
rotary
rotation
(1 rotation)

Developing
cylinder
rotation *2

Developing
rotary
rotation
(1 rotation)

ACR Control (No.3)

Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)

Developing
cylinder
rotation *2

*1: Correcting the amount of toner supply (Patch image detection).

It is executed only when start-up conditions of ACR Control are satisfied.
*2: Waste carrier in the developing unit is circulated for enhancement of its collection efficiency.

F-7-31

ACR Control (No.1)

Start-up Timing: Once every 15 sheets with a 5% image document (as a guide)
Time Required: Approx. 10 sec.
ACR Control (No.2)

7-22

Developing
rotary
rotation
(1 rotation)

Chapter 7
Start-up Timing: Once every 15 sheets with a 30% image document (as a guide)
Time Required: Approx. 10 to 20 sec.
ACR Control (No.3)
Start-up Timing: Once every 1800 sheets (accumulated quantity) with a 5% image document (as a guide)
Time Required: Approx. 60 sec.
b. While copying/printing
Start key
ON

STBY

INTR

Nth PRINT

Between
Sheets

(N+1)th PRINT

ACR Control
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)

ATR
Control *1

Developing
rotary
rotation
(1 rotation)

Developing
cylinder
rotation *2

Developing
rotary
rotation
(1 rotation)

*1: Correcting the amount of toner supply (Patch image detection).

*2: Waste carrier in the developing unit is circulated for enhancement of its collection efficiency.

F-7-32

Start-up Timing: Once every 200 sheets with a 5% image document (as a guide)
Time Required: Approx. 20 sec.

7.7.3 Developing Bias Control

0000-9311

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

AC component: fixed.
DC component: in keeping with the output of the environment sensor (temperature, humidity), drum film thickness detection current.

ITB

[1]

DEV-OUT

HV

J506

J505

J501

24V

DEVDCPWM2
DEVAC2
DEVACPWM

DC-CON

J323

J326A

F-7-33

Developing Bias Control

[1] Developing cylinder
DEVDCPWM2: PWM signal for developing DC
DEVACPWM: PWM signal for development AC
DEVAC2: remote signal for developing AC
DEV-OUT: developing bias output signal

7.8 Toner Container

7.8.1 Construction of the Toner Cartridge
0001-2844

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

7-23

Chapter 7

The machine uses different types of toner cartridge between Bk and Y/M/C; the latter type is not equipped with a toner feedscrew, and relies on the rotation of the
developing rotary for movement of toner.
The Bk cartridge comes filled with toner and carrier mixed to a specific ratio; the amount of toner it contains is about 3 times that in a Y/C cartridge.
T-7-21
Component

Description
Black

Color
none

[1]

Toner feedscrew

stirs up toner, and moves it to the buffer assembly

inside the developing unit.

[2]

Toner shutter

opens or closes in response to the shutter open/close

knob.

[3]

Toner case

comes filled with toner; about 635 g (including

about 95 g of carrier).

content: 170 g

[4]

Waste carrier collection

chamber

collects waste carrier.

none

[5]

Supply mouth

moves and directs toner through it to the developing

assembly.

[6]

Collection mouth

moves waste carrier through it to the waste carrier

collection chamber.

[7]

Shutter open/close knob

opens/closes the shutter.

none

[3]

[1]

[4]

Bk

[1]
[2]
[5]
[7]

[6]

Y/M/C

[2]
[5]
[7]
F-7-34

7.8.2 Toner Level Detection Control

0001-2847

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine is not equipped with a means (sensor) to directly check the level of toner inside the toner cartridge (all 4 cartridges), and uses the measurements it
takes of the patch images it forms on the photosensitive drum to find out the presence/absence of toner.
<Particulars of Control>
1) supplies toner to the inside of the developing unit.
2) forms a patch image on the photosensitive drum, and reads its density using the patch image read sensor.
3) compares the measurement against the reference value
|
v
i) if measurement >= reference value,
-> the machine assumes that toner exists inside the toner cartridge, and ends toner level detection control.
ii) if measurement < reference value
-> the machine repeats steps 1 through 3 a specific number of times; if the measurement still does not exceed the reference value, the machine will assume that
toner does not exist inside the toner cartridge, and moves the developing rotary to the point of toner cartridge replacement and then indicates the message "No
toner" on its control panel.

7-24

Chapter 7
<Timing of Start-Up/Duration>
- if the patch image density measurement at time of ATR control is less then the reference value for a specific number of times.
- when the toner cartridge access cover/front cover is opened/closed after the machine identifies the absence of toner (the machine is not equipped with a sensor
to check the presence/absence of the toner cartridge; it will execute toner level detection control automatically when the toner cartridge access cover/front cover
is opened and closed after it has identified the absence of toner regardless of the presence/absence of a cartridge).
It takes about 70 sec for the machine to execute the control mechanism.
Memo:
In addition to the message "No toner," the machine uses the following 2 types of indications to inform the user of the level of toner:
a) Toner Level Meter
From the amount of toner consumed so far (i.e., from the number of toner supply operations) and the amount of toner held by a single toner cartridge, the machine
assumes the remaining level of toner and indicates it by means of a 4-step meter (100%, 75%, 50%, 10%). The meter will remain 10% even when the toner level
is computed to be less than 10%; the meter will be 0% only when the machine identifies the absence of toner as the result of patch image density measurement
executed in relation to the aforementioned toner level detection control mechanism.
The meter will be returned to 100% when the DC Controller PCB is replaced or RAM of the DC Controller PCB is cleared. This is because the data of the amount
of toner consumed so far (predicted from the number of toner supply operations) is stored only in SRAM on the DC Controller PCB. Although it depends on the
amount of remaining toner in the cartridge right before either of the foregoing operations is executed, keep in mind that the toner-out message ("No toner") might
be displayed even when the meter indicates 100%.
b) "Add toner"
From the amount of toner consumed so far (from the number of toner supply operations) and the amount of toner held by a single toner cartridge, the machine
assumes the remaining level of toner; it indicates the message when the result of computation is less than 10%.
E026 (toner level detection operation upper limit)
Indicated if the toner density fails to return to a normal level after the machine has executed toner replacement and toner recovery mechanism 5 times in succession
following the identification of the absence of toner. The machine supplies toner and then checks the level of toner; if it repeats detection without a new toner cartridge, the toner inside the developing unit will be exhausted, possibly causing stray toner and damage to the ITB. To avoid such a problem, the machine puts a limit
on the number of times it executes toner level detection operations after the absence of toner has been identified:
0101- for Y toner cartridge
0201- for M toner cartridge
0301- for C toner cartridge
0401- for Bk toner cartridge

7.8.3 Toner Supply Control

0001-2845

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The toner inside the toner cartridge is first sent to the buffer assembly of the developing unit for storage. Then, the movement of the toner feedscrew supplies toner
from the toner buffer assembly to the developing chamber in an amount determined as the result of ATR control.
The Bk toner cartridge uses a toner feedscrew mounted inside it to move toner, while a Y, M, or C toner cartridge relies on the rotation of the developing rotary (for
lack of a feedscrew) to move toner along the protrusions arranged in a spiral inside the cartridge.

DC-CON
J311B

J313

J311A

M8

M2

CL7

CL3

[1]

ITB

Bk

[3]
Y
[2]

M
[4]

F-7-35

[1] Toner feedscrew (Bk only)

[2] Toner buffer assembly
[3] Toner feedscrew
[4] Developing rotary

7-25

Chapter 7
M2: main motor
M8: developing rotary motor

M
C

F-7-36

Moving the Toner Using the Rotation of the Developing Rotary (Y/M/C)

7.9 Transfer Device

7.9.1 Construction of the Transfer Assembly
0000-9298

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-7-22

7-26

Component

Description

[1]

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)

receives images (toner) formed on the photosensitive drum.

[2]

Drive roller

drives the ITB.

[3]

ITB home position sensors

detects the home position sticker (white) attached to the

inside of the ITB.

[4]

Tension roller

retains ITB tension.

[5]

Primary transfer roller

applies transfer bias to transfer the toner from the

photosensitive drum to the ITB.

[6]

Secondary transfer inside roller

[7]

Secondary transfer outside roller

transfers the toner from the ITB to paper using the

application of transfer bias from the secondary transfer
outside roller to the secondary transfer inside roller.

Chapter 7
Component

Description

[8]

Separation static eliminator

removes residual charges from the ITB.

[9]

ITB cleaning blade

scrapes off the toner remaining on the ITB.

[10]

ITB waste toner feedscrew

moves the waste toner from inside the ITB cleaning unit to
the waste toner case.

[11]

Stray toner blocking sheet

prevents the waste toner from moving astray inside the

machine at time of cleaning.

[12]

Inside blade

scrapes the toner for the inside of the ITB.

[11]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[12]
[4]

[5]

[10]

[11]

[9]
[6]
[8]

[7]
F-7-37

7.9.2 ITB Home Position Detection Control

0001-5495

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

When the ITB home position sensor detects the sticker (white) attached to the back of the ITB after the Start key is pressed, the machine generates the ITB home
position signal, used to form and transfer images.
[1]
[2]

F-7-38

[1] ITB HP sensor

[2] ITB HP sticker (2 pc.)
- Full color, Normal speed
The machine uses the ITB home position signal (hereafter, ITB HP signal) to generate the PVREQ signal for individual colors (image request signal). The machine
uses the PVREQ signal when it forms and transfers images.

7-27

Chapter 7

Start key
ON
INTR

PRINT

ITB HP signal
PVREQ signal
Y

Laser

Bk

Primary
transfer bias
Registration
clutch (CL2)
Secondary
transfer bias

F-7-39

- Full color, Normal speed, 1 copy

- Mono color, Normal speed
The machine forms images not in synch with the ITB HP signal. It generates the PVREQ signal a specific period of time after it has become ready to form images,
and uses the signal to form and transfer images.
Start key
ON
INTR

PRINT

ITB HP signal
PVREQ signal
Bk 2nd

Bk 1st

Laser
Primary
transfer bias
Registration
clutch (CL2)
Secondary
transfer bias

F-7-40

- Half-speed (both full and mono color)

The machine uses the ITB home position signal to generate the PVREQ signal (image request signal) for individual colors to serve as a reference when forming
and transferring images.
The machine operates in half-speed mode to ensure good fixing on paper; after transfer to the ITB, it reduces the speed of the drum/ITB motor (DC brushless motor
used to drive the fixing motor and the ITB) to half (68.5 mm/sec) the normal speed. After reducing the speed of the motor, the machine detects the ITB HP signal
and turns on the registration clutch using the ITB HP signal as the reference.
Start key
ON
INTR

PRINT
Half-speed rotation

Drum/ITB motor
signal (M9)
ITB HP signal

PVREQ signal
Laser

Bk

Primary
transfer bias
Registration
clutch (CL2)
Secondary
transfer bias

F-7-41

- Mono color, Half-speed, 1 copy

7.9.3 Transfer Bias Control

0000-9300

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Primary transfer bias: output in keeping with the output of the environment sensor (temperature, humidity), print mode (mono, full color), and color.
Secondary transfer bias: output in keeping with the output of the environment sensor (temperature, humidity), print mode (mono, full color), pickup (single-, doublesided), and paper type.

7-28

Chapter 7

ITB
[1]

[2]

TR1-OUT
TR2-OUT
T901

J506

24V
TR2_CS
HV_SUB_OPEN_S
RVTR2DC

J507

HV_SUB

J1

J504

HV

TR1PWM
TR2CVPWM
RVTR2DC

TR1MONITOR
TR2MONITOR

24V

J502

DC-CON

J323

J326B

F-7-42

[1] Primary transfer roller

[2] Secondary transfer roller
TR1PWM: PWM signal for primary transfer
TR2CVPWM: PWM signal for secondary transfer
TR1-OUT: primary transfer bias output signal
TR2-OUT: secondary bias output signal
TR1MONITOR: primary transfer current detection signal
TR2MONITOR: secondary transfer current detection signal
TR2_SUB: secondary transfer output detection signal
RVTR2DC, HV_SUB_OPEN_S: bias mode switching signal for secondary transfer

7.9.4 Cleaning the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)

0000-9303

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine uses a cleaning blade to clean the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).
T-7-23
Component

Description

[1] ITB cleaning blade

moves into contact with the ITB at all times to scrape off
toner remaining on the ITB; while the machine is in
standby, remains away from the ITB.

[2] Stray toner blocking sheet

prevents toner from moving astray during cleaning

operation.

[3] ITB waste toner feedscrew

moves waste toner in the direction of the ITB waste toner

case.

7-29

Chapter 7

[2]

[3]

[2]

[1]
F-7-43

7.9.5 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller

0002-0787

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine cleans the secondary transfer outside roller using static charges.
<Particulars of Control>
The machine alternately applies biases of opposite polarities to the secondary transfer outside roller (same and opposite in relation to the bias used when forming
images), thereby returning the toner remaining on the secondary transfer outside roller to the ITB.
<Timing of Control>
- end of copy/print job
- return from jam state
- after formation of a patch image or test pattern as part of image stabilization control

7.9.6 ITB Waste Toner Collection Mechanism

0000-9305

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The waste toner scraped off the ITB is collected in the ITB waste toner unit. The level of waste toner inside the unit is checked by means of a waste toner sensor
(LED, photo transistor).

7-30

Chapter 7

[2]
DC-CON

[1]

GND

[3]

GND

J308

+5V

W_TONERFULL
+5V

[4]

F-7-44

[1] ITB cleaning unit

[2] Waste toner sensor (light-emitting)
[3] Waste toner sensor (light-receiving)
[4] ITB waste toner unit
When the machine finds that the unit is full of waste toner, it indicates the message "Replace the waste toner container." If copies/prints are made in succession
thereafter, the machine will indicate an error code (E013) as soon as it has handled 500 copies (A4) and stops operation.

7.9.7 Transfer Assembly Drive Path

0000-9299

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-7-24
Component

Source of drive

[1] Drive roller

drum/ITB motor (M9)

[2] Tension roller

linked to ITB

[3] Primary transfer roller

linked to ITB

[4] Secondary transfer inside roller

linked to ITB

[5] Secondary transfer outside roller

linked to ITB

[6] ITB waste toner feedscrew

drum/ITB motor (M9)

7-31

Chapter 7

[1]
[2]

[3]

[6]
[4]

M9

J311A

DC-CON

[5]
F-7-45

7.9.8 Transfer Assembly Swing Control

0000-9301

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
- ITB Cleaning Blade
When the clutch (CL8) goes on, the drive of the main motor (M2) is transmitted to a cam; when the releasing lever moves up and down, its associated ITB cleaning
blade moves into contact with or moves away from the ITB. The ITB cleaning blade remains away from the ITB while the machine is in a standby state.
- Secondary Transfer Outside Roller
When the clutch (CL9) goes on, the drive of the main motor (M2) is transmitted to a cam, and the transfer locking arm pushes the secondary transfer arm, causing
the latter to move away from the ITB. The secondary transfer outside roller moves away from the ITB if no copy/print job arrives within about 30 sec after the
machine enters a standby state.

7-32

Chapter 7

[1]

[3]

[2]

DC-CON

J311B

CL8

J311A

M2

CL9

J320A
[7]
[6]

[4]

[5]
F-7-46

[1] ITB cleaning swing cam

[2] Releasing lever
[3] ITB cleaning blade
[4] Transfer locking cam
[5] Transfer locking arm
[6] Secondary transfer arm
[7] Secondary transfer outside roller

Points to Note When Turning Off the Power

If you need to turn off the machine for service work, be sure to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power switch. If the secondary
transfer outside roller is left in contact with the ITB for a long time, the ITB can suffer traces of the roller. To avoid these traces, the machine is designed to
automatically move the secondary transfer roller away from the ITB if there is no next job within about 30 sec after it has entered a standby state. Likewise, the
machine moves away the secondary transfer outside roller when the control panel power switch is turned off. If you turn off the main power switch within about
30 sec after the machine enters a standby state, the machine will not be able to move the secondary transfer outside roller from the ITB, permitting it to leave
traces on the belt.

LSTR

STBY

Roller in
contact

Roller in
contact

30sec.

Roller away

Roller away
Control panel
power switch
OFF
F-7-47

7.9.9 Transfer Assembly Swing Control

0010-3587

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- ITB Cleaning Blade

7-33

Chapter 7
When the clutch (CL8) goes on, the drive of the main motor (M2) is transmitted to a cam; when the releasing lever moves up and down, its associated ITB cleaning
blade moves into contact with or moves away from the ITB. The ITB cleaning blade remains away from the ITB while the machine is in a standby state.
- Secondary Transfer Outside Roller
When the clutch (CL9) goes on, the drive of the main motor (M2) is transmitted to a cam, and the transfer locking arm pushes the secondary transfer arm, causing
the latter to move away from the ITB. The secondary transfer outside roller moves away from the ITB if no copy/print job arrives within about 30 sec after the
machine enters a standby state.

[1]

[3]

[2]

DC-CON

J311B

CL8

J311A

M2

CL9

J320A
[7]
[6]

[4]

[5]
F-7-48

[1] ITB cleaning swing cam

[2] Releasing lever
[3] ITB cleaning blade
[4] Transfer locking cam
[5] Transfer locking arm
[6] Secondary transfer arm
[7] Secondary transfer outside roller

7.9.10 Separation
0000-9307

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine uses a curvature method to separate paper; it is also equipped with a static eliminator to assist separation. The eliminator removes positive changes
remaining on paper, thus preventing adhesion of paper (especially thin paper with little body) to the ITB.

7-34

Chapter 7

[2]

F-7-52

5) Remove the 2 screws (M4X20) [1].

F-7-49

[1] Secondary transfer outside roller

[2] ITB
[3] Separation static eliminator

7.10 Parts Replacement Procedure

7.10.1 Drum Unit
F-7-53

7.10.1.1 Removing Drum Unit

0001-6860

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

6) Turn the ITB release lever [1] clockwise until it is locked.

There is a protrusion behind the area indicated in the figure [2]. By turning the ITB release lever until the protrusion is ridden over the stopper
[3], the lever is locked.

1) Open the front cover.

2) Open the toner replacement cover [1].

F-7-54
F-7-50

3) Check that the toner container (magenta) [1] is positioned as shown. If not,
close the front cover and the toner replacement cover and turn on the main
power switch of the machine.
After making sure that the toner container (magenta) [1] is moved to the
position as shown, turn off the control panel power switch and main power switch of the machine in that order.

F-7-55

7) Remove the drum unit [1] by pulling it out toward the front.

F-7-51

Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum of the
drum unit.

4) Remove the screw (black; M3X20) [1].

7-35

Chapter 7

F-7-57

F-7-56

8) To return the ITB release lever to its initial position (where it was before
removing the drum unit), unlock it and turn it counterclockwise.

The photosensitive drum [1] and the ITB [2] are in contact with each other.
By turning the ITB release lever clockwise, the release member [3] that
operates in conjunction with the lever moves the ITB [2] up; thus, moving
the ITB [2] away from the photosensitive drum [1].

[2]

[1]

[3]
F-7-58
MEMO:
The laser light is emitted onto the photosensitive drum by passing through
between area [1] and area [2] shown in the figure. If dust is accumulated on
the area, part of the laser light is blocked, leaving a white line on an image.

7.10.1.3 After Replacing Drum Unit

0001-6873

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Initialize the drum unit.
Select the following in service mode:
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> DRM-LIFE
The indication "ACTIVE" is flashed on the screen while the initialization
is in process. Once the process completes, "OK" is indicated. The
initialization completes in about 1 min.

At this time, the ITB is slacked temporarily. Leaving as it is for a long time;
however, may cause deformation of ITB. To make the ITB being slacked as
short a time as possible, be sure to return the ITB release lever to its initial
position as soon as you have removed the drum unit.

7.10.1.2 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit

0001-6867

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum of
the drum unit.
- Be sure to slide the drum unit inside until it comes in contact with the rear
of the machine while holding it level when attaching the unit.
Otherwise, the photosensitive drum will interfere with the machine's internal components, possibly damaging it.
- Check that the area [1] of the drum unit and the area [2] of the optical hood
are free of dust and dirt before attaching the drum unit.
As necessary, wipe it with a cloth moistened with water. Do not dry wipe
the areas; otherwise, static electricity will build up to attract dust.

7-36

Be sure not to touch any key, open the door, or turn off the power while
initialization is in process (during the indication "ACTIVE" is flashing).
Otherwise, go back to step 1) and start over.

2) When initialization is done, check that the value is "0" by selecting the following in service mode:
COPIER> DISPLAY> MISC> DRM-LIFE
If the value is not "0", go back to step 1) and start over.
3) Obtain the value by selecting the following in service mode:
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DR-I-INT
Then, record the obtained value in the Remarks field of the drum initial
value label (attached to the light-blocking sheet of a new drum unit).
As necessary, record the date of drum unit replacement and the counter
reading on the drum initial value label.
4) Attach the drum initial value label to the front [1] of the drum unit.

Chapter 7

F-7-59

5) Execute "Full Adjust" of the auto gradation correction in additional functions mode.
F-7-60

7.10.2 Development Unit

7.10.2.1 Finisher-P1 in Use
0003-1924

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

2) Detach the rotary fixing plate [2].

- 1 screw [1]
In case of removing the developing unit (Bk), the rotary fixing plate is not
needed for the unit; thus, skip this step.

If the machine is equipped with a Finisher-P1, be sure to detach the finisher

rail before removing he developing unit. To detach the finisher rail [1],
remove the screw [2] and move it in the direction of the arrow.

F-7-61

3) Close the toner replacement cover, and insert a screwdriver through the
angular hole [1]. Then, turn the developing rotary [2] counterclockwise
slowly by hand so that the desired developing unit moves to the toner container replacement position.
When the developing rotary reaches to the point of the replacement, it is
fixed in place by the rotary fixing arm.

If removing the developing unit without detaching the finisher rail, the
developing cylinder may interfere with the finisher rail.

MEMO: Recommended Work in the Presence of Finisher-P1

To facilitate the removal of the developing unit, it is recommended to
remove both the finisher rail and the finisher itself before starting to remove
the unit.

7.10.2.2 Before Removing Developing Unit

0017-5641

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
2) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
3) Remove the ITB waste toner unit. (page 7-43)[Removing ITB Waste
Toner Unit]

F-7-62

7.10.2.3 Removing Developing Unit

0000-9364

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

7-37

Chapter 7

F-7-63

4) Open the toner replacement cover, and turn the knob [2] of the toner container [1] counterclockwise until it stops. Then, remove the toner container [1] by pulling it out toward the front.

F-7-66

5-2) In case of removing the developing unit with the Finisher-P1 connected,
attach the rotary fixing plate [1] to [B] position and fix the developing
rotary in place.
Be sure that the "LF" marking of the rotary fixing plate [1] faces upward when attaching.

When removing the toner container, work with care.

Otherwise, toner may spill around the toner container replacement mouth.

F-7-67

F-7-64

5) Fix the developing rotary in place.

In case of the developing unit (Bk), its replacement position is the same
as that of the toner container (Bk); thus, there is no need to perform the
following steps 5-1) and 5-2).
5-1) In case of the developing unit (Y/M/C), move the developing rotary to
the developing unit replacement position, and fix it in place with the
rotary fixing plate that has been removed previously.
Attach the rotary fixing plate [1] to [A] position so as to make the "UP"
marking face upward.

F-7-68

6) Remove the screw [1].

In case of the developing unit (Y/M/C), the position of the screw [1] differs depending on the fixing position of the developing rotary.

F-7-65

F-7-69

7-38

Chapter 7

F-7-73

F-7-70

7) Remove the developing unit [1].

This step is performed to prevent the screw base from riding over the
developing container guide plate [1]. If the screw base is being ridden over
the plate, the proper distance between the photosensitive drum and the
developing cylinder is not maintained, may cause a blank image.

F-7-71

7.10.2.4 Points to Note When Attaching Developing Unit

0001-3637

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
-

Check that the shutter [1] is in contact in the direction of the arrow as
shown in the figure before attaching the developing unit. If not, move the
shutter [1] in the direction of the arrow until it stops. If the push-on is not
sufficient, the toner container may not be attached properly.

7.10.2.5 After Replacing Developing Unit (Y/M/C)

0001-6774

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Select the following in service mode for the target item (color):
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y/M/C
2) Select the following in service mode for the target item (color):
COPIER>
FUNCTION>
INSTALL>
INIT-Y/M/CiY/M/
CINIT-3j
3) Select the following in service mode for the target item (color):
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> SPLY-Y/M/C
4) Obtain the values by selecting the followings in service mode for the target item (color):
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-Y/M/C, and
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > REF-Y/M/C
Then, record the obtained values in the service label.
5) Execute "Full Adjust" of the auto gradation correction in additional functions mode.

7.10.2.6 After Replacing Developing Unit (Bk)

0001-6215

F-7-72

- When fixing the developing unit in place with the screw [1], be sure to
push the casing of the unit in the direction of the arrow until it stops while
tightening the screw. After tightening the screw, check that there is about
1.5 to 2 mm room by pushing the casing of the developing unit in the direction of the arrow. If there is not enough room, remove the screw [1]
and then tighten it again while pushing the casing of the developing unit
in the direction of the arrow until it stops.

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Select the following in service mode:
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-K
2) Select the following in service mode:
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> SPLY-K
3) Select the following in service mode:
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> DV-UNT-K
Then, check that the value is cleared as "0".
4) Execute "Full Adjust" of the auto gradation correction in additional functions mode.

7.10.3 Rotary Upper Cover

7.10.3.1 Detaching Rotary Upper Cover
0002-6742

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]
2) Disengage the claw [2] at the front side of the rotary upper cover [1]. Then,
hold the center [3] of the rotary upper cover [1] and detach it in the direction of the arrow.

7-39

Chapter 7

MEMO:
The laser light is emitted onto the photosensitive drum by passing through
between area [1] and area [2] shown in the figure. If dust is accumulated on
the area, part of the laser light is blocked, leaving a white line on an image.

The ITB locates right above the rotary upper cover. Be sure not to touch the
ITB when detaching the rotary upper cover.
When the ITB is touched, be sure to execute the ITB cleaning by selecting
the following in service mode:
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > TBLT-CLN

7.10.4 Rotary Lower Cover

7.10.4.1 Before Detaching Rotary Lower Cover
0017-5648

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

[1]

1) Detach the upper left cover.(page 10-18)[Detaching Upper Left Cover]

2) Remove the left grip (front) [2].
- 2 screws [1]

[3]

[2]

F-7-74

7.10.3.2 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit

F-7-77

0002-6744

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

7.10.4.2 Detaching Rotary Lower Cover

0002-6625

- Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum of

the drum unit.
- Be sure to slide the drum unit inside until it comes in contact with the rear
of the machine while holding it level when attaching the unit.
Otherwise, the photosensitive drum will interfere with the machine's internal components, possibly damaging it.
- Check that the area [1] of the drum unit and the area [2] of the optical hood
are free of dust and dirt before attaching the drum unit.
As necessary, wipe it with a cloth moistened with water. Do not dry wipe
the areas; otherwise, static electricity will build up to attract dust.

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the front cover.
2) Detach the rotary lower cover [2] by pulling it out toward the front.
- 2 screws [1]

F-7-78
F-7-75

7.10.5 ITB Cleaning Unit

7.10.5.1 Preparing for the Removal of ITB Cleaning Unit
0001-8374

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Turn on the main power switch.
2) Select the following in service mode and press [OK]:
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ITB-CLSW (ITB cleaning blade
disengagement mode)
The indication "ACTIVE" is flashed on the screen while the operation is
in process. Once the process completes, "OK" is indicated.
MEMO:
The machine operates as follows in response to making the following
selection in service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ITBCLSW.
- Disengage the ITB cleaning blade from the ITB. (To prevent the ITB from
being damaged)

F-7-76

7-40

Chapter 7
- Change the position of the developing rotary. (If the developing cylinder
is positioned under the ITB cleaning unit, the base of the ITB cleaning unit
may rub against the surface of the developing cylinder to cause damage.
Therefore, rotate the developing rotary to position the Bk toner container
right under the ITB cleaning unit.)
- If the machine is equipped with a Finisher-P1, move the finisher delivery
tray as far up as it moves. (If the finisher delivery tray is in down position,
it may be difficult to attach the ITB cleaning unit.)

7.10.5.2 Removing the Delivery Tray

0002-0308

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Open the front cover.
2) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and detach the delivery tray [2].
F-7-82

7.10.5.4 Removing the ITB Waste Toner Unit

0001-8375

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Open the front cover.
2) Open the toner replacement cover [1].

F-7-79

Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Tray

Be sure that the delivery tray [1] fully covers the ribs [2] of the delivery
tray lower cover.
F-7-83

3) Remove the toner bottle retainer [2].

- 1 screw [1]
4) Remove the ITB waste toner unit [3].

F-7-80

7.10.5.3 Removing the Delivery Tray Lower Cover

0002-0309

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

F-7-84

1) Open the toner cartridge access cover [1].

7.10.5.5 Before Removing ITB Cleaning Unit

0017-5669

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
2) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
3) Detach the ITB waste toner unit. (page 7-43)[Removing ITB Waste
Toner Unit]

7.10.5.6 Removing ITB Cleaning Unit

0000-9358

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-7-81

1) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].

- 1 screw [1]

2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the delivery tray lower cover [1].

7-41

Chapter 7

F-7-85

2) Check that the toner container (Bk) [1] is positioned under the ITB cleaning unit [2].
If not, move the toner container (Bk) to the point right under the ITB
cleaning unit by rotating the developing rotary by hand.

When placing the ITB cleaning unit on the floor after removing it, be sure
to orient it as shown (so that the releasing arm is parallel with the floor).
Otherwise, the waste toner inside the ITB cleaning unit may spills out.

F-7-86

3) Remove the screw [1], and fit the screw to the screw hole [2].

F-7-87
MEMO:
To fix the arm [3] in place, fit the screw to the screw hole [2].
If the arm is not fixed in place, the cleaning blade may come into contact
with the ITB when removing the ITB cleaning unit, causing damage on the
ITB.

F-7-88

7.10.5.7 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Cleaning Unit

4) Remove the ITB cleaning unit [1] by pulling it out toward the front.

Be sure not to impose excess force on the nozzle area [1] of the ITB cleaning
unit when removing the unit.
Otherwise, the nozzle area [1] may get damage.

7-42

0000-9359

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Check that the screw [1] is fitted to the ITB cleaning unit before attaching
the unit to the machine.
If the screw [1] is not fitted, the ITB cleaning unit is attached while the
ITB cleaning blade is in contact with the ITB, may damaging the ITB.

Chapter 7

MEMO:
The figures below show the end seal [1] in normal condition and the one in
abnormal condition (upward-tilted one).

[1]

F-7-89

- When attaching the ITB cleaning unit to the machine without a care, the
end seal [1] may be deformed or removed by interfering with the ITB unit
guide assembly [2] (the surface indicated by a heavy line in the figure).
The damage on the seal may result in scattering of the waste toner inside
the machine.
To prevent the scattering, attach the ITB cleaning unit in the following
steps: [A] Slant the front edge of the ITB cleaning unit toward the left, and
insert the unit toward the rear side of the machine temporally, [B] Move
the unit until it becomes parallel to the ITB, ensuring that the end seal [1]
does not come in contact with the ITB unit guide assembly [2] (the surface indicated by a heavy line in the figure), [C] Push the unit straight to
the rear side of the machine.

[1]

- Be sure to fit the screw [1] to the screw hole [2] after attaching the ITB
cleaning unit to the machine. Otherwise, the ITB cleaning blade remains
disengaged; thus, the ITB cleaning cannot be executed.

[C]
[B]
[A]

F-7-92

7.10.6 ITB Waste Toner Unit

7.10.6.1 Removing ITB Waste Toner Unit
[1]

0000-9356

[2]

F-7-90

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the front cover.
2) Open the toner replacement cover [1].

F-7-93

3) Remove the toner bottle retainer [2].

- 1 screw [1]
4) Remove the ITB waste toner unit [3].

[2]
[1]
F-7-91

7-43

Chapter 7
1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]
2) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
4) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner
Container Retainer]
5) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-94

7.10.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit

7.10.7.1 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB
Unit)
0017-5887

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]
2) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
4) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner
Container Retainer]
5) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-97

6) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
7) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
8) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
9) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
10) Detach the plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-98
F-7-95

6) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
7) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
8) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
9) Detach the plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-96

0017-7756

7-44

0001-8252

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the screw [1] and the screw [2].

F-7-99

7.10.7.2 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB

Unit)
iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

7.10.7.3 Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)

2) While lifting up the fixing drive gear assembly [1] fully in the direction of
the arrow, insert the previously removed fixing release arm plate [4] into
the hole [3] of the fixing release arm [2] to hold the fixing drive gear assembly [1] in place.

Chapter 7

F-7-100

4) Fix the fixing release arm plate [1] in place with the screw [2].
Then, check that the fixing drive gear assembly moves in response to
moving the fixing release arm back and forth.

F-7-101
MEMO:
By performing step 2), the ITB unit and the fixing drive gear assembly will
not interfere with each other when removing the ITB unit.

3) Remove the contact guide [2].

- 2 screws [1]

Points to Note When Attaching

Be sure to put back the fixing release arm plate used to hold the fixing drive
gear assembly in place with the following procedures when attaching the
ITB unit.
1) In case that the delivery tray is attached, detach it once.
If the fixing release arm plate is attached in the presence of the delivery tray,
the fixing release arm (rear) will get stuck on the boss of the delivery tray,
preventing transmission of drive to the fixing roller.
2) Detach the fixing release arm plate [1] once.

F-7-102

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable from the cable guide.

3) While moving the fixing drive gear assembly [1] in the direction of the
arrow until it stops, attach the fixing release arm plate [2] by inserting it into
a hole.

F-7-103

5) Free the claw by lifting the 2 points [1] indicated in the figure, and remove
the ITB fan duct [2].

7-45

Chapter 7
diately wash your hands. You must not touch the ITB with your hand having the grease on.

F-7-104

6) Remove the 2 screws (TP; M3X6) [1] and the 2 screws (binding; M4X14)
[2].
7) Lift the 2 grips [3] of the ITB unit to remove from the shaft support, and
remove the ITB unit [4] in the direction of obliquely downward.

F-7-107

- Tighten the screw of the ITB unit with the following procedures.
1) Tighten the screw [1], and then, temporarily tighten the screw [2].

F-7-108

F-7-105

2) Pinch the ITB unit frame [A] and the ITB unit support member [B] with
fingers in the direction of the arrow, so that there will be no looseness between them. While keeping them as they are, fully tighten the screw [2].

Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the ITB when removing the
ITB unit.
Moreover, when removing the ITB unit, be sure to place a paper under it
instead of placing it directly on the floor or a desk.

If leaving the ITB unit alone for a long time after removing it, be sure to
cover the surface of the photosensitive drum with a paper to protect it
against light.

7.10.7.4 Points to Note When Attaching Intermediate

Transfer Unit (ITB Unit)
0000-9269

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- When attaching the ITB unit to the machine, move the ITB unit [1] in the
direction of the arrow "a" (toward the front side of the machine), and then
along the rails in the direction of the arrow "b".

F-7-109

3) Tighten the 2 screws (TP; M3X6) [3] and the 2 screws (binding; M4X14)
[4].
There is no specific order for tightening the two types of screw; therefore,
it is possible to attach either of them first.

F-7-106

- Be sure to give the gear [1] a full turn by hand before tightening the screw
to fix the ITB unit in place after fitting it in the machine.
Merely fitting the ITB unit in the machine does not always mean that the
gear [1] and the other gear [2] have been fully engaged; the turn will mesh
them correctly.
- The gear [1] above is coated with grease; the gear [2] is also coated with
grease. If the grease adheres to your hand when rotating the gears, imme-

7-46

F-7-110

Chapter 7

7.10.8.2 Removing ITB Waste Toner Detection Unit

0000-9361

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

When failing to follow the proper procedure (step 2) above) before

tightening the screw [2], the rear side of the ITB cleaning blade may not be
in completely contact with the ITB, causing faulty cleaning.
Moreover, when failing to attach the screw [1] and the screw [2] in the
correct order, some lines (96.7 mm pitch) may appear on the images.

1) Remove the toner bottle retainer [2] and the ITB waste toner unit [3].
- 1 screw [1]
2) Detach the front inner cover (middle) [5].
- 2 screws [4]

7.10.7.5 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit

0002-8701

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum of
the drum unit.
- Be sure to slide the drum unit inside until it comes in contact with the rear
of the machine while holding it level when attaching the unit.
Otherwise, the photosensitive drum will interfere with the machine's internal components, possibly damaging it.
- Check that the area [1] of the drum unit and the area [2] of the optical hood
are free of dust and dirt before attaching the drum unit.
As necessary, wipe it with a cloth moistened with water. Do not dry wipe
the areas; otherwise, static electricity will build up to attract dust.

F-7-113

3) Detach the front inner cover (left) [2].

- 2 screws [1]

F-7-111

F-7-114

4) Free the cable from the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the connector
[2].
5) Remove the ITB waste toner detection unit [4].
- 1 screw [3]

F-7-112
MEMO:
The laser light is emitted onto the photosensitive drum by passing through
between area [1] and area [2] shown in the figure. If dust is accumulated on
the area, part of the laser light is blocked, leaving a white line on an image.

7.10.7.6 After Replacing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB

Unit)
0001-8425

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
F-7-115

Select the following in service mode:

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX

7.10.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt

7.10.8 ITB Waste Toner Detection Unit

7.10.9.1 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt

(ITB)

7.10.8.1 Before Removing ITB Waste Toner Detection

Unit

0017-6623

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

0017-5888

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
2) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]

1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]

2) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
4) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner

7-47

Chapter 7
7) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
8) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
9) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
10) Detach the plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

Container Retainer]
5) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-116

6) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
7) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
8) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
9) Detach the plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-119

11) Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (page 7-44)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)]

7.10.9.3 Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)

0000-9270

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Be sure to place a paper under the ITB unit instead of placing the unit
directly on the floor or a desk.

1) Remove the ITB retainer [2].

- 1 screw [1]

F-7-117

10) Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (page 7-44)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)]

7.10.9.2 Before Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt

(ITB)
0017-7757

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]
2) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
4) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner
Container Retainer]
5) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-120

2) Remove the sheet base (rear) [2].

- 1 screw [1]

F-7-121

3) Remove the sheet base (front) [2].

- 1 screw [1]

F-7-118

6) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]

7-48

Chapter 7

F-7-122

F-7-126

4) Remove the 2 tension springs [1].

F-7-127
F-7-123
Be sure not to catch the ITB home position sensor cable [1] in the ITB unit
frame [A].

F-7-124

5) While pushing the bushings [1] and [2] toward the inside, move the secondary transfer inner roller in the direction of the arrow until it stops.

7) Remove the ITB [1] in upward direction.

F-7-125
MEMO:
This step loosens the tension of the ITB; thus, makes the removal of the ITB
easier.

6) Stand the ITB unit using the right cover (rear upper) detached when removing the ITB unit.
To stand the ITB unit, insert [a] and [b] of the ITB unit frame into the ribs
[A] and [B] on the right cover (rear upper).

F-7-128

7-49

Chapter 7

Notes on Falling Down of the ITB Unit

Although the ITB unit stands by means of the right cover (rear upper), it is
still very unstable and may fall down.
Be careful to the following points when servicing.
- Work performed by standing the ITB unit is limited to attachment/removal
of the ITB. Thus, do not stand the ITB unit for other works (e.g., cleaning
and replacement of parts other than the ITB).
- Be sure not to apply power in the direction of the arrow indicated below.
Otherwise, the ITB easily falls down.

[1]
F-7-131

- Be sure to attach the sheet base (front) [1] to prevent the plastic film [2]
riding over the ITB [3].

7.10.9.4 Points to Note When Attaching Intermediate

Transfer Belt (ITB)
0000-9271

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Be sure to place the drive gear side at the bottom when placing the ITB
unit upright.
- When attaching the ITB [1] to the ITB frame, be sure to place the end with
a red marking [2] at the top.

F-7-132

F-7-133

- Be sure to attach the sheet base (rear) [1] to prevent the plastic film [2]
riding over the ITB [3].

F-7-129

- Be sure to orient the 2 tension springs [1] as shown in the figure below
when attaching them.
When they are oriented to the reverse direction, they fail to keep the proper ITB tension, causing poor transfer or ITB breakage.

F-7-134

[1]
F-7-130

7-50

Chapter 7

F-7-135
F-7-138

7.10.9.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit

0001-8284

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

2) Pinch the ITB unit frame [A] and the ITB unit support member [B] with
fingers in the direction of the arrow, so that there will be no looseness between them. While keeping them as they are, fully tighten the screw [2].

- When attaching the ITB unit to the machine, move the ITB unit [1] in the
direction of the arrow "a" (toward the front side of the machine), and then
along the rails in the direction of the arrow "b".

F-7-139

F-7-136

3) Tighten the 2 screws (TP; M3X6) [3] and the 2 screws (binding; M4X14)
[4].
There is no specific order for tightening the two types of screw; therefore,
it is possible to attach either of them first.

- Be sure to give the gear [1] a full turn by hand before tightening the screw
to fix the ITB unit in place after fitting it in the machine.
Merely fitting the ITB unit in the machine does not always mean that the
gear [1] and the other gear [2] have been fully engaged; the turn will mesh
them correctly.
- The gear [1] above is coated with grease; the gear [2] is also coated with
grease. If the grease adheres to your hand when rotating the gears, immediately wash your hands. You must not touch the ITB with your hand having the grease on.

F-7-140

F-7-137

- Tighten the screw of the ITB unit with the following procedures.
1) Tighten the screw [1], and then, temporarily tighten the screw [2].

When failing to follow the proper procedure (step 2) above) before

tightening the screw [2], the rear side of the ITB cleaning blade may not be
in completely contact with the ITB, causing faulty cleaning.
Moreover, when failing to attach the screw [1] and the screw [2] in the
correct order, some lines (96.7 mm pitch) may appear on the images.

7.10.9.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit

0002-8703

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum of
the drum unit.
- Be sure to slide the drum unit inside until it comes in contact with the rear
of the machine while holding it level when attaching the unit.
Otherwise, the photosensitive drum will interfere with the machine's internal components, possibly damaging it.
- Check that the area [1] of the drum unit and the area [2] of the optical hood
are free of dust and dirt before attaching the drum unit.
As necessary, wipe it with a cloth moistened with water. Do not dry wipe
the areas; otherwise, static electricity will build up to attract dust.

7-51

Chapter 7

F-7-141

F-7-143

6) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
7) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
8) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
9) Detach the plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-142
MEMO:
The laser light is emitted onto the photosensitive drum by passing through
between area [1] and area [2] shown in the figure. If dust is accumulated on
the area, part of the laser light is blocked, leaving a white line on an image.
F-7-144

7.10.9.7 After Replacing ITB

0001-8289

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Select the following in service mode:
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> 1ATVC-EX

10) Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (page 7-44)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)]
11) Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (page 7-48)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)]

7.10.10.2 Before Removing ITB Home Position Sensor

PCB

7.10.10 ITB Home Position Sensor PCB

0017-7758

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

7.10.10.1 Before Removing ITB Home Position Sensor

PCB
0017-6625

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]
2) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
4) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner
Container Retainer]
5) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]

2) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
4) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner
Container Retainer]
5) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-145

6) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
7) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cov-

7-52

Chapter 7
er (Lower Rear)]
8) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
9) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
10) Detach the plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-149

7.10.10.4 Points to Note When Attaching ITB

0001-8358

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
F-7-146

11) Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (page 7-44)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)]
12) Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (page 7-48)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)]

- Be sure to place the drive gear side at the bottom when placing the ITB
unit upright.
- When attaching the ITB [1] to the ITB frame, be sure to place the end with
a red marking [2] at the top.

7.10.10.3 Removing ITB Home Position Sensor PCB

0000-9277

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Hold the both ends [2] of the inner blade [1], and remove it in upward direction.

F-7-150
F-7-147

2) Detach the plate [2].

- 2 screws [1]

- Be sure to orient the 2 tension springs [1] as shown in the figure below
when attaching them.
When they are oriented to the reverse direction, they fail to keep the proper ITB tension, causing poor transfer or ITB breakage.

[1]
F-7-151

F-7-148

3) Turn over the ITB unit and remove the ITB home position sensor PCB [2].
- 1 connector [1]

[1]
F-7-152

- Be sure to attach the sheet base (front) [1] to prevent the plastic film [2]
riding over the ITB [3].

7-53

Chapter 7

F-7-157

- Be sure to give the gear [1] a full turn by hand before tightening the screw
to fix the ITB unit in place after fitting it in the machine.
Merely fitting the ITB unit in the machine does not always mean that the
gear [1] and the other gear [2] have been fully engaged; the turn will mesh
them correctly.
- The gear [1] above is coated with grease; the gear [2] is also coated with
grease. If the grease adheres to your hand when rotating the gears, immediately wash your hands. You must not touch the ITB with your hand having the grease on.

F-7-153

F-7-154

- Be sure to attach the sheet base (rear) [1] to prevent the plastic film [2]
riding over the ITB [3].

F-7-158

- Tighten the screw of the ITB unit with the following procedures.
1) Tighten the screw [1], and then, temporarily tighten the screw [2].

F-7-155

F-7-159

2) Pinch the ITB unit frame [A] and the ITB unit support member [B] with
fingers in the direction of the arrow, so that there will be no looseness between them. While keeping them as they are, fully tighten the screw [2].

F-7-156

7.10.10.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit

0001-8359

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- When attaching the ITB unit to the machine, move the ITB unit [1] in the
direction of the arrow "a" (toward the front side of the machine), and then
along the rails in the direction of the arrow "b".
F-7-160

3) Tighten the 2 screws (TP; M3X6) [3] and the 2 screws (binding; M4X14)

7-54

Chapter 7
[4].
There is no specific order for tightening the two types of screw; therefore,
it is possible to attach either of them first.

MEMO:
The laser light is emitted onto the photosensitive drum by passing through
between area [1] and area [2] shown in the figure. If dust is accumulated on
the area, part of the laser light is blocked, leaving a white line on an image.

7.10.11 Primary Transfer Roller

7.10.11.1 Before Removing Primary Transfer Roller
0017-6626

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]
2) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
4) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner
Container Retainer]
5) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]
F-7-161

When failing to follow the proper procedure (step 2) above) before

tightening the screw [2], the rear side of the ITB cleaning blade may not be
in completely contact with the ITB, causing faulty cleaning.
Moreover, when failing to attach the screw [1] and the screw [2] in the
correct order, some lines (96.7 mm pitch) may appear on the images.

7.10.10.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit

0002-8705

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum of
the drum unit.
- Be sure to slide the drum unit inside until it comes in contact with the rear
of the machine while holding it level when attaching the unit.
Otherwise, the photosensitive drum will interfere with the machine's internal components, possibly damaging it.
- Check that the area [1] of the drum unit and the area [2] of the optical hood
are free of dust and dirt before attaching the drum unit.
As necessary, wipe it with a cloth moistened with water. Do not dry wipe
the areas; otherwise, static electricity will build up to attract dust.

F-7-164

6) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
7) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
8) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
9) Detach the plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-162
F-7-165

10) Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (page 7-44)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)]
11) Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (page 7-48)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)]

7.10.11.2 Before Removing Primary Transfer Roller

0017-7759

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]
2) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
4) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner
Container Retainer]
5) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]
F-7-163

7-55

Chapter 7
- Be sure to place the drive gear side at the bottom when placing the ITB
unit upright.
- When attaching the ITB [1] to the ITB frame, be sure to place the end with
a red marking [2] at the top.

F-7-166

6) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
7) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
8) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
9) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
10) Detach the plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-169

- Be sure to orient the 2 tension springs [1] as shown in the figure below
when attaching them.
When they are oriented to the reverse direction, they fail to keep the proper ITB tension, causing poor transfer or ITB breakage.

[1]
F-7-170
F-7-167

11) Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (page 7-44)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)]
12) Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (page 7-48)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)]

7.10.11.3 Removing Primary Transfer Roller

0000-9272

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Lift the both ends of the primary transfer roller [1] to remove from the
shaft support.

[1]
F-7-171

- Be sure to attach the sheet base (front) [1] to prevent the plastic film [2]
riding over the ITB [3].
Be sure not to hold the sponge or rubber area of the primary transfer roller.

F-7-172

F-7-168

7.10.11.4 Points to Note When Attaching ITB

0001-8329

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

7-56

Chapter 7
them correctly.
- The gear [1] above is coated with grease; the gear [2] is also coated with
grease. If the grease adheres to your hand when rotating the gears, immediately wash your hands. You must not touch the ITB with your hand having the grease on.

F-7-173

- Be sure to attach the sheet base (rear) [1] to prevent the plastic film [2]
riding over the ITB [3].
F-7-177

- Tighten the screw of the ITB unit with the following procedures.
1) Tighten the screw [1], and then, temporarily tighten the screw [2].

F-7-174

F-7-178

2) Pinch the ITB unit frame [A] and the ITB unit support member [B] with
fingers in the direction of the arrow, so that there will be no looseness between them. While keeping them as they are, fully tighten the screw [2].

F-7-175

7.10.11.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit

0001-8330

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- When attaching the ITB unit to the machine, move the ITB unit [1] in the
direction of the arrow "a" (toward the front side of the machine), and then
along the rails in the direction of the arrow "b".

F-7-179

3) Tighten the 2 screws (TP; M3X6) [3] and the 2 screws (binding; M4X14)
[4].
There is no specific order for tightening the two types of screw; therefore,
it is possible to attach either of them first.

F-7-176

- Be sure to give the gear [1] a full turn by hand before tightening the screw
to fix the ITB unit in place after fitting it in the machine.
Merely fitting the ITB unit in the machine does not always mean that the
gear [1] and the other gear [2] have been fully engaged; the turn will mesh
F-7-180

7-57

Chapter 7

When failing to follow the proper procedure (step 2) above) before

tightening the screw [2], the rear side of the ITB cleaning blade may not be
in completely contact with the ITB, causing faulty cleaning.
Moreover, when failing to attach the screw [1] and the screw [2] in the
correct order, some lines (96.7 mm pitch) may appear on the images.

- Be sure to hold the auxiliary guide and the secondary transfer outer roller
in place when removing the pin; otherwise, these parts will slide out due to
a spring pressure.
- Be sure not to touch the secondary transfer outer roller directly. Use paper
when holding it.

7.10.11.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit

0002-8707

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum of
the drum unit.
- Be sure to slide the drum unit inside until it comes in contact with the rear
of the machine while holding it level when attaching the unit.
Otherwise, the photosensitive drum will interfere with the machine's internal components, possibly damaging it.
- Check that the area [1] of the drum unit and the area [2] of the optical hood
are free of dust and dirt before attaching the drum unit.
As necessary, wipe it with a cloth moistened with water. Do not dry wipe
the areas; otherwise, static electricity will build up to attract dust.

F-7-183

3) Remove the arms [1] and [2] from the secondary transfer outer roller assembly.

Be sure not to touch the secondary transfer outer roller directly. Use paper
when holding it.

F-7-181

F-7-184

7.10.12.2 Points to Note When Attaching Secondary

Transfer Outer Roller
F-7-182

0001-8923

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

MEMO:
The laser light is emitted onto the photosensitive drum by passing through
between area [1] and area [2] shown in the figure. If dust is accumulated on
the area, part of the laser light is blocked, leaving a white line on an image.

- Be sure not to touch the secondary transfer outer roller directly. Use paper
when holding it.
- When attaching the secondary transfer outer roller [1], be sure to place the
end [2] with a blue marking at the front side.

7.10.11.7 After Replacing Primary Transfer Roller

0001-6883

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Select the following in service mode:
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX

7.10.12 Secondary Transfer External Roller

7.10.12.1 Removing Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
0000-9280

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the separation static eliminator. (page 7-67)[Removing Separation Static Eliminator]
2) While holding down the auxiliary guide [1] by hand, remove the 2 pins [2]
and the secondary transfer outer roller assembly [3].

F-7-185

- Be sure that the spring attached to the arm of the secondary transfer outer
roller assembly is fitted within the protrusion [1].

7-58

Chapter 7
Moreover, be sure that the spring attached to the auxiliary guide is fitted
within the protrusion [2].

F-7-186

- Be sure that the claw [1] of the arm found on both ends of the secondary
transfer outer roller assembly is inside the frame.

F-7-189

7.10.12.3 When Replacing Secondary Transfer Outer

Roller
0001-8427

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
When replacing the secondary transfer outer roller, be sure to apply about 10
mg (about the size of a rice grain) of grease (Tool name: Barrierta IMI, Tool
No.: FY9-6008) to the shaft end [2] (the side without the blue marking) at the
rear side of the secondary transfer outer roller [1].

F-7-190

7.10.13 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller

F-7-187

- When fixing the arm [2] of the secondary transfer outer roller [1] by means
of the pin [3], keep the pin halfway. Thereafter, when attaching the auxiliary guide [4], push the pin [3] fully inside.

7.10.13.1 Before Removing Secondary Transfer Inner

Roller
0017-6629

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]
2) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
4) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner
Container Retainer]
5) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-188

7-59

Chapter 7
er (Lower Rear)]
8) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
9) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
10) Detach the plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-191

6) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
7) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
8) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
9) Detach the plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-194

11) Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (page 7-44)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)]
12) Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (page 7-48)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)]

7.10.13.3 Removing Secondary Transfer Inner Roller

0000-9274

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) While pushing the bushings [2] and [3] toward the inside, move the secondary transfer inner roller assembly [1] in the direction of the arrow until
it stops.

F-7-192

10) Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (page 7-44)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)]
11) Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (page 7-48)[Removing Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)]

7.10.13.2 Before Removing Secondary Transfer Inner

Roller
0017-7760

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
F-7-195

1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]

2) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
4) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner
Container Retainer]
5) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

2) Remove the roller support members [2] and [3].

- 1 screw [1] for each

F-7-196

F-7-193

6) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
7) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cov-

7-60

Chapter 7

F-7-197

3) Move the secondary transfer inner roller assembly [1] in the direction of
the arrow [A] until it stops, and then, move it in the direction of the arrow
[B].

F-7-200

7.10.13.4 Points to Note When Attaching ITB

0001-8341

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Be sure to place the drive gear side at the bottom when placing the ITB
unit upright.
- When attaching the ITB [1] to the ITB frame, be sure to place the end with
a red marking [2] at the top.

F-7-198

F-7-201

F-7-199

- Be sure to orient the 2 tension springs [1] as shown in the figure below
when attaching them.
When they are oriented to the reverse direction, they fail to keep the proper ITB tension, causing poor transfer or ITB breakage.

MEMO:
Move the secondary transfer inner roller in the direction of the arrow so that
it is disengaged from the protrusion [1].

[1]
F-7-202

4) Remove the bushings [2] and [3].

- 1 E-ring [1] for each

Be sure not to hold the rubber area of the secondary transfer inner roller.

[1]
F-7-203

7-61

Chapter 7
- Be sure to attach the sheet base (front) [1] to prevent the plastic film [2]
riding over the ITB [3].

F-7-208

- Be sure to give the gear [1] a full turn by hand before tightening the screw
to fix the ITB unit in place after fitting it in the machine.
Merely fitting the ITB unit in the machine does not always mean that the
gear [1] and the other gear [2] have been fully engaged; the turn will mesh
them correctly.
- The gear [1] above is coated with grease; the gear [2] is also coated with
grease. If the grease adheres to your hand when rotating the gears, immediately wash your hands. You must not touch the ITB with your hand having the grease on.

F-7-204

F-7-205

- Be sure to attach the sheet base (rear) [1] to prevent the plastic film [2]
riding over the ITB [3].
F-7-209

- Tighten the screw of the ITB unit with the following procedures.
1) Tighten the screw [1], and then, temporarily tighten the screw [2].

F-7-206

F-7-210

2) Pinch the ITB unit frame [A] and the ITB unit support member [B] with
fingers in the direction of the arrow, so that there will be no looseness between them. While keeping them as they are, fully tighten the screw [2].

F-7-207

7.10.13.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Unit

0001-8343

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- When attaching the ITB unit to the machine, move the ITB unit [1] in the
direction of the arrow "a" (toward the front side of the machine), and then
along the rails in the direction of the arrow "b".

F-7-211

3) Tighten the 2 screws (TP; M3X6) [3] and the 2 screws (binding; M4X14)

7-62

Chapter 7
[4].
There is no specific order for tightening the two types of screw; therefore,
it is possible to attach either of them first.

MEMO:
The laser light is emitted onto the photosensitive drum by passing through
between area [1] and area [2] shown in the figure. If dust is accumulated on
the area, part of the laser light is blocked, leaving a white line on an image.

7.10.14 ITB Cleaning Blade

7.10.14.1 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit
0001-8382

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-212

When failing to follow the proper procedure (step 2) above) before

tightening the screw [2], the rear side of the ITB cleaning blade may not be
in completely contact with the ITB, causing faulty cleaning.
Moreover, when failing to attach the screw [1] and the screw [2] in the
correct order, some lines (96.7 mm pitch) may appear on the images.

7.10.13.6 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit

0002-8708

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum of
the drum unit.
- Be sure to slide the drum unit inside until it comes in contact with the rear
of the machine while holding it level when attaching the unit.
Otherwise, the photosensitive drum will interfere with the machine's internal components, possibly damaging it.
- Check that the area [1] of the drum unit and the area [2] of the optical hood
are free of dust and dirt before attaching the drum unit.
As necessary, wipe it with a cloth moistened with water. Do not dry wipe
the areas; otherwise, static electricity will build up to attract dust.

F-7-215

2) Check that the toner container (Bk) [1] is positioned under the ITB cleaning unit [2].
If not, move the toner container (Bk) to the point right under the ITB
cleaning unit by rotating the developing rotary by hand.

F-7-216

3) Remove the screw [1], and fit the screw to the screw hole [2].

F-7-213

F-7-217

F-7-214

MEMO:
To fix the arm [3] in place, fit the screw to the screw hole [2].
If the arm is not fixed in place, the cleaning blade may come into contact
with the ITB when removing the ITB cleaning unit, causing damage on the
ITB.

4) Remove the ITB cleaning unit [1] by pulling it out toward the front.

7-63

Chapter 7

MEMO:
The machine operates as follows in response to making the following
selection in service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ITBCLSW.

Be sure not to impose excess force on the nozzle area [1] of the ITB cleaning
unit when removing the unit.
Otherwise, the nozzle area [1] may get damage.

- Disengage the ITB cleaning blade from the ITB. (To prevent the ITB from
being damaged)
- Change the position of the developing rotary. (If the developing cylinder
is positioned under the ITB cleaning unit, the base of the ITB cleaning unit
may rub against the surface of the developing cylinder to cause damage.
Therefore, rotate the developing rotary to position the Bk toner container
right under the ITB cleaning unit.)
- If the machine is equipped with a Finisher-P1, move the finisher delivery
tray as far up as it moves. (If the finisher delivery tray is in down position,
it may be difficult to attach the ITB cleaning unit.)

3) Turn off the control panel power switch and wait for 15 sec. or more.
Then, turn off the main power switch.
4) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
5) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
6) Remove the ITB waste toner unit. (page 7-43)[Removing ITB Waste
Toner Unit]
7) Remove the ITB cleaning unit. (page 7-41)[Removing ITB Cleaning
Unit]

When placing the ITB cleaning unit on the floor after removing it, be sure
to orient it as shown (so that the releasing arm is parallel with the floor).
Otherwise, the waste toner inside the ITB cleaning unit may spills out.

7.10.14.3 Removing ITB Cleaning Blade

0000-9360

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the screw [1] attached when removing the ITB cleaning unit.

F-7-219

2) Remove the 2 end seals [2] and the ITB cleaning blade [3].
- 3 screws [1]

When removing or attaching the screw, be sure to keep the ITB cleaning
unit assembly [1] lifted by hand so that the shutter assembly [2] will not
come in contact with the floor.
Excess force on the shutter assembly may damage it.

F-7-218

7.10.14.2 Before Removing ITB Cleaning Blade

0017-6252

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Turn on the main power switch.
2) Select the following in service mode and press [OK]:
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ITB-CLSW (ITB cleaning blade
disengagement mode)
The indication "ACTIVE" is flashed on the screen while the operation is
in process. Once the process completes, "OK" is indicated.

7-64

F-7-220

Chapter 7

F-7-223

- After replacing the ITB cleaning blade, be sure to perform cleaning by selecting the following in additional functions mode:
Additional Function Mode > Adjustment / Cleaning > Cleaning Inside the
Machine
Moreover, cleaning will take about 1 min. 45 sec.
F-7-221

7.10.14.5 Points to Note When Attaching ITB Cleaning

Unit

7.10.14.4 When Replacing ITB Cleaning Blade

0004-5158

0001-8383

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Be sure to remove the waste toner accumulated on the brush [1] of the end
seal when replacing the ITB cleaning blade.

- Check that the screw [1] is fitted to the ITB cleaning unit before attaching
the unit to the machine.
If the screw [1] is not fitted, the ITB cleaning unit is attached while the
ITB cleaning blade is in contact with the ITB, may damaging the ITB.

F-7-222

- Apply the lubricant (Tool name: Cefbon CMA, Tool No.: TKN-0480) to
the edge of the ITB cleaning blade (the shaded part in the figure below)
using a lint-free paper. When applying the lubricant, place the lint-free
paper on the part and pat it with your finger.

F-7-224

- When attaching the ITB cleaning unit to the machine without a care, the
end seal [1] may be deformed or removed by interfering with the ITB unit
guide assembly [2] (the surface indicated by a heavy line in the figure).
The damage on the seal may result in scattering of the waste toner inside
the machine.
To prevent the scattering, attach the ITB cleaning unit in the following
steps: [A] Slant the front edge of the ITB cleaning unit toward the left, and
insert the unit toward the rear side of the machine temporally, [B] Move
the unit until it becomes parallel to the ITB, ensuring that the end seal [1]
does not come in contact with the ITB unit guide assembly [2] (the surface indicated by a heavy line in the figure), [C] Push the unit straight to
the rear side of the machine.

7-65

Chapter 7
disengaged; thus, the ITB cleaning cannot be executed.
[C]
[B]
[A]

F-7-227

7.10.15 ITB Fan

7.10.15.1 Before Removing ITB Duct Fan
0017-6254

[1]

[2]

F-7-225

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
2) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]

7.10.15.2 Removing ITB Duct Fan

0000-9362

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the toner bottle retainer [2] and the ITB waste toner unit [3].
- 1 screw [1]
2) Detach the front inner cover (middle) [5].
- 2 screws [4]

[2]
[1]
F-7-226
MEMO:
The figures below show the end seal [1] in normal condition and the one in
abnormal condition (upward-tilted one).

F-7-228

3) Open the right door, and detach the support cover (right) [3].
- 2 screws [1] (loosen)
- 1 screw [2]

[1]

[1]

F-7-229

4) Detach the ITB duct fan cover [3].

- 1 screw [1]
- 2 screws [2]
- Be sure to fit the screw [1] to the screw hole [2] after attaching the ITB
cleaning unit to the machine. Otherwise, the ITB cleaning blade remains

7-66

Chapter 7

7.10.17 ATR Sensor Unit

7.10.17.1 Before Removing ATR Sensor Unit
0017-6257

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the upper left cover. (page 10-18)[Detaching Upper Left Cover]
2) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]

7.10.17.2 Removing ATR Sensor Unit

0000-9369

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Move the developing rotary to the Bk toner container replacement position by rotating it by hand.
2) Remove the toner bottle retainer [2] and the ITB waste toner unit [3].
- 1 screw [1]
3) Detach the front inner cover (middle) [5].
- 2 screws [4]

F-7-230

5) Remove the ITB duct fan [3].

- 1 connector [1]
- 2 screws [2]

F-7-233
F-7-231

4) Detach the front inner cover (left) [2].

- 2 screws [1]

7.10.16 Separator Eliminator

7.10.16.1 Removing Separation Static Eliminator
0000-9279

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the right door.
2) Put a paper between the separation static eliminator [1] and the secondary
transfer outer roller [2].

Be sure to put a paper between them. Otherwise, the molded part of the
separation static eliminator may damage the secondary transfer outer roller
when removing the separation static eliminator.

3) Remove the separation static eliminator [1] by pulling it out toward the
front.
- 1 screw [3]
F-7-234

5) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

F-7-232
F-7-235

6) Remove the ATR sensor unit [2].

- 2 screws [1]

7-67

Chapter 7
7) Remove the patch image read sensor. (page 7-69)[Removing Patch Image Read Sensor]

7.10.18.3 Removing Environment Sensor PCB

0000-9291

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Free the cable [1] from the wire saddle.
2) Remove the 2 screws [2].

F-7-236

7.10.18 Environment Sensor PCB

7.10.18.1 Before Removing Environment Sensor PCB
0017-6260

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

F-7-239

1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]

2) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
3) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
5) Detach the fixing release arm plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

3) Turn over the sensor PCB holder [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
4) Remove the environment sensor PCB [3] by sliding it out in an angle.

F-7-240

7.10.18.4 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit

0001-8415

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-7-237

6) Remove the patch image read sensor. (page 7-69)[Removing Patch Image Read Sensor]

7.10.18.2 Before Removing Environment Sensor PCB

0017-7761

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]
2) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
5) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
6) Detach the fixing release arm plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

- Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum of

the drum unit.
- Be sure to slide the drum unit inside until it comes in contact with the rear
of the machine while holding it level when attaching the unit.
Otherwise, the photosensitive drum will interfere with the machine's internal components, possibly damaging it.
- Check that the area [1] of the drum unit and the area [2] of the optical hood
are free of dust and dirt before attaching the drum unit.
As necessary, wipe it with a cloth moistened with water. Do not dry wipe
the areas; otherwise, static electricity will build up to attract dust.

F-7-241

F-7-238

7-68

Chapter 7

F-7-244

7.10.19.3 Removing Patch Image Read Sensor

F-7-242

0000-9290

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

MEMO:
The laser light is emitted onto the photosensitive drum by passing through
between area [1] and area [2] shown in the figure. If dust is accumulated on
the area, part of the laser light is blocked, leaving a white line on an image.

1) Remove the 2 screws [1] using a stubby screwdriver, and detach the sensor
protection cover [2].

7.10.19 Patch Image Sensor

7.10.19.1 Before Removing Patch Image Read Sensor
0017-6262

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]
2) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
3) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
5) Detach the fixing release arm plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]
F-7-245

2) While lifting the sensor PCB holder [2] toward the front, remove the patch
image read sensor PCB [3] in upward direction at an angle.
- 1 screw [1]

- Be sure not to touch the volume element on the patch image read sensor
PCB. If you touched it accidentally, be sure to replace it.
- Be sure not to touch the window surface of the sensor. If you touched it
accidentally, be sure to wipe it with a moist cloth. (Do not dry wipe it)

F-7-243

7.10.19.2 Before Removing Patch Image Read Sensor

0017-7762

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the drum unit. (page 7-35)[Removing Drum Unit]
2) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
5) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
6) Detach the fixing release arm plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-7-246

3) Disconnect the connector [1].

7-69

Chapter 7

F-7-247

7.10.19.4 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Unit

0001-8408

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Be sure not to touch or damage the surface of the photosensitive drum of
the drum unit.
- Be sure to slide the drum unit inside until it comes in contact with the rear
of the machine while holding it level when attaching the unit.
Otherwise, the photosensitive drum will interfere with the machine's internal components, possibly damaging it.
- Check that the area [1] of the drum unit and the area [2] of the optical hood
are free of dust and dirt before attaching the drum unit.
As necessary, wipe it with a cloth moistened with water. Do not dry wipe
the areas; otherwise, static electricity will build up to attract dust.

F-7-248

F-7-249
MEMO:
The laser light is emitted onto the photosensitive drum by passing through
between area [1] and area [2] shown in the figure. If dust is accumulated on
the area, part of the laser light is blocked, leaving a white line on an image.

7-70

Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System

Contents

Contents
8.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Major Divisions of the Machine .................................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.3 Arrangement of the Rollers.......................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.4 Paper Paths (printer on its own)................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.5 Paper Paths (w/ Inner 2-Way Tray-C1) ....................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.6 Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-P1) ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.7 Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2) ...................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.8 Arrangement of Sensors............................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.1.9 Arrangement of Clutches and Solenoids...................................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.1.10 Drive Transmission Routes........................................................................................................................................................ 8-7

8.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................8-8

8.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ................................................................................................................................ 8-8
8.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key ....................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.3 Increase in Speed ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-9

8.3 Detecting Jams .............................................................................................................................................................8-11

8.3.1 Delay Jams ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-11
8.3.1.1 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly .......................................................................................................................................8-11
8.3.1.2 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly ................................................................................................................................................8-11

8.3.2 Stationary Jams .......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-12

8.3.2.1 Common Stationary Jam ...............................................................................................................................................................................8-12
8.3.2.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On..........................................................................................................................................................................8-12

8.3.3 Other Jams ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-12

8.3.3.1 Wrong Size Jam ............................................................................................................................................................................................8-12
8.3.3.2 Wrong Material Jam......................................................................................................................................................................................8-13
8.3.3.3 Cover Open Jam ............................................................................................................................................................................................8-13

8.4 Cassette ........................................................................................................................................................................8-13

8.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.2 Identifying the Paper Size .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.3 Setting Up the Universal Cassette.............................................................................................................................................. 8-15
8.4.4 Paper Level Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-15

8.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ..................................................................................................................................................8-17

8.5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-17
8.5.2 Basic Sequence of Operations ................................................................................................................................................... 8-18

8.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ............................................................................................................................................8-18

8.6.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18
8.6.2 Basic Sequence of Operation ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.6.3 Identifying the Paper Size .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.6.4 Paper Retaining Mechanism ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.6.5 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.6.6 Basic Sequence of Operations ................................................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.6.7 Identifying the Paper Size .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.6.8 Paper Retaining Mechanism ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-23

8.7 Registration Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................8-24

8.7.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-24
8.7.2 Controlling the Horizontal Registration..................................................................................................................................... 8-25

8.8 Duplex Feeding Unit ....................................................................................................................................................8-25

8.8.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.8.2 Sequence of Image Formation ................................................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.8.3 Flow of Paper (wo/ Delivery Option) ........................................................................................................................................ 8-27

Contents

8.8.4 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -internal delivery) .............................................................................................................. 8-32
8.8.5 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -external delivery).............................................................................................................. 8-36

8.9 Parts Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 8-39

8.9.1 Pickup Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-39
8.9.1.1 Before Removing Pickup Unit 1................................................................................................................................................................... 8-39
8.9.1.2 Before Removing Pickup Unit 1................................................................................................................................................................... 8-39
8.9.1.3 Removing Pickup Unit 1............................................................................................................................................................................... 8-39

8.9.2 Pickup Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-39

8.9.2.1 Before Removing Pickup Unit 2................................................................................................................................................................... 8-39
8.9.2.2 Removing Pickup Unit 2............................................................................................................................................................................... 8-39

8.9.3 Sensor Mounting Plate............................................................................................................................................................... 8-40

8.9.3.1 Before Removing Sensor Base ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-40
8.9.3.2 Before Removing Sensor Base ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-40
8.9.3.3 Removing Sensor Base ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-40
8.9.3.4 Attaching Sensor Base .................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-40

8.9.4 Pickup Roller ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-41

8.9.4.1 Removing Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller.............................................................................................................................. 8-41

8.9.5 Feed Roller................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-41

8.9.5.1 Removing Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller.............................................................................................................................. 8-41

8.9.6 Separation Roller ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-41

8.9.6.1 Removing Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller.............................................................................................................................. 8-41

8.9.7 Cassette Pickup Motor 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-41

8.9.7.1 Removing Cassette Pickup Motor 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-41

8.9.8 Cassette Pickup Motor 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-42

8.9.8.1 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Motor 2 ................................................................................................................................................. 8-42
8.9.8.2 Removing Cassette Pickup Motor 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-42

8.9.9 Cassette Size Detection Sensor.................................................................................................................................................. 8-42

8.9.9.1 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor........................................................................................................................................................ 8-42
8.9.9.2 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor........................................................................................................................................................ 8-42
8.9.9.3 Removing Cassette Size Sensor.................................................................................................................................................................... 8-42

8.9.10 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor .................................................................................................................................................... 8-43

8.9.10.1 Before Removing Cassette Retry Paper Sensor.......................................................................................................................................... 8-43
8.9.10.2 Before Removing Cassette Retry Paper Sensor.......................................................................................................................................... 8-43
8.9.10.3 Removing Cassette Retry Paper Sensor...................................................................................................................................................... 8-43

8.9.11 Cassette Paper Sensor .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-43

8.9.11.1 Before Removing Cassette Paper Sensor.................................................................................................................................................... 8-43
8.9.11.2 Before Removing Cassette Paper Sensor.................................................................................................................................................... 8-43
8.9.11.3 Removing Cassette Paper Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-43

8.9.12 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B).......................................................................................................................................... 8-43

8.9.12.1 Before Removing Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ............................................................................................................................... 8-43
8.9.12.2 Before Removing Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ............................................................................................................................... 8-44
8.9.12.3 Removing Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ........................................................................................................................................... 8-44

8.9.13 Slide Resistor ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-44

8.9.13.1 Before Removing Slide Resistor................................................................................................................................................................. 8-44
8.9.13.2 Before Removing Slide Resistor................................................................................................................................................................. 8-44
8.9.13.3 Removing Slide Resistor ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-44

8.9.14 Cassette Pickup Solenoid......................................................................................................................................................... 8-44

8.9.14.1 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Solenoid .............................................................................................................................................. 8-44
8.9.14.2 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Solenoid .............................................................................................................................................. 8-44
8.9.14.3 Removing Cassette Pickup Solenoid .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-44

8.9.15 Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB.............................................................................................................................................. 8-45

8.9.15.1 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB ................................................................................................................................... 8-45
8.9.15.2 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB ................................................................................................................................... 8-45
8.9.15.3 Removing Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB............................................................................................................................................... 8-45

8.9.16 Manual Feed Pickup Clutch..................................................................................................................................................... 8-45

8.9.16.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Clutch .......................................................................................................................................... 8-45
8.9.16.2 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Clutch ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-45
8.9.16.3 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Clutch ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-46

8.9.17 Manual Feed Tray Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 8-46

8.9.17.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit ................................................................................................................................................. 8-46

Contents

8.9.17.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit..................................................................................................................................................8-46

8.9.17.3 Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit .............................................................................................................................................................8-46
8.9.17.4 Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit .............................................................................................................................................................8-46

8.9.18 Manual Feed Unit .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-47

8.9.18.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................8-47
8.9.18.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................8-47
8.9.18.3 Removing Manual Feed Unit ......................................................................................................................................................................8-47
8.9.18.4 Removing Manual Feed Unit ......................................................................................................................................................................8-47

8.9.19 Manual Pickup Roller .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-48

8.9.19.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller ...........................................................................................................................................8-48
8.9.19.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller ...........................................................................................................................................8-48
8.9.19.3 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller .......................................................................................................................................................8-48
8.9.19.4 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller .......................................................................................................................................................8-48

8.9.20 Manual Feed Separation Pad ................................................................................................................................................... 8-49

8.9.20.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Separation Pad .........................................................................................................................................8-49
8.9.20.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Separation Pad .........................................................................................................................................8-49
8.9.20.3 Removing Manual Feed Separation Pad .....................................................................................................................................................8-49

8.9.21 Transparency Sensor (Front/Rear) ........................................................................................................................................... 8-49

8.9.21.1 Before Removing Transparency Sensor......................................................................................................................................................8-49
8.9.21.2 Before Removing Transparency Sensor......................................................................................................................................................8-50
8.9.21.3 Removing Transparency Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................8-50

8.9.22 Registration Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-50

8.9.22.1 Before Removing Registration Sensor........................................................................................................................................................8-50
8.9.22.2 Before Removing Registration Sensor........................................................................................................................................................8-50
8.9.22.3 Removing Registration Sensor....................................................................................................................................................................8-51

8.9.23 Registration Clutch .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-52

8.9.23.1 Removing Registration Clutch ....................................................................................................................................................................8-52

8.9.24 Pickup Vertical Path Roller ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-52

8.9.24.1 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 ..............................................................................................................................................................8-52
8.9.24.2 Removing the Sensor Base..........................................................................................................................................................................8-52
8.9.24.3 Before Removing Vertical Path Roller .......................................................................................................................................................8-52
8.9.24.4 Before Removing Vertical Path Roller .......................................................................................................................................................8-52
8.9.24.5 Removing Vertical Path Roller ...................................................................................................................................................................8-53

8.9.25 Duplex Feed Roller 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-53

8.9.25.1 Before Removing Duplex Feed Roller 2.....................................................................................................................................................8-53
8.9.25.2 Before Removing Duplex Feed Roller 2.....................................................................................................................................................8-53
8.9.25.3 Removing Duplex Feed Roller 2.................................................................................................................................................................8-53

8.9.26 Duplex Feed Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-53

8.9.26.1 Before Removing Duplex Feed Sensor.......................................................................................................................................................8-53
8.9.26.2 Before Removing Duplex Feed Sensor.......................................................................................................................................................8-53
8.9.26.3 Removing Duplex Feed Sensor...................................................................................................................................................................8-54

8.9.27 Duplex Feed Clutch ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-54

8.9.27.1 Before Removing Duplex Feed Clutch .......................................................................................................................................................8-54
8.9.27.2 Before Removing Duplex Feed Clutch .......................................................................................................................................................8-54
8.9.27.3 Removing Duplex Feed Clutch ...................................................................................................................................................................8-54

8.9.28 Delivery Assembly 1................................................................................................................................................................ 8-54

8.9.28.1 Before Removing Delivery Unit 1 ..............................................................................................................................................................8-54
8.9.28.2 Before Removing Delivery Unit 1 ..............................................................................................................................................................8-54
8.9.28.3 Removing Delivery Unit 1 ..........................................................................................................................................................................8-55

8.9.29 Delivery Drive Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-55

8.9.29.1 Before Removing Delivery Drive Unit .......................................................................................................................................................8-55
8.9.29.2 Before Removing Delivery Drive Unit .......................................................................................................................................................8-55
8.9.29.3 Removing Delivery Drive Unit ...................................................................................................................................................................8-55

Chapter 8

8.1 Construction
8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions
0000-7810

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the machine's pickup/feed system are as follows:
T-8-1
Item

Description

Accommodation of paper

front loading

Method of pickup

cassette

separation retard

manual feed tray

separation pad

Reference of paper feed

center

Size of paper stack

cassette 1/2
manual feed tray

50 sheets (80 g/m2 paper)

Size of paper

cassette 1

B4, A4, B5, LGL, LTR, EXE, A4 R, B5 R,

LTR R, A5 R, STMT R, envelope

cassette 2

A3, B4, A4, B5, LGL, LTR, EXE, A4 R, B5

R, LTR R, A5 R, STMT R, 12"x18"

manual feed tray

A3, B4, A4, B5, LDR, LGLLTR, A4 R, B5

R, LTR R, A5 R, STMT R, EXE, 12"x18",
SRA3, postcard, envelope, free size

cassette 1/2

64 to 163 g/m2 (single-sided)

Weight of paper

550 sheets (80 g/m2 paper)

64 to 105 g/m2 (auto duplex)

Paper size switch

Duplex printing

manual feed tray

64 to 163 g/m2 (if double-sided, manual

only; no auto duplex)

cassette 1/2

by user

manual size tray

by user

through

Envelope Sizes
Com10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISOB5, YOGATA No. 4
Postcard Sizes
A6 R, A5, A5 R, A4, A4 R
Special sizes:

12x18-> 305x457 mm
SRA3-> 320x450 mm

8.1.2 Major Divisions of the Machine

0000-7853

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

8-1

Chapter 8

[8]

[7]

[6]
[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

F-8-1

[1] Pickup assembly (cassette 2)

[2] Pickup assembly (cassette 1)
[3] Manual feed pickup assembly
[4] Registration roller assembly
[5] Secondary transfer assembly
[6] Duplex feeding assembly
[7] Fixing assembly
[8] Delivery assembly 1

8.1.3 Arrangement of the Rollers

0000-7817

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

8-2

Chapter 8

[25] [24] [23] [22]

[21]

[20]

[19]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]

[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]

[9]

[1]

[2] [3]

[4] [5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

F-8-2

[1] Pickup roller (cassette 1)

[2] Feed roller (cassette 1)
[3] Separation roller (cassette 1)
[4] Pickup roller (cassette 2)
[5] Feed roller (cassette 2)
[6] Separation roller (cassette 2)
[7] Vertical path roller 2
[8] Vertical path slave roller 2
[9] Vertical path roller 1
[10] Vertical path slave roller 1
[11] Manual feed pickup roller
[12] Registration roller (inside)
[13] Registration roller (outside)
[14] Duplex feed roller 2
[15] Duplex feed roll 2
[16] Secondary transfer outside roller
[17] Secondary transfer inside roller
[18] Duplex feed roller 1
[19] Duplex feed roll 1
[20] Pressure roller
[21] Fixing outlet roller
[22] Fixing outlet roll
[23] Fixing roller
[24] Delivery roller
[25] Delivery roll

8.1.4 Paper Paths (printer on its own)

0000-7836

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

8-3

Chapter 8

[6]

[5]
[4]
[1]

[2]
[3]
F-8-3

[1] pickup from cassette 1

[2] pickup from cassette 2
[3] pickup from cassette pedestal
[4] pickup from side paper deck
[5] pickup from manual feed tray
[6] delivery to copy tray 1

8.1.5 Paper Paths (w/ Inner 2-Way Tray-C1)

0000-7837

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

[8]
[7]

[6]

[5]
[4]
[1]

[2]
[3]
F-8-4

8-4

Chapter 8

[1] pickup from cassette 1

[2] pickup from cassette 2
[3] pickup from cassette pedestal
[4] pickup from side paper deck
[5] pickup from manual feed tray
[6] delivery to copy tray 1
[7] delivery to copy tray 2
[8] delivery to copy tray 3

8.1.6 Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-P1)

0000-7838

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

[7]
[6]

[5]
[4]
[1]

[2]
[3]
F-8-5

[1] pickup from cassette 1

[2] pickup from cassette 2
[3] pickup from cassette pedestal
[4] pickup from paper deck
[5] pickup from manual feed
[6] delivery to Finisher-P1
[7] delivery to copy tray 3

8.1.7 Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2)

0000-7840

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

8-5

Chapter 8

[6]

[5]
[4]
[1]

[2]
[3]
F-8-6

[1] pickup from cassette 1

[2] pickup from cassette 2
[3] pickup from cassette pedestal
[4] pickup from paper deck
[5] pickup from manual feed tray
[6] delivery to Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2

8.1.8 Arrangement of Sensors

0000-7841

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

[16]

[15]

[14]

[13]
[12]

[11]
[10]
[9]

[8]
[7]

[6]
[1]

[2]

[3]
F-8-7

8-6

[4]

[5]

Chapter 8

[1] Cassette 1 paper level sensor B (PS4)

[2] Cassette 1 paper level sensor A (PS3)
[3] Cassette 2 paper level sensor B (PS6)
[4] Cassette 2 paper level sensor A (PS5)
[5] Cassette 2 paper sensor (PS2)
[6] Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11)
[7] Cassette 1 paper sensor (PS1)
[8] Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10)
[9] Manual feed tray paper sensor (PS7)
[10] Transparency sensor (PS26)
[11] Registration sensor (PS9)
[12] Duplex feed sensor (PS17)
[13] Fixing inlet sensor (PS25)
[14] Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)
[15] Delivery sensor 1 (PS14)
[16] Delivery full sensor 1 (PS15)

8.1.9 Arrangement of Clutches and Solenoids

0000-7843

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

[5]
CL6

CL2
[4]
CL1
[3]

SL1

SL2

[1]

[2]
F-8-8

[1] Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL1)

[2] Cassette 2 pickup solenoid (SL2)
[3] Manual feed tray pickup clutch (CL1)
[4] Registration clutch (CL2)
[5] Duplex feed clutch (CL6)

8.1.10 Drive Transmission Routes

0000-7844

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

8-7

Chapter 8

M4

CL6

M11

M2
CL2
CL1

M6
SL1
M7
SL2
F-8-9

M2 main motor
M4 No. 1 delivery motor
M6 cassette 1 pickup motor
M7 cassette 2 pickup motor
M11 fixing motor
SL1 cassette 1 pickup solenoid
SL2 cassette 2 pickup solenoid
CL1 manual feed pickup clutch
CL2 registration clutch
CL6 duplex feed clutch

8.2 Basic Sequence

8.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On
0000-7861

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Main power switchON

WMUP

WMUPR

PSTBY

300 sec (approx.)

190

Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub
heater (H2)

185

1
Repeats ON/OFF

Fixing heat
retention heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M11)
50

300 sec 3

480 sec

Drum/ITB motor
(M9)
Rotates during
auto adjustment

Developing
rotary motor (M8)
Developing
cylinder clutch (CL3)

C Bk

Auto adjustment

F-8-10

8.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key

0000-8589

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Basic Sequence of Operations for Making 3 Prints

8-8

Chapter 8

Starts printing
PRINT
*1
Cassette 1 pickup motor
(M6)
Cassette 1 pickup solenoid
(SL1)
Cassette 1 retry sensor
(PS10)
Main motor
(M2)
Registration sensor (PS9)

*2

*3

0.8 sec

Registration clutch
(CL2)
Fixing motor(M11)
Fixing inlet sensor
(PS35)
Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)
Delivery motor 1 (M4)
Delivery sensor (PS14)

cassette 1 pickup motor rotation

increased
pickup
pre-registration
registration
cassette 1: 3 sheets of paper
A increase in sheet-to-sheet distance
in full-color mode

*1
*2
*3

F-8-11

8.2.3 Increase in Speed

0000-7866

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine increases the speed of moving paper over specific intervals. An overview and the associated accessories for the increase in speed are as follows:
- No Delivery Accessory

[1]

F-8-12

1. Increase in Speed for Pickup Operation

The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for manual feed pickup)
- Finisher-P1 in Use

8-9

Chapter 8

[2]

[1]

F-8-13

1. Increase in Speed for Pickup

The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for manual feed pickup).
2. Increase in Speed for Reversal
The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for delivery to tray 3).
- Finisher-Q1/Q2 in Use
[3]
[4]

[2]

[1]

F-8-14

8-10

Chapter 8
1. Increase in Speed for Pickup
The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for manual feed pickup).
2. Increase in Speed After Fixing
The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed.
3. Increase in Speed for the Buffer Path
The speed is 2.5 times as high as the process speed (increase if for large size; no increase if for delivery to saddle).
4. Increase in Speed for Reversal
The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for delivery to tray 3).

8.3 Detecting Jams

8.3.1 Delay Jams
8.3.1.1 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly
0000-7875

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

A delay jam outside the cassette pickup assembly is identified as follows:
The length of time it takes for paper to move from sensor N-1 to the delay jam sensor N is kept under control; a delay jam is identified if the delay jam sensor does
not go on within a specific length of time after the sensor N has gone on.

Start key ON
or PRINT set

INTR

PRINT

[1]

[1]

Sensor N-1
Jam check
Normal

Sensor N

Error
[1]:specific length of feed in time

F-8-15

T-8-2
Sensor
Registration sensor (PS9)
Fixing delivery sensor (PS13)
No. 1 delivery sensor (PS14)
Duplex feed sensor (PS17)

8.3.1.2 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly

0000-7884

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The leading edge of paper does not reach the sensor after the cassette 1/2 pickup motor has started to rotate.

Start key ON
or print start
INTR

PRINT

[1]

[1]

Pickup motor
Jam check
Sensor N
[1]:specific length of feed in time
: increase in motor speed
F-8-16

T-8-3
Source of paper
Cassette 1

Motor
cassette 1 pickup motor

Sensor
cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10)

8-11

Chapter 8
Source of paper
Cassette 2

Motor

Sensor

cassette 2 pickup motor

cassette 2 retry sensor (PSX11)

8.3.2 Stationary Jams

8.3.2.1 Common Stationary Jam
0000-7887

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The sensor N does not go off within a specific length of time after the sensor has gone on.

Start key ON
or print start
INTR

PRINT

[1]

[1]

Pickup motor
Jam check
Sensor N
[1]:specific length of feed in time
: increase in motor speed
F-8-17

T-8-4
Sensor
Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10)
Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11)
Registration sensor (PS9)
Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)
No. 1 delivery sensor (PS14)
Duplex feed sensor (PS17)

8.3.2.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On

0001-4453

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine makes a check to see that there is no paper over the following sensors before it starts initial multiple rotation at power-on:
T-8-5
Sensor
Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10)
Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11)
Registration sensor (PS9)
Fixing inlet sensor (PS25)
Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)
No. 1 delivery sensor (PS14)
Duplex feed sensor (PS17)

8.3.3 Other Jams

8.3.3.1 Wrong Size Jam
0001-4502

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

A wrong size jam is identified when paper being used is shorter than the specified paper length.
T-8-6
Sensor
Registration sensor (PS9)

8-12

Chapter 8

8.3.3.2 Wrong Material Jam

0001-4503

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

A wrong material jam is identified when the transparency sensor detects the wrong type of paper.
T-8-7
Sensor
Transparency sensor (PS26)

8.3.3.3 Cover Open Jam

0001-4504

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

A door open jam is identified when the machine detects the opening of the door while it is making copies/prints.
T-8-8
Sensor
Front cover open sensor (PS22)
Right cover open sensor (PS18)

8.4 Cassette
8.4.1 Overview
0000-7911

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter plate. When pickup takes place, the pickup roller moves down to come into contact with the surface of paper.
The pickup roller is moved down when the pickup solenoid goes on.
The feed roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved to the feed path, and the paper is moved as far as the registration
roller by the work of the vertical path roller.
The pickup vertical path roller, pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller are driven by the cassette pickup motor.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]
[7]

[8]

[10]

[9]

F-8-18

[1] Cassette paper sensor

[2] Pickup roller (roller A)
[3] Feed roller (roller B)
[4] Separation roller (roller C)
[5] Pickup vertical path roller
[6] Cassette retry paper sensor
[7] Vertical path guide
[8] Lower right cover
[9] Holding plate
[10] Lifter plate

8.4.2 Identifying the Paper Size

0000-7896

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The size of paper inside the cassette is detected by the cassette size dial, and is communicated to the cassette size detection PCB.
As may as 15 positions may be detected with reference to the combinations of on and off states of the array of 4 actuators mounted to the cassette size detection
PCB on the printer side and operating in conjunction with the cassette size dial.
In the absence of a cassette, all 4 actuators are off, causing the machine to assume there is no cassette.

8-13

Chapter 8

AB/Inch Switch
The cassette size dial is equipped with a switch operated to change between AB and Inch configurations; the cassette size detecting switch will detect the configuration as soon as a cassette is fitted in the machine.

[2]
[1]

INCH

SW3
SW2
SW1
SW0
SW4

SW4-ON=INCH
F-8-19

[1] AB/Inch switch

[2] Cassette size dial
[3] Cassette size detection PCB
T-8-9
AB-configuration
Size

SW0

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

(no cassette)

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

A5R

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

A4

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

A4R

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

A3

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

B5

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

B5R

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

B4

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

305x457mm

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

U1

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

U2

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Envelope

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON/OFF

SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB/Inch-configuration switch.

The machine will assume the absence of a cassette if it detects a combination not found in the table. At this time, it
does not move up the cassette lifter.
Since the paper size is not identified, there will be no indication of a paper size on the control panel; when the
cassette in question is selected, the machine will indicate a message prompting the supply of paper.
If an envelope size is detected, an envelope cassette must be fitted.

8-14

Chapter 8
T-8-10
Inch-configuration
Size

SW0

SW1

SW2

SW3

(no cassette)

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

SW4
OFF

STMTR

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

LTR

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

LTRR

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

LGL

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

11x17

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

EXEC

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

12x18

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON
ON

U3

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

U4

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

Envelope

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON/OFF

SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB/Inch-configuration switch.

The machine will assume the absence of a cassette if it detects a combination not found in the table. At this time, it
does not move up the cassette lifter.
Since the paper size is not identified, there will be no indication of a paper size on the control panel; when the
cassette in question is selected, the machine will indicate a message prompting the supply of paper.
If an envelope size is detected, an envelope cassette must be fitted.

8.4.3 Setting Up the Universal Cassette

0000-8451

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following are default sizes the machine will assume when U1 through U4 are detected:
T-8-11
U1

G-LTR

U2

FLSC

U3

G-LGL

U4

A-LTR

The following is a list of sizes that may be assigned in addition to default sizes in service mode:
T-8-12
Universal U1 Through U4
Size
FLSC
OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-OFI
M-OFI
FOLI
A-FLS
G-LTR
G-LGL
A-LTR (LTR)
A-LTRR (LTRR)

8.4.4 Paper Level Sensor

0000-7995

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The level of paper inside the cassette is checked using the following sensors:
T-8-13
Cassette 1

Cassette 2

Paper level sensor A

PS3

PS5

Paper level sensor B

PS4

PS6

Paper sensor

PS1

PS2

8-15

Chapter 8

[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]

[5]

[6]
[7]

[8]

F-8-20

[1] Flag
[2] Cassette paper sensor
[3] Lifter clutch
[4] Cassette paper level sensor A
[5] Cassette paper level sensor B
[6] Paper level sensor flag
[7] Lifter gear
[8] Tray

8-16

Chapter 8

View from the Front

of the Machine
When full with paper
Cassette paper
Cassette paper
level sensor A
level sensor B

Paper

OFF OFF
When half full with paper
Cassette paper
Cassette paper
level sensor A
level sensor B

Paper

OFF ON
When there is little paper
Cassette paper
level sensor B

Paper

Cassette paper
level sensor A

ON ON

Cassette paper sensor

Flag
Paper tray

When there is no paper

F-8-21

T-8-14
Paper level
sensor A

Paper level
sensor B

Paper sensor

Paper level

OFF

OFF

OFF

100% to 50% of capacity

ON

OFF

OFF

50% to 50 sheets (approx.)

ON

ON

OFF

50 sheets or less (approx.)

---

---

ON

No paper

Control panel
indication

8.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit

8.5.1 Overview
0001-8636

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

8-17

Chapter 8
The paper inside the cassette is held up by the work of the lifer plate. When pickup takes place, the pickup roller moves down to come into contact with the stack
of paper. The pickup roller starts to move down when the pickup solenoid goes on. The feed roller and the separation roller make sure that no more than a single
sheet of paper is moved forward to the paper path. The vertical path roller serves to move paper as far as the registration roller.
The pickup path roller, pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller are driven by the pickup motor.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]
[7]

[8]

[10]

[9]

F-8-22

[1] Cassette paper sensor

[2] Pickup roller (roller A)
[3] Feed roller (roller B)
[4] Separation roller (roller C)
[5] Pickup vertical path roller
[6] Cassette retry paper sensor
[7] Vertical path guide
[8] Lower right cover
[9] Holding plate
[10] Lifter plate

8.5.2 Basic Sequence of Operations

0001-8619

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Basic Sequence
Starts printing
PRINT
*1
Cassette 1 pickup motor
(M6)
Cassette 1 pickup solenoid
(SL1)
Cassette 1 retry sensor
(PS10)
Main motor
(M2)
Registration sensor (PS9)

*2

*3

0.8 sec

Registration clutch
(CL2)
Fixing motor(M11)
Fixing inlet sensor
(PS35)
Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)
Delivery motor 1 (M4)
Delivery sensor (PS14)

cassette 1 pickup motor rotation

increased
pickup
pre-registration
registration
cassette 1: 3 sheets of paper
A increase in sheet-to-sheet distance
in full-color mode

*1
*2
*3

F-8-23

8.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit

8.6.1 Overview
0017-6708

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The paper in the tray of the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the manual feed pickup roller by the work of the pickup guide plate; the manual feed pickup
roller and the separation pad serve to make sure that only a single sheet of paper is separated and moved into the machine:
(1) the pickup guide plate is locked in place at all times, and does not require drive for pickup operation.
(2) multi-pickup roller is driven by the main motor (M2) through the manual feed pickup clutch (CL1).

8-18

Chapter 8

[9]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[10]

[7]

[5]

[8]

[6]
F-8-24

[1] Upper guide

[2] Stopper plate
[3] Side guide
[4] Manual feed pickup tray
[5] Pressure spring
[6] Holding plate
[7] Manual feed paper sensor flag
[8] Separation pad
[9] Manual feed pickup roller
[10] (to registration roller assembly)
REF
The machine's manual feed pickup unit is not equipped with a sensor that may detect the last sheet of paper.

8.6.2 Basic Sequence of Operation

0017-6709

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The multi-pickup roller starts to rotate when the manual pickup clutch (CL1) goes on to start upper separation to pick up a single sheet of paper. When the leading
edge of the sheet reaches the registration sensor (PS26) and is moved a specific distance, the manual pickup clutch goes off, causing the sheet to arch in the registration roller area.
When the registration clutch (CL2) goes on, the manual feed pickup clutch (CL1) once again goes on to pick up paper. The manual feed pickup clutch (CL1) goes
off immediately before the trailing edge of paper moves past the manual feed pickup roller; thereafter, the registration roller serves to pull off the paper.
Print start
PRINT

LSTR

Manual feed pickup

clutch ( L1)
Registration
clutch ( L2)
Registration
sensor (PS26)

F-8-25

8.6.3 Identifying the Paper Size

0017-6710

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The width of paper is detected with reference to the output of the variable resistor (SVR1), which operates in conjunction with the movement of the side guide.
The side guide in the manual feed tray is set when the user moves it to place paper in the cassette.

8-19

Chapter 8

[2]
[1]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]
F-8-26

[1] Side guide (rear)

[2] Stop arm
[3] Center gear
[4] Side guide (front)
[5] Variable resistor (SVR1)
[6] Manual feed tray

8.6.4 Paper Retaining Mechanism

0018-0015

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Once the manual feeder pickup operation starts, the multi lifting plate up/down solenoid (SL4) turns ON. Then, the lifting plate of the manual feeder pickup assembly goes up, and a paper on the manual feeder pickup tray is pressed against the manual feeder pickup roller. In terms of paper, one paper is separated and fed by
means of the manual feeder pickup roller and the separation pad.

8-20

Chapter 8

M6

MLT_SL_ON

[1]

SL4

DC Driver

DC-CON
F-8-27

[1] Lifting plate

SL4: Multi lifting plate up/down solenoid
M6: Registration multi pickup motor

8.6.5 Overview
0000-7917

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The paper in the tray of the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the manual feed pickup roller by the work of the pickup guide plate; the manual feed pickup
roller and the separation pad serve to make sure that only a single sheet of paper is separated and moved into the machine:
(1) the pickup guide plate is locked in place at all times, and does not require drive for pickup operation.
(2) multi-pickup roller is driven by the main motor (M2) through the manual feed pickup clutch (CL1).

8-21

Chapter 8

[9]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[10]

[7]

[5]

[8]

[6]
F-8-28

[1] Upper guide

[2] Stopper plate
[3] Side guide
[4] Manual feed pickup tray
[5] Pressure spring
[6] Holding plate
[7] Manual feed paper sensor flag
[8] Separation pad
[9] Manual feed pickup roller
[10] (to registration roller assembly)
REF
The machine's manual feed pickup unit is not equipped with a sensor that may detect the last sheet of paper.

8.6.6 Basic Sequence of Operations

0000-7920

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The multi-pickup roller starts to rotate when the manual pickup clutch (CL1) goes on to start upper separation to pick up a single sheet of paper. When the leading
edge of the sheet reaches the registration sensor (PS26) and is moved a specific distance, the manual pickup clutch goes off, causing the sheet to arch in the registration roller area.
When the registration clutch (CL2) goes on, the manual feed pickup clutch (CL1) once again goes on to pick up paper. The manual feed pickup clutch (CL1) goes
off immediately before the trailing edge of paper moves past the manual feed pickup roller; thereafter, the registration roller serves to pull off the paper.
Print start
PRINT

LSTR

Manual feed pickup

clutch ( L1)
Registration
clutch ( L2)
Registration
sensor (PS26)

F-8-29

8.6.7 Identifying the Paper Size

0000-7926

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The width of paper is detected with reference to the output of the variable resistor (SVR1), which operates in conjunction with the movement of the side guide.
The side guide in the manual feed tray is set when the user moves it to place paper in the cassette.

8-22

Chapter 8

[2]
[1]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]
F-8-30

[1] Side guide (rear)

[2] Resistance arm
[3] Center gear
[4] Side guide (front)
[5] Variable resistor (SVR1)
[6] Manual feed tray

8.6.8 Paper Retaining Mechanism

0000-7929

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The holding plate of the machine's cassette is fixed in position at all times, and does not move up/down at time of pickup, and must temporarily be released when
paper is set between it and the manual feed pickup roller. It is linked to the upper guide so that it opens when the user opens the guide; to prevent the user from
placing paper without opening the upper guide, the guide is equipped with a stopper plate.
1) When the upper guide is closed,
the holding plate is locked in place,
and the stopper plate prevents the user from placing paper.

F-8-31

2) When the upper guide is open,

the holding plate is freed,
and the stopper plate opens, permitting the user to place paper.

8-23

Chapter 8

F-8-32

3) When the upper guide is closed once again,

the holding plate becomes locked in position once again.

F-8-33

8.7 Registration Unit

8.7.1 Overview
0001-4411

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The registration roller is driven by the main motor (M2). The registration clutch (CL2) found between the registration roller and the main motor goes on and off to
control the registration roller so that the paper and the image on the intermediate transfer belt will match.

8-24

Chapter 8

J320-B8
REG_CL*

Ragistration cluch drive signal

Mainmotor drive signal

J311

DC controller PCB

M2

CL2

F-8-34

8.7.2 Controlling the Horizontal Registration

0000-7937

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine is not equipped with a mechanism to detect horizontal registration for the 1st and 2nd sides of a sheet, but it permits the adjustment of the 2nd side
image horizontal registration (image write start position) in service mode, with each source of paper given its own setting to suit possible differences among the
sheets placed in the sources.
The leading edge registration and the degree of arching for the 2nd side of a double-sided copy/print must be adjusted separately from those for the 1st side, owing
to the different paths 1st and 2nd sides taken to the registration roller.
1st Side
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ>
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ>
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ>
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ>
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ>
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ>
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ>
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ>

horizontal registration adjustment for the 2nd side of a double-sided copy/print (pickup from cassette 1)
ADJ-C2RE horizontal registration adjustment for the 2nd side of a double-sided copy/print (pickup from cassette 2)
ADJ-C3RE horizontal registration adjustment for the 2nd side of a double-sided copy/print (pickup from cassette 3)
ADJ-C4RE horizontal registration adjustment for the 2nd side of a double-sided copy/print (pickup from cassette 4)
ADJ-DKRE horizontal registration adjustment for the 2nd side of a double-sided copy/print (pickup from side paper deck)
ADJ-MFRE horizontal registration adjustment for the 2nd side of a double-sided copy/print (pickup from manual feed tray)
RG-REFE leading edge registration adjustment for the 2nd side of a double-sided copy/print
LOOPREFE registration arching adjustment for the 2nd side of a double-sided copy/print

REF
The term "2nd side of a double-sided copy/print" used in reference to the machine's service mode refers to the side for which an image is formed second in order,
and it corresponds to the 1st side of the original.

8.8 Duplex Feeding Unit

8.8.1 Overview
0000-7932

iR C3100 / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

A pair of rollers exist inside the depleting unit, and these rollers are driven by the main motor (M2) with the help of the duplexing clutch (CL6).
The machine uses a different roller to turn over the paper for double-sided copying/printing: if it is not equipped with a delivery accessory, it uses the delivery roller;
if it is equipped with a delivery accessory, it uses the reversing roller.
Note:
Inner 2-Way Tray-C1
Finisher-L1, Finisher-Q1, or Saddle Finisher-Q2
Configuration with an Accessory Installed

8-25

Chapter 8

[1]

[2]

[3]
[4]

[5]

[6]
[7]

F-8-35

[1] Reversing roller

[2] No. 2 delivery sensor (PS1A)
[3] Duplex inlet sensor (PS3A)
[4] Duplex inlet roller
[5] Depleting feed roller 1
[6] Duplexing feed sensor (PS17)
[7] Duplexing feed roller 2
Configuration Without an Accessory Installed

8-26

Chapter 8

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]
[5]

[6]

F-8-36

[1] Delivery roller

[2] Delivery sensor 1 (PS14)
[3] Reversing flapper
[4] Duplexing feed roller 1
[5] Duplexing feed sensor (PS17)
[6] Duplexing feed roller 2

8.8.2 Sequence of Image Formation

0001-4746

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine goes thorough the following sequence to form images when making double-sided copies/prints:
4 A4/LTR
sheets

1-2

2-2

1-1

3-2

2-1

4-2

3-1

5 A4/LTR
sheets

1-2

2-2

1-1

3-2

2-1

4-2

3-1

5-2

4-1

6 A4/LTR
sheets

1-2

2-2

1-1

3-2

2-1

4-2

3-1

5-2

4-1

3 A3/LDR
sheets

1-2

1-1

2-2

4-1

2-1

1-1

indicates the 1st side of the 1st sheet.

1-2

indicates the 2nd side of the 1st sheet.

3-2

5-1

6-2

5-1

6-1

3-1

indicates a pair of sheets used for double-placement.

F-8-37

8.8.3 Flow of Paper (wo/ Delivery Option)

0001-4747

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

A4/LTR, Black-and-White, 5 Sheets
A number in a circle indicates the 1st side, while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side.

8-27

Chapter 8
Although a different sheet-to-sheet interval is used for full-color operation, the sequence of image formation is the same.

F-8-38

The 1st sheet is picked up.

F-8-39

An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up.

1
2

F-8-40

The 1st sheet is turned over and moved to duplexing registration. An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet.

8-28

Chapter 8

1
3

F-8-41

The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again. The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked up.

1
1
3
2

F-8-42

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and for the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing.

2
4

F-8-43

The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration. The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 4th sheet is
picked up.

8-29

Chapter 8

1
2
2
4
3

F-8-44

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet. The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing.

2
1
4

3
5

F-8-45

The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is reversed and is moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked for registration once again. The 5th sheet is
picked up.

2
1
3
3
5
4

F-8-46

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet. The 4th sheet is moved for duplexing.

8-30

Chapter 8

3
2

1
5

F-8-47

The 3rd sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is turned over and moved for registration. The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again.

3
2

1
4
4

F-8-48

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.

4
3

F-8-49

The 4th sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again.

4
3

5
5

F-8-50

8-31

Chapter 8
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet.

5
4

F-8-51

The 5th sheet is delivered.

8.8.4 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -internal delivery)

0001-4749

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

A4/LTR, 5 sheets, Delivery to tray 1/2
Although a different sheet-to-sheet interval is used for full-color operation, the sequence of image formation is the same.

F-8-52

The 1st sheet is picked up.

F-8-53

An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up.

8-32

Chapter 8

F-8-54

The 1st sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet.

1
3

F-8-55

The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again. The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked up.

1
1
3
2

F-8-56

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing.

8-33

Chapter 8

2
4

F-8-57

The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration. The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 4th sheet
is picked up.

2
2
4
3

F-8-58

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet. The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing.

2
1

3
5

F-8-59

The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 5th sheet
is picked up.

8-34

Chapter 8

2 1
3
3
5
4

F-8-60

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.

3
2 1

F-8-61

The 3rd sheet is delivery. The 5th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again.

2 1
1

5
4
4

F-8-62

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.

8-35

Chapter 8

4
3

2 1

F-8-63

The 4th sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again.

2 1

5
5

F-8-64

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet.

5
4

2 1

F-8-65

The 5th sheet is delivered.

8.8.5 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -external delivery)

0001-4750

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

A4/LTR, 3 sheets, Delivery to tray 3
Although a different sheet-to-sheet interval is used for full-color or A3/LDR size operation, the sequence of image formation is the same.

8-36

Chapter 8

F-8-66

The 1st sheet is picked up.

F-8-67

An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up.

F-8-68

The 1st sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet.

8-37

Chapter 8

2
1
1
3

F-8-69

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked up.

2
3

F-8-70

The 1st sheet is turned over, and an image is formed for the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The 2nd sheet is kept in wait for duplexing registration.

2
2

F-8-71

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet. The 3rd sheet is tuned over, and is moved for duplexing registration.

8-38

Chapter 8
Cover (Lower Front)]
1

8.9.1.2 Before Removing Pickup Unit 1

0017-7788

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
5) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]

8.9.1.3 Removing Pickup Unit 1

0017-6756

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-8-72

The 2nd sheet is turned over, and is delivered. The 3rd sheet is moved for
duplexing.

1) Remove the cassette 1 and 2.

2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and free the cable from the 2 wire saddles
[2] and the 2 edge saddles [3].

2
1

F-8-75

3) Remove the pickup unit 1 [2].

- 4 screws [1]
F-8-73

An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet.

2
3

F-8-76

8.9.2 Pickup Unit 2

8.9.2.1 Before Removing Pickup Unit 2
0017-6269

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-8-74

The 3rd sheet is turned over, and is delivered.

1) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]

8.9 Parts Replacement Procedure

8.9.1 Pickup Unit 1

8.9.2.2 Removing Pickup Unit 2

8.9.1.1 Before Removing Pickup Unit 1

0001-1549

0017-6268

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the cassette 1 and 2.
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable from the guide.
3) Remove the pickup unit 2 [3].
- 4 screws [2]

8-39

Chapter 8

F-8-77

8.9.3 Sensor Mounting Plate

F-8-79

8.9.3.1 Before Removing Sensor Base

Pickup unit 2
0017-6271

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]

2) Remove the cassette pickup solenoid [3].

- 1 connector [1]
- 1 screw [2]
3) Detach the sensor base [6].
- 1 bushing [4]
- 5 screws [5]

8.9.3.2 Before Removing Sensor Base

0017-7790

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
5) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
6) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
7) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]

8.9.3.3 Removing Sensor Base

0017-6758

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-8-80

8.9.3.4 Attaching Sensor Base

0002-5589

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1) Remove the bracket [3] at the back of the pickup unit.

- 2 screws (TP) [1]
- 1 screw (binding) [2]
Be sure not to make the pickup unit facing down when attaching the sensor
base, otherwise, the gears will fall out.

1) Fit the 6 points [A] indicated in the figure into the holes of the sensor base
securely, and then attach the sensor base [2] with the 5 screws [1].
[A]

F-8-78

Pickup unit 1

[1]
F-8-81

2) Attach the cassette pickup solenoid [1].

Be sure that the stop plate [2] is fully engaged with the cam gear [3].

8-40

Chapter 8

F-8-84

Points to Note When Replacing the Feed/Separation Roller

- The color (roller core) of the machine's feed/separation roller is black. Be
sure not to use the feed/separation roller in mint green that is used at a
different model. Otherwise, the component used in the roller will build up
on the intermediate transfer belt, causing faulty transfer.

F-8-82

- The color of the separation/feed roller shipped as Service Parts is black.

Although some machines come with a separation/feed roller in gray color,
be sure to attach the separation/feed roller in black collar that is shipped as
Service Parts.

Try turning the gears to be sure that they turn properly.

8.9.4 Pickup Roller

8.9.6 Separation Roller

8.9.4.1 Removing Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation

Roller

8.9.6.1 Removing Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation

Roller
0003-5925

0003-5923

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1) Remove the cassette.

2) Open the right door (in case of the separation roller).
3) Pick the tabs of each roller, and remove the pickup roller [1], feed roller
[2], and the separation roller [3].

1) Remove the cassette.

2) Open the right door (in case of the separation roller).
3) Pick the tabs of each roller, and remove the pickup roller [1], feed roller
[2], and the separation roller [3].

F-8-83

F-8-85

Points to Note When Replacing the Feed/Separation Roller

Points to Note When Replacing the Feed/Separation Roller

- The color (roller core) of the machine's feed/separation roller is black. Be

sure not to use the feed/separation roller in mint green that is used at a
different model. Otherwise, the component used in the roller will build up
on the intermediate transfer belt, causing faulty transfer.

- The color (roller core) of the machine's feed/separation roller is black. Be

sure not to use the feed/separation roller in mint green that is used at a
different model. Otherwise, the component used in the roller will build up
on the intermediate transfer belt, causing faulty transfer.

- The color of the separation/feed roller shipped as Service Parts is black.

Although some machines come with a separation/feed roller in gray color,
be sure to attach the separation/feed roller in black collar that is shipped as
Service Parts.

- The color of the separation/feed roller shipped as Service Parts is black.

Although some machines come with a separation/feed roller in gray color,
be sure to attach the separation/feed roller in black collar that is shipped as
Service Parts.

8.9.5 Feed Roller

8.9.7 Cassette Pickup Motor 1

8.9.5.1 Removing Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation

Roller

8.9.7.1 Removing Cassette Pickup Motor 1

0003-5924

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the cassette.
2) Open the right door (in case of the separation roller).
3) Pick the tabs of each roller, and remove the pickup roller [1], feed roller
[2], and the separation roller [3].

0001-1610

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Disconnect the connector [1].
3) Remove the pickup motor 1 [3].
- 2 screws [2]

8-41

Chapter 8

8.9.9.2 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor

0017-7791

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]

8.9.9.3 Removing Cassette Size Sensor

0001-1769

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the PCB cover [1] (snap stopper).

F-8-86

8.9.8 Cassette Pickup Motor 2

8.9.8.1 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Motor 2
0017-6281

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Remove the leakage breaker. (page 10-25)[Removing Leakage Breaker]

8.9.8.2 Removing Cassette Pickup Motor 2

0001-1653

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-8-88

2) Disconnect the connector from the cassette size sensor relay PCB.
- In case of cassette size sensor 1: connector [1]
- In case of cassette size sensor 2: connector [2]
3) Free the cable from the wire saddle.
- In case of cassette size sensor 1: 2 wire saddles [3]
- In case of cassette size sensor 2: 2 wire saddles each [3] [4]

1) Disconnect the connector [1].

2) Remove the pickup motor 2 [3].
- 2 screws [2]

F-8-89

4) Remove the cassette size sensor base [2].

- 1 screw each [1]
Although the base of cassette size sensor 2 can be removed by itself, the
base of the cassette size sensor 1 has to be removed together with the base
of the cassette size sensor 2.

F-8-87

8.9.9 Cassette Size Detection Sensor

8.9.9.1 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor
0017-6283

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]
F-8-90

8-42

Chapter 8
5) Detach the cover [1] from the base.

F-8-93

8.9.11 Cassette Paper Sensor

F-8-91

6) Detach the cassette size sensor [1] from the base.

8.9.11.1 Before Removing Cassette Paper Sensor

0017-6302

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]
7) Remove the sensor base. (page 8-40)[Removing Sensor Base]

8.9.11.2 Before Removing Cassette Paper Sensor

0017-7793

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-8-92

8.9.10 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor

8.9.10.1 Before Removing Cassette Retry Paper Sensor
0017-6301

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]
7) Remove the sensor base. (page 8-40)[Removing Sensor Base]

8.9.10.2 Before Removing Cassette Retry Paper Sensor

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]
7) Remove the sensor base. (page 8-40)[Removing Sensor Base]

8.9.11.3 Removing Cassette Paper Sensor

0001-1584

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the cassette paper sensor [2].
- 1 connector [1]

0017-7792

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]
7) Remove the sensor base. (page 8-40)[Removing Sensor Base]

8.9.10.3 Removing Cassette Retry Paper Sensor

0001-1569

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the cassette retry paper sensor [2].
- 1 connector [1]

F-8-94

8.9.12 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B)

8.9.12.1 Before Removing Cassette Paper Level Sensor
(A/B)
0017-6303

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right

8-43

Chapter 8
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]
7) Remove the sensor base. (page 8-40)[Removing Sensor Base]

8.9.12.2 Before Removing Cassette Paper Level Sensor

(A/B)
0017-7794

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]
7) Remove the sensor base. (page 8-40)[Removing Sensor Base]

F-8-96

2) Remove the slide resistor [1].

- 1 connector [2]

8.9.12.3 Removing Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B)

0001-1600

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the cassette paper level sensor (A/B) [2].
- 1 connector each [1]

F-8-97

8.9.14 Cassette Pickup Solenoid

8.9.14.1 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Solenoid
0017-6310

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

F-8-95

8.9.13 Slide Resistor

8.9.13.1 Before Removing Slide Resistor
0017-6306

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the manual feed unit. (page 8-47)[Removing Manual Feed
Unit]
4) Remove the manual feed tray unit. (page 8-46)[Removing Manual Feed
Tray Unit]

8.9.13.2 Before Removing Slide Resistor

0017-6304

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the manual feed unit. (page 8-47)[Removing Manual Feed
Unit]
5) Remove the manual feed tray unit. (page 8-46)[Removing Manual Feed
Tray Unit]

8.9.13.3 Removing Slide Resistor

0001-1755

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the manual feed tray upper cover [2].
- 2 screws [1]

Be sure to mark the horizontal registration position before detaching the

manual feed tray upper cover.

8-44

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]

8.9.14.2 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Solenoid

0017-7796

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]

8.9.14.3 Removing Cassette Pickup Solenoid

0001-1912

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the cassette pickup solenoid [3].
- 1 connector [1]
- 1 screw [2]

Chapter 8

F-8-98

8.9.15 Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB

F-8-100

8.9.15.1 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor Relay

PCB

8.9.16 Manual Feed Pickup Clutch

0017-6311

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

8.9.16.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Clutch

0017-6312

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]

8.9.16.2 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Clutch

0017-6910

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove the 4 faston terminals [1] connected to the main power switch.

8.9.15.2 Before Removing Cassette Size Sensor Relay

PCB
0017-7797

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]

8.9.15.3 Removing Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB

0001-1777

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-8-101

1) Detach the PCB cover [1] (snap stopper).

Points to note when attaching
Connect the 4 fastens to the respective correct positions according to the
numbers on each label as shown in the figure below.

F-8-99

2) Remove the cassette size sensor relay PCB [1].

- 3 connectors [2]
- 2 wire saddles [3]

2) Disconnect the connector (2-pin) [1], and free the cable [2] from the edge
saddle [3].

8-45

Chapter 8

[1]

[2]

[3]
F-8-102

3) Detach the stop plate [1].

- 2 screws [2]

F-8-105

8.9.17 Manual Feed Tray Unit

8.9.17.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit

The bushing [3] is attached to the stop plate from inside. When attaching/
detaching the stop plate, be sure not to drop the bushing inside of the
machine to prevent losing it.

[2]

0017-6316

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the manual feed unit. (page 8-47)[Removing Manual Feed
Unit]

[1]

8.9.17.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit

0017-6313

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

[3]

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the manual feed unit. (page 8-47)[Removing Manual Feed
Unit]

[2]
F-8-103

8.9.17.3 Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit

4) Remove the pickup manual feed clutch [1] toward the front.

0001-1677

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the tie-wrap [2].

[1]
F-8-104

8.9.16.3 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Clutch

0017-6761

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Disconnect the connector (2P) [1].
2) Detach the stop plate [2].
- 1 screw [3]
3) Remove the pickup manual feed clutch [4] toward the front.

[1]

[2]

F-8-106

2) Remove the manual feed tray unit [3].

[3]
F-8-107

8.9.17.4 Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit

0017-6314

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

8-46

Chapter 8

1) Disconnect the connector [1] and free the cable from the edge saddle [2].

[1]

[1]

[2]

[2]

F-8-108

F-8-111

2) Remove the manual feed tray unit [1].

3) Detach the connector cover [1] (snap stopper).

[1]

[1]

F-8-109

F-8-112

8.9.18 Manual Feed Unit

4) Disconnect the connector [1].

5) Remove the manual feed unit [3].
- 4 screws [2]

8.9.18.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Unit

0017-6320

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]

8.9.18.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Unit

0017-6317

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
F-8-113

8.9.18.3 Removing Manual Feed Unit

0001-1673

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove the manual feed guide link [1].
- 1 plastic E-ring [2]
- 1 boss [3]
[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[3]

F-8-114

8.9.18.4 Removing Manual Feed Unit

0017-6318

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the manual feed pickup guide [1].
- 1 screw [2]

[3]
F-8-110

2) Remove the manual feed pickup guide [1].

- 1 screw [2]

8-47

Chapter 8
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the manual feed unit. (page 8-47)[Removing Manual Feed
Unit]

8.9.19.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller

0017-6321

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the manual feed unit. (page 8-47)[Removing Manual Feed
Unit]
[1]

[2]

8.9.19.3 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller

F-8-115

0001-1953

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

2) Detach the connector cover [1].

- 1 claw [1]

[1]

1) Detach the manual feed pickup upper cover [1] (snap stopper).

[2]
F-8-116

3) Remove the manual feed unit [1].

- 1 connector [2].
- 7 screws [3]
[2]

F-8-119

2) Remove the manual feed pickup roller [3] together with the shaft.
- 1 bushing [2]
3) Remove the manual feed pickup roller [3] from the shaft.
- 1 plastic E-ring [4]

[1]

Do not drop the parallel pin when removing the manual feed pickup roller.

[3]
F-8-117

F-8-120

8.9.19.4 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller

[1]

0017-6322

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Disconnect the connector [1].
[3]
F-8-118

8.9.19 Manual Pickup Roller

8.9.19.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Roller
0017-6324

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]

8-48

Chapter 8

[1]

[2]

F-8-125

[1]

8.9.20 Manual Feed Separation Pad

F-8-121

8.9.20.1 Before Removing Manual Feed Separation Pad

2) Detach the plate [1].

- 1 screw [2]

0017-6351

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the manual feed unit. (page 8-47)[Removing Manual Feed
Unit]
4) Remove the manual feed pickup roller. (page 8-48)[Removing Manual
Feed Pickup Roller]

8.9.20.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Separation Pad

0017-6349

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

[2]

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the manual feed unit. (page 8-47)[Removing Manual Feed
Unit]
5) Remove the manual feed pickup roller. (page 8-48)[Removing Manual
Feed Pickup Roller]

[1]
F-8-122

3) Remove the bushing [1].

8.9.20.3 Removing Manual Feed Separation Pad

0001-4338

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the holding plate [5].
2) Remove the manual feed separation pad [6].

[1]
F-8-123

4) Detach the manual feed tray upper cover [1].

F-8-126

[1]

8.9.21 Transparency Sensor (Front/Rear)

8.9.21.1 Before Removing Transparency Sensor
0017-6352

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

F-8-124

5) Remove the manual feed pickup roller [2] from the shaft.
- 1 plastic E-ring [1]

Do not drop the parallel pin when removing the manual feed pickup roller.

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]

8-49

Chapter 8
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]

8.9.21.2 Before Removing Transparency Sensor

0017-7801

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]

8.9.21.3 Removing Transparency Sensor

0001-1963

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Put your hand from the back of the pre-registration guide, and remove the
transparency sensor [1].
- 1 snap stopper
- 1 connector

F-8-129

8) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner

Container Retainer]
9) Detach the front inner cover (middle) [2].
- 2 screws [1]

F-8-130

10) Detach the support cover (right). (page 10-18)[Detaching Support

Cover (Right)]
11) Detach the front inner cover (right) [2].
- 1 screw [1]

F-8-127

8.9.22 Registration Sensor

8.9.22.1 Before Removing Registration Sensor
0017-6353

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
4) Remove the main power switch. (page 10-29)[Removing Main Power
Switch]
5) Remove the manual feed pickup clutch. (page 8-45)[Removing Manual
Feed Pickup Clutch]
6) Remove the contact guide [1].
- 1 screw [2]
F-8-131

8.9.22.2 Before Removing Registration Sensor

0017-7802

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-8-128

7) Remove the pre-registration guide fixing boss (rear) [1].

- 1 screw [2]

8-50

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
5) Remove the main power switch. (page 10-29)[Removing Main Power
Switch]
6) Remove the manual feed pickup clutch. (page 8-45)[Removing Manual
Feed Pickup Clutch]
7) Remove the contact guide [1].
- 1 screw [2]

Chapter 8

8.9.22.3 Removing Registration Sensor

0001-1721

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the front cover switch gear unit [1].
- 2 screws [2]

F-8-132

8) Remove the pre-registration guide fixing boss (rear) [1].

- 1 screw [2]

F-8-136

2) Remove the front cover switch link [1].

- 1 screw [2]

F-8-133

9) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner

Container Retainer]
10) Detach the front inner cover (middle) [2].
- 2 screws [1]
F-8-137

3) Remove the varistor fixing screw [1].

4) Remove the pre-registration guide fixing boss (front) [2].
- 1 screw [3]

F-8-134

11) Detach the support cover (right). (page 10-18)[Detaching Support

Cover (Right)]
12) Detach the front inner cover (right) [2].
- 1 screw [1]
F-8-138

5) Lift the pre-registration guide [1].

F-8-135
F-8-139

6) Remove the registration sensor [1].

8-51

Chapter 8
- 1 snap stopper
- 1 connector

F-8-140

F-8-143

Pickup Unit 1

8.9.23 Registration Clutch

8.9.23.1 Removing Registration Clutch
0001-1730

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Disconnect the connector (3P) [1].
3) Detach the stop plate [2].
- 1 screw [3]
4) Pull out the registration clutch [4] toward the front.

F-8-144

Pickup Unit 2
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw; then, detach the cassette pickup solenoid [3].
3) Remove the bushing [4] and the 5 screws [5]; then, detach the sensor base
6].

F-8-141

8.9.24 Pickup Vertical Path Roller

8.9.24.1 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2
0001-1558

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.
2) Disconnect that connector [1], and free the harness from the guide; then,
remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the pickup assembly 2 [3].

F-8-145

8.9.24.3 Before Removing Vertical Path Roller

0017-6355

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

F-8-142

8.9.24.2 Removing the Sensor Base

0001-1559

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Remove the 2 TP screws [1] and the binding screw [2] from the rear of the
pickup assembly, and detach the bracket [3].

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]
7) Remove the sensor base. (page 8-40)[Removing Sensor Base]

8.9.24.4 Before Removing Vertical Path Roller

0017-7811

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

8-52

Chapter 8
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the right cover (lower front). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right
Cover (Lower Front)]
5) Remove the pickup unit 1. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 1]
6) Remove the pickup unit 2. (page 8-39)[Removing Pickup Unit 2]
7) Remove the sensor base. (page 8-40)[Removing Sensor Base]

8.9.25.3 Removing Duplex Feed Roller 2

0001-1687

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Release the coil spring [1].
2) Remove the E-ring [2] to remove the shaft [3], and detach the duplex feed
frame [4].

8.9.24.5 Removing Vertical Path Roller

0001-1560

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Release the claw [A] of the gear [1] at the rear, and remove the gear [1]
and the bushing [2].

F-8-148

3) Remove the one-way gear [2].

- 1 E-ring [1]

F-8-146

2) Release the claw [A] of the bushing [1] at the front to move it toward the
rear, and then remove the vertical path roller [2] upward.

F-8-149

4) Remove the duplex feed roller 2 [2].

- 1 E-ring [1]

F-8-147

8.9.25 Duplex Feed Roller 2

F-8-150

8.9.25.1 Before Removing Duplex Feed Roller 2

8.9.26 Duplex Feed Sensor

0017-6356

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

8.9.26.1 Before Removing Duplex Feed Sensor

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the duplex feed sensor. (page 8-54)[Removing Duplex Feed
Sensor]

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

8.9.25.2 Before Removing Duplex Feed Roller 2

8.9.26.2 Before Removing Duplex Feed Sensor

0017-6357

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]

0017-7812
0017-7814

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the duplex feed sensor. (page 8-54)[Removing Duplex Feed
Sensor]

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]

8-53

Chapter 8

8.9.26.3 Removing Duplex Feed Sensor

0017-6767

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the transfer frame [2].
- 2 screws (with plastic collar) [1]

F-8-153

2) Disconnect the connector (2P) [1].

3) Detach the stop plate [2].
- 1 screw [3]
4) Pull out the duplex feed clutch [4] toward the front.

F-8-151

2) Remove the duplex feed sensor [2].

- 1 connector [1]

F-8-154

8.9.28 Delivery Assembly 1

8.9.28.1 Before Removing Delivery Unit 1
0017-6359

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

F-8-152

1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]

2) Detach the support cover. (page 10-17)[Detaching Support Cover]
3) Detach the delivery tray right cover [1].

8.9.27 Duplex Feed Clutch

8.9.27.1 Before Removing Duplex Feed Clutch
0017-6358

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]

8.9.27.2 Before Removing Duplex Feed Clutch

0017-7816

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]

8.9.27.3 Removing Duplex Feed Clutch

F-8-155

4) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
5) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]

0001-1781

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

8.9.28.2 Before Removing Delivery Unit 1

0017-7817

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the duplex drive gear [1].
1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
2) Detach the support cover. (page 10-17)[Detaching Support Cover]
3) Detach the delivery tray right cover [1].

8-54

Chapter 8

F-8-156

F-8-159

4) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
5) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
6) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]

4) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
5) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
6) Remove the delivery unit 1. (page 8-55)[Removing Delivery Unit 1]

8.9.28.3 Removing Delivery Unit 1

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

8.9.29.2 Before Removing Delivery Drive Unit

0017-7819

0001-2480

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the connector cover [2].
- 1 screw [1]

1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]

2) Detach the support cover. (page 10-17)[Detaching Support Cover]
3) Detach the delivery tray right cover [1].

F-8-160

4) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
5) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
6) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
7) Remove the delivery unit 1. (page 8-55)[Removing Delivery Unit 1]

F-8-157

2) Remove the delivery unit 1 [1].

- 3 screws [2] (2 stepped screws at the left)

8.9.29.3 Removing Delivery Drive Unit

0001-1949

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Free the cable from the edge saddle [1].
2) Remove the delivery drive unit 1 [4].
- 1 connector [2]
- 3 screws [3]

F-8-158

8.9.29 Delivery Drive Unit

8.9.29.1 Before Removing Delivery Drive Unit
0017-6360

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
2) Detach the support cover. (page 10-17)[Detaching Support Cover]
3) Detach the delivery tray right cover [1].
F-8-161

8-55

Chapter 9 Fixing System

Contents

Contents
9.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................. 9-3

9.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................9-3

9.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On .......................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations During Printing ........................................................................................................................... 9-4

9.3 Various Control Mechanisms.........................................................................................................................................9-4

9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller.................................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.3.1.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.3.1.2 Speed Control According to Paper Type ........................................................................................................................................................9-5

9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature ................................................................................................................................. 9-6

9.3.2.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-6
9.3.2.2 At Power-On ...................................................................................................................................................................................................9-6
9.3.2.3 At a Standby State ...........................................................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.3.2.4 At Time of Printing .........................................................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.3.2.5 Return Sequence..............................................................................................................................................................................................9-9

9.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 9-9

9.3.3.1 Detection of the Passage of Paper ...................................................................................................................................................................9-9

9.4 Protective Functions.....................................................................................................................................................9-10

9.4.1 Detecting Overheating by the Main Thermistor (TH1) ............................................................................................................. 9-10
9.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Sub Thermistor (TH2) ............................................................................................................... 9-10
9.4.3 Detecting Overheating in Relation to a Triac Short-Circuit ...................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.4 Detecting Overheating by the Thermal Switch (TP1) ............................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.5 Detecting Overheating of the Heat Retention Heater (H3)........................................................................................................ 9-12
9.4.6 Error ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-12

9.5 Parts Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................................................9-13

9.5.1 Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-13
9.5.1.1 Before Removing Fixing Assembly..............................................................................................................................................................9-13
9.5.1.2 Before Removing Fixing Assembly..............................................................................................................................................................9-13
9.5.1.3 Removing Fixing Assembly..........................................................................................................................................................................9-13

9.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame ................................................................................................................................................................... 9-13

9.5.2.1 Before Removing the Fixing Upper Frame...................................................................................................................................................9-13
9.5.2.2 Before Removing the Fixing Upper Frame...................................................................................................................................................9-13
9.5.2.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame...............................................................................................................................................................9-13
9.5.2.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable ................................................................................................................................9-14

9.5.3 Fixing Roller .............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-14

9.5.3.1 Before Removing the Fixing Roller ..............................................................................................................................................................9-14
9.5.3.2 Before Removing the Fixing Roller ..............................................................................................................................................................9-14
9.5.3.3 Removing the Fixing Roller..........................................................................................................................................................................9-14
9.5.3.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable ................................................................................................................................9-16

9.5.4 Pressure Roller ........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-17

9.5.4.1 Before Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller ...............................................................................................................................................9-17
9.5.4.2 Before Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller ...............................................................................................................................................9-17
9.5.4.3 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller ...........................................................................................................................................................9-17
9.5.4.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable ................................................................................................................................9-18

9.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-19

9.5.5.1 Before Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor.............................................................................................................................................9-19
9.5.5.2 Before Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor.............................................................................................................................................9-19
9.5.5.3 Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor.........................................................................................................................................................9-19
9.5.5.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Main Thermistor .......................................................................................................................9-19

9.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor ............................................................................................................................................................... 9-20

9.5.6.1 Before Removing the Fixing Sub Thermistor ...............................................................................................................................................9-20

Contents

9.5.6.2 Before Removing the Fixing Sub Thermistor............................................................................................................................................... 9-20

9.5.6.3 Removing the Fixing Sub Thermistor .......................................................................................................................................................... 9-20
9.5.6.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Sub Thermistor ......................................................................................................................... 9-20

9.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch .............................................................................................................................................................. 9-20

9.5.7.1 Before Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch .............................................................................................................................................. 9-20
9.5.7.2 Before Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch .............................................................................................................................................. 9-20
9.5.7.3 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch.......................................................................................................................................................... 9-21
9.5.7.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal Switch ........................................................................................................................ 9-21

9.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater...................................................................................................................................... 9-21

9.5.8.1 Before Removing the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ........................................................................................................ 9-21
9.5.8.2 Before Removing the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ........................................................................................................ 9-21
9.5.8.3 Removing the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater .................................................................................................................... 9-22
9.5.8.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable ................................................................................................................................ 9-22

9.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater .................................................................................................................................................... 9-22

9.5.9.1 Before Removing the Fixing Heat Retention Heater.................................................................................................................................... 9-22
9.5.9.2 Before Removing the Fixing Heat Retention Heater.................................................................................................................................... 9-23
9.5.9.3 Removing the Fixing Heat Retention Heater................................................................................................................................................ 9-23

9.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide .................................................................................................................................................................... 9-24

9.5.10.1 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide ................................................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.5.10.2 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide ................................................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.5.10.3 Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide ............................................................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.5.10.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable .............................................................................................................................. 9-25

9.5.11 Fixing Delivery Guide ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-25

9.5.11.1 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Guide............................................................................................................................................. 9-25
9.5.11.2 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Guide............................................................................................................................................. 9-25
9.5.11.3 Removing the Fixing Delivery Guide......................................................................................................................................................... 9-25

9.5.12 Fixing Inlet Sensor................................................................................................................................................................... 9-26

9.5.12.1 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 9-26
9.5.12.2 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 9-26
9.5.12.3 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor .............................................................................................................................................................. 9-26
9.5.12.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main Cable .............................................................................................................................. 9-27

9.5.13 Fixing Delivery Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-27

9.5.13.1 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor............................................................................................................................................ 9-27
9.5.13.2 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor............................................................................................................................................ 9-27
9.5.13.3 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor........................................................................................................................................................ 9-27

Chapter 9

9.1 Construction
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions
0000-7945

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The fixing system has the following functions:
T-9-1
Item

Description

Fixing method

by heat roller

Fixing heater

for fixing roller side, 2 heaters (main, sub)

for pressure roller side, 1 heater (heat retention heater)

Control temperature

190 deg C (at standby)

Fixing drive control

by controlling speed of fixing roller (according to paper type)

Fixing temperature detection

by main thermistor (non-contact; TH1, fixing roller center)

Protective function

for the following; cuts off power to fixing heater in response to error:

by sub thermistor (contact; TH2, fixing roller front end)

- thermistor (TH1/TH2; temperature control)

- fixing thermal switch (TP1; fixing roller rear end; operating temperature of 190
+8, -8 deg C)
- thermistor connection detection
separation claw

non-contact type (assists separation of paper in high humidity environment; in

normal environment, separation by fixing/pressure roller)

Bias application

none

Cleaning mechanism

none (cleaning-less)

Oil application

none (oil-less fixing)

Unlocking mechanism

none (jam removal handle used)

Ref:
Cleaning-less Mechanism
The area of the machine where paper moves is free of an object that comes into contact with the fixing roller (e.g., separation claw, thermistor, thermal switch) so
that the fixing roller remains free of adhesion of paper lint or dust.
Ref:
Separation of Paper
The pressure of the separation roller in the fixing assembly is more or less identical at the roller center and ends; for this reason, paper comes into contact with and
leaves the roller under even pressure across the roller.

9.1.2 Major Components

0000-7948

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The fixing assembly consists of the following components offering the indicated functions:
T-9-2
Item

Notation

Fixing roller

Description
48.5 mm in outside diameter

Pressure roller

38.0 mm in outside diameter

Main heater

H1

485 W (100/115/230 V halogen heater)

Sub heater

H2

315 W (100/115/230 V halogen heater)

Heat retention heater

H3

80 W (24 V; DC heater)

Main thermistor

TH1

Sub thermistor

TH2

non-contact thermistor (overheating detection)

Thermal switch

TP1

contact type (operating temperature: 190 +8, -8 deg C)

Separation claw

non-contact thermistor (temperature control, overheating

detection)

non-contact type

Fixing inlet sensor

PS25

detects paper remaining in fixing assembly

Fixing delivery sensor

PS13

detects delivery of paper from fixing assembly

Fixing motor

M11

DC brush-less motor

9-1

Chapter 9

[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]

[1]

[4]
[2]
[3]
F-9-1
T-9-3
[1]

Pressure roller

[2]

Heat retention heater (H3)

[3]

Main heater (H1)

[4]

Sub heater (H2)

[5]

Sub thermistor (TH2)

[6]

Fixing roller

[7]

Separation claw

[8]

Thermistor cover

[9]

Main thermistor (TH1) (non-contact)

[10]

Thermal switch (TP1)

[14]

[1]

[13]

[2]

[12]
[11]

[3]
[10]

[9]
[4]

[8]
[5]

[6]

[7]
F-9-2

9-2

Chapter 9
T-9-4
[1]

Fixing outlet roller

[2]

Fixing outlet sensor arm

[3]

Duplex feed roll 1

[4]

Pressure roller

[5]

Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)

[6]

Fixing inlet sensor (PS25)

[7]

Fixing inlet guide

[8]

Fixing roller

[9]

Thermal switch (TP1)

[10]

Main thermistor (TH1)

[11]

Sub thermistor (TH2)

[12]

Separation claw

[13]

Fixing outlet sensor roll

[14]

Fixing outlet roll

9.1.3 Construction of the Control System

0000-7950

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram of the construction of the fixing system:

J325-8
J325-9
HETER_ON

J210-5
J210-6

J201-10

J255-2

Triac

J202-3

AC driver PCB
J202-1

J255-1

J202-5

HETER2_ON

J352-2

J316-B4
FUSER_C_NCTHM

J352-1

J316-B3
FUSER_R_NCTHM

TR_SHORT(ERR2)

J316-B6
FUSER_THM

TR_SHORT(ERR1)

J316-B1

J210-1

J316-B7

J210-2

Drive
circuit

FUSER_CNCTX_N

Controller power
supply PCB

DC controller PCB
J325-1

GND

SHEATER

Thermal switch
(TP1)
Main thermistor
(TH1) (non-contact)
Sub thermistor
(TH2)

Sub heater (H2)

Heat retention heater (H3)
Main heater (H1)
F-9-3

9.2 Basic Sequence

9.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On
0000-7951

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

9-3

Chapter 9

Main power switch

WMUP

WMUPR

Fixing system

Fixing main heater

H1
Fixing sub heater
H2
Fixing heat retention
heater (3
Fixing motor
M11

PSTBY

190 deg C

185 deg C

1
Repeats ON/OFF

50 deg C

300Sec

480Sec

F-9-4

*1: executes temperature control using the main heater or the sub heater according to the difference in temperature readings between the main thermistor (TH1) and
the sub thermistor (TH2).
*2: executes temperature control using the sub heater to reduce overshooting (from when the temperature reaches 180 deg C until the warm-up period ends). However, if the temperature is less than 170 deg C at the start of the warm-up period, the main heater will also be used.
*3: executes half-speed rotation if printing starts at the end of the warm-up period.

9.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations During Printing

0000-7952

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Printing starts in a standby state (black-and-white, plain paper).
Start key Registration
roller ON
ON
PSTBY PINTR

PRINT

LSTR

PSTBY

Fixing motor
(M11)
Fixing main
heater (H1)

*1

Fixing system

Fixing sub
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retention heater
(H3)

*1

Heat discharge
fan (FM1/2)
ITB duct fan
(FM3)
Controlled to
Controlled to 193 deg C Controlled to
185 deg C
190 deg C

Controlled to
174 deg C

Controlled to
190 deg C

193 deg C
190 deg C
185 deg C
174 deg C
164 deg C

8Sec

20Sec

30Sec *2
F-9-5

*1: executes temperature control (to 190 deg C) using the main heater or the sub heater according to the difference in temperature readings between the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2).
*2: executes idle rotation of the fixing motor and temperature control at 180 deg C after the end of printing that lasts 180 sec or more.

9.3 Various Control Mechanisms

9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller
9.3.1.1 Overview
0000-7953

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The fixing roller is driven by an exclusive DC motor (M11).
The speed of the fixing roller is controlled for the following:
1. speed control for paper type.
2. speed control for printing volume.
3. control against partial deformation of roller (otherwise caused by non-use over time).

9-4

Chapter 9
The following signals are sent from the DC controller to the fixing motor (M11).
T-9-5
Signal

Description

FUSER_DC_MONX_H

motor drive signal; if '1', on; if '0', off.

FUSER_DC_LOCK_N

motor speed detection signal; if '0', off or short in revolution; if '1', normal
rotation.

FUSER_DC_GAIN

motor speed control signal; if '1', half-speed; if '0', full speed.

FUSER_DC_CLK

basic frequency input to motor.

Fixing outlet
sensor arm
(PS13)

DC controller PCB

Fixing motor
24V

M11

Fixing roller

24V
J2133
1
2

J315
1
2

J2134
6
4
3
2
1
5

J316
4
6
7
8
9
5

5V

5V

FUSERDC_MONX_H
FUSERDC_LOCK_N
FUSERDC_GAIN
FUSERDC_CLK

Pressure roller

Fixing inlet sensor

(PS25)

FUSER_IN_SENS
FUSER_DELI_SENS

J316-B9
J316-B13

F-9-6

9.3.1.2 Speed Control According to Paper Type

0000-7956

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

a. 2-Speed Control
The machine controls the fixing roller to 2 speeds to suit the type of paper being used.
Paper type

Fixing speed

Plain paper

137.0 mm/sec (full speed)

Heavy paper

68.5 mm/sec (half speed)

Mono color transparency

137.0 mm/sec (full speed)

Full color transparency

68.5 mm/sec (half speed)

Note:
The machine reduces the speed of the fixing roller (to half) for the following; if thick paper, to ensure good fixing; for full color transparencies, for good fixing of
color toner layers to film.
b. Speed Control for Printing Volume (down sequence)
When a large volume of printing is undertaken, paper can collect heat from the pressure roller, increasing the curling at time of delivery and, thus, adversely affecting
stacking (number of sheets that are stacked).
To prevent the symptom, the machine permits a change to the service mode settings so that the following takes place: after the 100th sheet in large size mode or
after the 200th sheet in small size mode, the machine increases the distance between sheets and reduces the printing speed by half to decrease curling and ensuring
good stacking. The machine refers to the counter reading for the sequence, not to the roller temperature reading.

Service Mode:
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DWNSQ-SW (Level 2)
1: down sequence enabled
0: down sequence disabled (default)
c. Prevention of Partial Deformation of the Roller (otherwise caused by no use over time)
The fixing roller can start to suffer deformation if left alone for a long time under temperature control (because of its nip). To prevent deformation, the machine
rotates the fixing roller at 68.5 mm/sec (half speed) for a period of 0.5 sec every 30 min (during standby).
When the machine starts sleep mode, the machine turns off the power to the fixing motor (M11) to prevent the fixing motor from rotating; however, since the machine does not perform temperature control for fixing in sleep mode, the roller will not suffer deformation even when it remains stationary.
The machine performs temperature control for fixing while it is in power save mode (-50%) or in low-power mode, and turns off the power to the fixing motor
(M11), thus preventing the fixing roller from rotating. If such a condition lasts for 4 hr or more, the roller can start to suffer deformation; the machine, however, is

9-5

Chapter 9
designed to shift to sleep mode before the passage of 4 hr so that the roller cannot start to suffer deformation.

9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature

9.3.2.1 Overview
0000-7958

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram of the mechanisms involved in fixing roller temperature control; see the detailed descriptions of the mechanism for the following states:
[1] at time of power-on
[2] in a standby state
[3] during printing
[4] return sequence

J325-8
J325-9
HETER_ON

J210-5
J210-6

J201-10

J255-2

Triac

J202-1

AC driver PCB
J202-3

J255-1

J202-5

HETER2_ON

J352-2
TR_SHORT(ERR2)

J352-1
TR_SHORT(ERR1)

J316-B4

J210-1

J316-B3

FUSER_C_NCTHM

J210-2

Drive
circuit

J316-B6

Controller power
supply PCB

FUSER_R_NCTHM

J325-1

FUSER_THM

DC controller PCB
SHEATER

Thermal switch
(TP1)
Main thermistor
(TH1) (non-contact)
Sub thermistor
(TH2)

Sub heater (H2)

Heat retention heater (H3)
Main heater (H1)
F-9-7

9.3.2.2 At Power-On
0000-7960

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The fixing roller is heated by 2 fixing heaters (H1, main heater; H2, sub heater). The fixing pressure roller is heated by the heat retention heat heater (H3; DC heater).
The main and sub heaters remain fully on until the fixing roller reaches 185 deg C. Thereafter, the sub heater remains fully on until the fixing roller reaches 190
deg C; when it reaches 190 deg C, the machine ends the warm-up period. (If the temperature is 170 deg C or more at the start of the warm-up period, however, the
main heater will also remain fully on until the warm-up period ends.) The heat retention heater remains fully on from the start of the warm-up period until the
temperature of the fixing roller reaches 50 deg C.
When the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 50 deg C, the machine starts initial multiple rotation (full speed), and continues it until the warm-up period ends
(i.e., when the fixing roller is heated to 190 deg C).
If printing does not start at the end of the warm-up period, the machine rotates the fixing roller for 300 sec at half speed (following initial multiple rotation). While
the roller is rotating at half speed, it is controlled to 195 deg C by the work of the sub heater.
Memo:
1. The machine accepts a print job at time of half-speed rotation; if 300 sec has not passed at the end of the job, it will continue half-speed rotation until 300 sec
has passed.
2. The machine uses half-speed rotation so that the temperature of the pressure roller increases, thereby ensuring good fixing.

9-6

Chapter 9

Main power switch ON

WMUP

Fixing system

Fixing main heater

H1
Fixing sub heater
H2
Fixing heat retention
heater H3
Fixing motor M11

WMUPR

PSTBY

190 deg C

185 deg C

1
Repeats ON/OFF.

50 deg C

300Sec

480Sec

F-9-8

*1: The machine executes temperature control (to 190 deg C) using the main heater or the sub heater according to the difference in temperature readings between
the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2).
*2: The machine performs temperature control using the sub heater when the temperature reaches 180 deg C to reduce overshooting (until the end of the warm-up
period). If the temperature at the start of the warm-up period is less than 170 deg C, the machine executes temperature control also using the main heater.
*3: If printing does not start at the end of the warm-up period, the machine executes half-speed rotation.
The machine uses half-speed rotation to increase the temperature of the pressure roller.

9.3.2.3 At a Standby State

0000-7964

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine controls the temperature of the fixing roller using the main heater (H1) and the sub heater (H2) to 190 deg C based on the readings of the main thermistor (TH1; non-contact type) and the sub thermistor (TH2). If we assume that the reading of temperature by the main thermistor is Th1 and that by the sub thermistor is Th2,
- if Th1 is higher than Th2, the machine uses the sub thermistor to execute temperature control.
- if TH1 is lower than or is equal to Th2, the machine uses the main heater to execute temperature control.
Memo:
The main heater emits heat most at its center, while the sub heater emits heat most at its both ends.
WMUPR

PSTBY

Fixing system

Fixing main heater

H1
Fixing sub heater
H2
Fixing heat retention
heater H3
Fixing motor
M11
300sec

480sec

F-9-9

*1: The machine executes temperature control (to 190 deg C) using the main heater or the sub heater according to the difference in readings between the main
thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2).
*2: The fixing heat retention heater repeats remaining on for 4.2 sec and off for 1.6

9.3.2.4 At Time of Printing

0000-7967

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine controls the temperature of the fixing roller by turning on and off the main heater according to the reading of the main thermistor. The following shows
how the machine controls the temperature when making black-and-white prints using plain paper:

9-7

Chapter 9

Start key
ON

Registration
roller ON

PSTBY PINTR

PRINT

LSTR

PSTBY

Fixing motor
(M11)
Fixing main
heater (H1)

*1

Fixing system

Fixing sub
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retention heater
(H3)

*1

Heat discharge
fan (FM1/2)
ITB duct fan
(FM3)
Controlled to
Controlled to193 deg C Controlled to
185 deg C
190 deg C

Controlled to
190 deg C

Controlled to
174 deg C

193 deg C
190 deg C
185 deg C
174 deg C
164 deg C

8Sec

20Sec

30Sec *2
F-9-10

*1: The machine executes temperature control (to 190 deg C) using the main heater or the sub heater according to the difference in readings of the main thermistor
(TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2).
*2: The machine executes idle rotation of the fixing motor and temperature control to 180 deg C after a print job that lasts for 180 sec or more.
The machine uses the following temperature control sequence when making black-and-white prints on transparencies or making color prints.
Start key Registration
roller ON
ON
PSTBY PINTR

PRINT

LSTR

PSTBY

Fixing motor
(M11)
Fixing main
heater (H1)

*1

Fixing system

Fixing sub
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retention heater
(H3)

*1

Heat discharge
fan (FM1/2)
ITB duct fan
(FM3)
Controlled to
Controlled to 193 deg C Controlled to
190 deg C
190 deg C

193 deg C
190 deg C
185 deg C
174 deg C
164 deg C

8Sec

30Sec *2
F-9-11

*1: The machine executes temperature control (to 190 dg C) using the main heater or the sub heater according to the difference in readings of the main thermistor
(TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2).

9-8

Chapter 9
*: The machine executes idle rotation of the fixing motor after a print job that lasts 180 sec or more.

9.3.2.5 Return Sequence

0000-7974

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Return from Power Save Mode/Jam Removal/Door Open State
The machine becomes ready for printing when the temperature of the main thermistor (TH1) reaches 190 deg C.
Return from Low Power Mode
- In the Case of Black-and-White Prints
The machine becomes ready for printing 30 sec (less than 180 deg C) after it starts return sequence.
- In the Case of Full Color Prints
The machine becomes ready for printing when the temperature of the main thermistor (TH1) reaches 180 deg C.

Service Mode:
The machine permits a change to the conditions imposed on return from low power mode (so that it becomes ready for printing when the temperature of the main
thermistor (TH1) reaches 180 deg C, 185 deg C, or 190 deg C).
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > LPM-RTRN
0: return in 30 sec (default)
1: return at 180 deg C
2: return at 185 deg C
3: return at 190 deg C

9.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper

9.3.3.1 Detection of the Passage of Paper
0001-4703

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following is a diagram of the mechanisms used by the machine to detect the passage of paper for the fixing unit:

J316-B13

J316-B9

FUSER DELI SNS

FUSER IN SNS

DC controller PCB

Fixing delivery sensor (PS25)

Fixing delivery sensor (PS13)
F-9-12
T-9-6
Sensor

Description

Fixing inlet sensor (PS25)

detects paper remaining at the fixing assembly inlet at power-on.

Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)

Detects paper delivered by the fixing assembly.

- Preventing Wrapping of Paper Around the Fixing Roller

The machine starts its mechanism to prevent wrapping of paper around the fixing roller in response to detection of a jam by the fixing inside sensor.

9-9

Chapter 9

a. Fixing Inlet sensor (PS25)

When the fixing inlet sensor (PS25) detects a stationary jam at power-on, the machine does not execute initial multiple rotation, thereby preventing paper from
wrapping around the fixing roller.
The fixing inlet sensor (PS25), however, does not check for a delay or stationary jam while feed operation is under way.
b. Fixing Outlet Sensor (PS13)
When the fixing outlet sensor (PS13) detects a delay jam, the machine stops the fixing motor (M11) to prevent wrapping of paper around the fixing roller.

9.4 Protective Functions

9.4.1 Detecting Overheating by the Main Thermistor (TH1)
0000-7976

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

When the main thermistor (TH1) detects overheating, the CPU on the DC controller PCB turns off the triac drive circuit.
Moreover, if the CPU on the DC controller detects that the difference in readings between the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2) is more than
specified, the CPU turns off the triac drive circuit.

DC controller PCB
IC30

Heat retention heater drive signal

CPU monitoring
Main heater drive signal

CPU
OFF

Sub heater drive signal

Main thermistor
overheating detection

Fixing assembly
Sub thermistor
(TH2)

Thermal
switch
(TP1)

Heater drive
enable signal

Triac short-circuit
detection
Main
thermistor
(TH1)

J325-1

J325-12

J316_
B3/B4

Main/sub thermistor
overheating detection

Triac drive
circuit

J325-6
J325-8
J325-9

OFF

Latch
circuit

J316_B6

Main thermistor/
Sub thermistor
overheating detection

Sub thermistor
overheating detection

Front door
switch
(SW3)

AC drive PCB
AC relay
Triac
Triac

Sub heater
(H2)
Main heater
(H1)

Controller power supply PCB

Drive circuit

Heat retention heater

(H3)

F-9-13

9.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Sub Thermistor (TH2)

0000-8584

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

When the sub thermistor (TH2) detects overheating, the triac drive circuit of the DC controller PCB turns off the main heater/sub heater drive signal. Or, the latch
circuit of the DC controller PCB turns off the heater drive enable signal to the triac drive circuit.

9-10

Chapter 9

DC controller PCB
Heat retention heater drive signal

IC30

CPU monitoring
Main heater drive signal

CPU

OFF
Sub heater drive signal

Sub thermistor
overheating
detection

OFF

Latch
circuit

Sub thermistor
(TH2)

Main
thermistor
(TH1)

Thermal
switch
(TP1)

Front door
switch
(SW3)

Heater drive
enable signal

Traic short-circuit
detection

J316_
B3/B4

Fixing assembly

J325-6
J325-8
J325-9

Traic drive
circuit

J325-1

OFF
J325-12

Sub thermistor
OFF
overheating
detection

J316_B6

Main thermistor/
Sub thermistor
overheating detection

IC29

AC driver PCB
AC relay
Triac
Triac

Sub heater
(H2)

DC controller PCB

Main heater
(H1)

Drive circuit

Heat retention heater

(H3)

F-9-14

9.4.3 Detecting Overheating in Relation to a Triac Short-Circuit

0000-8585

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

When the AC drive detects a short circuit in the triac, the triac drive circuit on the DC controller PCB turns off the main heater/sub heater drive signal.

DC controller PCB
Heat retention heater drive signal

IC30

CPU monitoring
Main heater drive signal

CPU

OFF

OFF

Heater drive
enable signal

Traic short-circuit
detection

Fixing assembly
Sub thermistor
(TH2)

Main
thermistor
(TH1)

Thermal
switch
(TP1)

J325-1

J325-12

Traic drive
circuit

J325-6
J325-8
J325-9

OFF

Latch
circuit
J316_
B3/B4

Main thermistor/
Sub thermistor
overheating detection
J316_B6

Sub heater drive signal

IC29

Sub thermistor
overheating detection

Front door
switch
(SW3)

AC drive PCB
AC relay
Traic
Traic

Sub heater
(H2)

Controller power supply PCB

Main heater
(H1)

Drive circuit

Heat retention heater (H3)

F-9-15

9.4.4 Detecting Overheating by the Thermal Switch (TP1)

0000-8586

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

9-11

Chapter 9

When the thermal switch (TP1) reaches a specific temperature, it goes off to cut off the AC power line to the main heater and the sub heater.
Caution:
Once open, the contact of the thermal switch will not return to normal even after the temperature drops to its normal level. Remove the cause of the error that opened
the contact, and be sure to replace the thermal switch with a new one.

DC controller PCB
IC30

Heat retention drive signal

CPU monitoring
Main heater drive signal

CPU

OFF
Sub heater drive signal

IC29

Fixing assembly
Sub thermistor
(TH2)

Main
thermistor
(TH1)

Heater drive
enable signal

Thermal
switch
(TP1)

AC driver PCB

OFF

AC relay

J325-1

J325-12
Traic short-circuit
detection

Triac
drive
circuit

J325-6
J325-8
J325-9

OFF

Latch
circuit

J316_
B3/B4

Main thermistor/
Sub thermistor
overheating detection
J316_B6

Sub thermistor
overheating detection

Front door
switch
(SW3)

Triac
Triac

Sub heater
(H2)

Controller power supply PCB

Main heater
(H1)

Dive circuit

Heat retention heater

(H3)

F-9-16

9.4.5 Detecting Overheating of the Heat Retention Heater (H3)

0000-8587

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine does not monitor the heat retention heater (H3) for overheating, and there is no mechanism to turn off the power to the heat retention heater.

9.4.6 Error
0000-8588

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Related Error
E000
The main thermistor (TH1) has an open circuit or has poor contact. The sub thermistor (TH2) has an open circuit or poor contact. The thermal switch (TP1) has an
open circuit. The main heater (H1)/sub heater (H2) has an open circuit. The AC drive PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The door switch (SW3) is
faulty.
E001
The main thermistor (TH1) is faulty. The sub thermistor (TH2) is faulty. The AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E003
The sub thermistor (TH2) has an open circuit or has poor contact. The thermal switch (TP1) has an open circuit. The main heater (H1)/sub heater (H2) has an open
circuit. The AC drive PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The door switch (SW3) is faulty.
E004
The main thermistor (TH1) has an open circuit or has poor contact. The sub thermistor (TH2) has an open circuit or has poor contact. The thermal switch (TGP1)
has an open circuit. The main heater (H1)/sub heater (H2) has an open circuit. The AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E008
The fixing upper roller counter reading has reached its upper limit (180,000 counts: if smaller than B4, 1 count; if B4 or larger, 2 counts).
E014
The fixing motor (M11) has an open circuit or has poor contact. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Note 1:
If the machine indicates E000 through E003, it will not reset the error when its main power switch is turned off and then on, requiring you to execute the following
service mode item: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
Note 2:
If the machine suffers an error because the fixing upper roller count has reached its upper limit, be sure to replace the fixing assembly or the fixing upper roller, and
then execute the following service mode item: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FX-UP-RL.
Note 3:
If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM on the DC controller, be sure to enter the reading you noted before the replacement or initialization in the following service mode item: COPIER >COUNTER>MISC>FX-UP-RL.

9-12

Chapter 9

Note 4:
The machine indicates a warning when the reading of the fixing upper roller
counter reaches 100,000.

9.5 Parts Replacement Procedure

9.5.1 Fixing Unit
9.5.1.1 Before Removing Fixing Assembly
0017-6362

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]

F-9-19

9.5.1.2 Before Removing Fixing Assembly

0017-7763

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]

How to place fixing assembly

When placing the fixing assembly on the floor, the area with the duplexing
rollers [1] should face upward.
Take extra care to avoid placing the side with screws [2] or the inlet sensor
[3] on the floor. Otherwise the parts may be broken.

9.5.1.3 Removing Fixing Assembly

0001-1309

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the connector cover [2].
- 1 screw [1]

Points to note when attaching

- After replacing the fixing assembly, clear the counter reading from service
mode below:
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> FX-UP-RL

F-9-17

2) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] and free the cable from the edge saddle
[2].

- When replacing with a used fixing assembly, go to service mode below to

input the counter reading of the replaced device:
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> FX-UP-RL

9.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame

9.5.2.1 Before Removing the Fixing Upper Frame
0018-0898

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
4) Remove the fixing inlet guide. (page 9-24)[Removing the Fixing Inlet
Guide]
5) Detach the fixing roller. (page 9-14)[Removing the Fixing Roller]

9.5.2.2 Before Removing the Fixing Upper Frame

0018-0904

F-9-18

3) Remove the fixing assembly [2].

- 4 screws [1] (2 on the left are stepped screws)

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
5) Remove the fixing inlet guide. (page 9-24)[Removing the Fixing Inlet
Guide]
6) Detach the fixing roller. (page 9-14)[Removing the Fixing Roller]

9.5.2.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame

0002-7390

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

9-13

Chapter 9

9.5.3 Fixing Roller

1) Remove the screw [2] and the insulating sheet retainer [1]; then, detach
the heat insulating sheet [3].

9.5.3.1 Before Removing the Fixing Roller

0018-0915

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
4) Remove the fixing inlet guide. (page 9-24)[Removing the Fixing Inlet
Guide]

9.5.3.2 Before Removing the Fixing Roller

0018-0916

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
5) Remove the fixing inlet guide. (page 9-24)[Removing the Fixing Inlet
Guide]

F-9-20

2) Detach the spur unit [2].

- 1 screw [1]

9.5.3.3 Removing the Fixing Roller

0001-1336

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
[1]

[2]

1) Detach the round terminal [1] connected to the fixing heat retention heater.
- 1 screw

F-9-21

9.5.2.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main

Cable
0006-6670

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The screw used to fix the round terminal is equipped with a washer. Be
careful not to lose the washer.

Keep in mind that the fixing main cable [1] does not come off from the fixing
frame when handling it while assembling the fixing assembly.
If the fixing main cable comes off from the fixing frame, it may rub against
the duplexing feed guide of the right door assembly during operation.

F-9-23

2) Detach the fixing heat retention heater [4].

2-1) Detach the terminal.
- 2 screws [1]
2-2) Detach the heater base (front/rear) [3].
- 2 screws [2]

The screw used to fix the fixing heat retention heater in place is equipped
with a washer. Be careful not to lose the washer.

[1]

F-9-22
F-9-24

9-14

Chapter 9

F-9-28
F-9-25

3) Detach cover [2] and the bearing retainer (front) [3].

- 2 screws [1]

MEMO:
The fixing main heater is connected to the white cable, and it is located on
the pickup side.
The fixing sub heater is connected to the black cable, and it is located on the
delivery side.

5) Detach the 3 gears [1].

- 3 E rings
6) Detach the bearing retainer (rear) [3].
- 1 screw [2]

F-9-26

4) Detach the fixing main/sub heater [5].

Be careful not to lose the washer for the screw described below:

- 2 screws [2] used to fix the heater retainer [1] in place

- 1 screw used to fix the round terminal [3] in place
- 2 screws [4] used to retain the heater in place

4-1) Detach the heater retainer [1].

- 2 screws [2]
4-2) Detach the round terminal [3].
- 1 screw
4-3) Remove the 2 screws [4] used to retain the heater in place.

F-9-29

7) Detach the fixing pressure roller [3].

7-1) Detach the pressure unit (front) [2].
- 2 screws (M5) [1]

F-9-30
F-9-27

7-2) Detach the pressure unit (rear) [2].

- 2 screws (M5) [1]

9-15

Chapter 9

F-9-35
F-9-31

8) Detach the delivery guide [1].

- 1 screw [2]

Points At Attaching
- If you have replaced the fixing roller, be sure to initialize the service mode
counter using the following service mode:
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> FX-UP-RL

- If you have replaced the fixing roller with a used one, be sure to enter the
counter reading of the used fixing roller using the following service mode
item:
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> FX-UP-RL

9.5.3.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main

Cable
0006-6663

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
F-9-32

9) Free the 4 separation claws [1].

Keep in mind that the fixing main cable [1] does not come off from the fixing
frame when handling it while assembling the fixing assembly.
If the fixing main cable comes off from the fixing frame, it may rub against
the duplexing feed guide of the right door assembly during operation.

F-9-33

10) Remove the fixing roller [1].

[1]

F-9-34

11) Detach the following parts from the fixing roller.

- 2 bushings [1]
- 2 bearings [2]
- 1 gear [3]
- 2 C rings
F-9-36

9-16

Chapter 9

9.5.4 Pressure Roller

9.5.4.1 Before Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller
0018-0929

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.4.2 Before Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller

0018-0931

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

2) Detach the jam removal dial [2].

- 2 E rings [1]

9.5.4.3 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller

0001-1342

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the duplex feed guide [2] and the jam access guide [3] at the same
time.
- 1 screw [1]

F-9-38

3) Disconnect the fixing inlet sensor connector [1] and the fixing delivery
sensor connector [2]; then, pull out the faston [3] connected to the fixing
heat retention heater.

F-9-37

Points to Note When Routing the Cable (before re-mounting the

duplex/feed guide)
Be sure that the cable to the fixing heat retention heater (H3) is routed in the
path indicated in Figure B.
If routed in the path indicated in Figure A, it can become trapped by the
duplex/feed guide.

F-9-39

4) Detach the fixing inside cover [1].

- 3 screws [2]

F-9-40

5) Detach the round terminal [1] connected to the fixing heat retention heater.
- 1 screw

The screw used to fix the round terminal is equipped with a washer. Be
careful not to lose the washer.

9-17

Chapter 9
- 1 screw [2]

F-9-41

6) Detach the fixing heat retention heater [4].

F-9-45
The screw used to fix the fixing heat retention heater is equipped with a
washer. Be careful not to lose the washer.

9) Detach the fixing pressure roller [3].

9-1) Detach the pressure unit (front) [2].
- 2 screws (M5) [1]

6-1) Detach the terminal.

- 2 screws [1]
6-2) Detach the heater base (front, rear) [3].
- 2 screws [2]

F-9-46

9-2) Detach the pressure unit (rear) [2].

- 2 screws (M5) [1]
F-9-42

F-9-47
F-9-43

7) Detach the cover [2] and the bearing retainer (front) [3].
- 2 screws [1]

9.5.4.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main

Cable
0006-6666

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Keep in mind that the fixing main cable [1] does not come off from the fixing
frame when handling it while assembling the fixing assembly.
If the fixing main cable comes off from the fixing frame, it may rub against
the duplexing feed guide of the right door assembly during operation.

F-9-44

8) Detach the bearing retainer (rear) [3].

- 3 gears [1]

9-18

Chapter 9

F-9-49

2) Detach the thermistor retainer [2].

- 2 screws [1]

[1]

F-9-50

3) Detach the fixing main thermistor [2].

- 1 connector [1]
F-9-48

9.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor

9.5.5.1 Before Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor
0018-0955

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.5.2 Before Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor

0018-0956

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.5.3 Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor

0001-1346

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-9-51

9.5.5.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Main

Thermistor
0001-8700

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
- Check to be sure that the thermistor cover [2] is fitted under the fixing main
thermistor [1].
- Check to be sure that the thermistor cover [2] is not mounted in the wrong
orientation. The cover is equipped with a protrusion to prevent wrong orientation.

1) Remove the screw [2], and detach the heat insulating sheet retainer [1];
then, detach the heat insulating sheet [3].
MEMO:
The following figure shows the back of the fixing assembly.

9-19

Chapter 9

F-9-54
F-9-52

- Check to be sure that the spring [1] of the thermistor retainer is found forcing the thermistor.
- Be sure to tighten the screw [A] and then the screw [B] of the thermistor
retainer in sequence.

2) Detach the fixing sub thermistor [2].

- 1 connector [1]
- 1 screw (12mm-long) [3]

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-9-53

F-9-55

9.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor

9.5.6.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Sub

Thermistor

9.5.6.1 Before Removing the Fixing Sub Thermistor

0018-0958

0001-8699

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

- Take care not to touch the surface [1] of the fixing sub thermistor.
- Take care not to deform the fixing sub thermistor.

9.5.6.2 Before Removing the Fixing Sub Thermistor

0018-0959

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.6.3 Removing the Fixing Sub Thermistor

0001-1353

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the screw [2], and detach the heat insulating sheet retainer [1];
then, detach the heat insulating sheet [3].
MEMO:
The following figure shows the back of the fixing assembly.

F-9-56

9.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch

9.5.7.1 Before Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch
0018-0966

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.7.2 Before Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch

0018-0967

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]

9-20

Chapter 9
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.7.3 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch

0001-1358

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the screw [2], and detach the heat insulating sheet retainer [1];
then, detach the heat insulating sheet [3].
MEMO:
The following figure shows the back of the fixing assembly.

F-9-59

- After tightening the fixing screw of the fixing thermal switch, perform the
following:
- Check to be sure that the surface of the fixing thermal switch [1] is level
in relation to the fixing roller. Be sure to use a pen light or the like to shine
the fixing thermal switch for this check.
- If not level, be sure to repeat the mounting work.

F-9-57

2) Detach the fixing thermal switch [2].

- 2 screws [1]

The 2 screws used to fit the fixing thermal switch in place are equipped with
a washer. Be careful not to lose the washer.
F-9-60

OK

NG

NG

NG

NG

F-9-61

9.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater

F-9-58

9.5.7.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal

Switch
0001-8698

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
- Check to be sure that the claw [1] of the fixing thermal switch is in the cutoff of the conducting plate [2].
- Be sure to tighten the fixing screw [A] and then the fixing screw [B] of the
thermal switch.

9.5.8.1 Before Removing the Fixing Main Heater and the

Fixing Sub Heater
0018-0972

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
4) Remove the fixing inlet guide. (page 9-24)[Removing the Fixing Inlet
Guide]

9.5.8.2 Before Removing the Fixing Main Heater and the

Fixing Sub Heater
0018-0973

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
5) Remove the fixing inlet guide. (page 9-24)[Removing the Fixing Inlet
Guide]

9-21

Chapter 9

9.5.8.3 Removing the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing

Sub Heater
0001-1334

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the terminal.
- 1 screw [1]
2) Detach the heater base (front) [3].
- 1 screw [2]

F-9-65

F-9-62

3) Detach the cover [2] and the bearing retainer (front) [3].
- 2 screws [1]

MEMO:
The fixing main heater is connected to the white cable, and it is located on
the pickup side.
The fixing sub heater is connected to the black cable, and it is located on the
delivery side.

9.5.8.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main

Cable
0006-6667

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Keep in mind that the fixing main cable [1] does not come off from the fixing
frame when handling it while assembling the fixing assembly.
If the fixing main cable comes off from the fixing frame, it may rub against
the duplexing feed guide of the right door assembly during operation.

F-9-63

4) Detach the fixing main/sub heater [5].

Be careful not to lose the washer for the screw described below:
- 2 screws [2] used to fix the heater retainer [1] in place
- 1 screw used to fix the round terminal [3]
- 2 screws [4] used to retain the heater in place

4-1) Detach the heater retainer [1].

- 2 screws [2]
4-2) Detach the round terminal [3].
- 1 screw
4-3) Remove the 2 screws [4] used to retain the heater in place.
[1]

F-9-64

F-9-66

9.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater

9.5.9.1 Before Removing the Fixing Heat Retention
Heater
0018-0979

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

9-22

Chapter 9

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.9.2 Before Removing the Fixing Heat Retention

Heater
0018-0980

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

2) Detach the jam removal dial [2].

- 2 E rings [1]

9.5.9.3 Removing the Fixing Heat Retention Heater

0001-1339

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the duplex feed guide [2] and the jam access guide [3] at the same
time.
- 1 screw [1]

F-9-68

3) Disconnect the fixing inlet sensor connector [1] and the fixing delivery
sensor connector [2]; then, pull out the faston [3] connected to the fixing
heat retention heater.

F-9-67

Points to Note When Routing the Cable (before re-mounting the

duplex/feed guide)
Be sure that the cable to the fixing heat retention heater (H3) is routed in the
path indicated in Figure B.
If routed in the path indicated in Figure A, it can become trapped by the
duplex/feed guide.

F-9-69

4) Detach the fixing inside cover [1].

- 3 screws [2]

F-9-70

5) Detach the round terminal [1] connected to the fixing heat retention heater.
- 1 screw

The screw used to fix the round terminal is equipped with a washer. Be
careful not to lose the washer.

9-23

Chapter 9
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.10.3 Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide

0001-1331

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the duplex feed guide [2] and the jam access guide [3] at the same
time.
- 1 screw [1]

F-9-71

6) Detach the fixing heat retention heater [4].

The screw used to fix the fixing heat retention heater is equipped with a
washer. Be careful not to lose the washer.

6-1) Detach the terminal.

- 2 screws [1]
6-2) Detach the heater base (front, rear) [3].
- 2 screws [2]

F-9-74

Points to Note When Routing the Cable (before re-mounting the

duplex/feed guide)
Be sure that the cable to the fixing heat retention heater (H3) is routed in the
path indicated in Figure B.
If routed in the path indicated in Figure A, it can become trapped by the
duplex/feed guide.

F-9-72

F-9-73

9.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide

9.5.10.1 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide
0018-0983

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.10.2 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide

0018-0984

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]

9-24

2) Detach the jam removal dial [2].

- 2 E rings [1]

Chapter 9

F-9-75

3) Disconnect the fixing inlet sensor connector [1] and the fixing delivery
sensor connector [2]; then, pull out the faston [3] connected to the fixing
heat retention heater.

[1]

F-9-76

4) Detach the fixing inside cover [1].

- 3 screws [2]

F-9-79

9.5.11 Fixing Delivery Guide

9.5.11.1 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Guide
0018-0988

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]
F-9-77

9.5.11.2 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Guide

5) Remove the fixing inlet guide [1].

0018-0989

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.11.3 Removing the Fixing Delivery Guide

0001-2263

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the fixing delivery guide [2].
- 1 screw [1]
F-9-78

9.5.10.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main

Cable
0006-6668

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Keep in mind that the fixing main cable [1] does not come off from the fixing
frame when handling it while assembling the fixing assembly.
If the fixing main cable comes off from the fixing frame, it may rub against
the duplexing feed guide of the right door assembly during operation.

9-25

Chapter 9

F-9-80

9.5.12 Fixing Inlet Sensor

9.5.12.1 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor
0018-1000

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.12.2 Before Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor

0018-1001

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

2) Detach the jam removal dial [2].

- 2 E rings [1]

9.5.12.3 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor

0001-1362

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the duplex feed guide [2] and the jam access guide [3] at the same
time.
- 1 screw [1]

F-9-82

3) Disconnect the fixing inlet sensor connector [1] and the fixing delivery
sensor connector [2]; then, pull out the faston [3] connected to the fixing
heat retention heater.

F-9-81

Points to Note When Routing the Cable (before re-mounting the

duplex/feed guide)
Be sure that the cable to the fixing heat retention heater (H3) is routed in the
path indicated in Figure B.
If routed in the path indicated in Figure A, it can become trapped by the
duplex/feed guide.

9-26

F-9-83

4) Detach the fixing inside cover [1].

- 3 screws [2]

Chapter 9

F-9-84

5) Detach the fixing inlet sensor [1] from the fixing inside cover.

[1]

F-9-85

9.5.12.4 Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Main

Cable
0006-6669

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Keep in mind that the fixing main cable [1] does not come off from the fixing
frame when handling it while assembling the fixing assembly.
If the fixing main cable comes off from the fixing frame, it may rub against
the duplexing feed guide of the right door assembly during operation.

F-9-86

9.5.13 Fixing Delivery Sensor

9.5.13.1 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor
0018-1004

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.13.2 Before Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor

0018-1005

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 9-13)[Removing Fixing Assembly]

9.5.13.3 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor

0001-1368

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the fixing delivery sensor [2].
- 1 connector [1]

9-27

Chapter 9

F-9-87

9-28

Chapter 10 Externals and Controls

Contents

Contents
10.1 Control Panel..............................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 LCD Processing ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.3 Adjusting the LCD Screen Contrast ........................................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.1.4 Control Panel CPU................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2 Counters .....................................................................................................................................................................10-1

10.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count ............................................................................................................................................... 10-3

10.3 Fans ............................................................................................................................................................................10-3

10.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-3
10.3.2 2-Speed Control ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.3.3 Sequence of Operations ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-4

10.4 Power Supply .............................................................................................................................................................10-4

10.4.1 Power Supply ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer...................................................................................................................................................10-4
10.4.1.2 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer...................................................................................................................................................10-5
10.4.1.3 Route of Power to the Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................................10-6
10.4.1.4 Timing of Supplying Power to the Reader Unit..........................................................................................................................................10-7
10.4.1.5 Routes of Power to various Options............................................................................................................................................................10-7

10.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................................. 10-8

10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB .................................................................................................................................10-8
10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB....................................................................................................................................10-8
10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the Options Power Supply PCB .......................................................................................................................................10-8
10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the Non-Interruptive Power Supply PCB .........................................................................................................................10-8

10.4.3 Protection Function .................................................................................................................................................................. 10-9

10.4.3.1 Protective Functions....................................................................................................................................................................................10-9

10.4.4 Backup Battery......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-9

10.4.4.1 Backup Battery............................................................................................................................................................................................10-9

10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-9

10.4.5.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................................................................................................10-9
10.4.5.2 Power Supply and Heater Control.............................................................................................................................................................10-10
10.4.5.3 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................................10-11
10.4.5.4 Power Supply and Heater Control.............................................................................................................................................................10-12
10.4.5.5 SNMP setup ..............................................................................................................................................................................................10-14

10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure...................................................................................................................................10-17

10.5.1 External Covers...................................................................................................................................................................... 10-17
10.5.1.1 Right Cover (Upper Rear) .........................................................................................................................................................................10-17
10.5.1.1.1 Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)................................................................................................................................................10-17
10.5.1.2 Right Cover (Lower Rear) ........................................................................................................................................................................10-17
10.5.1.2.1 Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear) ...............................................................................................................................................10-17
10.5.1.3 Right Cover (Lower Front) .......................................................................................................................................................................10-17
10.5.1.3.1 Detaching Right Cover (Lower Front) ..............................................................................................................................................10-17
10.5.1.4 Support Cover ...........................................................................................................................................................................................10-17
10.5.1.4.1 Detaching Support Cover ..................................................................................................................................................................10-17
10.5.1.5 Support Cover (Right)...............................................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.5.1.5.1 Detaching Support Cover (Right) .....................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.5.1.6 Upper Left Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.5.1.6.1 Detaching Upper Left Cover .............................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.5.1.7 Left Lower Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.5.1.7.1 Detaching Lower Left Cover.............................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.5.1.8 Left Rear Cover (Upper) ...........................................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.5.1.8.1 Detaching Rear Left Cover (Upper)..................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.5.1.9 Rear Cover ................................................................................................................................................................................................10-19

Contents

10.5.1.9.1 Detaching Rear Cover....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-19

10.5.1.10 Rear Right Cover .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-19
10.5.1.10.1 Detaching Rear Right Cover........................................................................................................................................................... 10-19
10.5.1.11 Toner Replacement Cover ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10-19
10.5.1.11.1 Removing Toner Container Retainer .............................................................................................................................................. 10-19
10.5.1.12 Reader Front Cover................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-19
10.5.1.12.1 Detaching Reader Front Cover ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-19
10.5.1.13 Reader Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-20
10.5.1.13.1 Detaching Reader Rear Cover ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.5.1.14 Delivery Cover........................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.5.1.14.1 Removing Delivery Tray ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.5.1.14.2 Detaching Delivery Tray Lower Cover .......................................................................................................................................... 10-21

10.5.2 Main Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................ 10-21

10.5.2.1 Before Removing Main Drive Assembly ................................................................................................................................................. 10-21
10.5.2.2 Removing Main Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................. 10-21

10.5.3 Option Power Supply Assembly............................................................................................................................................ 10-22

10.5.3.1 Before Removing Option Power Supply Assembly ................................................................................................................................. 10-22
10.5.3.2 Before Removing Option Power Supply Assembly ................................................................................................................................. 10-22
10.5.3.3 Removing Option Power Supply Assembly ............................................................................................................................................. 10-22

10.5.4 Controller Power Supply Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 10-22

10.5.4.1 Before Removing Controller Power Supply Unit..................................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.5.4.2 Before Removing Controller Power Supply Unit..................................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.5.4.3 Removing Controller Power Supply Unit................................................................................................................................................. 10-22

10.5.5 Printer Power Supply Unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-23

10.5.5.1 Before Removing Printer Power Supply Unit .......................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.5.5.2 Before Removing Printer Power Supply Unit .......................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.5.5.3 Removing Printer Power Supply Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-23

10.5.6 Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-23

10.5.6.1 Removing Control Panel........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-23

10.5.7 Control Panel LCD Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-24

10.5.7.1 Before Removing Control Panel LCD...................................................................................................................................................... 10-24
10.5.7.2 Removing Control Panel LCD.................................................................................................................................................................. 10-24

10.5.8 DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-24

10.5.8.1 Removing DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................. 10-24
10.5.8.2 When Replacing DC Controller PCB ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-25

10.5.9 All-Night Power Supply PCB................................................................................................................................................ 10-25

10.5.9.1 Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 10-25

10.5.10 Leakage Breaker .................................................................................................................................................................. 10-25

10.5.10.1 Removing Leakage Breaker.................................................................................................................................................................... 10-25

10.5.11 HVT PCB............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-26

10.5.11.1 Before Removing HVT PCB .................................................................................................................................................................. 10-26
10.5.11.2 Before Removing HVT PCB .................................................................................................................................................................. 10-26
10.5.11.3 Removing HVT PCB .............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-26
10.5.11.4 When Replacing HVT PCB .................................................................................................................................................................... 10-27

10.5.12 High-Voltage Sub PCB........................................................................................................................................................ 10-27

10.5.12.1 Before Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB............................................................................................................................................. 10-27
10.5.12.2 Before Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB............................................................................................................................................. 10-27
10.5.12.3 Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB......................................................................................................................................................... 10-27

10.5.13 Control Panel CPU PCB ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-27

10.5.13.1 Before Removing Control Panel CPU PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 10-27
10.5.13.2 Removing Control Panel CPU PCB ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-27

10.5.14 Control Panel Key Switch PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 10-27

10.5.14.1 Before Removing Control Panel KEY PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 10-27
10.5.14.2 Removing Control Panel KEY PCB ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-28

10.5.15 Control Panel Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 10-28

10.5.15.1 Before Removing Control Panel Inverter PCB....................................................................................................................................... 10-28
10.5.15.2 Removing Control Panel Inverter PCB .................................................................................................................................................. 10-28

10.5.16 Main Power Switch.............................................................................................................................................................. 10-28

10.5.16.1 Before Removing Main Power Switch ................................................................................................................................................... 10-28
10.5.16.2 Removing Main Power Switch ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-29

Contents

10.5.17 Front Cover Open/Closed Detecting Switch........................................................................................................................ 10-29

10.5.17.1 Before Removing Front Cover Switch....................................................................................................................................................10-29
10.5.17.2 Removing Front Cover Switch................................................................................................................................................................10-29

10.5.18 ITB Fan ................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-30

10.5.18.1 Before Removing ITB Duct Fan .............................................................................................................................................................10-30
10.5.18.2 Removing ITB Duct Fan .........................................................................................................................................................................10-30

10.5.19 Toner Intake Fan .................................................................................................................................................................. 10-30

10.5.19.1 Before Removing Toner Suction Fan .....................................................................................................................................................10-30
10.5.19.2 Removing Toner Suction Fan .................................................................................................................................................................10-30

10.5.20 Machine Heat Discharge Fan............................................................................................................................................... 10-31

10.5.20.1 Before Removing Heat Exhaust Fan.......................................................................................................................................................10-31
10.5.20.2 Before Removing Heat Exhaust Fan.......................................................................................................................................................10-31
10.5.20.3 Removing Heat Exhaust Fan...................................................................................................................................................................10-31
10.5.20.4 Routing Heat Exhaust Fan Harness.........................................................................................................................................................10-31

10.5.21 Toner Intake Fan Filter ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-31

10.5.21.1 Removing Toner Suction Fan Filter........................................................................................................................................................10-31

10.5.22 Motor of Main Drive Assembly........................................................................................................................................... 10-32

10.5.22.1 Before Removing Main Drive Motor......................................................................................................................................................10-32
10.5.22.2 Removing Main Drive Motor..................................................................................................................................................................10-32
10.5.22.3 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Motor .........................................................................................................................................10-32

10.5.23 Right Door ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-32

10.5.23.1 Detaching Right Door .............................................................................................................................................................................10-32
10.5.23.2 Before Opening Right Door ....................................................................................................................................................................10-33
10.5.23.3 Opening Right Door ................................................................................................................................................................................10-33

10.5.24 Cautions in Handling the Left Stay...................................................................................................................................... 10-34

10.5.24.1 Points to Note When Handling Left Stay................................................................................................................................................10-34

Chapter 10

10.1 Control Panel

10.1.1 Overview
0000-8876

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's control panel consists of the following PCBs, LCD, and touch panel, each offering the functions that follow:
- LCD display function
- contrast adjustment
- touch switch input
- hardware key input

Main controller PCB

J1212A,J1212B

J2117A,J2117B
touch panel

J1114

Control panel CPU PCB

J1112
J1113

J1110,J1111

Color LCD
J2137

J6891,J6892

Control panel
inverter PCB

Keypad PCB

Control panel
F-10-1

10.1.2 LCD Processing

0001-4625

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The CPU on the main controlled PCB sends data (display data) to the control panel CPU PCB as instructed by the program.
The data is sent through the control panel PCB to reach the color LCD.

10.1.3 Adjusting the LCD Screen Contrast

0001-4628

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine is equipped with a density adjustment volume (VR6801) on its keypad PCB for use by the user to adjust the contrast of the LCD screen.

10.1.4 Control Panel CPU

0001-4629

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Monitoring the Key Inputs
It communicates the keypad and function key inputs to the CPU on the main controller PCB.
- Monitoring the Touch Panel Input
It communicates the key inputs made on the touch panel to the CPU on the main controller PCB.
- Controlling the Buzzer Sound
- Controlling the Control Panel LED
Memo:
the color LCD is driven by the main controller, and the control panel CPU PCB serves to relay the drive signals.

10.2 Counters
10.2.1 Overview
0003-7582

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The machine is equipped with counters that indicate the counts of output according to types of printers. These counters are indicated in response to a press on the
Check key on the control panel, and they operate as follows (as set at time of shipment from the factory):

10-1

Chapter 10
T-10-1
Model

Counter 1

Counter 2

Counter 3

Counter 4

Counter 5

100V
*1
***

total 1

total
(black-andwhite 1)

copy
(full color +
mono; 1)

print
(full color +
mono; 1)

not indicated** not indicated**

101

108

232

324

000

000

total 2

copy
(full color +
mono color; 2)

total A
(full color +
mono color; 2)

copy
(black-andwhite 2)

total A
(black-andwhite 2)

not indicated**

102

231

148

222

133

000

total 1

total
(black-andwhite 1)

copy + print
(full color,
large)

copy + print
(full color,
small)

total
not indicated **
(mono color 1)

101

108

401

402

118

000

total 1

total
(black-andwhite 1)

copy
(full color +
mono color,
large)

copy
(full color +
mono color,
small)

print
(full color+
mono color,
large)

print
(full color +
mono color,
small)

101

108

229

230

321

322

total 1

total
(black-andwhite 1)

copy + print
(full color,
large)

copy + print
(full color,
small)

total
total 1
(mono color 1) (duplex)

101

108

401

402

118

114

total 1

total
(black-andwhite 1)

copy
(full color +
mono color,
large)

copy
(full color +
mono color,
small)

print
(full color +
mono color,
large)

print
(full color +
mono color,
small)

101

108

229

230

321

322

total
(full color +
mono color,
large)

total
(full color +
mono color,
small)

total
(black-andwhite, large)

total
(black-andwhite, small)

scan
(total 1)

122

123

112

113

501

100V
*1
****

120V
TW
*2

120V
UL
*3

230V
*4

240V
CA
*5

230V
total 1
AMS@
*6

101

Counter 6

<Guide to Notations>
large: large-size paper (longer than 364 mm in feed direction; count increased by 1).
small: small-size paper (364 mm in feed length or shorter).
total: all (C+P; count increased by 1).
duplex: duplexing (in auto duplexing; count increased by 1).
- The 3-digit number in the counter column indicates the setting of the following service mode item: COPIER >OPTION >USER > COUNTER1 to 6
- counters 2 through 6 may be changed using the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>USER.
*1: F14-3019/3011/3029/3012/3049/3014/3059/3015
*2: F14-3001
*3: F14-3031
*4: F14-3041/3060/3070/3044 /3048/3078
*5: F14-3061/3068
*6: F14-3091/3094
**: by default, not indicated; may be changed in service mode.
***: if '0' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW.
****: if '1' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW.

10-2

Chapter 10

10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count

0001-6146

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine increases the count depending on the selected mode (single-sided, double-sided), delivery location, and the type of accessory connected to it.
1. Single-Sided Print, 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print
In the case of a single-sided print or the 2nd side of a double-sided print, the machine increase the count when the trailing edge of paper is discharged outside
the machine, as indicated by the output of the following sensor:
T-10-2
Condition
w/o finisher

Delivery location

sensor

to tray 1

delivery sensor (PS14)

to tray 2

No. 2 delivery sensor (PS1A)

to tray 3

No. 3 delivery sensor (PS5A)

w/ finisher

delivery sensor of finisher

2. 1st Side of a Double-Sided Print

The machine increases the count when the duplex feed sensor (PS17) goes on, assuming that the printing on the 1st side is over.

10.3 Fans
10.3.1 Overview
0001-4632

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine is equipped with the following fans arranged as shown in the diagram:
T-10-3
Notation

Name

Filter

2-speed
control

Remarks

FM1

heat exhaust fan (rear)

absent

present

cools the fixing assembly.

FM2

heat exhaust fan (front)

absent

present

cools the fixing assembly.

FM3

ITB fan

present

present

cools the ITB (intermediate

transfer belt).

FM4

controller cooling fan

absent

absent

cools the controller.

FM5

toner collecting fan

present

absent

collects toner found astray inside

the machine.

FM4
FM5

FM1
FM3
FM2

F-10-2

10.3.2 2-Speed Control

0001-4633

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

10-3

Chapter 10

Some of the fans used in the machine are controlled for 2 different speeds (T07-301-01). These fans rotate at different speeds in response to the switchover of voltage
by the voltage switching circuit.

DC controller PCB

24V

13V
24V or 13V

Full-speed
signal

CPU

Voltage
Half-speed
switching circuit

Clock signal

signal

Fan

F-10-3

10.3.3 Sequence of Operations

0001-4634

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Main power
switch
ON
Warm-up

Control panel Main power

power switch
switch
OFF
OFF

Print request
signal
Standby

Standby

Print

Low-power
mode

Power save
mode

Sleep mode

Heat exhaust fan

(rear) (FM1)
Heat exhaust fan
(front) (FM2)
ITB fan
(FM3)
Controller fan
(FM4)
Toner colleting fan
(FM5)
half-speed

full-speed

F-10-4

10.4 Power Supply

10.4.1 Power Supply
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer
0001-4682

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The machine's DC power is supplied by the printer power supply PCB. The DC power to its accessories is supplied by the accessories power supply PCB.
The functions of the individual power supply PCBs and distribution of power is as follows:
T-10-4
Name
Printer power supply PCB

Description

Remarks

generates DC power (24V, 13V); supplies DC power to the

controller power supply PCB and the cassette pedestal.

Accessories power supply PCB supplies DC power to the side paper deck, buffer path, and
finisher.

Main switch

turns on and off AC power to the AC driver PCB.

Cover switch

turns on and off 24 VU1/13 VA to the DC controller PCB.

Leakage breaker

cuts power in the event of an error.

Environment heater switch

PCB

turns on and off power to the cassette heater, reader heater, and 100/230V
deck heater.
accessory

High-voltage power supply

PCB

generates various high-voltage power.

AC driver PCB

supplies AC power to the printer power supply PCB; drives the

fixing system.

Controller power supply PCB

supplies DC power to the inner 2-way tray, fax board,

controller, DC controller PCB, and fixing heat retention heater
(H3).
generates DC power (13V, 5V, 3.3V).

10-4

Chapter 10

Reader heater (H5)

Heater switch
SW5

Reader heater (H6)

DADF
-L1

High-voltage
power supply PCB

DC controller PCB

Heater
switch PCB

Deck heater (H7)

Pickup
heater
mounting
kit

Reader
unit

24VU1

24VU2

13VA

13VA

5VA

3VA

Printer power supply

24VU2

Cassette pedestal
heater (H1C)

13VA2

Main switch
SW1

24VU2

Cassette heater (H4)

ELCB 1/2

13V

Leakage breaker

Front
cover
opne/ closed
swish
SW3

only 100V
Arrestor
PCB
Fixing main heater (H1)
AC drive PCB

Printer power
supply PCB

Fixing sub heater (H2)

24VU1
24VU2
13VA1
13VA2

Thermal switch (TP1)

13VB

To Finisher-Q1/Q2

To Inner 2-Way Tray-C1

(by way of Cassette

Feeding Unit-Y1)
To Side Paper Deck-Q1
To Buffer Path-C1
To Finisher-P1

Controller power supply PCB

13VA

To Cassette 24VU2
Feeding Unit-Y1
Fixing DC heater (H3)

24VA

Accessories
power supply
PCB

24VH

Super G3
Fax Board-N1

5VA

12VA

3VB

3VA

13VB

3VA: non-all night

3VB: all night

13VB

13VA1: non-all
5VA1: non-all
night
night
13VA2: non-all
night
13VB: all night
13VA: non-all night

13VA

24VU1: non-all
night
24VU2: non-all
night
24VA: non-all
night

13VA2

13VA2

24VU2

To Finisher-Q1/Q2
To Finisher-P1

Controller PCB

F-10-5

10.4.1.2 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer

0009-7443

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's DC power is supplied by the printer power supply PCB. The DC power to its accessories is supplied by the accessories power supply PCB.
The functions of the individual power supply PCBs and distribution of power is as follows:
T-10-5
Name
Printer power supply PCB

Description

Remarks

generates DC power (24V, 13V); supplies DC power to the

controller power supply PCB and the cassette pedestal.

Accessories power supply PCB supplies DC power to the side paper deck, buffer path, and
finisher.

Main switch

turns on and off AC power to the AC driver PCB.

Cover switch

turns on and off 24 VU1/13 VA to the DC controller PCB.

Leakage breaker

cuts power in the event of an error.

Environment heater switch

PCB

turns on and off power to the cassette heater, reader heater, and 100/230V
deck heater.
accessory

High-voltage power supply

PCB

generates various high-voltage power.

AC driver PCB

supplies AC power to the printer power supply PCB; drives the

fixing system.

Controller power supply PCB

supplies DC power to the inner 2-way tray, fax board,

controller, DC controller PCB, and fixing heat retention heater
(H3).
generates DC power (13V, 5V, 3.3V).

All-night power supply PCB

generates and supplies all-night power (3VB).

10-5

Chapter 10

100/230V Reader heater (H5)

Heater switch
SW5

Reader heater (H6)

DADF
-L1

High-voltage
power supply PCB

24VU2

Cassette heater (H4)

ELCB 1/2

13V

Leakage breaker

DC controller PCB

Heater
switch PCB

Deck heater (H7)

Pickup
heater
mounting
kit

Front
cover
opne/ closed
swish
SW3

24VU1

24VU2

13VA

13VA

5VA

3VA

Printer power supply

24VU2

Cassette pedestal
heater (H1C)

13VA2

Main switch
SW1

Reader
unit

only 100V
Arrestor
PCB
Fixing main heater (H1)
AC drive PCB

Printer power
supply PCB

Fixing sub heater (H2)

24VU1
24VU2
13VA1
13VA2

Thermal switch (TP1)

3VB

13VB

13VA

To Cassette 24VU2
Feeding Unit-Y2
Fixing DC heater (H3)
24VH

Super G3
Fax Board-S1

5VA

3VB

3VB

12VA

3VA: non-all night

3VB: all night

13VB

13VA1: non-all
5VA1: non-all
night
night
13VA2: non-all
night
13VB: all night
13VA: non-all night

3VA

3VB

24VU1: non-all
night
24VU2: non-all
night
24VA: non-all
night

13VB

13VA2
13VA

13VA2

To Inner 2-Way Tray-C1

Controller power supply PCB

24VU2

To Finisher-Q3/Q4
To Finisher-P1

24VA

All-night power
supply PCB

(by way of Cassette

Feeding Unit-Y1)
To Side Paper Deck-Q1
To Buffer Path-C1
To Finisher-P1

Accessories power
supply PCB

To Finisher-Q3/Q4

Controller PCB

F-10-6

10.4.1.3 Route of Power to the Reader Unit

0001-4686

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The reader controller PCB uses the 24/13 VDC from the printer unit to generate the following DC voltages:
- 16 VDC (for scanning lamp)
- 12 VDC (for CCD)
- 5 VDC (for sensor)
- 3.3 VDC (for IC)

DC13V
DC12V/5V

To DF

AC100V

To printer unit
(scanner PCB)
DC24V DC13V
From printer unit
/5 03
04

DC16V

12
J5

J5
05

00
J5

10

J5

J5

01

DC24V

J5
02

J5

To DF

01

J5

J5

AC100V

01

Reader controller PCB

Inverter PCB
DC24V
DC13V
DC13V
DC13V

DC16V
DC12V
DC5V
DC3.3V
F-10-7

10-6

Chapter 10

10.4.1.4 Timing of Supplying Power to the Reader Unit

0001-4689

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The reader unit is supplied with 24/13 VDC by the printer unit at the following timing:

Sleep mode
Power save mode
(-50%)
Power save mode
(no return time; -10%, -25%)
Standby

Main power switch turned on

Power plug connected
to power outlet

PSTBY

F-10-8

10.4.1.5 Routes of Power to various Options

0001-4693

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The power from the printer unit to the accessories is routed as follows:
[2]

[A]

[B]
[1]
[3]

[C]

[9]

[4]

[5]
[E]

[8]

[7]

[6]

[D]

F-10-9

[1] Reader unit power cable

[2] DADF I/F cable
[3] DDIS cable
[4] Finisher-Q1/Saddle /Finisher-Q2 I/F cable
[5] Pickup heater cable
[6] Side deck heater cable
[7] Side deck I/F cable
[8] Cassette pedestal I/F cable
[9] AC input
[A] DADF-L1
[B] Reader unit
[C] Printer unit

10-7

Chapter 10
[D] Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1
[E] Paper Deck-Q1

10.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB

10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB
0001-4716

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The ratings and the power tolerances of the printer power supply PCB are as follows:
T-10-6
Output name

13VA

13VB

24VU1

24VU2

all-night/non-all night

non-all night

all night

non-all night

rated output

13.2 V

13.2 V

24 V

power supply tolerance

3%

3%

5%

+3%, -5% (between 4.7

A and 5.2 A)

+8%, -6% (between 8 A and 10 A)

+8%, -6% between 0 A and 0.1 A)

10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB

0001-4719

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The ratings and the power tolerances of the controller power supply PCB are as follows:
T-10-7
Output name

3VA

3VB

5VA

12VA

24VH

all night/non-all
night

non-all night

all night

non-all night

non-all night

non-all night

rated output

3.4V

3.4V

5.1V

12V

24V

power supply
tolerance

4%

4%

3%

5%

7%

+5%, -6%
(between 2A and
2.5A)

10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the Options Power Supply PCB

0001-4721

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The ratings and the power tolerances of the accessories power supply PCB are as follows:
T-10-8
Output name

24VA

all all/non-all night

non-all night

rated output

24V

power tolerances

5%
+8%, -6% (between 6.5A and 12A)
+8%, -6% (between 0A and 0.1A)

10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the Non-Interruptive Power Supply PCB

0009-8508

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following shows the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the non-interruptive power supply PCB:

10-8

Chapter 10
T-10-9

Output name

3VB

Non-interruptive/regular

Non-interruptive

Rated output

3.4V

Power supply tolerance

3%

10.4.3 Protection Function

10.4.3.1 Protective Functions
0001-4742

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's DC power supply PCB and those of its accessories are equipped with protective functions against excess current and voltage, which will automatically cut off the output voltage in response to an error power condition (caused, for example, by a short-circuit on a load).
If any of these protective mechanism has gone on, turn off the main power switch of the printer unit, and remove the cause of activation; then, leave the machine
alone for about 3 min, and turn its power back on to reset it.

10.4.4 Backup Battery

10.4.4.1 Backup Battery
0001-4726

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The SRAM PCB on the machine's controller PCB and the DC controller PCB are equipped with a lithium battery (1 pc. each) to serve as a source of power, backing
up various data in the even of power failure.
T-10-10

SRAM PCB

manganese dioxide lithium battery (3 V, 1000 mAh)

DC controller PCB

lithium battery (3 V, 560 mAh)

Life

Both types of batteries are expected to last for 10 yr or more (with the
power plug disconnected).

Replacement

The batteries cannot be replaced on their own in the field.

Be sure to exercise care whenever you have to replace the battery. In certain cases, it may explode.
Do not use a battery which is not of a type specifically indicated (same name, or equivalent).
Dispose of any used battery according to the instructions of its manufacturer.

10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function

10.4.5.1 Overview
0001-4743

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1. Standby Mode
In standby mode, the machine is more or less ready to start a job, i.e., all its components are supplied with power.
2. Power Save Mode
The control mechanism in which the machine's power status is changed (including power save, low power, sleep states) are generically referred to as power save
mode. The machine automatically moves through the following states: power save>low power>sleep.
T-10-11
Power save
mode

Shift

The machine moves through these different states in response to a press on the
Save Power key on the control panel.

Description

The machine saves power according to the settings made in Additional

Function (-10%, -25%, -50%). For a saving by -10% or -25%, the output of the
fixing heat retention the heater (H3) is decreased; or its output is turned off.
For a saving by -50%, the fixing heat retention heater (H3) is turned off and,
at the same time, the power to the accessories (except the fax unit) is turned
off.

10-9

Chapter 10

T-10-12
Low power
shift
mode (at time of
shipment)
Description

The machine moves through different states in response to the passage of

times programmed in advance.
The machine performs its power save functions in keeping with the
requirements of the Energy Star standards. It controls the fixing
temperature to 175 deg C. The machine uses the same output states as it
uses for a saving by -50%, but uses different fixing AC heater control
temperatures (H1/H2).

T-10-13

Sleep
mode

Shift

The machine moves through different sates in response to the passage of times
selected in Additional Function or in response to a press on the control panel
software power switch.

Description

In sleep mode 1, the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB are
supplied with power. In sleep mode 2, the main controller PCB is supplied with
power. In both sleep modes 1 and 2, the power to the fixing AC heater is off.

3. AC Off Mode
The machine remains in this sate when its main power switch remains off. All its power and heater control mechanisms also remain off.

10.4.5.2 Power Supply and Heater Control

0001-4754

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The machine's power supply conditions and its fixing heater states are as follows:
- Standby Mode, Power State Mode (-105, -25%, -50%)
T-10-14
Standby
mode

reader unit

DC controller
PCB

controller PCB

10-10

Power save mode

-10%

-25%

-50%

remote 1

ON

ON

ON

ON

remote 2

ON

ON

ON

OFF

non-all night

13VA2

ON

ON

ON

OFF

non-all night

24VU2

ON

ON

ON

OFF

non-all night

3VA

ON

ON

ON

ON

non-all night

5VA

ON

ON

ON

ON

non-all night

13VA1

ON

ON

ON

ON

non-all night

24VU1

ON

ON

ON

OFF

non-all night

24VU2

ON

ON

ON

OFF

non-all night

3VA

ON

ON

ON

ON

all night

3VB

ON

ON

ON

ON

non-all night

5VA

ON

ON

ON

ON

all night

13VB

ON

ON

ON

ON

non-all night

12VA

ON

ON

ON

ON

Chapter 10

fax

Standby
mode

Power save mode

non-all night

13VA1

ON

ON

ON

ON

all night

13VB

ON

ON

ON

ON

non-all night

24VU2

ON

ON

ON

OFF

fixing AC heater
(H1/H2) control

190 deg C

190 deg C

190 deg C

166 deg C

fixing heat
retention heater
(H3) control

repeats
remaining on
for 4.2 sec and
off for 1.6 sec

repeats
OFF
remaining on
for 2.8 sec and
off for 2.3 sec

OFF

- Low Power Mode, Sleep Mode, AC Off Mode

T-10-15
Low power Sleep mode
mode

AC off mode

remote 1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

remote 2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

non-all night

13VA2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

non-all night

24VU2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

non-all night

3VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

5VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

13VA1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

24VU1

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

non-all night

24VU2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

non-all night

3VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

all night

3VB

ON

ON

ON

OFF

non-all night

5VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

all night

13VB

ON

ON

ON

OFF

non-all night

12VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-all night

13VA1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

all night

13VB

ON

ON

ON

OFF

non-all night

24VU2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

fixing AC heater
(H1/H2) control

175 deg C

OFF

OFF

OFF

fixing heat retention

heater (H3) control

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

reader unit

DC controller PCB

controller PCB

fax

10.4.5.3 Overview
0009-8512

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

10-11

Chapter 10
1. Standby Mode
In standby mode, the device is operating or is ready to operate, and all its power supplies are available.
2. Power Save Mode
In power save mode, the power state of the device is varied; the term "power save mode" is generic referring to the following: power save, low power, and sleep.
The state changes automatically in the following direction: power save -> low power -> sleep.
T-10-16
Power
Shift
save mode

Description

A shift is made in response to a press on the Power Save key on the control panel.

The device saves on power in keeping with the setting (-10%, -25%, -50%) selected
in user mode. If -10% or -25% has been selected, the output of the fixing heat
retention heater (H3) is reduced or turned off. If -50% is selected, on the other hand,
the fixing heat retention heat (H3) is turned off and, in addition, all power supplies
to accessories except the fax unit are turned off.

T-10-17
Low power
mode (factory
default)

Shift

A shift is made at the end of an auto low power mode shift period specified in
user mode.

Description

The device saves on power as required by the Energy Star regulations. The
fixing temperature is controlled to 175 deg C. All outputs are the same as when
-50% has been selected, with the fixing AC heater controlled to a different
temperature level (H1/H2).

T-10-18

Sleep
mode

Shift

A shift is made at the end of an auto sleep shift period specified in user mode, or in
response to a press on the control panel software power switch.

Description

In sleep mode 1, the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB remain supplied
with power. In sleep mode 2, the main controller PCB remains supplied with power.
In both sleep mode 1 and 2, the fixing AC heater is deprived of power.

3. AC Off Mode
In AC off mode, the state of the device is the same as when its main power switch is turned off, i.e., all power supplies and heater mechanisms are off.

10.4.5.4 Power Supply and Heater Control

0009-8513

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following shows how the various systems are supplied with power and how the fixing heater is controlled in relation to individual modes:
- Standby Mode/Power Save Mode (-10%, -25%, -50%)
T-10-19
Standby

10-12

Power save
-10%

-25%

-50%

Remote 1

ON

ON

ON

ON

Remove 2

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Chapter 10
Reader unit

regular

13VA2

ON

ON

ON

OFF

regular

24VU2

ON

ON

ON

OFF

regular

3VA

ON

ON

ON

ON

regular

5VA

ON

ON

ON

ON

regular

13VA1

ON

ON

ON

ON

regular

24VU1

ON

ON

ON

OFF

regular

24VU2

ON

ON

ON

OFF

regular

3VA

ON

ON

ON

ON

noninterruptive

3VB

ON

ON

ON

ON

regular

5VA

ON

ON

ON

ON

noninterruptive

13VB

ON

ON

ON

ON

regular

12VA

ON

ON

ON

ON

regular

13VA1

ON

ON

ON

ON

noninterruptive

13VB

ON

ON

ON

ON

regular

24VU2

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Fixing AC heater

190 deg C

190 deg C

190 deg C

166 deg C

Fixing heat
retention heater
(H3) control

repeats ON for repeats ON for OFF

4.2 and OFF for 2.8 sec and OFF
1.6 sec
for 2.3 sec

DC controller
PCB

Controller PCB

Fax unit

OFF

- Low Power Mode, Sleep Mode, AC Off Mode

T-10-20

Reader unit

DC controller PCB

Low
power

Sleep

AC off

Remote 1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Remote 2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

regular

13VA2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

regular

24VU2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

regular

3VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

regular

5VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

regular

13VA1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

regular

24VU1

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

regular

24VU2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

10-13

Chapter 10
Low
power

Sleep

AC off

regular

3VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-interruptive

3VB

ON

ON

ON

OFF

regular

5VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-interruptive

13VB

ON

ON

ON

OFF

regular

12VA

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-interruptive

3VB

ON

ON

ON

OFF

regular

13VA1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

non-interruptive

13VB

ON

ON

ON

OFF

regular

24VU2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Fixing AC heater (H1/

H2) control

175 deg C

OFF

OFF

OFF

Fixing heat retention

heater (H3) control

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Controller PCB

Fax

10.4.5.5 SNMP setup

0012-5776

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

When the machine is used as a Windows printer, enabling 'Use SNMP' causes the operating system to collect machine status information at specific intervals, preventing the machine from starting a sleep state.
To avoid the situation, disable the setting (Windows' printer properties).
-Disabling 'Use SNMP'
1) Select 'Configure Port' on the Ports screen (printer properties).

10-14

Chapter 10

F-10-10

2) Remove the check mark from 'SNMP Status Enabled'.

10-15

Chapter 10

F-10-11

10-16

Chapter 10

10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure

10.5.1 External Covers
10.5.1.1 Right Cover (Upper Rear)
10.5.1.1.1 Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)
0017-6794

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Disconnect the power cable [1] from the printer unit.
2) Detach the right cover (upper rear) [3].
- 4 screws [2]

[4]
[3]

[2]

[1]

[1]
F-10-13

10.5.1.3 Right Cover (Lower Front)

10.5.1.3.1 Detaching Right Cover (Lower Front)
0017-6790

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the right door [1] of the pedestal (when 2-Cassette Pedestal Y1 is
installed).
2) Open the lower right cover [2].
3) Detach the right cover (lower front) [3].
- 2 screws

[2]
[3]
F-10-12

Points to note when attaching right cover (upper rear; when Inner
2-Way Tray C1, Finisher P1/Q1 or Saddle Finisher Q2 is installed)
Do not trap the cable [1] by the cutoff [2] on the right cover (upper rear).

[2]
[3]

[1]

F-10-14

10.5.1.4 Support Cover

10.5.1.2 Right Cover (Lower Rear)

10.5.1.4.1 Detaching Support Cover

10.5.1.2.1 Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)

0017-6787
0017-6791

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the right door [1] of the pedestal (when 2-Cassette Pedestal Y1 is
installed).
2) Open the lower right cover [2].
3) Detach the right cover (lower rear) [3].
- 2 screws [4]

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
2) Detach the support cover [2].
- 1 screw [1]

10-17

Chapter 10
C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Disconnect the lattice connector from the finisher (when Finisher Q1 or
Saddle Finisher Q2 is installed).
Or detach the lattice connector cover.
MEMO:
The lattice connector may not be attached depending on specifications of the
machine.

2) Remove the cassette 1 and 2 [1].

3) Detach the lower left cover [3].
- 5 screws [2] (4 screws when the lattice connector is not attached)

F-10-15

10.5.1.5 Support Cover (Right)

[3]

10.5.1.5.1 Detaching Support Cover (Right)

0017-6789

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the right door.
2) Open the front cover.
3) Detach the support cover (right) [2].
- 3 screws [1]
[1]

[2]
F-10-18

10.5.1.8 Left Rear Cover (Upper)

10.5.1.8.1 Detaching Rear Left Cover (Upper)
0017-6801

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear left cover (upper) [2].
- 3 screws [1]

Be careful not to break the claw on the side of the cover.

F-10-16

10.5.1.6 Upper Left Cover

10.5.1.6.1 Detaching Upper Left Cover
0017-6798

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the upper left cover [2].
- 4 screws [1]

[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-17

10.5.1.7 Left Lower Cover

10.5.1.7.1 Detaching Lower Left Cover

F-10-19
0017-6799

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

10-18

Chapter 10

10.5.1.9 Rear Cover

- 9 screws [2]

10.5.1.9.1 Detaching Rear Cover

[2]

0017-6796

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
[1]

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the reader communication cable.

2) Free the reader communication cable [2] from the wire saddle [3].
[1]

[2]

[2]

F-10-23

10.5.1.11 Toner Replacement Cover

10.5.1.11.1 Removing Toner Container Retainer
0017-6795

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
[2]

[3]

1) Open the front cover.

2) Open the toner cartridge access cover [1].

[1]

F-10-20

3) Detach the rear cover [1] and the rear right cover [2] at a time.
- 9 screws [3]

[3]

[2]
[3]

[3]

F-10-24

3) Remove the toner container retainer [2].

- 1 TP screw [1]
[3]

[3]

[1]

F-10-21

10.5.1.10 Rear Right Cover

10.5.1.10.1 Detaching Rear Right Cover
0017-6797

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the reader communication cable.
[1]

F-10-25

10.5.1.12 Reader Front Cover

10.5.1.12.1 Detaching Reader Front Cover
0017-6830

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the copyboard cover (ADF).
2) Remove the copyboard glass retainer (right) [2].
- 2 screws [1]

[1]

F-10-22

2) Detach the rear right cover [1].

10-19

Chapter 10

F-10-29

3) Detach the reader rear cover [2].

- 4 screws [1]

F-10-26

3) Remove the copyboard glass retainer (left) [2].

- 2 screws [1]

F-10-30

10.5.1.14 Delivery Cover

10.5.1.14.1 Removing Delivery Tray
F-10-27

0017-6783

4) Detach the reader front cover [2].

- 2 screws [1]

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the delivery tray [2].
- 2 screws [1] (loosen them)

F-10-28

10.5.1.13 Reader Rear Cover

10.5.1.13.1 Detaching Reader Rear Cover
F-10-31
0017-6825

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Open the copyboard cover (ADF).
2) Disconnect the reader communication cable [1] and the ADF communication cable [2] (only when the ADF is installed).

10-20

Points to note when attaching

Attach the delivery tray [1] so as to cover the ribs [2] of the delivery tray
lower cover.

Chapter 10

10.5.1.14.2 Detaching Delivery Tray Lower Cover

F-10-34
0017-6785

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

5) Remove the ITB cleaner blade cam [1].

- 1 claw [2]

1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]

2) Open the toner cartridge access cover [1].

[2]

[1]
F-10-35

Works performed on the rear side:

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Remove the all-night power supply PCB (only for iR3170/2570 series).
(page 10-25)[Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB]
3) Remove the DC controller PCB (with the base). (page 10-24)[Removing
DC Controller PCB]
4) Remove the controller box. (page 4-43)[Removing Controller Box]
5) Remove the optional power supply assembly. (page 10-22)[Removing
Option Power Supply Assembly]
6) Remove the high-voltage sub-PCB. (page 10-27)[Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB]
7) Remove the controller power supply unit. (page 10-22)[Removing Controller Power Supply Unit]
8) Remove the printer power supply unit. (page 10-23)[Removing Printer
Power Supply Unit]
9) Remove the HVT PCB. (page 10-26)[Removing HVT PCB]

F-10-32

3) Detach the delivery tray lower cover [1].

- 1 screw [2]

10.5.2.2 Removing Main Drive Assembly

0012-2493

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
F-10-33

10.5.2 Main Drive Assembly

10.5.2.1 Before Removing Main Drive Assembly
0012-2490

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1) Disconnect all connectors shown in the shadowed area in the figure below.
2) Free all cables from wire saddles shown in the shadowed area in the figure
below.
3) Remove the high-voltage contact board [2] from the member [3] in the direction of the arrow.
4) Remove the main drive assembly [1].
- 6 screws [4]

Works performed on the front side:

1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
2) Detach the delivery tray lower cover. (page 10-21)[Detaching Delivery
Tray Lower Cover]
3) Remove the ITB waste toner unit. (page 7-43)[Removing ITB Waste
Toner Unit]
4) Remove the rotary protection plate [2].
- 1 screw [1]

10-21

Chapter 10

[4]

[1]

F-10-38

10.5.4 Controller Power Supply Unit

[3]

10.5.4.1 Before Removing Controller Power Supply Unit

[4]

0017-8787

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[2]

1) Detach the rear right cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Right Cover]

10.5.4.2 Before Removing Controller Power Supply Unit

0017-6373

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
F-10-36

10.5.3 Option Power Supply Assembly

1) Detach the rear right cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Right Cover]
2) Remove the all-night power supply PCB (only for iR3170/2570 series).
(page 10-25)[Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB]

10.5.3.1 Before Removing Option Power Supply

Assembly

10.5.4.3 Removing Controller Power Supply Unit

0001-1452
0017-8786

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the controller power supply cover [1] in the upward direction.
- 6 screws [2]

10.5.3.2 Before Removing Option Power Supply

Assembly
0017-6370

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Remove the all-night power supply PCB (only for iR3170/2570 series).
(page 10-25)[Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB]

10.5.3.3 Removing Option Power Supply Assembly

0001-2579

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Disconnect the connector J640 [1].
2) Free the cable from the edge saddle [2].

F-10-39

2) Remove the controller power supply unit [1].

- 15 connectors
- 5 wire saddles
- 4 screws [2]

F-10-37

3) Remove the option power supply assembly [3].

- 4 TP screws (M3x6) [1]
- 6 connectors [2]

10-22

Chapter 10

F-10-42
F-10-40

10.5.6 Control Panel

10.5.5 Printer Power Supply Unit

10.5.6.1 Removing Control Panel

0001-1469

10.5.5.1 Before Removing Printer Power Supply Unit

0017-8788

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Remove the controller box. (page 4-43)[Removing Controller Box]
3) Remove the option power supply assembly. (page 10-22)[Removing
Option Power Supply Assembly]
4) Remove the controller power supply unit. (page 10-22)[Removing Controller Power Supply Unit]
5) Detach the lower left cover. (page 10-18)[Detaching Lower Left Cover]

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the support cover (right). (page 10-18)[Detaching Support Cover (Right)]
2) Disconnect the connector [1] of the control panel cable and free the cable
from the wire saddle [2].

10.5.5.2 Before Removing Printer Power Supply Unit

0017-6376

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Remove the all-night power supply PCB (only for iR3170/2570 series).
(page 10-25)[Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB]
3) Remove the controller box. (page 4-43)[Removing Controller Box]
4) Remove the option power supply assembly. (page 10-22)[Removing
Option Power Supply Assembly]
5) Remove the controller power supply unit. (page 10-22)[Removing Controller Power Supply Unit]
6) Detach the lower left cover. (page 10-18)[Detaching Lower Left Cover]
F-10-43

10.5.5.3 Removing Printer Power Supply Unit

3) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the right side of the control panel.
0001-1433

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the HVT cover [1].
- 5 screws
- 8 clamps

F-10-44

4) Detach the screw cover [1] from the left side of the control panel and remove the screw.

F-10-41

2) Disconnect the lattice connector [1] from the cassette pedestal.

- 1 screw
3) Disconnect the lattice connector [2] from the finisher.
- 1 screw
MEMO:
Depending on specifications of a machine, the lattice connector is not
connected to the finisher.

4) Remove the printer power supply unit [3].

- 3 connectors
- 4 screws

10-23

Chapter 10

F-10-45

5) Shift the control panel [1] to the right and remove it to the forward direction.

F-10-48

4) Remove the control panel inner frame [1].

- 1 TP screw [2]
- 11 self-tapping screws [3]

F-10-46

10.5.7 Control Panel LCD Unit

10.5.7.1 Before Removing Control Panel LCD

F-10-49
0017-6377

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

5) Remove the control panel LCD [1].

- 2 self-tapping screws [2]

1) Detach the support cover (right). (page 10-18)[Detaching Support Cover (Right)]
2) Remove the control panel. (page 10-23)[Removing Control Panel]
3) Detach the control panel lower cover [1].
- 4 TP screws [2]

F-10-50

10.5.8 DC Controller PCB

10.5.8.1 Removing DC Controller PCB

F-10-47

0001-1491

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

10.5.7.2 Removing Control Panel LCD

0001-1484

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the cable used between the control panel PCB and the control panel key switch PCB, and free the cable from the
3 wire saddles [2].
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [3] used between the control panel PCB and
the control panel LCD.

Be sure to remove the stoppers in the direction of the arrow. The 2 stoppers
are moved to the different directions, respectively.

3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [4] of the control panel inverter PCB.

10-24

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Disconnect all connectors of the DC controller PCB.
3) Remove the 8 TP screws [1] from the DC controller PCB base.
4) Shift the DC controller PCB with the base to the left, and disconnect the
connector [2] from the main controller PCB (main).

Chapter 10
9) Execute service mode for the drum film thickness level setting.
COPIERADJUSTHV-PRIDRM-CHK

10.5.9 All-Night Power Supply PCB

10.5.9.1 Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB
0010-1297

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] of the all-night power supply PCB.
3) Free the 2 cables from the 2 wire saddles [2] and the edge saddle [3].

F-10-51

5) Remove the DC controller PCB together with the base to the forward direction.

10.5.8.2 When Replacing DC Controller PCB

0001-7538

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Before replacing the DC controller PCB, output the latest P-PRINT.

COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
- "Toner supply count" is stored on the DC controller PCB. Thus, "Toner
level" indicator returns to "100%" when the DC controller PCB is replaced.

1) Set to SST and download the latest system software.

2) After the DC controller PCB is replaced, go to service mode shown below
to clear the DC controller PCB memory.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> DC-CON
3) Enter the values indicated on the service label in the following service
modes:
- COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LA-DELAY
- COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG>
REG-V-Y,M,K
REG2-V-Y,M,K
- COPIER> ADJUST> DENS>
SGNL-Y,M,C
REF-Y,M,C
- COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI>
OFST1-AC
PRI-GAIN
PRI-OFST
- COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR>
1TR-GAIN,OFST
2TR-GAIN,OFST
- COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ>
MF-A4R,A6R,A4
- COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ>
REGIST
ADJ-C1, C2, MF, C1RE, C2RE, C3RE, C4RE
ADJ-DKRE,MFRE,RG-REFE
4) If any values are indicated on the remarks field of the service label, enter
the values in service mode.
5) Enter the counter backup value indicated on P-Print in service mode.
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> FX-UP-RL
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> DV-UNT-K
6) Enter the drum film thickness current value in service mode.
The drum film thickness current value is indicated in the drum counter label attached to the front of the drum unit.
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> DR-I-INT

F-10-53

4) Remove the all-night power supply PCB [2].

- 3 screws [1]

F-10-54

10.5.10 Leakage Breaker

10.5.10.1 Removing Leakage Breaker
0001-1494

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Remove the 4 fastens [1].

The figure shows the colors of codes connected to the fastens. Match with
the correct cord when reconnecting.

F-10-52

7) Turn OFF the control panel power switch.

8) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

10-25

Chapter 10

F-10-57

2) Remove the fan duct [1].

- 1 screw [2]

F-10-55

3) Remove the leakage breaker [3].

- 2 screws [2]

F-10-58

3) Detach the HVT cover [1].

- 5 screws
- 8 wire saddles

F-10-56

10.5.11 HVT PCB

10.5.11.1 Before Removing HVT PCB
0017-8790

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Remove the controller box. (page 4-43)[Removing Controller Box]
3) Remove the option power supply assembly. (page 10-22)[Removing
Option Power Supply Assembly]
4) Remove the high-voltage sub-PCB. (page 10-27)[Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB]
5) Remove the controller power supply unit. (page 10-22)[Removing Controller Power Supply Unit]
6) Remove the printer power supply unit. (page 10-23)[Removing Printer
Power Supply Unit]
F-10-59

10.5.11.2 Before Removing HVT PCB

0017-6382

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

4) Remove the HVT PCB [1].

- 5 connectors
- 8 screws
- 2 PCB supports

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Remove the all-night power supply PCB (only for iR3170/2570 series).
(page 10-25)[Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB]
3) Remove the controller box. (page 4-43)[Removing Controller Box]
4) Remove the option power supply assembly. (page 10-22)[Removing
Option Power Supply Assembly]
5) Remove the high-voltage sub-PCB. (page 10-27)[Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB]
6) Remove the controller power supply unit. (page 10-22)[Removing Controller Power Supply Unit]
7) Remove the printer power supply unit. (page 10-23)[Removing Printer
Power Supply Unit]

10.5.11.3 Removing HVT PCB

0001-1423

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
F-10-60

1) Remove the rear right grip [1].

- 2 screws [2]

10-26

Chapter 10

10.5.11.4 When Replacing HVT PCB

10.5.13 Control Panel CPU PCB

0001-6276

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

10.5.13.1 Before Removing Control Panel CPU PCB

0017-6400

1) Enter the following 6 items in service mode as indicated in PCB label attached on the new HVT PCB.
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>PRI-GAIN (CHG G)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>PRI-OFST (CHG Off)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PR>1TR-GAIN (1TR G)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PR>1TR-OFST (1TR Off)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PR>2TR-GAIN (2TR G)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PR>2TR-OFST (2TR Off)

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the support cover (right). (page 10-18)[Detaching Support Cover (Right)]
2) Remove the control panel. (page 10-23)[Removing Control Panel]
3) Detach the control panel lower cover [1].
- 4 TP screws [2]

The indication on the PCB label is shown in the parentheses.

2) Write down the new values on the service label.
3) Output P-PRINT in service mode.
4) Keep the output P-PRINT [1] in the service book case.
Put away the old P-PRINT.

F-10-63

10.5.13.2 Removing Control Panel CPU PCB

0001-1966

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] of the cable used between the control panel PCB and the control panel KEY PCB.
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [2] used between the control panel PCB and
the control panel LCD.

F-10-61

10.5.12 High-Voltage Sub PCB

10.5.12.1 Before Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB
0017-8791

Be sure to remove the stoppers to the direction of the arrow. The 2 stoppers
are moved to the different directions, respectively.

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Remove the option power supply assembly. (page 10-22)[Removing
Option Power Supply Assembly]

3) Disconnect the control panel cable [4].

4) Remove the control panel CPU PCB [6].
- 4 TP screws [5]

10.5.12.2 Before Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB

0017-6399

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Remove the all-night power supply PCB (only for iR3170/2570 series).
(page 10-25)[Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB]
3) Remove the option power supply assembly. (page 10-22)[Removing
Option Power Supply Assembly]

10.5.12.3 Removing High-Voltage Sub-PCB

0001-9581

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the high-voltage sub-PCB [3].
- 2 connectors [1]
- 5 PCB supports [2]

F-10-64

10.5.14 Control Panel Key Switch PCB

10.5.14.1 Before Removing Control Panel KEY PCB
0017-6403

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the support cover (right). (page 10-18)[Detaching Support Cover (Right)]
2) Remove the control panel. (page 10-23)[Removing Control Panel]
3) Detach the control panel lower cover [1].
- 4 TP screws [2]

F-10-62

10-27

Chapter 10

F-10-65
F-10-68

10.5.14.2 Removing Control Panel KEY PCB

0001-1627

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the cable used between the control panel PCB and the control panel KEY PCB, and free the cable from the 3 wire
saddles [2].
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [3] used between the control panel PCB and
the control panel LCD.

Be sure to remove the stoppers to the direction of the arrow. The 2 stoppers
are moved to the different directions, respectively.

10.5.15 Control Panel Inverter PCB

10.5.15.1 Before Removing Control Panel Inverter PCB
0017-6407

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the support cover (right). (page 10-18)[Detaching Support Cover (Right)]
2) Remove the control panel. (page 10-23)[Removing Control Panel]
3) Detach the control panel lower cover [1].
- 4 TP screws [2]

3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [4] of the control panel inverter PCB.

F-10-69

10.5.15.2 Removing Control Panel Inverter PCB

0001-1475

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
F-10-66

4) Remove the control panel inner frame [1].

- 1 TP screw [2]
- 11 self-tapping screws [3]

1) Remove the control panel inverter PCB [1].

- 3 connectors [2]
- 4 screws [3]

F-10-70
F-10-67

5) Remove the control panel KEY PCB [1].

- 5 self-tapping screws [2]

10.5.16 Main Power Switch

10.5.16.1 Before Removing Main Power Switch
0017-6410

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]

10-28

Chapter 10

10.5.16.2 Removing Main Power Switch

0001-1500

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the main power switch [2].
- 4 fastens [1]
- Snaps

F-10-73

10.5.17.2 Removing Front Cover Switch

0001-1504

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the link retainer [1].
- 2 screws [2]
F-10-71

Points to note when attaching

Connect the 4 fastens to the respective correct positions according to the
numbers on each label as shown in the figure below.

F-10-74

2) Remove the front cover switch [2].

- 4 fastens [1]
- Snaps

10.5.17 Front Cover Open/Closed Detecting Switch

10.5.17.1 Before Removing Front Cover Switch
0017-6426

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner
Container Retainer]
2) Detach the inner front cover (middle) [2].
- 2 screws [1]

F-10-75

Points to note when attaching

Connect the 4 fastens in the respective correct positions according to the
numbers on each label as shown in the figure below.

F-10-72

3) Detach the support cover (right). (page 10-18)[Detaching Support Cover (Right)]
4) Detach the inner front cover (right) [2].
- 1 screw [1]

10-29

Chapter 10

F-10-78

2) Disconnect the connector [1] in the direction of the arrow.

3) Remove the ITB duct fan [3].
- 2 self-tapping screws [2]

10.5.18 ITB Fan

10.5.18.1 Before Removing ITB Duct Fan
0017-6445

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the delivery tray. (page 10-20)[Removing Delivery Tray]
2) Remove the toner container retainer. (page 10-19)[Removing Toner
Container Retainer]
3) Detach the inner front cover (middle) [2].
- 2 screws [1]

F-10-79

10.5.19 Toner Intake Fan

10.5.19.1 Before Removing Toner Suction Fan
0017-6452

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
F-10-76

4) Detach the support cover (right). (page 10-18)[Detaching Support Cover (Right)]
5) Detach the inner front cover (right) [2].
- 1 screw [1]

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the rear left cover (upper). (page 10-18)[Detaching Rear Left
Cover (Upper)]

10.5.19.2 Removing Toner Suction Fan

0001-1860

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Disconnect the connector [1] in the direction of the arrow.
2) Remove the toner suction fan [3] with the holder.
- 2 screws [2]

F-10-77

10.5.18.2 Removing ITB Duct Fan

0001-1830

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the fan guard [1].
- 1 tapping screw [2]
- 2 self-tapping screws [3]

10-30

F-10-80

3) Remove the filter [1] from the holder.

Chapter 10
3) Remove the heat exhaust fans (front [1] and rear [2]).
- 1 connector each [3]

F-10-81

4) Remove the toner suction fan [1] from the holder.

F-10-84

10.5.20.4 Routing Heat Exhaust Fan Harness

0003-9412

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Put the cable [1] of the heat exhaust fan (front) through the cable guide [2].

F-10-82

10.5.20 Machine Heat Discharge Fan

10.5.20.1 Before Removing Heat Exhaust Fan
0017-6456

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right door. (page 10-32)[Detaching Right Door]

F-10-85

2) Place the connector [2] of the heat exhaust fan (rear) [1] in the cable guide
so as to retain the cable of the heat exhaust fan (front).

10.5.20.2 Before Removing Heat Exhaust Fan

0017-7830

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
3) Open the right door fully (to the point where it does not interfere with other parts). (page 10-33)[Opening Right Door]

10.5.20.3 Removing Heat Exhaust Fan

0001-1969

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the right door feed guide 1 [1] (when no relay delivery assembly
is used).
- 3 self-tapping screws
2) Remove the right door feed guide 2 [2].
- 5 self-tapping screws

F-10-86

10.5.21 Toner Intake Fan Filter

10.5.21.1 Removing Toner Suction Fan Filter
0001-1866

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove the toner suction fan cover [1].
- 1 screw [2]

F-10-83

10-31

Chapter 10
T-10-21

[1]

Motor name

Indication/
engraved mark

Label color

Main motor (M2)

white

Drum motor (M9)

yellow

Fixing motor (M11)

pink

10.5.22.3 Points to Note When Attaching Drum Motor

0004-5152

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

[2]

If the attached drum motor [1] is loose in the vertical direction, shift the motor in the direction of the arrow as shown below (diagonally right down) and
tighten the screws.
If the screws are tightened at the incorrect position (diagonally left up), banding may appear on output images.

F-10-87

2) Remove the toner suction fan filter [1] to the upward direction.

F-10-90

10.5.23 Right Door

F-10-88

10.5.22 Motor of Main Drive Assembly

10.5.23.1 Detaching Right Door

10.5.22.1 Before Removing Main Drive Motor

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

0002-0325

0017-6473

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 10-19)[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Remove the DC controller PCB. (page 10-24)[Removing DC Controller
PCB]
3) Remove the controller box. (page 4-43)[Removing Controller Box]

10.5.22.2 Removing Main Drive Motor

1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
2) Open the right door.
3) Lift up Inner 2-Way Tray [2] to separate from the right door.
- 1 joint pin [1]
This step should be performed when Inner 2-Way Tray C1, Finisher P1/
Q1 or Saddle Finisher Q2 is installed.

0001-2608

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Remove each motor [1].
- 2 connectors each [2]
- 4 screws each [3]

F-10-91

F-10-89

Points to note when attaching

The 3 motors on the main drive assembly should be attached in the
respective correct positions by matching the indication shown on each
motor label to the engraved marks on the main drive frame. Each motor can
be identified by the motor label colors.

10-32

4) Remove the joint plate [2].

- 1 screw [1]
This step should be performed when Inner 2-Way Tray C1, Finisher P1/
Q1 or Saddle Finisher Q2 is installed.

Chapter 10
er (Upper Rear)]
2) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cover (Lower Rear)]

10.5.23.3 Opening Right Door

0017-6477

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
With the iR C2580i / C3180C / 3180Ci / 3180i, removal and attachment of
the parts are possible by fully opening the right door instead of detaching it.
1) Open the right door [1].
2) Remove 3 screws [2].
3) Disengage the hook [3] by lifting up the right door [1].
4) Open the right door [1] fully (to the point where it does not interfere with
other parts).

F-10-92

5) Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the wire saddle [2].
6) Remove the 2 screws [3] that fix the hinge.

[3]
[2]

[1]

F-10-93

7) Detach the right door [1] with the hinge [2].

[2]

F-10-96
F-10-94

Attaching Right Door

1) Fit the hinge [1] at the right door bottom to the boss.
2) Engage the hinge [2] at the right door top with the hook on the machine's
side plate.

MEMO:
When detaching the right door [1], remove the wire saddle [2], disconnect
the connector [3], and remove the 7 screws [4].

[1]
[4]

[2]

[3]

F-10-95

[4]
Firstly close the right door and tighten the 2 screws to fix the hinge.

10.5.23.2 Before Opening Right Door

0017-6951

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
With the iR C2580i / C3180C / 3180Ci / 3180i, removal and attachment of
the parts are possible by fully opening the right door instead of detaching it.
1) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-17)[Detaching Right Cov-

Points To Note When Attaching

1) Hook the right door onto the hook [1].
2) Tighten 3 screws [2].

10-33

Chapter 10

[1]
[2]

[2]

10.5.24 Cautions in Handling the Left Stay

10.5.24.1 Points to Note When Handling Left Stay
0001-1863

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The 5 paint-locked screws [1] are to fix the left stay; do not loosen these
screws.
The left stay secures the constant distance between the front and rear side
plates. If the distance is changed, the output image may be blurred.
Note that the distance between the front and rear side plates cannot be adjusted in field.

F-10-97

10-34

Chapter 11 MEAP

Contents

Contents
11.1 MEAP.........................................................................................................................................................................11-1
11.1.1 Checking the Operating Environment. .................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.2 Setting Up the Network ........................................................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.1.3 Setting the method to login to SMS ......................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.4 Login to SMS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 11-8
11.1.5 Checking Application List ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.1.6 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application .......................................................................................................................... 11-11
11.1.7 Checking the Platform Information ....................................................................................................................................... 11-12
11.1.8 MEAP Specifications............................................................................................................................................................. 11-13
11.1.9 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS ................................................................................. 11-15
11.1.10 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application................................................................................................... 11-15
11.1.11 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................................. 11-16
11.1.12 Reference (Application System Information) ...................................................................................................................... 11-16
11.1.13 Installing an Application...................................................................................................................................................... 11-17
11.1.14 MEAP Enterprise Service Manager..................................................................................................................................... 11-19
11.1.15 Adding a License File .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-20
11.1.16 Disabling a License File (suspending a license) .................................................................................................................. 11-22
11.1.17 Downloading/Removing an Invalidated License File.......................................................................................................... 11-24
11.1.18 Reusable license................................................................................................................................................................... 11-26
11.1.19 License for forwarding......................................................................................................................................................... 11-26
11.1.20 Uninstalling an Application ................................................................................................................................................. 11-29
11.1.21 Changing Login Services ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-30
11.1.22 MEAP Counter..................................................................................................................................................................... 11-34
11.1.23 Initializing the Password...................................................................................................................................................... 11-35
11.1.24 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area with the
Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool)........................................................................................................................... 11-36
11.1.25 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive............................................................................................................................................ 11-37
11.1.26 MEAP Safe Mode ................................................................................................................................................................ 11-38
11.1.27 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2)............................................................................................................. 11-39
11.1.28 Reference material ............................................................................................................................................................... 11-42
11.1.29 Option for exclusive individual measure ............................................................................................................................. 11-43
11.1.30 Construction of the MEAP Platform.................................................................................................................................... 11-44

Chapter 11

11.1 MEAP
11.1.1 Checking the Operating Environment.
0017-8694

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
This section lists the requirements on the operating environment for the maintenance.

Memo:
Java Script must be enabled in every environment.
Important:
For the following operations in the combined environment of Windows XP and Internet Explorer6, Java2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.3.1 or later
is required.
- User registration / edit in SDL
- User registration / edit in SSO local device
- Use of SSO remote login in SSO

Remote Login of Default Authentication or Simple Device Login (SDL), Remote UI, and Portal Services
Remote Login of Default Authentication or Simple Device Login (SDL), Remote UI, and Portal Services guarantee operation under the following system environment.
T-11-1
Operating System

Supported browser

Microsoft Windows 98 SE
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows ME

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP3

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows XP Professional / Home

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 Gold

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Mac OS 8.6 - 9.x

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 - 5.1.6

Mac OS X 10 - 10.2.4

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.2.2

Remote UI (RUI)
RUI guarantees operation under the following system environment.
T-11-2
Operating System

Supported browser

Microsoft Windows 98 SE
Microsoft Windows ME
Microsoft Windows NT Workstartion 4.0
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows XP

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2 or later

Netscape Communicator 4.6 or later

MacOS 8.6 or later

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later

SMS
SMS guarantees operation under the following system environment.
T-11-3
Operating System

Supported browser

Microsoft Windows 98 SE

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows XP

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

11-1

Chapter 11
SDL and SSO with Local Devoce Authentication (user registration/edit functions)
For user registration / edit in SDL and SSO(with Local Authentication), following system requirements must be satisfied.
System environment for administrator
T-11-4
Operating System

Supported browser

Microsoft Windows 98 SE

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP3

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows XP

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

System environment for end user

T-11-5
Operating System

Supported browser

Microsoft Windows 98 SE
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation4.0

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0.1 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows ME

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0.1 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows XP Professional

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

SSO domain authentication environment

Windows server for Security Agent to be installed
Security Agent (hereinafter SA) guarantees operation in the following system environment.

T-11-6

Hardware

Memory

256MB or more

Hard disk

Empty capacity of 15MB or more

CPU

Processor more than Intel Celeron 800 MHz corresponding

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP4
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4

Software

OS

Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP1
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4

Corresponding Active Directory

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP1 *

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 *

* Construction of SSO domain environment by using Active Directory of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 needs SA of version 2.0.1 or newer, SSO Login application of version 3.0.0 or newer.

Combination list of the versions of SSO Login application of MEAP device and SA
T-11-7
Product Nameof MEAP Device
US

EU

iR5020/ iR5020i/ iR6020/ iR5020N/ iR5020i/

iR6020i
iR6020N/ iR6020i

11-2

AO

iR5020i/ iR6020i

Version Version of SA
of SSO
V1.1.0 V1.2.0
Login
Applicati
on
V1.1.0

V1.3.0

V1.3.1

V2.0.0

V2.0.1

V3.0.1

Chapter 11
Product Nameof MEAP Device

Version Version of SA
of SSO
V1.1.0 V1.2.0
Login
Applicati
on

US

EU

AO

iR2220i/ iR2220N/
iR3320i/ iR3320N

iR2220i/ iR2220N/
iR3320i/ iR3320N

iR2220i/ iR3320i

V1.1.0

iR C3220/ iR C2620

iR C3220/ iR C2620

iR C3220/ iR C2620

V1.1.1

V1.1.2

iR 2270/ iR 2870/ iR 3035/ iR 2270 / iR 2870/ iR 3035/ iR 2270 /2870/3035/3045

iR 3045
iR 3045

V1.3.0

V1.3.1

V2.0.0

V2.0.1

V3.0.1

V2.2.7

iR85+/ iR8070/ iR105+/

iR9070

iR85+/ iR8070/ iR105+/

iR9070

iR85+/ iR8070/ iR105+/

iR9070

V1.1.3

V2.2.7

iR 5570/ iR 6570

iR 5570 / 6570

iR 5570 / 6570

V2.0.0,
V2.2.9

iR C3170U/ iR C3170i

iR 3170C/ iR 3170Ci/ iR
C2570/ iR C2570i

iR C3170/ iR C3170i/ iR
C2570/ iR C2570i

V2.2.6

iR 3180C/ iR3180Ci

iR C3180i / iR C2580i

V3.9.0

iR C5870U/ iR C6870U

iR 5870C/ iR 5870Ci/ iR
6870C/ iR 6870Ci

iR C5870/ iR C5870i/ iR
C6870/ iR C6870i

V2.4.0

iR7086/ iR7095/ iR7095

Printer/ iR7105

iR7086/ iR7095/ iR7095 P/ iR7086/ iR7095/ iR7095 P/ V2.5.0

iR7105
iR7105

iR C5180i/ iR C4580i/ iR
C4080i

iR C4080/ iR C4080N/ iR iR C4080/ iR C4080N/ iR V3.0.0

C4580/ iR C4580N/ iR
C4580/ iR C4580N/ iR
C5180/ iR C5180N
C5180/ iR C5180N

imagePRESS C1

imagePRESS C1

imagePRESS C1

V3.1.0

iR C2880/ iR C3380

iR C2880 / C3380

iR C2880 / C3380

V3.2.0

iR3025/ iR3030/ iR3035/

iR3045

iR3025/ iR3030/ iR3035/

iR3045

iR3025/ iR3030/ iR3035/

iR3045

V3.4.1

V3.9.0

iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 V3.5.0

iR C5185

iR C5185

iR C5185

V3.6.0

imagePRESS C7000VP

imagePRESS C7000VP

imagePRESS C7000VP

V3.8.0

iR 5050

A = SSO basic function support

B = SSO basic function + Multi domain function + LLS cache function support
C = SSO basic function + Multi domain function + LLS cache function support + Server 2003 Active Directory support
Memo:
-It must improve in the version of SSO Login application and version of SA when you want to use the function B or C.
-The right of access to the domain controller and the right of access to the Windows 2003 DNS are necessary, when the domain authentication is used with SSO.
Important:
-The device using SSO authentication and the Windows server on which Security Agent is installed must exists in the same domain.
-In the case that Security Agent has been installed in Windows XP Professional SP2, Windows Server 2003 SP1/Server 2003 R2 and Windows Firewall is set
enabled, Security Agent (SA.exe) needs to be added as an exceptional program of Windows Firewall. If not being designated a directory of installation, SA.exe
is stored in the following directory. C:\Program Files\Canon\SSOPackage\SecurityAgent
-In the case that Active Directory has been constructed in Windows Server 2003 SP1/Server 2003 R2 and Windows Firewall is set enabled, TCP port '5678' used
by Security Agent needs to be added in Windows Firewall.

Browser
The following combinations of operations are guaranteed for the access from Web browser to MEAP device.
T-11-8
OS

Supported Browser

Microsoft Windows 98SE

Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2,

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows ME

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2,

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP3

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP3,

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1,

Microsoft Windows XP Professional

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1,

11-3

Chapter 11

11.1.2 Setting Up the Network

0017-8695

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
To allow a MEAP device to accept accesses through the network, for example you operate a device with SMS, the On option must be selected on Use HTTP screen.
The option is selected by default. The setting can be changed on the control panel of the MEAP device.
1) Make the following selections: Ad Func button > System Settings button> Down-arrow button.
Memo:
If the System manager ID and system password have already been assigned, ID Entry dialog appears after System Settings button is pressed. Enter the system
manager ID and the password, and click ID key to go into System Management Mode.

F-11-1

2) Make the following selections: MEAP Settings button > Use HTTP button> On button > OK button .

F-11-2

Memo:
When using SSL, set [Use SSL] ON.
(This setting is also applied to the SSL setting of RUI. Same is true in the case of setting SSL ON on the side of RUI.)
Setting [Use SSL] ON displays the message dialogue 'Changes effective after the main power switch is turned OFF and ON' . Press [OK].

F-11-3

11-4

Chapter 11

3) Press Done button as many times as necessary until the Basic screen appears.
4) Turn off the device's main power; wait for 10 sec, and then turn the power back on.

- The setting [Use HTTP] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have turned off and then on the device's main power switch.
- You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use, enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the
browser. Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button
of Proxy server group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As network settings vary among environments, consult the
network administrator.
- If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to use SMS.
- To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP device's touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize
some characters.
- When [se SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL
with [Certificate Settings] that exists in [System Settings] > [Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Settings] on the iR device.

11.1.3 Setting the method to login to SMS

0017-8696

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
SMS Installer Service, which is used to login SMS includes Password Authentication and Remote Login Service Authentication (henceforce: RLS Authentication).
Password Authentication is an authentication method only by password. RLS Authentication is an authentication method using SDL / SSO by ID and password.
Either or both of the authentication methods can be enabled by changing the setting.
Memo:
If Default Authentication is selected as the device authentication method, 'RLS Authentication' is not selectable as SMS Login method. Also, if 'RLS
Authentication' is selected, the device authentication method (Default Authentication, SDL, SSO) cannot be changed.
Setting of login method to SMS (Start/Stop) must be made after logging-in by the other login method. In other words, setting for Start/Stop of Password Authentication is made after logging-in with RLS Authentication, and setting for Start/Stop of RLS Authentication is made after logging-in with Password Authentication.
The table below shows the setting methods for each combination of login method and Start/Stop.
T-11-9
Start RLS Authentication

Stop RLS Authentication

Start Password Authentication

Login available with either method

Login available only with Password Authentication

Stop Password Authentication

Login available only with RLS Authentication

Setting unavailable

When only RLS Authentication is enabled, there may be a case you cannot login to device for the following reasons.
- Authentication server down
- Disconnection with authentication server due to network failure
In these cases, boot the device as MEAP SAFE mode from device service mode.
By booting the device as MEAP SAFE mode, login to SMS becomes available as Default Authentication is enabled. After login to SMS, set RLS Authentication
as Started, return the device to normal mode, and then login by RLS Authentication.

Setting for login by Password Authentication

1) In order to make a setting for login by Password Authentication, you need to login by RLS Authentication. Therefore, login by RLS Authentication.
Login screen (In case authentication method is SSO)

11-5

Chapter 11

F-11-4

2) Select 'System Management' tab > 'Utility' tab > 'Application Management Function' tab.

F-11-5

3) In order to enable login by Password Authentication, tick SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) radio button and then click [Start]. On the other hand,
in order to disable login by Password Authentication, clear the tick of SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) radio button and click [Stop].

F-11-6

4) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly. In case the setting is changed from 'Stop' to 'Start', login screen that was not seen
before is displayed. In case the setting is changed from 'Start' to 'Stop', access to login screen leads to the screen below and login becomes unavailable.
Login error screen

11-6

Chapter 11

F-11-7

Setting for login by RLS Authentication

1) In order to make a setting for Login by RLS Authentication, you need to Login by Password Authentication.
Login screen by Password Authentication

F-11-8

2) Select 'System Management' tab > 'Utility' tab > 'Application Management Function' tab.

F-11-9

3) In order to enable Login by RLS Authentication, tick SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) radio button and then click [Start]. On the
other hand, in order to disable login by RLS Authentication, clear the tick of SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) radio button and click
[Stop].

11-7

Chapter 11

F-11-10

4) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly. In case the setting is changed from 'Stop' to 'Start', login screen that was not seen
before is displayed. In case the setting is changed from 'Start' to 'Stop', access to login screen leads to the screen below and Login becomes unavailable.
Login error screen

F-11-11

11.1.4 Login to SMS

0017-8697

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Login by Password Authentication
1) Access SMS from the browser of the PC connected to the network on which the MEAP device operates.
URL: http://<MEAP Device IP address>:8000/sms/
Ex.) http://172.16.188.240:8000/sms/
Memo:
- The default password is "MeapSmsLogin." (The password is case-sensitive.)
- When you want to change the display original language, change in the box in the right of the screen. This setting is not affect by the setting of the language of
the device.

11-8

Chapter 11

F-11-12

2) The following screen appears if the password has been changed by the user's system administrator. If so, check with the system administrator for the new password. Keep in mind that there is no special password offered for service work.

F-11-13

Login by RLS Authentication

1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the MEAP device.
URL: http://<IP address of MEAP device>:8000/sms/rls/
Ex.) http://172.16.188.240:8000/sms/rls

Memo:
- In case the device authentication method is SSO and login to domain, enter User Name, Password, and Login Destination registered in Active Directory, and
click 'Log in'.
- In case the device authentication method is SDL or SSO and login to 'this device', enter User Name and Password registered in the device and click 'Log in'.

In the case the device authentication method is SSO

11-9

Chapter 11

F-11-14

In the case the device authentication method is SDL

F-11-15

11.1.5 Checking Application List

0017-8698

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The page of Application List is designed to show resources arranged according to applications. The page gives you a good idea of how much of the device's memory
is being used by the applications (both in absolute and relative terms) as well as how much memory still remains. Check this page before adding an application.
The information is collected from the manifest (headers) - in other words, the size of a resource represents the size as it is declared by the application in question,
not necessarily the size of resources actually used by the application. The items of information include the following:
- hard disk
- memory
- thread
- socket
- file descriptor
You will not be able to install an application if the size of the remaining memory falls short of the size declared by the application. Moreover, the specifications
have been designed so that an application will not be able to start up if there is a shortage of memory for any of the foregoing items (i.e., memory, thread, socket,
file descriptor). To find out if there is enough memory, go through the following steps:
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Click Application List tab.
3) Check the displayed information:
a. Information on Applications
- Name (of the application)
- Installation (date)
- Application ID
- Status
- License
- Resources Used
b. Resource Information
- Amount Used
- Remaining
- Percent Used

11-10

Chapter 11

F-11-16

11.1.6 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application

0017-8699

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Log in to the SMS.
2) Click 'Application List'.
3) Click the radio button of the MEAP application in question, and click 'Start' or 'Stop'.

F-11-17

4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either "Started" or "Stopped."

11-11

Chapter 11

F-11-18

11.1.7 Checking the Platform Information

0017-8700

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
You can check the versions of MEAP Contents, MEAP Specifications, and Java Virtual Machine of the device.

Some applications may not be installed to some MEAP devices of specific specifications. (See 'MEAP Specifications').
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Click System Management tab.

F-11-19

3) Click System Info tab.

11-12

Chapter 11

F-11-20

11.1.8 MEAP Specifications

0017-8701

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent
an application that uses a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the function.

About Name
MEAP Specification is shown as 'MEAP Specifications' in the screen to check the version on the side of device that supports MEAP (counter confirmation button)
and MEAP platform (SMS). On the other hand, in the manifest file of MEAP application, it is shown as 'MeapSpecVersion' (described in the same way in the SDK
document)
(Note) 'MEAP Specifications' hereafter in this document.

Mechanism
MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2 information below:
- Device Specification ID
- MEAP Specifications
Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum
copy number, thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID
required for its execution. Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models declared. Upon installation of
MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager, matching of Device Specification ID is executed on the side of MEAP platform machine.
The machine which doesn't support the ID declared by the application rejects installation of such an application.
Meanwhile, MEAP Specifications shows other information than defined by Device Specification ID above, including network and security. Thus each model does
not always have the same version.
MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution. Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application
is operable in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the application rejects installation of such an
application.

MEAP Spec Version for each model

T-11-10
Product Name

USA

EUR

OCE

SPL

KOR

iR 6020

Initial MEAPSpecVer Change information

iR 5020

iR 3320

iR 2220

iR C3220

1, 2, 3

iR C2620

1, 2, 3

iR 4570

5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later)

iR 2870

5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later)

iR 2270

5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later)

iR 3570

5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later)

iR85+

iR 8070

5, 6, 7 (System v10.xx later)

11-13

Chapter 11
Product Name

USA

EUR

OCE

SPL

KOR

Initial MEAPSpecVer Change information

iR 105+

iR 9070

5, 6, 7 (System v10.xx later)

iR 6570

5, 6

5, 6, 7, 9 (System v20.xx later)

5, 6, 7, 9 (System v20.xx later)

iR 5570

5, 6

iR C3170

5, 6, 7

iR C2570

5, 6, 7

iR C3180

5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,
17,18

iR C2580

5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,
17,18

iR 7105

5, 6, 7

iR 7095

5, 6, 7

iR 7086

5, 6, 7

iR 7095P

5, 6, 7

iR C6870

5, 6, 7

iR C5870

5, 6, 7

iR C5180

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11

CLC5151

iR C4580

CLC4040

iR C4080

5, 6, 7 (System v10.xx later)

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later)

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later)

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later)

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later)
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later)

iR C5185

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14,

15

imagePRESS C1

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11

iR C3380

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13

iR C2880

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13

iR 3025

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13

iR 3045

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13

iR 3035

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13

iR 3030

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13

iR 5050

5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,
17,18

iR 5055

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13

iR 5065

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13

iR 5075

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13

imagePRESS C7000VP

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13

* Due to the change in I/F specifications, these models support '5' only.

T-11-11

MEAP Spec Version

11-14

MEAP Spec Version

Description

MEAP basic function

MEAP Spec Version 1 function and SSL/TSL + Proxy

[Reserved]

MEAP Spec Version 1 function and CPCA V2 + ERS (Error Recovery Service) + New SSL/TSL

[Reserved]

MEAP Spec Version 5 function and Compact PDF + OCR PDF(Text Searchable) + USB-Host(Buffering of Interrupt Transfer)

[Reserved]

10

MEAP Spec Version 5 function and USB-Host(Exception + ClearFeature + SetFeature + HotPlug) + WINS address acquisition using
MIBAgent + TimerService + SSL client authentication

11

MEAP Spec Version 5 function and AMS

13

MEAP Spec Version 5 function and J2ME1.1 Support + Encrypted PDF + Trace and smooth PDF + CTK2.0

14

Device signature PDF

15

IMI + ERS (API addition for IMI)

17

Acquiring images of JBIG format

18

Parsing XML documents (XML parser)

Chapter 11

11.1.9 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS

0017-8702

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Click System Management tab.
3) On System Management screen, click System Info tab.
4) Click Details button.

F-11-21

5) When the following status information of MEAP applications (including the system application) appears in a different window, copy and paste all information
to create an attachment (text information) for preparing a problem report. You can also use this function whenever you want to check the status of any particular
application.

F-11-22

11.1.10 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application

0017-8703

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Make the following selections: Additional Functions button > System Settings button> the down-arrow button.
Memo:
If the System manager ID and system password have already been assigned, ID Entry dialog appears after System Settings button is pressed. Enter the system
manager ID and the password, and click ID key.

11-15

Chapter 11

F-11-23

2) Make the following selections: MEAP Settings button > Print System Information button >Yes button.

F-11-24

3) Press Done button as many times as necessary until the Basic screen appears.
4) Turn off the MEAP device's main power; wait for 10 sec, and then turn the power back on.
Important:
The previous version of printing function for MEAP application status information (system information) was depended on PDL. However, current version of
function is not dependent on PDL. So even device for which PDL is not available can print it. (Since iRC3220)

11.1.11 Overview
0010-1113

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The term MEAP stands for Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform, and is used to generically refer to a platform for software built into MFPs and peripheral equipment. The architecture is based on Java (J2ME, i.e., Java 2 Platform Micro Edition), and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications.
A MEAP application behaves independently from its host printer's system software, and may be installed or uninstalled using SMS (Service Management Service),
which is an interface that runs as part of the browser on a PC. As long as the device supports MEAP, most MEAP applications may be added to the device in the field.

11.1.12 Reference (Application System Information)

0017-8704

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
You can check all applications installed to the device at a glance with the MEAP application status information and, thus, it is important for you to provide it when
you are reporting a problem.
The following items of information will be indicated or printed for individual applications:
Memo:
The system information shown on the screen and the system information printed in the MEAP device's user mode are exactly the same.

T-11-12

11-16

Chapter 11
Application System Information
Application Name: C-Cabinet Gateway for MEAP
Application ID/System Application Name: 03a46668-63e4-4636-9cbb-492b6cef05d5
Application Version: 1.0.0
Status: Resolved
Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003
Vendor : Canon Inc.
License Status : Installed
Maximum Memory Usage : 1024
Registered Service :

Application Name
It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application program. It may not necessarily be identical to the name of the program.
Application ID/System Application Name
In the case of a system application, it will be the file name. If a general application, it is the application ID (application-ID) declared in a statement within the application program. Within the device, the applications are set apart by means of their application IDs.
Application Version
It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement within the application program.
Status
It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically,
Installed: the application has been installed.
Active: the application is being in use.
Resolved: the application is at rest.
Installed On
It indicates the date on which the application was installed.
Vendor
It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name (bundle-vendor) declared in a statement within the application program.
License Status
It indicates the status of the license; specifically,
None: no license is needed.
Not Installed: no license has been installed.
Installed: the appropriate license has been installed.
Invalid: the license has been invalidated.
Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit.
License Expires After
It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
License Upper Limit
It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Counter Value
It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Maximum Memory Usage
It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is the amount (maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the application
program, and is expressed in kilobytes.
Registered Service
It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the MEAP framework. Some services may not have printable data.

11.1.13 Installing an Application

0017-8705

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Important:
- To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs
to register the license access number of the application and the serial number of the device.
http://www.canon.com/meap/
-Maximum 20 applications can be installed (In iR5160/iR6060/iR2250/iR2850/iR3350, one is the portal service already installed at the time of shipment from
the factory)
-The following are the resource amounts assured for each device in the operation of one MEAP application. These values are for reference purpose only, therefore
the unused resource of SMS needs to be checked at the time of installation of MEAP application.
The displayed values of SMS resource may be larger than the followings since the actual values vary according to the log-in service (authentication function)
selected by users and the configuration (future models).
T-11-13
Product Name

HDD

Memory

Thread

Socket

File
Description

iR5020/iR6020/iR2220/iR3320

300MB

20MB

128

48

42

iRC2620/iRC3220

400MB

20MB

128

48

42

iR2270/iR2870/iR3570/iR4570/iR85/iR8070/iR6570/iR5570

400MB

20MB

128

48

42

iRC3170/iRC2570

400MB

20MB

128

48

42

iRC3180/iRC2580

1024MB

30MB

128

128

128

iR7086/iR7095/iR7105

400MB

20MB

128

48

42

11-17

Chapter 11
HDD

Memory

Thread

Socket

File
Description

Initial MEAP Spec Ver

1024MB

20MB

128

48

42

Change Information

1024MB

30MB

128

128

128

1024MB

20MB

128

48

42

Product Name
iRC4080/iRC4580/iRC5180
imagePRESS C1
iRC2880/iRC3380

1024MB

20MB

128

48

42

iR3025/iR3030/iR3035/iR3045

400MB

20/30MB*

128

48

42

iR5050

1024MB

30MB

128

128

128

iR5055/iR5065/iR5075

1024MB

20MB

128

48

42

iRC5185

1024MB

30MB

128

128

42

imagePRESS C7000VP

1024MB

20MB

128

48

42

*20MB for 512MB model, 30MB for 768MB model.

- As for memory, check the available resource when starting up the application. For other resources other than memory, check them when installing.
- Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the User's Guide that comes with the individual applications.

1) Long on to SMS.
2) Click Install tab.

F-11-25

3) Check that Install Application/License page appears.

4) Click Browse button, and select the application file and the license file of the application; then, click OK button.
Memo:
Application File: identified by the extension "jar".
License File: identified by the extension "lic".

F-11-26

5) See the message "Installing...Please wait a moment."

11-18

Chapter 11

F-11-27

Important:
- You cannot install only the license.
- You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license. Be sure to select its license file.
- If you are adding a license to an existing application, see 1.3.10 Adding a License File.
- If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application
while it is running.

6) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click OK button.

F-11-28

7) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and click OK.
8) Check the message "Installing...Please wait a moment." appears, beginning the installation.
9) Check Application List page appears when the installation is completed.
Important:
To use the application that you have just installed, you must make sure that the application status is Started.

11.1.14 MEAP Enterprise Service Manager

0017-8706

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Outline
MEAP Enterprise Service Manager is the PC application utility to perform batch installation, unistallation and management of MEAP application and license files
required for installation of applications, on several MEAP-available devices on network.
The main targets are system administrators in big companies and CANON service engineers (end users of devices do not use).
It is used when customized applications delivered to a certain company needs to be managed collectively.
Previous SMS can manage only one device at a time. This utility reduces the management cost of devices and TCO.

11-19

Chapter 11

Major functions
Discovery of devices available for MEAP
Discovery of devices available for MEAP on network
Storage of the serial number list of discovered device
Installation of application and license file
Management of application (starting / stopping)
Uninstallation of application
Others

System configuration
MEAP Enterprise Service Manager (MEAP ESM) functions in combination with DIS (DSL Installer Service) installed on the MEAP platform side of the device.
This system can be used only for MEAP-available device with appropriate DIS installed.
(*) When using this system on the firmware for version upgrading on October 2003 or older, version upgrading of the system software on the field device is necessary.
The versions available for ESM are as follows:
iR5160 / iR6020: System v54.02 or newer, MEAP Contents v53.07 or newer
iR2220 / iR3320: System v33.01 or newer, MEAP Contents v33.02 or newer
Other products: Available from the initial version

When installing MEAP Enterprise Service Manager (MEAP ESM) of master CD on PC, Microsoft '.NET Framework' v1.0 or v1.1 is necessary. The user should
download it from the Web site of Microsoft.

11.1.15 Adding a License File

0017-8707

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Log on to SMS.
2) On Application List, click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file.

F-11-29

3) Check appears.
4) On Application/License Information page, click License Management button.

11-20

Chapter 11

F-11-30

5) Click Browse button, and select the license file you want to install.

F-11-31

6) Click Install button.

11-21

Chapter 11

F-11-32

7) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click OK button.

11.1.16 Disabling a License File (suspending a license)

0017-8708

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Important:
- To invalidate (or suspend) a license, you must first stop the application in question.
- Once suspended, the status of the license will be 'Not Installed', and its application will no longer be available for use.
- You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the same iR, the device with the same device serial number.
- When replacing the device due to lease up or trouble, use the license for forwarding (See 'License for forwarding').
1) Stop the application you want to uninstall on Application List page.

F-11-33

2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable.

11-22

Chapter 11

F-11-34

3) License File Management page appears. On Application/License Information page, click License Management button.

F-11-35

4) Click Disable button.

11-23

Chapter 11

F-11-36

5) Click OK.

11.1.17 Downloading/Removing an Invalidated License File

0017-8709

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
You must remove the invalidated license file before uninstalling an application. If re-installation is a possibility, you may download the license file to a PC for
storage. To download or delete a license file, first disable it.
Important:
- Once you have removed an invalidated license file, you will no longer be able to download it form the MEAP device.

1) Login to SMS.
2) Application List page appears.
3) On Application List page, click the name of the application you want.

F-11-37

4) Check Application/License Information page appears.

5) On Application/License Information page, click License Management button.

11-24

Chapter 11

F-11-38

6) License File Management page appears. To download, click Download button.

F-11-39

7) When you have selected Download button, specify where you want to store the file by following the instructions on the screen.
8) To delete, click Delete button.

11-25

Chapter 11

F-11-40

9) Check the confirmation page appears.

10) Click OK button.
Important:
- Without the license file, an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP device that the application had been installed last time. Download and save
the license file before deleting the application.

11.1.18 Reusable license

0017-8710

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Reinstallation was not able to perform for all license files. When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see 'Disabling a License File' and 'Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File' in this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation.
This specification aims to prevent misuse of applications.
To increase convenience of users, only application with unlimited validity date and application counter (e.g. Portal Service, SDL, SSO) has been made to be able
to install as many times as needed by the same license file. This kind of license is called 'Reusable license'.

Memo:
For devices for System version of 33.01, 54.02 (iR 2220 series / iR5020 series) or older, version upgrading is required. It is already installed in the model with
iR C3220 or newer.

11.1.19 License for forwarding

0017-8711

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
When the device is replaced due to lease up or trouble, it is possible to continue using the current license information of MEAP application by forwarding it to a
new device. The license is forwarded by CE because the hidden page of SMS is used.
1) Log in to SMS, stop the application to be forwarded (see 'Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application' in this manual).

11-26

Chapter 11

F-11-41

2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (http:// IP address of device: 8000/sms/ForwardLicense).

F-11-42

3) Specify the application to be forwarded.

F-11-43

4) Click 'Disable' at Create Transfer License File.

11-27

Chapter 11

F-11-44

5) The screen to check invalidation of the license is displayed. Click 'OK',

F-11-45

6) Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading. Click 'Download'.

F-11-46

7) The dialogue 'File Download' is displayed. Click 'Save'.

11-28

Chapter 11

F-11-47

8) Specify the download destination, click 'Save'.

F-11-48

9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click 'Delete' to display the confirmation screen and click 'OK' to delete the file (in consideration of breakage
of license for forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).

F-11-49

10) Log out of SMS.

11) Ask the sales company to issue a license for forwarding.

Memo:
When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the
name of product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.

12) Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.

11.1.20 Uninstalling an Application

0017-8712

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

11-29

Chapter 11

1) Log on to SMS, and click 'Application List' tab.

2) Check 'Application List' page appears.
3) On the application list, select the radio button of the application you want to uninstall, and click 'Uninstall' button.
Memo:
Dimmed Uninstall button shows that the selected application cannot be removed.

F-11-50

4) Check the screen to make sure that what is shown is the application you want to uninstall; then, click OK button.
In response, the system runs an uninstall sessions.
Important:
- The status of the license must be 'Not Installed' or 'Unnecessary' for its application to be uninstalled. As necessary, go to License File Management page, and
disable the license file before starting to remove it.
- A license file may be invalidated only when its application is not active.
- If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a message will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will
no loner be available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications.

11.1.21 Changing Login Services

0017-8713

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Login Service Overview
The login service is used to authenticate users who logs in to a MEAP device. You can change login services or uninstall them using System Management site.
At time of shipment, the login service offers the following 3 modes of authentication:
- Default authentication
- SDL (Simple Device Login)
- SSO (Single Sign-On)

Important:
- To set SDL, the registered information in SDL and the registered user data (Department ID and Password) in Department ID Management of the machine have
to match.
- To set up SDL or SSO, Department ID Management must be set to Off in advance. To use SDL and Department ID Management simultaneously, set
Department ID Management to On after switching the login service to SDL.
- If SSO is set as the login service, NetSpot Accountant is necessary for using Department ID Management.
- If SSO is set, you cannot use an optional card reader.
- To set to SSO, first adjust the current time for the PC where Active Directory is running, the iR, and the PC where users log on. If there is more than a 30minute difference among them, an error occurs at logon.
- If SSO or SDL is set as login service, it takes time until the iR is ready to start up.
- When the SEND function is used in the environment of SDL and SSO, it is necessary to set each user's mail address to transmit E-mail. When the mail address
is not set, E-mail cannot be transmitted. However, when i-Fax is transmitted, the mail address set to the device is used.

Outline of Default Authentication

11-30

Chapter 11
In this mode of authentication, you will be using Department ID Management or you will not be using any authentication mechanism. If you enable the Department
ID Management in the MEAP device's Additional Functions mode, the user can use the device only when he/she enters an ID number (a 7-character ID and password) that has been registered from the device's touch panel display or through Remote UI.
Outline of SDL (Simple Device Login)
In this mode of authentication, you will be operating on a MEAP device on its own. You will store user information to the MEAP device's memory by accessing
the device through a Web browser. SDL offers the following functions:
a. it brings up the Login screen on the MEAP device's touch panel display for user authentication.
b. it brings up the Login page when you access the MEAP device from Web browser to manage the numbers of printed and scanned sheets for each department ID
working with the department ID management function. it operates in conjunction with the group ID control mechanisms to keep track of the number of print
pages or scan pages according to group IDs.
c. it enables register/editing of user authentication information through a Web browser.

F-11-51

Outline of SSO (Single Sign-On)

This is the log-in service that can be operated on the domain of Active Directory environment network or at iR device. The following are the user authentication
systems.
- Domain Authentication
- Local Device Authentication
- Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication

- The three user authentication systems can be changed at Web browser (See 'Setting the User Authentication System' on MEAP Administrator Guide).
- The default setting is 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'. To increase security, set 'Domain Authentication' as user authentication system
or change the user name and password of the administrator of Local Device Authentication from the default ones, just after starting to use SSO.
Domain Anthentication
This is the authentication of the domains on network simultaneously with log-in to iR device, in combination with the domain controller on Active Directory environment network. It authenticates up to four domain users (multi domain) with trusts as well as the domain with iR device installed. Users select the domain name
of log-in destination when they log in.
Optional NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager enables analysis / management of the usage of iR device.

Local Device Anthentication

This is the user authentication used for only iR device itself. The users to be authenticated is registered / managed by the database of iR device. The method of
registration / management is the same as the one for SDL. The log-in destination is [this device].

Domain Authentication + Local Device Anthentication

This is the user authentication system with the functions of both 'Domain Authentication' and 'Local Device Authentication'. Domain Authentication is useful to
authenticate the users registered / managed by Active Directory, and Local Device Authentication is for authentication of the temporary users being not able to be
added to Active Directory. In the case that any trouble of domain controller or Security Agent occurs, using Local Device Authentication enables emergency action
until recovery.
In the following example, Domain A user with iR installed and Domain B having trusts with Domain A, and also the users registered in iR device itself can be
authenticated. Users select the login destination (domain name or [This Device]) when they log in.

11-31

Chapter 11

Domain A
NetSpot
Security Agent
Accountant

Domain A User

Domain B
Domain
Controller
(Active Directory)

iR

Domain
Controller
(Active Directory)

Domain B User
F-11-52

- Optional NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager is necessary to use Domain Authentication and department ID management
simultaneously. When Domain Authentication is set without combination with NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager, log-in is impossible.
Therefore, department ID management should not be 'ON'. If department ID management is set to 'ON' while using Domain Authentication and log-in becomes
impossible, change the log-in service to Default Authentication and turn department ID management to [OFF].
- For combination with NSA / iWAM, it is necessary to set the user with administrative privilege of the domain on the SA service account.
- When the print count and scan count for each department ID needs to be managed in conjunction with Local Device Authentication and department ID
management, turn department ID management to [ON]. To use simultaneously Local Device Authentication and department ID management, the information
registered with Local Device Authentication should be matched with the user information of department ID management (department ID and password).
- The user information registered by SDL and the one by Local Device Authentication are managed separately in the iR device. The user information registered
in one system is not reflected to the other.
- The card reader for optional control card cannot be used for Local Device Authentication. When using the card reader for control card, set SDL.
- Security Agent is necessary only for Domain Authentication.
- Security Agent should be installed on the computer in the domain with iR device installed.
- Installation of Security Agent is included in MEAP Administrator CD-ROM.

Operating Environment
The operation is guaranteed for SDL or SSO if the system environment is in keeping with the following requirements:
SDL (registering/editing user information)
a. Operating System and Supported Browsers
T-11-14
Operating System

Supported browser

Windows 98 SE

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Windows 2000 Professional SP3

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Windows XP

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Important:
- If you use Internet Explorer 6 on Windows XP, you will need Java 2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.3.1.

SSO
To use SSO, you must have a Widows server to which Active Directory has been installed as well as Security Agent.
1) PC for hosting Security Agent
a. Supported OS
T-11-15
Operating System
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows Server 2003

11-32

Chapter 11

When using SA on WindowXP SP2, it is necessary to exclude Security Agent from the targets of firewall at the setting of the firewall.
b. Others
Access right to Windows 2000 domain Name System (DNS)Access right to domain controller

For combination with NetSpot Accountant / iW Accounting Manager, and department ID management is turned on to use it, it is necessary to set the user with
administrative privilege of the domain on the SA service account.
2) Client PC (if access from Web browser to MEAP device is desired)
a. Operating System and Supported Browsers
T-11-16
Operating System

Supported Browsers

Windows 98 SE
Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Windows ME

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Windows 2000 Professional SP3

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP3

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Windows XP Professional

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

b. Others
Access right to Windows 2000 Domain Name System (DNS)
Access right to Domain Controller Client
Steps to Change Login Services
1) Make the following selections: System Management > Enhanced Sys. App.

F-11-53

2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Select the radio button of the login service mode you want to use; then,
click Select button.

11-33

Chapter 11

F-11-54

3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, turn off the device's main power, and turn it back on after 10 seconds.

F-11-55

11.1.22 MEAP Counter

0010-1118

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

In addition to the installation of the system software, language file, and RUI, a printer equipped with MEAP functions calls for the installation of MEAP content,
which offers functions (system services) needed to run MEAP applications and class libraries needed by the MEAP applications to control the device.
It is important that the version of the system software be fully compatible with the version of the MEAP content, calling for special care. (In the case of a mismatch,
the device will not be able to run the MEAP application.) For version information, refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in conjunction with the
system software.
The following shows the components of a MEAP application:

11-34

Chapter 11

Type

Counter item

forced

total 1
total (black-and-white/small)
total (black-and-white/large)
total (black1)
total (mono-color/small)
total (mono-color/large)
total (mono-color1)
total (full-color/small)
total (full-color/large)
total (full-color1)
scan (total1)
black-and-white scan (total 1)

in response to instructions from application

black-and-white scan 1
black-and-white scan 2
black-and-white scan 3
black-and-white scan 4
color scan 1
color scan 2
color scan 3
color scan 4

application-independent

free 1
free 2
free 3
free 4
free 5
free 6
free 7
free 8
free 9
free 10
free 11
free 12

MEMO:
forced: the device forces the counter to increase its reading in response to execution of a job.
in response to instructions from application: the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from the application.
application independent: the counter operates according to the specifications of the application.

11.1.23 Initializing the Password

0017-8714

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Get the switch license for initializing the password.
Request the support of the regional headquarters of the Canon for switch license for initializing the password presenting the device serial number.
2) Click Login button leaving Password field blank or entering incorrect password. The Return to install Password Settings area appears. Click Browse button
and select the switch license file prepared in advance.

F-11-56

3) When you click Initialize button, the confirmation message appears. Click OK button. Then Login page opens. Enter the default password 'MeapSmsLogin' to

11-35

Chapter 11
log in. The password is case-sensitive.
If you click Cancel button, the Login page opens without initializing the password.

11.1.24 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area with
the Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool)
0017-8715

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
You can back up the area of the HDD where MEAP applications reside to a PC, as when you want to format the HDD. MEAP devices use a license-based mechanism
to control applications so that formatting the HDD will necessarily delete the jar files and application data, requiring you to not only reinstall them but also make
necessary settings. (Doing so consists in obtaining special license files for reinstallation and downloading user data/settings, increasing your work load.)
If you use the SST's backup function, you will be able to temporarily put aside the area of MEAP applications, thus being free of the foregoing extra work. This
function, however, is limited to a specific MEAP device (serial number), and cannot be used for illegal copying of applications.

You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the HDD has been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP
counter readings and the HDD contents, and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation.
Memo:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the same license.

The following list shows the details of area that SST backs up;
Jar files of MEAP applications
Settings set with MEAP applications.
Note that SST does not back up images in Mailboxes that MEAP applications use.
User information data registered with SDL
Requirements for Backup Using the SST
The following conditions must be met for use of the function:
1) Device Firmware Version
T-11-17
Boot ROM

System

SST

iR2220 Series
iR2250 Series

24.42 later

33.01 later

Since Ver 1.81

iR5020 Series
iR5160 Series

24.42 later

54.02 later

Since Ver 1.81

Devices ither than those listed the above. Already supported since the 1st version. Already supported since the 1st version. The version supporting the
corresponding devices.

2) SST Version
Version 1.81 or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed, upgrade the SST.
3) Space for backup
To back up the HDD of the iR, the PC must have approx 300 MB of free space at maximum.
Making a Backup and Formatting Hard Disk Drive with Service Support Tool
1) If SDL or SSO is used for the login service, switch to default authentication before backing up the user information. Although SST will back up SDL user information, it is recommended to export the user information just in case. For SDL user information backup, go to User Management page of Simple Device Login
site and export the data. (The SDL login page opens with the URL "http://<device IP address>:8000/sdl/").

If a hard disk of a system that uses SDL or SSO is formatted without changing the login service to the default authentication, the error message "The login service
must be set again with SMS" appears and the system cannot start up when you attempt to restart the system after formatting. If this problem occurs, change the
login service to SDL or SSO with SMS. If you cannot access to SMS since you do not have the IP address of the device, start the system with FIXIP mode hold down the numeric keys 1 and 7 and turn the power switch on. The IP address "172.16.1.100" will be automatically assigned for the device. Then log in to
SMS specifying the address.
2) While holding down the 2 and 8 buttons, start up the device in download mode.
As in the case of Sramimg.bin, the function is available only when the device is in Download Mode.
3) Connect the PC to the device and start the Service Support Tool.
4) In Download/Upload session of SST, select the appropriate device model, System in the tree view, and take necessary steps to connect to the device.
5) Click Upload the Backup Data button.
6) Click the option "Meapback.bin" from Name list of Backup Data Available for Selection, and click Start Storing button.

11-36

Chapter 11
Selecting Meapback.bin

F-11-57

7) When the data has been generated, enter an appropriate name in File name field and click Save button; then, click OK button to end the backup session.
8) In Selecting Model/Unit screen, select HDFormat and start formatting. All the partitions in the hard disk drive will be formatted.
Restoring the Backup Data
1) After formatting the hard disk drive with SST, install the System, MEAP Contents, Language, and Remote UI files.
2) To restore the backup "Meapback.bin," click Download the Backup Data button.
3) Select the backup data file and click Start Writing button to download the backup data. Note that SST cannot restore backup data created with a different version.
Selecting Backup Data

F-11-58

4) When the screen with OK button appears, the restoration of backup data finishes. Click OK button.
5) Reboot the main power and access the device with SMS and check that the MEAP applications are restored.
6) Restore non-MEAP backup data and settings that are saved before formatting the hard disk drive. The SDL user information is included in the backup data. You
do not have to restore it.

11.1.25 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive

0017-8716

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
If you must replace the hard disk drive because of a fault, all MEAP application files stored on it will also be lost, requiring you to re-install the applications and
their license files in addition to performing the normal work associated with the replacement of the hard disk.
Like other counter information, MEAP counter information will remain after replacement. Reinstallation of MEAP applications calls for special license files designed to continue with the current counter readings, thus enabling the use of the applications until the date of their expiration. These special licenses are service
tools, and are not offered to general users.
If you cannot make a backup of the license files as hard disk suffers a fault, contact the support staff of the regional headquarters of Canon telling the device serial
number and the names of MEAP applications installed to the device to obtain the necessary special license files.
In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers,
enabling you to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial number of the device in question.

11-37

Chapter 11
The following shows the steps to follow after you have obtained a special license from the support staff of the regional headquarters of Canon.
1) Copy the set of special license files on the PC you are using for service work.
Register the following with the Service Support Tool (SST): system file, language file, remote UI file, hard disk drive format file, MEAP contents file. (Be sure
to pay attention to the version compatibility of individual files.)
2) Have the new hard disk drive at hand and replace it on site.
While holding down the 2 and 8 keys at the same time, turn on the main power so that the machine will start up in download mode. The IP address 172.16.1.100
will automatically be used, which enables you to download files in high speed through a network.)
3) Using the SST, format the new HDD, and install the System, MEAP Contents, Language, and Remote UI files.
4) When the device has started normally, obtain the jar files of the MEAP applications from the user, and install them using the license files of the applications in
the same way as you would when installing them for the first time.
5) As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
Memo:
If you format the hard disk without uninstalling MEAP applications, always reinstall the applications previously installed. Unless reinstalling them, lots for the
MEAP counters the applications use will not be released. The message "The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit. Try to install
this application after uninstalling other applications." may appear and the device does not accept to install new application. To install new applications, once
reinstall the applications installed before formatting and uninstall unnecessary applications.

11.1.26 MEAP Safe Mode

0017-8717

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that
normally start up as default files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up.
When you have made changes and turned off and then on the device, the control panel will indicate 'MPSF' in its lower right corner. The MEAP applications that
may have been active before you shut down the equipment will not start up on their own. Make use of safe mode when restoring the system software as when MEAP
applications or services cause a fault as the result of a conflict or wrong sequence of registration/use. You can access to SMS in this condition so that you can take
necessary measures, for example, you can stop application that may cause the trouble.
If default authentication has been selected, the mode of authentication remains valid; otherwise, the message "The login service must be set again with SMS" appears. Change the login service as necessary.
Starting in Safe Mode
1) Start the device in service mode: click Ad Func key, press 2 and 8 buttons at the same time, and then click Ad Func key once again so that the service mode
screen appears.
2) Press COPIER button.
3) Press OPTION button.
4) Press USER.
5) Press the right-arrow button.
6) Press MEAPSAFE.

F-11-59

7) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click OK button.

11-38

Chapter 11

F-11-60

8) Check that the notation 'MPSF' has appeared in the lower right corner of the screen; then, turn off and then on the main power.

F-11-61

If you want to end safe mode, repeat the steps but change '1' to '0' in step -7 and turn off and then on the main power.

11.1.27 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2)

0017-8718

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
For the ports in which the MEAP application uses, the default is 8000 for the port on HTTP server, and 8443 for the port on HTTPS server. In the case that these
ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP application cannot use the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s).
By changing the following ports to use, however, the MEAP application can be used as well as the existing system.
HTTP server
Setting value is 0 through 65535 [the value at factory shipment/after clearing RAM: 8000]
HTTPS server
Setting value is 0 through 65535 [the value at factory shipment/after clearing RAM: 8443]
Memo:
-As for port on HTTPS server, it only applies to the device that supports SSL function.
-Make sure not to use 1 through 1023 other than 80 (HTTP) as a port for MEAP. Because the ports in this range are used by general servers, there is a possibility
that the ports in this range will be duplicated in the future.

<Setting Procedure of Port on HTTP server>

1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then
by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed).
2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on
control panel, the screen is displayed.
3) Press [COPIER] button.
4) Press [Option] button.
5) Press [BODY] button.
6) Press [<-] button.
7) Press [MEAP-PN] button.

11-39

Chapter 11

F-11-62

8) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.

F-11-63

9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.

F-11-64

<Setting Procedure of port on HTTPS server>

1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then
by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed).
2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on
control panel, the screen is displayed.
3) Press [COPIER] button.
4) Press [Option] button.
5) Press [BODY] button.
6) Press [<-] button.
7) Press [MEAP-SSL] button.

11-40

Chapter 11

F-11-65

8) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.

F-11-66

9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.

F-11-67

11-41

Chapter 11

11.1.28 Reference material

0017-8719

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Glossary
T-11-18

11-42

Terms & Acronyms

Definitions and Explanations

Applet

Applet Type Application. A Type of MEAP application that is designed to display user interface on device control panel.

Application

A software unit that provides a solution to users.

Application ID

A unique identifier assigned to each application. Used for indicating memory usage of the application in the MEAP system.

ASP

Application Service Provider. A business to provide the application service on Internet.

AVS

Applet Viewer Service. One of the MEAP system services that shows the user interface of the current applet type service on the
console.

Code Sign

To attach Digital Signature to software code. MEAP has the mechanism to reject MEAP application without Code Sign for
security reason.

CPCA

Common Peripheral Controlling Architecture. CPCA defines an object model of peripheral deices. A client can control a device
by creating or modifying objects in the device.

CPCA Java CL

CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a device.

Default Authentication Department ID Management

The login service used when the department ID control is used but other authentication controls are not used. When the Department
ID control is turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID and password. The dialog appears the initial
screen of both the control panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI

Device Specification ID

ID assigned for each device model. It shows the usage of functions that are equipped by MFP, as well as CPCA API specification
and version numbers that is necessary for acquiring the values such as maximum number of copies, etc.

DIS

Dynamic Service Loading Installer Service. Receives data from the DSL on the MEAP platform. Enables an application to install
to two or more devices.

DSL

Dynamic Service Loading. While the SMS installs a license file and application to one device, the DSL can install them to two or
more devices. It consists of MEAP ESM and the DIS.

Esplet

Esplet Type Application. A type of MEAP application that does not have a user interface on the device console or on the web
browser. The term of "Esplet" is a coinage by Canon inspired from Applet, Servlet, and "Espresso".

File descriptor

With a file descriptor, an OS identifies the files that a program accesses. The file descriptor includes information such as file name
and size as well as the identifier. An OS determines files to operate with the identifier.

iR Native Application

The functionalities that existing imageRUNNER has such as Copy, Universal Send and Mailbox.

ISV

Independent Software Vender. Software manufacturer who develops and/or sells applications and tools but does not entire
computer systems. Refers application developer in this document.

J2ME

Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices
such as cellular phones and PDA.

Java

A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, in the U. S. A. Low dependent on models and OSes and runs on
various platforms. Taking advantage of this feature, many applications that runs on web servers uses Java. The MEAP platform
uses J2ME - a type of Java.

Java Script

A script language developed by Netscape Communications, in the U.S. A., runs on web browsers such as Netscape Navigator and
Internet Explorer.
Allows web designers to create interactive pages with HTML files such as animated buttons and display of timetables.

Java VM

JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code
using the native instruction set.

License Access Number

A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires entries of application ID, expiration date/times
information, and the number of access numbers, to issue license access numbers.

License File

A software manufacture of a MEAP application provides the users with the license files. Specifies the terms of agreement that a
user concludes with the manufacturer. Required for installing a MEAP application.

Login Service

Manages user information of MEAP device. Authenticates users with user names and passwords. Three login services are
available for MEAP device - Default Authentication, which provides department ID control, SDL (Simple Device Login) and SSO
(Single Sign-On).

MEAP

Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment for executing application programs on a peripheral
device. Uses the Java platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for MEAP.

MEAP AMS

MEAP Application Management System. The license issuing server that issues "License File" necessary for MEAP applications
to be installed onto MEAP device. Also used for issuing the "License Access Number".

MEAP Application

Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files (*.jar) and the license file (*.lic).

MEAP Contents

Required to install an MEAP application to a MEAP device.

MEAP ESM

MEAP Enterprise Service Manager. One of software programs composing the DSL, to be installed on a PC in a Windows
environment. Works as the interface with the DSL.

MEAP Specifications

MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than
CPCA, such as network and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model.

MEAP device

imageRUNNER (iR) device that has MEAP Platform incorporated.

MFP

Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax.

OSGi

Open Service Gateway Initiative. See "http://www.osgi.org/".

Portal Service

The service displayed on a Web browser by inputting the address

"http://<device IP address>:8000/" or "http://<device IP address>/"
A portal to access a MEAP device from a Web browser.

Proxy Server

Provides functions to store data fetched from remote servers.

When a user request to display a web page that has been displayed and stored in the proxy, the proxy server read the stored data
but does not access the remote server where the original page is present, for efficient access services. When a proxy server receives
a URL from a PC, it searches the file in the cache and sends it to the PC if the requested file is found. If the requested file is not
stored in the cache, it accesses the remote server of the URL to acquire the file and, at the same time, stores the acquired file in
the cache so that the proxy server can quickly send the file at the next request.

Chapter 11

Detail of License File

LicenseFile-Version: 1
LicenseFile-Id: f6489a8c-8c7e-4d74-bd12-b031ea6a62a5
Application-Id: e92b0b91-7c42-45b1-96b3-295d5d1b5877
Serial-No: XYZ00123
Validated-Period: 100
MaximumBWScan1: 1000, stop
MaximumBWScan2: 900, stop
MaximumBWScan3: 800, stop
MaximumBWScan4: 700, stop
MaximumPrintedImpressions: 1000, stop
MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW: 800, stop
MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW-Large: 200, stop
MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW-Small: 600, stop
MaximumScannedImpressions: 2000, stop
MaximumScannedImpressions-BW: 1200, stop

License File ID
Application ID
Serial No
Validated Period

Counter information

IxQvZ/A8O0aDsUBdMeu5XrxqIsqLzq7JAjHAD/ZMnNxVMsR7RGcuI2c6RRdU7mlW
ht2VF8LA3SH6n4kxvZYmEQZ8pBhu67wliysAJ0gHS0l6WsMqX6WI5ZAQeD8TZnnf
344VXYG4

F-11-68

11.1.29 Option for exclusive individual measure

0017-8720

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
-Display Setting of Copy Tab
Make a setting as to whether to display/hide the copy screen (copy tab) on the control panel. This is the specification for users who want to customize hiding it on
control panel.
Default value
1: display
Setting range, item
0: hide 1: display

Setting Procedure
1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then
by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed).
2) Press [COPIER] button.
3) Press [Option] button.
4) Press [BODY] button.
5) Press [<-]or[->] (arrow) button.
6) Press [UI-COPY] button.
7) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
8) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.

-Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2)

In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application, hide the warning screen of error/JAM (such as JAM screen, door opening, no-toner). In the case that
these errors occur, there will be a display indicating 'call the service personnel' etc.

Memo:
Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen.
- As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
- As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]

Default value
1: No activation of warning display

11-43

Chapter 11

Setting range, item

0: display warning screen 1: hide warning screen

Setting Procedure
1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then
by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed).
2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on
control panel, the screen is displayed.
3) Press [COPIER] button.
4) Press [Option] button.
5) Press [BODY] button.
6) Press [<-]or[->] button.
7) Press [ANIM-SW] button.
8) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.

-Setting of Screen Transition from MEAP Screen to the Standard Screen

In the case that the operation is restricted by MEAP application, make a setting to hide Native applications such as Copy/Send/Box. With this setting, disable screen
transition with => key.
Default value
0: OFF (transit to Native screen)
Setting range, item
0: OFF (transit to Native screen)

1: ON (No-transition to Native screen)

Setting Procedure
1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then,
by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed).
2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on
control panel, the screen is displayed.
3) Press [COPIER] button.
4) Press [Option] button.
5) Press [BODY] button.
6) Press [<-] (arrow) button.
7) Press [ANIM-DSP] button.
8) Press either 0 (transit to Native screen) or 1 (no-transition to Native screen) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press
[OK] button.
9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.

11.1.30 Construction of the MEAP Platform

0010-1119

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

In addition to the installation of the system software, language file, and RUI, a printer equipped with MEAP functions calls for the installation of MEAP content,
which offers functions (system services) needed to run MEAP applications and class libraries needed by the MEAP applications to control the device.
It is important that the version of the system software be fully compatible with the version of the MEAP content, calling for special care. (In the case of a mismatch,
the device will not be able to run the MEAP application.) For version information, refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in conjunction with the
system software.
The following shows the components of a MEAP application:

[5]

[7] [8]

[1]
[6]
[4]

[2]
[3]
F-11-69

[1] User Interface Control Bock

installed as part of the system software
[2] Device Control Block
installed as part of the system software
[3] Operating System
installed as part of the system software
[4] Java VM
installed as part of the system software
[5] MEAP System Services (includes SDL/SSO)
installed as part of MEAP content
[6] Device Control Class Library
installed as part of MEAP content
[7] internally developed application
[8] externally developed application

11-44

Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection

Contents

Contents
12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .......................................................................................................................................12-1
12.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.2 Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.3 Printer Unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2 Durables and Consumables ........................................................................................................................................12-1

12.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2.2 Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2.3 Printer Unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure........................................................................................................................12-2

12.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ..................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.3.2 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (reader unit).............................................................................................................. 12-3
12.3.3 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (printer unit) ............................................................................................................. 12-3
12.3.4 Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing Work ......................................................................................................................... 12-8

12.4 Cleaning .....................................................................................................................................................................12-9

12.4.1 Cleaning the Primary Charging Roller .................................................................................................................................... 12-9

Chapter 12

12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts

12.1.1 Overview
0000-9632

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis so as to ensure a specific level of performance. They may be free of external changes or damage,
but they can significantly affect the machine performance once they lose their function.
It is best if replacement work is scheduled to coincide with a scheduled visit to the user's.
The values indicated herein are estimates only and are subject to change depending on the site environment and how the machine is used.

12.1.2 Reader Unit

0000-9633

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's reader unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.

12.1.3 Printer Unit

0000-9634

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's printer unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.

12.2 Durables and Consumables

12.2.1 Overview
0000-9642

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Some parts of the machine may have to be replaced once or more over the period of machine warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them as needed by
referring to the table of estimated lives (expressed in terms of the number of prints they make).
Making Checks When Replacing Durables
Use the following service mode items to find out when to replace parts:
- Machine
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC(Bk developing unit only)
- Accessory
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2

12.2.2 Reader Unit

0000-9645

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's reader unit does not have parts that are classified as durables.

12.2.3 Printer Unit

0000-9647

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

as of July 2007
Ref.

Parts name

Pats No.

Q'ty

Estimated life
(prints)

Remarks

[1]

Developing unit (Bk)

FM2-1751

500,000

[2]

Developing unit (Y)

FM2-1752

50,000

[3]

Developing unit (M)

FM2-1753

50,000

[4]

Developing unit (C)

FM2-1754

50,000

[5]

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)

FC5-0334

300,000 images

*1

[6]

ITB cleaning blade

FC5-0368

100,000 images

*1

[7]

Primary transfer roller

FC5-6920

300,000 images

*1

[8]

Secondary transfer inside roller

FC5-0337

300,000 images

*1

[9]

Secondary transfer outside roller

FC5-0661

60,000

[10]

Separation static eliminator

FC5-0664

240,000

[11]

Fixing assembly 100 V

FM2-0172

200,000

*2

Fixing assembly 115 V

FM2-0173

200,000

*2

Fixing assembly 230 V

FM2-0174

200,000

*2

Fixing roller

FC6-6996

100,000

*3

[13]

Pressure roller

FC6-6997

100,000

*3

[14]

Fixing upper frame unit

FM2-0176

100,000

*3

[15]

Separation roller

FC6-6661

120,000

[16]

Manual feed pickup roller

FB1-8581

240,000

[12]

[17]

Manual feed separation pad

FC7-9481

240,000

[18]

Dust-blocking glass cleaning pad

FL2-0033

500,000

[19]

ITB Waste Toner Unit

FM2-0083

60,000 images

*1

12-1

Chapter 12
as of July 2007
Ref.

Parts name

Pats No.

Q'ty

Estimated life
(prints)

Remarks

*1:

The value here is an estimate expressed in terms of the number of mono color prints made. In the case of
full-color prints, the value will be 1/4 of that indicated.

*2:

Be sure to replace the fixing roller, pressure roller, and fixing upper frame unit when 100,000 prints are
made.

*3:

Be sure to replace the fixing roller, pressure roller, and fixing upper frame unit at a time; or to replace the
fixing assembly every 100,000 prints.

Expected service life shows the central value of a group of evaluation data points. Parts Numbers may subject to change because of design changes.

[12]
[13]
[11]
[5]

[7]

[8]

[10]
[9]

[14]

[6]

[17]

[16]
[15]

[4]

[1]

[15]

[19]

[2]
[18]
[3]

F-12-1

12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure

12.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure
0000-9666

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- As a rule, provide scheduled servicing every 60,000 prints.

- Before setting out for a visit, check with the service book, and take parts for which replacement is expected.
- Disconnect the power plug on a periodical basis, and clean it and the area around it with a dry cloth. If left connected for a long time in an area subject to high
humidity or oily smoke, it can catch fire (the buildup of dust is likely to absorb moisture and cause insulation failure).
<Work Procedure>
1) Report to the person in charge, and check the general condition.
2) Record the counter readings, and check the faulty prints.
3) Make the following checks, and clean/adjust the components:
- COPIER > COUNTER > MISC > FX-UP-RL
- COPIER > COUNTER > MISC > DV-UNT-K

12-2

Chapter 12

Any of the following indicates that the counter reading is incorrect:

a. the counter reading is lower than that recorded for the previous service visit.
b. the counter reading is excessively high in relation to the increase in the total counter reading recorded for the previous service visit.

If the counter reading is faulty, make the following computation, and enter the result:
A = current reading of 'total 2'.
B = reading of 'total 2' recorded for the previous service visit.
C = reading of 'FX-UP-RL' or 'DV-UNIT-K' recorded for the previous service visit.
Enter the result of the following for 'FX-UP-RL' or 'DV-UNIT-K':
(A - B) + C
4) Check the following item, and clean/adjust the parts as necessary.
T-12-1
Item to check
Test Copy

image density standards

soiling of white background
clarity of characters
margin
fixing

incorrect registration, soiling of back of paper

margin standards (singe-sided print)

leading edge: 2.5 +/-1.5 mm

left edge: 2.5 +/-1.5 mm

(double-sided print)

leading edge: 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm

left edge: 2.5 +/-2.0 mm

Laser Exposure System dust-blocking glass cleaning tool

Feeding System

registration upper/lower roller

paper lint in front of registration assembly

5) Check the waste toner case.

If the case is half full, dispose of the waste toner in a plastic bag for collection. Or, replace it with a new one.

- If you have to dispose of waste toner, be sure that you follow the rules and regulations imposed by the local authorities.
- Do not throw waste toner into fire. (It can explode, creating significant hazards.)
6) Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass.
7) Make test copies.
8) Make sample copies.
9) Check the operation of the leakage breaker.
While the machine remains on, press the test switch of the leakage breaker to see if it operates normally (i.e., the lever shits to the OFF side to cut off the power).
- If the leakage breaker fails to operate normally, replace it, and make the foregoing check once again.
[Resetting]
After making the check, turn off the power switch; then, shift the lever back to the ON position, and turn on the power.
10) Put the sample copies in order, and clean up the area around the machine.
11) Record the final counter readings. At this time, be sure also to record the readings of 'FX-UP-RL' and 'DV-UNIT-K'.
12) Fill out the service book and report to the person in charge.
Be sure to record the result of the check on the leakage breaker in the service book.

12.3.2 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (reader unit)

0000-9673

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's reader unit does not have items that must be serviced on a scheduled basis.
Be sure to clean the copyboard glass and the ADF reading glass during each visit you make for scheduled servicing.

12.3.3 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (printer unit)

0000-9676

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

12-3

Chapter 12
Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated.
T-12-2
Unit

Location

Item of Interwork
vals

Transfer
assembly

Transfer/feed guide clean

Remarks

At the
time of
drum
unit
replacem
ent

[1] Feed guide

[2] Secondary transfer front outside guide
[3] Secondary transfer front inside guide

Transfer
assembly

patch image read

sensor

clean

At the
time of
drum
unit
replacem
ent

Transfer
assembly

Drive roller/
Tension roller/
Inside brade

clean

300,000
images

[1] Drive roller

[2] Tension roller
[3] Inside blade

12-4

Chapter 12
Unit

Location

Item of Interwork
vals

Transfer
assembly

Mylar sheet

clean

Remarks

300,000
images

[1] Mylar sheet

Transfer
assembly

ITB cleaning blade clean

fixing base

At the
time of
drum
unit
replacem
ent

Transfer
assembly

ATR sensor
window/shutter

At the
time of
drum
unit
replacem
ent

[1] ITB cleaning blade fixing base

clean

[1] ATR sensor unit

[2] ATR sensor window
[3] Shutter
Transfer
assembly

Transfer
assembly

rotary upper cover clean

ITB/HP sensor

clean

At the
time of
drum
unit
replacem
ent

If there is no stained image at the time of drum unit

replacement, clean it at the time of 300,000 images.
For instructions on how to remove the rotary upper cover,
see "Disassembly and Assembly" under "Image
Formation System."

300,000
images

12-5

Chapter 12
Unit

Location

Item of Interwork
vals

Transfer
assembly

ITB releasing part

clean

Remarks

300,000
images

[1]

[1]ITB releasing part

Before cleaning the part, remove the ITB unit and the
drum unit from the machine.
Developing
assembly

Photosensitive
drum butting roll

clean

120,000
images

[1] Photosensitive drum butting rolls

Perform the work only for the Bk developing unit. The
color units need not be cleaned (as they are replaced after
30,000 images).
Developing
assembly

Developing
assembly casing

clean

120,000
images

[1] Developing assembly casing

Perform the work only for the Bk developing unit. The
color developing units need not be cleaned (as they are
replaced after 30,000 images).

12-6

Developing
assembly

Rotary lower cover clean

120,000
images

Feeding
assembly

Registration roller

At the
time of
drum
unit
replacem
ent

clean

For instructions on how to remove the rotary lower cover,

see "Disassembly and Assembly" under "Image
Formation System."

Chapter 12
Unit

Location

Item of Interwork
vals

Feeding
assembly

Registration front
guide

clean

Remarks

At the
time of
drum
unit
replacem
ent

[1] Registration front guide

Feeding
assembly

Transparency
sensor surface

clean

240,000
images

Feeding
assembly

Feeding roller,
scraping ring

clean

as
needed

[1] Delivery rollers

[2] Scrape rings
Clean the part only when dirt is conspicuous.
You need not clean the parts if a Finisher-P1 is installed.
Feeding
assembly

Duplex feed roller

1/2

clean

as
needed

Clean the part only when dirt is conspicuous.

Fixing
assembly

Fixing outlet roller, clean

roll

as
needed

Clean the part only when dirt is conspicuous.

Fixing
assembly

Fixing delivery
guide assembly

as
needed

clean

[1] Fixing delivery guide

Clean the part if adhesion is found.

12-7

Chapter 12
Unit

Location

Item of Interwork
vals

Others

Dust-blocking
glass

clean

Remarks

At the
time of
drum
unit
replacem
ent

[1] Dust-blocking guide

The above values are estimates only, and are subject to change according to future data.

12.3.4 Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing Work

0000-9678

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- If you used solvent, be sure to check that the part has completely dried before fitting it back to the machine.
- Do not use a wet (moist) cloth in areas not specifically indicated.
- Be sure to conduct scheduled servicing at the indicated intervals.

ITB HP sensor
Dry wipe with
lint-free paper.

Drive roller

Delivery roller
Scraping ring

Dry wipe with

lint-free paper;
as necessary, use alcohol.

ITB cleaning
blade fixing

Fixing/delivery
guide assembly
Fixing outlet roller
Fixing outlet roll

Patch image reading

sensor window

Duplexing
feed roller 1

Use a blower brush or

lint-free paper with alcohol.
Never dry wipe.

Feed guide
Duplex feed roller 2
Transfer guide
assembly
Registration roller

Rotary upper
cover
ATR sensor
window shutter

Transparency
sensor surface
Never use a blower brush.

Registration front
guide assembly

Rotary lower cover

ITB releasing part

Dust-blocking
glass

Dry wipe with

lint-free paper.

Dry wipe with lint-free paper.

Be sure to clean in one
direction only. As necessary,
use alcohol, and dry wipe
thereafter.

Photosensitive drum
Butting roll
Developing cartridge
assembly
Note: Unless otherwise specified, use lint-free paper with alcohol.

F-12-2

12-8

Chapter 12

12.4 Cleaning
12.4.1 Cleaning the Primary Charging Roller
0004-1957

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Cleaning the primary charging roller involves rotating the drum manually. Be sure of the following during the work:
- Do not touch the imaging area of the drum surface. The presence of finger prints or oils can cause cracking of the surface. Whenever possible, try washing
the hands before starting the work.
- Be sure to rotate the drum in the correct direction. Go over the following, and make sure not to rotate it in the wrong direction.

Be sure to use paper under the drum unit to prevent adhesion of dust.
1) Insert paper through the gap under the primary charging roller cover [1], all the way until it stops.

F-12-3

Be sure to perform step 1) without fail to protect the drum from scratches and external light.
2) Free the 4 protrusions [1], and detach the primary charging roller cover [2].

F-12-4

3) Dry wipe the primary charging roller [1] with lint-free paper. Be sure to move the paper in axial direction and in one direction.

F-12-5

4) Hold the end of the drum [A] (i.e., non-imaging area, shown in beige); then, turn the drum in the direction of the arrow (clockwise direction when viewing the
drum unit from the front). This will rotate the primary charging roller.

12-9

Chapter 12

F-12-6

Do not touch the imaging area [A] (shown in moss green) of the drum surface. The presence of fingerprints or oils will cause cracking of the drum
surface.

F-12-7

Be sure to pay attention to the direction of drum rotation. Do NOT rotate it counterclockwise when viewing the drum unit from the front. If you
inadvertently started to turn it in the wrong direction, stop immediately; then, put the drum unit back into the machine, generate a halftone image, and
check to see that the output is free of image faults.
5) Repeat steps 3) and 4) to clean the entire surface of the primary charging roller.

If subjected to light for a long time, the drum will deteriorate. Be sure to work briskly (e.g., within 5 min or less).

When removing the primary charging roller cover, be sure also to keep paper between the primary charging roller and the drum as you did when removing the
cover. Remove the paper after you have attached the cover.

12-10

Chapter 13 Standards and Adjustments

Contents

Contents
13.1 Image Adjustments ....................................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1.1 Standards for Image Position ................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Checking the Image Position ................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.3 Cassette .................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.1.4 Manual Feed Tray .................................................................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.5 Side Paper Deck ....................................................................................................................................................................... 13-4

13.2 Scanning System ........................................................................................................................................................13-4

13.2.1 After Replacing CIS................................................................................................................................................................. 13-4
13.2.2 After Replacing Copyboard Glass ........................................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.2.3 After Replacing ADF Reading Glass....................................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.2.4 After Replacing Reader Controller PCB or After Initializing the RAM ................................................................................. 13-5

13.3 Laser Exposure System ..............................................................................................................................................13-6

13.3.1 After Replacing Laser Scanner Unit ........................................................................................................................................ 13-6

13.4 Image Formation System ...........................................................................................................................................13-6

13.4.1 After Replacing Intermediate Transfer Unit ............................................................................................................................ 13-6
13.4.2 After Replacing Intermediate Transfer Belt ............................................................................................................................ 13-6
13.4.3 After Replacing Primary Transfer Roller ................................................................................................................................ 13-6
13.4.4 After Replacing Drum Unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.4.5 After Replacing Developing Unit (Y/M/C) ............................................................................................................................. 13-7
13.4.6 After Replacing Developing Unit (Bk).................................................................................................................................... 13-7
13.4.7 After Replacing Secondary Transfer Outer Roller .................................................................................................................. 13-7
13.4.8 How to replace the primary transfer roller holder.................................................................................................................... 13-7

13.5 Fixing System ............................................................................................................................................................13-8

13.5.1 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.5.2 After Replacing the Fixing Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 13-8
13.5.3 After Replacing the Fixing Roller............................................................................................................................................ 13-8
13.5.4 Nip Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................................ 13-8
13.5.5 Point to Note About the Position of the Fixing Main Thermistor ........................................................................................... 13-9
13.5.6 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Sub Thermistor...................................................................................................... 13-9
13.5.7 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal Switch ................................................................................................... 13-10

13.6 Electrical Components .............................................................................................................................................13-10

13.6.1 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB.......................................................................................................................... 13-10
13.6.2 After Replacing DC Controller PCB ..................................................................................................................................... 13-11
13.6.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) ................................................................................................................. 13-11
13.6.4 After Replacing the SRAM Board ......................................................................................................................................... 13-11
13.6.5 After Replacing the HDD ...................................................................................................................................................... 13-12
13.6.6 When Replacing HVT PCB ................................................................................................................................................... 13-12

13.7 Pickup/Feeding System............................................................................................................................................13-12

13.7.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Pickup Cassette ....................................................................... 13-12
13.7.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit............................................................................. 13-13
13.7.3 Adjust the Horizontal Registration for the Manual Feed Tray .............................................................................................. 13-14
13.7.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value.............................................................................................................................. 13-14

Chapter 13

13.1 Image Adjustments

Decrease the value of REGIST.
(A decrease by 10 will
increase the margin by 1 mm.)

13.1.1 Standards for Image Position

0001-6001

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
A print made at a magnification of 100% must meet the following standards
for image margin/non-image width:
- Margin Along the Leading Edge
2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of double-sided copy
2.5 2.0mm

1st side copy

2.5

1.5mm

Leading edge
of paper
Increase the value
of REGIST.
(An increase by
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 10 will decrease
the margin by
1 mm.)

F-13-5

2. Left/right image margin (1st side)

Use it to adjust the horizontal registration mechanically.
3. Leading edge image margin (2nd side)
Use the following service mode item to adjust the registration:
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> RG-REFE

0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

F-13-1

- Left/Right Image Margin

2nd side of
double-sided copy

2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of double-sided copy
2.5 2.0mm

Decrease the value of RG-REFE.

(A decrease by 10 will
increase the margin by 1 mm.)
2.5

2.0mm

Leading edge
of paper

Increase the value

of RG-REFE.
(An increase by
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 10 will decrease
the margin by
1 mm.)

2
4
5
6
8
10

F-13-6
F-13-2

4. Left/right image margin (2nd side)

Use the following service mode item to adjust the horizontal registration:

- Leading Edge Non-Image Width

- Cassette 1
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-C1RE

2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of double-sided copy
2.5 1.5mm

Paper left edge

Decrease the value of
ADJ-C1RE
(A decrease by 1 will
increase the margin by
0.1 mm.)

0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

Increase the value of

ADJ-C1RE
(An increase by 1 will
decrease the margin by
0.1 mm.)
2nd side of
double-sided copy
for cassette
1 2.5 2.0mm

F-13-3

- Left/Right Non-Image Width

2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of double-sided copy
2.5 1.5mm

0
2

0
2

4
5
6

4
5
6

10

F-13-7
10

- Cassette 2
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-C2RE

F-13-4

13.1.2 Checking the Image Position

0001-1715

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Make 10 prints each using the following sources of paper; then, check to
make sure that the image margin and the non-image width are as indicated;
[1] individual cassettes
[2] manual feed tray
[3] side paper deck
If not as indicated, make the following adjustments:
1. Leading edge image margin (1st side)
Use the following service mode item to adjust the registration:
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> REGIST

13-1

Chapter 13

Paper left edge

Increase the value of
ADJ-C2RE
(An increase by 1 will
decrease the margin by
0.1 mm.)

Decrease the value of

ADJ-C2RE
(A decrease by 1 will
increase the margin by
0.1 mm.)

2nd side of
double-sided copy
for cassette
1 2.5 2.0mm

0
2
4
5
6
8

[2]

10

[1]

F-13-8
F-13-11

5. Leading edge non-image width

Use the following service mode item to make adjustments:
COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-X

2) Slide out the cassette 1 or 2.

(In the case of a 2-cassette pedestal, slide out the cassette 3 or 4.)
3) Check the index [1].
(Perform this step also for a 2-cassette pedestal.)

Decrease the value

of ADJ-X.
(A decrease by
10 will decrease
the margin by
1 mm.)

1st side copy 2.5 1.5mm

2nd side of double-sided copy
2.5 1.5mm

Leading edge
of paper

0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

Increase the value

of ADJ-X
(An increase by
10 will increase
the margin by
1 mm.)

F-13-9

6. Left/right non-image width

Use the following service mode item to make adjustments:
COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y

F-13-12

Paper left edge

Decrease the value of
ADJ-Y.
(A decrease by 10 will
decrease the margin by
1 mm.)

A-1. Making Adjustments of the Cassette 1 (left/right image margin;

1st side)
4) Free the 2 claws [2], and detach the grip (right front) [1].

Increase the value of

ADJ-Y.
(An increase by 10 will
increase the margin by
1 mm.)
2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of
double-sided copy
2.5 1.5mm

0
2
4
5
6
8
10

F-13-10
F-13-13

13.1.3 Cassette
0001-1716

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
A. Left/Right Image Margin Adjustment (1st side)
1) Open the lower right cover [2]; then, remove the 2 screws, and
detach the cover (lower front) [1].

13-2

5) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the horizontal registration adjusting plate
[1] of the cassette.
6) In keeping with the index you checked in step 3), move the horizontal
registration adjusting plate back and forth. Moving the adjusting plate toward the rear of the machine will increase the left/right image margin on
the front of the image.

Chapter 13

Paper left edge

Decrease the value of
ADJ-C1RE
(A decrease by 1 will
increase the margin by
0.1 mm.)

Increase the value of

ADJ-C1RE
(An increase by 1 will
decrease the margin by
0.1 mm.)
2nd side of
double-sided copy
for cassette
1 2.5 2.0mm

0
2
4
5
6

F-13-14

7) Tighten the fixing screw.

8) Fit the cassette 1.
9) Make copies using the cassette 1 as the source of paper, and check to
make sure that the margin is as indicated.
10) Fit back the grip (right front).
11) Fit back the machine's right front cover.

10

A-2. Making Adjustments for the Cassette 2 ( left/right image margin; 1st side)
4) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the horizontal registration adjusting plate
[1] of the cassette.
5) In keeping with the index you checked in step 3), move the horizontal
registration adjusting plate back and forth. Moving the adjusting plate toward the rear of the machine will increase the left/right image margin on
the front of the image.

F-13-16

B-2. Making Adjustments for Cassette 2 (left/right image margin;

2nd side)
1) Enter the same value as for ADJ-C1RE using the following service mode
item:
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C2RE
2) Make double-sided copies from the cassette 2, and check to make sure
that the margin is as indicated.
3) If not as indicated, change the adjustment value of the left/right margin
on the 2nd side for the cassette 2.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C2RE
An increase by 1 will decrease the left/right margin on the front by 0.1
mm.
Paper left edge
Decrease the value of
ADJ-C2RE
(A decrease by 1 will
increase the margin by
0.1 mm.)

Increase the value of

ADJ-C2RE
(An increase by 1 will
decrease the margin by
0.1 mm.)
2nd side of
double-sided copy
for cassette
1 2.5 2.0mm

0
2
4
5
6
8

F-13-15

6) Tighten the fixing screw.

7) Fit back the cassette 2.
8) Make copies using the cassette 2 as the source of paper, and check to make
sure that the margin is as indicated.
9) Fit back the machine's right front cover.
B. Left/Right Image Margin (2nd side)

10

F-13-17

4) Record the new adjustment values on the service label.

- ADJ-C1RE
- ADJ-C2RE
5) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

13.1.4 Manual Feed Tray

0001-1718

B-1. Making Adjustments for Cassette 1 (left/right image margin; 2nd

side)
1) If the margin is not as indicated, change the adjustment value for the left/
right margin of the 2nd side.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C1RE
An increase by 1 will decrease the left/right margin on the front by 0.1
mm.

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
A. Left/Right Margin Adjustment (1st side; mechanical adjustment)
1) Place paper in the manual feed tray.
2) Make copies using the manual feed tray, and check to make sure that
the left/right margin is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
- If not as indicated, perform the following:
3) Remove the paper from the manual feed tray.
4) Loosen the manual feed tray upper cover fixing screw [1].

13-3

Chapter 13

A. Left/Right Margin Adjustment (1st side; mechanical adjustment)

1) Make copies using the paper deck as the source of paper, and check to
make sure that the left-right margin is 2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm.
- If not as indicated, perform the following:
2) Slide out the compartment.
3) Turn the 2 screws [2] to adjust the position of the latch plate [1] of the
deck open solenoid (SL2D).
At this time, use the index [3] on the latch plate as a reference.
[1]

[3]

[2]

F-13-18

5) So that the margin is as indicated, move the manual feed tray upper cover
back and froth.
Moving the manual feed tray upper cover toward the rear of the machine
will decrease the left/right margin on the front side.
6) Tighten the manual feed tray upper cover fixing screw.
7) Place paper in the manual feed tray.
8) Make copies using the manual feed tray as the source of paper, and
check to make sure that the margin is as indicated.
B. Left/Right Margin Adjustment (2nd side)
1) Make double-sided copies using the manual feed tray as the source of
paper, and check to make sure that the left/right margin on the 2nd side is
2.5 2.0 mm.
2) If not as indicated, change the adjustment value of the left/right margin
on the 2nd side for the manual feed tray.
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-MFRE
An increase by 1 will decrease the left/right image margin by 0.1 mm on
the front side.
Paper left edge
Decrease the value of
ADJ-MFRE.
(A decrease by 1 will
increase the margin
by 0.1 mm.)

Increase the value of

ADJ-MFRE.
(An increase by 1 will
decrease the margin
by 0.1 mm.)

F-13-21

B. Left/Right Margin Adjustment (2nd side)

1) Start service mode, and check the left/right margin for the cassette 1:
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-CIRE
2) Enter the adjustment value of the left/right margin on the 2nd side for
the cassette 1 as the left/right margin on the 2nd side of the side deck.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-DKRE
An increase by 1 will increase the left/right image on the front by 0.1 mm.
Paper left edge
Decrease the value of
ADJ-DKRE.
(A decrease by 1 will
decrease the margin by
0.1 mm.)

2nd side of
double-sided copy
for manual feed
tray: 2.5 2.0mm

Increase the value of

ADJ-DKRE.
(An increase by 1 will
increase the margin
by 0.1 mm.)
2nd side of
double-sided copy
for paper deck
: 2.5 2.0mm

0
2
4
5
6

4
5
6

10

F-13-19
10

3) Record the new adjustment values on the service label.

- ADJ-MFRE
4) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

F-13-22

3) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

13.1.5 Side Paper Deck

0001-1722

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

13.2 Scanning System

1) Check to make sure that the 4 adjusters [1] of the pedestal are in firm contact with the floor.

13.2.1 After Replacing CIS

[1]

0002-4555

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Be sure to enter the values indicated on the CIS label attached to the contact
image sensor (CIS) using the following service mode items:
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> CCDU-RG
(offset value against color displacement caused by CIS)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-MG
(MTF correction value for main scanning direction)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-SG
(MTF correction value for sub scanning direction)

[1]
F-13-20

2) Connect the machine's power plug, and turn on the power.

3) When the machine has completed its wait period, make copies using
the paper deck as the source of paper; then, make checks.

13-4

Chapter 13

-04

BOOK-RG

-012

72

70
F-13-25

CCDU-RG

13.2.3 After Replacing ADF Reading Glass

MTF-SG

0002-4566

MTF-MG

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

F-13-23

Also, be sure to update the values indicated on the service label attached behind the reader left cover by the values indicated on the CIS label.
MEMO:
The machine is not shipped out of the factory with the CIS label attached to
it.

Enter the value indicated by the bar code found on the ADF reading glass using the following service mode item. (offset value against color displacement
caused by stream reading glass)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DF-RG

13.2.2 After Replacing Copyboard Glass

0002-4561

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Enter the value indicated by the bar code found at the upper right on the
copyboard glass (copyboard cover) using the following service mode.
(standard white plate white level data X, Y, Z)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Z

002

DF-RG

F-13-26

13.2.4 After Replacing Reader Controller PCB or After

Initializing the RAM
0002-4569

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Before replacing the reader controller PCB, be sure to generate the latest PPRINT printout.
In the case that you are initializing the RAM of the reader
controller without replacing the PCB
Using the SST, upload the R-CON backup data; after initializing the RAM,
download the data, thus eliminating the need for the following adjustment.

W-PLT-X

W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y
F-13-24

2) Enter the value indicated by the bar code found at the upper left of the
copyboard glass (copyboard cover) using the following service mode
item. (offset value against color displacement caused by copyboard glass)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> BOOK-RG

Reader Unit-Related Adjustment

1) Using the SST, download the latest system software (R-CON).
2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION>
CLEAR> R-CON; then, press the OK key to initialize the RAM. Thereafter, turn off and then on the main power.
3) Enter the appropriate values using the following service mode items:
- standard white plate white level data
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X,Y,Z
- offset value against color displacement for copyboard glass (copyboard
cover)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> BOOK-RG
- offset value against color displacement for ADF reading glass
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DF-RG

13-5

Chapter 13

3) When you have finished the foregoing adjustments, put the P-PRINT
printout [1] you have previously generated in the service book cassette to
replace the old P-PRINT printout.

BOOK-RG

DF-RG

F-13-28

13.3 Laser Exposure System

13.3.1 After Replacing Laser Scanner Unit
0001-6187

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

W- P LT- X

W- P LT- Z
W- P LT- Y
F-13-27

- service label (behind reader unit left cover) values

- CIS read position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
- main scanning direction position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
- shading position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
- sub scanning direction color displacement correction
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG
- main/sub scanning direction MTF value
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG,SG
- auto gradation correction target value
COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL>OFST-P-Y,M,C,K

Enter the values indicated on the label attached to the laser scanner unit using
the following service mode item:
COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LA-DELAY

13.4 Image Formation System

13.4.1 After Replacing Intermediate Transfer Unit
0001-6190

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Select the following in service mode:
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX

13.4.2 After Replacing Intermediate Transfer Belt

0001-6879

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Select the following in service mode:
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> 1ATVC-EX

If the value of the following was not 0 before the replacement of the reader
controller PCB:
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> CCD-LUT.
Set a value other than '0' once again, and make the following adjustments
using the D-10 Chart.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> LUT-ADJ2

ADF-Related Adjustment

13.4.3 After Replacing Primary Transfer Roller

0001-6881

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Select the following in service mode:
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX

13.4.4 After Replacing Drum Unit

0001-6872

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The machine keeps ADF-related service mode data in the RAM of the
reader controller; as such, you will have to make the appropriate
adjustments if you have replaced the reader controller or initialized the
RAM.

1) Enter the values indicated in the P-PRINT printout you have previously
generated using the following service mode:
- main scanning direction position adjustment (stream reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF
- original stop position adjustment
FEEDER>ADJUST>DOCST
- original feed speed (magnification) adjustment
FEEDER>ADJUST>LA-SPEED
2) Make adjustments using the following items:
- tray width adjustment
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-A4
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-A5R
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-LTR
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-LTRR
- CIS read position adjustment (stream reading)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS
- white level adjustment
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD>DF-WLVL1
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD>DF-WLVL2

13-6

1) Initialize the drum unit.

Select the following in service mode:
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> DRM-LIFE
The indication "ACTIVE" is flashed on the screen while the initialization
is in process. Once the process completes, "OK" is indicated. The
initialization completes in about 1 min.

Be sure not to touch any key, open the door, or turn off the power while
initialization is in process (during the indication "ACTIVE" is flashing).
Otherwise, go back to step 1) and start over.

2) When initialization is done, check that the value is "0" by selecting the following in service mode:
COPIER> DISPLAY> MISC> DRM-LIFE
If the value is not "0", go back to step 1) and start over.
3) Obtain the value by selecting the following in service mode:
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DR-I-INT
Then, record the obtained value in the Remarks field of the drum initial
value label (attached to the light-blocking sheet of a new drum unit).
As necessary, record the date of drum unit replacement and the counter

Chapter 13

13.4.8 How to replace the primary transfer roller holder

reading on the drum initial value label.

4) Attach the drum initial value label to the front [1] of the drum unit.

0006-9351

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
<Removing steps>
1) Draw a mark-off line at the attachment position of the primary transfer
roller holder. At this time, care should be taken to draw the line precisely
because the primary transfer roller holder is attached back based on the
line.

F-13-29

5) Execute "Full Adjust" of the auto gradation correction in additional functions mode.

13.4.5 After Replacing Developing Unit (Y/M/C)

0001-6772

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Select the following in service mode for the target item (color):
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y/M/C
2) Select the following in service mode for the target item (color):
COPIER>
FUNCTION>
INSTALL>
INIT-Y/M/CiY/M/
CINIT-3j
3) Select the following in service mode for the target item (color):
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> SPLY-Y/M/C
4) Obtain the values by selecting the followings in service mode for the target item (color):
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-Y/M/C, and
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > REF-Y/M/C
Then, record the obtained values in the service label.
5) Execute "Full Adjust" of the auto gradation correction in additional functions mode.

[1]

13.4.6 After Replacing Developing Unit (Bk)

0001-6193

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Select the following in service mode:
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-K
2) Select the following in service mode:
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> SPLY-K
3) Select the following in service mode:
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> DV-UNT-K
Then, check that the value is cleared as "0".
4) Execute "Full Adjust" of the auto gradation correction in additional functions mode.

F-13-31

2) Remove the bushing [1].

[1]

13.4.7 After Replacing Secondary Transfer Outer Roller

0001-8396

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
When replacing the secondary transfer outer roller, be sure to apply about 10
mg (about the size of a rice grain) of grease (Tool name: Barrierta IMI, Tool
No.: FY9-6008) to the shaft end [2] (the side without the blue marking) at the
rear side of the secondary transfer outer roller [1].

F-13-32

3) Remove the contact plate [1] from the boss [2].

F-13-30

13-7

Chapter 13

[2]

[1]

[B]

[A]
[A]

F-13-33

[B]

Do not reuse the removed contact plate. There are cases where the contact
plate that has been removed once fails to be attached securely or it is deformed when being detached. Be sure to replace the contact plate with new
one.
4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the primary transfer roller holder [2].

F-13-36

[2]

Image blanking may occur if the holes on the primary transfer roller holder
and the ITB frame are not in correct positions.
3) Attach the contact plate and the bushing back to the machine.

13.5 Fixing System

13.5.1 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit
0001-1743

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) If you have detached any of the following electrical components, check to
see if it has been mounted back correctly;
- fixing main thermistor
- fixing sub thermistor
- fixing thermal switch

[1]
F-13-34

<Attaching steps>
1) Attach the primary transfer roller holder [2] temporarily using the 2
screws [1].
[2]

2) Adjust the fixing roller nip.

Service Mode;
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
fixing nip width auto measurement output

13.5.2 After Replacing the Fixing Unit

0001-6541

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Initialize the fixing roller counter in service mode:
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FX-UP-RL

13.5.3 After Replacing the Fixing Roller

0001-6546

[1]
F-13-35

2) Fit the primary transfer roller holder to the mark-off line, and tighten the
temporarily attached 2 screws securely. At this time, make sure that the
hole [A] (center hole of the 13 round holes) and hole [B] (center hole of
the 13 slotted holes) on the primary transfer roller holder and the ITB
frame are in correct positions as shown in the figures below.

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Initialize the fixing roller counter in service mode:
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FX-UP-RL
2) Perform nip adjustments.

13.5.4 Nip Adjustment

0001-7823

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Generate a printout of automatic measurement of the fixing nip width.
Method of operation
1) Select 'plain paper' or 'recycled paper' as the type of paper for the cassette 1 (Additional

13-8

Chapter 13
Function> common settings >paper type).
2) Place A4/LTR plain paper or recycled paper in the cassette 1.
3) Press the OK key (so that paper is picked up from the cassette 1).
4) See that the paper is stopped once between the fixing roller and then
discharged in about
15 sec.
5) Check to see the nip width of the discharged paper is as indicated.

(grid).

13.5.5 Point to Note About the Position of the Fixing Main

Thermistor
0003-5490

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
b

- Check to be sure that the thermistor cover [2] is fitted under the fixing main
thermistor [1].
- Check to be sure that the thermistor cover [2] is not mounted in the wrong
orientation. The cover is equipped with a protrusion to prevent wrong orientation.

c
F-13-37

standard: b, c
9.25 -0.25, +0.25 mm (less than 5000 sheets)
9.25 +1.25/ -0.25mm difference between b and c 0.5 mm or less (5000 sheets
or more)
standard: a (reference only)
from 8.5 to 9.0 mm (less than 5000 sheets)
from 8.5 to 10.0 mm (5000 sheets or more)
Note 1:
The point of measurement for a is in the middle of paper.
Note 2:
The points of measurement for b and c are 10 to 15 mm from the edge of paper.

F-13-39

- Check to be sure that the spring [1] of the thermistor retainer is found forcing the thermistor.
- Be sure to tighten the screw [A] and then the screw [B] of the thermistor
retainer in sequence.

Note 3:
The arrow in the figure indicates the direction of paper movement.
Note 4:
The nip tends to increase as more and more paper is moved past. There is no
need, however,
for another session of adjustment each time 5000 sheets have been moved
past. If
adjustments are needed for some reason, try so that b and c are adjusted to
match the median
value of 9.25 mm.
6) If the nip width is not as indicated, perform the following:
6-1) Turn the front and rear adjusting screws to adjust the nip.
EX: if the median value of the nip measurements is closer to the lower
limit,
tighten the screw of the side where the nip at the ends is smaller; a full
turn of the screw will
cause a change of about 0.5 mm.
EX: if the nip balance is correct, turn the screws of both sides.

F-13-40

13.5.6 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Sub

Thermistor
0003-5492

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Take care not to touch the surface [1] of the fixing sub thermistor.
- Take care not to deform the fixing sub thermistor.

F-13-38
F-13-41

7) After the work, generate a test print using the following: COPIER>
TEST> PG> TYPE6

13-9

Chapter 13

13.5.7 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal

Switch
0003-5496

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- Check to be sure that the claw [1] of the fixing thermal switch is in the cutoff of the conducting plate [2].
- Be sure to tighten the fixing screw [A] and then the fixing screw [B] of the
thermal switch.

Reader Unit-Related Adjustment

1) Using the SST, download the latest system software (R-CON).
2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION>
CLEAR> R-CON; then, press the OK key to initialize the RAM. Thereafter, turn off and then on the main power.
3) Enter the appropriate values using the following service mode items:
- standard white plate white level data
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X,Y,Z
- offset value against color displacement for copyboard glass (copyboard
cover)
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> BOOK-RG
- offset value against color displacement for ADF reading glass
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DF-RG

BOOK-RG

DF-RG

F-13-42

- After tightening the fixing screw of the fixing thermal switch, perform the
following:
- Check to be sure that the surface of the fixing thermal switch [1] is level
in relation to the fixing roller. Be sure to use a pen light or the like to shine
the fixing thermal switch for this check.
- If not level, be sure to repeat the mounting work.

W- P LT- X

W- P LT- Z
W- P LT- Y
F-13-45

- service label (behind reader unit left cover) values

- CIS read position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
- main scanning direction position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
- shading position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
- sub scanning direction color displacement correction
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG
- main/sub scanning direction MTF value
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG,SG
- auto gradation correction target value
COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL>OFST-P-Y,M,C,K

F-13-43

OK

NG

NG

NG

NG

If the value of the following was not 0 before the replacement of the reader
controller PCB:
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> CCD-LUT.
Set a value other than '0' once again, and make the following adjustments
using the D-10 Chart.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> LUT-ADJ2

F-13-44

13.6 Electrical Components

13.6.1 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB
0002-4570

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Before replacing the reader controller PCB, be sure to generate the latest PPRINT printout.
In the case that you are initializing the RAM of the reader
controller without replacing the PCB
Using the SST, upload the R-CON backup data; after initializing the RAM,
download the data, thus eliminating the need for the following adjustment.

13-10

ADF-Related Adjustment

The machine keeps ADF-related service mode data in the RAM of the
reader controller; as such, you will have to make the appropriate
adjustments if you have replaced the reader controller or initialized the
RAM.

1) Enter the values indicated in the P-PRINT printout you have previously
generated using the following service mode:
- main scanning direction position adjustment (stream reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF
- original stop position adjustment
FEEDER>ADJUST>DOCST

Chapter 13
- original feed speed (magnification) adjustment
FEEDER>ADJUST>LA-SPEED
2) Make adjustments using the following items:
- tray width adjustment
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-A4
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-A5R
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-LTR
FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-LTRR
- CIS read position adjustment (stream reading)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS
- white level adjustment
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD>DF-WLVL1
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD>DF-WLVL2
3) When you have finished the foregoing adjustments, put the P-PRINT
printout [1] you have previously generated in the service book cassette to
replace the old P-PRINT printout.

F-13-47

7) Turn OFF the control panel power switch.

8) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
9) Execute service mode for the drum film thickness level setting.
COPIERADJUSTHV-PRIDRM-CHK

13.6.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)

0001-6280

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
When you have mounted the main controller PCB (main), be sure to mount
the PCBs you may have removed before starting the work:
[1] Boot ROM
[2] Image memory (SDRAM)
[3] Expansion bus PCB
[4] Main controller PCB (sub)
[5] UFR board
[6] Ethernet board
F-13-46

13.6.2 After Replacing DC Controller PCB

0001-1745

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Before replacing the DC controller PCB, output the latest P-PRINT.

COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
- "Toner supply count" is stored on the DC controller PCB. Thus, "Toner
level" indicator returns to "100%" when the DC controller PCB is replaced.

1) Set to SST and download the latest system software.

2) After the DC controller PCB is replaced, go to service mode shown below
to clear the DC controller PCB memory.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> DC-CON
3) Enter the values indicated on the service label in the following service
modes:
- COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LA-DELAY
- COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG>
REG-V-Y,M,K
REG2-V-Y,M,K
- COPIER> ADJUST> DENS>
SGNL-Y,M,C
REF-Y,M,C
- COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI>
OFST1-AC
PRI-GAIN
PRI-OFST
- COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR>
1TR-GAIN,OFST
2TR-GAIN,OFST
- COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ>
MF-A4R,A6R,A4
- COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ>
REGIST
ADJ-C1, C2, MF, C1RE, C2RE, C3RE, C4RE
ADJ-DKRE,MFRE,RG-REFE
4) If any values are indicated on the remarks field of the service label, enter
the values in service mode.
5) Enter the counter backup value indicated on P-Print in service mode.
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> FX-UP-RL
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> DV-UNT-K
6) Enter the drum film thickness current value in service mode.
The drum film thickness current value is indicated in the drum counter label attached to the front of the drum unit.
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> DR-I-INT

F-13-48

F-13-49

13.6.4 After Replacing the SRAM Board

0001-6278

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Inform the user that replacing the SRAM board will cause all image data
in Box to be lost. Be sure to obtain the user's consent before starting the
work.

13-11

Chapter 13
- Be sure that the SRAM board you are using is a new one.
The machine will be likely to malfunction if you use a RAM that has
been used in a different printer unit.

3) Output P-PRINT in service mode.

4) Keep the output P-PRINT [1] in the service book case.
Put away the old P-PRINT.

1) Replace the SRAM board, and turn on the main power. (The machine will
perform automatic initialization.)
2) See that the machine indicates the message "Turn On the Power Switch on
the Right Side" on its control panel. Turn off and then on the power.
3) Initialize the RAM.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>MN-CON
Make the foregoing selections, and press the OK key.

13.6.5 After Replacing the HDD

0001-7305

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1. If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Not Used
1) Format the HDD.
Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while
holding down the 2 and 8 keys).
Using the SST's HD formatting function, perform formatting of all
partitions. (For details, see the instructions on how to upgrade the
machine.)
2) Download the system software.
Using the SST, download the system, language, and RUI files.
It may take about 5 min for the machine to start up after a download
session.

F-13-50

13.7 Pickup/Feeding System

13.7.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When
Replacing the Pickup Cassette
0001-1751

2. If a Card Reader and NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Are Used

A card ID used by the NSA exists on the HDD. If you have replaced the
HDD, you must also download the card data used by the NSA once again;
otherwise, you will not be able to make use of statistical management
functions of the NSA.
You will first have to format the HDD and download the system software
as for 1 above; thereafter, you need to perform additional steps:
1) Format the HDD.
2) Download the system software.
3) Make the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD
4) Enter a card number.
5) Turn off and then on the machine's main power.
Enter the number of the first card of those to be used for group control,
and press the OK key. (For instance, if the group will be using numbers
between 1 through 1000, enter '1'.)
6) Make a check.
Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control
settings>group ID control>count control; then, check to make sure the
following IDs are made ready: ID00000001 through ID00001000.
7) Set the appropriate addresses.
Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control
settings>network settings>TCP/IP settings>IP address. Then, set the
following addresses: IP address, gateway address, subnet mask.
8) Enter a number.
Make the following selections in Additional Function, and enter a
number: system administrator information settings>system control group
ID/system control ID No.
9) Turn off and then on the machine's main power.

Unless you set up the system control ID and the system control ID No., you
will not be able to register a card to the machine while using NSA.

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- 1st side (mechanical adjustment)
1)Make copies using the cassette 1/2 as the source of paper; then, check
to make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm.
- If the margin is not as indicated, make the following adjustment:

(-)

(+)

0
2
4
6
8
10

2.51.5mm
F-13-51

2) If a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1 is installed, open the right door [1] of the pedestal.
3) After opening the lower right cover [2], remove the 2 screws, and detach the cover (lower front) [3].

10) Download the card ID.

Keep the machine in a standby state, and download the card ID through
the NSA.
11) Check the count control.
Make the following selections in Additional Function to bring up the
Count Control screen: system control settings>group ID control; then,
check to see that only the ID data you have downloaded are indicated.
12) Check to see that the operation is normal.
Using a user card that has been registered to the NSA, make copies; then,
check that the number of copies you have made are associated with the
card you have used in the machine.

13.6.6 When Replacing HVT PCB

0001-1750

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Enter the following 6 items in service mode as indicated in PCB label attached on the new HVT PCB.
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>PRI-GAIN (CHG G)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>PRI-OFST (CHG Off)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PR>1TR-GAIN (1TR G)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PR>1TR-OFST (1TR Off)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PR>2TR-GAIN (2TR G)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PR>2TR-OFST (2TR Off)
The indication on the PCB label is shown in the parentheses.
2) Write down the new values on the service label.

13-12

[2]
[3]
F-13-52

4) Slide out the cassette 1 or 2.

5) Check the index [1] on the adjusting plate.

[1]

Chapter 13

F-13-53

- Adjusting the Cassette 1

6) Free the 2 claws [2], and detach the grip (right front) [1].

F-13-56

8) Tighten the fixing screw.

9) Fit back the cassette 2.
10) Make copies using the cassette 2 as the source of paper; then, check
to make sure that the margin on the image front is 2.2 +1.5, -1.5 mm.
11) Fit back the machine's right front cover.
-Margin (2nd side)
1) Make double-sided copies using the cassette you have adjusted for the
1st side; then, check to make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5
+2.0, -2.0 mm.

()

(+)

F-13-54

0
2

7) Loosen the fixing screw [2] on the adjusting plate [1].

8) Move the adjusting plate back and forth with reference to the index you
have checked in step 5). Moving the adjusting plate toward the rear of the
machine will increase the margin on the front side of the image.

4
6
8
10

2.52.0mm
F-13-57

2) If the margin is not as indicated, change the adjustment value of the horizontal registration on the 2nd side for the cassette in question.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C1RE
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C2RE
An increase by 1 will decrease the margin on the front by 0.1 mm.
3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.- ADJ-C1RE
- ADJ-C2RE

13.7.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When

Replacing the Duplex Unit
F-13-55

9) Tighten the fixing screw.

10) Put back the cassette 1.
11) Make copies using the cassette 1 as the source of paper; then, check
to make sure that the margin along the image front side is 2.5 +1.5, -1.5
mm.
12) Fit back the grip (right front).
13) Attach the machine's right front cover.
- Adjusting the Cassette 2
6) Loosen the fixing screw [2] on the horizontal registration adjusting
plate [1] of the cassette.
7) Move the adjusting plate back and forth along the index you checked
in step 5). (Moving the adjusting plate toward the rear of the machine will
increase the margin on the image front.)

0001-1754

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Make double-sided copies using the cassette 1/2 as the source of paper;
then, check to be sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 -2.0, +2.0
mm.

()

(+)

0
2
4
6
8
10

2.52.0mm
F-13-58

2) If the margin is not as indicated, change the adjustment value of the hori-

13-13

Chapter 13
zontal registration on the 2nd side for the cassette in question.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C1RE
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C2RE
An increase by 1 will decrease the margin on the front side by 0.1 mm.
3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.
- ADJ-C1RE
- ADJ-C2RE

13.7.3 Adjust the Horizontal Registration for the Manual

Feed Tray

()

(+)

0
2

0001-7739

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci
- 1st side (mechanical adjustment)
1) Place paper in the manual feed tray. For instructions on how to place
paper, see the label attached to the manual feed assembly.
2) Make copies using the manual feed tray as the source of paper; then,
check to make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm.

(-)

4
6
8
10

2.52.0mm
F-13-61

(+)

2) If the margin is not as indicated, change the adjustment value of the horizontal registration on the 2nd side.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-MFRE
An increase of 1 will decrease the margin on the front side by 0.1 mm.
3) Record the new adjustment value on the service label.
- ADJ-MFRE

0
2

13.7.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value

0001-6579

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR

C3180C / iR C3180Ci

4
6

1) Turn on the main power switch.

2) Register the paper width basic value for A4R as follows:
2-1) Match the manual feed side guide [1] against A4R.

8
10

2.51.5mm
F-13-59

[1]

- If the margin is not as indicated, make the following adjustments:

3) Remove the paper from the manual feed tray.
4) Loosen the fixing screw [1] on the manual feed tray upper cover.
5) Move the manual feed tray upper cover back and forth based on the value you checked in step 2). (Moving the manual feed tray upper cover toward the rear of the machine will increase the margin on the front side.

[1]
F-13-62

2-2) Start service mode, and select 'register manual feed A4R width'.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A4R
2-3) Press the OK key to store the A4R width.
2-4) Record the A4 basic value indicated on the control panel on the service label.
F-13-60

6) Tighten the fixing screw of the manual feed tray upper cover.
7) Place paper in the manual feed tray.
8) Make copies using the manual feed tray as the source of paper; then,
check to make sure that the margin on the front side is 2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm.
- Manual Feed Margin (2nd side)
1) Make double-sided copies using the manual feed tray as the source of
paper; then, check to make sure that the margin on the front side of the
2nd side is 2.5 -2.0, +2.0 mm.

3) Register the paper width basic value for A4 as follows:

3-1) Match the manual feed guide against A4.
3-2) Select 'register manual feed A4 width' in service mode.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A4
3-3) Press the OK key to storp the A4 width.
3-4) Record the A4 basic value indicated on the control panel on the service label.
4) Register the A6R paper width basic value as follows:
4-1) Match the manual feed side guide against A6R.
4-2) Select 'register manual feed A6R width' in service mode.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A6R
4-3) Press the OK key to store the A6R width.
4-4) Record the A4 basic value indicated on the control panel on the service label.
5) Press the Rest key twice to end service mode.
6) Turn off the control panel power switch.
7) Turn off the main power switch.

13-14

Chapter 14 Correcting Faulty Images

Contents

Contents
14.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................................14-1
14.1.1 Checking the Site Environment ............................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2 Checking the Paper .................................................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ............................................................................................................................................ 14-1
14.1.4 Checking the Durables ............................................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts ............................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks.............................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1.7 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-2

14.2 Test Print ....................................................................................................................................................................14-2

14.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.2.2 Test Print TYPE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.3 Selecting Test Print TYPE ....................................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.4 16-Gradation (TYPE=4) .......................................................................................................................................................... 14-3
14.2.5 Full Page Halftone (TYPE=5) ................................................................................................................................................. 14-3
14.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 14-4
14.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripes (TYPE=10).................................................................................................................................. 14-4
14.2.8 64-Gradation (TYPE=12) ........................................................................................................................................................ 14-5
14.2.9 Full Color 16-Gradation (TYPE=14)....................................................................................................................................... 14-5

14.3 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................................................................14-6

14.3.1 Symptoms ................................................................................................................................................................................ 14-6
14.3.1.1 Symptoms....................................................................................................................................................................................................14-6

14.3.2 Image Faults............................................................................................................................................................................. 14-6

14.3.2.1 Blank Image ................................................................................................................................................................................................14-6
14.3.2.1.1 Blank image occurs when copying......................................................................................................................................................14-6
14.3.2.2 Light Image / Weak Density .......................................................................................................................................................................14-7
14.3.2.2.1 Density is different between front and rear sides (front or rear side is light in density), Developer of Y/M/C/BK leaks, Abnormal Noise
from developing ass'y......................................................................................................................................................................................14-7
14.3.2.2.2 Density is excessively different between front and rear sides ............................................................................................................14-7
14.3.2.2.3 Developing cylinder locks up..............................................................................................................................................................14-7
14.3.2.2.4 How to adjust density of FAX-transmitted image ..............................................................................................................................14-7
14.3.2.2.5 Light image: Because of condensation upon installation....................................................................................................................14-7
14.3.2.2.6 Light image occurs throughout page when copying in color mode ....................................................................................................14-8
14.3.2.3 Foggy Image................................................................................................................................................................................................14-8
14.3.2.3.1 Texts in FAX-received documents are too dark..................................................................................................................................14-8
14.3.2.3.2 Texts are too thick on copies, prints, and FAX-RX ............................................................................................................................14-8
14.3.2.3.3 Poor reproducibility of photo when copying text-photo mixed original: Text / Photo / Map mode ..................................................14-8
14.3.2.4 Out of Focus................................................................................................................................................................................................14-8
14.3.2.4.1 Blurred image in main scanning direction only on copies ..................................................................................................................14-8
14.3.2.4.2 Image registration failure at leading edge because of anomalous data of DC Controller PCB ..........................................................14-8
14.3.2.4.3 Multiple unintended shadows / ghost images occur on copied image in main scanning direction.....................................................14-9
14.3.2.4.4 Copied image is displaced in main scanning direction: When scanning from copyboard glass.........................................................14-9
14.3.2.4.5 Copied image is displaced in main scanning direction: When scanning from ADF...........................................................................14-9
14.3.2.4.6 Image on second side is displaced in main scanning direction in duplex mode: How to adjust horizontal registration of second side ...
14-9
14.3.2.4.7 Image-positioning error occurs only when scanning irreg. size original (280mm x 380mm) from ADF and printing on same size paper
fed from manual feed tray ...............................................................................................................................................................................14-9
14.3.2.4.8 Blurred Image/Line Caused by Condensation ....................................................................................................................................14-9
14.3.2.4.9 Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction .................................................................................................................................14-9
14.3.2.5 Partially Blank/Streaked............................................................................................................................................................................14-10
14.3.2.5.1 White streaks in sub scanning direction............................................................................................................................................14-10
14.3.2.5.2 Streaks in sub scanning line appear on image corresponding to rear side of host machine because of ITB cleaning failure ..........14-10
14.3.2.5.3 Streaks in main scanning direction appear at 5cm from paper trailing edge on full-colored A3 paper............................................14-10
14.3.2.5.4 Voids at trailing edge on A3-sized coated paper...............................................................................................................................14-10

Contents

14.3.2.5.5 Missing color and color displacement in sub scanning direction (Yellow)...................................................................................... 14-11
14.3.2.5.6 Horizontal White Streaks.................................................................................................................................................................. 14-11
14.3.2.5.7 White Horizontal Lines at Intervals of 75.4 mm .............................................................................................................................. 14-11
14.3.2.5.8 Vertical White Line........................................................................................................................................................................... 14-12
14.3.2.5.9 White Spots Along the Trailing Edge............................................................................................................................................... 14-13
14.3.2.5.10 White Spot Indicating Trace of the Pickup Roller.......................................................................................................................... 14-14
14.3.2.5.11 Cyclic Image Fault.......................................................................................................................................................................... 14-14
14.3.2.6 Smudged/Streaked .................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-15
14.3.2.6.1 Yellow streaks on full-colored copy, black streaks on black-and-white copy, in sub scanning direction ....................................... 14-15
14.3.2.6.2 Toner scattering inside machine and soiled image because side seal in Transfer Cleaning As'y peeled off ................................... 14-15
14.3.2.6.3 Streaks/Uneven density occurs at 195mm intervals after recovers from Energy Saver mode or Low Power mode ....................... 14-15
14.3.2.6.4 Line appears on image when printing PDF file from PC: Push scan................................................................................................ 14-15
14.3.2.6.5 Bleeding occurs in duplex copying................................................................................................................................................... 14-15
14.3.2.6.6 Horizontal Black Line Along Leading Edge .................................................................................................................................... 14-15
14.3.2.6.7 Fine, Black Line in Stream Read Mode............................................................................................................................................ 14-16
14.3.2.6.8 Rib-Shaped Dirt ................................................................................................................................................................................ 14-16
14.3.2.7 Ghost / Memory ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 14-20
14.3.2.7.1 Ghost image/gradual decrease in density from 40mm off leading edge: Occurs only with magenta upon installation................... 14-20
14.3.2.8 Poor Finxing ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-20
14.3.2.8.1 Flap of envelope is glued after passing through machine................................................................................................................. 14-20
14.3.2.9 Faulty Color Reproduction ....................................................................................................................................................................... 14-21
14.3.2.9.1 How to adjust color on prints (color density adjustment)................................................................................................................. 14-21
14.3.2.9.2 When outputting data created by PowerPoint via UFR, color of texts occasionally varies ............................................................. 14-21
14.3.2.9.3 Hue problem: Occurs when using DADF......................................................................................................................................... 14-21
14.3.2.9.4 Poor Reproduction of Horizontal Fine Lines.................................................................................................................................... 14-21
14.3.2.10 Stretching/Shrinking ............................................................................................................................................................................... 14-21
14.3.2.10.1 DADF-L1: Image stretch or image shrinkage in sub scanning direction / How to adjust magnification of DADF-L1................. 14-21

14.3.3 Faulty Feeding ....................................................................................................................................................................... 14-22

14.3.3.1 Skew Feed................................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-22
14.3.3.1.1 Misalignment greater than 2mm in a batch when stapling: Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2 ......................................................... 14-22
14.3.3.1.2 Last Paper Skew (manually fed postcard) ........................................................................................................................................ 14-22
14.3.3.1.3 Skew in Manually Fed Paper ............................................................................................................................................................ 14-22
14.3.3.2 Fold/Rip .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-23
14.3.3.2.1 Peeling of a Manually Fed Label Sheet ............................................................................................................................................ 14-23

14.3.4 Malfunction............................................................................................................................................................................ 14-23

14.3.4.1 No Power .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-23
14.3.4.1.1 iRC3100 does not start up, Progress bar on start-up window stops at three-quarters point ............................................................. 14-23
14.3.4.1.2 iRC3100 does not start up from sleep state ...................................................................................................................................... 14-23
14.3.4.1.3 LCD on control panel does not come on (start up) for about 10 seconds when host machine recovers from sleep state................ 14-23
14.3.4.1.4 iRC3100 does not start up: Power is unintentionally shut off after progress bar on start-up window completes and thereafter iRC3100
never start up................................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-23
14.3.4.1.5 iRC3100 does not recover from sleep state; although energy consumption in sleep mode has been set to [High] ......................... 14-23
14.3.4.1.6 No power when tuning power ON instantaneously after turning OFF............................................................................................. 14-24
14.3.4.1.7 E240/E732/E733/E747/E602/E001 Error Code / Machine does not start up / Machine locks up / LCD flickers and then goes off
although backlight comes on: Upon installation........................................................................................................................................... 14-24
14.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related............................................................................................................................................................................... 14-24
14.3.4.2.1 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Not recognized by iRC3100.................................................................................................................. 14-24
14.3.4.2.2 LCD does not come on although main power indicator on control panel lights up ......................................................................... 14-24
14.3.4.2.3 DADF-L1: Original size detection failure / How to adjust tray width of DADF-L1 ....................................................................... 14-24
14.3.4.2.4 Power lamp light up but LCD on control panel does not: Because BootROM is not securely fitted............................................... 14-25
14.3.4.2.5 LCD displays nothing during copying (Only back light comes on) ................................................................................................. 14-25
14.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-25
14.3.4.3.1 Counters for Dept. ID Management does not increase after installation of Card Reader-D1: Card itself is recognized ................. 14-25
14.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection................................................................................................................................................................... 14-25
14.3.4.4.1 FAX board cannot be detected / [Fax] button does not appear in [Send] screen.............................................................................. 14-25
14.3.4.4.2 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Paper lifting plate does not ascend upon installation ............................................................................ 14-25
14.3.4.4.3 Finisher-P1: Not operate upon installation ....................................................................................................................................... 14-25
14.3.4.4.4 Paper size detection failure at Cassette 2.......................................................................................................................................... 14-25
14.3.4.4.5 DADF-L1: Message [Original scanning area is dirty.] / How to adjust white level ........................................................................ 14-26
14.3.4.4.6 DADF-L1: Auto orientation feature does not work upon installation.............................................................................................. 14-26
14.3.4.4.7 DADF-L1: Paper pick-up roller does not ascend because shaft of registration sensor lever comes off .......................................... 14-26
14.3.4.4.8 iRC3100 displays message prompting to confirm size guide position although designated size of paper is placed on stack bypass . 14-

Contents

26
14.3.4.4.9 Inner 2way Tray-C1: Rotate Collating feature is inoperative when printing via UFR .....................................................................14-26
14.3.4.4.10 Paper lifting plate of 3rd Cassette does not ascend: Because pins of lattice connector for Cassette Pedestal-Y1 are bent............14-26
14.3.4.4.11 PS-E1: "Printer" tab does not appear on LCD ................................................................................................................................14-27
14.3.4.4.12 Paper lifting plate does not ascend: Because cassette paper detect sensor flag does not actuate smoothly ...................................14-27
14.3.4.4.13 iRC3100 locks up / does not start up with "Waiting" message...................................................................................................14-27
14.3.4.4.14 Paper lifting plate does not ascend / "Load paper." indication: Troubleshooting...........................................................................14-27
14.3.4.4.15 Toner cartridge cannot be pulled out when attempting to replace it: Because developing rotary is not locked at specified position1429
14.3.4.4.16 Unable to receive FAX message, Unable to connect telephone line ..............................................................................................14-29
14.3.4.4.17 Unable to format hard disk (HD)/Format error: Because hard disk drive (HDD) is changed ........................................................14-29
14.3.4.4.18 Paper lifting plate for cassette 3 does not ascend when DC Controller PCB Ver. 20.07 or later is used because Pedestal Driver PCB
is faulty: Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1 ..............................................................................................................................................................14-29
14.3.4.4.19 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1/Y2 cannot be recognized: Due to poor connection of main cont. PS PCB connector J213 .................14-29
14.3.4.4.20 Finisher cannot be recognized: Due to poor connection of main cont. PS PCB connector J213 ...................................................14-29
14.3.4.4.21 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1 cannot be recognized.................................................................................................................................14-30
14.3.4.4.22 Fax TX Report is output although it is set to OFF ..........................................................................................................................14-30
14.3.4.4.23 False detection of original size occurs in book mode .....................................................................................................................14-30
14.3.4.4.24 Machine hangs up with message "Waiting to print" when running print job or report print job: upon installation.......................14-30
14.3.4.5 Noise .........................................................................................................................................................................................................14-30
14.3.4.5.1 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Abnormal noise from drive unit ............................................................................................................14-30
14.3.4.5.2 Bk developing ass'y locks up during continuous Bk copy / Abnormal noise: Because of too much amount of carrier...................14-31
14.3.4.5.3 Control sound at power-on after long period of shut-down is noisy / How to ease image stabilization control sound at power-on or at
wake-up from sleep mode .............................................................................................................................................................................14-31
14.3.4.5.4 Abnormal (squeaky) sound from fixing assembly: Due to deformation of internal delivery guide (lower) ....................................14-31
14.3.4.5.5 Abnormal (buzzing) sound occurs when feeding paper from cassette of machine or Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1............................14-31
14.3.4.5.6 Noise at Time of Pickup from the Cassette.......................................................................................................................................14-32
14.3.4.6 User Warning Message .............................................................................................................................................................................14-32
14.3.4.6.1 Message [Check the network connection.] / Message [Check the TCP/IP.].....................................................................................14-32
14.3.4.6.2 Once arbitrary paper is registered in user mode [Common Settings> Stack Bypass Standard Settings], paper of different paper sizes
cannot be copied from stack bypass..............................................................................................................................................................14-32
14.3.4.6.3 #853 User Error Code during printing ..............................................................................................................................................14-32
14.3.4.6.4 Message 'The file attachment cannot be processed by Internet Fax. No programs can process the file attachment.' is printed out with
text of received I-Fax ....................................................................................................................................................................................14-32
14.3.4.6.5 When attempting to access iRC3100 via Remote UI, message 'User information is invalid' is displayed.......................................14-32
14.3.4.6.6 When printing, paper source does not automatically change from Cassette 1 to Cassette 2 (OS: WindowsXP, Port: Standard TCP/IP
Port)...............................................................................................................................................................................................................14-32
14.3.4.6.7 "Finisher cannot be used." is displayed.............................................................................................................................................14-33
14.3.4.6.8 The machine frequently indicates the message "Clean DF Reading Glass." ....................................................................................14-33
14.3.4.6.9 The machine frequently indicates the message "Clean reading Glass." (The user wants to disable it.) ...........................................14-33
14.3.4.7 Other Defect ..............................................................................................................................................................................................14-34
14.3.4.7.1 Key Switch Unit-A1: Key not recognized upon installation.............................................................................................................14-34
14.3.4.7.2 Machine locks up (hangs up/does not start up) with "Wait" indication displayed and progress bar being completed: Because absence
of cable between Reader and Printer.............................................................................................................................................................14-34
14.3.4.7.3 PS-D1 is not recognized....................................................................................................................................................................14-34
14.3.4.7.4 Machine does not start up after replacement of hard disk (HDD) ....................................................................................................14-34
14.3.4.7.5 Inner 2way tray-C1: Settings for [Tray Designation] are not displayed ...........................................................................................14-34
14.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment........................................................................................................................................................................14-35
14.3.4.8.1 Jam Access Guide in Fixing Ass'y came off / Boss in Fixing Ass'y was broken .............................................................................14-35
14.3.4.8.2 Unable to fit magnet catch that holds front cover onto inner cover..................................................................................................14-35

14.3.5 Printing/scanning ................................................................................................................................................................... 14-35

14.3.5.1 No Output..................................................................................................................................................................................................14-35
14.3.5.1.1 2nd page and later are not output or abnormal image is output when attempting to print multiple sheets of huge data from computer..
14-35
14.3.5.1.2 #852 User Error Code .......................................................................................................................................................................14-35
14.3.5.1.3 Unable to send documents stored in Inbox .......................................................................................................................................14-35
14.3.5.1.4 Machine accepts print job but does not run it ...................................................................................................................................14-36
14.3.5.1.5 When printing, paper is fed from stack bypass although auto paper selection mode is set in machine side ....................................14-36
14.3.5.2 Installation Failure ....................................................................................................................................................................................14-36
14.3.5.2.1 Can Send Kit for iRC3200 be used with iRC3100?..........................................................................................................................14-36
14.3.5.2.2 Unable to install printer driver completely: Because UBS cable is connected before installing......................................................14-36
14.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result ...............................................................................................................................................................14-36

Contents

14.3.5.3.1 Message [Waiting to print ] keeps appearing at UFR printing / Half of image becomes solid black .......................................... 14-36
14.3.5.3.2 Image sent to computer in PDF format (Compact, 300dpi) is scaled down when printing.............................................................. 14-36
14.3.5.3.3 Print settings made in printer driver were not effective when printing multiple sheets of MS Excel data ...................................... 14-36
14.3.5.3.4 Pages are output in reverse order: MS Word .................................................................................................................................... 14-37
14.3.5.3.5 Scanned documents are always saved in PDF format although selecting "TIFF/PDF" as File Format: Push Scan ........................ 14-37
14.3.5.3.6 Machine does not print when data is sent from PC with operating system (OS) from Macintosh (Mac) via UFR ......................... 14-37
14.3.5.3.7 Document properties is output when printing document that is prepared using MS Word.............................................................. 14-37

14.3.6 Network.................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-37

14.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 14-37
14.3.6.1.1 Utility software (e.g. Network ScanGear) cannot be used, no problem with other functions .......................................................... 14-37
14.3.6.2 Connection Problem ................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-37
14.3.6.2.1 Message "I-FAX POP server connection error" is sometimes displayed at lower-left of LCD ....................................................... 14-37

14.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related ..................................................................................................................................................... 14-37

14.3.7.1 Transmission Problem .............................................................................................................................................................................. 14-37
14.3.7.1.1 One-sheet original is output in two sheets at receiving side............................................................................................................. 14-37
14.3.7.1.2 I-Fax transmission sometimes results in error .................................................................................................................................. 14-38
14.3.7.1.3 E-mail message is sometimes split up into several E-mail messages............................................................................................... 14-38
14.3.7.1.4 Fax number is not entered partially (in the actual failure case, 2nd digit)........................................................................................ 14-38
14.3.7.1.5 FAX-transmitted image becomes too light on receiving side: User mode adjustment is not effective, FAX transmission............. 14-38
14.3.7.1.6 How to register high scanning density as standard sending mode: FAX transmission .................................................................... 14-38
14.3.7.1.7 Unable to send scanned image to file server: Because logon password entered from PC differs from address information of file server
registered in machine #801 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 14-38
14.3.7.1.8 Unable to use SEND function: Desired folder cannot be browsed although desired PC can be...................................................... 14-38
14.3.7.1.9 Cannot send FAX message to specified destination using one-touch button: Overseas FAX transmission .................................... 14-39
14.3.7.2 Reception Problem.................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-39
14.3.7.2.1 iR C3100 cannot receive FAX while it is in sleep state ................................................................................................................... 14-39
14.3.7.2.2 DADF-L1: Image at receiving side is partially missing at FAX transmission ................................................................................. 14-39
14.3.7.2.3 "NG" is indicated in Activity Report: Occurs only with "Unknown" FAX message....................................................................... 14-39
14.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect.......................................................................................................................................................................... 14-39
14.3.7.3.1 Alarm tone (Success tone, Error tone) that iRC3100 emits during fax transmission ....................................................................... 14-39
14.3.7.3.2 FAX-transmitted image spreads across tow pages on receiving side when sending one page of image to particular destination .. 14-39
14.3.7.3.3 FAX-transmitted image is reduced in sub scanning direction on receiving side when sending to particular destination................ 14-40
14.3.7.3.4 FAX-received document that consists of 2 pages or more is printed in dupl ................................................................................... 14-40
14.3.7.3.5 #899 User Error Code: After e-mail or I-Fax transmission .............................................................................................................. 14-40
14.3.7.4 Setting/Registration Defect....................................................................................................................................................................... 14-40
14.3.7.4.1 Shared folder on PC cannot be registered in address book: Windows XP ....................................................................................... 14-40
14.3.7.4.2 Transmission/Reception becomes impossible after expansion of FAX or SEND function into iRC3100N: Because of absence of
Resolution Switch Board PCB...................................................................................................................................................................... 14-40

14.3.8 Jam (Main Unit)..................................................................................................................................................................... 14-40

14.3.8.1 0105 Jam Code: Because multifeed sensor flag is detached .................................................................................................................... 14-40
14.3.8.2 010C JAM CODE: 2nd side of duplex print is jammed because of duplex inlet sensor coming off ....................................................... 14-40
14.3.8.3 0111 Jam Code: Because of deformed connector pin of buffer pass unit ................................................................................................ 14-41
14.3.8.4 Jam Immediately After Pickup (heavy paper, envelope, postcard) .......................................................................................................... 14-41
14.3.8.5 0202/0105 Jam Code: Always occur in front of registration roller when picking up A4-size paper from cassette 2 .............................. 14-41
14.3.8.6 0A06 Jam Code: Because claw of fixing inlet sensor (PS25) is freed ..................................................................................................... 14-41
14.3.8.7 0A0B JAM CODE occurred upon installation of Inner 2way Tray-C1 ................................................................................................... 14-41
14.3.8.8 0B00/0B01 Jam Code: Supplementary descriptions ................................................................................................................................ 14-42
14.3.8.9 0D91 JAM CODE: Occurred at all cassettes upon installation ................................................................................................................ 14-42
14.3.8.10 0D91/0105 Jam Code: At all paper cassettes and stack bypass.............................................................................................................. 14-42
14.3.8.11 Pickup Faults (pickup from the side paper deck) ................................................................................................................................... 14-42
14.3.8.12 Delivery Delay Jam (label sheet)............................................................................................................................................................ 14-42
14.3.8.13 Pickup Stationary Jam ............................................................................................................................................................................ 14-43

14.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder)......................................................................................................................................................... 14-43

14.3.9.1 0094 Jam Code: Because of poor contact of Delivery Sensor (PI4) connector in DADF-L1 .................................................................. 14-43

14.3.10 Error Code............................................................................................................................................................................ 14-44

14.3.10.1 E004-0001 Error Code: Displayed after opening/closing front panel .................................................................................................... 14-44
14.3.10.2 E010-0002 Error Code: Protection sheet for developing cylinder was not removed upon installation ................................................. 14-44
14.3.10.3 E070-0003 Error Code: Because grounding spring for registration hard roller is deformed ................................................................. 14-44
14.3.10.4 E014-0001 Error Code: Because fixing roller is deformed .................................................................................................................... 14-44
14.3.10.5 E014-0001 Error Code: Because fixing motor (M11) is faulty .............................................................................................................. 14-44
14.3.10.6 E020 Error Code: Occurred upon installation because developer failed to be filled inside developing ass'y........................................ 14-44

Contents

14.3.10.7 E020 Error Code and Toner scattering inside machine: Because wrong screw is used for fixing developing ass'y..............................14-44
14.3.10.8 E020-01A8 Error Code: Machine performs adjustments each time outputting copy, finally resulting in E020-01A8..........................14-45
14.3.10.9 E020-0XA2/E020-0XA8 Error Code......................................................................................................................................................14-45
14.3.10.10 E020-0XA0/E020-0XA1/E020-0XA9 Error Code ...............................................................................................................................14-45
14.3.10.11 E021-000x Error Code: Developing rotary does not rotate and abnormal noise comes from motor ...................................................14-45
14.3.10.12 E021-0003 Error Code: Occurs during copy, not upon FAX reception but output becomes yellow ...................................................14-46
14.3.10.13 E026-0x01 Error Code / Message [Remaining toner is low.] / Toner scattering inside machine.........................................................14-46
14.3.10.14 E067-0100 Error Code: Because tension spring for Primary Transfer Roller comes off .....................................................................14-46
14.3.10.15 E067-0100 Error Code: Because of condensation upon installation ....................................................................................................14-46
14.3.10.16 E067-0100 Error Code: Troubleshooting upon error code indication ..................................................................................................14-46
14.3.10.17 E070-0003 Error Code: Improper ground of ITB tension roller shaft in ITB unit ...............................................................................14-46
14.3.10.18 E070-0003 Error Code: Because ITB-HP sensor (PS19) is soiled .......................................................................................................14-47
14.3.10.19 E070-0003 Error Code: ITB HP sticker is soiled..................................................................................................................................14-47
14.3.10.20 E070-0001 Error Code: Because tension arm (front/rear) of ITB is broken.........................................................................................14-47
14.3.10.21 E100 / E110 Error Code: Occurred because J328 connector on DC Controller PCB was not securely fitted .....................................14-47
14.3.10.22 E110 Error Code: Error occurred at the time when paper was delivered to transfer unit.....................................................................14-47
14.3.10.23 E225-0001 Error Code: Scanning lamp came on..................................................................................................................................14-47
14.3.10.24 E315-0010/0034/0038 Error Code: Occurred during PCFAX transmission, then host machine rebooted ..........................................14-47
14.3.10.25 E351-0000 Error Code: Occasionally occurs while host machine is being energized .........................................................................14-48
14.3.10.26 E400-0002 Error Code: Because ADF Controller PCB is faulty..........................................................................................................14-48
14.3.10.27 E500 (Finisher-P1) ................................................................................................................................................................................14-48
14.3.10.28 E505 (Finisher-P1) ................................................................................................................................................................................14-48
14.3.10.29 E514 (Finisher-P1) ................................................................................................................................................................................14-48
14.3.10.30 E530 (Finisher-P1) ................................................................................................................................................................................14-49
14.3.10.31 E531 (Finisher-P1) ................................................................................................................................................................................14-49
14.3.10.32 E532 (Finisher-P1) ................................................................................................................................................................................14-49
14.3.10.33 E532-8002 Error Code: Because staple connecting assembly cable has open-circuit, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2.....................14-50
14.3.10.34 E535 (Finisher-P1) ................................................................................................................................................................................14-50
14.3.10.35 E537 (Finisher-P1) ................................................................................................................................................................................14-50
14.3.10.36 E540 (Finisher-P1) ................................................................................................................................................................................14-50
14.3.10.37 E540-8003 Error Code: Occurs when Upper Tray ascends because of Back End Assist Plate coming off .........................................14-51
14.3.10.38 E540-0003 Error Code: Saddle Finisher-Q2.........................................................................................................................................14-51
14.3.10.39 E542 Error Code: Saddle Delivery Tray of Saddle Finisher-Q2 not completely latched .....................................................................14-51
14.3.10.40 E577 (Finisher-P1) ................................................................................................................................................................................14-52
14.3.10.41 E602-0001 Error Code: Ticktack sound is heard upon start-up and then the error code is displayed..................................................14-53
14.3.10.42 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after HD-CLEAR .........................................................................................................................14-53
14.3.10.43 E602-0402 Error Code: Recovered after HD-CLEAR .........................................................................................................................14-53
14.3.10.44 E602-0111 Error Code ..........................................................................................................................................................................14-53
14.3.10.45 E602-0113 Error Code: Because of faulty HDD ..................................................................................................................................14-54
14.3.10.46 E674-0001 Error Code: Because J1210 connector is not securely fitted on Main Controller PCB (Main) .........................................14-54
14.3.10.47 E732-0001 Error Code: Reader Controller PCB is faulty.....................................................................................................................14-54
14.3.10.48 E732-0001 Error Code: iRC3100 locks up during copying..................................................................................................................14-54
14.3.10.49 E732-0001 Error Code: Because of poor contact of SDRAM ..............................................................................................................14-54
14.3.10.50 E733-0001 Error Code: Occurs after progress bar is filled completely................................................................................................14-54
14.3.10.51 E747-8702 / E747-00FF Error Code: Scanning lamp keeps lighting up at its home position when making a copy............................14-55
14.3.10.52 E747-0031 Error Code: Half of image becomes blank when printing list in user mode ......................................................................14-55
14.3.10.53 E803-0002 Error Code: Front Door Switch (SW3) is faulty ................................................................................................................14-55
14.3.10.54 E803-0001/E227-0004 Error Code: Poor soldering on Printer Power Supply PCB.............................................................................14-55

14.3.11 FAX # Code ......................................................................................................................................................................... 14-55

14.3.11.1 #751 Fax Error Code: Occurs occasionally when sending to PC ...........................................................................................................14-55

14.3.12 FAX ## Code ....................................................................................................................................................................... 14-55

14.3.12.1 ##100 FAX Error Code: Occurs frequently when sending to a specific party .......................................................................................14-55

14.3.13 Specifications-Related FAQ ................................................................................................................................................ 14-56

14.3.13.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................14-56
14.3.13.1.1 Differences between [Energy Save Mode], [Sleep Mode] and [Low Power Mode] ......................................................................14-56
14.3.13.1.2 Network settings (IP Address, Subnet mask) when using Service Support Tool (SST).................................................................14-56
14.3.13.1.3 How to make [Mail Box] tab not display on LCD..........................................................................................................................14-56
14.3.13.1.4 How to clear System Administrator Password................................................................................................................................14-56
14.3.13.1.5 Card Reader-C1: How to restrict copy impression limit only for color copy when using Card Reader.........................................14-56
14.3.13.1.6 Tandem copy and remote copy .......................................................................................................................................................14-56
14.3.13.1.7 How to set [Different Size Originals] as Standard Send Settings for FAX transmission ...............................................................14-57

Contents

14.3.13.1.8 Card Reader-C1: How to clear card counter................................................................................................................................... 14-57

14.3.13.1.9 Function [Two-page Separation] is inoperative under [Special Features] when using ADF ......................................................... 14-57
14.3.13.1.10 Functions [Flaming] and [Blanking] are inoperative under [Special Features> Area Designation> Pen Entry] when using ADF. 1457
14.3.13.1.11 How to print documents that has failed to be forwarded (forwarding errors) .............................................................................. 14-57
14.3.13.1.12 Upgrading DCON/RCON............................................................................................................................................................. 14-57
14.3.13.1.13 How to deactivate [Sleep Mode] [Low Power Mode] .................................................................................................................. 14-57
14.3.13.1.14 Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2: Necessary options when installing Finisher............................................................................ 14-57
14.3.13.1.15 Recovery time from [Energy Save Mode] .................................................................................................................................... 14-57
14.3.13.1.16 Unable to select [Stack Bypass Settings] button .......................................................................................................................... 14-58
14.3.13.1.17 Booklet copy function................................................................................................................................................................... 14-58
14.3.13.1.18 Saddle stitching function (Necessary option and applicable paper size)...................................................................................... 14-58
14.3.13.1.19 How to shorten recovery time from Energy Save Mode (sleep state) .......................................................................................... 14-58
14.3.13.1.20 [Free Size] button does not appear when attempting to use stack bypass for paper source ......................................................... 14-58
14.3.13.1.21 Stack Bypass Standard Settings: How to register arbitrary paper size and paper type as standard mode for stack bypass ......... 14-58
14.3.13.1.22 Copy Tray-J1: Necessary setting upon installation ...................................................................................................................... 14-58
14.3.13.1.23 Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2: Can paper be delivered to the 3d tray (Copy Tray-J1) on machine equipped with Finisher-Q1 or
Saddle Finisher-Q2?...................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-58
14.3.13.1.24 Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2: Can paper be delivered to the inner tray on machine equipped with Finisher-Q1 or Saddle FinisherQ2?................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 14-59
14.3.13.1.25 Necessary steps after replacement of Reader Controller PCB (initializing RCON): without using SST..................................... 14-59
14.3.13.1.26 Horizontal registration failure: How to adjust horizontal registration for main cassettes and Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1........... 14-59
14.3.13.1.27 Want to change intervals of image stabilization control / Want to decrease number of auto gradation correction ..................... 14-59
14.3.13.1.28 How to set copy standard mode at 'Black' .................................................................................................................................... 14-59
14.3.13.1.29 Applicable paper sizes .................................................................................................................................................................. 14-59
14.3.13.1.30 Applicable paper types.................................................................................................................................................................. 14-60
14.3.13.1.31 How to fix Ethernet setting at 10BASE-T .................................................................................................................................... 14-60
14.3.13.1.32 LCD on control panel does not come on (start up) for about 10 seconds when host machine recovers from sleep state............ 14-60
14.3.13.1.33 Description about [User Inboxes] functions ................................................................................................................................. 14-60
14.3.13.1.34 Description about [Memory RX Inbox] functions........................................................................................................................ 14-60
14.3.13.1.35 Description about [Confidential Fax Inboxes] functions.............................................................................................................. 14-60
14.3.13.1.36 [Scan Doc.] stored in User Inboxes .............................................................................................................................................. 14-60
14.3.13.1.37 [System Doc.] stored in User Inboxes .......................................................................................................................................... 14-60
14.3.13.1.38 [Print Doc.] stored in User Inboxes .............................................................................................................................................. 14-60
14.3.13.1.39 When choosing A4R or LTRR for paper size of stack bypass, OHP film cannot be specified.................................................... 14-61
14.3.13.1.40 Is [Offset] feature available with iRC3100? ................................................................................................................................. 14-61
14.3.13.1.41 Is Newspaper mode available? / Background is fogged when making a copy of newspaper ...................................................... 14-61
14.3.13.1.42 How to disable to display job histories (logs) stored by iRC3100 ............................................................................................... 14-61
14.3.13.1.43 Necessary actions after replacement of drum unit........................................................................................................................ 14-61
14.3.13.1.44 How to output Fax-received document from any specified paper drawers .................................................................................. 14-61
14.3.13.1.45 Differences between [Full Adjustment] and [Quick Adjustment] of Auto Gradation Adjustment.............................................. 14-61
14.3.13.1.46 How to temporarily take out toner cartridge in use ...................................................................................................................... 14-62
14.3.13.1.47 What is [Auto Offline] feature? .................................................................................................................................................... 14-62
14.3.13.1.48 How to print list of destinations registered in address books and one-touch buttons................................................................... 14-62
14.3.13.1.49 Function limitation when security key is not inserted .................................................................................................................. 14-62
14.3.13.1.50 What is [Auto Online] feature?..................................................................................................................................................... 14-62
14.3.13.1.51 How to resend document, which has failed to send, to new destination ...................................................................................... 14-62
14.3.13.1.52 Differences between Normal Mode and Safe Mode in Download Mode for iRC3100................................................................ 14-62
14.3.13.1.53 Auto Orientation is not functioned when Different Size Original mode is set............................................................................. 14-63
14.3.13.1.54 Explanations about "trimming" and "masking" functions ............................................................................................................ 14-63
14.3.13.1.55 DADF-L1: Can originals with different widths and lengths be fed at once? Different size originals function ........................... 14-63
14.3.13.1.56 How to print documents in monochrome that have been scanned in full color and stored into User Inbox ................................ 14-63
14.3.13.1.57 When selecting [PDF (Compact)] as File Format, color mode is automatically changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)]
in scan settings .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-63
14.3.13.1.58 How to disable display of message "Prepare a new fixing unit." ................................................................................................. 14-63
14.3.13.1.59 Stamping Original feature is invalid when Different Size Original mode is set .......................................................................... 14-63
14.3.13.1.60 Heaters (Reader Heater, Cassette Heater, Paper Deck Heater, Cassette Pedestal Heater) is not energized................................. 14-64
14.3.13.1.61 Copy numbers per minute (CPM) during continuous printing in black ....................................................................................... 14-64
14.3.13.1.62 DRM-LIFE is not reset to "0" even after executing drum life clear / Initialization of drum unit: Upon replacement of drum unit 1464
14.3.13.1.63 How to replace toner cartridge by specifying color: When message "Remaining toner is low." is displayed............................. 14-64
14.3.13.1.64 How to clear message "Remaining toner is low." / Message "Remaining toner is low." does not disappear even after replacement of

Contents

toner cartridge ...............................................................................................................................................................................................14-65

14.3.13.1.65 Feed/Separation Rollers: Different appearance between original and service part, between host machine and cassette pedestal...1465
14.3.13.1.66 Necessary steps for counters after replacing fixing ass'y or fixing roller .....................................................................................14-65
14.3.13.1.67 Necessary steps after replacement of color developing ass'ys ......................................................................................................14-65
14.3.13.1.68 How to check estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts..............................................................14-65
14.3.13.1.69 Want to erase all documents stored in Conf. Fax Inbox at once...................................................................................................14-65
14.3.13.1.70 Equation to calculate estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts ..................................................14-65
14.3.13.1.71 Card Reader-C1: Card cannot be recognized (Card No. 2500).....................................................................................................14-66
14.3.13.1.72 Is short connector available for temporarily disconnecting Card Reader-C1? .............................................................................14-66
14.3.13.1.73 Card Reader-C1: Magnetic type cards cannot be recognized although optical type cards can be used normally........................14-66
14.3.13.1.74 Want to know estimated life of ITB Cleaning Blade, Guide for replacement ..............................................................................14-66
14.3.13.1.75 Card Reader-C1: Is it possible to use optical type cards which were used for other card reader? ...............................................14-66
14.3.13.1.76 Types of staple mode of Saddle Finisher-Q2 ................................................................................................................................14-66
14.3.13.1.77 Necessary steps after replacement of Black developing ass'y ......................................................................................................14-66
14.3.13.1.78 How to activate AppleTalk settings ..............................................................................................................................................14-66
14.3.13.1.79 Message "Load paper" is displayed on LCD when printing: Because paper type selected in printer driver does not agree with
machine's setting ...........................................................................................................................................................................................14-67
14.3.13.1.80 How to temporarily print standard-size heavy paper in heavy paper mode..................................................................................14-67
14.3.13.1.81 Reading of ENV-TR (Environmental zone) differs from that of other iRC machines .................................................................14-67
14.3.13.1.82 Output image size is different between when using "Zoom by Percentage" function and "Preset Zoom" function although same copy
ratio is set ......................................................................................................................................................................................................14-67
14.3.13.1.83 Convenient setting for always printing on particular irregular-size paper: How to register Stack Bypass Standard Settings and
Custom Paper Size ........................................................................................................................................................................................14-67
14.3.13.1.84 ENV-TR (Environmental zone indication) is not displayed in Service Mode..............................................................................14-68
14.3.13.1.85 Methods to make stamping original mode effective .....................................................................................................................14-68
14.3.13.1.86 Image loss occurs when copying irregular size original (280 x 420 mm: double truck of magazine) by reducing ratio .............14-68
14.3.13.1.87 Specifications of software counter "922" (Counter name: B/W Send05 Scan Total)...................................................................14-68
14.3.13.1.88 How to make heavy paper available when printing: Registration of Heavy paper to Printer driver ............................................14-68
14.3.13.1.89 Specifications of software counter "918" (Counter name: B/W Send03 Scan Total)...................................................................14-68
14.3.13.1.90 Specifications of software counter "929" (Counter name: Full Color Send06 Scan Total)..........................................................14-68
14.3.13.1.91 Specifications of software counter "921" (Counter name: Full Color Send05 Scan Total)..........................................................14-69
14.3.13.1.92 Specifications of software counter "915" (Counter name: Full Color Send02 Scan Total)..........................................................14-69
14.3.13.1.93 Specifications of software counter "916" (Counter name: B/W Send02 Scan Total)...................................................................14-69
14.3.13.1.94 Wants to know about control sequence for preventing partial deformation of fixing roller: Preventing against deformation of fixing
roller ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................14-69
14.3.13.1.95 Does this machine support Equitrac? ............................................................................................................................................14-69
14.3.13.1.96 Specifications of software counter "930" (Counter name: B/W Send06 Scan Total)...................................................................14-69
14.3.13.1.97 Six items under Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST (Level 2) > HV-TR....................................................................................14-69
14.3.13.1.98 How to check environmental zoon................................................................................................................................................14-69
14.3.13.1.99 Specifications of software counter "917" (Counter name: Full Color Send03 Scan Total)..........................................................14-70
14.3.13.1.100 Image size differs between original image and copied image: When scanning from copyboard glass......................................14-70
14.3.13.1.101 Condensation upon installation/faulty image/malfunction .........................................................................................................14-70
14.3.13.1.102 Auto paper selection mode is unavailable when portrait original (A5/STMT) is placed in landscape orientation (A5R/STMTR)....
14-70
14.3.13.1.103 Destinations registered to One-touch buttons cannot be grouped as single destination in address registration screen under user mode
14-70
14.3.13.1.104 HDD compatibility between iRC3100 and iRC3170..................................................................................................................14-70
14.3.13.1.105 When printing from Windows XP using UFR, message "Local Downlevel Document" appears and machine does not output: Upon
installation .....................................................................................................................................................................................................14-71
14.3.13.1.106 How to set maximum length of irregular size paper to 630mm: Long strip original mode........................................................14-71
14.3.13.2 FAQ on Send Specifications ...................................................................................................................................................................14-71
14.3.13.2.1 When document with handwritten letters is sent by Fax, letters look patchy on received document.............................................14-71
14.3.13.2.2 Address cannot be erase ..................................................................................................................................................................14-71
14.3.13.2.3 Documents stored in Mail Box (Inbox) are lost..............................................................................................................................14-71
14.3.13.2.4 'TIFF/JPEG' is not indicated in pull-down menu of File Type .......................................................................................................14-72
14.3.13.2.5 How to send documents or images to designated folder in computer: Windows (SMB) ...............................................................14-72
14.3.13.2.6 How to make [Send] tab not display on LCD .................................................................................................................................14-72
14.3.13.2.7 How to clear logs (job history, job record) .....................................................................................................................................14-72
14.3.13.2.8 How to send E-mail.........................................................................................................................................................................14-72
14.3.13.2.9 Is iR C3100i equipped with SEND function as standard? ..............................................................................................................14-72
14.3.13.2.10 Does iRC3100 equip function to change copy ratio when sending? / [Copy Ratio] key does not appear on [Send] screen........14-72
14.3.13.2.11 How to print list of destinations registered in one-touch buttons .................................................................................................14-73

Contents

14.3.13.2.12 How to modify [Standard Send Settings] ..................................................................................................................................... 14-73

14.3.13.2.13 Documents that failed to be forwarded were automatically erased .............................................................................................. 14-73
14.3.13.2.14 File format that can be selected in "Send" tab .............................................................................................................................. 14-73
14.3.13.2.15 How to cancel send jobs waiting to be processed or being sent (E-mail / IFAX / Sending to File Server / Storing in User Inbox)1473
14.3.13.2.16 Message "To send a file in [PDF (compct)] format, select a setting other than black and white and select 300 x 300 dpi." is displayed:
FAX transmission ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-73
14.3.13.2.17 Does this machine support MIME (Ver. 1.0)?.............................................................................................................................. 14-73
14.3.13.2.18 Want to send originals with blank boarder (margin) around edge of scanned image: Push scan................................................. 14-73
14.3.13.3 FAQ on UFR Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................... 14-74
14.3.13.3.1 USB Interface Board: Installation location..................................................................................................................................... 14-74
14.3.13.3.2 OS (Operating System) which supports UFR printer functions ..................................................................................................... 14-74
14.3.13.3.3 Description about [Print After Completing RIP] ............................................................................................................................ 14-74
14.3.13.3.4 How to disable color print on printer driver ................................................................................................................................... 14-74
14.3.13.3.5 Image is shifted by 1.5mm to trailing edge (in sub scanning direction) on postcard loaded on stack bypass: via UFR, Windows98 ...
14-74
14.3.13.3.6 Can page numbers be added on copies/prints? ............................................................................................................................... 14-74
14.3.13.3.7 How to store printing data into Inbox via UFR: OS is Windows ................................................................................................... 14-74
14.3.13.3.8 How to make booklet copy by merging multiple documents via UFR: OS is Windows ............................................................... 14-74
14.3.13.3.9 How to print 2nd side upside down in duplex printing................................................................................................................... 14-75
14.3.13.3.10 How to fix print color in black and white (monochrome) ............................................................................................................ 14-75
14.3.13.3.11 How to restrict computers that can send data (print job, I-FAX) ................................................................................................. 14-75
14.3.13.3.12 How to check type information (size, type, level of paper) of machine in printer driver properties............................................ 14-75
14.3.13.3.13 Cannot select Staple as finishing mode on PC: Device status is not obtained ............................................................................. 14-75
14.3.13.3.14 Do counters increase when printing a job of an Excel sheet including both monochrome and color pages? .............................. 14-75
14.3.13.3.15 Correct paper type is not displayed in Tooltip (message) on illustration of printer driver........................................................... 14-75
14.3.13.3.16 Cannot select staple as finishing mode on PC: Because Custom Size Paper is selected.............................................................. 14-76
14.3.13.4 FAQ on PS Specifications ...................................................................................................................................................................... 14-76
14.3.13.4.1 imagePASS-E1/Color Network Printer Unit-E1 cannot be recognized: Upon installation............................................................ 14-76
14.3.13.5 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications .............................................................................................................................................................. 14-76
14.3.13.5.1 Function to inhibit Direct Mail (DM) ............................................................................................................................................. 14-76
14.3.13.5.2 How to darken scanning density of FAX-transmitted document.................................................................................................... 14-76
14.3.13.5.3 Necessary settings for FAX/TEL Auto Switch............................................................................................................................... 14-76
14.3.13.5.4 Can I-FAX/ FAX send and receive color documents? ................................................................................................................... 14-76
14.3.13.5.5 Send TX Report and FAX TX Report (total 2 sheets) are output in the case of FAX transmission error ..................................... 14-76
14.3.13.5.6 How to set transmission level (ATT) at -7db or higher .................................................................................................................. 14-76
14.3.13.5.7 How to register one-touch destinations as group in one-touch button............................................................................................ 14-77
14.3.13.5.8 How to output system dump list ..................................................................................................................................................... 14-77
14.3.13.5.9 How to display FAX error codes on Activity Report ..................................................................................................................... 14-77
14.3.13.5.10 DADF-L1: Can originals that exceed stackable height of DADF-L1 be sent as one job? ........................................................... 14-77
14.3.13.5.11 Unable to receive documents in memory...................................................................................................................................... 14-77
14.3.13.5.12 When receiving B5-sized document by FAX, A4 paper is used for output ................................................................................. 14-77
14.3.13.5.13 How to register Address Book in address list of FAX driver ....................................................................................................... 14-77
14.3.13.5.14 How to display ## service error code ........................................................................................................................................... 14-77
14.3.13.5.15 How to erase all address book data at once .................................................................................................................................. 14-78
14.3.13.5.16 How to activate direct sending feature / Applicable system software versions............................................................................ 14-78
14.3.13.5.17 How to erase Fax forwarding settings .......................................................................................................................................... 14-78
14.3.13.5.18 How to invalidate Fax forwarding setting temporarily................................................................................................................. 14-78
14.3.13.5.19 Wants to forward incoming fax message with no FAX number (Unknown) to Confidential FAX Inboxes ............................... 14-78
14.3.13.5.20 Difference between # error and ## error: FAX error code ........................................................................................................... 14-78
14.3.13.5.21 There is no error code indication in Details although its log displays "NG"................................................................................ 14-78
14.3.13.5.22 How to print FAX Activity Report when necessary..................................................................................................................... 14-78
14.3.13.5.23 Is it possible to move data from Address Book to One-Touch key? ............................................................................................ 14-79
14.3.13.5.24 Multiple Communication Result Report....................................................................................................................................... 14-79
14.3.13.5.25 How to erase all destinations stored in Address Book and One-Touch buttons at once .............................................................. 14-79
14.3.13.5.26 Wants to hide destination name printed at sender information area on receiving side when sending FAX message: FAX transmission
14-79
14.3.13.5.27 Is it possible to do away with prefix number that triggers outside call?: FAX transmission ....................................................... 14-79
14.3.13.6 FAQ on I-FAX Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................ 14-79
14.3.13.6.1 "--" mark indicated in "RESULT" column on Activity Report for e-mail and I-Fax transmission................................................ 14-79
14.3.13.6.2 "Send Via Server" key is grayed out when storing new address for I-Fax..................................................................................... 14-79
14.3.13.6.3 Message [Waiting for result] is displayed on Status screen even after completion of I-Fax transmission ................................ 14-79

Contents

14.3.13.7 FAQ on Remote UI Specifications .........................................................................................................................................................14-80

14.3.13.7.1 Remote UI: Prompting for password when attempting to execute system settings through Remote UI........................................14-80
14.3.13.7.2 Remote UI: How to restrict computers that can set/browse items through Remote UI ..................................................................14-80
14.3.13.7.3 How to review documents stored in Inbox from computer.............................................................................................................14-80
14.3.13.7.4 Remote UI: Explanations about applicable functions of Remote UI ..............................................................................................14-80
14.3.13.7.5 Remote UI: Functions [Job Status] [Mail Box] [Address] [Add. Func.] do not work except for [Device], while prompting for [User
Name] and [Password] ..................................................................................................................................................................................14-80
14.3.13.7.6 Remote UI cannot be accessed with Mac........................................................................................................................................14-80
14.3.13.7.7 Remote UI: How to back up (export) address book........................................................................................................................14-81
14.3.13.7.8 Remote UI: How to specify Department ID Management settings through Remote UI ................................................................14-81
14.3.13.7.9 Remote UI: How to back up settings of additional functions (user mode) .....................................................................................14-81
14.3.13.7.10 Remote UI: How to back up forwarding settings..........................................................................................................................14-81
14.3.13.7.11 Pop-up window cannot be closed after displaying message board on touch panel / How to display "Done" key: Remote UI ...14-81
14.3.13.7.12 One-touch addresses do not return when importing because they have been exported in LDAP format: Remote UI.................14-81
14.3.13.7.13 ECM TX setting is reset to ON (default) when exporting and importing again destinations in Address Book or One-touch buttons
by means of Remote UI.................................................................................................................................................................................14-82
14.3.13.7.14 Wants to import FAX destinations registered to Address Book of machine into FAX driver .....................................................14-82
14.3.13.8 FAQ on iR (Color) Network ScanGear Specifications ...........................................................................................................................14-82
14.3.13.8.1 Color Network ScanGear: Tips for setup........................................................................................................................................14-82
14.3.13.8.2 Can Color Network ScanGear driver for iRC3100 operate coresident with Network ScanGear for iR machines on a computer? ...1482
14.3.13.8.3 After scanning via Color Network ScanGear in PhotoShop, subsequent operation cannot be done in PhotoShop .......................14-82

14.4 Outline of Electrical Components............................................................................................................................14-82

14.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid...................................................................................................................................................................... 14-82
14.4.1.1 Clutch/Solenoid Table...............................................................................................................................................................................14-82
14.4.1.2 Clutch/Solenoid Table...............................................................................................................................................................................14-83

14.4.2 Motor...................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-84

14.4.2.1 Motor Table...............................................................................................................................................................................................14-84

14.4.3 Fan.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-86

14.4.3.1 Fan Table...................................................................................................................................................................................................14-86
14.4.3.2 Fan Table...................................................................................................................................................................................................14-87

14.4.4 Sensor..................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-88

14.4.4.1 Sensor Table..............................................................................................................................................................................................14-88

14.4.5 Switch .................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-91

14.4.5.1 Switch Table..............................................................................................................................................................................................14-91
14.4.5.2 Switch Table..............................................................................................................................................................................................14-92

14.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ................................................................................................................................................... 14-93

14.4.6.1 Lamp. Heaters, and Others Table..............................................................................................................................................................14-93
14.4.6.2 Lamp. Heaters, and Others Table..............................................................................................................................................................14-95

14.4.7 PCBs ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-97

14.4.7.1 PCBs Table................................................................................................................................................................................................14-97
14.4.7.2 PCBs Table................................................................................................................................................................................................14-99
14.4.7.3 PCBs Table..............................................................................................................................................................................................14-102

14.4.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB............................................................. 14-104
14.4.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emiting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB .................................................................................14-104
14.4.8.2 Points to Note about the Leakage Breaker ..............................................................................................................................................14-104
14.4.8.3 Main Controller PCB (main)...................................................................................................................................................................14-104
14.4.8.4 Main Controller PCB (main)...................................................................................................................................................................14-105
14.4.8.5 Main Controller PCB (sub PE-A) ...........................................................................................................................................................14-106
14.4.8.6 Main Controller PCB (sub SJ-A) ............................................................................................................................................................14-106
14.4.8.7 Main Controller PCB (sub R-A) .............................................................................................................................................................14-107
14.4.8.8 Main Controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A) ...............................................................................................................................................14-107
14.4.8.9 DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................................................................14-107
14.4.8.10 DC Controller PCB ...............................................................................................................................................................................14-108
14.4.8.11 High-Voltage Power Supply PCB.........................................................................................................................................................14-109

Chapter 14

14.1 Making lnitial Checks

14.1.1 Checking the Site Environment
0001-6073

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- The voltage of the source of power must be as indicated (+/-10%), and the power plug must remain connected day and night.
- The temperature and humidity of the site must be as indicated, and the site must be away from a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier; moreover, the machine
must not be near a fire or subjected to dust.
- The site must be free of ammonium gas.
- The machine must not be subjected to the direct rays of the sun. As necessary, curtains must be furnished.
- The site must be well ventilated, and its floor must keep the machine level.
- The machine must remain connected to the wall outlet at all times.

14.1.2 Checking the Paper

0001-6076

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Check if the paper is of a type recommended by Canon.
- Check if the paper is dry. If moist, try paper fresh out of package.

14.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper

0001-6077

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- Check that the amount of paper placed in the cassette and the manual feed tray is as indicated.
- If transparencies are used, check to see if they are placed in the correct orientation.

14.1.4 Checking the Durables

0001-6079

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Check the Durables Table, and replace those parts that have reached the end of the indicated lifetimes.

14.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts

0001-6080

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Check the Scheduled Servicing Chart and the Periodically Replaced Parts Table, and replace those parts that have reached the end of the indicated lifetimes.

14.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks

0001-6082

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

1. Reader Unit
- Check the optical system (contact sensor, white plate, copyboard glass) for a scar, dirt, and foreign matter.
- Check the contact sensor unit to see if it moves smoothly. Check its rail for dirt.
- Check the contact sensor for flickering.
- Check the scanner for condensation.
2. Process
- Check the drum unit/developing unit to see if it is attached properly.
- Check the photosensitive drum for a scar and dirt.
- Check the patch image read sensor window for dirt.
3. Transfer
- Check the secondary transfer outside roller for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the blade of the cleaning unit for a tear, warping, deformation, and stray toner.
4. Fixing
- Check the fixing roller/pressure roller for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the fixing heater (main/sub) to see if it goes on when the power is turned on.
- Check the fixing thermistor for an open circuit.
- Check the thermal switch for electrical continuity.
5. Paper Movement
- Check if there is foreign matter such as paper lint.
- Check the pickup/feed/separation roller for a buildup of paper powder, wear, scar, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the registration roller (middle, outside)/paper path roller for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the feed guide for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the paper for a bent leading edge, curling, waving, and moisture.
- As necessary, try transparencies of a type recommended by Canon to see if the problem, if any, is corrected.
6. Machine
- Check if an excess load is imposed on the drive system.
- Check the gears for wear and chipping.
7. Cassette
- Check if the cassettes are fitted properly. Check also to see that an appropriate paper size is selected. As necessary, try a normal cassette if the problem, if any,
stops.
- Check the movement of the cassette holding plate is smooth. Check also to see that the holding plate is free of deformation.
- Check if the side guide plate/trailing edge plate inside the cassette are set correctly.
- Check if the cassette heater switch is at the ON side (if a cassette heater is fitted).
8. Service Mode
- Check that the various CCD adjustment values are as indicated on the service label.

14-1

Chapter 14
(COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>all items)
- Check if registration adjustment is correct.
(COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST)
- Check if the machine inside temperature/humidity is the correct reading.
(COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG>TEMP/ABS-HUM)
- Check the image read position adjustment is correct.
(COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X/ADJ-Y)
- Check if the value for ADJUST/OPTION is as indicated on the service label.
- Check if error initialization has been executed.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)
9. General
- Check the power plug is connected properly.
- Check there is the rated AC voltage at the power outlet.
- Check the sensors, clutches, motors, and solenoids operate normally. Check the connectors for poor contact.
(Be sure to check with the General Timing Chart for reference to power/signal routes.)
- Check the leakage breaker/circuit breaker operates normally.
- Check the wiring for trapping and loose screws.
- Check the external cover are all fitted properly.
- Check the main power switch/control panel power switch are at the ON side.
- Check the power cable/signal cable to accessories are correctly routed.
- Check the cover switch operates normally.
- Check the fuses on the PCBs to see if they have blown.
- Check the user knows how to use the machine correctly.

14.1.7 Others
0001-6094

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

If a machine is brought in from a cold to a warm place, its inside can develop condensation, which will lead to various problems.
(1) condensation on the BD sensor can cause faults associated with E100.
(2) condensation on the dust-blocking glass can cause the images in sub scanning direction to be too light.
(3) condensation on the contact sensor of the reader unit or the copyboard glass can lead to light images.
(4) condensation on the pickup/feed guide can cause faulty paper movement.
If (4) above is noted, be sure to dry wipe the units involved in the feed system.
The same is true of toner cartridges, developing units, and drum units, i.e., when they are unpacked after being brought in from a cold place. To prevent condensation, advise the user to leave the package alone (for about 1 to 2 hr) before opening it.

14.2 Test Print

14.2.1 Overview
0001-6108

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine offers the following 6 types of test prints (TYPE), each designed for identification of a specific type of image fault. The data for these test prints is
prepared by the main controller: if the output of a test print is free of the fault in question, suspect a fault on the PDL input or the reader unit.

14.2.2 Test Print TYPE

0001-6109

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-14-1
Type No.

Description

normal copy/print

1-3

-(for R&D)

16 gradations

full half-tone

grid

7-9

-(for R&D)

10

MCYBk horizontal stripe (sub scanning direction)

11

-(for R&D)

12

64 gradations

13

-(for R&D)

14

full color 16 gradations

15-100

-(for R&D)

14.2.3 Selecting Test Print TYPE

0001-6111

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

14-2

Chapter 14

1) Set the copy count, paper size, and pickup mode (single-sided or double-sided).
2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG.
3) Make the following selections: COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE.
4) Enter the appropriate TYPE No. using the keypad, and press the OK key.
5) Select the appropriate color using COLOR-Y/M/C/K (output at 1).
6) Set the density using DENS-Y/M/C/K (valid only if TYPE=5).
7) Press the start key.

14.2.4 16-Gradation (TYPE=4)

0001-6113

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Use this test print to check gradation, fogging, white line, and uneven density at the front/rear.
- Gradation
If the 16-gradation[1] is not properly produced, suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser exposure system.
- Fogging
If fogging is found only in the white area[2], suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser exposure system.
- White Line
If a white line is found in the image, suspect a fault in the developing system.
- Uneven Density at the Front/Rear
If uneven density is found at the front/rear, suspect a fault in the drum unit, laser exposure system, or transfer system.

[1]

[2]

F-14-1

14.2.5 Full Page Halftone (TYPE=5)

0001-6115

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Use this test print to check a transfer fault, black line, white line, and uneven density at specific intervals.
MEMO:
- You can print out test prints for individual colors by making the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG and then COLOR-Y/M/C/K.
- You can also change the density of the test prints by making the following selections in service mode: TEST>PG>DENS>Y/M/C/K.
(1) Transfer Fault
If a transfer fault (white spot) occurs, suspect a fault in the ITB unit or the secondary transfer outside roller.
(2) Black Line
If a black line occurs, suspect a scratch in the photosensitive drum or dirt on the primary charging roller.
(3) White Line
If a white line occurs, suspect a fault in the ITB unit, secondary transfer outside roller, or laser exposure system.
(4) Uneven Density
If the density is uneven at specific intervals, suspect the following:
(a) photosensitive drum (if at 194.7 mm)
(b) developing cylinder (if at 37.6 mm)
(5) Uneven Density
If uneven density occurs, suspect dirt on the dust-blocking glass of the laser unit or deterioration of the ITB.

14-3

Chapter 14

COLOR-M=1, COLOR-Y/C/K=0
F-14-2

14.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6)

0001-6117

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Use this text print to check color displacement, right angles, and straight lines.
- Color Displacement
If color displacement is found, suspect a scar in the ITB and a fault in the drum unit.
- Right Angle, Straight Lines
If the right angles or straight lines are not correct, suspect a fault in the laser exposure system, a fault in the shape of the registration (middle/outside) roller,
and a fault in the secondary transfer outside roller.

F-14-3

14.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripes (TYPE=10)

0001-6118

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Use this test print to check the density of dark areas of individual colors, balance among colors, and white lines associated with development.
(1) Solid Density of Individual Colors and Balance Among Colors
(a) the density must not be appreciably low (too light).
(b) if the density of a specific color is too low (too light), suspect a fault in the developing system.
(c) if the density of all colors is low (too light), suspect a fault in the laser exposure system and the transfer block.
(2) While Line
If a white line is found in a specific color, suspect a fault in the development system of that particular color.
(3) Uneven Density at the Front/Rear
If uneven density is found in a specific color, suspect a fault in the development system of that particular color. If it is found in all colors, suspect a fault in
the drum unit, ITB unit, and laser exposure system.

14-4

Chapter 14

2.5 1.5mm

2.5 1.5mm
F-14-4

14.2.8 64-Gradation (TYPE=12)

0001-6119

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Use this test print to check the gradation of Y, M, C, and Bk at once.

F-14-5

14.2.9 Full Color 16-Gradation (TYPE=14)

0001-6120

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Use this test print to check the gray balance, gradation of individual colors (YMCBk), and fogging.
- Gray Balance
Check the grayscale area to see if the densities of all colors are even.
- Gradation
Check the gradation of individual colors (YMCBk) and for any difference in color.
- Fogging
If fogging is found in the white area, suspect a fault in the developing system, a fault in the drum unit, and poor adjustment of the laser exposure system.

14-5

Chapter 14

4 colors (YMCK)
3 colors (YMC)

Light area

White

White

F-14-6

14.3 Troubleshooting
14.3.1 Symptoms
14.3.1.1 Symptoms
0001-8098

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

T-14-2
Item
Image fault

Description
blurry image/line caused by condensation
color displacement in sub scanning direction
white spot in horizontal direction
horizontal lines at intervals of 75.4 mm
vertical white line
round, white spot along trailing edge
white spot indicating traces of pickup roller
cyclic image fault
black line along leading edge
fine, black line in stream reading
rib-shaped dirt
poor reproduction of horizontal fine line

Paper movement fault

skew of last postcard from manual feed tray

skew of paper from manual feed tray
peeling of a manually fed label sheet

Operation fault

noise during pickup from cassette

Jam (machine)

pickup fault from side paper deck

jam immediately after pickup (heavy paper, envelope, postcard)
delivery delay jam (label sheet)
Pickup Stationary Jam

For details, see the remedies given for individual faults.

14.3.2 Image Faults

14.3.2.1 Blank Image
14.3.2.1.1 Blank image occurs when copying
0011-2561

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, blank image occurred when copying although FAX received image was output normally. Additionally, the same symptom occurred when
outputting the P-PRINT printout and the Activity Report for the purpose of identification of its cause; however, it was solved by performing the auto gradation
correction.

14-6

Chapter 14
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, perform the auto gradation correction.

14.3.2.2 Light Image / Weak Density

14.3.2.2.1 Density is different between front and rear sides (front or rear side is light in density), Developer of Y/M/C/BK leaks, Abnormal
Noise from developing ass'y
0005-1494

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the developing ass'y was transferred in a vertical position to a site after pre-installation of the host machine,
causing the developer to lean to one side.
Follow the steps below:
1. Visually inspect the surface of the developing cylinder of the affected developing ass'y. If the developer extremely accumulates at one point, go to the Step
4. If not, it is possible the developing ass'y can recover, so go to the Step 2.
2. Rotate the developing cylinder while softly swaying the developing ass'y from side to side in order to uniform the amount of the developer on the surface.
3. Install the developing ass'y and check whether or not the symptom recurs. If it recurs, go to the Step 4.
4. Replace the developing ass'y with a new one.
Developing Ass'y (BLACK): FM2-0056
Developing Ass'y (YELLOW): FM2-0057
Developing Ass'y (MAGENTA): FM2-0058
Developing Ass'y (CYAN): FM2-0059
Note: Be sure not to transfer the developing ass'y in a vertical position when it is transferred after pre-installation or as a service part.
14.3.2.2.2 Density is excessively different between front and rear sides
0005-1503

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Follow the steps below:
1. Make a copy and output a PG test print.
If the symptom occurs only on the copy, it is possible the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) is faulty. If it occurs only on the PG test print or on both, go to the
Step 2.
2. Make sure that the connectors on the Main Controller PCB are securely fitted or there is no pinched cable, and whether the BootROM and SDRAM are
securely fitted. If no problem is found, go to the Step 3.
3. Remove the Resolution Switch PCB and the UFR Board PCB in that order, and output a PG test print each time of removal. If the symptom still recurs,
go to the Step 4.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB (Main) with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main) Ass'y: FG3-3221
Contact Image Sensor Ass'y: FM2-1563
Resolution Switch PCB Ass'y: FG3-2728
UFR Board PCB Ass'y: FG3-3223
14.3.2.2.3 Developing cylinder locks up
0005-4360

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the developing ass'y was transferred in a vertical position to a site after pre-installation of the host machine, causing
the developer to lean to one side.
Follow the steps below:
1. Visually inspect the surface of the developing cylinder of the affected developing ass'y. If the developer extremely accumulates at one point, go to the Step
4. If not, it is possible the developing ass'y can recover, so go to the Step 2.
2. Rotate the developing cylinder while softly swaying the developing ass'y from side to side in order to uniform the amount of the developer on the surface.
3. Install the developing ass'y and check whether or not the symptom recurs. If it recurs, go to the Step 4.
4. Replace the developing ass'y with a new one.
Developing Ass'y (BLACK): FM2-0056
Developing Ass'y (YELLOW): FM2-0057
Developing Ass'y (MAGENTA): FM2-0058
Developing Ass'y (CYAN): FM2-0059
Note: Be sure not to transfer the developing ass'y in a vertical position when it is transferred after pre-installation or as a service part.
14.3.2.2.4 How to adjust density of FAX-transmitted image
0006-5253

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
If a FAX-transmitted image is too light or too dark regardless of destinations, adjust the density in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Exposure Recalibration>
Send (B & W)].
14.3.2.2.5 Light image: Because of condensation upon installation
0009-7519

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the following occurred: When the machine is pre-installed and delivered to a user site by a truck, light image occurs right after the installation.
Since the cause is assumed to be condensation inside the machine, the machine is left for about 3 hours to correct the symptom.
Field Remedy
When the symptom is not solved by the gradation correction, condensation may occur inside the machine. Unplug the power code and leave the machine for
a few hours. When the condensation disappears as a result of the machine being acclimated to ambient temperature, plug the power code and turn the main
power switch ON.

14-7

Chapter 14
14.3.2.2.6 Light image occurs throughout page when copying in color mode
0009-7525

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
In inspection, light image occurred throughout a page because service mode and user mode were set as follows.
- In service mode, the adjustment values for [COLOR ADJ-Y, M, C, K] were set to "-8."
- In user mode, the Copy/Inbox exposure recalibration adjustment knob was set on "light" side (9-level adjustment).
The symptom was solved by returning such settings to the factory settings. When the symptom occurs, follow the field remedy below.
Field Remedy
1. In service mode [COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR > ADJ-Y, M, C, K], set the values to "0."
2. In user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning > Exposure Recalibration > Copy/In-box], set the adjustment knob at the middle point.

14.3.2.3 Foggy Image

14.3.2.3.1 Texts in FAX-received documents are too dark
0006-1071

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
iRC3100 does not have a mode to adjust only the density of the FAX-received documents.
However, if you still want to adjust the density, perform the service mode below. Note that it will affect the density of all the outputs such as copy, fax, print.
In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Adjust> V-CONT> VCONT-K], the smaller the setting value, the lighter the density. Default: 0 (Adjustment range: -30 to 30)
14.3.2.3.2 Texts are too thick on copies, prints, and FAX-RX
0006-9661

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
The setting change described below can make texts thinner. First, perform the step "a" and if you want further go on to the step "b".
Note: The setting change will lighten the density and affect the quality of pictures, so pay careful attention to the image quality during the setting change.
Field Remedy
a. Lower the light amount of laser
1. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Function> LASER> POWER-H], press the OK key.
2. When an indication "START" appears, press the OK key once again.
3. When an indication "STOP!" appears, turn the control panel switch OFF, and turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
4. In user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Auto Gradation Adjustment], perform [Full Adjustment].
5. Check the output images (text PDL, photo PDL, copied image).
Note: If you want to restore the above setting to the default, select [POWER-H] > press the OK key > "START" appears (do NOT press the OK key) > turn the
control panel switch OFF > turn the main power switch OFF/ON > perform [Full Adjustment].
b. Lower the set value of toner density
1. In user mode [Printer Settings> Settings> Print Quality], select [Density].
2. Lower the set value of each color by one degree (If the customer complains black texts, change the value of black only.).
3. Check the output images. If you want further, repeat the steps 1 and 2.
14.3.2.3.3 Poor reproducibility of photo when copying text-photo mixed original: Text / Photo / Map mode
0009-1295

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, the symptom was improved by increasing the setting of the text-photo recognition level in service mode.
When the symptom occurs, select [COPIER > ADJUST >MISC > SEG-ADJ] and adjust the text-photo recognition level.
In order for the original to be recognized as a photo original: Increase the setting
In order for the original to be recognized as a text original: Decrease the setting
Available range of setting: -4 to +4.

14.3.2.4 Out of Focus

14.3.2.4.1 Blurred image in main scanning direction only on copies
0005-3470

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (sub) was faulty (1 case).
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connectors on the Main Controller PCB are securely fitted or there is no pinched cable. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 2.
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (main): FG3-3221
14.3.2.4.2 Image registration failure at leading edge because of anomalous data of DC Controller PCB
0005-6476

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the data of the DC Controller PCB was anomalous.
Field Remedy
1. Check whether the values indicated in the service label attached to the inside of the front cover are input in the corresponding service mode. If not, input the
value indicated in the service label in service mode.
2. Adjust the registration in service mode [COPIER> Adjust> FEED-ADJ> REGIST (-50 to 50)].
3. If the symptom still recurs, initialize RAM on the DC Controller PCB as follows: Output a P-PRINT that lists the service mode settings in service mode
[COPIER> Function> MISC-P> P-PRINT]. Then, select [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> DC-CON] and press OK. Turn the power OFF/ON afterwards. Enter

14-8

Chapter 14
the service mode settings once again by referring to P-PRINT as necessary.
14.3.2.4.3 Multiple unintended shadows / ghost images occur on copied image in main scanning direction
0009-1298

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the symptom was solved by replacement of the contact image sensor assembly (CIS). If the symptom still recurs although the test print is normal
and the CIS flat cable connector is reinserted, replace the CIS with a new one.
FM2-1563 Contact Image Sensor Assembly (CIS)
14.3.2.4.4 Copied image is displaced in main scanning direction: When scanning from copyboard glass
0009-1300

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, the symptom was solved by making an adjustment in service mode [COPIER > ADJUST > ADSJ-JX > ADJ-Y]. When the symptom occurs, try this
adjustment. The range of adjustment is 85 to 169, and the default value/the value after RAM clear is 131. An increase of the value moves the image position
frontward in the main scanning direction. An increase of the value by "10" will move the image by 1mm.
14.3.2.4.5 Copied image is displaced in main scanning direction: When scanning from ADF
0009-1301

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, the symptom was improved by making an adjustment in service mode [COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF]. The range of adjustment is
50 to 250. The default setting / the setting after the RAM clear is 158. Increasing the setting will move the position of copied image frontward in the main
scanning direction. Increasing the setting by 10 will moves the image by 1mm.
14.3.2.4.6 Image on second side is displaced in main scanning direction in duplex mode: How to adjust horizontal registration of second
side
0009-7521

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170

[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, the symptom was solved by adjusting the second side horizontal registration in service mode with each paper source. When the symptom occurs,
try the procedure below.
a. For Paper Cassettes (1 to 4)
ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1RE to ADJ-C4RE
b. For Paper Deck-Q1
ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-DKRE
c. For Manual Feed Tray
ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-MFRE
Adjustable range for each service mode item is 10 to +10. A "1" increase of the adjustment value will move the image position by 0.1mm on the far side of
paper.
14.3.2.4.7 Image-positioning error occurs only when scanning irreg. size original (280mm x 380mm) from ADF and printing on same size
paper fed from manual feed tray
0009-8293

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In service mode (Level2) [COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST ("Long Strip Original key" indication)], change the default setting "0" (no indication)
to "1." As the "Long Strip Original" key appears on the special features screen, select it and then scan the irregular size original from the ADF.
Description
With the factory setting, when scanning an irregular size original from the ADF and printing the scanned image on the same size copying paper, the machine
falsely recognizes the copying paper as standard size paper of the nearest size and operates as if it prints the image on such standard size paper, causing imagepositioning error.
14.3.2.4.8 Blurred Image/Line Caused by Condensation
0002-1418

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Cause>
The machine fails to create normal images because of condensation.
<Field Remedy>
Remove the left cover and the delivery tray, and leave the machine alone so that it will become used to the room temperature.
14.3.2.4.9 Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction
0002-1429

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Cause>
- The transfer to the ITB has become displaced because of a shock occurring when the ITB cleaning blade is engaged/disengaged.
- Transfer to the ITB has become displaced because of a shock occurring when the secondary transfer outside roller is engaged/disengaged.
<Field Remedy>
Make the following selections in service mode to make adjustments: COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG.
Service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG
Use it to fine-adjust the image sub scanning direction start position.
- REG-V-Y (Y, 1st side)

14-9

Chapter 14
- REG-V-M (M, 1st side)
- REG-V-K (K, 1st side)
- REG2-V-Y (Y, 2nd side)
- REG2-V-M (M, 2nd side)
- REG2-V-K (K, 2nd side)
<Making Adjustments>
- An increase by '1' will move the image by a single pixel (about 0.04 mm) toward the rear.
- Be sure to enter the values indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB.
<Range of Adjustment>
-10 to +10 (unit: pixel) [at time of shipment: factory value] [at time of RAM initialization: 0]
Service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TBLD-TMG (level 2)
Timing of Execution of ITB Cleaning in Direct, Full Color Mode
<Settings>
0: do not delay [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: delay
<Note>
Setting it to '1' will lead to lowered productivity.

14.3.2.5 Partially Blank/Streaked

14.3.2.5.1 White streaks in sub scanning direction
0005-3241

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because foreign substances were trapped inside the developing ass'y.
Field Remedy
1. Output each color of test print (Y/M/C/Bk) in service mode:
Change the set value from [0] to [5] in [COPIER> Test> PG> TYPE]. In order to output a test print in e.g. yellow (single color), set [1] for [COLOR-Y] and
[0] for [COLOR-M/COLOR-C/COLOR-K]. Then press the start key. For Magenta, Cyan and Black, do the same thing by setting [1] for each color.
2. If white streaks appear on any of the test prints, inspect the affected developing ass'y to see any scratches on the developing cylinder surface or any foreign
substances between the cylinder and the blade.
Checking Method:
Move toner between the cylinder and the blade using a sheet of OHT. If the position of the white streaks is changed, foreign substances might be the root cause.
Developing Ass'y (BLACK): FM2-0056
Developing Ass'y (YELLOW): FM2-0057
Developing Ass'y (MAGENTA): FM2-0058
Developing Ass'y (CYAN): FM2-0059
14.3.2.5.2 Streaks in sub scanning line appear on image corresponding to rear side of host machine because of ITB cleaning failure
0006-6277

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
Since there is a backlash between the ITB unit and the ITB unit supporting plate at the rear left point, toner passes under the ITB cleaning blade (rear) without
being scraped off, resulting in this symptom.
Field Remedy
Follow the steps below to install the ITB unit at the proper position.
a. Preparation
a-1. Select the service mode [COPIER> Function> MISC-P> ITB-CLSW] and press the OK key in order to rotate the developing rotary until the BK toner bottle
is moved to the top. Then, turn the power OFF/ON.
a-2. Remove the following parts: drum unit, delivery tray, delivery tray lower cover, waste toner bottle, protective plate, ITB cleaning unit.
b. Adjust the installation position
b-1. The ITB unit becomes visible, so loosen the two screws (front and rear) of the ITB unit. Then, tighten the front screw only.
b-2. While pressing the ITB unit (left rear) down to the ITB supporting plate, tighten the rear screw once gain.
c. Image checking
Install the parts removed in the step a-2 and check the image. If the symptom still recurs, the pressure of the ITB cleaning blade is not proper. In such a case,
make sure of the ITB cleaning unit installation state. If there is no problem, replace the ITB cleaning blade or the ITB cleaning unit with a new one.
Note: When the ITB cleaning unit is installed into the host machine, be sure to apply the lubricant to the edge of the cleaning blade.
ITB Cleaning Blade: FC5-0368
ITB Cleaning Unit: FM2-0082
Lubricant for Cleaning Assembly: TKN-0480
14.3.2.5.3 Streaks in main scanning direction appear at 5cm from paper trailing edge on full-colored A3 paper
0007-9927

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
There is an actual case in the field that streaks in the main scanning direction appeared on a light halftone image because vibrations of the ITB created when the
ITB cleaning blade contacts the ITB was transferred to the primary transfer area.
Field Remedy
In order to temporarily ease this symptom on a particular image, make the following setting. However, note that the productivity will degrade by approximately
20 percent, so be sure to restore the setting to the original under the normal usage condition.
In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> TBLD-TMG], set it to "1" (default: 0).
14.3.2.5.4 Voids at trailing edge on A3-sized coated paper
0008-0529

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]

14-10

Chapter 14
Description
Coated paper is out of specification of this machine. Available paper types of this machine are described in the Reference Guide [Basic Operations> Available
Paper Stock]. In actual failure cases in the field, voids appeared 2cm to 3cm from the trailing edge because A3-sized coated paper for iRC3200 was used.
14.3.2.5.5 Missing color and color displacement in sub scanning direction (Yellow)
0011-0386

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, missing color and color displacement in the sub scanning direction occurred because the rear tension arm of the primary transfer roller was broken.
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, check the ITB belt tension; if it is loose in either of the front or rear side, perform the following procedure "a" or "b". After
that, perform auto gradation correction, and then check output images for the symptom.
a. If the tension arm is broken, replace it with a new one.
b. If the tension spring is detached from the tension arm, re-fit it.
FC5-0344 Rear Tension Arm
14.3.2.5.6 Horizontal White Streaks
0002-1420

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur in a full color, halftone image made in a high temperature/humidity environment.
<Cause>
The secondary transfer outside roller has been left in contact with the ITB, thus causing a secondary transfer fault.
<Field Remedy>
Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>TBLT-CLN.
<Caution>
The machine moves the secondary transfer roller away from the ITB for the following:
- about 30 sec after it enters a standby state.
- the control panel power switch is tuned off.
If the main power switch is turned off in about 30 sec after the machine enters a standby state, the machine cannot move the secondary transfer roller away from
the ITB, leaving it in contact with the ITB.
<Notes>
The symptom starts to appear when the secondary transfer outside roller is left in contact with the ITB for about 30 min to 1 hr; it tends to disappear when about
200 sheets of paper have been moved past.
<Image Sample>

F-14-7

14.3.2.5.7 White Horizontal Lines at Intervals of 75.4 mm

0002-1421

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur on the 2nd side of a halftone image print.
<Cause>
The secondary transfer outside roller is approaching the end of its life, thus starting to show abnormal discharge.
<Field Remedy>
Replace the secondary transfer outside roller.
<Image Sample>

14-11

Chapter 14

F-14-8

14.3.2.5.8 Vertical White Line

0002-1422

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Cause>
There is adhesion of dust in a specific area [1] or [2] of the drum unit or scanner hood, respectively.

F-14-9

F-14-10

<Field Remedy>
Dry wipe the area [1] or [2] of the drum unit or the scanner hood, respectively with a moist cloth.
<Caution>
Never dry wipe the areas; otherwise, static charges will occur and attract dust.
<Image Sample>

14-12

Chapter 14

F-14-11

14.3.2.5.9 White Spots Along the Trailing Edge

0002-1423

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur in a low humidity environment.
<Cause>
The movement of paper is disrupted when the secondary transfer roller moves away.
<Field Remedy>
Make adjustments using the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK-B.
T-14-3
BLANK-B

Use it to enter an adjustment value for the non-image width (trailing edge).

Method of
adjustment

Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the main
controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB.

Range of
adjustment

0 to 1000 [at time of shipment/at time of RAM initialization, +59]

<Caution>
Executing this field remedy will increase the trailing edge margin/non-image width.
<Image Sample>

F-14-12

14-13

Chapter 14
14.3.2.5.10 White Spot Indicating Trace of the Pickup Roller
0002-1424

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur in a high temperature/humidity environment.
<Cause>
An ingredient contained in the pickup roller builds up on the ITB, causing the white spots.
<Field Remedy>
1. Replace the ITB.
2. If FB6-3406 (w/ green collar) is used as the feed roller/separation roller, replace it with the roller designed for the iR C3100 Series (see the Parts Catalog).
<Caution>
Do not use FB6-3406 (w/ green collar) as the feed roller/separation roller to avoid white spots.
<Image Sample>

F-14-13

14.3.2.5.11 Cyclic Image Fault

0002-1425

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur in sub scanning direction.
<Field Remedy>
See the following table to identify the part; then, clean or replace the part:
T-14-4
Interval (mm)

Part

14.1

fixing outlet sensor roll

15.7

fixing inlet roll

27.3

delivery roll

29.5

fixing outlet roll

37.6

developing cylinder

40.8

registration roller (middle)

44.0

primary charging roller

45.4

delivery roller

46.3

duplexing feed roller 1/2

50.2

primary transfer roller

pickup roller
vertical path roller 1/2
vertical path slave roller

50.5

registration roller (outside)

56.5

duplex feed roller 1/2

62.8

fixing outlet roller

65.9

secondary transfer inside roller

75.4

secondary transfer outside roller

feed roller
separation roller

113.0

14-14

manual feed pickup roller

119.3

pressure roller

152.3

fixing roller

194.7

photosensitive drum

Chapter 14
Interval (mm)

Part

584.0

ITB

14.3.2.6 Smudged/Streaked
14.3.2.6.1 Yellow streaks on full-colored copy, black streaks on black-and-white copy, in sub scanning direction
0005-3466

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) was faulty (1 case). Follow the steps below:
In service mode [COPIER> Test> PG], select either of 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, or 14 for [TYPE] to output a test print. If no streak appears on the test print, it is possible
that the CIS is faulty, so replace it with a new one.
Contact Image Sensor Ass'y: FM2-1563
After replacement, follow the instructions described in Service Manual [Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments > Scanning System > After Replacing the CIS].
14.3.2.6.2 Toner scattering inside machine and soiled image because side seal in Transfer Cleaning As'y peeled off
0005-4383

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, it was found that toner scattered inside the machine upon installation because the side seal in the Transfer Cleaning Ass'y (FM2-0082) peeled off.
Check whether or not the side seal peels off when this symptom occurs.
Transfer Cleaning Ass'y (ITB Cleaning Unit): FM2-0082
14.3.2.6.3 Streaks/Uneven density occurs at 195mm intervals after recovers from Energy Saver mode or Low Power mode
0009-1412

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
With the sleep function disabled in service mode, when the machine is left in the energy saver mode or the low power mode for a long time, the fixing roller is
rotated every 10 minutes to prevent it from being deformed by nip pressure applied to it. It was found that the primary charging roller applies voltage to a certain
location of the drum for a very short time during rotation, and causes charge memory at the location, finally allowing the symptom to occur on certain types of
image.
Field Remedy
Upgrade the ROM on the DC Controller PCB to Ver. 40.01 or later. In these versions, the control sequence of the voltage output from the primary charging roller
is modified.
14.3.2.6.4 Line appears on image when printing PDF file from PC: Push scan
0009-7518

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the leading edge of an original, which had been scanned and sent to a PC as a PDF file (Push scan), was printed as a line on the output image
when the PDF file was printed from the PC. (This symptom did not occur when using the copy function.)
Field Remedy
When the symptom occurs, open the PDF file and uncheck the checkbox of [Shrink oversized pages to page size] under [File > Print > Copies and
Adjustments].
14.3.2.6.5 Bleeding occurs in duplex copying
0010-4547

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the image on the reverse side of an original appeared on the copy in duplex copying.
Field Remedy
a. Check the original that causes the symptom. If the image on the reverse side shows through, take such a measure as using thicker paper for the original.
b. If the image on the reverse side does not show through, make the following selections in sequence on the LCD [Special Features > Image Qual. Adjustment
> Prevent Bleed-thru.].
14.3.2.6.6 Horizontal Black Line Along Leading Edge
0002-1426

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur in a high temperature/humidity environment.
<Cause>
The movement of paper is disrupted during secondary transfer.
<Remedy>
Increase the value of the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK>-T.
<Caution>
Execution of this field remedy will increase the leading edge margin/non-image width.
<Image Sample>

14-15

Chapter 14

F-14-14

14.3.2.6.7 Fine, Black Line in Stream Read Mode

0002-1427

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Cause>
Dust causing black streaks has 2 types, and measures to be taken against the streaks differ depending upon the dust type.
- Airborne Dust
Suspended on the DADF feeding path.
- Adherent Dust
Adhered to the DADF reading glass.
<How to Identify the Dust Type>
- Airborne Dust
Cause is regarded as airborne dust if black streaks are short at random.
- Adherent Dust
Cause is regarded as adherent dust if black streaks are long in the same direction (height direction).
<Field Remedy>
- Measures against airborne dust
1)Clean the white mylar and platen roller to remove dust.
2)Clean inside the DADF to remove dust.
For environment where user often uses paper containing much paper dust, however, there is possibility that black streaks caused by airborne dust still occur even
after these measures are taken. In this case, advise user to make the background removal setting in user mode.
- Measures against adherent dust
1)Clean the DADF reading glass (using silicone oil and cleaning tissue).
For environment where black streaks caused by adherent dust often occur, advise user to clean the reading glass with cleaning tissue.
2)Fix the reading position at 6.5mm. (In service mode, COPIER>OPTION>BODY and set 2 to DST-POS.)
This reading position can prevent the DADF reading glass from adhesion of much dust (since document does not come in contact with the glass). In other words,
black streaks appear as long as any dust is adhered to this position.
If black streaks often occur even after these measures are taken, advise user to make the background removal setting in user mode.
14.3.2.6.8 Rib-Shaped Dirt
0002-1428

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Cause>
A rib in the path is soiled with stray toner or paper powder to cause dirt in the form of a rib.
<Field Remedy>
Clean the area of the rib identified by the map that follows.

14-16

Vertical
path guide

Lower
right door

Pickup frame

Lower right door deck path

Return guide

Pickup frame

Return guide

Return guide

Vertical path slave roller

Vertical path roller

Pickup roller

Feed roller
separation roller

Vertical path roller

Pickup roller

Vertical path slave roller

Feed roller
Separation roller

100mm

Return guide

Return guide

Return guide

Lower right door grip

* Make a copy of this diagram so that

the interval here is as long as 100 mm.

Chapter 14

F-14-15

14-17

F-14-16

14-18
Pre-registration Side guide

Lower right inside door

MP holding plate

Pre-registration auxiliary guide sheet

MP frame

Registration roller inside

Registration roller inside

Pre-registration
machine Side guide

Vertical path roller

Holding plate sheet

Registration outside

Registration roller outside

Pre-registration Side guide

Secondary transfer outside roller

Feed frame

Registration roller inside

Registration roller outside

MMP separation pad

100mm

Lower right inside door

* Make a copy of this diagram so that

the interval here is as long as 100 mm.

Chapter 14

Pressure roller

Fixing roller

Inside delivery guide lower

Inside delivery guide upper

Fixing delivery reversing flapper

Duplex feed guide 2

Upper right cover

Delivery guide

Fixing inlet guide

Fixing outlet roll

Delivery roll

Delivery roller

Fixing outlet roll

Fixing outlet sensor roll

Delivery roll

Delivery roller

Fixing outlet roll

Delivery roll

Delivery roller

Delivery roll

Delivery roller

Fixing outlet roll

100mm

* Make a copy of this diagram so that

the interval here is as long as 100 mm.

Chapter 14

F-14-17

14-19

Duplex. feed roller

Duplex feed roll

Duplex feed roller

Duplex feed roll

Duplex feed roller

duplex fed roll

Inside delivery guide lower

Duplex feed guide 1

Duplex feed guide 2

Duplex inside
guide

Right outside roller

Duplex feed roll

Reversing
guide

Duplex feed roller

100mm

* Make a copy of this diagram so that

the interval here is as long as 100 mm.

Chapter 14

F-14-18

14.3.2.7 Ghost / Memory

14.3.2.7.1 Ghost image/gradual decrease in density from 40mm off leading edge: Occurs only with magenta upon installation
0010-8339

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
When output images were verified upon installation, ghost image or gradual decrease in density from 40mm off the leading edge occurred only with magenta;
however, changing the setting of [TMC-SLCT] in service mode corrected the symptom. When the symptom has occurred, perform the following procedure.
Field Remedy
Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > OPTION > BODY > change the setting of [TMC-SLCT] to "2" (the default setting is "0") > turn the control panel switch
OFF > turn the main power switch OFF and then ON > make copies.
- Typical use of [TMC-SLCT] in the field
This service mode item is used to enhance the dot reproducibility and improve uneven density at regular intervals or coarse image that is caused at a severe
level by the default setting of this item.
In case that such symptoms occur only with black, change the setting to "1".
In case that such symptoms occur with all colors, change the setting to "2".

14.3.2.8 Poor Finxing

14.3.2.8.1 Flap of envelope is glued after passing through machine
0008-2875

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
If the flap of an envelope is glued in "Envelope" mode, make a copy or print in "Plain Paper" mode by following the steps below:
a. For copy
Press [Paper Select> Stack Bypass> Irreg. Size> enter the envelope size> OK> Next> Plain Paper> OK], and load the envelopes on the stack bypass.
b. For print
1. As in the case of copy, make the stack bypass settings.

14-20

Chapter 14
2. Register the size of an envelope to be used into "Custom Paper Size" in the printer driver:
[Start> Settings> Printers> iRC3100> Properties> General> Printing Preference> Custom Paper Size> enter any name (e.g. envelope) in Name of Custom Paper
Size> enter the envelope size in Paper Size> Register> OK].
3. Select the registered paper in the printer driver and start to print:
[Print> iRC3100> Properties> Page Setup> select the registered paper in step 2 from Output Size> OK].
Note: The steps above enable envelopes to be fed at a normal speed. Accordingly, this symptom will not occur at a high rate. However, if it still recurs, decrease
the fixing temperature in service mode [COPIER> Option> BODY> TEMP-TBL> set to "1" or "2"].

14.3.2.9 Faulty Color Reproduction

14.3.2.9.1 How to adjust color on prints (color density adjustment)
0005-5989

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Printer Settings> Settings> Print Quality> Density], select any color you want to adjust.
14.3.2.9.2 When outputting data created by PowerPoint via UFR, color of texts occasionally varies
0005-9662

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with UFR printer driver Ver.10.20. So, upgrade it to the latest version when this occurs.
14.3.2.9.3 Hue problem: Occurs when using DADF
0010-7274

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, when an original with a pink background was copied using the DADF, the machine output an image with a yellow-tinged color background; however,
when the same original was copied using the copyboard glass, the machine output an image with the normal background color. Therefore, white level adjustment
was performed on the DADF.
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, perform the following steps.
1. Place blank sheet of paper on the copyboard glass.
2. In service mode [COPIER > Function > CCD > DF-WLVL1], press [OK], and then, make sure that the display on the LCD changes as follows: START >
ACTIVATE > OK!.
3. Remove the blank sheet of paper from the copyboard glass, and then place it on the DADF.
4. In service mode [COPIER > Function > CCD > DF-WLVL2], press [OK], and then, make sure that the display on the LCD changes as follows: START >
ACTIVATE > OK!.
Note: Be sure to execute the above-mentioned two service mode items.
14.3.2.9.4 Poor Reproduction of Horizontal Fine Lines
0002-1430

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Notes>
This fault tends to occur in text/photo/map mode and photo mode.
<Cause>
- characteristics of the contact image sensor
- image processing characteristics used for text
<Field Remedy>
Recommend the use of film photo/print photo mode.

14.3.2.10 Stretching/Shrinking
14.3.2.10.1 DADF-L1: Image stretch or image shrinkage in sub scanning direction / How to adjust magnification of DADF-L1
0005-4386

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the adjustment of the magnification had not been executed upon installation of DADF-L1.
Field Remedy
Follow the steps below:
Magnification Adjustment
1. Place a test chart on the copyboard glass and make a copy [Copy A].
2. Place a test chart on the DADF and make a copy [Copy B].
3. Compare [Copy A] and [Copy B]. In service mode [FEEDER> Adjust> LA-SPEED], adjust the document feeding speed as follows; Decrease the set value if
the image of [Copy B] is shorter than [Copy A], and increase it if it is longer (1 = 0.1%).
Note: When installing DADF-L1 as an option, be sure to execute all of the following adjustments by referring to the DADF-L1 Service Manual [Chapter 3 Unpacking and Installation > Making Adjustments].
- Adjusting the Height
- Adjusting the Tray Height
- Adjusting the Read Position
- Adjusting the Magnification
- Adjusting the Horizontal Registration
- Adjusting the Trailing Edge Registration
- Adjusting the White Level

14-21

Chapter 14

14.3.3 Faulty Feeding

14.3.3.1 Skew Feed
14.3.3.1.1 Misalignment greater than 2mm in a batch when stapling: Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2
0007-4029

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
Because the Front/Rear Return Rollers exhibit variations in coefficient of friction when they are new, stapling misalignment in a batch occurred in early stage
of usage. If your machine exhibits this symptom upon installation of the finisher or in early stage of usage, check the finisher serial number. If it agrees with
the range of the serial numbers below, perform the procedure in Field Remedy.
Finisher Serial Numbers: JEY03609 and before, JEZ02687 and before
Field Remedy
1. Remove the tray connector cover (only for Q2) and the rear panel.
2. Set SW104 bits 1, 3, 5, 6, and 8 ON on the Finisher Controller PCB.
3. Hold up the swing guide with a hand and insert about 5 sheets of paper into the operation tray.
4. Turn the power ON and push SW103 on the Finisher Controller PCB to start the roller running-in operation. The swing guide starts ascending and the return
rollers start turning counterclockwise for aging.
5. Leave the machine as it is for more than 20 minutes, and then push SW103 once again to stop the operation. (There will be no problem if the operation is
performed longer.)
6. Turn the power OFF and set all bits of SW104 OFF.
7. Make sure that the misalignment has been improved.
8. Install the rear panel and the tray connector cover.
14.3.3.1.2 Last Paper Skew (manually fed postcard)
0002-1431

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Note>
This symptom tends to occur on last sheets of paper.
<Cause>
The last of a group of postcards tends to be subject to friction by the separation pad, at times causing the side guide plate to fail to move it along a straight path.
<Field Remedy>
Advise the user to use an MP sheet (FC5-6560; available as a separate remedy) when using postcards.

POSTCARD
POSTCARD

F-14-19

14.3.3.1.3 Skew in Manually Fed Paper

0002-1432

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Cause>
This symptom tends to occur when the side guide plate is not set to the correct position of the size of paper in use.
<Field Remedy>
If the user is not using paper larger than A3 (i.e., 305x457, 320x450), attach an MP side guide stopper (FC5-0530; available as a separate remedy) to the machine.

F-14-20

14-22

Chapter 14

14.3.3.2 Fold/Rip
14.3.3.2.1 Peeling of a Manually Fed Label Sheet
0002-7030

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Cause>
The glue used on the label sheet stuck to a metal area of the manual feed separation pad.
<Field Remedy>
Clean the metal area of the manual feed separation pad to remove the glue.

14.3.4 Malfunction
14.3.4.1 No Power
14.3.4.1.1 iRC3100 does not start up, Progress bar on start-up window stops at three-quarters point
0005-1508

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
n the field, this symptom occurred because the HDD was faulty (1 case). If the progress bar stops at the three-quarters point, it is possible that a writing error
into the HDD could have occurred or the SRAM Board PCB Ass'y could have failed.
Follow the steps below:
1. Make sure that the BootROM, SDRAM and connectors on the Main Controller PCB are securely fitted or there is no pinched cable. If the symptom still
recurs, go to the Step 2.
2. Turn the power OFF and then ON while pressing the numeric keys 1+9 simultaneously. The recovery program will automatically start and the LCD on
the control panel will be shut off (blackened). When the LCD comes on, turn the power OFF/ON. If the host machine starts up normally, reinstall the system
software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI). If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 3.
3. Start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn the power ON while pressing 2+8 keys) and execute HDD format (ALL) and download the system software
(SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) by using SST, and then turn the power OFF/ON. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 4.
4. Replace the HDD with a new one and start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn the power ON while pressing 2+8 keys) and execute HDD format (ALL)
and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) by using SST, and then turn the power OFF/ON. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 5.
5. Replace the SRAM Board PCB with a new one.
HDD: WM2-5188
SRAM Board PCB Ass'y: FG3-3225
Note: After replacement of the HDD, be sure to follow the instructions described in [12.6.5 After Replacing the HDD].
14.3.4.1.2 iRC3100 does not start up from sleep state
0005-3469

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
The following describes the suspect cause and their temporary solutions:
a. If the host machine can recover by pressing the control panel switch; however, printing cannot be done in the sleep state.
It is possible that the Network board PCB (NIC) or the UFR board PCB is not securely fitted.
1. Remove and reinstall both PCBs. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 2.
2. Replace either of the Network board PCB (NIC) or the UFR board PCB with a new one.
Network Board PCB: FG3-3135
UFR Board PCB: FG3-3223
b. If the host machine can recover by tuning the power ON.
As a temporary solution, change the energy consumption in sleep mode to [High]. In user mode [Common Settings> Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode>
High].
c. If the host machine can recover by turning the power OFF/ON several times.
It is possible that BootROM or SDRAM is not securely fitted. Remove and reinsert them.
14.3.4.1.3 LCD on control panel does not come on (start up) for about 10 seconds when host machine recovers from sleep state
0005-5378

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This is a specification constraint of this product. The LCD on the control panel does not come on for about 10 seconds until the HDD starts up following a press
of the control panel switch.
14.3.4.1.4 iRC3100 does not start up: Power is unintentionally shut off after progress bar on start-up window completes and thereafter
iRC3100 never start up
0005-5380

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the front cover open sensor (PS22) was damaged, causing 5V line to be short-circuited.
The suspect cause of the sensor breakage is that an excessive force could have been applied to the front cover during transportation.
Field Remedy
Inspect the front cover open sensor (FH7-7312). Replace it with a new one if it is damaged.
14.3.4.1.5 iRC3100 does not recover from sleep state; although energy consumption in sleep mode has been set to [High]
0005-7441

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that the DDI-S serial cable that connects the printer unit and the reader unit of the host machine was faulty. So, replace
it with a new one.
DDI-S serial cable: FH2-7036

14-23

Chapter 14
14.3.4.1.6 No power when tuning power ON instantaneously after turning OFF
0006-1078

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This is a specification constraint of this product. As described in the Reference Guide, if you turn OFF the main power, wait at least 10 seconds before turning
it ON again.
(This is described in Reference Guide [Before You Start Using This Machine> Main Power and Control Main Power].)
14.3.4.1.7 E240/E732/E733/E747/E602/E001 Error Code / Machine does not start up / Machine locks up / LCD flickers and then goes off
although backlight comes on: Upon installation
0009-1415

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
Immediately after the machine has started up, the touch panel display flickers and goes off. Then, the machine locks up with the backlight come on. Or, any of
the above error codes are displayed at power-on
Cause
At the time of inspection, the symptom was corrected by replacing the Main Cont. PS PCB with a new one. At that time, it was confirmed that the output voltage
between Pin 1 (5V) and Pin 2 (GND) of the connector J253 on the PCB was dropped from specified value of 5.1V to 4.5V.
Field Remedy
Check the output voltage of the pins aforementioned. If it is below 5V, replace the Main Cont. PS PCB with a new one.
FG3-2792 Main Cont. PS PCB Assembly

14.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related

14.3.4.2.1 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Not recognized by iRC3100
0005-1498

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the connector at J319 on the DC Controller PCB was not securely fitted.
Make sure that the connector at J319 and the lattice connector for the Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1 (back side of iRC3100) are securely fitted or there is no
pinched cable.
14.3.4.2.2 LCD does not come on although main power indicator on control panel lights up
0005-1506

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
The following were found in the field or in our inspection. They are listed in order of decreasing number.
- Poor contact of the SDRAM512MB at J1107 on the Main Controller PCB.
- Poor contact of the BootROM.
- Poor contact of the connector for the HDD.
- iR256MB expansion memory is faulty.
- The Main Controller PCB (Main) is faulty.
Field Remedy
Follow the steps below:
1. Turn the power ON and wait for 2 to 3 minutes to see whether any error code (such as E602 or E732) is displayed or not. If so, perform the corrective action
for the indicated error code.
2. Remove the expansion memory if it is installed and check whether the captioned symptom is resolved. If not, go to the next step without installing it.
3. Remove and insert the SDRAM and BootROM, and check whether the symptom is resolved each time. Also, make sure that the HDD connector is securely
fitted.
4. In order to check whether the original slot on the Main Controller PCB is faulty, remove the SDRAM and insert it into another slot (for the expansion memory),
and check whether the symptom is resolved.
5. If the symptom still recurs even after the Steps 1 through 4, replace the SDRAM, the Main Controller PCB (Main), and the BootROM in this order.
14.3.4.2.3 DADF-L1: Original size detection failure / How to adjust tray width of DADF-L1
0005-4387

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the adjustment of the tray width had not been executed upon installation of DADF-L1.
Field Remedy
Execute the tray width adjustment (either of a or b).
a. For AB
1. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-A4], set the tray side guide at the A4/A3 position and press OK to store the A4 width.
2. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-A5R], set the tray side guide at the A5R position and press OK to store the A5R width.
3. Clear service mode and turn the power OFF/ON.
b. For INCH
1. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-LTR], set the tray side guide at the LTR/11x17 position and press OK to store the LTR width.
2. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-LTRR], set the tray side guide at the STMT/LTRR/LGL position and press OK to store the LTRR width.
3. Clear service mode and turn the power OFF/ON.
Note: When installing DADF-L1 as an option, be sure to execute all of the following adjustments by referring to the DADF-L1 Service Manual [Chapter 3
Unpacking and Installation > Making Adjustments].
- Adjusting the Height
- Adjusting the Tray Height
- Adjusting the Read Position
- Adjusting the Magnification
- Adjusting the Horizontal Registration
- Adjusting the Trailing Edge Registration
- Adjusting the White Level

14-24

Chapter 14
14.3.4.2.4 Power lamp light up but LCD on control panel does not: Because BootROM is not securely fitted
0005-7443

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that the BootROM was not securely fitted. So, remove and insert the BootROM once again.
14.3.4.2.5 LCD displays nothing during copying (Only back light comes on)
0010-8563

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the LCD displayed nothing during copying (only the back light came on), and E240 was recorded as an error history in service mode; however,
re-insertion of the Boot ROM and the main memory solved the symptom.
Field Remedy
1. Turn the main power switch OFF, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Re-insert the Boot ROM and the main memory.
3. Plug the power cord to the wall outlet, and then turn the main power switch ON.
4. If the symptom still occurs, turn the main power switch OFF and then ON again. In some cases, this work successfully corrected the symptom.
- E240 can be displayed when a communication error occurs between the main controller PCB and the DC controller PCB.

14.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction

14.3.4.3.1 Counters for Dept. ID Management does not increase after installation of Card Reader-D1: Card itself is recognized
0007-5159

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
Change the set value in service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> CARD (default: 0)] to the lowest number of the cards that are to be used. For example,
when the cards from 100 through 300 are used, the number "100"should be entered. After making sure that the set value has been changed (it could take some
time), turn the power OFF/ON.
Description
If the set value remains the default "0", the counters for the Dept. ID management will not increase because the host machine cannot understand which cards
should be managed although the card itself is recognized and copy can be made. For your information, if you mistakenly enter "200" in the above case, the cards
numbered "100" through "199" will not be recognized and copy cannot be made.
The card counter can be checked in user mode [System Management Settings> Department ID Management> Count Management].

14.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection

14.3.4.4.1 FAX board cannot be detected / [Fax] button does not appear in [Send] screen
0003-8638

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that the FAX board was not securely connected because the 14 and 15 pins of J2119 were deformed.
Field Remedy
1. Inspect the connector pins on the FAX board to make sure of no abnormality.
2. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between the J1210 on the Main Controller PCB (Main) and J2119 on the FAX board, and that there is no pinched
wire.
3. If there is no abnormality in the above steps, replace the FAX board with a new one.
FAX Board PCB Ass'y: FM2-0271 (100V), FM2-0280 (120V), FM2-0281 (EUR), FM2-0282 (CA/CHN/ASIA)
14.3.4.4.2 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Paper lifting plate does not ascend upon installation
0005-1483

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the connector of J723 on the Pedestal Driver PCB was not securely fitted. So, check this connector.
14.3.4.4.3 Finisher-P1: Not operate upon installation
0005-1492

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the DIPSWs 2 and 6 on the Finisher Controller PCB have been set at [ON] since factory shipment.
Make sure that all of the DIPSWs on the Finisher Controller PCB are set at [OFF] when this symptom occurs.
14.3.4.4.4 Paper size detection failure at Cassette 2
0005-1578

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the DC Controller PCB was faulty. Follow the steps below:
1. Make sure that the connectors at J321 on the DC Controller PCB and at the Cassette 2 Size Sensor PCB are securely fitted and that there is no pinched cable.
2. Swap the Cassette 2 Size Sensor PCB with the Cassette 1 Size Sensor PCB.
- If the symptom keeps occurring at the Cassette 2, the DC Controller PCB is likely to be faulty.
- If the symptom occurs at the Cassette 1, the Cassette 2 Size Sensor PCB is likely to be faulty.
Cassette Size Sensor PCB Ass'y: FG3-2798
DC Controller PCB Ass'y: FG3-2795

14-25

Chapter 14
14.3.4.4.5 DADF-L1: Message [Original scanning area is dirty.] / How to adjust white level
0005-4355

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
In the field, the message [Original scanning area is dirty.] was displayed because the adjustment of the white level had not been executed upon installation of
DADF-L1.
Field Remedy
Follow the steps below (adjusting the white level):
First of all, clean the reading glass and the platen roller.
1. Place a sheet of paper on the copyboard glass and close the DADF. In service mode [COPIER> Function> CCD> DF-MLVL1], press OK (OK will be
displayed when the adjustment has been completed.)
2. Remove the paper and place it on the DADF tray. In service mode [COPIER> Function> CCD> DF-MLVL2], press OK (OK will be displayed when the
adjustment has been completed.)
If this symptom still recurs, decrement the set value in service mode [COPIER> Option> BODY> DFDST-L1/DFDST-L2] by 5 so as to optimize the dust
detection level.
Note: When installing DADF-L1 as an option, be sure to execute all of the following adjustments by referring to the DADF-L1 Service Manual [Chapter 3
Unpacking and Installation > Making Adjustments].
- Adjusting the Height
- Adjusting the Tray Height
- Adjusting the Read Position
- Adjusting the Magnification
- Adjusting the Horizontal Registration
- Adjusting the Trailing Edge Registration
- Adjusting the White Level

14.3.4.4.6 DADF-L1: Auto orientation feature does not work upon installation
0005-5915

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the adjustment of DADF-L1 had not been executed upon its installation.
Field Remedy
When DADF-L1 is installed as an option, it is necessary to execute all the following adjustments by referring to the DADF-L1 Service Manual [Chapter 3
Unpacking and Installation > Making Adjustments].
- Adjusting the Height
- Adjusting the Tray Height
- Adjusting the Read Position
- Adjusting the Magnification
- Adjusting the Horizontal Registration
- Adjusting the Trailing Edge Registration
- Adjusting the White Level
14.3.4.4.7 DADF-L1: Paper pick-up roller does not ascend because shaft of registration sensor lever comes off
0005-6477

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the shaft of the registration sensor lever in DADF-L1 came off.
Field Remedy
Open the feeder cover and inspect the registration sensor lever above the registration roller to make sure that the shaft is securely fitted.
14.3.4.4.8 iRC3100 displays message prompting to confirm size guide position although designated size of paper is placed on stack
bypass
0005-7440

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
Register the paper width for the stack bypass in service mode as follows:
1. Select in service mode [COPIER> Function> CST].
2. Place A4R paper on the stack bypass, and adjust the size guide to A4R width. Press [MF-A4R] to highlight and press the OK key so that the value will be
stored after auto adjustment.
3. Likewise, repeat the step 2 for A6R and A4.
14.3.4.4.9 Inner 2way Tray-C1: Rotate Collating feature is inoperative when printing via UFR
0005-9661

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with UFR printer driver Ver.10.20. So, upgrade it to the latest version when this occurs.
14.3.4.4.10 Paper lifting plate of 3rd Cassette does not ascend: Because pins of lattice connector for Cassette Pedestal-Y1 are bent
0005-9667

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because pins of the lattice connector J2021 for the Cassette Pedestal-Y1 were bent.
Field Remedy
Remove the rear cover and inspect the lattice connector to make sure that the pins are not bent. If they are, correct them.

14-26

Chapter 14
14.3.4.4.11 PS-E1: "Printer" tab does not appear on LCD
0006-1074

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Open I/F PCB was not securely fitted on the Main Controller PCB. So, remove and insert the Open I/F PCB
once again.
14.3.4.4.12 Paper lifting plate does not ascend: Because cassette paper detect sensor flag does not actuate smoothly
0006-1376

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that the sensor flag for the cassette paper sensor was stuck because of burrs on the flag shaft, and the sensor kept detecting
paper presence, leading to this symptom.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the sensor flag for the cassette paper sensor in the paper pickup ass'y actuates smoothly. If any problem is found, replace the sensor flag with a
new one.
Paper Detect Sensor Flag: FB6-3398
14.3.4.4.13 iRC3100 locks up / does not start up with "Waiting" message
0006-4435

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that the connector J325 on the DC Controller PCB was not securely fitted.
Field Remedy
As J325 is connected to J210 on the Printer Power Supply Unit and to J212 on the Main Controller PCB (Main), make sure that all the connectors are securely
fitted.
14.3.4.4.14 Paper lifting plate does not ascend / "Load paper." indication: Troubleshooting
0006-4750

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
The following are probable causes for the symptom "paper lifting plate does not ascend".
a. Paper pick-up ass'y-related cause
- Shaft of the paper detect sensor flag is burred.
- Pick-up lock mechanism is faulty.
b. Host machine-related cause
- Connectors are not securely fitted.
- Cassette Size Detection PCB is faulty.
- Paper pick-up motor is faulty.
- Pedestal Controller PCB is faulty.
- DC Controller PCB is faulty.
With the DCON whose version is earlier than Ver.20.07, when paper is loaded into multiple cassettes while the power is OFF and then the power is turned ON,
it is possible that the paper lifting plate does not ascend in the 3rd and 4th cassettes. In such a case, upgrade the DCON to Ver.20.07 or later.
Field Remedy
1. Determine whether the root cause is related to the paper pick-up ass'y or the host machine.
Remove the cassette where the symptom occurs and press any switch on the Cassette Size Detection PCB [1]. Does the separation roller[2] rotate?
- Yes: Go to the step 2 "Paper pick-up ass'y-related cause".
- No: Go to the step 3 "Host machine-related cause".

F-14-21

2. Paper pick-up ass'y-related cause

2-1. Paper detect sensor flag is faulty.
If the defective cassette is
1st or 3rd cassette: Open the right lower door.
2nd or 4th cassette: Remove the upper cassette.
Then, install the defective cassette. Does the paper detect sensor flag fall down smoothly?
- Yes: Go to the step 2-2 "Pick-up lock mechanism is faulty".
- No: Remove burrs on the shaft of the paper detect sensor flag (FF6-2363) or replace it with a new one.

14-27

Chapter 14

F-14-22

2-2. Pick-up lock mechanism is faulty.

If the defective cassette is
1st cassette: Remove the vertical path guide[5] (FC5-0595) and the right lower inner guide[6] (FC5-0596) in the paper pick-up ass'y. Open the right lower door
and insert a sheet of paper into the door sensor[7].
3rd cassette: Open the right lower door for the cassette pedestal and insert a sheet of paper into the door sensor.
2nd or 4th cassette: Remove the upper cassette.
Then, install the defective cassette. Observe how the paper pick-up roller[4] behaves.
- Goes down but immediately back to its original position without stopping: Since the replacement procedure of the pick-up lock (FB6-3396) is complicated,
you can replace the paper pick-up ass'y (1st cst: FM2-1577, 2nd: FM2-1578, Pedestal 3rd and 4th: FM2-1496).
- Does not go down, or goes down and stops there: Go to the step 2-3 "Other factors".

F-14-23

F-14-24

2-3. Other factors

Remove the paper pick-up ass'y of the defective cassette and install it into a normal cassette. Does the symptom recur in the normal cassette?
- Yes: Replace the paper pick-up ass'y with a new one.
- No: Go to the step 3 "Host machine-related cause".
Note that the installation plate to the host machine, the vertical path guide, and the right lower inner guide are to be replaced as necessary.
3. Host machine-related cause
3-1. Connectors are not securely fitted.
Inspect the following connectors to make sure that neither poor connection nor pin bending occur with either of them. If no problem is found, go to the step 32 "Cassette Size Detection PCB or Paper pick-up motor is faulty".
If the defective cassette is
1st or 2nd cassette (main unit):
- Between the DC Controller PCB (J322) and the paper pick-up ass'y
- Between the DC Controller PCB (J321A) and the Cassette Size Detection PCB
- Between the DC Controller PCB (J321B) and the paper pick-up motor
3rd or 4th cassette (pedestal):
- Between the DC Controller PCB (J319) and the lattice connector (back side of host machine) for the cassette pedestal
- Between the lattice connector for the cassette pedestal and the Pedestal Controller PCB (J722)
- Between the Pedestal Controller PCB (J728) and the Cassette Size Detection PCB
- Between the Pedestal Controller PCB (J725, J732) and the paper pick-up motor

14-28

Chapter 14
3-2. Cassette Size Detection PCB or Paper pick-up motor is faulty.
Remove the Cassette Size Detection PCB and the paper pick-up motor of the defective cassette, and install them into a normal cassette one by one. Does the
symptom recur in the normal cassette?
- Yes: Replace the Cassette Size Detection PCB (FG3-2798) or the paper pick-up motor (FH6-1972 for main cassette, FM2-1495 for pedestal) with a new one.
- No: Replace the DC Controller PCB (FG3-2795) or the Pedestal Controller PCB (FG3-3203) with a new one.
Note that the paper pick-up motor is different between the main cassette and the pedestal cassette.
FYI
How the paper lifting plate ascends:
1. Once the cassette is set, the separation roller release rod in the paper pick-up ass'y is pushed and the paper detect sensor flag is released.
2. At the same time, the cassette insertion pushes the switches on the Cassette Size Detection PCB. Then, the paper pick-up motor starts rotating and the solenoid
in the paper pick-up ass'y is energized.
3. The paper pick-up roller starts descending and the pick-up lock locks the roller at the lower position.
4. A drive of the paper pick-up motor will be transferred to the paper lifting gear. Then, the paper lifting plate starts ascending.
5. Paper loaded in the cassette pushes up the paper detect sensor flag. Once the paper detect sensor detects "paper presence", the paper lifting plate stops
ascending.
14.3.4.4.15 Toner cartridge cannot be pulled out when attempting to replace it: Because developing rotary is not locked at specified
position
0007-9854

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
Upgrade the ROM on the DC Controller PCB to Ver.30.07 and later.
As a result of inspection, the following was found. Since the developing rotary might not be locked at a specified position when attempting to replace the toner
cartridge, the cartridge is slightly shifted from a position for replacement and thus cannot be pulled out. Accordingly, the ROM has been modified so that the
developing rotary is securely locked at a specified position.
If you upgrade at a later time, rotate the developing rotary at the appropriate position by following the steps and then replace the toner cartridge.
1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> MISC-P], select [DEV-DR-Y, -M, -C, or -K] and press the OK key.
2. After making sure that the LCD indication is changed from "SERVICE" to "READY", replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
14.3.4.4.16 Unable to receive FAX message, Unable to connect telephone line
0009-1414

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, the symptoms were solved by reducing the length of the cable between the main device (PBX: Private Branch Exchanger) and the machine to less
than 10m.
14.3.4.4.17 Unable to format hard disk (HD)/Format error: Because hard disk drive (HDD) is changed
0009-8294

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
From the machines with the following serial numbers, the new type hard disk drive (HDD) is being adopted. And the service part HDD was also replaced
with the new type one. Additionally, the HD format file version 00.09 was released with this HDD change. When you format the new type HDD, download
the HD format file version 00.09 or later to SST.
Note: Please be informed that there is the possibility that the new version HD format file is released when the HDD is changed in the future.
Starting serial number
iRC3100 (120V): JGX02697/iRC3100N (120V): JXK02874/iRC3100 (EUR 230V): JGY05431/iRC3100N (EUR 230V): JHC12631/iRC3100 (230V):
JHZ00079/iRC3100N (230V): JJC01188/iRC3100 (AU 230V): JHB01326/iRC3100N (TW 120V): JXR00001
WM2-5222 HDD (HDS728040PLAT20)
14.3.4.4.18 Paper lifting plate for cassette 3 does not ascend when DC Controller PCB Ver. 20.07 or later is used because Pedestal Driver
PCB is faulty: Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1
0009-8296

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the symptom was solved by replacing the Pedestal Drive PCB with a new one because performing the following remedies in sequence did not
have effect on the symptom.
- Interchanging the cassette3 and 4.
- Replacing the cassette size detection PCB with a new one.
- Replacing the paper pick-up assembly with a new one.
When the symptom occurs, check the connectors for poor connection. If no poor connection is found, replace the Pedestal Driver PCB with a new one.
FG3-3203 Pedestal Driver PCB Assembly
14.3.4.4.19 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1/Y2 cannot be recognized: Due to poor connection of main cont. PS PCB connector J213
0010-7145

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
As a result of inspection, the following was found: Poor connection of the connector J213 of the main cont. PS PCB prevents the illustration of the cassette 3
and 4 from being displayed in the Paper Select screen. Additionally, it prevents the cassette feeding unit-Y1/Y2 from being listed in the Device Configuration
screen under the Counter Check screen that appears in response to a press of the counter check key.
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, re-insert the J213 connector of the main cont. PS PCB.
FG3-2792 Main Cont. PS PCB Assembly
14.3.4.4.20 Finisher cannot be recognized: Due to poor connection of main cont. PS PCB connector J213
0010-7147

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

14-29

Chapter 14

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]

Description
As a result of inspection, the following was found: Poor connection of the connector J213 of the main cont. PS PCB prevents the illustration of the finisher from
being displayed in the Paper Select screen. Additionally, it prevents the option equipment from being listed in the Device Configuration screen under the Counter
Check screen that appears in response to a press of the counter check key.
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, re-insert the J213 connector of the main cont. PS PCB.
FG3-2792 Main Cont. PS PCB Assembly
14.3.4.4.21 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1 cannot be recognized
0010-7362

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the machine could not recognize the 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1 because connector J319 of the DC controller PCB had bad connection.
Field Remedy
1. Re-insert the lattice connector extending from the 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1 to the machine.
2. Remove the rear cover of the machine, and then re-insert connector J319 of the DC controller PCB.
14.3.4.4.22 Fax TX Report is output although it is set to OFF
0010-8131

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the Fax TX Report was output after a FAX transmission although the report was set to OFF; however, executing FAX ALL CLEAR solved this
symptom.
When the symptom occurred, the output Fax TX Report indicated the following data:
JOB NO.: 0000, ST.TIME:00/00 00:00, USAGE T: 00'00, PGS.: 0, RESULT: OK
Field Remedy
1. In service mode [FAX > Report > DATA], press [OK] to output the system data report.
2. In service mode [FAX > Clear > ALL], press [OK].
3. In the same screen as Step 2, check if there is difference between the settings of the items that reappear on the screen and the settings on the system data report
output in Step 1; if any, enter the settings indicated on the system data report.
4. Turn the control panel switch OFF > turn the main power switch OFF and then ON > turn the control panel switch ON again.
5. In user mode [Report Settings > Fax under Settings > Fax TX Report], make sure that the Fax TX Report is set to OFF.
6. Run a FAX job and make sure that the Fax TX Report is not output.
14.3.4.4.23 False detection of original size occurs in book mode
0010-8559

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
When making copies in book mode, the machine printed the image of an A4-size original on A3-size paper. It also displayed the Selecting the Original Size
screen when using A4R-size original; however, this symptom was solved by executing R-CON CLEAR in service mode. (This symptom did not occur when
using A3-size or B4-size original in book mode or when using the DADF.)
- In book mode, the machine detects the size of the original placed on the copyboard glass when the copyboard cover is brought down to approx. 25 deg.
Depending on the place where the machine is installed, the machine may cause a false detection of original size on account of light that runs in the copyboard
glass from outside.
Field Remedy
1. Before executing R-CON CLEAR, check if the symptom is caused by light that pours into the copyboard glass; To this end, move the machine away from
windows, or block off the light with sheets of paper or clothes. If it is found that the symptom is not attribute to the light, perform the step2 and later.
2. In service mode [COPIER > Function > MISC-P], perform [P-PRINT] to output all the settings of service mode.
3. In service mode [COPIER > Function > CLEAR > R-CON], press [OK].
4. Turn the control panels switch OFF, and then, turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
5. Enter service mode again and input all the service mode settings referring to the P-PRINT printout that is generated in the step 2.
6. After executing R-CON CLEAR, be sure to adjust the following: the DADF tray width, the read position, and the white level.
7. Make copies of all the fixed size originals using both book mode and the DADF to check to see if the machine detects the size of originals correctly.
14.3.4.4.24 Machine hangs up with message "Waiting to print" when running print job or report print job: upon installation
0010-8566

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
When a print job was ran upon installation to check output images, the machine hung up while displaying the message "Waiting to print" at the bottom of the
LCD. (The machine recovered from such a situation when the main power switch was turned OFF and then ON.) Since the same symptom occurred when a
report was generated in user mode, the UFR board PCB was re-inserted for solution.
Field Remedy
1.Re-insert the UFR board PCB.
2. If the symptom still occurs, replace the PCB with a new one.
FG3-3223 UFR Board PCB Assembly

14.3.4.5 Noise
14.3.4.5.1 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Abnormal noise from drive unit
0005-3245

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, abnormal noise occurred somewhere between the gear of the cassette paper pick-up motor and the driving gear (80T/16T gear) inside
the drive unit because the attachment position of the motor was not proper (1 case).
Make sure the motor is in proper alignment with the drive gear when this symptom occurs.
Drive Ass'y: FM2-0147

14-30

Chapter 14
14.3.4.5.2 Bk developing ass'y locks up during continuous Bk copy / Abnormal noise: Because of too much amount of carrier
0007-9848

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
Upgrade ROM of the DC Controller PCB to Ver.30.07 and later, which changes the ACR control timing during a continuous Bk copy.
Description
The root cause of this symptom is: If the frequency of Bk copy is too much higher, the waste carrier cannot be collected sufficiently during the ACR control.
This caused the amount of carrier to increase inside the developing ass'y and too much load is applied to it. With this timing change, the collectability of the
waste toner is increased.
14.3.4.5.3 Control sound at power-on after long period of shut-down is noisy / How to ease image stabilization control sound at power-on
or at wake-up from sleep mode
0007-9856

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
1. Upgrade the ROM on the DC Controller PCB to Ver.30.07 and later.
2. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> BK-MD-SW], set it to "1" and turn the power OFF/ON.
With this setting change, the image stabilization control will be performed in monochrome mode instead of full-color mode, and accordingly the time required
for the control can be shortened from about 3 and a half minutes to about 1 minute, which can improve the impression.
Note: As the following negative effects are possible with the setting change, inform your customer of them in advance before step 2 is performed.
a. During the pre-rotation for the first color job after the setting has been changed to "1", the image stabilization control is executed in full-color mode. Therefore,
the first color job might take longer than before.
b. After the setting has been changed to "1", if your customer keeps making monochrome output only (no color output), color toner will be replenished although
it is not consumed at all. As a result, a symptom such as "color images are too dark" or "E020" might occur. (The occurrence timing might vary depending on
how many times the temperature of the fixing roller becomes lower than 50 degrees C and how many pages the machine continuously outputs.)
14.3.4.5.4 Abnormal (squeaky) sound from fixing assembly: Due to deformation of internal delivery guide (lower)
0010-7166

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the lower internal delivery guide was deformed, and came into contact with the internal delivery roller shaft, causing a squeaky sound.
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, replace the lower internal delivery guide with a new one.
FL2-0167 Internal Delivery Guide. L.
14.3.4.5.5 Abnormal (buzzing) sound occurs when feeding paper from cassette of machine or Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1
0011-2562

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
In the field, abnormal (buzzing) sound was caused by the feed roller or the separation roller because paper was fed into the machine in a bunch; based on the
results of inspection, however, it was found that the new type separation roller was implemented to the machines with the following serial numbers for the
purpose of reducing the abnormal (buzzing) sound. When the symptom has occurred, replace the separation roller with a new type one.
Note: In the event of the symptom, be sure to replace only the separation roller [1] with a new type one although the same roller (FC5-6934) is shared between
the separation roller [1] and the feed roller [2].

F-14-25

- The serial numbers of the machines

iRC2570
230V (AU): KNP00069 and later/230V: KNN00001 and later
iRC2570i
230V (EUR): KNR00035 and later
iRC3100
230V (EUR): JGY09162 and later/230V: JHZ00095 and later/230V (AU): JHB02386 and later/120V: JGX04485 and later
iRC3100N
230V (EUR): JHC22629 and later/230V: JJC01763 and later/120V: JXK04880 and later/120V (TW): JXR00121 and later/220V (CN): JXS00076 and later
iRC3170
230V (AU): KND00226 and later/230V: KNC00001 and later
iRC3170i
120V: KNF00095 and later/230V: KNH00053 and later
iRC3170U
120V: KNE00046 and later
Cause

14-31

Chapter 14
As paper had no clean-cut edge or has high resistance, it was fed to the feed roller or the separation roller in a bunch.
FC6-6661 Separation Roller
14.3.4.5.6 Noise at Time of Pickup from the Cassette
0002-1433

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Cause>
The symptom (i.e., noise) occurs when multiple sheets are moved to the feed roller or the separation roller, causing the separation roller assembly to vibrate.
<Field Remedy>
Use a sponge retard roller (FB5-0873; available as a separate remedy).

14.3.4.6 User Warning Message

14.3.4.6.1 Message [Check the network connection.] / Message [Check the TCP/IP.]
0005-1394

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
If the host machine is not connected to network, follow the steps below:
Change the service mode setting so as not to display the network error messages.
In service mode (LEVEL 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> NWERR-SW], change the set value from [1] to [0], and then turn the control panel switch off and
turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
0: not display
1: display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
14.3.4.6.2 Once arbitrary paper is registered in user mode [Common Settings> Stack Bypass Standard Settings], paper of different paper
sizes cannot be copied from stack bypass
0005-1912

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
This is a specification constraint of this product. Explain to the customer that if they want to use paper of several sizes from the stack bypass [Stack Bypass
Standard Settings] should be set at [OFF].
14.3.4.6.3 #853 User Error Code during printing
0005-4366

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Cause
If the host machine stops printing because of no paper or no toner remaining, or if the speed of data input is faster than the one of data processing (e.g. a large
volume of print job is sent to the host machine), the area of spooling on network will become full and communication clogging occur. As a result, a timeout
occurs on the computer and #853 is displayed without a completion of the job.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the host machine does not stop for any reasons such as no paper or no toner.
2. Enable network spooling function in user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Use Spooler> On] so that it will become faster to release the computer
that sends the job from network environment.
14.3.4.6.4 Message 'The file attachment cannot be processed by Internet Fax. No programs can process the file attachment.' is printed
out with text of received I-Fax
0005-5390

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This symptom can occur when the files (images) that are attached to received I-fax documents are not compatible with this machine. In that case, the machine
does not process (print, forward, or store) these files, but erases them instead. The names of the erased files and the message above is printed out with the text
of the received I-fax.
For your information, iRC3100 I-Fax can support only TIFF format (MH, MR, MMR).
14.3.4.6.5 When attempting to access iRC3100 via Remote UI, message 'User information is invalid' is displayed
0005-6478

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
It is impossible that the above message will be displayed when the privacy preference setting is set to 'High'. Try changing the privacy preference setting to
'Medium'.
In the Internet Explorer's case, click [Tool]> [Internet Option]> [Privacy].
14.3.4.6.6 When printing, paper source does not automatically change from Cassette 1 to Cassette 2 (OS: WindowsXP, Port: Standard
TCP/IP Port)
0006-4871

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
Follow the steps below in the order presented:
1. In user mode [Common Settings> Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS> Printer], make sure that the Cassettes 1 and 2 are set to "On".
2. In the printer driver properties, select Ports tab, place a checkmark on "Enable bidirectional support". Then, press "Configure Port" and place a checkmark
on "Enable SNPM status". In the field, this setting change solved the problem.

14-32

Chapter 14
14.3.4.6.7 "Finisher cannot be used." is displayed
0006-6134

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Check the error log and perform corrective actions for the error. Then, clear the functional separation mode in either way of the following so that the message
will disappear.
How to clear:
a. In user mode [Common Settings> Limited Functions Mode], set it to "Off".
b. In service mode [SORTER> Option> MD-SPRTN], change the set value from "1" to "0".
Description
The "Limited Functions Mode " key appears on the LCD when an error occurs in the finisher, that means the host machine can shift to the "Limited Functions
Mode" in which the finisher can output paper but neither staple or alignment. If you press the key, the message "Finisher cannot be used." is displayed on the
LCD.
14.3.4.6.8 The machine frequently indicates the message "Clean DF Reading Glass."
0004-6846

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause 1>
The reading glass is soiled with dust or dirt. (The reader detects the presence of dust on the glass, but does not detects stray dust.)
<Field Remedy 1>
Clean the reading glass using cleaning tissue/cleaning oil.

<Cause 2>
The read roller is soiled. The white sheet film is soiled with dust.
<Field Remedy 2>
Dry wipe the white sheet/ read roller. (Or, alcohol may be used.)
MEMO
If the machine is installed in an area subject to dust, it is a good idea to periodically perform cleaning.

<Cause 3>
The reading glass has scratches or dirt that cannot be removed by cleaning.
<Field Remedy 3>
Replace the reading glass.

<Cause 4>
The read roller has scratches in radial direction, or has dirt that cannot be removed by cleaning.
<Field Remedy 4>
Replace the read roller.
MEMO
When you have replaced the read roller, be sure to perform the following:
- while level adjustment
- DF height adjustment
- read position adjustment

<Cause 5>
The CIS has soiled pixel cells.
<Checking the CIS for Soiled Pixel Cells>
Make a copy in copyboard mode. The presence of a soiled pixel cell will cause a line in the image.
<Field Remedy 5>
Replace the CIS.
14.3.4.6.9 The machine frequently indicates the message "Clean reading Glass." (The user wants to disable it.)
0004-8893

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
Since the message is not serious (not triggered by soiling inside the machine), the user may want to disable it.

<Cause 1>
Change the setting (level 2) of the machine's dust detection mechanism.
<Field Remedy 1>
Make the following selections in service mode, and decrease the level: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L2. The setting will decrease in units of '5'.

14-33

Chapter 14
MEMO
A lower setting will decrease the dust correction level, thus possibly leaving light black lines in the images. Setting the level to '0' will disable the dust detection
mechanism all together.
<Cause 2>
The user wants to disable the cleaning message.
<Field Remedy 2>
Make the following selections, and turn it off so as to disable the cleaning message: Additional Function>Common Settings>Cleaning Display for Original Scanning
Area.
MEMO
The reader unit executes dust detection even after the cleaning message has been disabled, changing the read position as needed depending on the result of detention.

14.3.4.7 Other Defect

14.3.4.7.1 Key Switch Unit-A1: Key not recognized upon installation
0005-1583

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
When installing the Key Switch Unit-A1, the following setting change is required. Follow the steps below:
In service mode [COPIER> Install> KEY], type [1], shut off the control panel switch and turn the power OFF/ON.
14.3.4.7.2 Machine locks up (hangs up/does not start up) with "Wait" indication displayed and progress bar being completed: Because
absence of cable between Reader and Printer
0009-8295

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the symptom occurred because the cable was not connected between the reader and the printer. When the symptom occurs, check the connection
of the reader communication cable and the DDI-S cable.
14.3.4.7.3 PS-D1 is not recognized
0009-8300

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the machine did not recognize the PS-D1 because "IMG-CONT" was not implemented in service mode after the PS-D1 was connected to the
machine. When the symptom occurs, follow the field remedy below.
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE > IMG-CONT], set "3" as the value for the item and turn the controller panel switch OFF. Then turn the
main power switch OFF/ON.
14.3.4.7.4 Machine does not start up after replacement of hard disk (HDD)
0010-8342

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the machine did not start up after replacement of the hard disk drive (HDD). This was because firmware programs for system, RUI, Language
and the like were installed without formatting the new HDD.
Field Remedy
After replacing the HDD with a new type, be sure to perform [HD Format] of the service support tool (SST) before installing system software programs.
Note 1: Cautions in formatting the HDD
The HDD for the machines with the following serial numbers and the service parts HDD were changed to the new type (WM2-5222/HDS728040PLAT20).
With this change, the HD format file for the Service Support Tool (SST) was upgraded to Ver. 00.09. When formatting the new type HDD, be sure to
download the HD format file Ver. 00.09 to SST.
Serial numbers
iRC3100 (120V): JGX02697 and later/iRC3100N (120V): JXK02874and later/iRC3100 (EUR 230V): JGY05431 and later/iRC3100N (EUR 230V):
JHC12631 and later/iRC3100 (230V): JHZ00079 and later/iRC3100N (230V): JJC01188 and later/iRC3100 (AU 230V): JHB01326 and later/iRC3100N
(TW 120V): JXR00001 and later
Note 2: Please be informed that the HD format file may be upgraded again when another new type HDD is available in the future.
14.3.4.7.5 Inner 2way tray-C1: Settings for [Tray Designation] are not displayed
0011-2565

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, output trays could not be designated because the delivery controller PCB was faulty. In order to check if the PCB was really faulty, the main
power switch was turned OFF and then ON; then, it was found that the delivery roller of the inner 2way tray-C1 did not rotate.
- How to designate output trays: User mode > Common Settings > Tray Designation
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, re-insert all the connectors of the delivery controller PCB. If the symptom still occurs, replace the PCB with a new one.
FG3-3293 Delivery Controller PCB Assembly

14-34

Chapter 14

14.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment

14.3.4.8.1 Jam Access Guide in Fixing Ass'y came off / Boss in Fixing Ass'y was broken
0007-4954

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
If the Jam Access Guide is forcibly opened in order to clear a jam, the boss of the Duplexing Feeder Guide Mount (FC5-0746) can be broken.
Field Remedy
If the boss is broken, replace the Duplexing Feeder Guide Mount with a new one.
Duplexing Feeder Guide Mount: FC5-0746
Note: Please instruct your customer not to forcibly open the Jam Access Guide in case of a jam clearance.
14.3.4.8.2 Unable to fit magnet catch that holds front cover onto inner cover
0009-8304

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
From the machines with the following serial numbers, the new type inner covers and magnet catches are being adopted. When you replace a magnet catch
with a new one, however, you have to follow the field remedy below because the old type inner covers and magnet catches have no interchangeability with
the new type ones.
Field Remedy
When replacing a magnet catch, use the magnet catch
- XZ9-0582 for the machines with the following serial numbers and later.
- XZ9-0421 for the machines with the serial numbers younger than the following.

F-14-26

Starting serial numbers:

iRC3100 (120V): JGX02488/iRC3100N (120V): JXK02874/iRC3100 (EUR 230V): JGY05410/iRC3100N (EUR 230V): JHC12621/iRC3100 (230V): JHZ00079/
iRC3100N (230V): JJC01188/iRC3100 (AU 230V): JHB01326/iRC3100N (TW 120V): JXR00001

14.3.5 Printing/scanning
14.3.5.1 No Output
14.3.5.1.1 2nd page and later are not output or abnormal image is output when attempting to print multiple sheets of huge data from
computer
0005-1501

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, there are two cases where the SDRAM512MB on the Main Controller PCB was faulty.
Unplug and insert the SDRAM512MB at J1107 on the Main Controller PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the SDRAM512MB with a new one.
SDRAM512MB: WA7-2326
14.3.5.1.2 #852 User Error Code
0005-3251

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Description >
#852 indicates a state that the main power switch was turned OFF while a job was being processed.
< Field Remedy >
If this error code is displayed in other cases than the above, check the user mode setting as described below because the setting change corrected the symptom
in the field: User mode [Common Settings> Entergy Consumption in Sleep Mode> High].
14.3.5.1.3 Unable to send documents stored in Inbox
0006-0080

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]

14-35

Chapter 14
Description
Among the documents stored in Inboxes, those stored as "Scan Doc." and "Print Doc." cannot be sent. If you want to, store the document as "System Doc." in
the Inbox by following the steps below:
Place a document> Press [Send] tab> Press [Store in User Inbox]> Select any Inbox> Press [Start] key
14.3.5.1.4 Machine accepts print job but does not run it
0010-4546

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the following occurred: When the LAN cable is temporarily disconnected from a PC, since the machine is receiving a print job from the PC, it
fails to run the job, and moreover, fails to run print jobs that are sent after reconnection of the LAN cable, even if it can accept such jobs.
Field Remedy
On the System Monitor screen, cancel the print job, of which transmission was not completed. This will allow the machine to run print jobs that were sent
after reconnection of the LAN cable. In case that the causal job is not canceled, the machine cancels it 5 minutes later in accordance with the specifications
and starts running the print jobs that are stopped by the causal job.
14.3.5.1.5 When printing, paper is fed from stack bypass although auto paper selection mode is set in machine side
0010-8562

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Manual-related ]
Description
Although auto paper selection mode was set in the machine side, the machine picked up paper from the stack bypass each time a print job was run from a PC.
This was because the stack bypass was selected in the printer driver [Properties > Paper Source > Paper Source].
Field Remedy
In order to make auto paper selection mode available for print jobs, perform the following procedure on the PC side.
[Open the target data > File > Print > Properties > Paper Source > set "Auto" for the Paper Source].

14.3.5.2 Installation Failure

14.3.5.2.1 Can Send Kit for iRC3200 be used with iRC3100?
0005-7437

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
No, it cannot be used. The Send Kit varies among models. When installing the sending feature into iRC3100, be sure to use Color Send Kit-C1.
14.3.5.2.2 Unable to install printer driver completely: Because UBS cable is connected before installing
0009-1294

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
In USB connection, it is impossible to completely install the printer driver in a PC when a USB cable is connected between the machine and the PC beforehand.
Wait for connecting the cable until the installer instructs you to do so.
Field Remedy
In the field, the symptom was solved retrying the installation after uninstalling the uncompleted printer driver and then rebooting the PC. In the PC [Start >
Programs], if the Canon Printer Uninstaller is present, use it to uninstall the uncompleted printer driver.

14.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result

14.3.5.3.1 Message [Waiting to print ] keeps appearing at UFR printing / Half of image becomes solid black
0005-1589

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the UFR Board PCB was faulty. If this kind of abnormal image occurs on prints from a computer, not on copies
or PG test prints, the UFR Board PCB is likely to be faulty.
Follow the steps below:
1. Remove and reinsert the UFR Board PCB to make sure of its connection.
2. If the symptom still recurs, replace the UFR Board PCB with a new one.
UFR Board PCB Ass'y: FG3-3223
14.3.5.3.2 Image sent to computer in PDF format (Compact, 300dpi) is scaled down when printing
0005-5179

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
When printing a PDF file using Acrobat, the image will be shrunk if a check mark is placed on [Shrink oversized pages to paper size].
Field Remedy
Clear the check mark on [Shrink oversized pages to paper size] when printing.
14.3.5.3.3 Print settings made in printer driver were not effective when printing multiple sheets of MS Excel data
0005-5388

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In order to print multiple sheets of MS Excel data with some special features (e.g. duplex mode, specifying a particular paper source), it is necessary to make
those settings for every sheet. Before printing, make the appropriate settings in [Properties] of the printer driver for every sheet.

14-36

Chapter 14
14.3.5.3.4 Pages are output in reverse order: MS Word
0009-1293

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
In MS Word [Print dialog box > Option], if Reverse Print Order is checked, pages are output in reverse order. Uncheck it to collect the page order.
14.3.5.3.5 Scanned documents are always saved in PDF format although selecting "TIFF/PDF" as File Format: Push Scan
0009-7516

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170

[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
If you want to save a scanned document in TIFF format, on the Send Screen, select [File Format > TIFF/PDF > Scan Settings > Black and White] before
scanning. When any of the color modes is selected, scanned documents are always saved in PDF format.
14.3.5.3.6 Machine does not print when data is sent from PC with operating system (OS) from Macintosh (Mac) via UFR
0010-4545

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
UFR does not support a PC with OS from Macintosh.
Field Remedy
When sending data from a PC with OS from Macintosh to a iRC3100 series machine, use PS/PCL
14.3.5.3.7 Document properties is output when printing document that is prepared using MS Word
0010-4550

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the document properties was always output following the desired document. This was because the [Document Properties] check box was checked
in MS Word. When the symptom occurs, try the field remedy below.
Field Remedy
Make the following selections in sequence in MS Word [Tools > Options > Print > Include with document] and then uncheck the [Document Properties]
check box.

14.3.6 Network
14.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure
14.3.6.1.1 Utility software (e.g. Network ScanGear) cannot be used, no problem with other functions
0005-5996

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
It is possible that [SNMP Settings] and [Enable Dedicated Port] are set to 'Off'. If so, change them to 'On'.
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> SNMP Settings> On
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Enable Dedicated Port> On
[SNMP Settings]: If you want to set or browse each item of the machine with utility software that uses SNMP to obtain information, set it to 'On'.
[Enable Dedicated Port]: If you want to set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility software, set it to 'On'.

14.3.6.2 Connection Problem

14.3.6.2.1 Message "I-FAX POP server connection error" is sometimes displayed at lower-left of LCD
0009-7515

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the message was displayed at 1-minute intervals because the user had set the wrong POP server name at the same time as the following settings
were made in the E-mail/I-Fax settings screen under user mode: [POP] is "ON", and [POP Interval] is "1." When the symptom occurs, follow the field remedy
below.
Note: The message is displayed according to the POP Interval setting of the E-mail/I-Fax settings.
Field Remedy
In user mode [System Settings > Network Settings > E-mail/I-FAX],
1. Check "SMTP Server" for a wrong IP address (or a wrong name).
2. Check "POP Server" for a wrong IP address (or a wrong name).
3. Check "POP Address" for a wrong Login name to access the POP server.
4. Check "POP Password" for a wrong password to access the POP server.
For E-mail/I-FAX settings, please refer to the Network Guide [Using a TCP/IP Network > Protocol Settings > Settings from the control panel > E-mail/IFAX Settings].

14.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related
14.3.7.1 Transmission Problem
14.3.7.1.1 One-sheet original is output in two sheets at receiving side
0005-5983

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy

14-37

Chapter 14
Make the sender information smaller or change the printing position of the transmission terminal ID.
a. How to make sender information smaller
In service mode [FAX> NCU> SPECIAL-B> SW28], change bit6 to [1].
b. How to change TX transmission terminal ID position
In user mode [Communications Settings> Common Settings> TX Settings> TX Terminal ID> On> Option> Printing Position], select [Inside].
14.3.7.1.2 I-Fax transmission sometimes results in error
0006-0081

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
If the I-Fax transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is handled as errors. (The E-mail message will be split up into several messages.)
In such a case, change the data size limit as follows:
In user mode [System Settings> Communications Settings> E-mail/I-FAX Settings> Maximum Data Size For Sending] (Default: 3MB, Setting Range: 0 to 99)
Note: The maximum data size for sending must not be greater than the maximum data size of the mail server. If you enter "0" MB as the data size, there is no
size limit on the data that is sent.
14.3.7.1.3 E-mail message is sometimes split up into several E-mail messages
0006-0082

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
If the E-mail message send job exceeds the data size limit, it is split up into several messages before being sent. In such a case, change the data size limit as
follows:
In user mode [System Settings> Communications Settings> E-mail/I-FAX Settings> Maximum Data Size For Sending] (Default: 3MB, Setting Range: 0 to 99)
Note: The maximum data size for sending must not be greater than the maximum data size of the mail server. If you enter "0" MB as the data size, there is no
size limit on the data that is sent.
14.3.7.1.4 Fax number is not entered partially (in the actual failure case, 2nd digit)
0007-4033

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
If you enter a fax number using the numerical keys without pressing the "Fax" key immediately after switching to the "Send" screen (this is not a proper
procedure), the machine has to start up the entry screen of the fax number and cannot accept any entry of the numerical keys in a fraction of a second because
of software constraints. This is to prevent any operational error even if some key operations are done during transition of the screens. In this failure case, one
digit of the fax number was not entered because the operator pressed the number during the affected period of time.
Field Remedy
According to the proper procedure, press the "Fax" key after switching to the "Send" screen, and then enter the fax number using the numerical keys. Or, enter
the number slowly after making sure that the screen has been switched.
For more details, refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide [Basic Sending Methods> Specifying Destinations> Using the New Address Tab> Specifying a Fax
Number].
14.3.7.1.5 FAX-transmitted image becomes too light on receiving side: User mode adjustment is not effective, FAX transmission
0009-1565

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, in addition to the adjustment in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning > Exposure Recalibration > Send (B&W)], the symptom was improved by adjusting
the density as follows: On Send screen, press [Scan Settings > Option > increase the density > OK]. Therefore, when the symptom occurs, perform the both
adjustments before sending.
14.3.7.1.6 How to register high scanning density as standard sending mode: FAX transmission
0009-1566

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In order to send a FAX message without adjusting the scanning density every FAX transmission, follow the steps below.
1. Send screen > Scan Settings > Option > change the scanning density > Register/Erase > Scanning Mode > select any of the three "Black & White" modes >
Store > Overwrite > Yes > change name by pressing "Register Name" > Done.
2. User mode > Communications Settings > Common Settings > TX Settings > Edit Standard Send Settings > Scanning Mode > select the scanning mode
registered in step1 > OK.
14.3.7.1.7 Unable to send scanned image to file server: Because logon password entered from PC differs from address information of file
server registered in machine #801
0009-1567

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the symptom occurred on a customer who regularly changes the log on password to the LAN with a PC for security. Because the customer forgot
to reflect the new log on password in the address information of the file server after changing. When the symptom occurs, set the new password in User mode
[Address Book Settings > select either "Register Address" or "One-touch Buttons" where the affected file server is registered > select the file server > press
"Register/Edit" or "Edit" button].
14.3.7.1.8 Unable to use SEND function: Desired folder cannot be browsed although desired PC can be
0009-8323

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, a desired folder could not be browsed in the Send screen [File > Browse] although a desired PC could be. However, the symptom was solved by

14-38

Chapter 14
disabling the antivirus software "Norton Internet Security" installed in the PC. When the symptom occurs, disable antivirus software if installed.
14.3.7.1.9 Cannot send FAX message to specified destination using one-touch button: Overseas FAX transmission
0011-0388

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, a FAX message could not be sent to a specified overseas destination. In order to solve this symptom, pauses were added at the end of the FAX
number of the destination that had been registered to a One-touch button.
When the symptom has occurred, perform the following procedure.
Cause
In the FAX receiving side, the answering machine was turned ON.
Field Remedy
User mode > Address Book Settings > One-touch Buttons > select the One-touch button to which the FAX number of the destination has been registered >
Register/Edit > add pauses at the end of the displayed FAX number. In the above-mentioned case, three pauses were required to send the FAX message to
the destination.

14.3.7.2 Reception Problem

14.3.7.2.1 iR C3100 cannot receive FAX while it is in sleep state
0005-4370

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom was corrected by changing the setting of the energy consumption in sleep mode to [High].
How to set: In user mode [Common Settings> Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode> High]
14.3.7.2.2 DADF-L1: Image at receiving side is partially missing at FAX transmission
0005-4385

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the adjustment of the tray width had not been executed upon installation of DADF-L1.
Field Remedy
Execute the tray width adjustment (either of a or b).
a. For AB
1. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-A4], set the tray side guide at the A4/A3 position and press OK to store the A4 width.
2. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-A5R], set the tray side guide at the A5R position and press OK to store the A5R width.
3. Clear service mode and turn the power OFF/ON.
b. For INCH
1. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-LTR], set the tray side guide at the LTR/11x17 position and press OK to store the LTR width.
2. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-LTRR], set the tray side guide at the STMT/LTRR/LGL position and press OK to store the LTRR width.
3. Clear service mode and turn the power OFF/ON.
Note: When installing DADF-L1 as an option, be sure to execute all of the following adjustments by referring to the DADF-L1 Service Manual [Chapter 3
Unpacking and Installation > Making Adjustments].
- Adjusting the Height
- Adjusting the Tray Height
- Adjusting the Read Position
- Adjusting the Magnification
- Adjusting the Horizontal Registration
- Adjusting the Trailing Edge Registration
- Adjusting the White Level
14.3.7.2.3 "NG" is indicated in Activity Report: Occurs only with "Unknown" FAX message
0008-2873

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This machine does not have a function to reject a certain incoming FAX message. Since the faulty FAX reception may be resulted from other causes, check the
error code in the activity report for solution. The destination address column in the activity report shows "Unknown"unless a sender's FAX number is registered
to the machine.

14.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect

14.3.7.3.1 Alarm tone (Success tone, Error tone) that iRC3100 emits during fax transmission
0006-1058

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In the factory default setting, the alarm tone sounds when sending or receiving is intentionally canceled. The following setting changes will make iRC3100 emit
the success tone and the error tone. So, perform them upon request from your customers.
1. Success tone (emitted when sending or receiving is normally completed):
In service mode [FAX> NCU> SPECIALB> SW04], change bit1 to "1" (to emit). "0": not emit (default)
2. Error tone (emitted when sending or receiving abends):
In service mode [FAX> NCU> SPECIALB> SW04], change bit0 to "1" (to emit). "0": not emit (default)
14.3.7.3.2 FAX-transmitted image spreads across tow pages on receiving side when sending one page of image to particular destination
0009-1583

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]

14-39

Chapter 14
Field Remedy
In the field, the symptom occurred because the length of the transmitted image was increased in the sub scanning direction. However, it was solved by executing
the following in service mode [FAX > SSSW].
1. Activate inch/mm conversion (text mode) function: Change bit1 of [SW05] from "0" to "1."
2. Activate inch/mm conversion (text/photo mode) function: Change bit2 of [SW05] from "0" to "1."
3. Set scanning direction for inch/mm conversion to "both main and sub scanning direction": Change bit2 of [SW14] from "0" to "1."
14.3.7.3.3 FAX-transmitted image is reduced in sub scanning direction on receiving side when sending to particular destination
0009-1585

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the filed, the symptom was solved by changing all of the following in service mode [FAX > SSSW].
1. Activate inch/mm conversion (text mode): Change bit1 of [SW05] from "0" to "1."
2. Activate inch/mm conversion (text/photo mode): Change bit2 of [SW05] from "0" to "1."
3. Set scanning direction for inch/mm conversion to "both main and sub scanning direction": Change bit2 of [SW14] from "0" to "1."
14.3.7.3.4 FAX-received document that consists of 2 pages or more is printed in dupl
0009-8324

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
If FAX-received document consists of 2 pages or more, they are always printed in duplex when the following setting is "On"; In user mode [Communications
Settings > RX Settings under Common Settings > Two-sided Print]. If you don't want to, change the setting to "Off".
14.3.7.3.5 #899 User Error Code: After e-mail or I-Fax transmission
0005-5648

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
#899 can be displayed when the e-mail or I-Fax has been successfully sent; however, it is unknown whether or not reception has been complete because
transmission was relayed via multiple servers.

14.3.7.4 Setting/Registration Defect

14.3.7.4.1 Shared folder on PC cannot be registered in address book: Windows XP
0008-0507

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
When attempting to register a shared folder on a PC (OS: Windows XP) in one of the address books as follows: in user mode [Address Book Settings> Register
Address> Register New Address> File> select "Windows (SMB)" for Protocol> specify the PC> configure User and Password> designate the shared folder];
however, a message "Cannot find server." was displayed and the registration failed. When this symptom occurs, follow the steps below.
Field Remedy
1. Right-click on the shared folder on the PC, select [Properties> Sharing], and place a check mark on both of the following messages "Share this folder on the
network." and "Allow other users to change my files.".
2. Register the folder in the address book once again in user mode.
For detail procedures of registration, refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide [Storing/Editing Address Book Settings> Storing New Addresses> File Server
Addresses].
14.3.7.4.2 Transmission/Reception becomes impossible after expansion of FAX or SEND function into iRC3100N: Because of absence of
Resolution Switch Board PCB
0009-1586

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
When making an expansion of the FAX function or the SEND function into iRC3100N, the Resolution Switch Board PCB is required.

14.3.8 Jam (Main Unit)

14.3.8.1 0105 Jam Code: Because multifeed sensor flag is detached
0011-1403

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the multifeed sensor flag (FC5-0489) on the right door assembly came off and interrupted a stream of paper, causing 0105 jam. When the symptom
has occurred, check the sensor flag for detachment; if detached, re-fit it.
- 0105 Jam Code: Delay jam at the pre-registration sensor (PS9).
FC5-0489 Multifeed Sensor Flag

14.3.8.2 010C JAM CODE: 2nd side of duplex print is jammed because of duplex inlet sensor coming off
0005-5923

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
010C: Delay jam at duplex inlet sensor PS3A (3rd Delivery Frame Ass'y)
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the duplex inlet sensor came off.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the duplex inlet sensor at the duplex inlet guide unit does not come off. If it comes off, reinstall it securely.
Duplex Inlet Sensor: FH7-7312

14-40

Chapter 14

14.3.8.3 0111 Jam Code: Because of deformed connector pin of buffer pass unit
0006-1069

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
0111 is a delay jam at the buffer inlet sensor (PS1B).
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the feed motor did not rotate due to the deformed pin of the connector located deep inside the buffer pass unit,
resulting in a jam. So, inspect the connector to make sure that there is no problem with the pins.

14.3.8.4 Jam Immediately After Pickup (heavy paper, envelope, postcard)

0002-6207

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause>
The heavy paper, envelope, or postcard was not given curling before it was set in the manual feed tray.
<Field Remedy>
Give heavy paper, envelope, or postcard curling of about 3 mm before placing it in the manual feed tray as shown.

[1]
F-14-27

[1] Direction of paper feed

Memo:
The remedy herein is indicated in the User's Manual for use by the user. If a similar jam recurs, advise the user to refer to the User's Manual (i.e., to curl the edge
of the paper).

14.3.8.5 0202/0105 Jam Code: Always occur in front of registration roller when picking up A4-size paper from cassette 2
0010-8557

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
Since the right lower door sheets on the right lower door assembly (FM2-0131) were deformed, a paper jam always occurred in front of the registration roller
when A4-size paper was picked up from the cassette 2.
Cause
The right lower door sheets are deformed, preventing the vertical path guide (FC5-0595) from being fitted securely to the paper pick-up assembly for the
cassette1.
- 0202 Jam Code: Stationary jam at the cassette2 retry sensor (PS11).
- 0105 Jam Code: Delay jam at the pre-registration sensor (PS9).
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, check the right lower door sheets for detachment or deformation; if detached or deformed, replace the sheets with new ones.
FC5-7413 Right Lower Door Sheet

14.3.8.6 0A06 Jam Code: Because claw of fixing inlet sensor (PS25) is freed
0010-7149

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
As a result of inspection, the following was found: The claw of the fixing inlet sensor (PS25) was freed from the lug-hole on the fixing lower frame, causing the
sensor to be displaced. This resulted in a false detection of a paper jam.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that there is no jammed paper in the fixing assembly.
2. In service mode [COPIER > I/O > DC-CON], if the setting of [P006-bit5] is "1", mount the fixing inlet sensor again.
- 0A06 Jam Code: Residnal jam at the fixing inlet sensor (PS25)
FK2-0149 Photointerrupter (fixing intel sensor: PS25)

14.3.8.7 0A0B JAM CODE occurred upon installation of Inner 2way Tray-C1
0005-5917

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]

14-41

Chapter 14
Description
0A0B: Stationary jam at the No. 3 delivery sensor PS5A (3rd Delivery Frame Ass'y)
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the spring of the No. 3 delivery sensor lever came off (1 case). So, inspect the spring.
Torsion Spring: FC5-1011

14.3.8.8 0B00/0B01 Jam Code: Supplementary descriptions

0007-9850

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
1. 0B00: Door open jam
It is displayed when the front cover, the right cover or the optional products (cassette pedestal, buffer path, etc.) is opened during operation.
2. 0B01: Door open jam (detected by software)
It is like a logical jam. When an unexpected condition occurs in software, the host machine detects it and halts for itself. On some of the products currently in
the market, the drive ass'y might keep rotating; however, on this product, the host machine diagnose its current condition and halts for itself for protection
purposes.

14.3.8.9 0D91 JAM CODE: Occurred at all cassettes upon installation

0005-1582

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the spring of the pre-registration sensor (PS9) flag was deviated from the hook
portion (1 case).
Generally speaking, the 0D91 jam code can be displayed when the paper size is wrongly designated (paper in shorter length than designated is delivered).
If the paper jam occurs at all the cassettes, check whether there are any abnormalities on the sensor (PS9), the sensor flag and its spring.

14.3.8.10 0D91/0105 Jam Code: At all paper cassettes and stack bypass
0010-8341

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, 0D91 or 0105 jam code occurred at all the paper cassettes and the stack bypass; however, the symptom was solved by executing the main
controller clear in service mode.
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, perform the following steps.
1. Before executing the main controller clear, perform the following service mode items to output the setting data; [Service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION
> MISC-P > P-PRINT/USER PRT].
2. In service mode [COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > MN-CONT], press [OK], and then turn the main power switch OFF and then ON without fail.
Note: Executing this service mode item will delete all the image data in Boxes; be sure to store such data again after the symptom is solved.
3. After executing the above-mentioned service mode item, check the setting data displayed on the LCD against those indicated on the P-PRINT printout and
the USER PRT printout; if there is a setting that has been changed, return it to the previous setting.
4. Make sure that all the paper sources are available for copy jobs.

14.3.8.11 Pickup Faults (pickup from the side paper deck)

0002-1434

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Note>
This symptom tends to occur when the deck adjuster is not correctly adjusted at time of installation.
<Cause>
The point of paper passage from the paper deck to the machine is too low, adversely affecting the latching to the machine; the resulting low pressure of the pull-off
roller causes pickup faults.
<Field Remedy>
Turn the adjuster found on the bottom of the paper deck to adjust the height of the deck.
<Remarks>
If the adjuster is not adjusted correctly at time of installation, the following symptoms can also occur in addition to jams:
1. the release lever movement tends to be heavy.
2. the door tends to close more tightly at the rear than at the front.
3. the deck may not easily settle in place.

14.3.8.12 Delivery Delay Jam (label sheet)

0002-7023

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Cause>
The glue used on the delivered label sheet stuck on the rib found where the feed path curves immediately in front of the delivery roller. The glue used on the label
sheet that follows joined the glue left by the preceding sheet, thus turning into a delivery delay jam.
<Field Remedy>
Clean the delivery path [1] to remove the glue left behind the label sheets.

14-42

Chapter 14

[1]

F-14-28

14.3.8.13 Pickup Stationary Jam

0003-5010

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Cause>
Paper moving past leaves lint behind it, which tends to collect around the sensor flag. The build-up of lint soon starts to hinder the movement of the sensor flag, at
times preventing it from returning to its initial position.
<Field Remedy>
1) Remove the pickup unit in question.
2) Clean the area around the sensor flag [1] using a blower brush or the like to remove the paper lint.

[1]

F-14-29

3) Put the pickup unit back into place.

14.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder)

14.3.9.1 0094 Jam Code: Because of poor contact of Delivery Sensor (PI4) connector in DADF-L1
0006-2034

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
0094 is an initial stationary jam at PI2, PI3, and PI4; while the 1st sheet is being picked, paper is detected within the feeder.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the connector of the delivery sensor (PI4) had poor contact.
Field Remedy
Check the paper detection state for the sensors listed below in service mode [COPIER> I/O> FEEDER].
- Registration paper sensor (PI2): P001-Bit1 (1: paper detected, 0: no paper)

14-43

Chapter 14
- Read sensor (PI3): P001-Bit0 (1: paper detected, 0: no paper)
- Delivery sensor (PI4): P005-Bit6 (1: no paper, 0: paper detected)
If the results show "paper detected", make sure that the connector of the affected sensor(s) are securely fitted and that the sensor, the sensor flag, and the springs
are securely installed.

14.3.10 Error Code

14.3.10.1 E004-0001 Error Code: Displayed after opening/closing front panel
0005-1486

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred for the following reasons (3 cases):
During transportation, the front panel was held with an excessive force. As a result, the front panel actuator interfered with and detached the front panel
sensor (PS22). The sensor came in contact with the sensor mount causing 5V line to be short-circuited.
If the front panel sensor is damaged, replace it with a new one. At that time, visually inspect the front panel actuator to make sure that it does not interfere
with the sensor.
Front Panel Sensor (PS22): FH7-7312

14.3.10.2 E010-0002 Error Code: Protection sheet for developing cylinder was not removed upon installation
0005-3463

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
In the field, E010-0002 was displayed because the protection sheet for the developing cylinder was not removed upon installation.
Be sure to remove the protection sheet by following the Installation Procedure and Service Manual [Chapter 2 Installation> Unpacking and Installation>
Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly].

14.3.10.3 E070-0003 Error Code: Because grounding spring for registration hard roller is deformed
0010-7963

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the grounding spring (front) for the registration hard roller was deformed, causing E070-0003.
- E070-0003 can be displayed when the time that passes after detection of ITB home position to the next detection of the home position is shorter than a specified
period of time.
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, check the grounding spring (front/rear) for deformation; if deformed, replace it with a new one.
FC5-0516 Grounding Spring (front)
FC6-5062 Grounding Spring (rear)

14.3.10.4 E014-0001 Error Code: Because fixing roller is deformed

0009-7512

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
When the error code was displayed and then the fixing roller was checked during inspection, the roller was found to be deformed. However, the error was
corrected by replacing the deformed roller with a new one.
Field Remedy
When the symptom occurs, if the fixing roller is deformed, replace it with a new one.
FC5-0726 Fixing Roller

14.3.10.5 E014-0001 Error Code: Because fixing motor (M11) is faulty

0009-7513

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
In inspection, the error code occurred because the fixing motor (M11) of the main drive assembly was faulty. When the symptom occurs, replace the motor
with a new one.
FH5-1006 DC Motor
- E014-0001 can be displayed when a lock state is not detected for 2 seconds or more after the motor goes on.

14.3.10.6 E020 Error Code: Occurred upon installation because developer failed to be filled inside developing ass'y
0005-1489

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred upon installation because a developing ass'y without developer being filled had been wrongly enclosed in the package.
If this occurs, replace the affected developing ass'y:
Developing Ass'y (BLACK): FM2-0056
Developing Ass'y (YELLOW): FM2-0057
Developing Ass'y (MAGENTA): FM2-0058
Developing Ass'y (CYAN): FM2-0059

14.3.10.7 E020 Error Code and Toner scattering inside machine: Because wrong screw is used for fixing developing ass'y
0005-7894

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
E020 indicates that the drum or the developer-related errors occur.
Cause
As a result of inspection, this symptom occurred because of the following fact. When the developing ass'y is fixed inside the developing rotary, a TP screw was
wrongly used although the designated stepped screw should have been used. Consequently, a clearance became wider between the developing cylinder and the
drum at a time of developing.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the developing ass'y is fixed with the designated stepped screw. In addition, move the developing ass'y with your hand to make sure that there
is approximately 1.5 to 2.0mm-clearance in all directions.
Stepped Screw: FS1-9003

14-44

Chapter 14

14.3.10.8 E020-01A8 Error Code: Machine performs adjustments each time outputting copy, finally resulting in E020-01A8
0010-8568

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
Since E020-xx81/xx63 was displayed after cleaning the drum and its surrounding parts, the patch image reader sensor and the like were cleaned and the main
power switch was turned OFF/ON several times. Then, the machine had come to display E020-01A8 each time it output a copy; however, this symptom was
solved by executing D-CON CLEAR in service mode.
Field Remedy
1. Before performing D-CON CLEAR, make the following selections in sequence [Service mode > COPIER > Function > MISC-P], and then execute [PPRINT] to output all the setting data of the machine.
2. In service mode [COPIER > Function > CLEAR > DC-CON], press [OK]. Be sure to turn the main power switch OFF and then ON without fail.
3. After performing D-CON CLEAR, check the setting data displayed on the LCD against those in the P-PRINT printout generated in the step 1; if a setting
is changed, reset it to the previous setting.
- E020-01A8 can be displayed when the T/D ratio detected in the ATR control exceeds the upper limit (13%) three times in a row.

14.3.10.9 E020-0XA2/E020-0XA8 Error Code

0011-6420

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
Since E020-0XA2/E020-0XA8 was displayed, the following procedure was performed as a solution. When the symptom has occurred, performed the
following field remedy to adjust toner ratio inside the developing assembly close to the normal level by outputting solid images (30 sheets) of the problematic
color.
- E020-0XA2 can be displayed when SGNL value is 960 or higher as a result of ATR control.
- E020-0XA8 can be displayed when toner/developer ratio (T/D ratio) detected as a result of ATR control exceeds the upper limit (13%) three times in a row.
Field Remedy
1. Turn the control panel switch OFF > turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
2. Check the following;
- The service mode item [DRM-CNTR] under [Service mode > COPIER > MISC] is 70,000 or higher.
- The service mode item [DRM-LIFE] under [Service mode > COPIER > Display > MISC] is 95% or higher.
If either of them is true, replace the drum, and then go to Step 3; if neither of them is true, go to Step 3.
3. Service mode > COPIER > Test > PG > set [TYPE] to "5."
4. Set the values specified below for the following service mode items depending on the second digit "X" of the displayed sub error code. ("X" means
problematic color; "1" is Yellow, "2" is Magenta, and "3" is Cyan.) Here, assume the problematic color as being Yellow (i.e., the displayed error code is
"E020-01A0/01A8.")
- DENS-Y: 255
- Other than DENS-Y: 0
- COLOR-Y: 1
- Other than COLOR-Y: 0
In case the problematic color differs, set the appropriate value to each service mode item in the same manner.
5. Service mode > COPIER > Test > PG > input the number of the paper source, on which A4-size paper is loaded, to [PG-PIC] (the number of the upper
cassette is "1") > input "30" to [PG-QTY] > OK > press the Start key.
6. If the symptom still occurs, output 30 sheets of solid image again. If the symptom still remains, replace the developing assembly with a new one.
Note1: Procedure to be performed without fail after the developing assemblies are set during installation, or when a developing assembly is replaced after
some period of use.
- After the developing assemblies are set during installation,
Service mode > COPIER > Function > INSTALL > STIR-Y > INIT-3 > SPLY-H-4
- When a developing assembly is replaced after some period of use,
Service mode > COPIER > Function > INSTALL > STIR-Y > INIT-Y > SPLY-H-Y
Note2: Never perform the following
- Service mode > COPIER > Adjust > DENS > change the setting values for [SGNL-Y] through [REF-D].
- Service mode > COPIER > Function > INSTALL > INIT (Never perform this service mode item when the error code has occurred.)

14.3.10.10 E020-0XA0/E020-0XA1/E020-0XA9 Error Code

0011-6424

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
Since E020-0XA0/E020-0XA1/E020-0XA9 was displayed, the following procedure was performed as a solution. When the symptom has occurred, perform
the following field remedy to adjust the toner/developer ration (T/D ratio) inside the developing assembly close to the normal level by supplying toner for
the trouble developing assembly.
- E020-0XA0 can be displayed when the SGNL value detected as a result of ATR control is less than 62.
- E020-0XA1 can be displayed when the REF value detected as a result of ATR control is less than 62.
- E020-0XA9 can be displayed when the T/D ratio detected as a result of ATR control falls below the lower limit (3%) three times in a row.
Field Remedy
1. Turn the control panel switch OFF > turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
2. Service mode > COPIER > Function > INSTALL > SPLY-H-"X" ("X" means the problematic color: "1" is Yellow, "2" is Magenta, and "3" is Cyan.) > OK.
3. If the symptom still occurs, replace the developing assembly with a new one.
Note: Never change the setting values for [SGNL-Y] through [REF-D] under [Service mode > COPIER > Adjust > DENS]. Also never perform the following
service mode item when the error code has been displayed; [Service mode > COPIER > Function > INSTALL > INIT].

14.3.10.11 E021-000x Error Code: Developing rotary does not rotate and abnormal noise comes from motor
0005-5650

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
E021 can be displayed when an error occurs in the developing rotary. The detail codes are:
0001: The developing rotary home position cannot be detected.

14-45

Chapter 14
0002: The intervals of flag detection during rotation is too short or long.
0003: The sensor does not detect the flag when the developing rotary stops at development point.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that the DC Controller PCB was unable to control the motor because it was faulty (1 case).
Field Remedy
1. Check whether or not the developing rotary receives any physical load.
Rotate the developing rotary in a counterclockwise direction by hand to see whether it rotates smoothly. If any abnormality is found, eliminate the root cause.
No problem is found, go to the Step 2.
2. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between J313 on the DC Controller PCB and the Rotary Motor (M8) or there is no pinched wire. No problem
is found, go to the Step 3.
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 4.
4. Replace the Rotary Motor with a new one.
DC Controller PCB: FG3-2795
Rotary Motor: FM2-0080

14.3.10.12 E021-0003 Error Code: Occurs during copy, not upon FAX reception but output becomes yellow
0005-7415

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
E021-0003 can be displayed when the rotary HP sensor cannot detect the developing position detecting sensor flag although the developing rotary stops at
development point.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because of breakage of the developing position detecting sensor flag that is located on the rear rotary flange.
Field Remedy
Visually inspect the rear rotary flange to see whether or not the developing position detecting sensor flag is broken.
Rear Rotary Flange: FC5-0299

14.3.10.13 E026-0x01 Error Code / Message [Remaining toner is low.] / Toner scattering inside machine
0005-4367

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
E026-0x01 can be displayed when the toner concentration does not return to a normal level after replacement of the toner bottle and 5-time toner recovery
sessions following the detection of toner absence.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the toner shutter in the developing ass'y was not open completely and the toner was not supplied from the toner bottle
to the developing ass'y.
Field Remedy
Before installing the developing ass'y into the host machine, be sure to slide and fix the toner shutter so as to cover the opening for toner. Then, install the toner
bottle.

14.3.10.14 E067-0100 Error Code: Because tension spring for Primary Transfer Roller comes off
0005-7405

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
E067-0100 can be displayed when the value of the primary transfer output current measures abnormal two straight times.
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the tension spring for the primary transfer roller shaft in the ITB came off. So, make sure that the spring is securely
installed.

14.3.10.15 E067-0100 Error Code: Because of condensation upon installation

0006-2033

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
E067 can be displayed when the current readings are abnormal two times in succession when a reference voltage is applied to the primary transfer roller during
ATVC control.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because of condensation inside the machine upon installation.
Field Remedy
If condensation occurs inside the machine, unplug the power cord and leave it for a few hours. When the condensation disappears as a result of the machine
being acclimated, plug the power cord and turn the power ON.

14.3.10.16 E067-0100 Error Code: Troubleshooting upon error code indication

0007-9846

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
This error code can be displayed when the current measured at the primary transfer ATVC is abnormal 2 times in succession.
Field Remedy
When this error code is displayed, perform the steps below.
1. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Display> HV-STS], make sure that the rightmost value for each "1ATVC" exceeds 3000.
2. Check the following and take an appropriate measure against; condensation occurs inside the host machine, a spring for the primary transfer roller comes off,
or the shaft of the primary transfer roller is soiled where the leaf spring for applying transfer voltage comes in contact.
3. Execute the following service mode [COPIER> Function> MISC-P> 1ATVC-EX (to execute the primary transfer ATVC forcibly)], and then check the service
mode described in the Step 1 to make sure that the value is smaller than 3000. If not, the drum unit is likely to be faulty, replace it with a new one.

14.3.10.17 E070-0003 Error Code: Improper ground of ITB tension roller shaft in ITB unit
0005-4358

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that the grounding plate did not come in contact with the shaft of the ITB drive roller in the ITB unit, causing a poor ground
(1 case). This grounding plate is used to establish a ground for the ITB tension roller to the ITB drive roller.
E070-0003 can be displayed when the time that passes between the first detection of the ITB home position (HP) and the next HP detection is shorter than a
specific period of time.

14-46

Chapter 14
Field Remedy
Follow the steps below:
1. Make sure that the inner surface of the ITB has stains or scratches on it.
2. Make sure that the ITB-HP sensor (PS19) operates normally.
3. Make sure that the grounding plate properly comes in contact with the shaft of the ITB drive roller.
Grounding Plate: FC5-0715
ITB-HP Sensor (PS19): FH7-7630

14.3.10.18 E070-0003 Error Code: Because ITB-HP sensor (PS19) is soiled

0005-7411

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
E070-0003 can be displayed when the time from the first detection of the ITB home position to the next detection is shorter than a specific period of time.
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the ITB-HP sensor (PS19) was soiled. So, remove the ITB and clean the sensor with a blower brush and clean the inner
of the belt with extra care for scratches.

14.3.10.19 E070-0003 Error Code: ITB HP sticker is soiled

0007-9859

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, this error code was displayed because the ITB home position stickers (2 pcs.) inside of the ITB were soiled, and was resolved by cleaning the stickers.
When this symptom occurs, clean the stickers and the sensor.
E070-0003 can be displayed when the time that passes between the first detection of the ITB home position (HP) and the next HP detection is shorter than a
specific period of time.

14.3.10.20 E070-0001 Error Code: Because tension arm (front/rear) of ITB is broken
0010-7167

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the error code appeared because a tension arm (front or rear) of the ITB tension roller was broken.
- E070-0001 Error Code can be displayed when the ITB home position is not detected within a specific period of time.
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, check the tension arms (front and rear) for breakage. If either of the arms is broken, replace it with a new one.
FC5-0343 Tension Arm, Front
FC5-0344 Tension Arm, Rear

14.3.10.21 E100 / E110 Error Code: Occurred because J328 connector on DC Controller PCB was not securely fitted
0005-3197

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
E100 is a BD error and E110 is a fault of the laser scanner motor operation.
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that the connector at J328 on the DC Controller PCB was not securely fitted (1 case). Check whether the connectors are
securely fitted between the laser scanner unit and the DC Controller PCB (J327, J328, J329), and whether there is no pinched cable.

14.3.10.22 E110 Error Code: Error occurred at the time when paper was delivered to transfer unit
0005-3235

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Description >
E110 can be displayed when a fault of the laser scanner motor operation occurs.
< Field Remedy >
In the field, it was found that the laser scanner unit was faulty (1 case).
Check whether the connectors are securely fitted between the laser scanner unit and the DC Controller PCB (J327, J328, J329) or whether there is no pinched
cable. If no problem is found, replace the Laser Scanner unit with a new one.
Laser Scanner Ass'y: FM2-0041

14.3.10.23 E225-0001 Error Code: Scanning lamp came on

0005-5375

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
E225-0001 indicates a CIS light intensity error occurs and can be displayed when the machine cannot find out whether the lamp has come on normally during
shading correction at time of power-on or at the start of a job.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) Ass'y was faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between the CIS Ass'y - CIS Inverter PCB - Reader Controller PCB, and that there is no pinched cable. If
no problem is found, go to the Step 2.
2. Replace the CIS Ass'y with a new one.
Contact Image Sensor Ass'y: FM2-1563
CIS Inverter PCB: FH3-7215
Reader Controller PCB: FG3-3159

14.3.10.24 E315-0010/0034/0038 Error Code: Occurred during PCFAX transmission, then host machine rebooted
0005-1477

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty (1 case).
E315 can be displayed when the image data failure has occurred (The Resolution Switch PCB is faulty, the image memory (SDRAM) and HDD are faulty
or not securely fitted.)

14-47

Chapter 14
Make sure that the connectors on the Main Controller PCB are securely fitted or there is no pinched cables. If no problem is found, replace the Resolution
Switch PCB with a new one.
Resolution Switch PCB: FG3-2728

14.3.10.25 E351-0000 Error Code: Occasionally occurs while host machine is being energized
0005-5916

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
E351 can be displayed when an Main Controller PCB (Sub) error occurs.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between J1207 on the Main Controller PCB (Main) and Main Controller PCB (Sub), and there is no pinched
wire.
2. If this symptom recurs with a low frequency, it is possible that the Main Controller PCB (Sub) is faulty. So, replace it with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Sub): FM2-0209

14.3.10.26 E400-0002 Error Code: Because ADF Controller PCB is faulty

0005-5918

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
E400 can be displayed when a feeder communication error occurs. The detail code 0002 indicates a reception status error.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the ADF Controller PCB was faulty.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted on the ADF Controller PCB, and between the ADF Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB (Sub), and
that there is no pinched wire. If no abnormality is found, replace the ADC Controller PCB with a new one.
ADF Controller PCB: FG3-3124
Main Controller PCB (Sub): FM2-0209

14.3.10.27 E500 (Finisher-P1)

0002-9116

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause 1>
- The harness is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Check the connection between J2 of the finisher controller PCB and the DC controller PCB of the host machine.
<Cause 2>
- The finisher controller PCB is faulty, or the host machine has a fault.
<Field Remedy 2>
- Replace the finisher controller PCB, or replace the DC controller of the host machine.

14.3.10.28 E505 (Finisher-P1)

0002-9118

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause>
- The backup memory is inadequate.
<Field Remedy>
Initialize the RAM.
Replace the finisher controller PCB.

14.3.10.29 E514 (Finisher-P1)

0002-9119

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause 1>
- The stack delivery motor (M2) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
- Replace the stack delivery motor (M2).
<Cause 2>
- The return belt escape HP sensor (SR5) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
Replace the return belt escape HP sensor (SR5).
<Cause 3>
- The stack retaining roll drive mechanism is faulty.
<Field Remedy 3>
Correct the stack retaining roll drive mechanism.
EX:
Check to see that the drive cam [2] is under the belt arm [1].

14-48

Chapter 14

F-14-30

<Cause 4>
- The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
<Field Remedy 4>
Initialize the RAM.
Replace the finisher controller PCB.

14.3.10.30 E530 (Finisher-P1)

0002-9120

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause 1>
- The rear alignment motor (M4) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the rear alignment motor (M4).
<Cause 2>
- The rear alignment HP sensor (SR4) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
Replace the rear alignment HP sensor (SR4).
<Cause 3>
- The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
<Field Remedy 3>
Initialize the RAM.
Replace the finisher controller PCB.

14.3.10.31 E531 (Finisher-P1)

0002-9121

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause 1>
- A staple has jammed.
<Field Remedy 1>
Remove the staple.
<Cause 2>
- The stapler motor (M9) is faulty.
- The stapler punching home position sensor (SR18) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
- Replace the stapler.
<Cause 3>
- The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
<Field Remedy 3>
Initialize the RAM.
Replace the finisher controller PCB.

14.3.10.32 E532 (Finisher-P1)

0002-9122

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause 1>
- The stapler slide motor (M8) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the stapler slide motor (M8).
Check the harness between the stapler slide motor (M8) and the finisher controller PCB.
<Cause 2>
- The stapler slide HP sensor (SR6) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
Replace the stapler slide HP sensor (SR6).
Check the harness between the stapler slide HP sensor (SR76) and the finisher controller PCB.
<Cause 3>
- The stapler shift belt is faulty.
<Field Remedy 3>

14-49

Chapter 14
Check the stapler shift belt.
<Cause 4>
- The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
<Field Remedy 4>
Initialize the RAM.
Replace the finisher controller PCB.

14.3.10.33 E532-8002 Error Code: Because staple connecting assembly cable has open-circuit, Finisher-R1/Saddle
Finisher-R2
0009-7514

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
At time of inspection, the error code occurred because the staple connecting assembly cable had an open-circuit. However, it was solved by replacing the
cable with a new one.
Field Remedy
Check the staple connecting assembly cable for electrical continuity between J993-8 and J993-8 and between J993-9 and J992-9. If no electrical continuity
is confirmed, replace the cable with a new one.
- E532-8002 can be displayed when the home position sensor does not go on within a specific period of time after the stapler shaft motor has started to rotate.
FM2-1426 Staple Connecting Assembly Cable

14.3.10.34 E535 (Finisher-P1)

0002-9123

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause 1>
- The swing cam motor (M5) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the swing cam motor (M5).
<Cause 2>
- The swing cam HP sensor (SR7) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
Replace the swing cam HP sensor (SR7).
<Cause 3>
- The stack delivery roller swing mechanism is faulty
<Field Remedy 3>
Replace the upper guide assembly.
Correct the stack delivery motor swing mechanism.
<Cause 4>
- The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
<Field Remedy 4>
Initialize the RAM.
Replace the finisher controller PCB.

14.3.10.35 E537 (Finisher-P1)

0002-9124

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause 1>
- The front alignment motor (M3) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the font alignment motor (M3).
<Cause 2>
- The front alignment HP sensor (SR3) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
Replace the front alignment HP sensor (SR3).
<Cause 3>
- The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
<Field Remedy 3>
Initialize the RAM.
Replace the finisher controller PCB.

14.3.10.36 E540 (Finisher-P1)

0002-9126

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause 1>
- The stack tray shift motor (M7) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the stack tray shift motor (M7).
Adjust the belt tension of the stack tray shift motor (M7).
After mounting the motor back in place, loosen the screw [3] once and then tighten it. The spring [1] will automatically adjust the tension of the belt [2].

14-50

Chapter 14

F-14-31

F-14-32

<Cause 2>
- The stack tray upper paper sensor (SR9) is faulty.
- The stack tray lower paper sensor (SR10) is faulty.
- The stack tray lower limit sensor (SR12) is faulty.
- The stack tray upper limit sensor (SR13) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
Replace the individual sensors.
<Cause 3>
- The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
<Field Remedy 3>
Initialize the RAM.
Replace the finisher controller PCB.

14.3.10.37 E540-8003 Error Code: Occurs when Upper Tray ascends because of Back End Assist Plate coming off
0007-4030

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
Since the Back End Assist Plate and the Back End Assist Button came off the Timing Belt in the Operation Tray Ass'y, there occurred a malfunction in paper
stacking operation, and E540-8003 was displayed when the upper tray ascended. When this symptom occurs, it is possible that the timing belt has been damaged.
Thus, replace the belt with a new one and attach the assist plate and the assist button once again.
FC5-3553 Timing Belt
FC5-3554 Back End Assist Plate
FC5-4715 Back End Assist Button

14.3.10.38 E540-0003 Error Code: Saddle Finisher-Q2

0011-2553

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the paper sensing sensor flag was broken, causing E540-0003.
- E540-0003: Tray 1 shift motor error.
Field Remedy
When the symptom has occurred, check the paper sensing sensor flag for detachment or breakage and re-fit or replace it according to the check result.
FC5-5004: Paper Sensing Sensor Flag

14.3.10.39 E542 Error Code: Saddle Delivery Tray of Saddle Finisher-Q2 not completely latched
0005-4373

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
E542 can be displayed when the tray 2 shift motor (M38) is faulty.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the cover of the saddle delivery tray was not completely latched (rear side, specifically) as a result of opening/closing
for jam clearance, causing the finisher tray to hit against the cover.

14-51

Chapter 14
Field Remedy
Make sure that the cove of the saddle delivery tray is completely latched.

F-14-33

14.3.10.40 E577 (Finisher-P1)

0002-9128

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Cause 1>
- The paddle motor (M6) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the paddle motor (M6).
<Cause 2>
- The paddle HP sensor (SRE8) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
- Replace the paddle HP sensor (SR8).
<Cause 3>
- The paddle and the stacking wall drive mechanism are faulty.
<Field Remedy 3>
Check the paddle and the stacking wall drive mechanism..
Check to see if the drive gear phase is correct.
Be sure to mount the 3 gears so that the groove [1] of gear B fully engages with the extensions of gears A and B.

F-14-34

<Cause 4>
- The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
<Field Remedy 4>
Initialize the RAM.
Replace the finisher controller PCB.

14-52

Chapter 14

14.3.10.41 E602-0001 Error Code: Ticktack sound is heard upon start-up and then the error code is displayed
0005-4356

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
n the field, it was found that the HDD was faulty.
E602-0001 can be displayed when the machine cannot recognize the HDD or cannot find BOOTDEV at start-up.
Follow the steps below (Described in the Service Manual [Chapter 14 Self Diagnosis > Error Code Details> E602 in detail]).
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the 2 types of cables (for Power Supply and IDE) that come from the HDD are securely fitted. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 2.
2. Turn the power OFF and then ON while pressing the numeric keys 1+9 simultaneously. The recovery program will automatically start and the LCD on the
control panel will be shut off (blackened). When the LCD comes on, turn the power OFF/ON.
- If the host machine starts up normally, reinstall the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
- If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 3.
3. Replace the HDD with a new one and start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn the power ON while pressing 2+8 keys). Format the HDD (ALL) and
download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) using the SST, and then turn the power OFF/ON. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 4.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB (Main) with a new one.
HDD: WM2-5188
Main Controller PCB Ass'y (Main): FG3-3221
Note: After replacement of the HDD, be sure to follow the instructions described in the Service Manual [Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments > Electrical
Components > After Replacing the HDD].

14.3.10.42 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after HD-CLEAR

0005-4357

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
E602-0202 can be displayed when no image data exists although it should be stored in [FSTDEV] (the image storage area in the HDD). This error is determined
by the data held in the SRAM on the SRAM Board PCB Ass'y. So, the host machine will not recover by replacement of the HDD without initializing the SRAM.
Executing [HD-CLEAR] in service mode will initialize the image storage area and update the data in the SRAM.
Consequently, when any E602-related error codes occur, do not replace the HDD first. Follow the instructions described in Service Manual [Chapter 14 Self
Diagnosis > Error Code Details > E602 in detail].
Outline of procedures
1. Partition check and recovery process
In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE], enter [1]. Select [HD-CHECK] and press [OK]. Upon completion, turn the power OFF/ON.
- If the host machine recovers, download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
- If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 2.
2. Partition initialization
In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE], enter [1]. Select [HD-CLEAR] and press [OK]. Upon completion, turn the power OFF/ON.
- If the host machine recovers, download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
- If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 3.
3. Replacement of HDD and system software download
Replace the HDD with a new one and start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn the power ON while pressing 2+8 keys). Format the HDD (ALL) and
download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) using the SST, and then turn the power OFF/ON.
HDD: WM2-5188
Note: After replacement of the HDD, be sure to follow the instructions described in the Service Manual [Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments > Electrical
Components > After Replacing the HDD].

14.3.10.43 E602-0402 Error Code: Recovered after HD-CLEAR

0005-4359

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
E602-0402 can be displayed when no image data exists although it should be stored in [FSTPDEV] (the image storage area in the HDD). This error is determined
by the data held in the SRAM on the SRAM Board PCB Ass'y. So, the host machine will not recover by replacement of the HDD without initializing the SRAM.
Executing [HD-CLEAR] in service mode will initialize the image storage area and update the data in the SRAM.
Consequently, when any E602-related error codes occur, do not replace the HDD first. Follow the instructions described in Service Manual [Chapter 14 Self
Diagnosis > Error Code Details > E602 in detail].
Outline of procedures
1. Partition check and recovery process
In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE], enter [1]. Select [HD-CHECK] and press [OK]. Upon completion, turn the power OFF/ON.
- If the host machine recovers, download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
- If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 2.
2. Partition initialization
In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE], enter [1]. Select [HD-CLEAR] and press [OK]. Upon completion, turn the power OFF/ON.
- If the host machine recovers, download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
- If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 3.
3. Replacement of HDD and system software download
Replace the HDD with a new one and start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn the power ON while pressing 2+8 keys). Format the HDD (ALL) and
download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) using the SST, and then turn the power OFF/ON.
HDD: WM2-5188
Note: After replacement of the HDD, be sure to follow the instructions described in the Service Manual [Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments > Electrical
Components > After Replacing the HDD].

14.3.10.44 E602-0111 Error Code

0005-5184

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
E602-0111 can be displayed when an error occurs in the DOSDEV (retains multipurpose data). The suspect causes are HDD contact failure, HDD failure, main
controller PCB (Main) failure.
Remedy
1. Turn the power OFF and make sure that the 2 types of cables (for Power Supply and IDE) that come from the HDD are securely fitted. If the symptom still
recurs, go to the Step 2.
2. Replace the HDD with a new one and start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn the power ON while pressing 2+8 keys). Format the HDD (ALL) and
download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) using the SST. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 3.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB (Main) with a new one.
HDD: WM2-5188
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-3221

14-53

Chapter 14

14.3.10.45 E602-0113 Error Code: Because of faulty HDD

0005-7407

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
E602-0113 can be displayed when a readout error occurs in the general data storage area of the HDD.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that the HDD was faulty.
Field Remedy
Follow the steps below:
1. Partition check and recovery process
In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE], enter [1]. Select [HD-CHECK] and press [OK]. Upon completion, turn the power OFF/ON.
- If the host machine recovers, reinstall the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
- If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 2.
2. Partition initialization
In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE], enter [1]. Select [HD-CLEAR] and press [OK]. Upon completion, turn the power OFF/ON.
- If the host machine recovers, reinstall the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
- If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 3.
3. Replacement of HDD and system software download
Replace the HDD with a new one and start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn the power ON while pressing 2+8 keys). Format the HDD (ALL) and
download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) using the SST, and then turn the power OFF/ON.
HDD: WM2-5188
Note: After replacement of the HDD, be sure to follow the instructions described in the Service Manual [Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments > Electrical
Components > After Replacing the HDD].

14.3.10.46 E674-0001 Error Code: Because J1210 connector is not securely fitted on Main Controller PCB (Main)
0005-5919

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
E674-0001 can be displayed when the fax board can be detected, but cannot communicate with the host machine.
Cause
As a result of inspection, this symptom occurred because the connector at J1210 on the Main Controller PCB (Main) was not securely fitted.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between J1210 on the Main Controller PCB (Main) and the FAX board, and there is no pinched wire.

14.3.10.47 E732-0001 Error Code: Reader Controller PCB is faulty

0005-5182

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
E732-0001 can be displayed when a communication error occurs.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Reader Controller PCB was faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connector between the host machine and the reader unit is securely fitted.
2. Make sure that the connectors on the Reader Controller PCB are securely fitted or there is no pinched cables.
3. Remove and insert the Main Controller PCB (Sub) from the Main Controller PCB (Main). If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 4.
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB with a new one.
Reader Controller PCB: FG3-3159
Main Controller PCB (Sub): FM2-0209

14.3.10.48 E732-0001 Error Code: iRC3100 locks up during copying

0005-6475

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
E732-0001 can be displayed when a reader communication error occurs.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because of poor soldering of J1302-34pin on the Main Controller PCB (Sub).
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between J1302 on the Main Controller PCB (Sub) and J502 on the Reader Controller PCB and that there is no
pinched cable.
2. If no problem is found, replace the Main Controller PCB (Sub) with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Sub): FM2-0209
Reader Controller PCB: FG3-3159

14.3.10.49 E732-0001 Error Code: Because of poor contact of SDRAM

0006-1067

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
E732-0001 indicates that a reader communication error has occurred.
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the SDRAM was not securely fitted on the Main Controller PCB. So, remove and
insert the SDRAM once again.

14.3.10.50 E733-0001 Error Code: Occurs after progress bar is filled completely
0010-7146

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the following 3 cases occurred.
a. When the progress bar on the LCD is filled completely upon power-on, the display on the LCD disappears and E733-0001 appears because the connectors of
the cable between the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB have poor connection.
b. A communication error occurs between the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB, and results in E733-0001 because the power supply voltage of
the wall outlet is low (due to star-burst connection of power cable).
c. A communication error occurs between the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB and results in E733-0001 because the DC controller PCB is faulty.

14-54

Chapter 14
Field Remedy
1. Check if other device is not connected to the same wall outlet as the machine. When the symptom occurs no matter if other device is not connected there,
check if the power supply voltage of the outlet is within the specification.
1-1. Unplug other device from the outlet.
1-2. When the power supply voltage of the outlet is not within the specification, connect the machine to other outlet, and check if the symptom is corrected.
2. Re-insert the connectors of the cable between the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
3. Replace the DC controller PCB with a new one.
- E733-0001: DDI-P communication error
FG3-3846 DC Controller PCB Assembly

14.3.10.51 E747-8702 / E747-00FF Error Code: Scanning lamp keeps lighting up at its home position when making a copy
0005-3467

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Description >
E747 indicates that IC1010 (for image processing ASIC) or IC1012 (memory control/communication control ASIC, CPU) on the Main Controller PCB has
a fault (e.g., image data transfer error).
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was faulty (1 case). Remove and reinsert the Main Controller PCB (Sub). If the
symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Sub): FM2-0209

14.3.10.52 E747-0031 Error Code: Half of image becomes blank when printing list in user mode
0005-5922

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
E747 can be displayed when an error (e.g., image data transfer error) occurs in IC1015 (image processing ASIC) or IC1012 (memory control/communication
control ASIC, CPU) on the Main Controller PCB.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted on the Main Controller PCB and there is no pinched wire. If there is no abnormality, replace the PCB with a
new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-3221

14.3.10.53 E803-0002 Error Code: Front Door Switch (SW3) is faulty

0005-7409

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
E803-0002 can be displayed when it is detected that 13V is not supplied to the 13V line that is connected by the front door switch (SW3) upon closure of the
front door.
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that the front door switch (SW3) was faulty and 13V line was not connected, leading to this symptom. So, check whether
the front door switch works normally.
Front Door Switch (SW3): WC2-5327

14.3.10.54 E803-0001/E227-0004 Error Code: Poor soldering on Printer Power Supply PCB
0005-7412

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
E803-0001 can be displayed when it is detected that 24V is not supplied to the 24V line that is connected by the front door switch (SW3) upon closure of the
front door.
E227-0004 can be displayed when it is detected that 24V is not supplied to the 24V line of the Reader unit when indicates that an error has occurred in supplying
power to the Reader unit, and can be displayed when it is detected that the 24V line opens or there is no output.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that 24V was not output due to poor soldering on the Printer Power Supply PCB, leading to this symptom.
Field Remedy
Follow the steps in the designated order.
1. Check whether the front door switch (SW3) works normally.
2. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between the Printer Power Supply PCB, the Controller Power Supply PCB, and the DC Controller PCB, and
also that there is no pinched cable.
3. If no problem is found, replace the Printer Power Supply PCB with a new one.
Printer Power Supply PCB: FM2-0190 (220/240V), FM2-0216 (100/120V)

14.3.11 FAX # Code

14.3.11.1 #751 Fax Error Code: Occurs occasionally when sending to PC
0008-0952

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
This error code occurred in an environment where two computers and iRC3100 are connected into the broadband router incorporating switching hub.
#751 indicates a condition where the server does not start up or the network is disconnected.
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom was corrected by changing the IP address obtaining method from "automatic" to "fix" in the connected computers. To be more specific,
place a check mark on "Use the following IP address" instead of "Obtain an IP address automatically" and enter the IP address.

14.3.12 FAX ## Code

14.3.12.1 ##100 FAX Error Code: Occurs frequently when sending to a specific party
0008-2798

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description

14-55

Chapter 14
In the field, this symptom was solved after the machine at the receiving side was connected to a different telephone line. When this symptom occurs, follow the
steps below.
Field Remedy
1. Slow down the sending start speed to 9600bps.
2. If the symptom recurs, check the line quality where this machine is connected.
3. If no problem is found in step 2, ask the receiving party to check their line quality or to connect to a different telephone line.
##100 indicates that the number of times the procedural signal has been transmitted exceeds its specification during transmission because the line quality is poor.

14.3.13 Specifications-Related FAQ

14.3.13.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications
14.3.13.1.1 Differences between [Energy Save Mode], [Sleep Mode] and [Low Power Mode]
0005-1298

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
The following describes the specifications:
a. Energy Save Mode
Energy Save Mode is activated/deactivated by a press on the Power Save key. It lowers the fixing temperature and thus reduce the power consumption. The
rate of saving is selectable in user mode [Common Settings> Energy Save Mode (-10%, -25%, -50% and no return time].
b. Low Power Mode
Low Power Mode will shut off only the +24V power supply and will automatically be shifted from standby after the predetermined time has lapsed. The
period of time until Lower Power Mode starts can be specified in user mode [Timer Settings> Low-power Mode (10 min. to 4 hours)].
The fixing temperature is controlled at 140 degrees C and a specific period of recovery time will be required.
c. Sleep Mode
Sleep Mode will lower the power consumption below the two modes above. It is activated when the control panel power switch is turned OFF or after the
predetermined time has lapsed. The period of time until Sleep Mode starts can be specified in user mode [Timer Settings> Auto Sleep Time (10 min. to 4
hours)]. The fuser is turned OFF and a specific period of recovery time will be required. This mode can be turned OFF in service mode [COPIER> Option>
USER> SLEEP> 0 (1: ON by default)].
Note:
Since Low Power Mode cannot be turned OFF in accordance with Energy Start Program although Sleep Mode can be, the host machine will shift from standby
to Low Power Mode after 4 hours at the longest. If Sleep Mode is activated and the period of time until Low Power Mode starts is shorter than that of Sleep
Mode, the host machine will shift from standby to Low Power Mode and then to Sleep Mode. However, in the contrary case, the host machine will shift to
Sleep Mode without shifting to Low Power Mode.
14.3.13.1.2 Network settings (IP Address, Subnet mask) when using Service Support Tool (SST)
0005-1302

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
If you start up the host machine in normal mode (turning the power ON while pressing 1+7 simultaneously) or in safe more (turning the power ON while
pressing 2+8 simultaneously), the IP address of the host machine is fixed at the one for servicing and thus no additional settings are required.
Configure the computer for SST as below and connect it to the host machine.
IP address: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
14.3.13.1.3 How to make [Mail Box] tab not display on LCD
0005-1304

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
You can select in service mode whether or not the mail box functions are displayed on the LCD. In order not to display the [Mail Box] tab, change the setting
in service mode (LEVEL 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> UI-BOX> 0].
14.3.13.1.4 How to clear System Administrator Password
0005-1306

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> PWD-CLR> OK] and turn the power OFF/ON.
14.3.13.1.5 Card Reader-C1: How to restrict copy impression limit only for color copy when using Card Reader
0005-1308

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
In user mode [System Settings> Dept. ID Management> On > Register Dept. ID/Password> select a department whose impression limit you want to set>
Edit> Turn Limits On/Off and Set Page Limits> press On for Color Copy Print> enter the page limit restriction> OK].
For more detail, refer to the Reference Guide > System Manager Settings > Department ID Management.
14.3.13.1.6 Tandem copy and remote copy
0005-1315

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >

14-56

Chapter 14
Tandem copy and remote copy are not supported with this product.
14.3.13.1.7 How to set [Different Size Originals] as Standard Send Settings for FAX transmission
0005-1319

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
1. Select 'Different Size Originals' mode:
On 'Send' screen, press [Scan Settings> Option> Special Features> Different Size Originals> Done].
2. Register 'Different Size Originals' mode as 'Scanning Mode':
On 'Send' screen, press [Scan Settings> Store/Erase], select any item, press [Store> 'Do you wish to overwrite the previous setting?'> Yes] and register the
name as necessary, and finally press [Done].
3. Set the registered scanning mode as 'Standard Send Setting':
In user mode [Communications Settings> Common Settings> TX Settings> Edit Standard Send Settings], and press 'Scanning Mode' to select the scanning
mode where [Different Size Originals] has been registered.
14.3.13.1.8 Card Reader-C1: How to clear card counter
0005-1321

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
In user mode [System Settings> Dept. ID Management> On> Page Totals], select the department whose page total you want to erase, and press [Clear].
14.3.13.1.9 Function [Two-page Separation] is inoperative under [Special Features] when using ADF
0005-1324

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
This is a specification constraint of this product. [Special Features> Two-page Separation] is inoperative when a document is placed on the ADF.
14.3.13.1.10 Functions [Flaming] and [Blanking] are inoperative under [Special Features> Area Designation> Pen Entry] when using ADF
0005-1326

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
This is a specification constraint of this product. When a document is placed on the ADF, [Special Features> Area Designation> Pen Entry> Flaming or
Blanking] is inoperative. However, the following feature is available: [Special Features> Area Designation> Numeric Key Entry> Flaming or Blanking].
14.3.13.1.11 How to print documents that has failed to be forwarded (forwarding errors)
0005-1329

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
In user mode [Communications Settings> Common Settings> TX Settings> Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors> Always Print> OK].
14.3.13.1.12 Upgrading DCON/RCON
0005-1330

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
When upgrading DCON and RCON using the Service Support Tool, only the normal mode (simultaneous press of 1+7 and turning the power ON) is available.
The network settings on a computer for the SST should be:
IP address: 172.16.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
14.3.13.1.13 How to deactivate [Sleep Mode] [Low Power Mode]
0005-1349

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
[Sleep Mode] can be deactivated in service mode; however, [Low Power Mode] cannot be in accordance with Energy Start Program.
Accordingly, the host machine will automatically be shifted from standby state to sleep state after 4 hours at the longest.
14.3.13.1.14 Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2: Necessary options when installing Finisher
0005-1399

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following option is necessary when installing the finisher:
Buffer Path Unit-C1
14.3.13.1.15 Recovery time from [Energy Save Mode]
0005-1404

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

14-57

Chapter 14
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
The following describes the recovery time for each rating of the energy save mode that is selectable in user mode [Common Settings> Energy Saver Mode]
-10%: approx. 50 sec.
-25%: approx. 80 sec.
-50%: approx. 110 sec.
None (no return time): approx. 3 sec.
* Conditions: 100V 50Hz
14.3.13.1.16 Unable to select [Stack Bypass Settings] button
0005-1470

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
If [Stack Bypass Standard Settings] is set at [On], the button [Stack Bypass Settings] does not work. In user mode [Common Settings> Stack Bypass Standard
Settings], select [Off].
14.3.13.1.17 Booklet copy function
0005-1511

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
The booklet copy function enables the original to be copied or printed into a booklet and can be set under [Special Features> Booklet]. To be more specific,
two pages of the original are copied or printed on a single sheet (four pages in duplex mode), and the pages are arranged in the proper order.
When the host machine is equipped with the Saddle Finisher-Q2, the saddle stitching, the pages are folded and stapled in two locations, is available.
14.3.13.1.18 Saddle stitching function (Necessary option and applicable paper size)
0005-1513

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
In order to make the saddle stitching function available, the Saddle Finisher-Q2 is required. The applicable paper sizes for saddle stitching are A3, B4, A4R,
11x17, LTRR.
14.3.13.1.19 How to shorten recovery time from Energy Save Mode (sleep state)
0005-1587

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
1. If the host machine is in [Energy Save Mode]; a mode activated by pressing the Power Save key, the recovery time can be shortened by the following
setting: In user mode [Common Settings> Energy Saver Mode> None (no recovery time)].
2. If the host machine is in [Low Power Mode] and [Sleep Mode]; modes automatically shifted from standby state, it is impossible to shorten the recovery
time.
14.3.13.1.20 [Free Size] button does not appear when attempting to use stack bypass for paper source
0005-1593

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
This is a specification constraint of this product.
If the paper size to be used is standard, select the appropriate size on the screen of [Selecting the Paper Size]. If it is irregular, press [Irreg. Size] button and
enter the paper size.
14.3.13.1.21 Stack Bypass Standard Settings: How to register arbitrary paper size and paper type as standard mode for stack bypass
0005-1913

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
In user mode [Common Settings> Stack Bypass Standard Settings> On> Register], select any paper size and paper type.
Once the above setting is done, it is unnecessary to select the size and type for stack bypass. So, it is convenient if the customer always uses paper of the
same size and same type for stack bypass.B
14.3.13.1.22 Copy Tray-J1: Necessary setting upon installation
0005-3464

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
The following setting must be done when installing the Copy Tray-J1:
In service mode [COPIER> Option> ACC> OUT-TRAY (whether or not the third delivery tray is installed], change the set value from [0] to [1]. Then, turn the
power OFF/ON.
[0]: absent (at time of shipment/after RAM initialization)
[1]: present
14.3.13.1.23 Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2: Can paper be delivered to the 3d tray (Copy Tray-J1) on machine equipped with Finisher-Q1
or Saddle Finisher-Q2?
0005-3474

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]

14-58

Chapter 14
Field Remedy
Because of specification constraints, paper cannot be delivered to Copy Tray-J1 when the machine is equipped with Finisher-Q1 or Saddle Finisher-Q2.
14.3.13.1.24 Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher-Q2: Can paper be delivered to the inner tray on machine equipped with Finisher-Q1 or Saddle
Finisher-Q2?
0005-3476

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Because of specification constraints, paper cannot be delivered to the inner tray (on Buffer Path Unit-C1) when the machine is equipped with Finisher-Q1 or Saddle
Finisher-Q2.
14.3.13.1.25 Necessary steps after replacement of Reader Controller PCB (initializing RCON): without using SST
0005-3478

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB (initializing RCON), be sure to generate the latest P-PRINT printout.
a. Adjustments for host machine
1. Initialize the RCON in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> R-CON]. Then, shut down the control panel switch and turn the power OFF/ON.
2. Enter the values indicated in the P-PRINT printout you have previously generated for the following:
- Standard white plate white level data [COPIER> Adjust> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z]
- Offset value against color displacement caused by copyboard glass [COPIER> Adjust> CCD> BOOK-RG]
- Offset value against color displacement caused by stream reading glass [COPIER> Adjust>CCD >DF-RG]
- CIS read position adjustment (fixed reading) [COPIER> Adjust> ADJ-XY> ADJ-X]
- Main scanning direction position adjustment (fixed reading) [COPIER> Adjust> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y]
- Shading position adjustment (fixed reading) [COPIER> Adjust> ADJ-XY> ADJ-S]
- Sub scanning direction color displacement correction [COPIER> Adjust> CCD> CCDU-RG]
- Auto gradation correction target value [COPIER> Adjust> PASCAL> OFST-P-Y/M/C/K]
3. Check the P-PRINT to see whether or not the value [COPIER> Option> BODY> CCDLUT] is set at [0]. If a value other than [0] was set, enter that value
once again and make the adjustment in service mode [COPIER> Function> CCD> LUT-ADJ2] by using D-10 chart.
b. Adjustments for ADF
1. Enter the values indicated in the P-PRINT printout you have previously generated for the following:
- Main scanning direction position adjustment (stream reading) [COPIER> Adjust> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y-DF]
- Original stop position adjustment [FEEDER> Adjust> DOCST]
- Original feed speed (magnification) adjustment [FEEDER> Adjust> LA-SPEED]
2. Make adjustments using the following items:
- Tray width adjustment [FEEDER> Function> TRY-A4, TRY-A5R, TRY-LTR, TRY-LTRR]
- CIS read position adjustment (stream reading) [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> STRD-POS]
- White level adjustment [COPIER> Function> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2]
14.3.13.1.26 Horizontal registration failure: How to adjust horizontal registration for main cassettes and Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1
0005-4354

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Slide out the cassettes and detach the cover (lower front). Loosen the fixing screw on the adjusting plate with a screw driver and move it back and forth to adjust
the margin.
14.3.13.1.27 Want to change intervals of image stabilization control / Want to decrease number of auto gradation correction
0005-4362

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Because of specification constraints, the settings of the image stabilization control timing cannot be changed. For the descriptions of the control timing, refer to
the Service Manual [Chapter 7 Image Formation > Image Stabilization Control].
When the following settings are effective, the intervals of this control will become longest.
- In user mode [Common Settings> Energy Saver Mode> None (no recovery time)]
- In user mode [Timer Settings> Auto Sleep Time > 4 hours]
- In user mode [Timer Settings> Low-power Mode> 4 hours]
The control timing may vary depending on several factors such as output volume or fixing temperature.
14.3.13.1.28 How to set copy standard mode at 'Black'
0005-4363

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Set the copy standard mode at 'Black'. Follow the steps below:
1. On the screen of [Copy], select [Black] from the list of color.
2. In user mode [Copy Settings> Standard Settings], press [Store].
14.3.13.1.29 Applicable paper sizes
0005-4377

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following lists paper sizes that can be loaded in each paper input:
Cassette: A3, LDR, B4, LGL, A4, LTR, A4R, LTRR, B5, A5R, B5R, STMTR, EXE, 12x18, SRA3, Com10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5ISO-B5, YOKEI No. 4
Manual Feed Tray: A3, LDR, B4, LGL, A4, LTR, A4R, LTRR, B5, A5R, B5R, STMTR, EXE, 12x18, A5, STMT, SRA3, Postcard A6R Modified, Double
Postcard A5/A5R Modified, A4/A4R Modified, Com10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5ISO-B5, YOKEI No. 4
Side Paper Deck-Q1: A4, LTR
For more details, refer to the Service Manual [Chapter 1 Introduction > Product Specification > Types of Paper].

14-59

Chapter 14
14.3.13.1.30 Applicable paper types
0005-4380

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following lists paper types that can be loaded in each paper input:
Cassette: Plain Paper (64-105g), Recycled Paper (64-105g), Heavy Paper (106-163g), OHT, 3-Hole Paper, Tracing Paper, Envelope
Manual Feed Tray: Plain Paper (64-105g), Recycled Paper (64-105g), Heavy Paper (106-163g), OHT, Postcard, 4-Plane Postcard, Label Paper, 3-Hole Paper,
Tracing Paper, Envelope
Side Paper Deck-Q1: Plain Paper (64-105g), Recycled Paper (64-105g), 3-Hole Paper
For more details, refer to the Service Manual [Chapter 1 Introduction > Product Specification > Types of Paper].
14.3.13.1.31 How to fix Ethernet setting at 10BASE-T
0005-4382

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Ethernet Driver Settings> Auto Detect], select [Off]. Then, select [10BASE-T] for [Ethernet Type].
14.3.13.1.32 LCD on control panel does not come on (start up) for about 10 seconds when host machine recovers from sleep state
0005-5383

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This is a specification constraint of this product. The LCD on the control panel does not come on for about 10 seconds until the HDD starts up following a press
of the control panel switch.
14.3.13.1.33 Description about [User Inboxes] functions
0005-5393

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
You can store scanned documents or data sent from a computer into any User Inbox by selecting it from 100. There are three different document types; [Scan
Doc.], [Print Doc.], and [System Doc.], depending on how you store it.
Images of documents in User Inboxes can be viewed, sent to a desired destination, printed and printed by merging multiple documents on the LCD of iRC3100
as well as through Remote UI.
Note: Documents that can be sent to a desired destination and can be viewed through Remote UI are the ones stored as [System Doc.]. As for [Scan. Doc.] and
[Print Doc.], they cannot be sent and only thumbnails are displayed through Remote UI.
14.3.13.1.34 Description about [Memory RX Inbox] functions
0005-5397

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Fax/I-Fax documents received in memory are stored in the Memory RX Inbox as [System Doc.]. Images of documents can be viewed only through Remote UI.
Documents can be sent to a desired destination and printed on the LCD of iRC3100 as well as through Remote UI, but cannot be printed by merging multiple
documents.
14.3.13.1.35 Description about [Confidential Fax Inboxes] functions
0005-5400

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
You can transfer Fax/I-Fax documents received in memory in the Memory RX Inbox to any Confidential Fax Inbox by selecting it from 50.
Documents will be stored as [System Doc.]. Images of documents can be viewed only through Remote UI. Documents can be printed on the LCD of iRC3100
as well as through Remote UI, but cannot be sent to a desired destination and printed by merging multiple documents.
14.3.13.1.36 [Scan Doc.] stored in User Inboxes
0005-5402

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Fleid Remedy
When a document is scanned in the screen of [Mail Box], it will be stored as [Scan Doc.]. The image quality equals to the one when copied. Images of
documents can be viewed on the LCD of iRC3200; however, only thumbnails are displayed through Remote UI. It cannot be sent to a desired destination.
14.3.13.1.37 [System Doc.] stored in User Inboxes
0005-5404

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
A document that is scanned in the screen of [Send] be stored as [System Doc.]. The image will be saved at the resolution configured upon scanning. equals to
the one when it is copied. Images of documents can be viewed on the LCD of iRC3200 as well as through Remote UI. Documents can be sent to a desired
destination.B
14.3.13.1.38 [Print Doc.] stored in User Inboxes
0005-5406

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

14-60

Chapter 14

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remdy
A document that is sent through printer drivers will be stored as [Print Doc.]. Images of documents can be viewed on the LCD of iRC3200; however, only
thumbnails are displayed through Remote UI. It cannot be sent to a desired destination.
14.3.13.1.39 When choosing A4R or LTRR for paper size of stack bypass, OHP film cannot be specified
0005-5980

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
Because of a specification constraint, OHP films cannot be fed in A4R or LTRR direction from the stack bypass.
14.3.13.1.40 Is [Offset] feature available with iRC3100?
0005-5991

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The [Offset] feature is not available with iRC3100. If any of Finisher products is installed, it will become available.
14.3.13.1.41 Is Newspaper mode available? / Background is fogged when making a copy of newspaper
0005-5993

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Newspaper mode is not available. Before making a copy of newspaper, adjust the background color as follows:
a. Adjustment of background color
Press [Special Features> Image Quality Adjustment> Remove Background> Fine Adjustment] to adjust the background color. Adjusting it in a minus direction
lightens the color.
For your information, it will be easier to copy newspaper from now on if you save the adjustment results above in mode memory and display it on the copy screen.
b. How to save it in mode memory
1. While the adjustment of background color is being effective, press Special Features> Mode Memory, select either of M1 through M9, and press Store to save
the current state.
2. Press Register Name to register the name of the selected mode. Our recommendation is 'Newspaper'.
3. In user mode [Copy Settings> Standard Key 1 (or 2) Settings], select [Mode Memory] from Group and the applicable mode memory (e.g., Newspaper). As
a result, 'Newspaper' button will appear in the bottom of the copy screen.
14.3.13.1.42 How to disable to display job histories (logs) stored by iRC3100
0005-5994

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
After iR Security Kit-A1 is installed as an option, a new function will be added to enable/disable to display the job histories.
Upon its installation, follow the steps below:
In service mode [COPIER> Option> USER> LGSW-DSP], change from [0] to [1].
[0]: disable display in user mode (default)
[1]: enable display in user mode
Consequently, a new item [Job Log Display] will appear in user mode [System Settings]. In order to disable to display the job histories, set it to 'Off'.
14.3.13.1.43 Necessary actions after replacement of drum unit
0005-7447

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Perform the operations [a] and [b].
a. Initialization of Drum Unit
1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> DRM-LIFE], press OK. Initialization will take approximately 1 minute.
2. In service mode [COPIER> Display> MISC> DRM-LIFE], make sure that the value shows [0]. If it does not, repeat the step 1 once again.
3. Write the value of the following service mode in the drum initial value label (Remarks field) and attach the label to the front of the drum unit.
COPIER> Adjust> HV-PRI> DR-I-INT (Drum film thickness current initial value)
b. Auto Gradation Adjustment
In user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Auto Gradation Adjustment> Full Adjustment].
14.3.13.1.44 How to output Fax-received document from any specified paper drawers
0005-9660

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Common Settings> Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS> Receive/Fax], select 'Off' for paper drawers except for the ones from which you want to
output Fax-received documents.
14.3.13.1.45 Differences between [Full Adjustment] and [Quick Adjustment] of Auto Gradation Adjustment
0005-9663

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
There are two kinds of adjustments in the auto gradation adjustment mode.
- Quick Adjustment
This is a quick and simple recalibration that is made to the gradation, density, and color settings of the machine. Recalibration is made inside the machine by

14-61

Chapter 14
spreading a gradation pattern on the ITB and measuring it, so no test print is output.
- Full Adjustment
This is a precise recalibration that is made to the gradation, density, and color settings of the machine. The procedure involves making test prints and placing
them on the copy board glass for scanning.
Note: It is recommended that you select [Full Adjustment] when performing an automatic gradation adjustment. Select [Quick Adjustment] for quick but less
complete adjustments between regular full adjustment recalibrations.
14.3.13.1.46 How to temporarily take out toner cartridge in use
0005-9666

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In order to temporarily take out the toner cartridges in use for the purpose of cleaning or parts replacement, select the following service mode so that the
developing rotary will rotate and stop at the point where the desired toner cartridge can be removed. So, select the desired color and press the OK key.
Service mode [COPIER> Function> MISC-P> DEV-DR-Y/M/C/K]
Note: Be sure NOT to use the above service mode when a new toner cartridge is installed. If you install a new one by using this service mode, [Remaining
Toner] indication in [Consumables] window will not be reset. Consequently, a message prompting to replace the toner cartridge will appear although toner still
remains. When the toner cartridge is replaced with a new one, follow the instructions that will be indicated after the replacement message has appeared.
14.3.13.1.47 What is [Auto Offline] feature?
0005-9669

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
If [Auto Offline] is set to 'On' in user mode, iRC3100 automatically goes offline after the network scan function is used.
How to Set:
In user mode [System Settings> Auto Online/Offline> Auto Offline], set it to 'On'.
The machine will go offline after the period of time specified in user mode [Timer Settings> Auto Clear Time] has lapsed. Note that if [Auto Clear Time] is set
to '0' (none), the machine will go offline approximately 2 minutes later.
14.3.13.1.48 How to print list of destinations registered in address books and one-touch buttons
0005-9671

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
1. In user mode, press [Report Settings].
2. Press [Print List> Send> Address Book List].
3. Select an address book from Address Book 1 through 10 or One-touch Buttons. Then, press [Print List].
4. A message 'Do you wish to print list?' will appear. Then, press [Yes] so that the list will be printed out.
14.3.13.1.49 Function limitation when security key is not inserted
0005-9672

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
At the time of shipment from the factory, printing/RX printing are possible even without inserting the security key. A change in user mode setting can disable
all the functions.
In user mode [System Settings> Limit Functions with the Security Key Off], select [Partial Functions] (default) or [All Functions].
- Partial Functions: Printing/RX printing are possible; however, copying, Mailbox, report outputting (manual), TX, Remote UI, Remote scan are impossible.
- All Functions: All the functions are impossible.
14.3.13.1.50 What is [Auto Online] feature?
0005-9676

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
In order to use the network scan function, iRC3100 needs to be switched to online. If [Auto Online] is set to 'On', the machine automatically goes online when
you press [Scan] on the Basic Features screen.
How to set:
In user mode [System Settings> Auto Online/Offline> Auto Online], set it to 'On'.
14.3.13.1.51 How to resend document, which has failed to send, to new destination
0005-9677

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
1. Set [Erase Failed TX] to 'OFF'. The default setting is 'ON'. In user mode [Communications Settings> Common Settings> TX Settings> Erase Failed TX>
OFF].
2. Press [System Monitor> Send> Status], select the document whose destination you want to change and press [Details].
3. Change the destination and press the OK key.
4. Select the document whose destination you have changed, and press [Details].
5. Press [Resend].
14.3.13.1.52 Differences between Normal Mode and Safe Mode in Download Mode for iRC3100
0006-0083

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
There are two different modes in the download mode of iRC3100. Note that servicing fixed IP address (17.16.1.100) will be automatically set up when the host
machine is connected with the SST.

14-62

Chapter 14
a. Normal Mode
1. Normal mode becomes effective when the following operations are performed:
Turn the power ON while pressing the numerical keys "1"+"7".
When the machine becomes ready ("FIXIP" at the upper right of the LCD), enter the service mode and select [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> DOWNLOAD>
OK].
2. Downloading DCON and RCON is possible only in this mode.
3. Uploading the service mode data stored in DCON and RCON is possible only in this mode.
- SramDCON.bin: DC Controller PCB data
- SramRCON.bin: Reader Controller PCB data
Note: Be sure not to download/upload [SramImg.bin] as it is for R&D.
b. Safe Mode
1. Safe mode becomes effective by turning the power ON while pressing the numerical keys "2"+"8". It is used when the host machine cannot be started normally
or after replacing the HD with the service part.
2. Initializing the HDD is possible only in this mode.
3. Uploading the service mode data stored in DCON and RCON is NOT possible in this mode. Be sure not to download/upload [SramImg.bin] as it is for R&D.
14.3.13.1.53 Auto Orientation is not functioned when Different Size Original mode is set
0006-1055

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
Because of a specification constraint, the Auto Orientation is not performed when the Different Size Original mode is set.
The above is described in Copy Guide [Special Copying Features - Scan Settings and Notifications > Different Size Originals].
14.3.13.1.54 Explanations about "trimming" and "masking" functions
0006-1060

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
The trimming and masking functions are available with the iRC3100 series. However, these function terms have been changed from trimming to "Framing" and
masking to "Blanking".
In place of the editor function, you can designate up to four areas using the edit pen on the preview screen, or using the numeric keys on the inch entry pop-up
screen.
Press [Special Features> Area Designation], and select [Pen Entry] or [Numeric Key Entry].
For more details, refer to Copying Guide [Special Copying Features - Image Editing> Area Designation].
14.3.13.1.55 DADF-L1: Can originals with different widths and lengths be fed at once? Different size originals function
0006-1062

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
DADF-L1 can feed different size originals not only with same widths but with different widths. The different size originals in the following combinations are
applicable: A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, A4 ad B5, B5 and A5
Be sure to align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder if you are placing originals with different widths.
14.3.13.1.56 How to print documents in monochrome that have been scanned in full color and stored into User Inbox
0006-1072

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
1. Select the document to print from the desired User Inbox, and press [Print] key.
2. Press [Color Selection Drop-Down List] and select [Black].
3. Press [Start Print] key.
14.3.13.1.57 When selecting [PDF (Compact)] as File Format, color mode is automatically changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/
Grayscale)] in scan settings
0006-1077

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Because of a specification constraint, [PDF (Compact)] cannot be selected if you select a combination of "Color Mode" and "Resolution" other than the following
three.
- Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale) 300x300dpi
- Full Color 300x300dpi
- Grayscale 300x300dpi
If you want to select [PDF (Compact)] as a file format, select either of the combinations above.
14.3.13.1.58 How to disable display of message "Prepare a new fixing unit."
0006-1081

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> FXMSG-SW], set it to "0" (default: 1).
0: not display
1: display
14.3.13.1.59 Stamping Original feature is invalid when Different Size Original mode is set
0006-1087

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]

14-63

Chapter 14
Description
This is a specification constraint of this product. The Stamping Original mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size), Two-page Separation,
or Different Size Originals mode.
14.3.13.1.60 Heaters (Reader Heater, Cassette Heater, Paper Deck Heater, Cassette Pedestal Heater) is not energized
0006-1380

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
On a machine equipped with one or some of the heaters above and the Heater PCB-B1, the heaters are energized only when the switch of the heater is turned
ON and either of the following "a" or "b" is satisfied.
a. The power switch of iRC3100 is turned OFF.
b. iRC3100 is in Sleep Mode 2, in which only all-night power is supplied to the Main Controller PCB and FAX PCB.
However, iRC3100 does not go into Sleep Mode 2 under the following conditions:
1. Either of the following optional products is installed.
- ISDN board
- TokenRing board
- USB board
- PS-E1
2. Either of the following settings is effective.
Power Consumption:
- Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to "High".
FAX:
- Memory Lock Start Time and Memory Lock End Time are specified.
- Daily Activity Report Time under Fax Activity Report setting is set to "On".
I-FAX:
- The POP interval for E-Mail/I-Fax is set at longer than 1 minute.
Network:
- DHCP is set to "On".
- AppleTalk is set to "On".
- NetWare is set to "On".
- SMB printing is set to "On".
Report:
- Daily Activity Report Time is set to "On".
3. There is a send job that is stored in memory and will be sent at a later time (Delayed Send mode).
In summary, in order to energize the heaters during the sleep mode on a machine without the optional products listed in "1", it is necessary to clear all the settings
listed in "2".
14.3.13.1.61 Copy numbers per minute (CPM) during continuous printing in black
0006-2567

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
Basically, the specification of iRC3100 states that the number of copies per minute is 31 CPM under the following condition: continuous printing in black, A4-sized
paper, image duty 5%. However, depending on the image duty, a message "Adjusting gradation. Please wait a moment." is displayed on the per minute becomes
fewer.
The reason of this symptom is that iRC3100 has two modes "Patch Image Creation Control" and "ACR Control" in order to stabilize the density of developer inside
the Bk developing unit during printing. Depending on the image duty of originals to be copied/printed, the number of these controls will be changed and finally
the number of copies per minute becomes fewer.
The following shows the measurement results of copy numbers by image duty:
- up to 35%: 31CPM
- up to 70%: 22CPM
- up to 100%: 16.8CPM
For your information, in the case of full-color printing, the "Patch Image Creation Control" is executed between colors (while the developing rotary rotates and
stops at each color's developing point), and furthermore the colors' developing units do not have the mechanism for the "ACR Control" to collect the waste carrier
unlike the Bk developing unit. Consequently, the copy numbers (7CPM for A4) will not be affected depending on the image duty for full-color printing.
14.3.13.1.62 DRM-LIFE is not reset to "0" even after executing drum life clear / Initialization of drum unit: Upon replacement of drum unit
0007-9806

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
After replacing the drum unit with a new one, the following service mode was executed: [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> DRM-LIFE (initialization of the drum
unit)] and "OK" was indicated; however, the set value in service mode [COPIER> Display> MISC> DRM-LIFE] was not reset to "0". As a result of inspection,
this symptom occurred because the service mode was executed before the host machine became ready. Be sure to execute the service mode after making sure
that the host machine becomes ready.
14.3.13.1.63 How to replace toner cartridge by specifying color: When message "Remaining toner is low." is displayed
0007-9809

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
If you want to replace the toner cartridge by specifying the color, follow the steps below.
Field Remedy
1. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> T-CRG-SW], set it to "1" and turn the power OFF/ON.
2. A button "Specified Toner Replacement" appears under user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning]. Press it and select the color you want to change before
replacement.
Note: Please do not change the service mode setting above unless a request from your customer is made (e.g. wants to replace the toner cartridge in advance in
order to make a huge number of copy although the toner still remains.). In principle, avoid any replacement by specifying the color as much as possible because
the remaining toner is wasted and a toner leakage might occur when the cartridge is removed.

14-64

Chapter 14
14.3.13.1.64 How to clear message "Remaining toner is low." / Message "Remaining toner is low." does not disappear even after
replacement of toner cartridge
0007-9811

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
Since the above message prompts for customers to prepare a new toner cartridge, it is not necessary to replace the cartridge at that time. There are some cases
in the field that the toner cartridge is replaced by rotating the developing rotary; however, instruct your customer not to do that when the above message is
displayed. The message will not be cleared even if a new cartridge is installed.
When replacing the cartridge, follow the instructions appearing on the LCD when the message "Replace toner cartridge." is displayed. The host machine
recognizes a new cartridge and then clears the message.
If the toner cartridge has been replaced and your customer wants to clear the message, follow the steps below.
1. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> T-CRG-SW], set it to "1" and turn the power OFF/ON.
2. A button "Specified Toner Replacement" appears under user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning]. Press it, select the color which has been changed and open/close
the toner supply port cover.
3. Reset the service mode setting in step 1 to "0".
14.3.13.1.65 Feed/Separation Rollers: Different appearance between original and service part, between host machine and cassette
pedestal
0007-9813

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Description
In the factory, two different kinds of the feed/separation roller with different appearance are used for both the host machine and the cassette pedestal for
manufacturing reasons. These rollers are of equal performance. The following are differences between the rollers.
1. There is no groove on the roller surface, and the core is black. It is assigned as a service part (Part No. FC5-6934).
2. There is a groove on the roller surface, and the core is gray. It is not assigned as a service part.
14.3.13.1.66 Necessary steps for counters after replacing fixing ass'y or fixing roller
0007-9814

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
When replacing the fixing ass'y or the fixing roller, follow the steps below to reset the counter.
1. When replacing it with a new one:
In service mode [COPIER> Counter> MISC> FX-UP-RL], press the counter (left) and press the clear key.
2. When replacing it with a one which has already been used as a temporary solution:
In service mode [COPIER> Counter> MISC> FX-UP-RL], press the counter (left) and enter the counter of the installed fixing ass'y (or fixing roller).
14.3.13.1.67 Necessary steps after replacement of color developing ass'ys
0007-9816

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
When replacing either of the color developing ass'ys, follow the steps below:
1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> STIR-Y/M/C], press the OK key.
2. In service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> INIT-Y/M/C], press the OK key.
Note: When replacing all the colors' simultaneously, select [INIT-3].
3. In service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> SPLY-H-Y/M/C], press the OK key.
4. Record the readings in the following service modes on the service label.
- COPIER> Adjust> DENS> SGNL-Y/M/C
- COPIER> Adjust> DENS> REF-y/M/C
5. In user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Auto Gradation Adjustment], perform [Full Adjustment].
14.3.13.1.68 How to check estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts
0008-0482

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
In service mode [COPIER> Counter> MISC] and [COPIER> Counter> DRBL-1/DRBL-2], the rightmost reading for each consumable parts indicates how many
days are left before the next replacement.
14.3.13.1.69 Want to erase all documents stored in Conf. Fax Inbox at once
0008-0950

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
Documents stored in the Conf. Fax Inbox can be erased on a one-by-one basis only. In order to erase the documents in Conf. Fax Inbox or Memory RX Inbox,
select the desired document and press [Erase].
Note: All the documents stored in User Inbox can be erased at once by pressing [Select All].
14.3.13.1.70 Equation to calculate estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts
0008-0951

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts are calculated from the following equation: (L x D / C) - D
D: Days between installation of the host machine (or part replacement) and to date, C: Counter, L: Limit (life of the parts)
Note that the remaining days are just reference because they are predicated on that the host machine will be continuously used at the same pace as before.

14-65

Chapter 14
14.3.13.1.71 Card Reader-C1: Card cannot be recognized (Card No. 2500)
0008-1566

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
According to the specification of the card reader, any number from "1" through "2001" can be entered as the smallest number of the card. Since 1000 cards
starting with the entered number are acceptable, in order to make the card reader recognize the card "2500", enter any number from "1501" through "2001" as
the smallest number.
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> CARD], enter any number from "1501" through "2001".
14.3.13.1.72 Is short connector available for temporarily disconnecting Card Reader-C1?
0008-2868

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This machine does not have a short connector available for Card Reader-C1. At power-on after disconnecting the card reader, E719-0011 will be displayed.
In order to perform service work with the card reader disconnected, follow the steps below to clear the error code.
1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> ERR], press OK, turn the control panel switch OFF and turn the main power OFF/ON. A window for the
department ID and the password will appear.
2. In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> PWD-CLR], press OK, turn the control panel switch OFF and turn the main power OFF/ON.
14.3.13.1.73 Card Reader-C1: Magnetic type cards cannot be recognized although optical type cards can be used normally
0008-2870

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
It is possible that the number of the magnetic type card is out of the applicable range which has been registered in the host machine. In order to use the both
types, follow the steps below:
Field Remedy
1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> CARD], enter the smallest number of the cards among the both.
2. Turn the control panel switch OFF and turn the main power OFF/ON. 1000 consecutive cards from the entered number can be used.
Note: If a card you want to use is out of the applicable range, it cannot be used regardless of its type.
14.3.13.1.74 Want to know estimated life of ITB Cleaning Blade, Guide for replacement
0008-2871

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The ITB cleaning blade is designated to be replaced at one hundred thousand images.
- One sheet of mono-color image corresponds to 1 image.
- One sheet of full-color image corresponds to 4 images.
Accordingly, use the following numbers as a guide for replacement of the ITB cleaning blade:
- 100,000 sheets when the machine is used exclusively for mono-color printing.
- 25,000 sheets when the machine is used exclusively for full-color printing.
The page counter can be checked in service mode [COPIER> Counter> DRBL-1> T-CL-BD].
FC5-0368 Transfer Cleaner Blade
14.3.13.1.75 Card Reader-C1: Is it possible to use optical type cards which were used for other card reader?
0008-6210

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The optical type cards are common between models, so they can be used for Card Readder-C1.
14.3.13.1.76 Types of staple mode of Saddle Finisher-Q2
0008-6211

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
1-point stapling, 2-point stapling, and center binding are available for Saddle Finisher-Q2.
Note: Center binding is not available for Finisher-Q1.
14.3.13.1.77 Necessary steps after replacement of Black developing ass'y
0008-8126

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Follow the steps below:
1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> STIR-K], press the OK key.
2. In service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> SPLY-H-K], press the OK key.
3. In service mode [COPIER> Counter> MISC> DV-UNT-K], clear the reading.
4. In user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Auto Gradation Adjustment], perform [Full Adjustment].
14.3.13.1.78 How to activate AppleTalk settings
0008-8141

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]

14-66

Chapter 14
Field Remedy
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> AppleTalk Settings], press "On" for AppleTalk.
14.3.13.1.79 Message "Load paper" is displayed on LCD when printing: Because paper type selected in printer driver does not agree with
machine's setting
0009-1422

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This message is displayed when the paper type selected in the printer driver is not registered in the machine. In the field, it was displayed because the setting of
a cassette, which had been assigned for heavy paper, was changed to a different paper type and an operator selected heavy paper in the printer diver and sent a
print job without noticing such a fact.
When sending a job from a PC to the machine, perform "Get Device Status" to check the current settings of the machine. If any change has been made to the
machine's setting, register the paper type if necessary. Please explain this to your customer.
Note: When the symptom occurs, the procedure below allows you to print the job instead of sending it again. Please also explain this to your customer.
[System Monitor > check the indicated paper type > "Recover Later" > Done > set the paper you want to use in a cassette > register it in user mode (Register
Paper Type under Common Settings) > OK].
14.3.13.1.80 How to temporarily print standard-size heavy paper in heavy paper mode
0009-1424

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Follow the procedure below.
Set the heavy paper you want to use in the stack bypass or a paper cassette. You can't set it in the side paper deck.
a. When using the stack bypass
1. In machine: press [Paper Select > Stack Bypass > select the paper size > Next > select the paper type (Heavy) > OK]
2. In PC: [Print > iRC3100 > Properties > Paper Source tab > check the radio button "Paper Source " in "Select by" > select Stack Bypass from "Paper Source"
> print]. The machine will start picking up the heavy paper from the stack bypass and print it in the heavy paper mode.
b. When using a paper cassette
1. In machine: [User mode > Common Settings > Register Paper Type > select the paper source (the cassette where the paper is set) > select the paper type
(Heavy) > OK].
2. In PC: [Print > iRC3100 > Properties > Paper Source tab > check the radio button "Paper Source" in "Select by" > select the paper source (the cassette where
the heavy paper is set.) from "Paper Source" > print]. The machine will start picking up the heavy paper from the cassette and print it in the heavy paper mode.
14.3.13.1.81 Reading of ENV-TR (Environmental zone) differs from that of other iRC machines
0009-1425

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
"ENV-TR" (Environmental zone) in Service Mode has the following three definitions and is subject to the moisture containt (g) in the machine installation
environment. The moisture content can be checked in service mode [COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > ABS-HUM]. The three definitions differ depending
on models. Therefore, even if this machine is installed in the same environment as others, the reading of ENV-TR may differ from each other. The following
are the definitions of moisture content of this machine.
1: low humidity environment (up to 5.8g)
2: normal humidity environment (5.9g to 15g)
3: high humidity environment (15.1g and higher)
14.3.13.1.82 Output image size is different between when using "Zoom by Percentage" function and "Preset Zoom" function although
same copy ratio is set
0009-1429

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
In the "Zoom by Percentage" function, originals can be reduced or enlarged in an integer magnification which is set on the LCD. In the "Preset Zoom" function,
on the other hand, all the preset buttons on the LCD show an integer: however, rescale of the original is done at the decimal level. This is the reason why the
size of the output image differs between those functions. This is true for other models.
14.3.13.1.83 Convenient setting for always printing on particular irregular-size paper: How to register Stack Bypass Standard Settings
and Custom Paper Size
0009-1430

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
When you want to feed a particular irregular-size paper from the stack bypass every time you print on it, follow the procedure below, and you will omit to enter
the size and type of the paper to both the machine and your PC.
1. In the machine: Register the paper in Custom Paper Size.
2. In the machine: Register the paper in Stack Bypass Standard Settings.
3. In the PC: Register the paper in Custom Paper Size in the printer driver.
4. In the PC: Select the paper for Output Size in the printer driver.
The detailed procedure is explained below by taking the envelope case for an example.
Field Remedy
1. In the machine: Register the paper in Custom Paper Size
[Paper Select > Stack Bypass > Irreg. Size > Register > select one of the keys that has not been registered > Register/Edit > enter the size of the envelope >
Register Name > enter the name (e.g., Envelope A) > OK > Done].
2. In the machine: Register the paper in Stack Bypass Standard Settings
In user mode, [Common Settings > Stack Bypass Standard Settings > ON > Register > Irreg. Size > select Envelope A registered in the step 1. > select the paper
type > OK > OK], and then load the envelope on the stack bypass.
3. In the PC: Register the paper in Custom Paper Size in the printer driver
[Start > Settings > Printer > iRC3100 > Properties > General > Printing Preferences > Custom Paper Size > enter the name of the envelope (in this case, Envelope
A) into Name of Custom Paper Size > enter the size of the envelope > Register > OK].
4. In the PC: Select the paper for Output Size in the printer driver
[Start > Settings >Printer > iRC3100 > Properties > General > Printing Preferences > Output Size > select Envelope A registered in step 3. > Apply > OK].

14-67

Chapter 14
5. Launch an application software.
From the next printing operation, you can print on the paper without entering its size and type to the machine and your PC.
Note: When you set the Stack Bypass Standard Settings to ON, it will be impossible for you to either feed any sizes of paper other than the registered nor activate
Stack Bypass Setting.
14.3.13.1.84 ENV-TR (Environmental zone indication) is not displayed in Service Mode
0009-1441

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
This model does not have ENV-TR (Environmental zone indication) in service mode [COPIER> Display> MISC] if the ROM of the DC Controller PCB is
earlier than Ver.40.01, although other iRC models do regardless of the ROM version.
Field Remedy
To add this mode to service mode, upgrade the ROM to Ver. 40.01 or later, and system software to Ver. 40.02 or later simultaneously.
Note: If you want to verify the environmental zone to which the machine belongs before upgrading, check the reading in service mode [COPIER> Display>
ANALOG> ABS-HUM (moisture content: in g)] against the following definitions:
1: low humidity environment (up to 5.8g)
2: normal humidity environment (5.9g to 15g)
3: high humidity environment (15.1g or higher)
14.3.13.1.85 Methods to make stamping original mode effective
0009-1442

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
There are two different methods to make the stamping original mode effective; "a" is to stamp originals whenever you want and "b" is to stamp originals at all
times. If the method "b" is selected, "a" becomes ineffective.
Note: Originals can be stamped only when they are scanned with the document feeder.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the optional stamp unit is attached to the document feeder. Then, select either of the methods "a" or "b".
a. To stamp originals whenever you want:
On the send screen, specify the destination> Send Settings> Stamp> press OK.
b. To stamp originals at all times:
In user mode [Communications Settings> TX Settings under Common Settings> Edit Standard Send Settings], press [Stamp] and OK. All send originals will
be stamped.
14.3.13.1.86 Image loss occurs when copying irregular size original (280 x 420 mm: double truck of magazine) by reducing ratio
0009-1443

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
When making a copy of an irregular size original (in the actual failure case, 280 x 420mm: double truck of a magazine) to A4 paper, an image loss sometimes
occurs.
Cause
Since the length of the original in the main scanning direction is between B4 and A3, it could be detected as B4 or A3 depending on the position where it is
placed on the copyboard glass. If it is detected as B4, it is reduced at a copy ration of 81%, resulting in an image loss.
Field Remedy
Follow either of the following steps.
a. Place the original fitting on the top left corner of the copyboard glass > select A4R for Paper Size > set Copy Ratio at 70%.
b. Place the original aligning with the bottom left limit of A3 size paper > select A4 or A4R for Paper Size > press Auto Zoom button or set Copy Ratio at 70%.
14.3.13.1.87 Specifications of software counter "922" (Counter name: B/W Send05 Scan Total)
0009-1484

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This software counter shows how many times a black and white original is scanned and sent to any of the following destinations: FTP / SMB / NCP / Send to Box.
14.3.13.1.88 How to make heavy paper available when printing: Registration of Heavy paper to Printer driver
0009-1498

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Follow the steps below:
1. In the machine, [User Mode > Common Settings > Register Paper Type > select the paper source (a cassette where you want to set heavy paper) > select heavy
paper as the paper type > OK].
2. In the PC, [Start > Settings > Printer > iRC3100 > Properties > Device Settings > Get Device Status > Apply > OK].
Since this step adds the heavy paper to [Paper Type] of the printer driver as one of selection items, the heavy paper is selectable in the PC.
14.3.13.1.89 Specifications of software counter "918" (Counter name: B/W Send03 Scan Total)
0009-1520

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This software counter shows how many times a black-and-white original is scanned and sent to any of the following destinations: E-mail / FTP / SMB / NCP /
Send to Box.
14.3.13.1.90 Specifications of software counter "929" (Counter name: Full Color Send06 Scan Total)
0009-1533

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

14-68

Chapter 14
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This software counter shows how many times a color original is scanned and sent to any of the following destinations: BoxScan / FTP / SMB / NCP / Send to Box.
14.3.13.1.91 Specifications of software counter "921" (Counter name: Full Color Send05 Scan Total)
0009-1540

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This software counter shows how many times a color original is scanned and sent to any of the following destinations: FTP / SMB / NCP / Send to Box.
14.3.13.1.92 Specifications of software counter "915" (Counter name: Full Color Send02 Scan Total)
0009-1541

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This software counter shows how many times a color original is scanned and sent to any of the following destinations: BoxScan / E-mail / FTP / SMB / NCP /
Send to Box
14.3.13.1.93 Specifications of software counter "916" (Counter name: B/W Send02 Scan Total)
0009-1542

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This software counter shows how many times a black-and-white original is scanned and sent to any of the following destinations: BoxSxan / E-mail / FTP / SMB
/ NCP / Send to Box.
14.3.13.1.94 Wants to know about control sequence for preventing partial deformation of fixing roller: Preventing against deformation of
fixing roller
0009-1543

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
In order to prevent a partial deformation of the fixing roller, this machine rotates the roller at half speed according to the following conditions:
1. At 5-minute intervals in standby mode and energy saver mode (-10%, and 25%).
2. At 10-minute intervals in energy saver mode (-50%) and low power mode.
14.3.13.1.95 Does this machine support Equitrac?
0009-1544

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The operation of Equitrac has not confirmed: however, the device can be connected to the J2121M connector on the harness extended from J1205 on the Main
Controller PCB. When the rear covers (right and left) are removed from the machine simultaneously, you will find the J2121M connector fixed securely with a
wire saddle at the upper left of the DC controller PCB.
14.3.13.1.96 Specifications of software counter "930" (Counter name: B/W Send06 Scan Total)
0009-1545

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This software counter shows how many times a black-and-white original is scanned and sent to any of the following destinations: BoxScan / FTP / SMB / NCP
/ Send to Box.
14.3.13.1.97 Six items under Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST (Level 2) > HV-TR
0009-1546

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
Of the 14 items under Service mode (Level2) [COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR], the following six items are used to add or change the conditions in which the
machine performs the secondary transfer ATVC control. If faulty images occur because the machine is used under peculiar installation (job) environment, you
can use those items so that the machine can perform the secondary transfer ATVC control that is suitable for the environment and can improve the image quality.
- 2TR-TGT (1 to 8): Set an offset value used in relation to the secondary transfer ATVC target current level.
- 2TR-SHR (1 to 8): Set an offset value used in relation to the secondary transfer ATVC paper separation voltage.
- TR-PPR (1 to 8): Set paper type
- TR-ENV (1 to 8): Set environment
- TR-CLR (1 to 8): Set color mode
- TR-DUP (1 to 8): Set simplex/duplex mode
As the items that have the same number work as a group, you can set up eight different patterns of conditions (1 to 8). The first two items are used to designate
the offset value of the ATVC control and the last four are to designate the operating mode which makes the two items effective.
This machine checks the present job conditions against those 8 patterns of conditions. If it finds out the compatible pattern, it performs the secondary transfer
ATVC control in accordance with the pattern.
Note: Please refer to Service manual [Service mode > COPIER > ADJUST (Level2) > HV-TR] for detailed definitions and settings for each item.
14.3.13.1.98 How to check environmental zoon
0009-1548

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

14-69

Chapter 14
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
If you want to verify the environmental zone to which the machine belongs before upgrading, check the reading in service mode [COPIER> Display>
ANALOG> ABS-HUM (moisture content: in g)] against the following definitions:
1: low humidity environment (up to 5.8g)
2: normal humidity environment (5.9g to 15g)
3: high humidity environment (15.1g or higher)
Description
This model does not have ENV-TR (Environmental zone indication) in service mode [COPIER> Display> MISC] if the ROM of the DC Controller PCB is
earlier than Ver.40.01, although other iRC models do regardless of the ROM version.
14.3.13.1.99 Specifications of software counter "917" (Counter name: Full Color Send03 Scan Total)
0009-1551

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This software counter shows how many times a color original is scanned and sent to any of the following destinations: E-mail / FTP / SMB / NCP / Send to Box.
14.3.13.1.100 Image size differs between original image and copied image: When scanning from copyboard glass
0009-1552

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In User mode [Adjustment/Cleaning > Zoom Fine Adjustment], make a fine adjustment to the copied image. In this mode, the adjustment can be made both in
the main and the sub scanning directions in 0.1% increments.
14.3.13.1.101 Condensation upon installation/faulty image/malfunction
0010-4551

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, a faulty image or a malfunction occurred because of condensation caused on the machine. It is assumed that this condensation occurred because
the machine was installed immediately after it was transferred from a cold place to a warm place.
Field Remedy
When the machine is transferred from a cold place to a warm place, leave it for more than 1 hour without unpacking to let it get to know the surrounding
temperature.
14.3.13.1.102 Auto paper selection mode is unavailable when portrait original (A5/STMT) is placed in landscape orientation (A5R/STMTR)
0010-7269

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Manual-related ]
Description
When a copy job is run by loading a stack of paper on the cassette in landscape orientation and placing a portrait original (A5/STMT) on the copyboard glass in
landscape orientation (A5R/STMTR), the machine displays the Paper Select screen on its LCD, instead of selecting an appropriate size of paper automatically.
Auto paper selection mode is available only when a portrait original (A5/STMT) is set on the document feeder in landscape orientation.
Field Remedy
To make a copy of an STMT/A5-size original from the copyboard glass using auto paper selection mode, set the original in portrait orientation (A5/STMT).
Note: Auto paper selection mode is also unavailable for the following types of originals; use the manual paper selection mode for them.
- Irregular size originals
- Originals with high degree of transparency such as OHP film
- Originals with extremely dark background
- Originals smaller than A6R-size or postcard
14.3.13.1.103 Destinations registered to One-touch buttons cannot be grouped as single destination in address registration screen under
user mode
0010-7959

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
When grouping the destinations registered to One-touch buttons, perform the following procedure: user mode > Address Book Settings > One-touch Buttons >
select any One-touch button that has not been used yet > Register/Edit > Group > enter a group name to "Name" > enter a button name to "One-touch Button
Name" > Specifying Destinations > select all destinations (One-touch buttons) to be grouped > OK > Done.
Note: When storing a group address, be sure to register all the destinations to be grouped to One-touch buttons beforehand.
- For more information, refer to [Sending and Facsimile Guide > Storing/Editing Address Book Settings > Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons]
Description
It is impossible to group destinations registered to one-touch buttons as a single destination in user mode [Address Book Settings > Register Address > Group].

14.3.13.1.104 HDD compatibility between iRC3100 and iRC3170

0011-1399

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

14-70

Chapter 14
[ Manual-related ]
Description
There is no HDD compatibility between the iRC3100 and the iRC3170. When replacing the HDD of those machines, take care to use the correct HDD by
referring to the following information:
WM2-5222 HDS728040PLAT20 (for iRC3100)
FK2-0733 HDS728080PLAT20 (for iRC3170s/iRC2570s)
14.3.13.1.105 When printing from Windows XP using UFR, message "Local Downlevel Document" appears and machine does not output:
Upon installation
0011-2546

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the message "Local Downlevel Document" was displayed and the machine did not output when printing from Windows XP using UFR. This was
because [Apply Settings] was set to ON and an IP address was entered in [RX/Print Range] under user mode. When the symptom has occurred, set [Apply
Settings] to OFF or set it to ON and enter the IP address of the PC of which data the machine failed to output.
Field Remedy
a. In case of setting [Apply Settings] to OFF
a-1. User mode > System Settings > Network Settings > TCP/IP Settings > IP Address Range Settings > RX/Print Range > Permit IP Address(es) > set [Apply
Settings] to OFF > OK
a-2. Make the same selections as mentioned in Step a-1 until [RX/Print Range] appears > Reject IP Address(es) > set [Apply Settings] to OFF > OK.
b. In case of setting [Apply Settings] to ON and enter the IP address(es)
b-1. Make the same selections as in Step a-1, and set [Apply Settings] to ON; then select [Register] to perform either of the following:
- In case of setting a single IP address, select [Single Address] and enter the IP address; then press [OK].
- In case of setting multiple IP addresses, select [Multiple Addresses] and specify both [First Address] and [Last Address]; then press [OK].
c. In addition to the above-mentioned procedures a and b, it is possible to register the refusal IP addresses.
c-1. In User mode [System Settings > Network Settings > TCP/IP Settings > IP Address Range Settings > RX/Print Range > Reject IP Address(es) > set
[Apply Settings] to ON > Register], and then perform either of the following:
- In case of setting a single IP address, select [Single Address] and enter the IP address; then press [OK].
- In case of setting multiple IP addresses, select [Multiple Addresses] and specify both [First Address] and [Last Address]; then press [OK].
- For details, please refer to [Network Guide > Using a TCP/IP Network > Protocol Settings > Settings from the Control Panel > Step. 17].

14.3.13.1.106 How to set maximum length of irregular size paper to 630mm: Long strip original mode
0011-6425

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Manual-related ]
Description
In the field, more than 457mm could not be set as the maximum length of irregular size paper. This was because the service mode item [MF-LG-ST] was set
to "0" (default). In order to set the maximum length to 630mm, perform the following field remedy.
Field Remedy
1. Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > Option > USER > set [MF-LG-ST] to "1" > press the Reset key to return the Copy screen > press the Special Features
key > make sure the Long Strip Original key appears.
2. Paper Select (on the Copy screen) > Stack Bypass Settings > Irreg. Size > Register > select an empty key > Register/Edit > enter the paper size (e.g., X=630,
Y=140) > OK > Register Name (if necessary) > OK > Done > select the key to which the size has been registered > OK > Next > select the paper type (e.g.,
Plain) > OK.
Reference: Acceptable settings
- In case [MF-LG-ST] is set to "0": X=140 to 457mm, Y=99 to 320mm
- In case [MF-LG-ST] is set to "1": X=140 to 630mm, Y=99 to 320mm

14.3.13.2 FAQ on Send Specifications

14.3.13.2.1 When document with handwritten letters is sent by Fax, letters look patchy on received document
0005-5652

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
When sending an original with light penciled-letters, select [Text] from the original type drop down list.
How to set
1. After specifying the destination on the Send screen, press [Scan Settings> Option].
2. Press the original type drop down list and select [Text]. Then, press OK.
If the texts are still light, go to the step 3. If you want to sharpen the texts, go to the Step 4.
3. Press [Scan Settings> Option]. Deepen the scanning exposure by pressing the scanning exposure adjustment button.
4. Press [Scan Settings> Option> Special Features> Sharpness > High].
14.3.13.2.2 Address cannot be erase
0005-1337

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
An address cannot be erased if it is registered in one-touch button or as a group. In such a case, cancel it from one-touch button or the group in advance.
14.3.13.2.3 Documents stored in Mail Box (Inbox) are lost
0005-1341

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
Documents stored in the mail box (Inbox) will automatically be erased three days later by default. In order to prevent the documents from being erased,
change the settings in user mode [Mail Box Settings> User Inboxes Settings> select an Inbox to be changed> Time Until Doc. Auto Erase], enter '0'.

14-71

Chapter 14
14.3.13.2.4 'TIFF/JPEG' is not indicated in pull-down menu of File Type
0005-1343

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
If you want to select 'TIFF/JPEG' as a file type, press 'Divide into Pages' button in advance.
14.3.13.2.5 How to send documents or images to designated folder in computer: Windows (SMB)
0005-1391

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
a. Preparation on computer:
Create a new folder as a shared folder on your computer where you want to send documents (or images).
b. Settings on iRC3100:
Register the designated folder in one of the address books on Send screen.
1. In user mode [Address Book Settings> Register Address> Register New Address> File].
2. Enter [Name] and select any address book from Address Book 1 through 10.
3. Select "Windows (SMB)" for [Protocol].
4. Configure [Host Name], [File Path], [User] and [Password]. You can specify [Host Name] and [File Path] by pressing [Browse] button. For more details,
refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide [Basic Sending Methods> Specifying Destinations> Using the New Address Tab> Specifying a File Server> Using the
Browse Key (Windows (SMB)).
How to send:
On [Send] tab, press [Address Book/Server], select the folder from the address book, and press [Start] so that the documents or images will be sent to the
designated folder.
14.3.13.2.6 How to make [Send] tab not display on LCD
0005-1413

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
You can select in service mode whether or not the send functions are displayed on the LCD. In order not to display the [Send] tab, change the setting in
service mode (LEVEL 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> UI-SEND> 0].
14.3.13.2.7 How to clear logs (job history, job record)
0005-1474

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> 1] and press [OK] key. Then, select [HD-CLEAR] and press [OK] key. Turn the power
OFF/ON so that the logs will be cleared. Note that the data stored in Inboxes will also be cleared at that time.
The log of FAX transmission/reception can be cleared in service mode [FAX> CLEAR].
14.3.13.2.8 How to send E-mail
0005-4352

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Feild Remedy
There are two different sending methods.
a. How to send an e-mail to a destination that is not registered in the address book:
1. Set the document to be sent.
2. Press [Send] tab> [E-mail] under New Address> [E-mail Address], type an e-mail address and press OK.
3. Press [Send Settings] and enter each item (Send Doc. Name, Subject, Message, Reply-to, Sender's Name).
4. Press [E-mail Priority] to select the priority, and [File Format] to select the format of the document to send. Then, press the Start key.
b. How to send an e-mail to a destination that is registered in the address book:
1. Set the document to be sent.
2. Press [Send] tab> [Address Book/Server], and select the desired destination.
3. Press [Send Settings] and enter each item (Send Doc. Name, Subject, Message, Reply-to, Sender's Name).
4. Press [E-mail Priority] to select the priority, and [File Format] to select the format of the document to send. Then, press the Start key.
For your information, the following describes how to register addresses:
In user mode [Address Book Settings> Register Address> Register New Address> E-mail], type the name in the [Name] field and the e-mail address in the [Email Address] field. Then, press OK.
14.3.13.2.9 Is iR C3100i equipped with SEND function as standard?
0005-4361

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
iR C3100i is equipped with SEND function as standard.
In order to equip iR C3100, iR C3100N and iR C3100F with SEND function, the following options are required:
- Color Send Kit-C1
- Resolution Switching Board-A1
If the PS print server is installed, iR 256MB Expansion RAM is also required.
14.3.13.2.10 Does iRC3100 equip function to change copy ratio when sending? / [Copy Ratio] key does not appear on [Send] screen
0005-5177

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
Because of a specification constraint, iRC3100 and iRC3200 series do not equip a function to change the copy ratio when sending.

14-72

Chapter 14
14.3.13.2.11 How to print list of destinations registered in one-touch buttons
0005-5370

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following describes how to print a list of the destinations:
In user mode [Report Settings> Print List> Send> Address Book List> One-touch Buttons], press [Print List] key.
14.3.13.2.12 How to modify [Standard Send Settings]
0005-5381

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
In user mode [Communications Settings> Common Settings> TX Settings> Edit Standard Send Settings], press the Scanning Mode drop down list and the File
Format drop down list to select the mode. Then, press OK and done repeatedly until the Send Basis Features screen appears.
14.3.13.2.13 Documents that failed to be forwarded were automatically erased
0005-5986

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Select [Always Print] or [Store/Print] for [Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors] in user mode [Communications Settings> Common Settings> TX
Settings]. The default factory setting is [Off]. For more details, refer to Sending Guide on page 8-8.
Note that the above setting change is effective when [Erase Failed TX] is set to 'On' (Erases jobs after sending, whether the transmission ends successfully or
with an error.) in user mode.
14.3.13.2.14 File format that can be selected in "Send" tab
0006-0079

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following file format can be selected:
a. [TIFF/JPEG]: Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or JPEG (Grayscale/Color) format.
b. [TIFF/PDF]: Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or PDF (Grayscale/Color) format.
c. [PDF/PDF]: Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
d. [PDF(Compact)]: Can be selected when any color mode is set other than Auto-Color Select (Full COlor/Grayscale) or Black-and-White, and when 300x300dpi
is set.
Note: [TIFF/JPEG] will appear in place of [TIFF/JPEG] when "Divide into Pages" button is pressed.
14.3.13.2.15 How to cancel send jobs waiting to be processed or being sent (E-mail / IFAX / Sending to File Server / Storing in User Inbox)
0008-0937

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
In order to cancel a send job while it is waiting to be processed, or while it is being sent, follow the steps below.
Field Remedy
Press [System Monitor> Send> Status> select the send job to be canceled> Cancel]. The message "Is it OK to cancel?" is displayed on the LCD, so press [Yes].
Note: The canceled send job is displayed as "NG" (No Good) on the Log screen. And, a send job while it is being sent might be sent depending on in what timing
[Cancel] is pressed.
14.3.13.2.16 Message "To send a file in [PDF (compct)] format, select a setting other than black and white and select 300 x 300 dpi." is
displayed: FAX transmission
0009-1444

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
As the file format [PDF (compct)] is enabled only when it is combined with any of the following scanning modes: [Color/grayscale 300 x 300dpi], [Full color
300 x 300 dpi], or [Grayscale 300 x 300 dpi], the message is displayed when other scanning mode is selected. When you want to set [PDF(compct)] as a standard
sending setting, select one of those scanning modes. For your information, with the factory setting, if the file format is set to [PDF (compct)], [Color/Grayscale
300 x 300dpi] is automatically set as the scanning mode.
14.3.13.2.17 Does this machine support MIME (Ver. 1.0)?
0009-1550

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This machine supports MIME (Ver.1.0) for the I-FAX and the E-mail functions.
For your information
MIME is an acronym for "Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension" and is standards for specifying the data type of a file on the basis of the file extension. MIME
is an internet protocol and enables a binary data file to be sent on the Internet as an attachment of an E-mail message.
14.3.13.2.18 Want to send originals with blank boarder (margin) around edge of scanned image: Push scan
0009-8322

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
1. Set the original you want to send with a blank border on the feeder or the copyboard glass, and in the Send screen, press the drop-down list of [Scan Settings]
> select a scan setting > [Option] > [Special Features] > [Frame Erase].

14-73

Chapter 14
2. Press [Original Frame Erase] > enter the width of blank border > [Next] > select the original size > [OK] to return the Send screen. When entering the
width, you can set the same width for all four borders (Adjust All At Once), or set the top, left, right, and bottom widths independently (Adjust Each Dim).
3. Select the destination and press the Start key to send the image.
Description
Selecting the "Frame Erase" feature from the Scan Settings in the Send screen enables you to send originals with a blank boarder around the edge of scanned
image. There are three kinds of Frame Erase functions: Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Biding Erase. In the Original Frame Erase and the Book
Frame Erase, "Adjust All At Once" function and "Adjust Each Dim" function are available.

14.3.13.3 FAQ on UFR Specifications

14.3.13.3.1 USB Interface Board: Installation location
0005-1410

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
Install it at J1103 on the Main Controller PCB.
14.3.13.3.2 OS (Operating System) which supports UFR printer functions
0005-1415

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
The following OSs (operating system) support UFR printer functions: Windows98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003(32bit).
14.3.13.3.3 Description about [Print After Completing RIP]
0005-5386

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
If [Print After Completing RIP] is enabled, the fist page is printed after all the pages in the job have been processed. Although it may take longer to print the
first page, the remaining pages in the job will be printed more quickly. This is useful when several people are using the machine or when using another function,
such as the Copy function, because the printing time for a print job is reduced.
How to enable [Print After Completing RIP]:
In user mode [Printer Settings> Settings> Print After Completing RIP> On].
14.3.13.3.4 How to disable color print on printer driver
0005-7448

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In the printer driver, click [Quality] tab > select [Monochrome] from the color mode drop down list.
14.3.13.3.5 Image is shifted by 1.5mm to trailing edge (in sub scanning direction) on postcard loaded on stack bypass: via UFR,
Windows98
0005-7450

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In the printer driver, select [Properties> Finishing] and change the settings in [Binding Location] and [Gutter].
For more details, refer to xxxxxx
14.3.13.3.6 Can page numbers be added on copies/prints?
0005-9664

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
It is impossible to add page numbers on copies. As for prints, it is possible with UFR printer driver-installed computers (Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server2003).
How to set:
[Print]> [Properties]> [Page Options]> [Layout Options]> place a check mark on [Print Page Number] > select numbering location from the drop down list
14.3.13.3.7 How to store printing data into Inbox via UFR: OS is Windows
0005-9673

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
1. [Print]> [Properties]> [Page Setup]> select [Store] from the job processing method drop down list.
2. A message box appears saying that 'Output Destination switched to Store mode. Open the Store Destination dialog box by '. Click OK.
3. Click a small button [Store Destination] in the right side of [Store], and type the data name and select any Inbox to save. In the default settings, a document
will be stored into the Inbox numbered [00] in the file name of year, day, and time at printing.
14.3.13.3.8 How to make booklet copy by merging multiple documents via UFR: OS is Windows
0005-9675

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
By merging multiple documents, the following features become invalid although they have been specified for each document:
Duplex printing, Booklet copy, Copy numbers, Saddle stitches, Transparency interleaving, Color mode, and Output method
Field Remedy

14-74

Chapter 14
1. [Print]> [Properties]> [Page Setup]> select [Edit and Preview] from the job processing method drop down list.
2. A message box appears saying that 'Output Destination switched to Edit and Preview mode.'. Click OK and print the document. [Canon Page Composer]
dialog box will appear and the printed document will be saved there.
3. Repeat the Steps 1 and 2 so that all the documents will be saved in [Canon Page Composer].
4. In [Canon Page Composer] dialog box, select all the documents you want to merge and click [Edit > Combine].
5. A window for merging the documents will appear. It is possible to change the sequence of the documents in [Document List] tab.; however, impossible to
change the sequence of the pages.
6. Click [Print Settings] tab> Select [Booklet Printing] from the print style drop down list and select a particular paper size.
7. After configuring necessary settings such as copy numbers, click [Combine].
8. The combined document will be saved in [Canon Page Composer] dialog box. Select it and click [File]> [Proof Print] or [Print]. If [Print] is selected, the
document will be erased after being printed.
14.3.13.3.9 How to print 2nd side upside down in duplex printing
0006-1378

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In the printer driver properties, select Finishing tab and change Binding Location from "Long Edge (Left)" to "Short Edge (Top)".
14.3.13.3.10 How to fix print color in black and white (monochrome)
0008-2796

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
Depending on application software in use, the file could be printed in color although "black and white printing" is selected on the printer driver.
Field Remedy
In user mode [Printer Settings> Settings> Color Mode], select [Black and White] and press OK so that data is printed in black only even if the original is in color.
14.3.13.3.11 How to restrict computers that can send data (print job, I-FAX)
0008-2830

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
a. How to set permitted PCs:
a-1. In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> TCP/IP Settings> IP Address Range Settings> Setting/Browsing Range> Permit IP Address(es)> Apply
Settings> ON].
a-2. If a single address is to be set, press [Single Address] and enter the IP address and finally press [OK]. If multiple addresses are to be set, press [Multiple
Addresses] and enter the IP addresses in [First Address] and [Last Address], and finally press [OK].
b. How to set rejected PCs:
b-1. In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> TCP/IP Settings> IP Address Range Settings> Setting/Browsing Range> Reject IP Address(es)> Apply
Settings> ON].
b-2. Do the same thing in step 2 above.
14.3.13.3.12 How to check type information (size, type, level of paper) of machine in printer driver properties
0009-1421

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
Follow the steps below.
1. Start > Settings > Printers > iRC3100 > Properties > Device Settings > Get Device Status > Apply > OK.
2. "Print" dialogue box of a file > Properties > Paper Source tab > select "Paper Type" in "Select By"
3. In the Paper Source tab, move the mouse pointer over the illustration of this machine. The tooltip (message) pops up and displays the size, the type, and the
level of paper set in such a paper source.
14.3.13.3.13 Cannot select Staple as finishing mode on PC: Device status is not obtained
0009-1428

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the following symptom occurred: In the printer driver [Properties > Finishing tab > Finishing], the radio button [Staple] is grayed out and unavailable
for the user.
Field Remedy
To make the [Staple] button selectable, change the setting of the printer driver; [Start > Settings > Printers > The icon of iRC3100 > Properties > Device Settings
> choose the Finisher connected to your machine from the pull-down menu of Output Options or click on [Get Device Status] to automatically collect the
information on the Finisher > Apply > OK].
14.3.13.3.14 Do counters increase when printing a job of an Excel sheet including both monochrome and color pages?
0009-1527

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
If the color mode is set to "Auto Detect" in the printer driver, the machine detects color mode of each page and increases each counter in accordance with the
results of the detection.
14.3.13.3.15 Correct paper type is not displayed in Tooltip (message) on illustration of printer driver
0009-1557

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the symptom occurred because the paper type was newly added in a PC by using [Start > Settings > Printers > iRC3100 > Properties > Device

14-75

Chapter 14
Settings > Form to Tray Assignment > Paper Type]. To make the tooltips display correct paper type information, perform "Get Device Status" instead of "Form
to Tray Assignment."
Note: Performing "Get Device Status" will clear all the paper types that has been added using "Form to Tray Assignment."
14.3.13.3.16 Cannot select staple as finishing mode on PC: Because Custom Size Paper is selected
0009-1558

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
In the printer driver, when Custom Paper Size is selected for Output Size, the radio button [Staple] is grayed out and unavailable for the user. To select Staple
as the finishing mode, select any standard size paper for Output Size.

14.3.13.4 FAQ on PS Specifications

14.3.13.4.1 imagePASS-E1/Color Network Printer Unit-E1 cannot be recognized: Upon installation
0010-8340

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the machine could not recognize the imagePASS-E1/the Network Printer Unit-E1 upon installation. This was because there was a missing setting
under the service mode item [INT-FACE] that was performed after installation of the optional equipment.
Field Remedy
After connecting the imagePASS-E1/the Network Printer Unit-E1 to the machine, make the following selection in sequence: Service mode > COPIER >
Option > INT-FACE, and set [IMG-CONT] to "3". Then, restart the machine.

14.3.13.5 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications

14.3.13.5.1 Function to inhibit Direct Mail (DM)
0005-1407

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This product does not support the function to inhibit the host machine from receiving direct mails.
14.3.13.5.2 How to darken scanning density of FAX-transmitted document
0005-1585

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
Make an adjustment in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Exposure Recalibration> Send (B&W)].
14.3.13.5.3 Necessary settings for FAX/TEL Auto Switch
0005-1590

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Communications Settings> Fax Settings> RX Settings> RX Mode], select [FAX/TEL Auto Switch].
14.3.13.5.4 Can I-FAX/ FAX send and receive color documents?
0005-1909

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
I-FAX/ FAX transmission and reception are all made in monochrome. Therefore, even a color document is sent in monochrome.
14.3.13.5.5 Send TX Report and FAX TX Report (total 2 sheets) are output in the case of FAX transmission error
0005-1915

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
This is a specification constraint of this product.
There are two kinds of TX Reports, [Send TX Report] for a sending job and [FAX TX Report] for a FAX transmission. The default setting for both reports
is to output a report [For Error Only]. Since a FAX transmission is considered as one of the sending jobs, two kinds of TX reports are output for FAX
transmission.
As a solution, select [OFF] in user mode [Report Settings> Settings> Fax> Fax TX Report].
Note: On [Send TX Report], the following two items are not printed: USAGE T (the time taken from start to end of sending) and Error Code.
14.3.13.5.6 How to set transmission level (ATT) at -7db or higher
0005-1918

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
1. In service mode [FAX> SSSW> SW17> bit1], set at [1]. Shut off the control panel switch and turn the power OFF/ON.
2. As a result of the step 1, the range of setting has been changed from [8 to 15] to [0 to 15] in service mode [FAX> MENU> 007]. So, you can set the
transmission level at -7db or higher.

14-76

Chapter 14
14.3.13.5.7 How to register one-touch destinations as group in one-touch button
0005-7445

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Address Book Settings> One-touch Buttons], select a one-touch button to store, press [Register/Edit> Group], enter the name in the Name field
and the One-touch Buttons Name field respectively, and press OK. Then, press [Specifying Destinations], select destinations from One-touch Buttons, and
finally press OK to end the settings.
14.3.13.5.8 How to output system dump list
0005-9668

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [FAX> REPORT> DUMP], press OK to output the system dump list.
14.3.13.5.9 How to display FAX error codes on Activity Report
0005-9670

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [FAX> SSSW> SW01> bit0], set it to '1'.
14.3.13.5.10 DADF-L1: Can originals that exceed stackable height of DADF-L1 be sent as one job?
0005-9674

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
Enabling [Job Build] feature makes it possible to scan originals that exceed stackable height on DADF-L1.
Field Remedy
How to set:
1. Press [Scan Settings> Option> Special Features], and make sure that [Job Build] is enabled. Then, press Done and OK to close the scan settings window.
2. Press the Start key so that scanning will start. When scanning of the first batch of originals has been completed, place the next batch and press the Start key.
Be sure to remove the previous batch from the delivery tray before scanning the next batch.
3. Repeat the Step 2 until the last batch of originals is scanned, then press Done.
Note: The maximum number of pages that can be sent at once is 500. When the scanning amount exceeds 500 pages, a message will appear to ask whether to
send or cancel them.
14.3.13.5.11 Unable to receive documents in memory
0006-0072

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Make sure that both of the following settings are set to "On".
1. In user mode [System Settings> Communications Settings> Memory RX Inbox> Use Fax Memory Lock> On].
2. In the "Mail Box" tab, press [Memory RX Inbox> Memory RX Inbox> Fax Memory Lock> On].
14.3.13.5.12 When receiving B5-sized document by FAX, A4 paper is used for output
0006-0074

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This symptom is due to a specification of G3FAX. When the sending side scans B5-sized document in landscape orientation (182mm wide), the machine
declares the document to be A4. Consequently, the machine on the receiving side will receive and print it with A4 paper. This is because G3 standard regards
a document narrower than 210mm (equivalent to A4R) to be 210mm.
In order to print it with B5 paper at the receiving side, it is necessary that the sending side scans B5 paper in portrait orientation (257mm wide).
14.3.13.5.13 How to register Address Book in address list of FAX driver
0006-2032

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
1. Export the Address Book stored in iRC3100 and save it into your computer through the Remote UI as follows:
Click [Remote UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Address Book> Export], select a sub address book to store, place a check mark on "Custom Format" and click
[Start Export]. Then, specify the location where you want to save the file.
2. Register the stored address book in the address list of FAX driver as follows:
Start up any software application such as MS Word, click [File> Print], select the appropriate FAX from the drop-down list. Click [Properties> Edit Address
Book> Import File], select ".abk format" as a file format and click the stored address book. Then, the address(es) in the stored address book will be listed in the
window of the [Edit Address Book] tab. Click [OK] to close the window.
14.3.13.5.14 How to display ## service error code
0007-9858

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [FAX> Sssw> SW01], set bit0 (rightmost) to "1". ## service error code will be displayed in reports and on the LCD.
Description
If you want to check jobs which resulted in a service error on the LCD, follow the steps below:

14-77

Chapter 14
Press [System Monitor> Fax> Log], select a job with "NG" and press [Details]. If the selected job is a service error, ## code will be displayed in [Result].
Note: On the list of [Log], it is impossible to determine which job has resulted in a service error. You need to select a job with "NG" one by one.
14.3.13.5.15 How to erase all address book data at once
0007-9925

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> ADRS-BK], press the OK key and turn the power OFF/ON. All of the address book data will be erased at one.
In user mode [Address Book Settings> Register Address> Erase], you can erase the address on a one-by-one basis.
14.3.13.5.16 How to activate direct sending feature / Applicable system software versions
0008-0521

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
Description
The direct sending feature is supported with the software versions listed below:
System Software (MN-CONT): Ver.21.01 / BOOTROM: Ver.20.02 / DCON: Ver.20.07 / RCON: Ver.20.02 / FAX: Ver.51.02
Field Remedy
In order to activate the direct sending feature, follow the steps below after upgrading. As a result, "Direct" button will appear in [Send> New Address> Fax].
a. Clearing NCU in service mode
1. As it is necessary to enter the set values under NCU once again after clearing, output "SYSTEM DATA LIST" by executing the service mode [FAX> Report>
DATA].
2. In service mode [FAX> Clear> NCU], press OK.
3. In service mode [FAX> Ncu], check all the set values and reset them to the one before clearing.
b. Setting for activating the direct sending feature
1. In service mode [FAX> Ncu> SPECIALB> SW28], change bit4 from "1" to "0".
2. Turn the control panel switch OFF and then turn the main power OFF/ON.
14.3.13.5.17 How to erase Fax forwarding settings
0008-0945

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [System Settings> Forwarding Settings> select the forwarding setting that you want to erase> Erase], press Yes so that the selected setting will be
erased.
Note: If you want to make the setting invalid temporarily, in user mode [System Settings> Forwarding Settings], select the setting that you want to and press
[Validate/Invalidate].
14.3.13.5.18 How to invalidate Fax forwarding setting temporarily
0008-0947

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [System Settings> Forwarding Settings, select the forwarding setting that you want to invalidate and press [Validate/Invalidate]. In order to make
it valid once again, press [Validate/Invalidate] again.
14.3.13.5.19 Wants to forward incoming fax message with no FAX number (Unknown) to Confidential FAX Inboxes
0008-2874

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
It is impossible to sort out incoming FAX messages with no FAX number and forward them to any of the Confidential FAX Inboxes.
14.3.13.5.20 Difference between # error and ## error: FAX error code
0008-6213

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
When an error occurs during transmission or reception, the following error codes will be displayed on the LCD depending on what has happened.
- # error code: User error code which can be solved by users by themselves.
- ## error code: Service error code which needs any corrective action by a service engineer.
- STOP: Jobs which have been canceled during transmission or waiting for transmission.
14.3.13.5.21 There is no error code indication in Details although its log displays "NG"
0008-6214

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This job is the one which resulted in a service error (## error code). In order to prevent users from being confused, the host machine is configured at a time of
factory shipment so that ## error code is not be displayed although # code is. In order to display ## error codes. in service mode [FAX> Sssw> SW01], set bit0
(rightmost) to "1" from "0".
14.3.13.5.22 How to print FAX Activity Report when necessary
0009-1419

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy

14-78

Chapter 14
When you want to print the FAX Activity Report at a timing other than the specified times or every 40 transmissions,
select [Send screen > System Monitor > Fax > Log] and press "Print List."
14.3.13.5.23 Is it possible to move data from Address Book to One-Touch key?
0009-1420

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
It is impossible to move the address data registered in the Address Book to the One-Touch key. Newly register the address data you want to a One-Touch key.
The address data registered in a One-Touch key is reflected to the Address Book.
14.3.13.5.24 Multiple Communication Result Report
0009-1426

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The multiple communication result report is output after a sequential broadcast transmission. In this report, all the destinations are classified as follows according
to the result of the FAX transmission:
- TX/RX INCOMPLETE: The FAX number of the destination of an incomplete transmission is indicated. (For example, the FAX number that does not exist is
entered.)
- TRANSACTION OK: The FAX number of the destination of a completed transmission is indicated.
- ERROR: The FAX number of the destination of an error transmission is indicated.
For any column, if there is no applicable destination, "---" is printed.
14.3.13.5.25 How to erase all destinations stored in Address Book and One-Touch buttons at once
0009-1491

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode, [COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ADRS-BK > OK], then turn the control panel power switch off and switch on the main power of the
machine again.
14.3.13.5.26 Wants to hide destination name printed at sender information area on receiving side when sending FAX message: FAX
transmission
0009-8306

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following procedure enables you to hide the destination name that is printed at the sender information area on the receiving side. This function is useful
when you register destination names in the abbreviated form. However, please note that this function is not available for the iR3300 series machines.
In user mode [Communication Settings > TX Settings under Common Settings > TX Terminal ID > Display Destination Name], select [OFF].
14.3.13.5.27 Is it possible to do away with prefix number that triggers outside call?: FAX transmission
0009-8315

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Manual-related ]
Description
Although there is no setting that allows you to do away with a prefix number that is used to start an outside call, you can add the prefix number when
registering a FAX number to a One-touch key. When the One-touch key is unavailable, insert one pause "P" or more between the prefix number and the FAX
number on an as-needed basis.

14.3.13.6 FAQ on I-FAX Specifications

14.3.13.6.1 "--" mark indicated in "RESULT" column on Activity Report for e-mail and I-Fax transmission
0006-0077

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
"--" mark is indicated when it is not confirmed whether the e-mail or I-fax was actually delivered to a server or the destination.
14.3.13.6.2 "Send Via Server" key is grayed out when storing new address for I-Fax
0006-1065

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
In order to make the "Send Via Server" key selectable, the following setting must be done in user mode:
Press [System Settings> Communications Settings> E-mail/I-Fax Settings> Use Send Via Server> On] so that the "Send Via Server" key will become effective.
For more details, refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide on page 2-16.
[On]: Sends documents via a server. You can send documents to destinations via the Internet in the same way as e-mail.
[Off]: Does not send documents via a server. You can send large amount of image data to a recipient within the same LAN (Local Area Network) environment
without placing a burden on the mail server. This enables you to send documents quickly and directly to the recipient.
14.3.13.6.3 Message [Waiting for result] is displayed on Status screen even after completion of I-Fax transmission
0006-1080

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
If you send documents in [Full] mode to a machine that does not support the Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. When this happens, the

14-79

Chapter 14
job is not considered as complete even though the actual transmission is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result> on the Status screen until
the time set for Full Mode TX Timeout has elapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is shown as <-->. For more details, refer to
Sending and Facsimile Guide [Basic Sending Methods> Specifying Destinations> Using the New Address Tab> Specifying an I-Fax Address].
[Full Mode TX Timeout] can be checked in user mode [System Settings> Communications Settings> E-mail/I-Fax Settings> Full Mode TX Timeout].
- [Full] mode: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet, and enables you to receive a delivery confirmation message telling you whether your I-fax was
sent successfully.
- [Simple] mode: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet.

14.3.13.7 FAQ on Remote UI Specifications

14.3.13.7.1 Remote UI: Prompting for password when attempting to execute system settings through Remote UI
0005-1333

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
This is a specification of this product. When the host machine is equipped with the card reader, the department management feature becomes effective and
thus it prompts for an ID and a password.
As a solution, proceed without inputting either an ID or a password. Or, configure and input the system manager ID and the system password in user mode
[System Settings> System Manager Settings].
14.3.13.7.2 Remote UI: How to restrict computers that can set/browse items through Remote UI
0005-1335

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
Follow the steps below in user mode.
1. Press [System Settings> Network Settings> TCP/IP Settings> IP Address Range Settings> Setting/Browsing Range> Permit IP Address(es)> Apply
Settings> ON].
2. If a single address is to be set, press [Single Address] and enter the IP address and finally press [OK]. If multiple addresses are to be set, press [Multiple
Addresses] and enter the IP addresses in [First Address] and [Last Address], and finally press [OK].
3. Press [Reject IP Address(es)> Apply Settings> ON].
4. Do the same thing in step 2.
14.3.13.7.3 How to review documents stored in Inbox from computer
0005-1402

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
Documents (or images) stored in Inboxes can be reviewed through the Remote UI.
1. Start your web browser and enter the IP address of the host machine. The Remote UI top page will be displayed. (No additional software is required except
for Web browser.)
2. Click [Mail Box] button and select any Inbox where the document (or the image) is stored.
14.3.13.7.4 Remote UI: Explanations about applicable functions of Remote UI
0005-1463

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
a. How to access Remote UI
In user mode [System Settings> Remote UI> ON] and turn the power OFF/ON. Then, enter the host machine's IP address into your web browser, so the
Remote UI's top page or main screen is displayed on your computer screen.
b. Applicable functions of Remote UI
1. Device Status and Information Display
2. Job Management (Copy/Send/Fax jobs)
3. Managing Inboxes (User Inboxes/Memory RX Inboxes/Confidential Fax Inboxes)
4. Printing PDF or PS Files Directly (Direct Print)
5. Managing the Address Book
6. Customizing System Settings
7. Specifying LDAP Server Settings
8. Specifying Forwarding Settings
9. Managing Department IDs
10. Device Custom Settings
11. Import/Export Function of Address Book and Device Settings
14.3.13.7.5 Remote UI: Functions [Job Status] [Mail Box] [Address] [Add. Func.] do not work except for [Device], while prompting for
[User Name] and [Password]
0005-1466

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
When the host machine is equipped with the Card Reader C1 or D1, or [Dept. ID Management] is activated in user mode, the functions related to print volume
and billing cannot be viewed through the Remote UI.
For [User Name] and [Password], use [System Manager ID] and [System Password] respectively that have been specified in user mode [System Settings>
System Manager Settings], so that all the functions can be reviewed through the Remote UI.
14.3.13.7.6 Remote UI cannot be accessed with Mac
0005-7451

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

14-80

Chapter 14

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Make sure of the following:
1. MacOS is Ver.8.6 or later, Web browser is IE5.0 or later.
2. On iRC3100, [On] is selected in user mode [System Settings> Remote UI].
14.3.13.7.7 Remote UI: How to back up (export) address book
0006-1052

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
The Remote UI enables you to back up (export) the address book data to a computer or load (import) to the host machine.
How to back up (export):
[Remote UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Address Book> Export], select an address book to be saved and click 'Start Export'.
How to load (import):
[Remote UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Address Book> Import], select an address book to be loaded and click 'Start Import'.
For more details, refer to Remote UI Guide [Customizing Settings> Import/Export Function> Saving the Address Book].
14.3.13.7.8 Remote UI: How to specify Department ID Management settings through Remote UI
0006-1054

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
On the top page of the Remote UI, select [Add. Func.> Department ID Management] and configure the necessary settings.
For more details, refer to Remote UI Guide [Customizing Settings> Managing Department IDs].
14.3.13.7.9 Remote UI: How to back up settings of additional functions (user mode)
0006-1057

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
The Remote UI enables you to back up (export) the additional functions settings (user mode) to a computer or load (import) them back to the host machine.
How to back up (export):
[Remote UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Additional Functions> Export], click "Start Export".
How to load (import):
[Remote UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Additional Functions> Import], click "Start Import".
For more details, refer to Remote UI Guide [Customizing Settings> Import/Export Function> Saving Additional Functions Settings in Files (Export)].
14.3.13.7.10 Remote UI: How to back up forwarding settings
0006-1066

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
The Remote UI enables you to back up (export) the forwarding settings to a computer or load (import) them back to the host machine.
How to back up (export):
[Remove UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Forwarding Settings> Export], click "Start Export".
How to load (import):
[Remove UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Forwarding Settings> Import], click "Start Import".
For more details, refer to Remote UI Guide [Customizing Settings> Import/Export Function> Saving Forwarding Settings in Files (Export)].
14.3.13.7.11 Pop-up window cannot be closed after displaying message board on touch panel / How to display "Done" key: Remote UI
0007-9805

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
There are two options for how to display the pop-up window on the machine's touch panel display.
1. If you select [All Times], the pop-up window cannot be closed on the touch panel display. While it is being displayed, a copy or fax operation is not acceptable.
2. If you select [On Auto Clear Time], "Done" key appears in the bottom of the pop-up window so you can close the window by pressing the key. Then, you
can make a copy or fax operation. The window will be redisplayed after the Auto Clear mode initiates.
Field Remedy
In order to close the pop-up window on the machine's touch panel display so as to enable a copy or fax operation, select [On Auto Clear Time]. For more details,
refer to the Remote UI Guide [Customizing Settings> Customizing System Settings> Customizing System Information].
Note: If there is no problem in clearing the message in the pop-up window, select in user mode [System Settings> Clear Message Board]. In this case, the
message in the pop-up window and the status display will be cleared, so you have to enter the messages once again through the Remote UI.
14.3.13.7.12 One-touch addresses do not return when importing because they have been exported in LDAP format: Remote UI
0010-4548

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, addresses registered in One-touch buttons did not return to their original buttons when they were imported because they had been exported in the
LDAP format.
a. When exporting
Both the custom format and the LDAP format are available for addresses in Address Books and One-touch buttons.
b. When importing
Only the LDAP format is unavailable for One-touch addresses.
Field Remedy
When exporting addresses in One-touch buttons, select the custom format.

14-81

Chapter 14
14.3.13.7.13 ECM TX setting is reset to ON (default) when exporting and importing again destinations in Address Book or One-touch
buttons by means of Remote UI
0010-4549

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, the following occurred: When destinations registered in an address book or One-touch buttons are exported and imported again using Remote
UI, ECM setting of the destinations is reset to ON (default setting).
Field Remedy
When the symptom occurs, follow the procedure below in the Remote UI screen:
[Address > Address Book > select an address book in which the target destination is registered > select the target destination > press "Edit" button > change
the setting for "ECM TX"].
14.3.13.7.14 Wants to import FAX destinations registered to Address Book of machine into FAX driver
0010-7457

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[ Manual-related ]
Description
Using the Remote UI enables you to import FAX destinations registered to the address book of this machine into the address book of the FAX driver.
Field Remedy
1. Remote UI > Add. Func. > Import/Export > Address Book > Export > select the target address book from the pull down menu > select "Custom Format" as
File Format > Start Export.
2. In the File Download screen opened automatically after the above-mentioned Step1, Save > specify the destination for saving in [Save in] > select ".abk
Document" as [Save as type] > Save.
3. On the PC screen, Start > Settings > Printers > FAX printer driver > Properties > General > Printing Preferences > Import > select the .abk format file that is
saved in the Step2 > Open]. This step will import the exported address book data into the address book of the FAX driver.

14.3.13.8 FAQ on iR (Color) Network ScanGear Specifications

14.3.13.8.1 Color Network ScanGear: Tips for setup
0005-1581

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
In the CD-ROM enclosed in Color Network ScanGear kit, open [Disk 1] and double-click [Setup.exe] to start setup. Note that the Service Support Tool is
unnecessary.
14.3.13.8.2 Can Color Network ScanGear driver for iRC3100 operate coresident with Network ScanGear for iR machines on a computer?
0005-6480

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
Color Network ScanGear driver for iRC3100 can operate coresident with the Network ScanGear for iR machines on a computer.
14.3.13.8.3 After scanning via Color Network ScanGear in PhotoShop, subsequent operation cannot be done in PhotoShop
0005-9665

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[ Manual-related ]
Description
Even after scanning is completed, Color Network ScanGear is still opened. In such a case, any operation in PhotoShop cannot be done. End Color Network
ScanGear after scanning so that the subsequent operation in PhotoShop can be done.

14.4 Outline of Electrical Components

14.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid
14.4.1.1 Clutch/Solenoid Table
0018-0541

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
<Reader Unit>
The reader unit does not have clutches or solenoids.
<Printer Unit>
T-14-5
Ref.

14-82

Name

Description

CL1

manual feed pickup clutch

drives the manual feed pickup roller

CL2

registration cultch

drives the registration roller

CL3

developing sleeve clutch

drives the developing sleeve

CL6

duplex feed clutch

drives the duplexing roller 1/2

CL7

toner supply clutch

drives the toner feedscrew (Bk)

CL8

ITB cleaning clutch

drives the ITB cleaning blade

CL9

secondary transfer clutch

moves the secondary transfer roller in contact/

away

SL1

cassette 1 pickup solenoid

drives the cassette 1 pickup roller

Chapter 14
Ref.

Name

Description

SL2

cassette 2 pickup solenoid

drives the cassette 2 pickup roller

SL3

ATR shutter solenoid

drives the ATR shutter

SL4

Multi feeder pad up/ down solenoid

Going up and down of multi feeder pad

T-14-6

Ref.

Parts number

CL1

FH6-5076

P004-6

I/O
1:ON

CL>7

PART-CHK DC controller PCB

J320

CL2

FH6-5075

P004-5

1:ON

CL>6

J320

CL3

FH6-5076

P004-2

1:ON

CL>3

J311

CL6

FH6-5005

P004-4

1:ON

CL>5

J320

CL7

FH6-5005

P004-0

1:ON

CL>1

J311

CL8

RH7-5168

P004-1

1:ON

CL>2

J311

CL9

RH7-5168

P004-3

1:ON

CL>4

J320

SL1

FH6-5055

P005-7

1:ON

SL>1

J322

SL2

FH6-5055

P005-6

1:ON

SL3

FH6-5078

SL4

FK2-2070

SL>2

J322

SL>3

J307
J332

CL2
CL1
CL9
CL6
CL8

CL3
CL7

SL3
SL4
SL1
SL2
F-14-35

14.4.1.2 Clutch/Solenoid Table

0003-6400

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Reader Unit>
The reader unit does not have clutches or solenoids.
<Printer Unit>
T-14-7
Ref.

Name

Description

CL1

manual feed pickup clutch

drives the manual feed pickup roller

CL2

registration cultch

drives the registration roller

CL3

developing sleeve clutch

drives the developing sleeve

CL6

duplex feed clutch

drives the duplexing roller 1/2

CL7

toner supply clutch

drives the toner feedscrew (Bk)

CL8

ITB cleaning clutch

drives the ITB cleaning blade

CL9

secondary transfer clutch

moves the secondary transfer roller in contact/

away

SL1

cassette 1 pickup solenoid

drives the cassette 1 pickup roller

SL2

cassette 2 pickup solenoid

drives the cassette 2 pickup roller

SL3

ATR shutter solenoid

drives the ATR shutter

14-83

Chapter 14
T-14-8
Ref.

Parts number

I/O

CL1

FH6-5076

P004-6

1:ON

CL>7

PART-CHK DC controller PCB

J320

CL2

FH6-5075

P004-5

1:ON

CL>6

J320

CL3

FH6-5076

P004-2

1:ON

CL>3

J311

CL6

FH6-5005

P004-4

1:ON

CL>5

J320

CL7

FH6-5005

P004-0

1:ON

CL>1

J311

CL8

RH7-5168

P004-1

1:ON

CL>2

J311

CL9

RH7-5168

P004-3

1:ON

CL>4

J320

SL1

FH6-5055

P005-7

1:ON

SL>1

J322

SL2

FH6-5055

P005-6

1:ON

SL3

FH6-5078

SL>2

J322

SL>3

J307

CL2
CL6
CL9
CL1
CL8

CL3
CL7

SL3
SL1
SL2
F-14-36

14.4.2 Motor
14.4.2.1 Motor Table
0003-6403

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

<Reader Unit>
T-14-9
Ref.
M501

Name

Description

reader motor

drives the carriage

T-14-10
Ref.

Parts number

I/O

reader controller PCB

1: forward
M501

FH5-1028

P002-2

J505
0: reverse

14-84

Chapter 14

M501

F-14-37

<Printer Unit>
T-14-11
Ref.

Name

Description

M1

polygon motor

drives the laser scanner

M2

main motor

drives major printer unit components

M4

delivery motor 1

drives the delivery roller

M6

cassette 1 pickup motor

drives the pickup unit 1

M7

cassette 2 pickup motor

drives the pickup unit 2

M8

rotary motor

drives the rotary

M9

drum motor

drives the drum

M11

fixing motor

drives the fixing assembly

T-14-12
Ref.

Parts number

I/O

PARTCHK

DC
controller
PCB

E code

M1

FM2-0041(the scanner
Unit)

MTR>1

J328

M2

FH5-1001

MTR>7

J311,312

M4

FH6-1997

MTR>5

J314

M6

FH6-1972

MTR>3

J321

M7

FH6-1972

MTR>4

J321

M8

FM2-0080

MTR>2

J313

M9

FH5-1004

MTR>6

J311,J312

E012

J315,316

E014

E010

P017-0 (fixing
1:ON
motor locked)
M11

FH5-1006

P017-1 (fixing
speed switch- 1:half-speed MTR>8
over)
P017-2 (fixing
1:ON
motor ON)

14-85

Chapter 14

M11
M2
M9
M6
M7

M4

M8

M1

F-14-38

14.4.3 Fan
14.4.3.1 Fan Table
0003-6405

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Reader Unit>
The reader unit does not have a fan.
<Printer Unit>
T-14-13

14-86

Ref.

Name

Description

FM1

exhaust fan (front)

discharges heat from fixing unit

FM2

exhaust fan (rear)

discharges heat from fixing unit

FM3

ITB duct fan

prevents overheating near ITB/fixing assembly

FM4

controller fan

cools inside controller box

FM5

toner suction fan

collects stray toner inside machine

Chapter 14
T-14-14
Ref.

Parts
number

main
controller
PCB

DC
controller
PCB

E Code

MTR>1

J317

E805-0001

MTR>2

J317

E805-0002

MTR>4

J308

E805-0003

PARTCHK

I/O
P003-2
exhaust fan 1
1 half speed
half speed
(machine rear)

FM1

FH6-1998
P005-0
exhaust fan 1
1 ON
full speed
(machine rear)

FM2

FH6-1998

FM3

FH6-1885

FM4

FH5-1033

FM5

FH6-1999

P006-2
exhaust fan 2
full speed
(machine
front)

1 ON

P006-3
exhaust fan 2
full speed
(machine
front)

1 ON

J1113

MTR>3

E804-0004

J311

E805-0004

FM2
FM1
FM4

FM5

FM3

F-14-39

14.4.3.2 Fan Table

0010-2767

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

<Reader Unit>
The reader unit does not have a fan.
<Printer Unit>
T-14-15
Ref.

Name

Description

FM1

exhaust fan (front)

discharges heat from fixing unit

FM2

exhaust fan (rear)

discharges heat from fixing unit

FM3

ITB duct fan

prevents overheating near ITB/fixing assembly

FM4

controller fan

cools inside controller box

FM5

toner suction fan

collects stray toner inside machine

14-87

Chapter 14
T-14-16
Ref.

Parts
number

main
controller
PCB

DC
controller
PCB

E Code

MTR>1

J317

E805-0001

MTR>2

J317

E805-0002

MTR>4

J308

E805-0003

PARTCHK

I/O
P003-2
exhaust fan 1
1 half speed
half speed
(machine rear)

FM1

FH6-1998
P005-0
exhaust fan 1
1 ON
full speed
(machine rear)

FM2

FH6-1998

FM3

FH6-1885

FM4

FH5-1033

FM5

FH6-1999

P006-2
exhaust fan 2
full speed
(machine
front)

1 ON

P006-3
exhaust fan 2
full speed
(machine
front)

1 ON

J1007

MTR>3

E804-0004

J311

E805-0004

FM2
FM1
FM4

FM5

FM3

F-14-40

14.4.4 Sensor
14.4.4.1 Sensor Table
0003-6406

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

<Reader Unit>
T-14-17
Ref.

14-88

Name

Description

Parts
number

reader
controller
PCB

PS501

CIS HP sensor

detects CIS home position

FH7-7462

J506

PS502

copyboard cover open/closed

sensor (front)

detects the state (open/closed) of the

FH7-7312
copyboard cover

J506

PS503

copyboard cover open/closed

sensor (rear)

detects the state (open/closed) of the

FH7-7312
copyboard cover

J506

CIS1

CIS

reads originals

FM2-1563

SIZE1

original size sensor

identifies the size of originals

FH7-7569

J511

Chapter 14

SIZE1
PS503
PS502

CIS1
PS501

F-14-41

<Printer Unit>
T-14-18
Ref.

Name

Description

PS1

cassette 1 paper sensor

detects the presence/absence of paper in cassette 1

PS2

cassette 2 paper sensor

detects the presence/absence of paper in cassette 2

PS3

cassette 1 paper level A senor

detects paper level A in cassette 1

PS4

cassette 1 paper level B sensor

detects paper level B in cassette 1

PS5

cassette 2 paper level A sensor

detects paper level A in cassette 2

PS6

cassette 2 paper level B sensor

detects paper level B in cassette 2

PS7

manual feed tray paper sensor

detects the presence/absence of paper in the manual

feed tray

PS9

pre-registration sensor

detects paper for pre-registration

PS10

cassette 1 retry sensor

detects retry for cassette 1

PS11

cassette 2 retry sensor

detects retry for cassette 2

PS12

pickup cover sensor

detects the state (open/closed) of the pickup cover

PS13

fixing outlet sensor

detects paper at the fixing outlet

PS14

No. 1 delivery sensor

detects delivery

PS15

No. 1 delivery full sensor

detects the state (full) of delivery

PS17

duplex feed sensor

detects movement for duplexing

PS18

feed cover sensor

detects the state of the feed cover

PS19

ITB HP sensor

detects ITB home position

PS20

waste toner sensor (light-emitting)

detects waste toner (light-emitting)

PS21

waste toner sensor (light-receiving)

detects waste toner (light-receiving)

PS22

front cover sensor

detects the state (open/closed) of the front cover

PS23

patch image read sensor

detect the density of toner image on the drum

PS24

rotary sensor

detects rotary home position

PS25

fixing inlet sensor

detects paper at the fixing inlet

PS26

transparency sensor

identifies transparencies

PS27

ATR sensor

detects the density of toner on the developing

cylinder

PS28

toner cartridge access cover sensor

detects the state (open/closed) of the toner cartridge

access cover

HU1

environment sensor

detects the humidity inside the machine

TH1

fixing main thermistor

detects the temperature of the fixing roller (middle)

14-89

Chapter 14
Ref.
TH2
TP1

Name

Description

fixing sub thermistor

detects the temperature of the fixing roller (ends)

thermal switch

cuts off the power line to the heater in response to

overheating

T-14-19
Parts
number

Ref.

DC
controller
PCB

I/O

PS1

FH7-7312

P001-7

1 paper absent

J322

PS2

FH7-7312

P001-3

1 paper absent

J322

PS3

FH7-7312

P001-6

1 about half or less

J322

PS4

FH7-7312

P001-5

1 about 50 sheets or less

J322

PS5

FH7-7312

P001-2

1 about half or less

J322

PS6

FH7-7312

P001-1

1 about 50 sheets or less

J322

PS7

FH7-7312

P002-2

0 paper present

J317

PS9

FH7-7312

P002-7

1 paper present

J320

xx05

PS10

FH7-7312

P001-4

1 detected

J322

xx01

PS11

FH7-7312

P001-0

1 detected

J322

xx02

PS12

FH7-7312

PS13

FH7-7312

P002-6

1 paper present

J316

xx07

PS14

FH7-7312

P002-5

1 paper present

J314

xx08

PS15

FH7-7312

P002-4

0 paper present

J314

PS17

FH7-7312

P002-3

1 paper present

J317

PS18

FH7-7312

J308

PS19

FH7-7630

J320

PS20

FG3-2374

J308

PS21

FG3-2375

J308

PS22

FH7-7312

J308

PS23

FH7-7629

J310

PS24

FH7-7312

J311

E021

PS25

FH7-7312

J316

xx06
(residual
paper only)

PS26

RH7-7129

J320

PS27

FM2-0096

J307

PS28

FH7-7312

J308

HU1

FH7-7620

J310

J321

T-14-20
Ref.

14-90

JAM/E
Code

Parts number

DC controller PCB

TH1

FH7-7631

J316

TH2

FH7-7632

J316

TP1

FH7-6367

AC driver PCB

J202

xx0D

Chapter 14

PS13
TP1

PS19

TH1

PS10
PS25
PS1

TH2

PS3

PS26

PS4

PS12

PS15
PS14
PS11

HU1
PS23

PS2

PS17
PS7

PS5
PS6

PS9

PS24

PS22
PS18

PS20

PS27
PS28
PS21
F-14-42

14.4.5 Switch
14.4.5.1 Switch Table
0003-6408

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Reader Unit>
The reader unit doe not have a switch.
<Printer Unit>
T-14-21
Ref.

Name

Description

SW1

main power switch

turns on/off the main power

SW3

cover open/closed switch

detects the state (open/closed) of the front cover/right

door

SW4

control key

serves to control copy work

SW5

environment heater switch

turns on/off the environment heater

T-14-22
Ref.

Parts
number

SW1

FH7-6368

SW3

WC2-5327

COPIER>FUNCTION

SW4
FG3-3004

INSTALL>KEY

0: do not recognize control key.

[at time of shipment/after RAM
initialization: 0]

main controller PCB

J1208

1: recognize control key function.

14-91

Chapter 14
Ref.

Parts
number

SW5

WC1-5182

COPIER>FUNCTION

main controller PCB

SW4

SW1
SW5

SW3

F-14-43

14.4.5.2 Switch Table

0010-2770

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

<Reader Unit>
The reader unit doe not have a switch.
<Printer Unit>
T-14-23
Ref.

Name

Description

SW1

main power switch

turns on/off the main power

SW3

cover open/closed switch

detects the state (open/closed) of the front cover/right

door

SW4

control key

serves to control copy work

SW5

environment heater switch

turns on/off the environment heater

T-14-24
Ref.

Parts
number

SW1

FH7-6368

SW3

WC2-5327

COPIER>FUNCTION

SW4
FG3-3004

INSTALL>KEY

0: do not recognize control key.

[at time of shipment/after RAM
initialization: 0]
1: recognize control key function.

SW5

14-92

WC1-5182

main controller PCB

J1021

Chapter 14

SW4

SW1
SW5

SW3

F-14-44

14.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others

14.4.6.1 Lamp. Heaters, and Others Table
0003-6409

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Reader Unit>
T-14-25
Ref.

Name

Parts number

Description

H5

anti-condensation heater (left)

NPN

prevents condensation on the copyboard glass

H6

anti-condensation heater (right)

NPN

prevents condensation on the reading glass

LCD1

LCD panel

FL2-1148

provides visual indications on the control panel

(touch panel)

H5
H6
LCD1

F-14-45

<Printer Unit>
T-14-26
Ref.

Name

Description

H1

fixing main heater

serves the main heater (controls the temperature of the fixing

roller)

H2

fixing sub heater

serves the sub heater (controls the temperature of the fixing

roller)

14-93

Chapter 14
Ref.

Name

Description

H3

fixing heat retention heater

retains heat (keeps the pressure roller heated)

H4

cassette heater

prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the cassette

H7

deck heater

prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the side deck

ELCB1

leakage breaker (100V)

protects against leakage

ELCB2

leakage breaker (230V)

protects against leakage

VA1,2

varistor

protects against a voltage surge

HDD1

hard disk

holds programs and images

SVR1

paper width detecting volume

detects the width of paper from the manual feed tray

SP1

speaker

provides audio indication (fax unit)

T-14-27
Ref.

Parts number

main controller PCB

DC controller PCB

E Code

FG3-2787 (100V)
H1

FG3-2790 (120V)
FG3-2791 (240V)
FG3-2787 (100V)

H2

FG3-2790 (120V)
FG3-2791 (240V)

14-94

H3

FH7-4768-000

H4

NPN

H7

NPN

ELCB1

FH7-7624

ELCB2

FH7-7623

VA1,2

FF3-4529

HDD1

WM2-5188

SVR1

FG3-2800

SP1

FH5-3218

J1110/1111

E315

J317

Chapter 14

H7

H2
H1

H3

HDD1

ELCB1
ELCB2

SVR1
VA2
VA1

H4
SP1

F-14-46

14.4.6.2 Lamp. Heaters, and Others Table

0010-1123

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

<Reader Unit>
T-14-28
Ref.
H5
H6

Name

Parts number

anti-condensation heater (left)

NPN

anti-condensation heater (right)

NPN

LCD panel
LCD1

FL2-1148

Description
prevents condensation on the copyboard glass
prevents condensation on the reading glass

provides visual indications on the control panel

(touch panel)

H5
H6
LCD1

F-14-47

<Printer Unit>
T-14-29
Ref.

Name

Description

H1

fixing main heater

serves the main heater (controls the temperature of the fixing

roller)

H2

fixing sub heater

serves the sub heater (controls the temperature of the fixing

roller)

H3

fixing heat retention heater

retains heat (keeps the pressure roller heated)

14-95

Chapter 14
Ref.

Name

Description

H4

cassette heater

prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the cassette

H7

deck heater

prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the side deck

ELCB1

leakage breaker (100V)

protects against leakage

ELCB2

leakage breaker (230V)

protects against leakage

VA1,2

varistor

protects against a voltage surge

HDD1

hard disk

holds programs and images

SVR1

paper width detecting volume

detects the width of paper from the manual feed tray

speaker

provides audio indication (fax unit)

SP1

T-14-30
Ref.

Parts number

H1

FG3-2787 (100V)

main controller PCB

DC controller PCB

E Code

FG3-2790 (120V)
FG3-2791 (240V)
H2

FG3-2787 (100V)
FG3-2790 (120V)
FG3-2791 (240V)

14-96

H3

FH7-4768-000

H4

NPN

H7

NPN

ELCB1

FH7-7624

ELCB2

FH7-7623

VA1,2

FF3-4529

HDD1

WM2-5214

SVR1

FG3-2800

SP1

FM2-0342

J5002/5003

E315

J317

Chapter 14

H7

H2
H1

H3

HDD1

ELCB1
ELCB2

SVR1
VA2
VA1

H4
SP1

F-14-48

14.4.7 PCBs
14.4.7.1 PCBs Table
0003-6410

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
<Reader Unit>
T-14-31
Ref.

Name

Parts number

Description

[1]

reader controller PCB

FG3-3159

controls the reader unit/ADF

[2]

CIS inverter PCB

FH3-7215

controls the scanning lamp

[3]

PANEL-SW-CL PCB

FG6-8938

communicates the image data detected by the

reader unit to the printer unit

[4]

control panel inerter PCB

FG3-2834

controls the activation of the LCD backlight

[5]

control panel CPU PCB

FG6-8939

controls the control panel

[6]

control panel KEY PCB

FH6-0834

controls the inputs from the keypad

[1]

[3]

[2]

[4]

[5]
[6]

F-14-49

<Printer Unit>

14-97

Chapter 14
T-14-32
Ref.

Name

Parts number

arrestor PCB

FG3-2851

protects against over-voltage

[2]

cassette 1 size detection PCB

FG3-2798

detects the size setting of cassette 1

[3]

cassette 2 size PCB

FG3-2798

detects the size setting of cassette 2

[4]

cassette size detection relay PCB

NPN

relays the detected size setting of the cassette

[5]

pseudo CIP PCB

FM2-0103

generates pseudo CI signals

[6]

BD PCB

FM2-0041

generates the BD signal

[7]

NCU PCB

HG5-1866

controls line switching

[8]

fax board PCB

FG3-1587

controls the fax unit

[9]

laser driver PCB

FM2-0041

controls the laser unit

[10]

G3F AX power supply PCB

FG3-2801

serves as the power supply for G3FAX

[11]

modular PCB

FG3-3464

serves as an interface

[12]

high-voltage power supply PCB

FG3-2796

serves as a high-voltage power supply

[13]

printer power supply PCB

FM2-0216 (100/
120V)
FM2-0190 (230V)

serves as the printer power supply

[14]

controller power supply PCB

FG3-2792

serves as the controller power supply

[15]

AC driver PCB

FM2-0216 (100/
120V)
FM2-0190 (230V)

drives AC loads

[16]

high-voltage sub PCB

FG3-3584

serves as a high-voltage sub power supply

[17]

accessories power supply PCB

FH3-2656 (100/
120V)
FH3-2657 (230V)

serves as the power supply for accessories

[18]

environment switch PCB

FG3-2797

serves as the heater power switch

[19]

DC controller PCB

FG3-2795

controls the printer unit/accessories

[20]

SRAM PCB

FG3-3225

retains service mode settings/HDD control

information

[21]

main controller PCB (main)

FG3-3221

processes image data for output to the printer

unit

[22]

ECO-ID PCB

NPN

assists image processing

[23]

expansion bus PCB

FM2-0210

serves the color LCD controller, card reader

interface, etc.

[24]

main controller PCB (sub)

FM2-0209

converts images from the reader unit

[25]

resolution conversion board

FG3-2728

converts resolution

USB board/TokenRing board

FG3-3226

TokenRing board

FG3-3223

[27]

UFR board

FG3-3223

executes image rendering

[28]

LAN board

FG3-3135

permits connection to a network

[26]

14-98

Description

[1]

serves as an USB/TokenRing interface

Chapter 14

[11]

[1]
[6]
[10]
[2]
[9]

[3]

[8]
[7]
[4]

[5]

[22]

[21]

[23]
[20]
[24]

[19]

[25]

[26]

[18]

[27]
[28]

[17]
[12]

[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]

F-14-50

14.4.7.2 PCBs Table

0010-1104

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<Reader Unit>
T-14-33
Ref.

Name

[1]

Reader controller PCB

Parts No.
FG3-3159

reader unit/ADF control

Description

[2]

CIS inverter PCB

FH3-7215

scanning lamp control

[3]

Control panel CPU PCB

FG6-8938

control panel control

[4]

Control panel key PCB

FG3-2834

keypad input information control

[5]

Control panel inverter PCB

FG6-8939

LCD backlight activation control

[6]

Control panel LCD

FL2-1148

LCD indication, touch panel control

14-99

Chapter 14

[1]

[3]

[2]

[4]

[5]
[6]

F-14-51

<Printer Unit 1>

T-14-34
Ref.

Name

[1]

Arrestor PCB

[2]

Parts No.

Description

FM2-2793
(100V only)

protects against over-voltage

Cassette 1 size detection

PCB

FG3-2798

cassette 1 size identification

[3]

Cassette 2 size detection

PCB

FG3-2798

cassette 2 size identification

[4]

Cassette size detection

relay PCB

NPN

cassette size detection relay

[5]

Off-hook PCB

FM2-3857

detects the off-hook

[6]

BD PCB

FM2-0041

BD signal generation

[7]

NCU PCB

FM2-2790

line control

[8]

Modem PCB

FM2-2789

fax unit control

[9]

Laser driver PCB

FM2-0041

laser unit drive control

[10]

G3 fax power supply PCB

FG3-3844

G3 fax power supply

[11]

Fax relay PCB

FM2-3686

Relay of fax unit and main controller PCB (main)

[12]

Modular PCB

FM2-3741 (100V)
line I/F
FM2-2792 (120V/230V)

[1]
[12]

[6]

[11]

[10]
[2]
[9]

[3]

[8]
[7]
[5]

F-14-52

<Printer Unit 2>

14-100

[4]

Chapter 14
T-14-35
Ref.

Name

Parts No.

Description

[13]

High-voltage power supply

PCB

FG3-2796

high-voltage power supply

[14]

Printer power supply PCB

(Main power supply PCB)

FM2-3000 (100V/120V)
FM2-3001 (230V)

printer unit power supply

[15]

Controller power supply PCB

FG3-3843

controller power supply

[16]

AC driver PCB
(Main power supply PCB)

FM2-3000 (100V/120V)
FM2-3001 (230V)

AC drive

[17]

All night power supply PCB

FK2-0340 (100V/120V)
FK2-0341 (230V)

non-interruptive power supply

[18]

High-voltage sub PCB

FG3-3584

high-voltage power supply sub

[19]

Accessories power supply PCB FH3-2692 (100V/120V)

FH3-2693 (230V)

accessories power supply

[20]

Environment switch PCB

heater power supply switch

FM2-2777

[21]

DC controller PCB

FG3-3847

printer unit/accessory control

[22]

Main controller PCB (main)

FM2-3675

image data processing for output to printer

unit

[23]

ECO-ID PCB

NPN

image processing (auxiliary)

[24]

Main controller PCB (sub R-A) FM2-3677

color space conversion, rotation for

electronic sort, binary processing for fax,
resolution conversion for fax

[25]

Main controller PCB (sub PE- FM2-3678

A)

image processing for printer output (color

space compression, background removal,
LGO conversion, direction mapping, color
balance, zoom fine adjustment, gradation
conversion, screen processing, framing,
add-on)

[26]

Relay PCB (Gu-short)

FK2-0724

bus connection

[27]

Main controller PCB (sub SJA)

FM2-3676

scanner interface, scanner image

processing (resolution conversion, image
rotation, compression expansion)

[28]

Main controller PCB (sub

LAN-bar-A)

FM2-3680

LAN connection, HDD controller, HDD

power supply

[29]

SRAM PCB

FG3-3681

service mode settings/HDD control

information retention

[23]
[22]

[24]

[25]

[21]

[26]

[27]

[20]

[28]
[29]

[19]
[13]

[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]

[14]

F-14-53

14-101

Chapter 14

14.4.7.3 PCBs Table

0017-7604

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
<Reader Unit>
T-14-36
Ref.

Name

Parts No.

Description

[1]

Reader controller PCB

FG3-3159

reader unit/ADF control

[2]

CIS inverter PCB

FH3-7215

scanning lamp control

[3]

Control panel CPU PCB

FG3-3965

control panel control

[4]

Control panel key PCB

FG3-2834

keypad input information control

[5]

Control panel inverter PCB

FG3-2376

LCD backlight activation control

[6]

Control panel LCD

FL2-1148

LCD indication, touch panel control

[1]

[3]

[2]

[4]

[5]
[6]

F-14-54

<Printer Unit 1>

T-14-37
Ref.

14-102

Name

[1]

Arrestor PCB

[2]
[3]
[4]

Parts No.

Description

FM2-2793
(100V only)

protects against over-voltage

Cassette 1 size detection PCB

FM2-2770

cassette 1 size identification

Cassette 2 size detection PCB

FM2-2770

cassette 2 size identification

Cassette size detection relay PCB

FM2-2771

cassette size detection relay

[5]

Off-hook PCB

FM2-3857

detects the off-hook

[6]

BD PCB

FM2-0041

BD signal generation

[7]

NCU PCB

FM2-2790

line control

[8]

Modem PCB

FM2-2789

fax unit control

[9]

Laser driver PCB

FM2-0041

laser unit drive control

[10]

G3 fax power supply PCB

FG3-3844

G3 fax power supply

[11]

Fax relay PCB

FM2-3686

Relay of fax unit and main

controller PCB (main)

[12]

Modular PCB

FM2-3741 (100V)
FM2-2792 (120V/
230V)

line I/F

Chapter 14

[1]
[12]

[6]

[11]

[10]
[2]
[9]

[3]

[8]
[7]
[4]

[5]

F-14-55

<Printer Unit 2>

T-14-38
Ref.

Name

Parts No.
FG3-2796

Description

[13]

High-voltage power supply PCB

[14]

Printer power supply PCB

(Main power supply PCB)

[15]

Controller power supply PCB

[16]

AC driver PCB
(Main power supply PCB)

FM2-3000 (100/120V)
FM2-3003 (230V)

AC drive

[17]

All night power supply PCB

FK2-0340 (100/120V)
FK2-0341 (230V)

non-interruptive power supply

[18]

High-voltage sub PCB

[19]

Accessories power supply PCB

[20]

Environment switch PCB

FM2-2777

heater power supply switch

[21]

DC controller PCB

FM3-4210

printer unit/accessory control

[22]

Main controller PCB (main)

FM3-3963

image data processing for output to

printer unit, color space conversion,
rotation for electronic sort, binary
processing for fax, resolution
conversion for fax

[23]

ECO-ID PCB

[24]

Main controller PCB (sub PE-A)

[25]
[26]

FM2-3000 (100/120V)
FM2-3003 (230V)
FG3-3843

FG3-3584
FH3-2692 (100/120V)
FH3-2693 (230V)

NPN

high-voltage power supply

printer unit power supply

controller power supply

high-voltage power supply sub

accessories power supply

image processing (auxiliary)

FM2-3678

image processing for printer output

(color space compression,
background removal, LGO
conversion, direction mapping,
color balance, zoom fine
adjustment, gradation conversion,
screen processing, framing, add-on)

Relay PCB (Gu-short)

FM2-5919

bus connection

Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A)

FM2-3676

scanner interface, scanner image

processing (resolution conversion,
image rotation, compression
expansion)

[27]

Main controller PCB (sub LAN-barC)

FM2-9610

LAN connection, HDD controller,

HDD power supply

[28]

SRAM PCB

FM2-3681

service mode settings/HDD control

information retention

14-103

Chapter 14

[23]
[22]

[24]

[21]

[25]

[26]

[20]

[27]
[28]

[19]
[13]

[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]

[14]

F-14-56

14.4.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB
14.4.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emiting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB
0001-1848

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the machine those needed in the field are discussed.

- Although normal, some LEDs may emit dim light when they remain off becouse of leakege current.
- Keep the following symbols in mind;
---VR that may be used in the field.
---VR that must not be used in the field.

14.4.8.2 Points to Note about the Leakage Breaker

0003-1806

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Points to Note When Checking the Output of PCBs
While the machine is supplied with power, an AC voltage is applied to the terminlas of the leaksge breaker [1].
Be sure not to touch it inadvertently during a check.

F-14-57

14.4.8.3 Main Controller PCB (main)

0001-1849

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

14-104

Chapter 14

LED2

LED5

LED2001

F-14-58
T-14-39
Notation

Description

LED2001

in operation

LED2

+3.3V (all-night) being supplied

LED5

+3.3V (non-all night) being supplied

14.4.8.4 Main Controller PCB (main)

0010-1200

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

14-105

Chapter 14

J1009

LED4

J1008
J1010
J1011
J1012
J1013

IC10

IC11

J1003

IC2

J1034

IC1
J1024
J1001
LED11
J1002
LED12

LED3

LED2 LED1

F-14-59
Code

Role

LED1

+12V (Non-all night) feed is being executed.

LED2

+5V (Non-all night) feed is being executed.

LED3

+13V (Non-all night) feed is being executed.

LED4

+3.3V (Non-all noght; for ASIC drive) feed is being executed.

LED11

+3.3V (Non-all night) feed is being executed.

LED12

+3.3V (All night) feed is being executed.

14.4.8.5 Main Controller PCB (sub PE-A)

0010-2862

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

LED1

J2000
F-14-60
Code

Role

LED1

+3.3V (Non-all night; for ASIC drive) feed is being executed.

14.4.8.6 Main Controller PCB (sub SJ-A)

0010-2864

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

14-106

Chapter 14

J3001
LED1
F-14-61
Code

Role

LED1

+3.3V (Non-all night; for ASIC drive) feed is being executed.

14.4.8.7 Main Controller PCB (sub R-A)

0010-2865

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

LED1

J4001
F-14-62
Code

Role

LED1

+3.3V (Non-all night; for ASIC drive) feed is being executed.

14.4.8.8 Main Controller PCB (sub LANBAR-A)

0010-2866

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

LED2

J5003
J5002

J5001
F-14-63
Code

Role

LED2

Network transmission is being executed.

14.4.8.9 DC Controller PCB

0001-1854

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

14-107

Chapter 14

SW1

F-14-64
T-14-40
Notation

Description

SW1

for high-viltage PCB

Be sure that the bits of the switch are positioned as follows:

SW1
ON
OFF
1

14.4.8.10 DC Controller PCB

0010-1189

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

14-108

Chapter 14

SW1

F-14-65
T-14-41
Notation

Description

SW1

for high-voltage PCB

Be sure that the bits of the switch are positioned as follows:

SW1
ON
OFF
1

14.4.8.11 High-Voltage Power Supply PCB

0003-2199

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

VR851

VR601

F-14-66
T-14-42
Notation

Description

VR601

for factory adjustment

VR851

for factory adjustment

14-109

Chapter 15 Self Diagnosis

Contents

Contents
15.1 Error Code Table........................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1.1 Error Code................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-1

15.2 Error Code Details .....................................................................................................................................................15-2

15.2.1 Error Code Details Table ......................................................................................................................................................... 15-2
15.2.2 E602 in Detail (iR C3100 Series) .......................................................................................................................................... 15-17
15.2.3 E602 in Detail (iR C3170/C2570 Series)............................................................................................................................... 15-20

15.3 Error Codes (SEND) ................................................................................................................................................15-22

15.3.1 Self-Diagnostic Display ......................................................................................................................................................... 15-22
15.3.2 List of Error Codes without Messages................................................................................................................................... 15-23

15.4 Jam Codes ................................................................................................................................................................15-28

15.4.1 Jam Code (printer unit) .......................................................................................................................................................... 15-28
15.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related).................................................................................................................................................... 15-28
15.4.3 Jam Code (ADF-related)........................................................................................................................................................ 15-29

15.5 Alarm Codes ............................................................................................................................................................15-29

15.5.1 Alarm Code ............................................................................................................................................................................ 15-29

Chapter 15

15.1 Error Code Table

15.1.1 Error Code
0001-2273

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Code

Description

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
E000

Insufficient temperature rise of the fixing unit at power-on

E001

Abnormality of the fixing unit

E002

Insufficient temperature rise of the fixing unit

E003

Low temperature of the fixing unit after standby

E004

Error of the protection circuit in the fixing unit

E006

Connection error of the fixing unit

E008

Life expectancy of the fixing roller

E010

Main motor error

E012

Drum motor error

E013

ITB waste toner full error

E014

Fixing motor error

E020

Drum/Developer-related error
XX=01:Y XX=02:M XX=03:C

E021

Developing rotary error

E026

Toner empty error

XX=01:Y XX=02:M

E032

The counter of the NE controller fails to operate.

E045

OHP sensor error

E067

High voltage-related error

E070

ITB HP detection error

E100

BD error

E110

Operation error of the laser scanner motor

E202

CIS unit HP detection error

E225

CIS light quantity error

E227

Power supply error in the reader unit

E243

Control panel unit error

E248

Backup memory error

E315

Abnormality of image data

E351

Main controller PCB error

E400

Feeder communication error

E490

Model error

E500

Finisher communication error

E503 ***

Finisher internal communication error

E505

Finisher backup memory error

E514

*** Stack delivery error / **** End assist motor error

E519 ****

Gear change motor error

E530

*** Rear alignment error / **** Front alignment error

E531

Staple error

E532

Staple unit shift error

E535

Swing error

E537

*** Front alignment error / **** Rear alignment error

E540

*** Stack tray up/down error / **** Upper tray up/down error

E542 ****

Lower tray up/down error

E577 ***

Paddle error

E580

Stack tray up/down error

E584 ****

Shutter unit error

E590 *****

Puncher motor error

E591 *****

Puncher dust sensor error

E592 *****

Puncher side registration sensor error

E593 *****

Puncher shift motor error

E5F0 ****

Saddle paper positioning error

E5F1 ****

Saddle paper folder error

E5F2 ****

Saddle guide error

E5F3 ****

Saddle alignment error

E5F4 ****

Saddle rear side staple error

E5F5 ****

Saddle front side staple error

E5F6 ****

Saddle paper push-on error

E5F8 ****

Saddle connector error

XX=03:C

XX=04:K

XX=00:Any color

XX=04:K

15-1

Chapter 15
Code

Description

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
E5F9 ****

Saddle switch error

E601

Abnormality of image memory

E602

Hard disk error

E604

The image memory (SDRAM) is faulty/insufficient

E609 *

Abnormal low temperature of the hard disk

E610 **

Failure in the hard disk cryptographic key

E674

FAX board communication error

E677

Abnormality of the external controller

E710

IPC initialization error

E711

IPC communication error

E712

Communication error between the ADF and the reader

E713

Communication error between the finisher and the printer

E717

Communication error with the NE controller

E719

Communication error with the coin vender/card reader

E730

PDL error

E731

UFR PCB error

E732

Reader communication error

E733

Printer communication error

E740

Abnormality of the Ethernet board

E743

DDI communication error

E744

Language file/BootROM error

E745 *

Token ring board error

E746 *

Option board error

E747

Main controller PCB error (Image processing ASIC or memory control/communication control
ASIC)

E748 **

Main controller PCB error

E749 **

Restart in accordance with a change of the product configuration

E803

Door close error

E804

Controller fan error

E805

Fan error

15.2 Error Code Details

15.2.1 Error Code Details Table
0003-5636

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
E000

Insufficient temperature rise of the fixing unit at power-on

0001 Delay in temperature rise after poweron
The non-contact thermistor fails to
reach 50 deg C within 180sec after
power-on.

E001

15-2

Abnormality of the fixing unit

Check on connection of the thermistor/thermo

switch, Check on a break in the heater, Replace the
cover switch, Replace the fixing unit, Replace the
main power supply PCB, Replace the DC controller
PCB
To recover from the error: In service mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR >ERR

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
0001 High temperature of the end thermistor
is detected. (Hardware)
The hardware detects abnormal high
temperature of the end thermistor (230
deg C or higher) for 400msec
continuously.

Replace the fixing unit, Replace the main power

supply PCB, Replace the DC controller PCB
To recover from the error: In service mode
COPIER>FUNCTION> CLEAR>ERR

0002 High temperature of the non-contact

thermistor (Software)
Abnormal high temperature (250 deg C
or higher) of the non-contact thermistor
is detected for 500ms continuously.
0003 High temperature of the end thermistor
(Software)
Abnormal high temperature (220 deg C
or more) of the end thermistor is
detected for 500ms continuously.
0004 Large difference in temperature
between end and center Difference in
temperature (80 deg C or more) between
the non-contact thermistor and the end
thermistor is detected for 500msec
continuously.
0005 Foreign matter in the non-contact
thermistor
At the end of initial multiple rotations,
difference in temperature (20 deg C or
more) between the non-contact
thermistor and the end thermistor is
detected for 200msec continuously.

Check on remaining paper in the fixing unit,

Replace the fixing unit
To recover from the error: In service mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR >ERR

0006 A break in the non-contact thermistor

film
The status that A/D of the non-contact
thermistor film is FFh continues for
500msec.

Check on connection of the thermistor, Replace the

fixing unit
To recover from the error: In service mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR >ERR

0007 A short circuit in the non-contact

Replace the fixing unit
thermistor film
To recover from the error: In service mode
The status that A/D of the non-contact COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR >ERR
thermistor film is 30h or less continues
for 500msec.
0008 A break in the non-contact thermistor
case
The status that A/D of the non-contact
thermistor case is FFh continues for
500msec.

Check on connection of the thermistor, Replace the

fixing unit
To recover from the error: In service mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR >ERR

0009 A short circuit in the non-contact

Replace the fixing unit
thermistor case
To recover from the error: In service mode
The status that film A/D-case A/D of the COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR >ERR
non-contact thermistor is 0C or more
continues for 700msec.
0010 A break in the end thermistor
The status that A/D of the contact
thermistor case is FFh continues for
500msec.

Check on connection of the thermistor, Replace the

fixing unit
To recover from the error: In service mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR >ERR

0011 A short circuit in the end thermistor

The status that A/D of the contact
thermistor case is 39h or less continues
for 500msec.
E002

Insufficient temperature rise of the fixing unit

15-3

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
0002 The non-contact thermistor fails to
reach 70 deg C within 180 sec after
reaching 50 deg C.
0003 The non-contact thermistor fails to
reach 100 deg C within 180 sec after
reaching 70 deg C.

Check on connection of the thermistor, Replace the

fixing unit
To recover from the error: In service mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR >ERR

0004 The non-contact thermistor fails to

reach 120 deg C within 180 sec after
reaching 100 deg C.
0005 The non-contact thermistor fails to
reach 140 deg C within 180 sec after
reaching 120 deg C.
0006 The non-contact thermistor fails to
reach 160 deg C within 180 sec after
reaching 140 deg C.
0007 The non-contact thermistor fails to
reach 180 deg C within 180 sec after
reaching 160 deg C.
0008 The non-contact thermistor fails to
reach standby temperature (normally
190 deg C) within 180 sec after reaching
180 deg C.
0101 The non-contact thermistor fails to
reach 120 deg C within 300 sec after
power-on.
0102 The non-contact thermistor fails to
reach standby temperature (normally
190 deg C) within 300 sec after reaching
120 deg C.
E003

Low temperature of the fixing unit after standby

0001 Abnormal low temperature (130 deg C
or lower) of the non-contact thermistor
is detected for 3.5 sec continuously after
standby.

E004

Check on connection of the sub thermistor/thermo

switch, Replace the fixing unit, Check on a break in
the heater, Replace the cover switch, Replace the
main power supply PCB, Replace the DC controller
PCB
To recover from the error: In service mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR >ERR

Error of the protection circuit in the fixing unit

0001 The hardware detects triac short
Turn OFF and back ON the main power, Check on
abnormality (1 sec or more) for
connection of the thermo switch, Replace the main
400msec continuously while the heater power supply PCB, Replace the DC controller PCB
is OFF.

E006

Connection error of the fixing unit

0000 The hardware detects non-attachment of Check on connection of the fixing unit cable,
the fixing unit for 400msec
Replace the relay cable, Replace the fixing unit,
continuously.
Replace the DC controller PCB
A break in the fixing unit presence/
absence signal (FUSER_CNCTX_N) /
Disconnection of the connector (The
connectors are placed as shown below)
DC controller PCB : J316
Fixing unit : J2007, J2008
Relay connector (between DC
controller and fixing unit) : J2006 (7
pins)

E008

Life expectancy of the fixing roller

0001 The fixing roller life expectancy counter Replace the fixing roller or fixing unit
reaches its upper limit (120,000).
After replacement, enter "0" to the service mode
COPIER>COUNTER >MISC>FX-UP-RL

E010

Main motor error

0001 Lock of the motor fails to be detected 2 Check on connection of the connector, Replace the
sec or more after the motor starts to
motor
operate.
0002 After rotation of the motor becomes
stable, the motor lock fails (i.e., the
motor becomes unstable) for 500msec
or more.

E012

Drum motor error

0001 Lock of the motor fails to be detected 2 Check on connection of the connector, Replace the
sec or more after the motor starts to
motor
operate.
0002 After rotation of the motor becomes
stable, the motor lock fails (i.e., the
motor becomes unstable) for 500msec
or more.

E013

15-4

ITB waste toner full error

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
Replace the waste toner container
0000 Jobs for 500 images (on a small-size
paper basis) have been executed after
the ITB waste toner full sensor is turned
ON.
E014

Fixing motor error

0001 Lock of the motor fails to be detected
2sec or more after the motor starts to
operate.

Check on connection of the connector, Replace the

motor, Replace the fixing roller

0002 After rotation of the motor becomes

stable, the motor lock fails (i.e., the
motor becomes unstable) for 500msec
or more.
E020

Drum/Developer-related error
XX=01:Y XX=02:M XX=03:C

XX=04:K

XX=00:Any color

XX10 In INIT control of the initial setting,

SGNL is less than 62.

Clean the ATR sensor window, Check on

attachment of the developing unit, Check on a break
in the ATR sensor, Replace the ATR sensor

XX11 In INIT control of the initial setting,

REF is less than 62.

Check on a break in the ATR sensor, Replace the

ATR sensor

XX12 In INIT control of the initial setting,

SGNL is 960 or more.

Check on a break in the ATR sensor, Check on

operation of the shutter, Replace the ATR sensor

XX13 In INIT control of the initial setting,

REF is 960 or more.

Check on a break in the ATR sensor, Replace the

ATR sensor

XX50 When density data is computed using

SGNL value and REF value in ATR
control, REF becomes 0 due to backup
data corruption.

Clean the ATR sensor window, Check on

attachment of the developing unit, Check on a break
in the ATR sensor, Replace the ATR sensor,
Replace the DC controller PCB

XX51 When density data is computed using

SGNL value and REF value in ATR
control, the sensitivity coefficient
becomes 0 due to backup data
corruption.

Replace the DC controller PCB

XX81 P-SENS-P is less than 255 when a base Clean the patch image reading sensor window
(drum face) of patch detection is read
out.
XX90 A computation result of patch reading in Check on attachment of the developing unit,
patch detection is less than 16.
Replace the patch image reading sensor, Replace
the developing unit
XX91 A computation result of patch reading in Check on toner leak from toner buffer in the
patch detection is 1008 or more.
developing unit, Replace the patch image reading
sensor
XX92 A computation result of patch reading in Check on attachment of the developing unit,
patch detection is less than 42 for Y/M/ Replace the patch image reading sensor, Replace
C and less than 73 for Bk 3 times in
the developing unit
succession.
XX93 A computation result of patch reading in Check on toner leak from toner buffer in the
patch detection is 522 or more for Y/M/ developing unit, Replace the patch image reading
C and 543 or more for Bk 3 times in
sensor
succession.
XXA0 In ATR control, SGNL is less than 62.

Clean the ATR sensor window, Check on

attachment of the developing unit, Check on a break
in the ATR sensor, Replace the ATR sensor

XXA1 In ATR control, REF is less than 62.

Check on a break in the ATR sensor, Replace the

ATR sensor

XXA2 In ATR control, SGNL is 960 or more. Check on a break in the ATR sensor, Check on
operation of the shutter, Replace the ATR sensor
XXA3 In ATR control, REF is 960 or more.

Check on a break in the ATR sensor, Replace the

ATR sensor

XXA8 In ATR control, the detected T/D ratio is Check on toner leak from toner buffer in the
upper than its upper limit (13%) 10
developing unit, Replace the ATR sensor
times in succession.
XXA9 In ATR control, the detected T/D ratio is Check on attachment of the developing unit,
lower than its lower limit (3%) 3 times Replace the ATR sensor
in succession.
E021

Developing rotary error

0001 HP of the developing rotary fails to be
detected.
0002 Flag detection timing while the
developing rotary rotates is too fast or
too late.

Check on connection of the HP sensor, between the

rotary motor and the DC controller PCB, Replace
the HP sensor, Replace the DC controller PCB,
Replace the rotary motor

0003 The sensor fails to detect the flag when

the developing rotary stops at the
developing position.
E026

Toner empty error

XX=01:Y XX=02:M

XX=03:C

XX=04:K

15-5

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
XX01 After toner runs out, toner density fails Replace the toner container, Check on a position of
to go back to normal even if toner
the developing shutter
replacement and toner recovery have
been performed 5 times or more in
succession.
E032

The counter of the NE controller fails to operate.

0001 A break in the count pulse signal is
detected.

E045

OHP sensor error

0001 The sampling data measured during
initial multiple rotations is lower than
the specific level.

E067

E070

Check on a break in the cable

Replace the OHP sensor

High voltage-related error

0100 The measured current of the primary
transfer ATVC is abnormal twice in
succession.

Check on the primary transfer roller spring, Clean

the position where the primary transfer roller
contacts, Replace the primary transfer roller,
Replace the drum unit
Check a value
of COPIER> DISPLAY> MISC> DRM-LIFE, and
replace the drum unit if the value is near 100
because the drum may have reached its life
expectancy.

0110 The measured voltage of the primary

transfer ATVC is abnormal twice in
succession.

Turn OFF and back ON the main power

ITB HP detection error

0001 HP of the ITB fails to be detected even Clean the HP detection seal, Clean/Replace the HP
after the specific period of time.
sensor
Abnormality of the HP sensor,
Deviation of the belt from its position to
either edge, or soiling of the seal
0002 The next HP fails to be detected within Clean the ITB back side and the drive roller
the specific period of time after the HP
of the ITB is detected.
0003 The next HP is detected earlier than the Clean the HP detection seal, Clean/Replace the HP
specific period of time after the HP of sensor
the ITB is detected.
The ITB is torn due to scratches, and the
sensor detects the tear as a HP by
mistake.

E100

BD error
0001 Speed lock of the BD speed control fails Check on connection between the laser scanner unit
to be executed 5 sec after the laser
and the DC controller PCB, Check on 24V line fuse,
scanner motor starts to operate.
Replace the laser scanner unit
0002 The speed lock of the BD speed control
fails while rotation of the laser scanner
motor is stable.
0003 The phase lock of the BD phase control
fails while rotation of the laser scanner
motor is stable.
0004 Phase lock of the BD phase control fails
to be executed 6 sec after the laser
scanner motor starts to operate.

E110

Operation error of the laser scanner motor

0001 Speed lock of the FG speed control fails Check on connection between the laser scanner unit
to be executed 5 sec after the laser
and the DC controller PCB, Check on 24V line fuse,
scanner motor starts to operate.
Replace the laser scanner unit

E202

CIS unit HP detection error

0001 The HP sensor fails to be ON after the Disconnect and then connect the connector, Replace
CIS unit moves backward for a specific the scanner HP sensor, Replace the scanner motor,
distance or more.
Replace the reader controller PCB
0002 The HP sensor fails to be OFF after the
CIS unit moves forward for a specific
distance or more.

E225

CIS light quantity error

0001 Normal light-up of the lamp fails to be
confirmed at the time of power-on and
shading correction when a job starts.

E227

Power supply error in the reader unit

0001 24V port is off at power-on.
0002 24V port is off when a job starts.
0003 24V port is off when a job terminates.
0004 24V port is off during a drive under
load.

E243

15-6

Disconnect and then connect the connector, Replace

the document lamp (xenon tube), Replace the CIS,
Replace the inverter PCB, Replace the reader
controller PCB

Control panel unit error

Disconnect and connect the power supply

connector, Replace the power supply

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
0000 Communication between the main
controller and the control panel unit is
abnormal.
E248

Check on connection between the main controller

PCB and the control panel unit

Backup memory error

0000 Check error of the SRAM PCB (at start Check on connection of the SRAM PCB, Replace
up)
the SRAM PCB
0001 Reader controller EEPROM error at
power-on

Replace the reader controller PCB

0002 Reader controller EEPROM writing

error
0003 Reader controller EEPROM reading
error after check error writing
E315

Abnormality of image data

* 0008 ASIC (for compression/decompression) Check on connection of the image conversion
on the image conversion PCB is faulty. board, Replace the image conversion board
Timeout error during encoding (No
response after 30sec passed)
000e Data is corrupt (Abnormality of
memory/HDD)
Soft decode error

Replace the image memory (SDRAM) , Replace the

HDD

* 0010 ASIC (for compression/decompression) Check on connection of the image conversion

on the image conversion PCB is faulty. board, Replace the image conversion board
Timeout error during decoding
* 0025 ASIC (for compression/decompression)
on the image conversion PCB is faulty.
Image data transfer error during rotation
processing.
* 0028 ASIC (for compression/decompression)
on the image conversion PCB is faulty.
Timeout error during rotation
processing
* 0034 ASIC (for scaling processing) on the
image conversion PCB is faulty.
Image data transfer error during scaling
processing
* 0036 ASIC (for scaling processing) on the
image conversion PCB is faulty.
Timeout error during scaling processing
E351

Main controller PCB error

0000 Communication error of the main
controller PCB occurs at start-up.

E400

Feeder communication error

0001 Checksum error
0002 Reception status error
0003 Reception interrupt error

E490

E505

Connect an appropriate feeder

Finisher communication error

0001 Communication error is detected
between the main body and the finisher
for specific times and specific period of
time.

E503 ***

Check on connection between the ADF controller

PCB and the main controller PCB (sub), Replace
the ADF controller PCB, Replace the main
controller PCB (sub)

Model error
0001 Feeder for other model is detected.

E500

Check on connection between the main controller

PCB and the main controller PCB (sub) , Replace
the main controller PCB, Replace the main
controller PCB (sub)

Check on connection between the DC controller

PCB and the finisher controller PCB, Replace the
finisher controller PCB, Replace the DC controller
PCB

Finisher internal communication error

0002 Communication error between the
finisher and the saddle unit

Check on connection between the saddle stitcher

controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB,
Replace the finisher controller PCB, Replace the
saddle stitcher controller PCB

0003 Communication error between the

finisher and the puncher unit

Check on connection between the puncher

controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB,
Replace the finisher controller PCB, Replace the
puncher controller PCB

Finisher backup memory error

0001 Data stored in the backup memory is
abnormal.

Check on connection between the DC controller

PCB and the finisher controller PCB, Replace the
finisher controller PCB, Replace the DC controller
PCB

**** 0002 Abnormality of puncher unit EEPROM Check on connection between the puncher
data
controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB,
Replace the finisher controller PCB, Replace the
puncher controller PCB
E514

*** Stack delivery error / **** End assist motor error

15-7

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
*** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be ON within
1500ms after the return belt starts to
move to its HP.

Check on a drive of the stack retaining roller,

Replace the return belt U-turn HP sensor (SR5) ,
Replace the stack delivery motor (M2)

*** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be OFF within

1500ms after the return belt starts to
move to the belt contact position.
**** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be OFF after the Replace the end assist HP sensor (PI39) , Replace
the end assist motor (M39)
end assist motor rotates for a specific
period of time.
**** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be ON after the
end assist motor rotates for a specific
period of time.
E519 ****

Gear change motor error

0001 The HP sensor fails to be OFF after the Replace the gear change HP sensor (PI49) , Replace
gear change motor rotates for a specific the gear change motor (M40)
period of time.
0002 The HP sensor fails to be ON after the
gear change motor rotates for a specific
period of time.

E530

*** Rear alignment error / **** Front alignment error

*** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be ON within
2000ms after the rear adjuster plate
starts to move to its HP.

Replace the rear adjuster plate HP sensor (SR4) ,

Replace the rear adjuster plate motor (M4)

*** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be OFF within

1000ms after the rear adjuster plate
starts to move from its HP.
**** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be OFF after the Replace the front adjuster plate HP sensor (PI36) ,
front jog motor rotates for a specific
Replace the front adjuster plate motor (M33)
period of time.
**** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be ON after the
front job motor rotates for a specific
period of time.
E531

Staple error
*** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be ON within
Replace the stapling HP sensor (SR18) , Replace the
500ms after the staple motor starts to
staple motor (M9)
drive in the reverse direction to recover
from a staple jam.
*** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be OFF within
500ms after the staple motor starts to
drive.
**** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be OFF after the Replace the staple HP sensor (PI50) , Replace the
staple motor rotates for a specific period staple motor (M41)
of time.
**** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be ON after the
staple motor rotates for a specific period
of time.

E532

Staple unit shift error

*** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be ON within
11000ms after the staple unit starts to
move to the stapling HP.

Replace the stapler slide HP sensor (SR6) , Replace

the stapler slide motor (M8)

*** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be OFF within

1000ms after the staple unit starts to
move from its HP.
**** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be OFF after the Replace the stapler shift HP sensor (PI50) , Replace
staple shift motor rotates for a specific the stapler shift motor (M35)
period of time.
**** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be ON after the
stapler shift motor rotates for a specific
period of time.
E535

Swing error
*** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be ON within
2000ms after the swing arm starts to
move to its HP.

Check on operation of the stack delivery motor

swing mechanism, Replace the swing cam HP
sensor (SR7) , Replace the swing cam motor (M5)

*** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be OFF within

1000ms after the swing arm starts to
move from its HP.
**** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be OFF after the Replace the swing HP sensor (PI35) , Replace the
swing motor rotates for a specific period swing motor (M36)
of time.
**** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be ON after the
swing motor rotates for a specific period
of time.
E537

15-8

*** Front alignment error / **** Rear alignment error

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
*** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be ON within
2000ms after the front adjuster plate
starts to move to its HP.

Replace the front adjuster plate HP sensor (SR3) ,

Replace the front adjuster plate motor (M3) ,
Replace the adjuster plate drive belt

*** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be OFF within

1000ms after the front adjuster plate
starts to move from its HP.
**** 0001 The HP sensor fails to be OFF after the Replace the rear adjuster plate HP sensor (PI37) ,
swing motor rotates for a specific period Replace the rear adjuster plate motor (M34)
of time.
**** 0002 The HP sensor fails to be ON after the
swing motor rotates for a specific period
of time.
E540

*** Stack tray up/down error / **** Upper tray up/down error
*** 0002 Paper surface detection fails to end
within 1000ms.
*** 0003 Encoder lock within 200ms fails to
reach 10pulse during paper surface
detection.

Replace the stack tray top paper sensor (SR9) ,

Replace the stack tray bottom paper sensor (SR10) ,
Replace the stack tray upper limit sensor (SR13) ,
Replace the stack tray lower limit sensor (SR12) ,
Replace the stack tray shift motor (M7)

*** 0004 Outputs of the top paper sensor, bottom

paper sensor, tray upper limit sensor,
and tray lower limit sensor have
abnormality during paper surface
detection.
**** 0001 The upper tray up/down motor clock is Replace the shift motor (M37) of the tray 1, Replace
abnormal.
the shift area sensor PCB of the tray 1
**** 0002 Area is abnormal.
**** 0003 The safety switch is activated.
E542 ****

Lower tray up/down error

0001 The lower tray up/down motor clock is Replace the shift motor (M38) of the tray 2, Replace
abnormal.
the shift area sensor PCB of the tray 2
0002 Area is abnormal.
0003 The safety switch is activated.

E577 ***

Paddle error
0001 The HP sensor fails to be ON within
Replace the paddle HP sensor (SR8) , Replace the
1500ms after the paper retaining paddle paddle motor (M6)
starts to move to its HP.
0002 The HP sensor fails to be OFF within
1000ms after the paper retaining paddle
starts to move from its HP.

E580

Stack tray up/down error

0001 The stack tray fails to reach the stack
tray height sensor 4sec. after the stack
tray up/down motor starts to move up
the tray; or the stack tray fails to come
out of the height sensor.

E584 ****

Check on overload on the stack tray up/down motor,

Replace the stack tray up/down motor (M5),
Replace the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) ,
Replace the stack tray up/down motor clock sensor
(S9)

Shutter unit error

0001 The shutter open sensor fails to be OFF Replace the stack ejection motor (M32) , Replace
(The shutter cannot be closed).
the shutter open/close clutch (CL31), Replace the
shutter HP sensor (PI45)
0002 The shutter open sensor fails to be ON
(The shutter cannot be opened).

E590 *****

Replace the stack ejection motor (M32) , Replace

the shutter open/close clutch (CL31), Replace the
shutter HP sensor (PI45)

Puncher motor error

0001 The puncher HP sensor fails to be
detected after the puncher motor is
driven for 200ms.

Replace the puncher HP sensor, Replace the

puncher motor

0002 The puncher fails to detect the puncher

HP sensor after the puncher motor stops
during initial operation.
E591 *****

Puncher dust sensor error

0001 Light receiving voltage at the time of
light emission is abnormal.

Replace the puncher dust sensor

0002 Light receiving voltage at the time of

non-light-emission is abnormal.
E592 *****

Puncher side registration sensor error

0001 Light receiving voltage at the time of
light emission is abnormal.

Replace the end sensor

0002 Light receiving voltage at the time of

non-light-emission is abnormal.
0003 Light receiving voltage at the time of
light emission is abnormal.

Replace the side registration sensor 1

0004 Light receiving voltage at the time of

non-light-emission is abnormal.

15-9

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
0005 Light receiving voltage at the time of
light emission is abnormal.

Replace the side registration sensor 2

0006 Light receiving voltage at the time of

non-light-emission is abnormal.
0007 Light receiving voltage at the time of
light emission is abnormal.

Replace the side registration sensor 3

0008 Light receiving voltage at the time of

non-light-emission is abnormal.
0009 Light receiving voltage at the time of
light emission is abnormal.

Replace the side registration sensor 4

000A Light receiving voltage at the time of

non-light-emission is abnormal.
E593 *****

Puncher shift motor error

0001 The HP sensor fails to be OFF.
0002 The HP sensor fails to be ON.

E5F0 ****

Replace the HP sensor, Replace the puncher shift

motor

Saddle paper positioning error

0001 The paper positioning plate HP sensor
fails to be ON after the paper
positioning plate motor is driven for
1.33 sec.

Replace the paper positioning plate motor (M4S),

Replace the paper positioning plate HP sensor
(PI7S)

0002 The paper positioning plate HP sensor

fails to be OFF after the paper
positioning plate motor is driven for 1
sec.
E5F1 ****

Saddle paper folder error

0001 The number of detection pulses for the
paper folder motor clock sensor is
below the specific level.

Replace the paper folder motor (M2S), Replace the

paper folder motor clock sensor (PI4S)

0002 The paper folder HP sensor fails to

change after the paper folder motor is
driven for 3 sec.
E5F2 ****

Saddle guide error

0001 The guide HP sensor fails to be ON after Replace the guide motor (M3S), Replace the guide
the guide motor is driven for 0.455 sec. HP sensor (PI13S)
0002 The HP sensor fails to be OFF after the
guide motor is driven for 1 sec.

E5F3 ****

Saddle alignment error

0001 The adjuster plate HP sensor fails to be Replace the jog motor (M5S), Replace the adjuster
ON after the jog motor is driven for 0.5 plate HP sensor (PI5S)
sec. (for 1.67 sec. during initial
operation)
0002 The adjuster plate HP sensor fails to be
OFF after the jog motor is driven for 1
sec.

E5F4 ****

Saddle rear side staple error

0001 The stitching HP sensor fails to be ON Replace the stitcher motor (rear, M6S), Replace the
after the stitcher motor (rear) rotates in stitching HP sensor (rear, MS5S)
the adverse direction for 0.5 sec. or
more.
0002 The stitching HP sensor fails to be OFF
after the stitcher motor (rear) rotates for
0.5 sec. or more.

E5F5 ****

Saddle front side staple error

0001 The stitching HP sensor fails to be ON Replace the stitcher motor (front, M7S), Replace
after the stitcher motor (front) rotates in the stitching HP sensor (front, MS7S)
the adverse direction for 0.5 sec. or
more.
0002 The stitching HP sensor fails to be OFF
after the stitcher motor (front) rotates for
0.5 sec. or more.

E5F6 ****

Saddle paper push-on error

0001 The paper pressure plate HP sensor fails Replace the paper pressure plate motor (M8S),
to be ON after the paper pressure plate Replace the paper pressure plate HP sensor (PI14S)
motor is driven for 0.3 sec. or more.
0002 The paper pressure plate HP sensor fails
to be OFF after the paper pressure plate
motor is driven for 80ms or more.
0003 The number of detection pulses for the Replace the paper pressure plate motor (M8S),
paper pressure plate motor clock sensor Replace the paper pressure plate motor clock sensor
is below the specific level.
(PI1S)

15-10

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
0004 The paper pressure plate leading edge Replace the paper pressure plate motor (M8S),
sensor fails to be OFF after the paper
Replace the paper pressure plate leading edge
pressure plate motor is driven for 80ms sensor (PI15S)
or more.
0005 The paper pressure plate leading edge
sensor fails to be ON after the paper
pressure plate motor is driven for 0.3
sec. or more.
E5F8 ****

E5F9 ****

Saddle connector error

0001 Disconnection of the guide HP sensor
connector is detected.

Disconnect and then connect the guide HP sensor

(PI13S) connector

0002 Disconnection of the paper pressure

plate HP sensor connector is detected.

Disconnect and then connect the paper pressure

plate HP sensor (PI14S) connector

0003 Disconnection of the paper pressure

plate leading edge sensor connector is
detected.

Disconnect and then connect the paper pressure

plate leading edge sensor (PI15S) connector

Saddle switch error

0001 Open of the inlet cover is detected for 1 Replace the inlet cover switch (MS1S), Replace the
sec. or more after the host machine starts front cover switch (MS2S), Replace the delivery
initial rotation/printing while the
cover switch (MS3S)
following sensors detect their covers
closed.
- Inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
- Front cover open/close sensor (PI2S)
- Delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
Or, the front cover switch (MS2S) or the
delivery cover switch (MS3S) is open.
0002 Open of the front cover switch is
Replace the front cover switch (MS2S), Replace the
detected for 1 sec. or more after the host delivery cover switch (MS3S)
machine starts initial rotation/printing
while the following sensors detect their
covers closed.
- Inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
- Front cover open/close sensor (PI2S)
- Delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
0003 Open of the delivery cover switch is
Replace the inlet cover switch (MS1S), Replace the
detected for 1 sec. or more after the host front cover switch (MS2S), Replace the delivery
machine starts initial rotation/printing cover switch (MS3S)
while the following sensors detect their
covers closed.
- Inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
- Front cover open/close sensor (PI2S)
- Delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
- Delivery cover switch (MS3S)

E601

Abnormality of image memory

0000 Communication error of the image
memory (SDRAM)

Replace the SDRAM

E602

Hard disk error

E604

The image memory (SDRAM) is faulty/insufficient

0000 Memory capacity required for a model
fails to be recognized.

Refer to [Details of E602]

Add on the SDRAM

** 0001 Memory for MEAP application is

insufficient.
** 0768 Memory is faulty/insufficient (768MB
is required)
** 1024 Memory is faulty/insufficient (1024MB
is required)
E609 *

Abnormal low temperature of the hard disk

0008 At start-up, temperature of the HDD
Replace the HDD
fails to reach the specific level within a
specific period of time.
0009 During recovery from sleep mode,
temperature of the HDD is below the
specific level within the specific period
of time.

E610 **

Failure in the hard disk cryptographic key

0001 The encryption board is not attached.

Attach the encryption board

0002 Memory is faulty/insufficient

Add on memory

0101 Initialization of a key storage area in the Turn OFF and back ON the main power, Replace
memory ends in failure.
the main controller PCB
0102 Initialization of code processing ends in Turn OFF and back ON the main power, Replace
failure.
the encryption board
0201 Code processing error
0202 Code processing error
0301 Creation of a cryptographic key ends in
failure.

15-11

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
0302 Failure in the cryptographic key is
detected.
0303 Failure in the cryptographic key is
detected.
0401 Error is detected during encrypting.
0402 Error is detected during decoding.
E674

Turn OFF and back ON the main power, Replace

the main controller PCB
The HDD will be initialized due to the error.
Turn OFF and back ON the main power, Replace
the encryption board

FAX board communication error

0001 Communication error between the FAX Check on connection between the FAX board and
board and the main controller PCB is
the main controller PCB, Replace the FAX board,
detected for the specific number of
Replace the main controller PCB
times.
* 0002 Communication error between the FAX
board and the main controller PCB is
detected for the specific number of
times.
** 0004 Access to the modem IC is abnormal.
** 0008 Access to the port IC is abnormal.
** 000C Access to the modem IC and port IC is
abnormal.
** 0010 Abnormality is detected when the timer Replace the main controller PCB
device is open.
** 0011 Abnormality is detected when the timer
device starts.

E677

Abnormality of the external controller

0003 Abnormality of the external controller
Abnormality is detected in
configuration check when the external
controller starts up.

Check on connection of the cable, Re-install the

external controller system

0010 Controller for other mode is connected. Connect an appropriate controller, Re-install the
external controller system
0080 Communication with the printer is
abnormal after the external controller
starts up properly.
E710

Check on connection of the cable, Re-install the

external controller system

IPC initialization error

0001 The status fails to be ready within 3 sec Check on connection of the cable
after the IPC chip starts up.

E711

IPC communication error

0001 Error is set to the error register of the
Check on connection of the cable, Replace the ADF
IPC chip 4 times or more within 1.5 sec. controller PCB, Replace the reader controller PCB
0002 Error is detected 4 times or more within Check on connection of the cable, Replace the
1.5 sec. after communication between finisher controller PCB, Replace the DC controller
the finisher and the printer stops, and
PCB
recovery ends in failure.

E712

Communication error between the ADF and the reader

0001 Communication between the reader and Check on connection of the cable, Replace the ADF
the ADF stops, and the communication controller PCB, Replace the reader controller PCB
cannot recover for 5 sec. or more.

E713

Communication error between the finisher and the printer

0000 Communication between the finisher
and the copier stops.

E717

Check on connection of the cable, Replace the

finisher controller PCB, Replace the DC controller
PCB

Communication error with the NE controller

0001 The NE controller connected before the Check on connection of the cable
power is turned off fails to be
To recover from the error: In service mode
recognized at power-on.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR >ERR
0002 A break in the IPC, IPC communication
fails to recover

E719

Communication error with the coin vender/card reader

0001 The coin vender connected before the
power is turned off fails to be
recognized at power-on.
0002 - A break in the IPC cable connected to
the coin vender, IPC communication
fails to recover
- A break in the paper pickup/delivery
signal line
- Incorrect connection is detected (Short
circuit in Tx and Rx of IPC)
0011 The card reader connected before the
power is turned off fails to be
recognized at power-on.
0012 A break in the IPC cable connected to
the card reader, IPC communication
fails to recover

E730

15-12

PDL error

Check on connection of the cable

To recover from the error: In service mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR >ERR

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
1001 PDL software error
Initialization error when a job starts.

Reset PDL, Turn OFF and back ON the main power

100A PDL software error

System error such as a failure in
initialization occurs during job
processing.
9004 Open interface communication error
PAI communication error with the
external controller
9005 Connection error between the video
cable and the external controller is
detected.

Turn OFF and back ON the main power, Check on

connection of the Open interface board/cable,
Replace the external controller, Replace the Open
interface board, Replace the main controller PCB

A006 PDL communication error

PDL has no response

Reset PDL, Turn OFF and back ON the main

power, Check on connection of the UFR board, Reinstall the system, Replace the main controller PCB,
Format and re-install the whole system.

A007 PDL version mismatch

Machine control software version and
PDL control software version do not
match at start-up.

Reset PDL, Turn OFF and back ON the main

power, Format and re-install the whole system

B013 PDL built-in font error

Font data is corrupt at start-up.

Turn OFF and back ON the main power, Re-install

the system, Format and re-install the whole system.

C000 Initialization error

Format and re-install the whole system, Replace the

main controller PCB.

C001 HDD access error

Format and re-install the whole system, Replace the

HDD, Replace the main controller PCB.

E731

UFR PCB error

3000 The UFR PCB fails to be recognized at Check on connection of the UFR PCB * , Replace
start-up.
the UFR PCB * , Replace the main controller PCB
3001
The UFR PCB fails to be initialized at
start-up.
3002 Rambus fails to be initialized.
3015 Image data fails to be sent to the tip on
the main controller PCB (main).

E732

Reader communication error

0001 DDI-S communication error

E733

Check on connection between the reader controller

PCB and the main controller PCB, Check on the
reader power supply

Printer communication error

0000 The printer fails to be detected at startup.
0001 DDI-P communication error

E740

Turn OFF and back ON the main power, Replace

the UFR PCB * , Replace the main controller PCB

Check on connection between the DC controller

PCB and the main controller PCB, Check on the
printer power supply

Abnormality of the Ethernet board

0002 Incorrect MAC address is detected at
start-up.

Replace the Ethernet board * , Replace the main

controller PCB (sub LAN-bar) **

0003 Incorrect network ID is detected at startup.

E743

DDI communication error

0001 The reader controller PCB detects
Disconnect and then connect the reader
communication error between the main communication cable connector, Replace the reader
controller PCB and the reader controller controller PCB, Replace the main controller PCB
PCB.

E744

Language file/BootROM error

0001 Language version and Bootable version Upgrade the version of the Language file
in the HDD differ.
0002 The language size in the HDD is too
large.
0003 Language in Config.txt in the HDD that
should be switched fails to be found.
Switch to the language in the HDD
cannot be done.
0004 Switch to the language in the HDD
cannot be done.
1000 The BootROM for other model is
connected.
* 1001 System version and BootROM version
do not match.
2000 Incorrect engine ID is detected.
* 4000 Incorrect DC controller PCB is
detected.

E745 *

Replace the BootROM

Replace the BootROM, Upgrade the system version
Re-install the system
Upgrade the DC controller PCB version

Token ring board error

15-13

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
0001 Initialization of the token ring driver
using PCI ends in failure.

Check on connection of the token ring board,

Replace the token ring board

0002 MAC address is abnormal when the

token ring driver is initialized.
0003 Board information acquisition/setting is
abnormal when the token ring board is
initialized.
0004 Connection error when the token ring
driver starts up.
E746 *

Check on connection of the cable, Check on power

supply of the MAU

Option board error

0003 The UFR PCB for other model is
detected at start-up.

Replace with an appropriate UFR PCB

0004 The main controller PCB (sub) for other Replace with an appropriate main controller PCB
model is detected at start-up.
(sub)
E747 *

Main controller PCB error (Image processing ASIC or memory control/communication

control ASIC)
XXXX IC12 (image processing ASIC) or IC23 Turn OFF and back ON the main power, Replace
(memory control/communication
the main controller PCB (main)
control ASIC, CPU) on the main
controller PCB is abnormal (such as
image data transfer error)

E747 **

Main controller PCB error

0000-1217 An error occurs in the main controller
PCB (Main).

Turn the main power off and turn it back on.

Replace the main controller PCB (Main).

2000-3D00 An error occurs in the communication Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB
with the main controller PCB (Sub PE). (Sub PE), or replace it.
Replace the main controller PCB (Main).
3F00,3F02 When Unmounting of the main
controller PCB (Sub PE) is detected.

Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB

(Sub PE), or replace it.

6000-7D00 An error occurs in the communication

with the main controller PCB (Sub R)

Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB

(Sub R), or replace it.
Replace the main controller PCB (Main).

7F00 When unmounting of the main

controller PCB (Sub R) is detected.
8000-9C00 A error occurs in the communication
with the open interface PCB.
9F00 When unmounting of the main
controller PCB (Sub R) is detected.

Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB

(Sub R), or replace it.
Disconnect and connect the open interface PCB, or
replace it.
Replace the main controller PCB (Main).
Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB
(Sub R), or replace it.

C000-DC00 An error occurs in the communication Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB
with the main controller PCB (Sub SJ). (Sub SJ), or replace it.
Replace the main controller PCB (Main).
DF00 When unmounting of the main
controller PCB (Sub SJ) is detected.

Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB

(Sub SJ), or replace it.

FF00 Incorrect main controller PCB (Sub SJ/ Replace with an appropriate main controller PCB
PE/R) or incorrect open interface PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R) or open interface PCB.
is detected.
EXXX When an interrupt occurs from
unexpected ASIC.
E748 **

Turn the main power off and turn it back on.

Replace the main controller PCB (Main).

Main controller PCB error

4000 Any ASIC of the main controller PCB
(Sub SJ/PE/R) or ASIC of the open
interface PCB is not detected.

Disconnect and then connect the main controller

PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), Replace the main controller
PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), Disconnect and then connect
the relay PCB (GU-short), Replace the relay PCB
(GU-short), Disconnect and then connect the open
interface PCB, Replace the open interface PCB,
Replace the main controller PCB (main)

4010 Failure of the main controller PCB (Sub Disconnect and then connect the main controller
SJ/PE/R) or failure of the open interface PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), Replace the main controller
PCB is detected.
PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), Disconnect and then connect
the relay PCB (GU-short), Replace the relay PCB
(GU-short), Disconnect and then connect the open
interface PCB, Replace the open interface PCB,
Replace the main controller PCB (main)
4020 When connecting of an incorrect board Mount the PCI expansion board (encrypted board or
to the PCB expansion slot is detected: voice board) for the host machine.
4021 When the /SERROR signal of the PCI is Disconnect and connect the PCI expansion board, or
detected (such as the address parity
replace it.
error).
Replace the main controller PCB (Main).
4030 An error occurs in accessing to the HDD Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar)
controller.
Replace the main controller PCB (Main)

15-14

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
4040 Access error to the main controller PCB Disconnect and then connect the main controller
PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), Replace the main controller
(Sub SJ/PE/R) or access error to the
PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), Disconnect and then connect
open interface PCB.
the relay PCB (GU-short), Replace the relay PCB
(GU-short), Disconnect and then connect the open
interface PCB, Replace the open interface PCB,
Replace the main controller PCB (main)
4041 An error occurs in accessing to the
counter memory PCB.

Disconnect and connect the counter memory PCB,

or replace it.
Replace the main controller PCB (Main).

4042 An error occurs in size of SDRAM.

Disconnect and connect SDRAM, replace it, or add

another.
Replace the main controller PCB (Main)

4043 An error occurs in reading MAC

address.

Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar).

Replace the main controller PCB (Main).

4044 An error occurs in accessing to ECO-ID Connect and disconnect ECO-ID PCB, or replace it.
PCB.
Replace the main controller PCB (Main)
4045 An error occurs in accessing to RTC.

Disconnect and connect SRAM, or replace it.

Replace the main controller PCB (Main).

4050 An error occurs in accessing to LAN

controller.

Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar).

Replace the main controller PCB (Main).

4150 When an exhaustion of battery to

backup SRAM/RTC is detected

Turn off the main power and turn it back on.

Replace the SRAM PCB.

4160 An error occurs in accessing to the FAX Replace the main controller PCB (Main)
I/F controller.
4170 An error occurs in accessing to the USB Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar).
host controller.
Replace the main controller PCB (Main).
4180 An error occurs in accessing to the USB Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar).
device controller.
Replace the main controller PCB.
4190 An error occurs in accessing to the I/F
controller (Card reader, Coin robot) in
IPC communication.

Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar).

Replace the main controller PCB (Main).

4210 An error occurs in accessing to the

ASIC for I/O and interrupt.

Replace the main controller PCB (Main).

4220 An error occurs in reading

SDRAM(Slot position; Upper)

Disconnect and connect SDRAM, or replace it.

4221 An error occurs in reading

SDRAM(Slot position; Lower).

Disconnect and connect SDRAM, or replace it.

4230 An error occurs in accessing to the LCD Replace the main controller PCB (Main).
controller.

E749 **

4260 An error occurs in writing when the

BootROM version is upgraded.

Replace the BootROM.

4901 When turning off the 3.3V emergency

night power is detected during
operation.

Replace the controller power PCB.

Replace the main controller PCB (Main).

Restart in accordance with a change of the product configuration

0001 The BootROM is replaced with a
different type (when the PDL option is
installed) .

E803

Door close error

0001 Remote (+24V) OFF is detected soon
after the door is closed.
0002 Remote (+13V) OFF is detected soon
after the door is closed.

E804

Check on connection of the front cover open/close

switch (SW3) , Replace the front cover open/close
switch

Controller fan error

0004 Stoppage of the controller fan is
detected for 16 sec continuously.

E805

Turn OFF and back ON the main power to recover

Check on connection of the controller fan, Replace

the controller fan

Fan error
0001 Lock fails to be detected for 5sec
Check on connection of the exhaust fan (front),
continuously while the exhaust fan
Replace the exhaust fan (rear)
(front) is driven.
Disconnection of the fan connector.
Lock signal fails to be sent due to a fan
failure.
0002 Lock fails to be detected for 5sec
Check on connection of the exhaust fan (rear),
continuously while the exhaust fan
Replace the exhaust fan (rear)
(rear) is driven.
Disconnection of the fan connector.
Lock signal fails to be sent due to a fan
failure.
0003 Lock fails to be detected for 5sec
Check on connection of the ITB fan, Replace the
continuously while the ITB fan is
ITB fan
driven.
Disconnection of the fan connector.
Lock signal fails to be sent due to a fan
failure.

15-15

Chapter 15
Code

Main Cause/Detail of Detection

Countermeasures

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3170/C2570 Series

***: Finisher-P1 ****: Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q2/Q4
*****: Puncher Unit
0004 Lock fails to be detected for 5sec
Check on connection of the toner intake fan,
continuously while the toner intake fan Replace the toner intake fan
is driven.
Disconnection of the fan connector.
Lock signal fails to be sent due to a fan
failure.

15-16

Chapter 15

15.2.2 E602 in Detail (iR C3100 Series)

0009-9736

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
If the machine suffers a fault associated with E602-xxyy, it calls for different remedial actions as identified by the sub code.
if E602-xxyy is indicated, be sure always to turn off and then on the machine (so that it will run auto recovery sequence).
T-15-1
xx

Partition

yy

Description

00

HDD as a
whole

01

The machine cannot recognize the HDD. The machine cannot find BOOTDEV
at time of startup.
Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the 2 types of
cables (power, IDE) connecting to the HDD; then, turn on the power.
When doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if the power is supplied.

02

NG

The machine cannot find the system software for the CPU of the main
controller (main) in BOOT DEV.
Remedy:

E
03

NG

The machine detects a read error sector while it is reading data from
BOOTDEV.
Remedy:

H
06

NG

NG

The machine cannot find the system software for the CPU of the main
controller (sub) in BOOTDEV.
Remedy:

E
07

NG

The machine cannot find an appropriate ICCProfile in BOOTDEV/PDLDEV.

Remedy:

NG

15-17

Chapter 15
T-15-2
xx

Partition

yy

Description

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
FF

DOSDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5
not identified

01, 02

The machine has encountered a read error or a file system error while
starting up.
Remedy:
NG

NG

if xxyy is 0701, 0702.

Remedy:
Ask the user to use the RUI to collect address book data, transfer
settings, and user mode
NG

data.

NG

if xxyy is 0801, 0802.

Remedy:

NG

NG

NG

if xxyy is FF01, FF02.

Remedy:

A
03

NG

The machine has encountered an HDD contact fault or, operating system
error.
Remedy:
Turn off the main power, and check the 2 types of cable (power, IDE)
connecting to the HDD; then, turn on the main power.
While doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if power is supplied.

11,21

NG

NG

The machine has encountered an HDD contact fault.

Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the 2 types of cable
(power, IDE) connecting to the HDD; then,turn on the power.
While doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if the power is
supplied.

13,25

NG

The machine has encountered a read error.

Remedy:

NG

NG

NG

NG

if xxyy is 0713, 0725.

Remedy:

NG

if xxyy is 0813, 0825.

Remedy:

15-18

NG

Chapter 15
xx

Partition

yy

Description

10,12,14,22,2 The machine has encountered a system error or a packet data error.
3,
24
Remedy:
NG

A:
1) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to execute: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HDCHECK*.
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
B:
1) Find the appropriate CHK-TYPE from the table 'HDD Format' ; then, make the followingselections, and type: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHKTYPE.
2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to execute: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR.
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
C:
1)** Start up the machine in normal mode (i.e., turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 7 keys ; then, make the following selections, and press
the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD).
2) Execute formatting of DOSDEV4 using the Service Support Tool.
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
D:
1) Replace the main controller (main) board.
2) Remove the image memory (SDRAM) and the boot ROM from the previous board, and mount them on the new board.
E:
1)** Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the power while pressing the 2 and 8 keys).
2) Format the HDD (ALL) using the Service Support Tool, and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
F:
1)** Replace the HDD, and start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while pressing the 2 and 8 keys).
2) Format the HDD (ALL) using the Service Support Tool, and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
G:
1) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to execute: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR.
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
H:
1) Turn off the main power; then, turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 9 keys (so that the machine will automatically start its remedial program*, turning the control panel solid black).
2) When done (i.e., when the control panel turns white), turn off and then on the main power.
If the machine does not run its remedial program in response to the foregoing step, go to E.
I:
1) Find the appropriate CHK-TYPE in the table "HDD Format"; then, make the following selections and enter CHK-TYPE.
2) Make the selections, and press the OK key to execute: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK*.
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
J:
1) Make the following selections, and enter '4': OPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to execute: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK (1 to 5 min).
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
* Takes about 30 to 50 min.
** As necessary, ask the user to use the RUI to collect address book data, transfer settings, and user mode settings.
T-15-3
HDD Format
Partition

CHK-TYPE

Typical data item deleted

DOSDEV

all relating to images (reservation, Box, fax); mode memory, routine

task button

FSTDEV

DOSDEV2

FSTPDEV

DOSDEV3

PDL spool

PDLDEV

PDL-related file (font, registration form, ICCProfile)

DOSDEV4

user data (address book, transfer settings), system software

BOOTDEV

DOSDEV5

non specific

15-19

Chapter 15

15.2.3 E602 in Detail (iR C3170/C2570 Series)

0009-9738

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

<E602-XXYY>
- XX= '00'
XX

YY

Description

Remedy

The HDD is not recognized.

- Turn off the power, and check the HDD cable for
disconnection; then, turn the
power back on.
- Turn on the power, and put your ear or finger against the HDD
to see if the disk inside it is rotating.
- Check if the HDD is run from 5 volt / 12 volt mains.
- Replace the HDD, and then re-install the system.
- Replace the main controller PCB.

The system software for the

main CPU is absent.
At start-up, the start-up partition
(BOOTDEV) is not found.

- Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the

SST; then, re-install the system software, and turn off and then
on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and then re-install the system.

An interrupt has been detected

during writing to BootDevice.

Remedy differs according to an error code screen.

01

02

<The error code screen is black and white>

- Turn off the power, and then back on while pressing 1 and 9 at
a time.
With this operation, recovery of the writing discontinuation
sector will start automatically (the screen is black at this time).
Progress of the recovery is displayed on the screen while the
writing discontinuation sector is being recovered, and the screen
becomes white when the recovery is completed. Then, turn off
and back on the power.
- Start up in safe mode. Execute full formatting using the STT,
and re-install the system. Then, turn off and back on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system.

00

03

<The error core screen is normal (spanner mark)>

- Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HD-CHECK; turn off and back
on the power.
- Start up in safe mode. Execute full formatting using the STT,
and re-install the system. Then, turn off and back on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system.
06

- XX= '01 to FF'

15-20

When the system for sub-CPU

is not found:

- Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the

SST; then, re-install the system software, and turn off and then
on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and then re-install the system.

07

When ICC profile is not found: - Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the
SST; then, re-install the system software, and turn off and then
on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and then re-install the system.

08

When the PS Kanji font does

not exist.

- Re-install the system.

Chapter 15

XX

YY
At start-up

XX

CHKTYPE

Partition

Description

03

05

During operation

00,01,02, 11,2
04
1

Remedy
FSTDEV

compressed image data

(e.g., Box)

IMG_MNG

file management table,

profile

03

FSTCDEV

job archiving (chasing)

04

THUMDEV

Thumbnail

05

APL_GEN

general data

06

TMP_GEN

general data (temporary

file)

07

TMP_FAX

for fax (temporary file)

08

TMP_PSS

for PDL spool

(temporary file)

PDLDEV

PDL related files

01
02

09

10

BOOTDEV

11

APL_MEAP

12

APL_SEND

13

BOOTDEV2

FF

Not
identified

*1

firmware (system,
MEAP, key, certificate,
PDF dictionary, RUI
content, audio
dictionary)

13,2 10,12,14,2
5
2,23,24
Remedy

*5

*9

*3

*8

*1

*5

*2

*6

Firmware (BOOTDEV)
Back-up

*3

*8

full check on HDD for

faulty sector and
recovery

*4

*7

*10

*11

*12

MEAP application

YY

address book, filter

Description

Remedy

*1

An ongoing write operation - Set CHK-TYPE to the appropriate device number, execute HDis interrupted (at start-up). CHECK, turn off the
power, and turn it back on.
- Type in CHK-TYPE that corresponds to the partition in question,
and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power.

*2

- Ask the user to download the address book data using a remote UI.
- Set CHK-TYPE to the appropriate device number, execute HDCHECK, turn off the
power, and turn it back on.
- Start download mode, and execute full formatting using the SST;
thereafter, turn off and then back on the power.

03

*3

The recovery operation for the boot partition necessarily requires

the use of the SST in safe mode.
- Set '0' for CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CHECK; thereafter, turn
off and then back on the power.
- Start download mode, and execute full formatting and re-install the
system software; thereafter, turn off and then back on the power.

*4

- Set '0' to CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and
then back on the power.
- Execute HD-CLEAR by setting '1', '2', '3', and '5' to CHK-type;
then, turn off and then back on the power.
A file system error has
occurred.

*5

*6
05

- Type in CHK-TYPE corresponding to the partition in question,

and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

The machine does not permit execution of HD-CLEAR in service

mode (to prevent loss of partition information such as address book
and filter data).
- Ask the user to download the address book data using a remote UI.
- Start download mode from service mode; then, execute full
formatting using
the SST, and re-install the system software. Thereafter, turn off and
then back on the power.

*7

- Execute HD-CLEAR by setting "1', '2', '3', and '5' to CHK-TYPE;

then, turn off and then back on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

*8

Recovery operation for the Boot partition necessarily requires the

use of the SST in safe mode.
- Start in safe mode, and execute full formatting in the SST, and reinstall the system software. Thereafter, turn off and then on the
power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

15-21

Chapter 15
YY

*9

00
01
02
04

*10

11
21

Description

There is poor connection of - Check the cable and the power connectors for disconnection.
the HDD.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

A write operation has been

suspended.

*11

13
25

*12

10
12
14
22
23
24

Remedy

There is poor contact for the - Check the cables and power cord for disconnection.
HDD, or there is a system - Start up in safe mode; then, execute full formatting using the SST,
error.
and re-install the system software. Thereafter, turn off and then back
on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

It is highly possible that document data in boxes on HDD is

damaged.
- Set CHK-TYPE to the appropriate device number, execute HDCHECK, turn off the
power, and turn it back on.
- Set CHK-TYPE to the appropriate device number, execute HDCLEAR, turn off the
power, and turn it back on.
(For BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2, or APL_SEND, re-format using
SST, and re-install the system.)
- Replace HDD, and then re-install the system.

There is a system error or a - Start up in safe mode; then, execute full formatting using the SST,
packet data error.
and re-install the system software. Thereafter, turn off and then back
on the power.
- Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.

15.3 Error Codes (SEND)

15.3.1 Self-Diagnostic Display
0003-9199

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Cause

Remedy

Scanning has stopped because the size of the data for the scanned original exceeds the limit. Scanning may
be possible if [Data Cmprssn] is set to [High Ratio], Resolution is lowered, or [Sharpness] is reduced.
Scanning was stopped because the data size of the
scanned original exceeded the maximum data size that
the machine could handle.

By selecting [High Ratio] for Data Compression Ratio,

lowering the Resolution, and lowering the Sharpness
setting, scanning may become possible.

Out of resources. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.

You cannot browse the network. There is a lack of TCP/ Wait for a while, and try browsing again.
IP resources because documents have just been
continuously sent or are being continuously sent through
FTP or Windows (SMB).
Set the IP Address.
This machine is not set with an IP address.

Specify the IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in

Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen), then turn the machine's
main power OFF and back ON again.

No response from the server. Check the settings.

The specified server settings are incorrect, or the server Wait for a while, and try browsing again. If there is still
is not turned ON. Alternatively, the machine's TCP/IP no response from the server, try selecting another server.
resources may be low.
NetWare is in use. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.
You cannot browse the network because NetWare is
printing through a Pserver or NDS PServer.

Wait until printing is complete, then try browsing again.

There are too many subdirectories.

You have exceeded the maximum number of
subdirectory levels allowed.

Specify a different destination because the directory

level that you are trying to access cannot be specified.

No response.
The server was not running when you tried to send.

Make sure that the server is ON, and check the

destination.

The network connection was lost when you tried to send. Check the status of the network.
(Either you could not connect to the destination, or the
connection was lost before the job could be completed.)

15-22

You tried to send through NetWare, but the Tree name

was not entered.

Enter the Tree name.

A TCP/IP error occurred when you tried to send an email message or an I-fax.

Check that the network cables and connectors are

properly connected.

Chapter 15
Cause

Remedy

Check the TCP/IP.

Cause The machine's TCP/IP connection is not
operating.

Check the IP Address Settings (IP Address, DHCP,

RARP, BOOTP) in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings
in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen).

Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings.

The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot 1. Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in
be determined.
Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen).
2. Check whether the DNS server's DNS settings are
correct.
If Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to Network Settings in System Settings (from the
'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, the machine Additional Functions screen).
will not be able to determine the host name.
Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.
The machine cannot connect to the specified IP address/ 1. Check the Gateway Address setting in IP Address
port.
Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
2. Check the Server Address and Port Number in
Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen).
3. Check whether the LDAP server is operating
normally.
4. If Login Information in Register LDAP Server in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen)
is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, check
whether UDP (User Datagram Protocol) packages are
blocked by the filter.
Check the user name and password or check settings.
When setting Login Information for the LDAP server to Check the User and Password settings when Login
'Use' or 'Use (security auth.)', the user name or password Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings
is incorrect.
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use' or
'Use (security auth.)'.
When setting Login Information for the LDAP server to Check the Domain Name setting when Login
'Use (security auth.)', the domain name is incorrect.
Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use
(security auth.)'.
Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.
The search could not be completed within the time
specified under <Search Timeout>.

Increase the time setting for Search Timeout in Register

LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).

The number of search results has exceeded limits. Change search conditions and try again.
1. Narrow down the search criteria, and then search
The number of addresses that meet the search criteria
exceeds the specified maximum number of addresses to again.
2. Increase the maximum number of addresses to search.
search.
Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server.
"/" is used in the search criterion.

Remove "/" from the search criterion, and search again.

The combination of characters used in the search

criterion does not constitute an acceptable search
criterion.
There is an unequal number of "(" and ")".
"*" is not placed within "( )".

Make sure that the characters for the search criterion are
combined properly, and search again.

If <Server LDAP version and character code> is set to

'ver.2 (JIS)', characters other than ASCII Code (0x200x7E) are being used.

Omit characters that cannot be used, and search again.

Cannot start searching because the version setting for the server is incorrect. Check the settings.
Although 'ver. 3' is set as the server LDAP version
Set Server LDAP version and character code in Register
number in Register LDAP Server in System Settings
LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional
(from the Additional Functions screen), the LDAP server Functions screen) to 'ver. 2'.
is running on version 2.

15.3.2 List of Error Codes without Messages

0003-9233

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Cause

Remedy

# 001
Paper or originals are jammed.

Place the document properly in the feeder or on the

platen glass, and remove any jammed paper or originals.

# 003

15-23

Chapter 15
Cause

Remedy

Communications that take longer than the preset time (64 1. Reduce the resolution, and try sending the document
minutes) caused the error.
again.
2. When receiving a document, ask the remote party to
either reduce the resolution at which the document is
scanned, or divide the document into two or more parts
before sending it.
# 005
The other party did not answer within 35 seconds.

Confirm that the remote machine is able to

communicate, and try again.

The receiving machine is not a G3 fax.

Check the type of receiving machine with the receiving

party.

# 009
There is no paper.

Load paper.

The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into the

machine.

Insert the paper drawer properly.

# 011
The document that you are sending is not placed
correctly.

Place the document properly in the feeder or on the

platen glass, and repeat the whole procedure from the
beginning.

# 012
The document could not be sent because the receiving
fax machine was out of paper.

Ask the receiving party to load paper into their fax

machine.

# 018
The receiving machine did not respond when your
machine redialed.

Confirm that the receiving machine is able to

communicate, and try again.

The documents could not be sent because the receiving

machine was engaged.

Confirm that the receiving machine is able to

communicate, and try again.

The settings on your machine do not match the settings Confirm that the receiving machine is able to
on the receiving machine.
communicate, and try again.
# 022
Forwarding could not be performed because all of the
addresses stored under the specified Group destination
have been deleted, or User Inboxes are specified as the
Group destination.

Re-enter the forwarding address and try sending again.

Transmission could not be performed because the

specified destination was deleted while the documents
were waiting to be sent.

Re-enter the address in the address book and try sending

again.

# 037
Documents could not be received because there was
insufficient memory available.

Erase unwanted documents and documents with errors

from memory to increase the amount of available
memory.

# 080
A subaddress is not set in the remote machine.

Check the subaddress of the remote machine, and try

again.

# 081
A password is not set in the remote machine.

Check the password of the remote machine, and try

again.

# 099
Sending was interrupted.

Try sending again.

# 102
The subaddress and/or password do not match.

Check the subaddress and/or password of the remote

machine, and try again.

# 107
The document could not be sent because there was
insufficient memory available.

1. Resend the document in a lower resolution.

2. Erase unwanted documents to make memory
available.
3. If this problem occurs frequently, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.

# 701
The specified Department ID does not exist, or the
password has changed.

Enter the correct Department ID or password using 0-9

(numeric keys) on the control panel, and try sending
again.

# 702
The document could not be sent because the memory is 1. Wait a few moments, and try again after the other send
full.
jobs are complete.
2. Do not send the document to too many recipients at the
same time. Send the document to a smaller number of
recipients each time.
# 703

15-24

Chapter 15
Cause

Remedy

The memory for the image data is full.

1. Wait a few moments, and try again after the other send
jobs are complete.
2. Erase documents stored in inboxes. If the machine still
does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and
then back ON again.

# 704
An error occurred while reading address information
from the Address Book.

Check the address settings. If the machine still does not

operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then
back ON again.

# 705
The send operation was interrupted because the size of
the image data is larger than the Maximum Data Size for
Sending set in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in Communications
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).

Change the Maximum Data Size for Sending setting in

E-mail/I-Fax Settings in Communications Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Select a lower resolution, or if you are using I-fax,
decrease the number of pages containing images that you
are sending each time, so that you do not exceed the
Maximum Data Size for Sending limit.

# 706
The Address Book is being imported or exported from
the Remote UI, or it is being used by another sending
component.

Wait until the Address Book import/export function

from the Remote UI or the other sending component is
complete, and try sending again.

# 711
The inbox memory is full.

Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox.

# 712
The maximum number of documents is already stored in Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox.
the inbox.
# 751
The server is not functioning. The network is down (the Check the recipient's address.
server is unable to connect to the network or was
Check that the network is up.
disconnected).
# 752
The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not correct,
or the server is not functioning.
The domain name or e-mail address may not be set. The
network is down.

Check the SMTP Server name and E-mail Address in Email/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen).
Check that the SMTP server is operating properly.
Check the network status.

# 753
A TCP/IP error occurred while sending an e-mail
message. (Socket, Select error, etc.)

Check the network cables and connectors. If the machine

still does not operate normally, turn the main power
OFF, and then back ON again.

# 754
The server is not functioning or the network is down.
The destination setting is not correct.

Check the server and network.

Check the destination's address settings.

# 755
You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System
correctly.
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
The IP address is not set.

Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System

Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).

When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System
assigned to the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
BOOTP server.
# 756
NetWare in NetWare Settings in Network Settings in
Turn NetWare to 'On'.
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen)
is set to 'Off'.
# 801
A timeout error occurred while the machine was
1. Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally.
communicating with the SMTP server to send an e-mail 2. Check the network status.
message or send/receive an I-fax.
The SMTP server returned an error while trying to
1. Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally.
connect. The destination is not correct. An error occurred 2. Check the network status.
on the server side during transmission to a file server.
3. Check the destination setting.
4. Check the status and setting of the file server.
You are sending a file to a destination to which you have Check the destination setting.
no write permission.
When the machine tried to send a file to the server, a file Change the setting on the file server to enable the file to
with the same name already exists on the FTP server and be overwritten.
that file cannot be overwritten.
When the machine tried to send a file to the server, either Check the destination setting.
the folder name is incorrectly specified or the password
is incorrect.

15-25

Chapter 15
Cause

Remedy

# 802
The name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax settings in
Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is incorrect. The DNS
server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings
in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is incorrect. Connection to
the DNS server failed.

Check the name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax and

DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
Check that the DNS server is functioning normally.

# 803
The connection was interrupted due to reasons on the
recipient's side before all of the pages could be sent.

Try sending again.

# 804
Unable to match the specified directory name when
sending data to a file server.

Check the destination.

You have no permission to access the folder.

Change the setting on the server to enable access to the

folder.

# 806
An incorrect user name or password was specified for the Change the user name or password.
sending of a file to a file server.
An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of Check the e-mail or I-fax address.
an e-mail message or I-fax.
# 810
A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection error
occurred while receiving an I-fax.

Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network

Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally.
Check the network status.

The POP server returned an error during the connection. Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally.
Check the network status.
A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network
to the POP server.
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally.
Check the network status.
# 815
You cannot log on to the file server because the machine Wait for a few moments before trying to send the data
is printing a document sent to that server. Simultaneous again, or change the NetWare server to which you are
connections are not possible.
sending your documents. Alternatively, stop the Pserver.
# 818
The received data is not in a printable file format.

Ask the sender to change the file format and resend the
data.

# 819
You have received data that cannot be processed (MIME Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.
information is incorrect).
# 820
You have received data that cannot be processed (BASE Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.
64 or uuencode is incorrect).
# 821
You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.
analysis error).
# 822
You have received data that cannot be processed (image Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.
data cannot be decoded).
# 827
You have received data that cannot be processed
(contains MIME information that is not supported).

Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.

# 828
You have received HTML data.

Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML, and
resend the data.

# 829
Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received.

# 830

15-26

This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data

in memory, but will delete any data that exceeds this
limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining pages.

Chapter 15
Cause

Remedy

A DSN (Delivery Status Notification) error notification

is received because of an incorrect I-fax address or
destination setting, or the data size of the sent documents
exceeds the mail server capacity.

1. Check the I-fax address or destination setting.

2. Set Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax
Settings in Communication Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) so that it is less
than the mail server capability.
3. Check the status of the mail server, DNS server, and
network.

# 831
An I-fax document could not be received using SMTP Reset the RX/Print Range setting in IP Address Settings
in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System
because of the RX/Print Range setting in IP Address
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
# 832
DSN (Delivery Status Notification) mail was not sent
because TCP/IP Settings or E-mail/I-Fax in Network
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) have not been set, or trouble has
occurred in the mail server.

1. Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address

Settings in TCP/IP Settings, and E-mail/I-Fax in
Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen).
2. Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.

# 833
MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail was not sent
because TCP/IP Settings or E-mail/I-Fax in Network
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) have not been set, or trouble has
occurred in the mail server.

1. Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address

Settings in TCP/IP Settings, and E-mail/I-Fax in
Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen).
2. Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.

# 834
An MDN error notification is received because of an
Check the I-fax address and destination settings.
incorrect I-fax address or destination setting, or trouble
has occurred in the network or mail server. Alternatively,
the memory of the receiving machine is full.
# 835
The maximum number of text lines for receiving an I-fax Ask the sender to reduce the amount of text data in the
has been exceeded.
body of the document, and resend the data.
# 837
A connection request was received from a host whose
connection is restricted by IP Address Settings, which
can be set in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).

Check the settings in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP

Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen). Make sure that the
connection request is made from an authorized host.

# 839
The user name or password for the SMTP authentication
(SMTP AUTH) in Authent./Encryption in E-mail/I-Fax
in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is incorrect.

Check the user name and password for SMTP

Authentication (SMTP AUTH) in Authent./Encryption
in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen).

# 841
The encryption algorithm that matches the mail server
does not exist for sending e-mail or I-fax.

1. Set Allow SSL in Network Settings in System Settings

(from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'.
2. Add the same encryption algorithm as the mail server
in the mail server settings.

# 842
Authentication using the client certificate was requested 1. Set Allow SSL in Network Settings in System Settings
by the mail server for sending e-mail or I-fax.
(from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'.
2. Change the mail server settings so that the client
certificate is not requested.
# 843
There is large difference between the current time set in 1. Change the current date and time in Date & Time
the KDC (Key Distribution Center) server and the one Settings in Timer Settings (from the Additional
set in the machine.
Functions screen).
2. Change the current time set in the KDC (Key
Distribution Center) server.
# 851
There is insufficient memory remaining in the system.

Check the system's available memory, and delete

unwanted documents in the inboxes.

The scanned document cannot be stored because there

are more than 100 documents in the specified inbox.

Delete unnecessary documents from the specified inbox.

# 852
An error occurred because the main power switch was
turned OFF while a job was being processed.

Check to see if the main power switch is turned ON. Try

processing the job again, if necessary.

# 899
The e-mail message or I-fax has been successfully sent, 1. Confirm whether reception was complete.
but reception may be incomplete because the
2. Check if you received an error notification.
transmission was relayed via multiple servers.
# 995

15-27

Chapter 15
Cause

Remedy

Reserved communication jobs were cleared.

Reserve the jobs again, if necessary.

15.4 Jam Codes

15.4.1 Jam Code (printer unit)
0005-4897

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Code

Type of jam

01xx

delay jam

02xx

stationary jam

0Axx

residnal jam

0B00

door open jam

0B01

door open jam (detection by software)

0D91

size mismatch (paper shorter than specified size)

0D92

medium mismatch (plane paper instead of transparency)

0D93

medium mismatch (transparency instead of plane paper)

Code

Sensor type

Sensor No.

xx01

cassette 1 retry sensor

PS10

xx02

cassette 2 retry sensor

PS11

xx03

cassette 3 retry sensor

PS1 (cassette pedestal)

xx04

cassette 4 retry sensor

PS2 (cassette pedestal)

xx05

pre-registration sensor

PS9

xx06

fixing inlet sensor

(residual paper only)

PS25

xx07

fixing inside delivery sensor

PS13

xx08

No. 1 delivery sensor

PS14
PS1A (2/3 delivery unit)

xx09

No. 2 delivery sensor

xx0A

No. 3 reversal sensor

PS4A (2/3 delivery unit)

xx0B

No. 3 delivery sensor

PS5A (2/3 delivery unit)

xx0C

duplex inlet sensor

PS3A (2/3 delivery unit)

xx0D

duplex re-pickup sensor

PS17

xx0E

deck retry sensor

PS6D (side paper deck)

xx0F

deck pull-off sensor

PS1D (side paper deck)

xx10

multifeeder pickup sensor

(no activation)

xx11

buffer inlet sensor

PS1B (buffer path unit)

xx12

buffer outlet sensor

PS2B (buffer path unit)

15.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related)

0005-4898

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

15-28

Code

Sensory type

Sensor No.

1011

delivery sensor feed delay jam

SR1 (Finisher-P1)

1101

delivery sensor feed stationary jam

1500

staple jam

1300

power-on jam

1400

door open jam

Code

Sensor type

1001

inlet path sensor feed delay jam

Sensor No.
P13

1002

punch path sensor (punch registration sensor) feed

delay jam

LED5/PTR5

1004

delivery path sensor feed delay jam

P14

1101

inlet path sensor feed stationary jam

P13

1102

punch path sensor (punch registration sensor) feed

stationary jam

LED5/PTR5

1104

delivery path sensor feed stationary jam

P14

1200

timing jam

P13

1500

stapler staple jam

STP

1300

power-on jam

P13,P14

1400

door open jam

DOOR

1644

punch jam

LED5/PTR5

1645

punch power-on jam

LED5/PTR5

1791

saddle feed sensor feed delay jam

P18S, PI19S, PI20S

Chapter 15
Code

Sensor type

Sensor No.

1792

saddle delivery sensor feed delay jam

PI11S

1793

saddle inlet sensor feed delay jam

PI22S

17A1

saddle feed sensor feed stationary jam

P18S, PI19S, PI20S

17A2

saddle delivery sensor feed stationary jam

PI11S, PI17S

17A3

saddle inlet sensor feed stationary jam

PI22S

1786

saddle staple jam

S STP

1787

saddle power-on jam

PI11S, PI18S, PI19S, PI20S, PI22S

1788

saddle door open jam

DOOR

15.4.3 Jam Code (ADF-related)

0005-4899

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Code

Sensor type

Sensor No. Description

0003

registration sensor delay

PI2

The registration sensor does not detect paper

within 1.5 sec after pickup takes place.
At time of reversal, the registration sensor does
not detect paper when the read motor has rotated
for a specific period of time.

0004

registration sensor stationary

PI2

After the registration sensor goes on, it does not

go off when the paper has been moved for an
equivalent of 500 mm (if long paper, 700 mm).

0005

read sensor delay

PI2, PI3

After the pickup request signal is received from

the reader, the read sensor does not detect paper
when the feed motor has rotated for a specific
period of time.

0006

read sensor stationary

PI3

After the read sensor goes on, the sensor does not
go off after the paper has been moved for an
equivalent of 500 mm (if long paper, 70 mm).

0007

delivery sensor delay

PI3, PI4

After the read request signal is received from the

reader, the delivery sensor does not detect paper
when the read motor has rotated for a specific
period of time.

0008

delivery sensor stationary

PI4

After the delivery sensor goes on, the sensor

does not go off when paper has been moved for
an equivalent of 500 mm (if long paper, 700
mm).

0044

1st sheet registration sensor stationary

PI2

A registration sensor stationary jam has been

identified for the 1st original.

0045

1st sheet read sensor delay

PI2, PI3

A read sensor delay jam has been identified for

the 1st original.

0046

1st sheet read sensor stationary

PI3

A read sensor stationary jam has been identified

for the 1st original.

0047

1st sheet delivery sensor delay

PI3, PI4

A delivery sensor delay jam has been identified

for the 1st original.

0048

1st sheet delivery sensor stationary

PI4

A delivery sensor stationary jam has been

identified for the 1st original.

0071

timing error

A software sequence fails to end normally within

a specific period of time.

0090

ADF open

PI1

While the machine is in operation (drive system

in operation), the ADF is opened.

0091

user ADF open

PI1

While the machine is in operation (drive system

at rest), the ADF is opened.

0092

ADF cover open

PI10

While the machine is in operation (drive system

in operation), the ADF cover is opened.

0093

user cover open

PI10

While the machine is in operation (drive system

at rest), the ADF cover is opened.

0094

initial stationary

PI2, PI3,
PI4

While the 1st sheet is being picked, paper is

detected within the feeder.

0095

pickup fault

With no paper in the tray, the pickup signal is

received for 2 sec.

15.5 Alarm Codes

15.5.1 Alarm Code
0005-4900

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Location

Description

02

0002

indicates the presence of dirt on the glass for stream reading.

0020

line correction alarm (upon detection of dust on the stream reading glass
between originals)

0008

optional deck lifter error

04

scanner

pickup/feed

15-29

Chapter 15

15-30

Location

Description

06

fixing system

0002

fixing upper roller alarm

11

drum cleaner system,

waste toner collection
system

0001

waste other case full

50

ADF

0010

indicates that the original separation alarm condition has occurred 3 times
in sequence (i.e., faulty pickup of the 1st original).

61

finisher

0001

staple absent

62

saddle stitcher

0001

stitch staple absent

65

puncher

0001

punch waste case full

Chapter 16 Service Mode

Contents

Contents
16.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ................................................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ........................................................................................................................................ 16-1
16.1.3 Exiting service modes .............................................................................................................................................................. 16-2
16.1.4 Backing Up Service Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-2
16.1.5 Initial Screen ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-3
16.1.6 Main/intermediate Item Screen................................................................................................................................................ 16-3
16.1.7 Sub- Item Screen...................................................................................................................................................................... 16-3

16.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode)..............................................................................................................................16-4

16.2.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.1.1 COPIER Table ............................................................................................................................................................................................16-4

16.2.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-10

16.2.2.1 FEEDER Table..........................................................................................................................................................................................16-10

16.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode)............................................................................................................................................16-10

16.3.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-10
16.3.2 <DC-CON>............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-11
16.3.3 <R-CON>............................................................................................................................................................................... 16-13
16.3.4 <FEEDER> ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-13
16.3.5 <SORTER>............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-14
16.3.6 <MN-CONT> (iR C3100 Series)........................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.7 <MN-CONT> (iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series) ............................................................................................................... 16-19

16.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) ..................................................................................................................................16-20

16.4.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-20
16.4.1.1 COPIER Table ..........................................................................................................................................................................................16-20

16.4.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-29

16.4.2.1 FEEDER Table..........................................................................................................................................................................................16-29

16.4.3 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-29

16.4.3.1 SORTER Table .........................................................................................................................................................................................16-29

16.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode)..............................................................................................................16-29

16.5.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-29
16.5.1.1 COPIER Table ..........................................................................................................................................................................................16-29

16.5.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-38

16.5.2.1 FEEDER Table..........................................................................................................................................................................................16-38

16.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) .........................................................................................................................16-38

16.6.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-38
16.6.1.1 COPIER Table ..........................................................................................................................................................................................16-38
16.6.1.2 Software Counter Specifications...............................................................................................................................................................16-61

16.6.2 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-68

16.6.2.1 SORTER Table .........................................................................................................................................................................................16-68

16.6.3 BOARD.................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-68

16.6.3.1 BOARD Table...........................................................................................................................................................................................16-68

16.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ..........................................................................................................................................16-68

16.7.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-68
16.7.1.1 COPIER Table ..........................................................................................................................................................................................16-68

16.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ....................................................................................................................................16-70

16.8.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-70
16.8.1.1 COPIER Table ..........................................................................................................................................................................................16-70

Chapter 16

16.1 Outline
16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode
0000-9782

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The machine's service mode has a 3-layer screen construction: Initial screen, Level 1/2 screen, and Level 3 screen. Its mode items are grouped into those used in
regular maintenance work (Level 1 items) and those used in response to faults (Level 2 items).
User screen

)(2,8)(

Reset key

Initial screen
(Level 1)

Initial screen
(Level 2)

)(2)

(Select an item.)

Main/intermediate
item screen
(Level 1)

(Select an item.)

Main/intermediate
item screen
(Level 2)

(Select a main item from the top of screen.)

(The corresponding intermediate items are
then displayed and can be selected.)

Sub-item screen
(Level 1)

(Select a main item from the top of screen.)

(The corresponding intermediate items are
then displayed and can be selected.)

Sub-item screen
(Level 1)

Sub-item screen
(Level 2)

Previous/next page

Sub-item screen
(Level 2)

Previous/next page

F-16-1

The machine's service mode is divided into the following 7 types:

COPIER
FEEDER
DISPLAY

status indication mode

SORTER
BOARD

I/O
ADJUST
FUNCTION

input/output indication mode

adjustment mode
operation/inspection mode

OPTION

settings mode

TEST

test print mode

COUNTER

counter mode

F-16-2

16.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes

0000-9783

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

If you want to execute a machine operation using a service mode item, be sure to disconnect all cables from an external controller or a network before starting
service mode. Particularly, if you are using a FUNCTION (operation/inspection) mode item, the arrival of a print job from an external source can cause the machine
to malfunction, leading to damage.
1) Press the asterisk key "

" on the control panel.

16-1

Chapter 16
2) Press the 2 and 8 keys of the keypad at the same time.
3) Press the asterisk key "

" on the control panel.

In response to the foregoing key operations, the machine will bring up the following Initial screen:

Copier's service mode

COPIER
FEEDER

ADF's service mode

only when installed.

SORTER

Sorter's or finisher's service mode

only if installed; the absence
of a mode for a sorter prevents
the indication of the notation.

BOARD

Optional board's service mode

only if installed

F-16-3

16.1.3 Exiting service modes

0000-9785

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

A press on the Reset key will bring back the Service Mode Initial screen.
Another press on the Reset key will end service mode, and bring back the User screen (standard screen).

If you used service mode (ADJUST, FUNCTION, OPTION), be sure to turn off and then on the main power switch after ending service mode.

16.1.4 Backing Up Service Mode

0000-9786

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

At time of shipment from the factory, all machines are adjusted individually, and adjustment values are recorded in their respective service labels.
If you have replaced the reader controller PCB or the DC controller PCB, or if you have initialized the RAM, the adjustment values (for ADJUST and OPTION)
will return to their default settings. If there has been any change in a service mode item, be sure to update its setting indicated on the service label. As necessary,
make use of the space in the service label (as when recording an item not found on the label).
- Service Label for the Reader Controller PCB (behind the left cover [1] of the reader unit)

[1]

F-16-4

- Service Label [2] for the Main Controller PCB/DC controller PCB (behind the front cover of the printer unit)
[2]

[3]

F-16-5

16-2

Chapter 16

16.1.5 Initial Screen

0000-9788

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

COPIER
Initial item

FEEDER

Touch to select
an item.

SORTER

FAX
BOARD

F-16-6

16.1.6 Main/intermediate Item Screen

0000-9789

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Display

I/O

Adjust

Function

Option

Test

Counter

Main items
Touch an item to
select it.

VERSION
USER
ACC-STS
ANALOG

Intermediate items

CST-STS

Touch an item to
select it.

JAM
ERR

F-16-7

16.1.7 Sub- Item Screen

0000-9790

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Number of pages

Display

I/O

Adjust Function Option

<VERSION>
Selected
intermediate
item

Test

Counter

< READY >

Copier status display

< 1/3 >

DC-CON

Ready to receive service/copy

operation.
Paper jam
JAM:
Executing service mode.
SERVICE:
Performing warmup or similar
WAITING:
operation.
Cover open
DOOR:
COPYING: Copying
Error
ERROR:
NO-TONER: No toner
WTNR-FUL: Waste toner full
NO-PAPER: No paper
ALERM:
Alarm
READY:

IP
PANEL
ANAPRO
POWER

Sub-items

PREV

NEXT

+/-

OK

Returns to previous page.

Advances to next page.

F-16-8

16-3

Chapter 16

Display

I/O

Adjust Function Option

xxxxx

Pressing an item displays

it in reverse.

Counter

< READY >

< 1/3 >

<ADJ-XY>
ADJ-X

Test

(yyyyy) {aaaaa to bbbbb}

Range of values that

can be entered

Value before change

Entered value

ADJ-X

PREV

NEXT

+/-

OK
Sets entered value.

Toggles values sign ().

Stop

key: Stops running operations.

Clear

key: Clears value.

Start

key: Starts copying without exiting service mode.

F-16-9

16.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode)

16.2.1 COPIER
16.2.1.1 COPIER Table
0003-7598

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

<VERSION>
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item

Description

level

Use it to check the ROM version of individual PCBs (host machine and accessories).
- for example, in <R-CON XX.YY>, XX indicates the version and YY indicates R&D number.
- if no PCB is connected, the indication will be <--.-->.

16-4

DC-CON

Use it to check the ROM version of the DC controller PCB.

R-CON

Use it to check the ROM version of the reader controller PCB.

1
1

PANEL

Use it to check the ROM version of the control panel CPU PCB.

ECO

Use it to check the ROM version of the ECO PCB.

FEEDER

Uses it to check the ROM version of the ADF controller PCB.

SORTER

Use it to check the ROM version of the finisher controller PCB.

FAX

Use it to check the ROM version of the fax board.

NIB

Uses it to indicate the version of the network software.

PS/PCL *

Use it to check the version of the UFR board (PS/PCL function).

LIPS *

Use it to check the version of the UFR board (LIPS).

SDL-STCH

Use it to check the ROM version of the saddle stitcher controller PCB.

OP-CON

Use it to indicate the ROM version of the option controller PCB.

MN-CONT

Use it to check the ROM version of the main controller PCB.

BOOT-ROM *

Use it to check the boot ROM version of the main controller PCB.
- copier model/GDI-UFR model: xx.yyC
- LIPS mode: xx.yyL
- PS/PCL model: xx.yyN

DIAG-DVC

Use it to check the ROM version of the self-diagnosis device.

RUI

Use it to check the remote UI.

PUNCH

Use it to check the version of the punch unit.

LANG-EN

Use it to check the version of an English language file.

LANG-FR

Use it to check the version of a French language file.

LANG-DE

Use it to check the version of a German language file.

LANG-IT

Use it to check the version of an Italian language file.

LANG-JP

Use it to check the version of a Japanese language file.

GDI-UFR *

Use it to check the version of the UFR board (GDI-UFR function).

MEAP **

indicates the version of the MEAP content on the hard disk.

OCR-CN **

indicates the version of OCR of the Chinese language file (simplified).

OCR-JP **

indicates the version of OCR of the Japanese language file.

OCR-KR **

indicates the version of OCR of the Korean language file.

Chapter 16
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item

Description

level

Use it to check the ROM version of individual PCBs (host machine and accessories).
- for example, in <R-CON XX.YY>, XX indicates the version and YY indicates R&D number.
- if no PCB is connected, the indication will be <--.-->.
OCR-TW **

indicates the version of OCR of the Chinese language file (traditional).

BOOTROM **

indicates the version of boot ROM of the main controller PCB.

in "xx.yy_z," "z" indicate the type of boot ROM.

TTS-JA **

indicates the version of the Japanese language audio dictionary.

TTS-EN **

indicates the version of the English language audio dictionary.

WEB-BRWS **

indicates the version of web browser file.

HELP ***

Version of the simple navigation

WEBDAV ***

Version of the "WebDAV" file

TIMESTMP ***

Version of the "Time Stamp" file

LANG-CS

Use it to check the version of the Czech language file.

LANG-DA

Use it to check the version of the Danish language file.

LANG-EL

Use it to check the version f the Greek language file.

LANG-ES

Use it to check the version of the Spanish language file.

LANG-ET

Use it to check the version of the Estonian language file.

LANG-FI

Use it to check the version of the Finnish language file.

LANG-HU

Use it to check the version of the Hungarian language file.

LANG-KO

Use it to check the version of the Korean language file.

LANG-NL

Use it to check the version of the Dutch language file.

LANG-NO

Use it to check the version of the Norwegian language file.

LANG-PL

Use it to check the version of the Polish language file.

LANG-PT

Use it to check the version of the Portuguese language file.

LANG-RU

Use it to check the version of the Russian langue file.

LANG-SL

Use it to check the version of the Slovenian language file.

2
2

LANG-SV

Use it to check the version of the Swedish language file.

LANG-TW

Use it to check the version of the Chinese language file (traditional text).

LANG-ZH

Use it to check the version of the Chinese language file (simplified text).

ECO-ID

Use it to check the ECO-ID number.

LANG-BU

Use it to check the version of the Bulgarian language file.

LANG-CR

Use it to check the version of the Croatian language file.

LANG-RM

Use it to check the version of the Romanian language file.

LANG-SK

Use it to check the version of the Slovakian language file.

LANG-TK

Use it to check the version of the Turkish language file.

LANG-CA ***

Version of the Catalan language file

MEDIA-JA ***

Version of the Japanese paper brand information

MEDIA-EN ***

Version of the English paper brand information

MEDIA-DE ***

Version of the German paper brand information

MEDIA-IT ***

Version of the Italian paper brand information

MEDIA-FR ***

Version of the French paper brand information

MEDIA-ZH ***

Version of the simplified Chinese paper brand information

MEDIA-SK ***

Version of the Slovakian paper brand information

MEDIA-TK ***

Version of the Turkish paper brand information

MEDIA-CS ***

Version of the Czechoslovakian paper brand information

MEDIA-EL ***

Version of the Greek paper brand information

MEDIA-ES ***

Version of the Spanish paper brand information

MEDIA-ET ***

Version of the Esthonian paper brand information

MEDIA-FI ***

Version of the Finnish paper brand information

MEDIA-HU ***

Version of the Hungarian paper brand information

MEDIA-KO ***

Version of the Korean paper brand information

MEDIA-NL ***

Version of the Dutch paper brand information

MEDIA-NO ***

Version of the Norwegian paper brand information

MEDIA-PL ***

Version of the Polish paper brand information

MEDIA-PT ***

Version of the Portuguese paper brand information

MEDIA-RU ***

Version of the Russian paper brand information

MEDIA-SL ***

Version of the Slovenian paper brand information

MEDIA-SV ***

Version of the Swedish paper brand information

MEDIA-TW ***

Version of the traditional Chinese paper brand information

MEDIA-BU ***

Version of the Bulgarian paper brand information

MEDIA-CR ***

Version of the Croatian paper brand information

MEDIA-RM ***

Version of the Romanian paper brand information

MEDIA-CA ***

Version of the Catalan paper brand information

<ACC-STS>

16-5

Chapter 16

COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
FEEDER

SORTER

DECK

CARD

DATA-CON

RAM

COINROBO

NIB

NETWARE

SEND

PDL-FNC1 **

PDL-FNC2 **

Description

level

Use it to check the state of connection of a DADF:

0: not connected.
1: connected.

Use it to check the state of connection of a finisher and punch unit.

0: not connected.
1: finisher connected.
2: saddle finisher connected.

Use it to check the state of connection of a paper deck.

0: not connected.
1: connected.

Use it to check the state of connection of a card reader:

0: card reader connected but card not inserted.
1: card reader not connected; or, card reader connected and card inserted.
(indicates '1' if ready for copying; indicates '0' if not ready for copying)

Use it to check the state of connection of a copy data controller.

0: not connected.
1: connected.

Use it to check the size of the memory mounted on the main controller PCB.
512MB, 768MB,1024MB**

Uses it to indicate the state of connection of a coin vendor.

0: not connected.
1: connected.

Use it to check the state of connection of a network board.

0: not connected.
1: Ethernet board connected.
2: TokenRing board connected.
3: Ethernet board and TokeRing board connected.

Use it to check the state of installation of network firmware.

0: not installed.
1: installed.

Use it to check the presence of the SEND function.

0: SEND function absent.
1: SEND function present.

b31 : BDL
b30 : PS
b29 : PCL
b28 : PDF
b27 : LIPS
b26 : N201
b25 : I5577
b24 : ESC/P
b23 : HPGL
b22 : HPGL2
b21 : IMAGING
b20 : KS
b19 : BMLinkS
b18 to b16 : reserved (for possible addition of PDL)

b15 to b0: reserved (for possible addition of PDL)

HDD **

indicates the type name of the HDD.

PCI1 **

indicates the board name of PCI.

if not connected, indicates [-] (hyphen).
if connected, indicates the board name.
<Board Name>
Voice Board: voice guidance board
3DES Board: security expansion board

Display the connecting speed of the USB device

OFF,LOW,FLL(FULL),HGH(HIGH)

USBH-SPD **

<ANALOG>
COPIER >DISPLAY > ANALOG
Sub item

Description

level

TEMP

Use it to check the machine inside temperature (environment sensor; in deg C).

HUM

Use it to check the machine inside humidity (environment sensor; in %RH).

ABS-HUM

Use it to check moisture content (environment sensor; in g).

FIX-UC

Use it to check the surface temperature of the fixing upper roller (in deg C).

FIX-UE

Use it to check the surface temperature of the fixing upper roller (reading of sub thermistor; in deg C).

<CST-STS>
COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS
Sub item
WIDTH-MF

<JAM>

16-6

Description
Use it to check the width of paper in the manual feed tray (in mm).

level
2

Chapter 16

F-16-10

Touch any Jam Indication screen to go to the detailed screen of that particular type of jam.
1. press to go to the previous page.
2. press to go to the next page.
3. indicates the order of occurrence of the jam in question.
4. indicates the type of jam.
6. press to go to the previous Jam Indication screen.
7. press it to go to the next Jam Indication screen.
<No.> Indicates the order of occurrence of the jam in question.
1 through 50 (the higher the number, the older the jam)
<DATE> Indicates the date of the jam in question.
<TIME1> Indicates the time of the jam in question.
<TIME2> Indicates the jam recovery time.
<L> Indicates the location of the jam in question.
Code

Location/classification

host machine

feeder

finisher

<CODE> Jam Code (See the list of jam codes.)

<P> Indicates the source of paper used.
Code

Description

cassette 1

16-7

Chapter 16
Code

Description

cassette 2

cassette 3

cassette 4

not used

not used

side paper deck

manual feed tray

duplexing unit

<CNTR> Indicates the reading of the soft counter for the source of paper.
<SIZE> Indicates the size of paper.
<ERR>

F-16-11

<No.> Indicates the order of occurrence of the error in question.

1 to 50 (the higher the number, the older the error)
<DATE> Indicates the date of the error in question.
<TIME1> Indicates the time of the error in question.
<DATE2> Indicates the error return time.
<CODE> Indicates the cover of the error in question.
<DTL> Indicates the detail code of the error in question. (if not, '0000')
<L> Location Classification
Location Classification
0: main controller
1: DADF
2: finisher
3: not used
4: reader unit
5: printer unit
6: PDL board (any of)
7: fax board

<P> not used

<HV-STS>
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS
Sub item

Description

level

1ATVC-Y/M/C

Use it to check the value of the current measurement at time of primary transfer ATVC (Y/M/C; in yA).

1ATVC-K4

Use it to check the value of the current measured at time of primary transfer ATVC (K for full color mode; in yA).

1ATVC-K1

Use it to check the value of the current measured at time of primary transfer ATVC (in mono color mode; in yA).

<CCD>
COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
Sub item

16-8

Description

level

TARGET-B

Use it to check the shading target value for B.

TARGET-G

Use it to check the shading target value for G.

TARGET-R

Use it to check the shading target value for R.

OFST

Use it to check the offset level adjustment value for the CIS.

GAIN

Use it to check the gain level adjustment for the CIS.

MFIL

Use it to check the MTF correction index for main scanning direction. (for design analysis)

SFIL

Use it to check the MTF correction index for sub scanning direction. (for design analysis)

Chapter 16
<DPOT>
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT
Sub item

Description

level

VCONT-Y/M/C/K

Use it to check the current value of the target contrast potential (Y/M/C/K).

VBACK-Y/M/C/K

Use it to check the current value of the defogging potential (Y/M/C/K).

2TR-PPR

Use it to check the output value of the paper separation voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated last.

2TR-BASE

Use it to check the output value of the reference voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated last.

1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K

Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (Y/M/C/K) generated last.

<DENS>
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS
Sub item
DENS-Y/M/C/K

REF-Y/M/C

SGNL-Y/M/C

P-SENS-P

Description

level

Use it to check the computed value of the density (Y/M/C/K) of the patch formed on the photosensitive drum. (indicates the
discrepancy from the target value in $) The value is updated when the machine executes toner supply operation after the
main power switch is turned on.
Optimum:-25 to +25

Use it to check the density standard (Y/M/C) of the developer on the developing cylinder.The value is updated when the
machine executes toner supply operation after the main power switch is turned on.
Optimum:464 to 560

Use it to check the measurement (Y/M/C) of the density of the developer on the developing cylinder.The value is updated
when the machine executes toner supply operation after the main power switch is turned on.
Optimum:225 to 863

Use it to check the measurement (for P wave component) of the soiling of the window of the patch image sensor.The value
effective when the machine executes patch image detection operation after the main power switch is turned on is indicated.
(range of indications: 0 to 1023)In the case of 255 or lower, the indication will be E020-0081.
Optimum:400 to 600

DENS-S-Y/M/C/K

Use it to check the density value (Y/M/C/Bk) detected of the patch image.

D-Y/M/C -TRGT

Use it to check the target value (Y/M/C) of the developer density.

DEV-DC-Y/M/C/K

Use it to check the output value of the developing DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated last.

CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K

Use it to check the output value of the primary DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated last.

D-K-TRGT

Use it to check the target value (Bk) of the developer density.

D-CRNT-P/S

Uses it to indicate the value (P wave/S wave) measured of the dark current of patch image sensor.

P-SENS-S

Use it to check the value (S wave) detected of the intensity of light from the background (drum) of patch image sensor.

2
2

DENS-Y/M/C-H

Use it to check the history of measurements taken by the ATR sensor (Y/M/C; latest 8 measurements).

DS-S-Y/M/C/K-H

Use it to check the history of the results of detection of patch images (Y/M/C/K; latest 8 result).

P-LED-DA

Use it to check the D/A settings of the LED for the path image sensor.

<MISC>
COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC
Sub item
ENV-TR

DRM-LIFE

Description

level

Display environmental factors

1: Low humidity
2: Ordinary humidity
3: High temperature

Use it to check the age of the drum unit.

Indicates how much it has been used in %.
Optimum:0 to 100 (unit: %)

<ALARM-1>
COPIER > DISPLAY > ALARM-1
Sub item
IMG-DT-Y/M/C/K

Description

level

Mean value of image ratio created by Y/M/C/K

Calculate the mean value (%) of image ratio from the number of imaging and the supply of toner between the replacements
of toner container. The value is stored in the DC controller PCB.

<ALARM-2>

F-16-12

16-9

Chapter 16

Item

Description

Remarks

No.

indicates the order of occurrence of alarms (1 through 50; the

higher the number, the older the error).

DATE

indicates the date of the alarm in question.

TIME1

indicates the time of the alarm in question.

TIME2

indicates the alarm recovery time.

CODE

indicates the code of the location at which the alarm in

question occurred.
(See the table on next page.)
indicates the code of the alarm in question.
(See the table on next page.)

DTL

Indicates the detail code of the alarm in question.

(See the table on next page.)

CNTR

indicates the total counter reading at the time of the alarm in

question.

<ENVRNT>
Displaying Environment Logs
Use it to indicate logs of changes that may have taken place for [machine inside temperature (deg C)/humidity (%)/fixing roller surface (middle) temperature (deg
C)] collected from the monitor output of the fixing thermistor (main) and the environment sensor.
Remarks:
The intervals of data collection may be set in service mode: COPIER >OPTION >BODY >ENVP-IN.

F-16-13
Item

Description

No.

number of a data piece (higher the number, older the data piece)

DATE

date of data collection

TIME

time of data collection

D + deg C

machine inside temperature

E+%

machine inside humidity

F + deg C

fixing roller surface (middle) temperature

16.2.2 FEEDER
16.2.2.1 FEEDER Table
0003-5830

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

FEEDER > DISPLAY
Sub item

Description

level

FEEDSIZE

Use it to check the size of the original detected by the ADF.Indicates the detection in terms of paper size (e.g., A4, LTR).

TRY-WIDE

Use it to check the original pickup tray width of the DF.

16.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode)

16.3.1 Overview
0001-0118

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

The following appears in response to COPIER>I/O; descriptions of the items (limited to those needed in the field) area given on the pages that follow:

16-10

Chapter 16

Display

I/O

Adjust

Function

Option

Test

Counter

Option

Test

Counter

DC-CON
R-CON

FEEDER
SORTER

MN-CONT

F-16-14

1. Guide to the Screen

Display

I/O

Adjust

Function

< 1/3 >

<DC-CON>

< READY >

P001 xxxxxxxx
P002 xxxxxxxx
P003 xxxxxxxx
P004 xxxxxxxx
P005 xxxxxxxx
P006 xxxxxxxx
P007 xxxxxxxx
P008 xxxxxxxx

Bit0
Bit7
Address

F-16-15

16.3.2 <DC-CON>
0001-0119

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Address

Bit

Description

Remarks

P001

cassette 2 retry sensor

1: detected

cassette 2 level B sensor

1: about 50 sheets or less

cassette 2 level A sensor

1: about half or less

cassette 2 paper sensor

1: paper absent

cassette 1 retry sensor

1: detected

cassette 1 level B sensor

1: about 50 sheets or less

cassette 1 level A sensor

1: about half or less

cassette 1 paper sensor

1: paper absent

8-15

not used

13 V detection (door open detection)

1: door open

24 V detection (door open detection)

1: door open

manual feed tray paper sensor

0: paper present

duplex feed sensor (PS17)

1: paper present

No. 1 delivery full sensor (PS15)

0: paper present

No. 1 delivery sensor (PS14)

1: paper present

fixing delivery sensor (PS13)

1: paper present

pre-registration sensor (PS9)

1: paper present

8-15

not used

P002

16-11

Chapter 16
Address

Bit

Description

P003

patch detection LED-ON

1: ON

ITB fan half-speed

1: half speed

exhaust fan 1 half speed (machine rear)

1: half speed

for R&D

cassette 1 size detection indication

alternates 1/0

cassette 2 size detection indication

alternates 1/0

6,7

for R&D

8-15

not used

toner supply clutch

ITB cleaner drive clutch

1: ON

sleeve drive clutch (CL3)

1: ON

secondary transfer swing clutch (CL9)

1: ON

duplex feed clutch (CL6)

1: ON

registration clutch (CL2)

1: ON

manual feed pickup clutch (CL1)

1: ON

heat retention heater ON

0: ON

8-15

not used

exhaust fan 1 full speed (machine rear)

1: ON

ITB fan full speed

1: ON

for R&D

transparency sensor ON

1: ON

ITBHPLED_ON

1: ON

for R&D

pickup 2 solenoid (SL2)

1: ON

pickup 1 solenoid (SL1)

1: ON

8-15

not used

0,1

for R&D

exhaust fan 2 full speed (machine front) 1: ON

exhaust fan 2 half speed (machine front) 1: ON

feed door sensor

0 door closed

fixing inlet sensor

1: ON

pickup unit door sensor

0: door closed

front door sensor

0: door closed

8-15

not used

P004

P005

P006

P007
P008

P009

P010

16-12

1: ON

0-7

for R&D

8-15

not used

DIP SW0

1: ON

DIP SW1

1: ON

2,3

for R&D

delivery toner sensor

1: detected

ITB fan lock detection

0: detected

exhaust fan R lock detection

0: detected

exhaust fan F lock detection

0: detected

8-15

not used

cassette size detection 0 (alternately

indicates cassettes 1 and 2)

1: ON

cassette size detection 1 (alternately

indicates cassettes 1 and 2)

1: ON

cassette size detection 2 (alternately

indicates cassettes 1 and 2)

1: ON

cassette size detection 3 (alternately

indicates cassettes 1 and 2)

1: ON

cassette size detection 4 (alternately

indicates cassettes 1 and 2)

1: ON

5-7

for R&D

8-15

not used

toner fan lock detection

for R&D

reserved

3-7

for R&D

Address

Bit

Description

P011

0-7

for R&D

P012

0-5

for R&D

6,7

not used

0-7

for R&D

P013

Remarks

0: detected

Remarks

Chapter 16
Address

Bit

Description

P014

0-3

for R&D

4-7

not used

P015

0-7

for R&D

P016

0-4,7

not used

P017

P018
P019
P020
P021

Remarks

5,6

for R&D

fixing motor lock

0: detected

fixing speed switch-over

1: half speed

fixing motor ON

1: ON

3-7

for R&D

0-4

for R&D

5-7

not used

0-2,5,6

not used

3,4,7

for R&D

0-3

for R&D

4-7

not used

0-4

not used

5-7

for R&D

P022-P029

reserved

16.3.3 <R-CON>
0001-0120

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Address

Bit

Description

P001

not used

1-4

for R&D

P002

P003

P004

Remarks

CIS power-on signal

for R&D

size sensor drive single

not used

24V power supply monitor signal

0: normal

scanner motor drive single

1: forward 0: reverse

3,4

for R&D

13V power supply monitor signal

6,7

not used

0-3

for R&D

LED control signal

5-7

for R&D

0,1

not used

original size detection 2

3,4

not used

5-6

for R&D

1:ON
1: ON

0: normal

1: ON

0: original present

not used

P005

0-7

for R&D

P006

not used

1-3

for R&D

ADF sensor read input

0: ON

copyboard open/closed sensor interrupt

input 0

1: closed

HP sensor interrupt input

1: HP

copyboard open/closed sensor interrupt

input 1

1: closed

0-3

for R&D

scanner motor drive power saving

ADF pickup motor clock interrupt input alternately 0/1

ADF motor clock interrupt input

not used

lamp ON signal

1: ON

CIS drive ON signal

1: ON

2-7

for R&D

0-7

for R&D

P007

P008

P009

0: ON
alternately 0/1

16.3.4 <FEEDER>
0001-0122

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

16-13

Chapter 16

Address

Bit

Description

Remarks

P001

read sensor

1: detected

pre-registration sensor

1: detected

0-3

not used

stamp solenoid

not used

original detection LED

not used

P003

0-7

for R&D

P004

original sensor

1: detected

cover sensor

1: detected

2-7

not used

P002

P005

1: ON
1: ON

cycle end sensor

1: detected

length sensor 2

1: detected

length sensor 1

1: detected

A4/LTR identification sensor

1: detected

4,5

not used

delivery sensor

0: detected

DF open sensor

1: detected

P006

0-7

for R&D

P007

0-7

for R&D

P008

0-7

for R&D

P009

0-7

for R&D

P010

0-7

for R&D

P011

0-7

for R&D

16.3.5 <SORTER>
0001-0123

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Address

Controller

Bit

Description

P001

SORTER

inlet feed motor A

P002

inlet feed motor B

inlet feed motor A-

inlet feed motor B-

inlet feed motor switch 0

inlet feed motor switch 1

0: ON

inlet feed/stack delivery motor standby signal

1: ON
0: ON

common solenoid ON signal

punch feed motor A

punch feed motor A-

0: ON

punch feed motor B

punch feed motor B-

punch feed motor current switch 0

1: ON

punch feed motor current switch 1

1: ON

tray 2 motor clock

tray 1 motor clock

P003

SORTER

0-3

for R&D

4-7

not used

P004

SORTER

saddle connection detection signal

not used

swing HP sensor

upper cover open/closed sensor

0: ON

front cover open/closed sensor

0: ON

front cover interlock sensor

1: ON

gear change HP sensor

1: ON

not used

P005

16-14

SORTER

Remarks

SORTER

0: ON
1: ON

0,1

for R&D

punch transmission request signal

0: ON

saddle 13V ON signal

1: ON

4-7

not used

Chapter 16
Address

Controller

Bit

Description

Remarks

P006

SORTER

punch connection detection

0: ON

1,2

not used

punch motor standby

1: ON

inlet sensor (IRQ0)

1: ON

paper trailing edge sensor (IRQ1)

1: ON

punch communication input (IRQ2)

0: ON

not used

tray approach sensor

0: ON

tray 2 area sensor 1

0: ON

tray 2 area sensor 2

0: ON

tray 2 area sensor 3

0: ON

tray 2 paper sensor

1: ON

tray 2 paper surface sensor

1: ON

inlet motor lock sensor

P007

P008

P009

P010

P011

P012

P013

P014

P015

SORTER

SORTER

SORTER

SORTER

SORTER

SORTER

SORTER

SORTER

SORTER

stack edging motor lock input

tray 3 paper sensor

1: ON

tray 3 connection detection

0: ON

upper paper surface sensor

1: ON

tray 1 interlock sensor

1: ON

tray 1 area sensor 1

0: ON

tray 1 area sensor 2

0: ON

tray 1 area sensor 3

0: ON

tray 1 paper sensor

1: ON

tray 1 shift motor CW

0: ON

tray 1 shift motor enable

1: ON

tray 1 shift motor power supply switch 0

0: ON

tray 1 shit motor current switch 1

0: ON

tray 2 shift motor CW

0: ON

tray 2 shit motor enable

1: ON

tray 2 shift motor power supply switch 0

0: ON

tray 2 shift motor power supply switch 1

0: ON

not used

swing lock motor power supply switch 0

swing lock motor phase A pulse output

0: ON

swing lock motor phase B pulse output

4-7

not used

input roller drive (away) solenoid

1,2

for R&D

buffer roller drive (away) solenoid

1: ON

feed path sensor

1: ON

5-7

not used

gear change phase A

gear change phase B

gear change motor current switch 0

0: ON

gear change motor current switch 1

0: ON

not used

1: ON

5-7

for R&D

for R&D

front alignment HP sensor

1: ON

front alignment HP sensor

1: ON

handling tray paper sensor

1: ON

trailing edge assist HP sensor

1: ON

5-7

not used

rear alignment motor phase A

rear alignment motor phase B

rear alignment motor current switch 0

4-7

not used

front alignment phase A

front alignment phase B

front alignment motor current switch 0

3-7

not used

0: ON

0: ON

16-15

Chapter 16

Address

Controller

Bit

Description

P016

STACKER

not used

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

CIS power-on signal

for R&D

size sensor drive signal

not used

24V power supply monitor signal

0: normal

scanner motor drive signal

1: forward
0: reverse

for R&D

P017

P018

P019

P020

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

STACKER

for R&D

13V power supply monitor signal

not used

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

LED control signal

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

not used

not used

original size detection 2

not used

not used

for R&D

for R&D

not used

0-7

for R&D

Remarks

1:ON
1:ON

0: normal

1: ON

0: original
present

not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
P021

P022

16-16

STACKER

STACKER

not used

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

ADF sensor interrupt input

0: ON

ADF pickup motor clock interrupt input

1: closed

ADF read motor clock interrupt input

1: HP

copyboard open/closed sensor interrupt input 1

1: closed

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

scanner motor driver power saving

0: ON

ADF pickup motor clock interrupt input

alternates 0/1

ADF read motor clock interrupt input

alternates 0/1

not used

Chapter 16
Address

Controller

Bit

Description

P023

STACKER

lamp ON signal

1: ON

CIS drive ON signal

1: ON

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

Remarks

P024

SADDLE

1-7

not used

P025

SADDLE

0-7

not used

P026

SADDLE

0-7

not used

P027

SADDLE

0-7

not used

P028

SADDLE

0-7

not used

P029

SADDLE

0-7

not used

P030

SADDLE

0-7

not used

Address

Controller

Bit

Description

Remarks

P031

SADDLE

saddle tray paper sensor

0: ON

paper positioning area paper sensor

0: ON

crescent roller HP sensor

0: ON

saddle delivery path sensor

0: ON

saddle path (upstream) sensor

1: ON

saddle path (middle) sensor

1: ON

P032

P033

P034

P035

P036

SADDLE

SADDLE

SADDLE

SADDLE

SADDLE

saddle path (downstream) sensor

1: ON

saddle path sensor

1: ON

butting motor enable signal

1: ON

butting motor CW signal

1: ON

butting motor CCW signal

1: ON

folding roller HP sensor

1: ON

front door open sensor

0: ON

delivery cover open detection (photo sensor)

0: ON

saddle alignment HP sensor

0: ON
1: ON

delivery cover open 24V down detection

inlet flapper solenoid

1: ON

saddle path switch flapper 1

1: ON

saddle path switch flapper 2

1: ON

intermediate feed solenoid

1: ON

4-5

not used

inlet path sensor

not used

1: ON

rear staple motor CW

rear staple motor CCW

0: ON
0: ON

front stapler motor CW

0: ON

not used

folding roller HP connector open detection

5-7

not used

0: ON

DIPSW_1

0: ON

DIPSW_2

0: ON

DIPSW_3

0: ON

DIPSW_4

0: ON

DIPSW_5

0: ON

DIPSW_6

0: ON

DIPSW_7

0: ON

DIPSW_8

0: ON

0,1

not used

punch switch 1

0: ON

5V detection signal

0: ON

24V detection signal

0: ON

5-7

not used

16-17

Chapter 16
Address

Controller

Bit

Description

Remarks

P037

SADDLE

POWER_ON

1: ON

LED1

1: ON

LED2

1: ON

LED3

1: ON

LEDY

0: ON

TRAY_MTR_CUR

0: ON

TRAY_MTR_B

0: ON

TRAY_MTR_A

0: ON

DIPSW1

0: ON

DIPSW2

0: ON

DIPSW3

0: ON

not used

P038

PUNCHER

P039

PUNCHER

P040

PUNCHER

P041

P042

P043

PUNCHER

PUNCHER

PUNCHER

PCH-OUT

rear edge sensor

punch encoder clock

punch HP sensor

0-2

for R&D

3-7

not used

1: ON
0: ON

0-3

for R&D

horizontal registration HP sensor

1: ON

horizontal registration motor STB

0: ON

punch motor CCW

0: ON

punch motor CW

0: ON

0-3

not used

DIPSW4

0: ON

horizontal registration motor CUR

0: ON

for R&D

not used

LED1

for R&D

for R&D

LED2

0: ON

front cover sensor

0: ON

for R&D

PUSHSW2

0: ON

PUSHSW1

0: ON

0-4

not used

upper cover sensor

6,7

not used

0: ON

0: ON

16.3.6 <MN-CONT> (iR C3100 Series)

0001-0124

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
Address

Bit

Sign

Remarks

P001

PWR1

1: normal

PWR2

1: normal

for R&D

every 50 msec, alternates 1/0

for R&D

cooling fan ON

P002

0 to 16

for R&D

P003

10

pickup count (for coin robo, ASSIST)

11

delivery count (for coin robo, ASSIST)

P004

P005

16-18

cooling fan control

12

LCD backlight control

0: off, 1: on

SRAM board detected

0: present, 1: absent

for R&D

for R&D

operation enabled (key switch)

0: enabled, 1: disabled

operation enabled (control card)

0: enabled, 1: disabled

operation enabled (coin robo)

0: enabled, 1: disabled

0 to 7

for R&D

Chapter 16
Address
P006

Bit

Sign

Remarks

open I/F control

(PRDY signal)

0: Ready, 1: not ready

open I/F setting

Mode0

10

open I/F setting

Mode1

11

for R&D

12

for R&D

13

for R&D

14

open I/F board detection

0: present; 1: absent

15

open I/F detection (CRDY)

0: Ready, 1: not ready

P007

16

fax option

0: connected; 1: not connected

P008

Printer Power Ready

0: Ready, 1: not ready

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

Scanner Power Ready

0: Ready, 1: not ready

PCPRDY

0: Ready, 1: not ready

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

P009

10

for R&D

11

Controller Power Ready

0: Ready, 1: not ready

16.3.7 <MN-CONT> (iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series)

0010-1028

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Address

Bit

Sign

P001

I/O port for general-purpose (O-board)

I/O port for general-purpose (S-board)

I/O port for general-purpose (R-board)

P002

P003

P004

Remarks

I/O port for general-purpose (P-board)

Test packet issuance request to the image processing ASIC

DDI-P POWER signal

Delivery count (Control card, Coin machine)

H:At delivery

Pick-up count (Control card, Coin machine)

H:At pick-up

CPU reset cancel signal

Image processing ASIC reset signal

DDI-P CTS signal (Printer -> Controller)

DDI-P RTS signal (Controller -> Printer)

DDI-P Power Ready signal (Controller -> Printer)

DDI-P Power Ready signal (Printer -> Controller)

L:ON

Copy allowing signal (Control card)

Copy allowing signal (Coin machine)

Controller cooling fan ON signal

1:ON 0:OFF

USB host Power (5V) control signal

1:ON 0:OFF

PCI Serror interruption clear

FAX reset signal

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

for R&D

1
2
3
4

FAX board connection detection

0: Unconnected 1:
Connected

FAX board connection detection

0: Unconnected 1:
Connected

FAX board connection detection

0: Unconnected 1:
Connected

Control panel connection check

0: Connected 1:
Unconnected

DIMM judgment

DIMM judgment

DIMM judgment

16-19

Chapter 16
Address

Bit

Sign

P005

Open Interface Power Ready signal

Watch dog function

Watch dog interruption clear

P006

P007

DDI-S Livewake signal

DDI-S Download signal

DDI-P Livewake signal

DDI-P Download signal

for R&D

Main controller PCB version

Main controller PCB version

Main controller PCB version

Main controller PCB version

Coin machine controller Power Ready signal

Coin machine Power Ready signal

Coin machine Communication Ready signal

for R&D

not used

not used

Power control signal

3-6

not used

7
P008

P009

0: Connected 1:
Unconnected

Modem board detection signal

FRAM CLK

FRAM DATA

FRAM WP

3-7

not used

SPD CLK

SPD DT

2-4

not used

Emergency night power source (13V) ON signal

0:OFF 1:ON

Emergency night power source switching signal

0: High efficiency 1:
Standard

P010

Remarks

Emergency night power source (24V) ON signal

0:OFF 1:ON

LCD Backlit switch control signal

0:ON 1:OFF

USB V-bus power detection

0:OFF 1:ON

SDRAM structure detection

SDRAM structure detection

Watch dog timer CLK

Emergency night power source reset signal

6,7

not used

P011

0-7

not used

P012

0-7

not used

P013

0-7

not used

P014

0-7

not used

P015

0-7

not used

P016

0-7

not used

16.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode)

16.4.1 COPIER
16.4.1.1 COPIER Table
0003-7602

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

<ADJ-XY>
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
Sub item
ADJ-X

16-20

Description

level

Use it to adjust the scanner image leading edge position (i.e., image read start position in sub scanning direction).
Method of adjustment
- if the non-image width is larger than indicated, decrease the setting.
- if an area outside the original is copied, increase the setting.
- an increase of '1' will move the image read start position toward the trailing edge by 0.1 mm (i.e., the image read range will move
toward the trailing edge).
- if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the setting indicated on the
service label.
Range of adjustment 1 to 100
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 20]
Caution
If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label.

Chapter 16
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
Sub item
ADJ-Y

ADJ-S

ADJ-Y-DF

STRD-POS

Description

level

Use it to adjust the read start cell position of the CCD (i.e., image read start position in main scanning direction).
Method of adjustment
- if the non-image width is larger than indicated, decrease the setting
- if an area outside the original is copied, increase the setting.
- an increase of '1' will move the image read start position toward the front (i.e., the image read area will move toward the front).
- if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the
service label.
Range of adjustment 85 to 169
[at time of shipment: factory value/after RAM initialization: 131]
Caution
If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label.

Use it to enter an adjustment value for the scanner shading measurement position.
- a decrease of '1' will move the shading measurement position toward the leading edge by 0.1 mm.
Method of adjustment
- if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the
service label.
Range of adjustment 20 to 200
[at time of shipment: factory value/after RAM initialization: 40]

Use it to adjust the main scanning position for stream reading.

- an increase of '1' will move the image read start position toward the front by 0.1 mm.
Method of adjustment
- if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or if you have placed the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated
on the service label.
Range of adjustment 50 to 250
[at time of shipment: factory value/after RAM initialization: 158]

Use it to adjust the CCD read position for stream reading.

- an increase of '1' will move the image read position to the left by 1 mm.
Method of adjustment
- if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the
service label.
Range of adjustment 1 to 200
[at time of shipment: factory value/after RAM initialization: 100]

Original

Increase the setting

(so that the read start
position moves toward
the trailing edge).

Decrease the setting

(so that the read start
position moves toward
the leading edge).
Scanning lamp

CIS Unit

F-16-16

16-21

Chapter 16

Decrease the setting

(so that the read start
position moves toward the rear).

Read start position

Increase the setting

(so that the read
start position moves
toward the front).

Original

F-16-17

<CCD>
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
Sub item

Description

W-PLT-X/Y/Z Use it to enter the white level data indicated on the standard while plate.
Method of adjustment
- if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller or if you have replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated
on the service label.
- if you have replaced the copyboard glass, enter the value indicated on the copyboard glass. (See the figure below.)
Range of adjustment 1 to 9999
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization:
W-PLT-X=8244
W-PLT-Y=8707
W-PLT-Z=9383]
CCDU-RG

MTF-MG

MTF-SG

BOOK-RG

DF-RG

16-22

level

Use it to enter the offset value for color displacement caused by the CIS.
Method of adjustment
Enter the offset value for the following:
- if you have replaced the CIS unit, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the CIS unit. (In addition, be sure to record the
value on the service label.)
In the case of the following, enter the value indicated on the service label:
- if you have replaced the reader controller PCB.
- if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -150 to 150
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to enter the MTF correction value in main scanning direction.

Method of adjustment
Enter the value of the following:
If you have replaced the CIS unit, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the CIS unit. (In addition, be sure to record the
value on the service label.)
In the case of the following, enter the value indicated on the service label:
- if you have replaced the reader controller PCB.
- if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB.
Range of adjustment 0 to 99
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to enter the MTF correction value in sub scanning direction.

Method of adjustment
Enter the value for the following:
If you have replaced the CIS unit, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the CIS unit. (In addition, be sure to record the
value on the service label.)
In the case of the following, enter the value indicated on the service label:
- if you have replaced the reader controller PCB.
- if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB.
Range of adjustment 0 to 99
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to enter the offset value for color displacement caused by the copyboard glass.
Method of adjustment
Enter the value for the following:
If you have replaced the copyboard glass, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the copyboard glass. (In addition, be sure
to record the value on the service label.)
In the case of the following, enter the value indicated on the service label:
- if you have replaced the reader controller PCB.
- if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -150 to 150
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 0]

Enter the offset value for color displacement caused by the stream reading glass.
Method of adjustment
Enter the value for the following:
Use it to enter the offset value for color displacement caused by the stream reading glass.
If you have replaced the stream reading glass, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the stream reading glass.
In the case of the following, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the stream reading glass:
- if you have replaced the reader controller PCB.
- if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -150 to 150
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 0]

Chapter 16
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
Sub item

Description

level

50-RG

Use it to indicate the offset value (indication only) for color displacement (R-G) for BOOK mode/50% reading.

50-GB

Use it to indicate the offset value (indication only) for color displacement (G-B) for BOOK mode/50% reading.

100-RG

Use it to indicate the offset value (indication only) for color displacement (R-G) for BOOK mode/100% reading.

100-GB

Use it to indicate the offset value (indication only) for color displacement (G-B) for BOOK mode/100% reading.

50DF-RG

Use it to indicate the offset value (indication only) for color displacement (R-G) for ADF mode/50% reading.

50DF-GB

Use it to indicate the offset value (indication only) for color displacement (G-B) for ADF mode/50% reading.

100DF-RG

Use it to indicate the offset value (indication only) for color displacement (R-G) for ADF mode/100% reading.

100DF-GB

Use it to indicate the offset value (indication only) for color displacement (G-B) for ADF mode/100% reading.

DFTAR-R

Use it to enter the shading target (red) for the DF (normal original read position).
Method of adjustment
Use this mode item to enter the factory measurement if an image fault occurs (e.g., caused by soiling of the chart) after executing
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1/DF-WLV2.
Range of adjustment 1 to 2047
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 1106]

Use it to enter the shading target (green) for the DF (normal original read position).
Method of adjustment
Use this mode item to enter the factory measurement if an image fault occurs (e.g., caused by soiling of the chart) after executing
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1/DF-WLV2.
Range of adjustment 0 to 2047
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 1131]

Use it to enter the shading target (blue) for the DF (normal original read position).
Use this mode to enter the factory setting if an image fault occurs (e.g., caused by soling of the chart) after executing
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1/DF-WLV2.
Range of adjustment 1 to 2047
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 1185]

Use it to enter the shading target (red) for the DF (No. 2 read position).
Method of adjustment
Use this mode item to enter the factory measurement if an image fault occurs (e.g., caused by soiling of the chart) after executing
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2.
Range of adjustment 1 to 2047
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 1138]

Use it to enter the shading target value (green) for the DF No. 2 read position).
Method of adjustment
Use this mode item to enter the factory measurement if an image fault occurs (e.g., caused by soiling of the chart) after executing
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2.
Range of adjustment 1 to 2047
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 1154]

Use it to enter the shading target (blue) for the DF (No. 2 read position).
Method of adjustment
Use this mode item to enter the factory measurement if an image fault occurs (e.g. caused by soiling of the chart) after executing
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2.
Range of adjustment 1 to 2047
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 1201]

DFTAR-G

DFTAR-B

DFTAR2-R

DFTAR2-G

DFTAR2-B

820686679349
va l u e o f W- P L AT E - Z
va l u e o f W- P L AT E - X
va l u e o f W- P L AT E - Y
F-16-18

<LASER>
COPIER > ADJUST > LASER
Sub item
PVE-OFST

LA-DELAY

DLY-DAT1

Description

level

Use it to enter the adjustment value for the point of laser illumination.
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced
the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -25 to 25
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization]
Reference
This item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

Use it to adjust the point of laser B illumination.

Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller, if you have replaced the DC
controller PCB, or if you have replaced the laser scanner unit.
Range of adjustment 0 to 511
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 289]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

Use it to fine-adjust the point of laser B illumination.

Range of adjustment: 0 to 15 (unit: 1/16 pixel) [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

<IMG-REG>

16-23

Chapter 16

COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG

Sub item
REG-V-Y/K

REG2-V-Y/K

REG-V-M

REG2-V-M

Description

level

Use it to make rough adjustments of the write start position in sub scanning direction for Y/K.
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced
the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -10 to 10
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 0]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

Use it to make rough adjustments for the write start position in sub scanning direction for Y/K (for 2nd side image in 2-pane
placement).
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced
the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -10 to 10
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 0]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

Use it to make rough adjustments for the write start position in sub scanning direction for magenta.
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated in the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced
the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -10 to 10
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: -1]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

Use it to make rough adjustments for the write start position in sub scanning direction for magenta (2nd-side image in 2-pane
placement).
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced
the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -10 to 10
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 0]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

<DENS>
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
Sub item

Description

level

Use it to enter the toner density signal initial value (Y/M/C).

Method of adjustment
Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced
the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment 0 to 1024 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 512]

SGNL-D

not used

REF-Y/M/C

Use it to enter the toner density signal reference value (Y/M/C).

Method of adjustment
Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced
the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment 0 to 1024 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 512]

REF-D

not used

HLMT-PTY/M/C

Use it to adjust the upper limit for the patch target density level (Y/M/C).
Range of adjustment: 0 to 6 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 4]
Avoid its use as much a possible if the operation is normal.

Use it to adjust the lower limit level for the patch target density correction level (Y/M/C).
Range of adjustment: 2 to 6 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 2]
Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal.

SGNL-Y/M/C

LLMT-PTY/M/C

<BLANK>
COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
Sub item
BLANK-T

BLANK-L

BLANK-R

16-24

Description

level

Use it to enter the adjustment value for the non-image width (leading edge).
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or if you have replaced
the SRAM PCB.
Range of adjustment 0 to 1000
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: +59]

Use it to enter the adjustment value for the non-image width (left edge).
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or if you have replaced
the SRAM PCB.
Range of adjustment 0 to 1000
[at time of shipment: factory measurement /after RAM initialization: +59]

Enter the adjustment value for the non-image width (right edge).
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or if you have replaced
the SRAM PCB.
Range of adjustment 0 to 1000
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: +59]

Chapter 16
COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
Sub item
BLANK-B

Description

level

Use it to enter the adjustment value of the non-image width (trailing edge).
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or if you have replaced
the SRAM PCB.
Range of adjustment 0 to 1000
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: +94]

<V-CONT>
COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT
Sub item
VCONT-Y/M/C/K

VBACK-Y/M/C/K

PT-VCT-Y/M/C/K

Description

level

Use it to adjust the target contrast potential (Y/M/C/K).

Range of adjustment -30 to +30 (unit: 10 V)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
A higher setting causes the images to be darker.
Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal.

Use it to adjust the de-fogging potential (Y/M/C/K).

Range of adjustment -30 to +30 (unit: 5V)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
A higher setting decreases fogging.
Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal.

Use it to adjust the patch image target contrast potential (Y/M/C/K).

Range of adjustment -5 to +5 (unit: 4V)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

<PASCAL>
COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL
Sub item
OFST-P-Y/M/C/K

Description

level

Use it to apply an offset value on the text print read signal (Y/M/C/K) for PASCAL control executed at time of auto gradation
correction (full correction).
Method of adjustment
- A higher value darkens the image after auto gradation correction (full correction).
Range of adjustment -128 to +128
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

<COLOR>
COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR
Sub item
ADJ-Y/M/C/K

OFST-Y/M/C/K

LD-OFS-Y/M/C/K

MD-OFS-Y/M/C/K

HD-OFS-Y/M/C/K

Description

level

Use it to adjust the color balance used in user mode (Y/M/C/K).

Method of adjustment
- a higher value darkens the image.
- a lower value lightens the image.
Range of adjustment -8 to +8
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to adjust the color balance and the light area density (Y/M/C/K).
Method of adjustment
A lower value decreases fogging.
Range of adjustment -32 to +32
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to adjust the color balance for the low density range (Y/M/C/K).
Range of adjustment: -8 to +8 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal.

Use it to adjust heat color balance for the medium density range (Y/M/C/K).
Range of adjustment: -8 to +8 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
Avoid its use if the operation is normal.

Use it to adjust the color balance for the high-density range (Y/M/C/K).
Range of adjustment: -8 to +8 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal.

<HV-PRI>
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
Sub item
OFST1-AC

PRI-GAIN

Description

level

Use it to adjust the offset value of the primary charging AC voltage.

Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
- Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB.
Range of adjustment 0 to 255
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 8]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

Use it to adjust the gain for the primary charging current measurement.
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
- Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB.
Range of adjustment 50 to 700
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 162]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

16-25

Chapter 16
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
Sub item
PRI-OFST

DR-I-INT

Description

level

Use it to adjust the offset value for the primary charging current measurement.
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
- Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB.
Range of adjustment -10000 to +5000
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment/after RAM initialization: -17]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

Use it for the drum film thickness current initial value. The drum film thickness current value measured when the following
is executed will be indicated: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DRUM-LIFE.
Method of adjustment
- If you have newly mounted/replaced the drum unit, execute the following, and record on the service label the value indicated:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DRM-LIFE.
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment 300 to 600 (unit: 0.1yA)
[at time of shipment: factory measurement/after RAM initialization: 350]

<HV-TR>
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR
Sub item
2TR-GAIN

2TR-OFST

1TR-GAIN

1TR-OFST

2TR-TGT1 to 8

2TR-SHR1 to 8

TR-PPR1 to 8

TR-ENV1 to 8

TR-CLR1 to 8

TR-DUP1 to 8

1TR-TGY/M/C

16-26

Description

level

Use it to adjust the gain for the secondary transfer current measurement.
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
- Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB.
Range of adjustment -400 to +30
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: -108]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

Use it to adjust the offset value for the secondary transfer current measurement.
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
- Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB or if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB.
Range of adjustment 3000 to 30000
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 10045]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

Use it to adjust the gain for the primary transfer current measurement.
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
- Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB if y have replaced the high-voltage PCB.
Range of adjustment -70 to 0
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: -32]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

Use it to adjust the offset value of the primary transfer current measurement.
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
- Enter the value indicated on the label attached on the PCB if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB.
Range of adjustment -7000 to +7000
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 2991]
Reference
This mode item is for use at the factory only. Do not use it in the field.

Use it to set the offset value for the secondary transfer target current value.
The secondary transfer ATVC target current value will be offset if the operating mode of the machine matches the setting
of TR-ENV, TR-PPR, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.
1a/
Setting -5 to 5 (unit: yA)
Reference The following 6 items are grouped as a single set: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PPR, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.

Use it to set the offset value for the secondary ATVC assignment voltage.
The paper assignment voltage will be offset for secondary ATVC if the machine operation mode matches the settings of TRENV, TR-PPR, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.
Setting -5 to 5 (unit: 100V)
Reference The following 6 items are grouped as a single set: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PPR, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.

Use it to set paper types for secondary transfer ATVC.

1: plain paper; 2: heavy paper; 3: tracing paper; 4: transparency; 5: postcard, envelope; 6: label sheet; 7; special paper 2
Reference The following 6 items are grouped as a single set: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PPR, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.

Use it to make environmental settings for secondary transfer ATVC.

1: low humidity; 2: normal humidity; 3: high humidity
Reference The following 6 items are grouped as a single set: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PPR, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.

Use it to make color mode settings for secondary transfer ATVC.

1: Bk mode 2: C mode
Reference The following 6 items are grouped as a single set: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PPR, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.

Use it to make simplex/duplex pickup mode settings for secondary transfer ATVC.
1: single-sided; 2: auto double-sided; 3: manual double-sided
Reference The following 6 items are grouped as a single set: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PPR, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.

Use it to adjust the primary transfer ATVC target current offset value (Y/M/C).
Range of adjustment -10 to 10 (unit: 0.5 yA)

Chapter 16
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR
Sub item

Description

level

1TR-TGK1

Use it to adjust the primary transfer ATVC target current offset value (black, mono).
Range of adjustment -10 to 10 (unit: 0.5 yA)

1TR-TGK4

Use it to adjust the primary transfer ATVC target current offset value (Bk; 4C).
Range of adjustment -10 to 10 (unit: 0.5 yA)

TR-INTVL

Use it to adjust the primary transfer bias for between colors/between sheets.
Range of adjustment -8 to +8 (unit: 10%)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
Increase the setting (if the light image is limited to about 30 to 180 mm along the leading edge of a halftone solid area).
Decrease the setting (if the dark area is limited to about 30 to 180 mm along the leading edge of a halftone solid area).
When increasing the setting, be sure to do so in increments of '1'.

Use it to adjust the offset for the secondary transfer bias applied from when the leading edge of paper reaches the secondary
transfer roller to when a specific period of time passes.
Range of adjustment -50 to +50 (unit: 1%)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to adjust the offset for the secondary transfer bias applied when the leading edge of paper reaches the secondary
transfer roller.
Range of adjustment 0 to 290 (nit: msec)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

2T-TP-LV

2T-TP-TM

<FEED-ADJ>
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
Sub item
REGIST

ADJ-C1/2/3/4

ADJ-MF

ADJ-DK

RG-REFE

ADJ-C1/2/3/4RE

ADJ-DKRE

Description

level

Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration roller clutch goes on.
Method of adjustment
- An increase of '1' will move the image toward the leading edge of paper by 0.1 mm.
- Enter the value indicated on the service lable if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -50 to 50 (unit: 0.1 mm)
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: -30]

Use it to adjust the image write start position in main scanning direction when the cassette 1/2/3/4 is used as the source of
paper.
Method of adjustment
- An increase of '1' will move the image toward the rear by 0.1 mm.
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller.
Range of adjustment -100 to 100 (unit: 0.1 mm)
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to adjust the image write start position in main scanning direction when the multifeeder is used as the source of
paper.
Method of adjustment
- An increase of '1' will move the image toward the rear by 0.1 mm.
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -100 to 100 (unit: 0.1 mm)
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after initialization: 0]

Use it to adjust the image write start position in main scanning direction when the paper deck is used as the source of paper.
Method of adjustment
- An increase of '1' will move the image toward the rear by 0.1 mm.
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -100 to 100 (unit: 0.1 mm)
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to adjust the leading edge registration for the 2nd side of a double-sided print.
Method of adjustment
- An increase of '1' will move the image toward the leading edge of paper by 0.1 mm.
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller or if you have replaced
the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -50 to +50 (1 = 0.1 mm, approx.)
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 0]
Reference
The paper path used for duplexing is different from the path for the cassette (joins the later immediately in front of the
registration roller); as such, the leading edge registration may also be different from the registration for paper arriving from
the cassette. This mode is offered for that reason, and it does not operate in keeping with the registration used when the
cassette is the source of paper.

Use it to adjust the image write start position for the 2nd side in main scanning direction when the cassette 1/2/3/4 is used
as the source of paper (horizontal registration adjustment).
Method of adjustment
- An incase of '1' will move the image toward the rear by 0.1 mm.
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -10 to +10 (1 = 0.1 mm, approx.)
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 10]

Use it to adjust the image write start position for the 2nd side in main scanning direction when the paper deck is used as
the source of paper (horizontal registration adjustment).
Method of adjustment
- An increase of '1' will move the image toward the rear by 0.1 mm.
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -10 to +10 (1 = 0.1 mm, approx.)
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 10]

16-27

Chapter 16
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
Sub item

Description

level

Use it to adjust the image write start position for the 2nd side in main scanning direction when the manual feed tray is used
as the source of paper (horizontal registration adjustment).
Method of adjustment
- An increase of '1' will move the image toward the rear by 0.1 mm.
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -10 to +10 (1 = 0.1 mm, approx.)
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 10]

Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration clutch goes on (process speed at 1/2, heavy paper/transparency in use).
Method of adjustment
- An increase of '1' will move the image toward the leading edge of paper by 0.1 mm.
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have
replaced the DC controller PCB.
Range of adjustment -50 to 50 (1 = 0.1 mm, approx.)
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 0]

LOOP-CST

Use it to adjust the degree of arching when the cassette is used as the source of paper.
Range of adjustment -100 to 100

LOOP-MF

Use it to adjust the degree of arching when the multifeeder is used as the source of paper.
Range of adjustment -100 to 100

LOOPREFE

Use it to adjust the degree of arching in duplex mode.

Range of adjustment -100 to 100

ADJ-MFRE

RG-HF-SP

<CST-ADJ>
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
Sub item
MF-A4R

MF-A6R

MF-A4

Description

level

Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A4R).
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced
the DC controller PCB.
- If you have replaced the paper width detecting VR or if you are registering a value newly, be sure to execute the following in service
mode: FUNCTION>CST.
Range of adjustment 0 to 255
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 141]

Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A6R).
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced
the DC controller PCB.
- If you have replaced the paper width detecting VR or if you are registering a value newly, be sure to execute the following in service
mode: FUNCTION>CST.
Range of adjustment 0 to 255
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 235]

Enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A4).
Method of adjustment
- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced
the DC controller PCB.
- If you have replaced the paper width detecting VR or if you are registering the value newly, be sure to execute the following in
service mode: FUNCTION>CST.
Range of adjustment 0 to 255
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 26]

<MISC>
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
Sub item
SEG-ADJ

K-ADJ

ACS-ADJ

ACS-EN

ACS-CNT

ACS-EN2

16-28

Description

level

Use it to adjust the separation level used between text and photo in text/photo/map mode.
Method of adjustment
- If you want the machine to identify an original to be a photo original, increase the setting.
- If you want the machine to identify an original to be a text original, decrease the setting.
Range of adjustment -4 to 4 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to adjust the black recognition level for black character processing.
Method of adjustment
- If you want the machine to identify a character as a black character, increase the setting.
Range of adjustment -3 to 3 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to adjust the color recognition level for ACS mode.

Method of adjustment
- If you want the machine to identify an original to be a black-and-white original, increase the setting.
- If you want the machine to identify an original as a colored original, decrease the setting.
Range of adjustment -3 to 3 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to adjust the ACS identification area.

Range of adjustment -2 to 2
[at time of shipmen/after RAM initialization: 1]

Use it to set the chrome count range for ACS identification.

Range of adjustment -2 to 2
[at time of shipmen/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to adjust the ACS identification range (for DF stream reading).

Method of adjustment A higher setting increases the range of identification.
Range of adjustment -2 to 2
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1]

Chapter 16
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
Sub item
ACS-CNT2

D-MTR-SP

Description

level

Use it to adjust the count range of chrome pixels for ACS identification (for DF stream reading).
Method of adjustment A higher setting increases the range of identification.
Range of adjustment -2 to 2
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to fine-adjust the drum/ITB motor speed (magnification adjustment).

Range of adjustment -5 to +5 (unit: 0.1%)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

16.4.2 FEEDER
16.4.2.1 FEEDER Table
0003-6072

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

FEEDER > ADJUST
Sub item
DOCST

Description

level

Adjusting the Original Image Leading Edge.

Method of adjustment
A higher setting will delay the image leading edge timing.
Range of adjustment -100 to 100 (unit: 0.337mm) [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

LA-SPEED Adjusting the document feeding speed at the time of stream reading from the feeder.
Method of adjustment
The speed becomes faster (image is reduced) by increasing setting value.
Range of adjustment -30 to 30 (unit: 0.1%)
[at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 0]

16.4.3 SORTER
16.4.3.1 SORTER Table
0003-6076

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

SORTER > ADJUST
Sub-item
PNCH-HLE

Description

Level

Use it to adjust the punch hole position (paper feed direction) when the puncher unit is used.
<Setting range> -4 to +2 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
<Using the Mode>
1) Make a print of the Test Chart, and check the position of the holes.
2) Select the item, and change the setting to adjust.
3) Press the OK key.
4) Make a print of the Test Chart once again, and check to see if the position of the holes is as indicated.

Paper

Feed
direction

Higher value

Lower value

16.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode)

16.5.1 COPIER
16.5.1.1 COPIER Table
0003-7767

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

<INSTALL>
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
STIR-Y/M/C/K

Description
Use it to stir the developer inside the developing unit (Y/M/C/K).
Method of operation Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.

level
1

16-29

Chapter 16
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item

Description

level

STIR-4

Use it to stir the developer inside all developing units (Y, M, C, Bk).
Method of operation Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.

INIT-Y/M/C

Use it to cause the machine to read the initial value for the Y/M/C toner density signal (SGNL, REF).
Method of operation Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.

INIT-3

Use it to cause the machine to read the initial value for 3-color (Y, M, C) toner density signal (SGNL, REF).
Method of operation Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.

SPLY-H-Y/M/C/K

Use it to start initial supply of toner from the toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K) to the toner buffer assembly.
Method of operation Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.

SPLY-H-4

Use it to start initial supply of toner from all toner cartridges (Y, M, C, Bk) to the toner buffer assembly.
Method of operation Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.

STRD-POS

Use it to cause auto detection of the CIS read position for DF stream reading mode.
Method of operation Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.

CARD

Use it to make settings for a card reader.

Method of adjustment 1 to 2001 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
Method of operation Enter the number of a card, and press the OK key. (As many as 100 cards starting with the one
whose number you have entered will be accepted for use.)
At this time, the card control information (group ID and ID No.) is initialized.

Use it to set the control key function.

Settings 0: do not recognize control key. [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
1: recognize control key function.
Method of operation 1) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>INSTALL>KEY.
2: Turn off and then on the main power switch (so that the control key function will be recognized).

E-RDS
**

Use it to specify the use of E-RDS.

0: off (do not use; default)
1: use RDS (transmit all counter information)

RGW-PORT
**

Use it to set the Sales Company server port number used for embedded-RDS.
settings range: 1 to 65535

COM-TEST
**

Use it to check the connection to the server used for E-RDS.

Procedure
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key.
2) See where a connection has been made. (The result will be indicated as 'OK' or 'NG'.)
OK: connection possible; NG: connection not possible

COM-LOG
**

Use it to indicate the details of the result of the communication test executed for the server used for E-RDS.
Procedure
1) Select the item to highlight, and press [show info].
log information particulars: year, date, time, error code, error detail (128 characters max.)

RGW-ADR
**

Use it to specify the URL of the server used for E-RDS.

Procedure
1) Select the item to highlight, and press [show information].
2) When the URL input screen appears, enter the appropriate URL and press the OK key.
(default: https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agnetif010)

Set timing of counter transmission to server

Sets time and date for start of transmission of counter information to server, via E-RDS third party extension function.
Setting range: YYYYMMDDHHMM (YYYY: year, MM: month, DD: date, HH: hours, MM: minutes)
[Factory settings and after RAM clear::000000000000]
Note
This item is only displayed when the E-RDS third party extension function is enabled.Set timing of counter transmission
to server.
Sets time and date for start of transmission of counter information to server, via E-RDS third party extension function.
Setting range: YYYYMMDDHHMM (YYYY: year, MM: month, DD: date, HH: hours, MM: minutes)
[Factory settings and after RAM clear:: 000000000000]
Note
This item is only displayed when the E-RDS third party extension function is enabled.

Set interval of counter transmission to server

Sets transmission intervals for transmission of counter information to server, via E-RDS third party extension function.

KEY

CNT-DATE
***

CNT-INTV
***

<CCD>
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
Sub item
DF-WLVL1/2

16-30

Description

level

Use it to adjust the ADF white level.

Method of operation
1) Make the following selections, and enter the appropriate value: COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLATE-X/Y/Z.
To check the target value, make the following selections: COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD>TARGET-R/G/B.
2) Execute the following selections: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1.
Place paper normally used by the user on the copyboard glass, and cause the machine to read it.
The machine reads the white level for book mode (i.e., checks the degree of transmission of the glass for book mode).
3) Execute the following selections: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD-DF-WLVL2.
Place paper normally used by the user in the DF, and cause the machine to read it (steam reading).
The machine reads the white level for DF mode (stream reading; i.e., checks the level of transmission of the reading glass for stream
reading).
face reading: computes DFTAR-R/G/B
back reading: computes DFTAR2-R/G/B
Caution Be sure to execute these 2 items at the same time.

Chapter 16
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
Sub item
LUT-ADJ2

Description
CCD Gain Fine-Correction
If adjustment of the density using LUT-ADJ (CCD gain simple correction) cannot be made, execute this mode using the 10gradation chart.
<Method of Operation>
1) Place the 10-gradation Chart (D-10 test sheet) on the copyboard glass as shown.
2) Select the item, and press the OK key.
3) See that the machine executes automatic adjustment.
4) See that the machine ends the automatic adjustment.
5) When the service mode items (COPIER>ADJUST>LAMP, COPIER>ADJUST>CCD) are updated, print out a service sheet,
and store away the printout.

level

Place the chart so that the side

with gradation faces downward.

F-16-19

<LASER>
COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER
Sub item
POWER-H

Description

level

Use it to turn on the laser output of the laser power maximum value adjustment.
Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start laser output. Press the Stop key to stop the laser output.

<CST>
COPIER > FUNCTION > CST
Sub item
MF-A4R,MFA6R,MF-A4

Description

level

Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feeder.
A4 width: 210 mm; A6R width: 105 mm; A4 width: 297 mm
- To make fine-adjustments, make the following selections: COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4, RMF-A6R, MF-A4.
Method of operation
1) Place A4 paper in the manual feeder, and adjust the size guide to A4R width.
2) Using this service mode item, select 'MF-A4R' to highlight, and press the OK key(so that the value will be stored after auto
adjustment).
3) Likewise, perform steps 1) and 2) to register the basic value for A6R and A4.

<CLEANING>
COPIER >FUNCTION > CLEANING
Sub item
TBLT-CLN

FDRL-CLN

RVRL-CLN

DEVL-CLN

TB-INSD

Description

level

Use it to clean the intermediate transfer belt.

When executed, it will remove the foreign matter (e.g., oils from fingers, paper lint) to prevent image faults.
Method of operation Select it to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.
The cleaning operation will last for about 80 sec and end automatically.

Use it to clean the face-down delivery roller 1/2.

Method of operation 1) Select it to highlight, and press the OK key so that the rollers will start to rotate.
2) While both rollers are rotating, press a cloth moistened with alcohol against the individual rollers to clean them.
3) Press the Stop key to stop the operation.

Use it to clean the reversing roller.

Method of operation 1) Open the delivery cover.
2) Select the item, and press the OK key so that the roller will start to rotate.
3) While the roller is rotating, press a cloth moistened with alcohol against it to clean.
4) Press the Stop key to stop the operation.

Use it to clean the inside of the developing unit.

The machine is forced to use up the toner that may have been excessively stirred by the toner stirring screw (i.e., thus acquiring
wrong charges) to prevent image faults.
Method of operation Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.
The operation will last for about 7 min and will end automatically.

Use it to clean the inner side of the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).
Method of operation Select it to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.
The operation will last for about 30 sec and will end automatically.

<FIXING>

16-31

Chapter 16

COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING

Sub item
NIP-CHK

Description

level

Generate a printout of automatic measurement of the fixing nip width.

Steps 1) Select 'plain paper' or 'recycled paper' as the type of paper for the cassette 1 (Additional Function>common settings>paper
type).
2) Place A4/LTR plain paper or recycled paper in the cassette 1.
3) Press the OK key (so that paper is picked up from the cassette 1).
4) See that the paper is stopped once between the fixing roller and then discharged in about 15 sec.
5) Check to see the nip width of the discharged paper is as indicated.
6) If the nip width is not as indicated, perform the following:
6-1) Turn the front and rear adjusting screws to adjust the nip.
EX: if the median value of the nip measurements is closer to the lower limit,
tighten the screw of the side where the nip at the ends is smaller; a full turn of the screw will cause a change of about 0.5 mm.
EX: if the nip balance is correct, turn the screws of both sides.
7) After the work, generate a test print using the following: COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE6 (grid).

c
F-16-20

standard: b, c
9.25 -0.25, +0.25 mm (less than 5000 sheets)
9.25 +1.25/ -0.25mm difference between b and c 0.5 mm or less (5000 sheets or more)
standard: a (reference only)
from 8.5 to 9.0 mm (less than 5000 sheets)
from 8.5 to 10.0 mm (5000 sheets or more)
Note 1:
The point of measurement for a is in the middle of paper.
Note 2:
The points of measurement for b and c are 10 to 15 mm from the edge of paper.
Note 3:
The arrow in the figure indicates the direction of paper movement.
Note 4:
The nip tends to increase as more and more paper is moved past. There is no need, however, for another session of adjustment each time 5000 sheets have been
moved past. If adjustments are needed for some reason, try so that b and c are adjusted to match the median value of 9.25 mm.

F-16-21

<PANEL>
COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL
Sub item
LCD-CHK

LED-CHK

16-32

Description
Use it to check the LCD for a missing dot.
Method of operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start the operation.
See that the front face of the touch panel goes on in the following sequence: white, black, red, green, and blue.
2) Press the Stop key to end the operation. (In the case of the printer model, press the Clear key.)

level

Use it to check the LEDs on the control panel.

Method of operation 1) Select it, and press the OK key to start the operation.
See that the LEDs go on in sequence.
2) Press [LED-OFF] to stop the operation.

LED-OFF

Use it to check the LEDs on the control panel.

Method of operation 1) Select it to end the operation under [LED-CHK].

KEY-CHK

Use it to check the keys.

Method of operation 1) Select [KEY-CHK] so that the machine indicates the numbers/names of the input keys.
2) Press any key to check; if normal, the appropriate character will appear on the touch panel. (See the table.)
3) Select [KEY-CHK] once again to end the key input check.

Chapter 16
COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL
Sub item
TOUCHCHK

Description

level

Adjusting the Coordinates of the Analog Touch Panel

Method of operation - Match points pressed on the touch panel with the coordinates of the LCD.
- Execute this service mode item if you have replaced the LCD.
1) Select [TOUCHCHK] to highlight, and press the OK key.
2) Press the + symbols (9 pc.) appearing on the touch panel in sequence to end the adjustment.

Numbers/Names of the Keys

Key

Indication on screen

0 to 9, #, *

0 to 9, #, *

reset

RESET

stop

STOP

Additional Function

USER

start

START

power save

STAND BY

clear

CLEAR

ID

ID

help

counter check

BILL

<PART-CHK>
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK
Sub item
CL

CL-ON

FAN

FAN-ON

Description
Use it to select a clutch whose operation you want to check.
(range 1 through 15; 8 through 10 and 13 through 15, reserved)
Method of operation
1) Select the item.
2) Enter the code of the clutch you want to check using the keypad.
1: toner supply clutch CL7
2: ITB cleaning drive clutch CL8
3: sleeve drive clutch CL3
4: secondary transfer swing clutch CL9
5: duplex feed clutch CL6
6: registration clutch CL2
7: manual feed pickup clutch CL1
8 to 10: reserved
11: deck pickup clutch CL2D
12: deck draw-out clutch CL1D
3) Press the OK key.
4) Press [CL-ON] to check the operation.
Use it to start a check on the operation of the clutch you have selected.
Method of operation
1) Select the time, and press the OK key so that the clutch will repeat going on and off as follows:
ON for 0.5 sec > OFF for 10 sec > ON for 0.5 sec > OFF for 1 sec > ON for 0.5 sec > OFF

level

Use it to select a fan whose operation you want to check.

(1 through 10; 5 or higher, reserved)
Method of operation
1) Select the item.
2) Enter the code of the fan you want to check.
1: heat exhaust fan (FAN1)
2: heat exhaust fan 2 (FM2)
3: toner suction fan (FM5)
4: ITB fan (FM3)
3) Press the OK key.
4) Press [FAN-ON], and check the operation.

Use it to check the operation of the fans; power supply fan, fixing fan, cleaner fan.
Method of operation
1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that the following operation starts:
for 10 sec, ON at full speed > for 10 sec, ON at half speed > standby

16-33

Chapter 16
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK
Sub item
MTR

MTR-ON

SL

SL-ON

Description

level

Use it to select the motor whose operation you want to check.

(1 thorough 25; 9, 17 through 25, reserved)
Method of operation
1) Select the item.
2) Enter the code of the motor you want to check using the keypad.
1: laser scanner motor M1
2: rotary motor M8
3: pickup 1 motor M6
4: pickup 2 motor M7
5: No. 1 delivery motor M4
6: drum motor M9
7: main motor M2
8: fixing motor M11
9: reserved
10: pedestal pickup 1 motor M1C
11: pedestal pickup 2 motor M2C
12: P/D feed motor M1D
13: P/D lifter motor M2D
14: No. 2 delivery motor
15: No. 3 delivery motor
16: buffer path motor
3) Press the OK key.
4) Press [MTR-ON], and check the operation.

Use it to start the operation of the motor.

Method of operation Toner Cartridge Motor (Y, M, C, K)
1) Remove the toner cartridge, and close the front cover.
2) Select the item, and press the OK key.
- for 10 sec ON > OFF
Horizontal Registration Motor
1) Select the item, and press the OK key.
- HP search starts > end automatically
Motors Other Than Toner Cartridge Motor (Y, M, C, K) and Horizontal Motor
1) Select the item, and press the OK key.
- for 10 sec, ON > OFF

Use it to select the solenoid whose operation you want to check.

(1 to 20; 4 to 10, 18 to 20, reserved)
Method of operation
1) Select the item.
2) Enter the code of the solenoid you want to check using the keypad.
1: cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL1
2: cassette 2 pickup solenoid SL2
3: ATR shutter solenoid SL3
4 to 10: reserved
11: cassette 3 pickup solenoid SL1C
12: cassette 4 pickup solenoid SL2C
13: paper deck pickup solenoid SL1D
14: paper deck paper compartment open solenoid SL2D
15: No. 1 flapper solenoid
16: No. 2 flapper solenoid
17: No. 3 flapper solenoid
18 to 20: reserved
3) Press the OK key.
4) Press [SL-ON], and check the operation.

Use it to start the check on the solenoid you have selected.

Method of operation
1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that the solenoid will repeat going on and off as follows: for 0.5 sec, ON > for 10
sec, OFF > for 0.5 sec, ON > for 10 sec, OFF > for 0.5 sec, ON >OFF

<CLEAR>
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
ERR

DC-CON

R-CON

JAM-HIST

16-34

Description

level

Use it to reset an error code.

(E000, E001, E002, E003)
Method of operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.
2) Turn off and then on the main power supply.

Use it to reset the RAM on the DC controller PCB.

Caution The contents of the RAM are removed when the main power switch is turned off and then on once again.
Method of operation 1) Obtain a printout of the service mode settings by making the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT.
2) Select the item, and press the OK key.
3) Turn off and then on the main power.
4) As necessary, enter the data indicated on the print obtained using [P-PRINT].

Use it to initialize the RAM on the reader controller PCB.

Caution The contents of the RAM are initialized only when the main power switch has been turned off and then on once again.
Method of operation 1) Obtain a printout of the service mode settings by making the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT.
2) Select the item, and press the OK key.
3) Turn off and then on the main power.
4) As necessary, enter the data indicated on the printout obtained by [P-PRINT].

Use it to reset the jam history

The jam history is removed when the OK key is pressed.
Caution The jam history is removed when the OK key is pressed.
Method of operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.

Chapter 16
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
ERR-HIST

PWD-CLR

ADRS-BK

CNT-MCON

CNT-DCON

OPTION

MMI

Description
Use it to reset the error history.
Caution The error history is removed when the OK key is pressed.
Method of operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.
Use it to reset the password set up in user mode under [system administrator].
Caution The password is removed when the OK key is pressed.
Method of operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.

level
1

Use it to reset the address book data.

Caution The address book data is removed when the main power switch is turned off and then on once again.
Method of operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.
2) Turn off and then on the main power.

Use it to reset the service counter readings controlled by the main controller PCB (main).
(For the readings that are reset, see the description under COUNTER mode.)
Caution The counter readings are removed when the OK key is pressed.
Method of operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.

Use the item to reset the service counter readings controlled by the DC controller PCB.
- COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2>SORT
- COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2>FIN-STPR
- COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2>FIN-PDDL
- COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2>SADDLE
- COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2>SDL-STPL
Caution The counter readings are removed when the OK key is pressed.
Method of operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.

Use it to reset the service mode (OPTION) settings to default settings (RAM initialization).
Caution The settings are reset when the OK key is pressed.
Reference The data removed here is data in the main controller, DC controller, and reader controller.
Method of operation 1) Obtain a printout of the service mode settings by executing the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT.
2) Select the item, and press the OK key.

Use it to reset the following for user mode.

- backup data for copier control panel (user settings)
- common settings backup data (user settings)
- backup data (other than fax settings; user settings)
Caution The settings are removed when the main power switch is turned off and then on again.
Method of operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.
2) Turn off and then on the main power.

Use it to reset the RAM in the main controller PCB SRAM board.
Caution - The contents of the RAM are removed when the main power switch is turned off and then on once again.
- When this item is executed, all data on the SRAM board will be initialized. In other words, the image data including the images
in Boxes on the hard disk will also be lost. Be sure to obtain the consent of the user before executing this item.
Method of operation 1) Obtain a printout of the service mode settings by executing the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT.
2) Select the item, and press the OK key. The machine will restart automatically, and indicate a message asking you to turn off
and then on the power.
3) Turn off and then on the main power.

Use it to reset card ID-related data (group).

Caution The card ID-related data is removed when the main power switch is turned off and then on.
Method of operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.
2) Turn off and then on the main power.

Use it to initialize the various parameters after replacing the drum unit.
Method of operation Execute this item if you have replaced the drum unit with a new one.
1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key to start the operation.
While the operation is under way, the item will flash; and, the operation ends in about 1 min.
3) Record the setting indicated for the following on the drum counter label: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DRM-1-INIT.
4) If the following is not '0', execute the item once again: COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>DRUM>LIFE.
Caution - Do not execute this unit unless you have replaced the drum unit with a new one. Otherwise, the image density will not
be optimum, requiring you to replace the drum unit.
- Do not open any door or turn off the power switch while the operation is under way. Otherwise, you will have to execute the
item once again.

SND-STUP

Use it to initialize the setting for the transmission reading. (Execute this item when you switch language settings.)

CA-KEY
**

Use it to reset the CA certificate and key.

The CA certificate and the key will be reset when the main power switch is turned off and then back on.
Procedure
1) Select the item, and press the OK key.
2) Turn off and then back on the main power.

MN-CON

CARD

DRM-LIFE

KEY-CLR
***

Clear the encryption key in the HDD encryption board.

Clear the key in order to replace the encryption key for the HDD encryption board (security kit).
Select KEY-CLR and press the OK key to clear the encryption key.
When this operation is performed and the main power is turned OFF/ON, the processing for installation of the encryption board
is activated, and new encryption key is created.

<CAUTION>
When this operation is performed, all the data in the HDD cannot be used. Therefore, when the main power is turned OFF/ON,
it is necessary to perform procedures starting from HDD formatting.

<MISC-R>

16-35

Chapter 16

COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
Sub item
SCANLAMP

Description
Use it to check the operation of the scanning lamp.
Method of operation 1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key so that the scanning lamp remains on for 3 sec.

level
1

<MISC-P>
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
P-PRINT

USER-PRT

LBL-PRNT

DEV-DR-Y/M/C/K

ITB-CLSW

DRM-CHK

D-PRINT

1ATVC-EX

ENV-PRT

DEV-DR-D

I-BD-OFF

16-36

Description

level

Use it to generate a printout of the service mode settings.

Method of operation
1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key to generate a printout.
Reference It takes about 15 sec for the machine to generate a printout.

Use it to obtain a printout of the user mode settings.

Method of operation
1) Select the mode.
2) Press the OK key to generate a printout.
Reference It takes about 3 sec for the machine to generate a printout.

Use it to obtain a printout of the service label.

Method of operation
1) Place 4/LTR paper in the cassette 1.
2) Select the item.
3) Press the OK key to generate a printout.
Reference It takes about 15 sec for the machine to generate a printout.

Use it to move the developing assembly rotary to the point of replacement for the toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K).
Method of operation
1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key so that the developing assembly rotary moves to the point of replacement for the toner cartridge (Y/M/
C/k).
Caution Be sure to move the developing assembly rotary to the point of replacement for the toner cartridge; then, turn off
the control panel power switch and the main power switch in correct sequence before removing and mounting the toner
cartridge. If you replace and mount a toner cartridge that has already been used while the power is on, the machine will
incorrectly indicate the level of remaining toner (to be full) until the next replacement of the toner cartridge.

Use it when replacing the ITB cleaning unit.

Method of operation Execute this mode when you are removing the ITB cleaning unit.
1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key to start that operation.
During the operation, the item will flash, and the operation will end in about 5 sec.
Reference The following takes place for this mode item:
1. the developing assembly rotary is moved to the point of replacement for the toner cartridge (C) so that the toner cartridge
(Bk) will move under the ITB cleaning unit.
2. if a Finisher-P1 is used, the finisher delivery tray is moved to the topmost position.
Caution Do not use this mode unless you are removing the ITB cleaning unit.

Use it to set the drum film thickness correction level.

Method of operation Execute this item if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or if you have initialized the RAM on
the DC controller PCB.
1) Enter the value indicated on the drum initial value label for the following: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DR-I-INT.
2) Select this item, and press the OK key so that the machine will automatically measure the drum film thickness current and
set up a drum film thickness correction level based on the measurement it has taken and the initial value
(COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DR-I-INT).

Print out the service mode (DISPLAY).

This is a mode to print out only the items displayed in the DISPLAY service mode (excluding
items output by P-PRINT/LBL-PRINT/HIST-PRINT and ALARM).
Operation method
1) When selecting the item to highlight and pressing OK key, the operation is started.

Use it to force the execution of primary ATVC.

Execute this item when you have replaced the ITB, the ITB unit, or the primary transfer roller.
Method of operation
1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key so that the operation starts; the operation will end in about 1 min.

Use it to generate a printout of the log of changes in machine internal humidity/fixing temperature.
Reference The machine prints out changes that have taken place in machine internal humidity/fixing temperature (middle)
obtained from the readings of the environment sensor and then on-contact thermistor.

Implementation of the drum unit replacement mode

In order to detach/attach the drum unit safely, move the developing rotary so that it does not interfere with the drum unit.
1) Select this item.
2) Press OK key. Then, the developing rotary will move to stop at the position the developing cylinder (M) faces the ATR
sensor.
Alienation of ITB cleaning blade
Alienate the ITB cleaning blade from the ITB when detaching the ITB unit from the host machine.
1) Select this item.
2) Press OK key. Then, the ITB cleaning swing cam will start to rotate and the ITB cleaning blade will be alienated from
the ITB unit.

Chapter 16
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
PJH-P-1
***

Description

level

Print out the print job history with detailed information. (for 100 jobs)
Print out the history of 100 jobs stored in the copier main unit with detailed information.
[Operation]
Press the item to highlight it, and press the OK key to perform printing.
[Remarks]
The print job history is printed out with detailed information which is not displayed/output in the job history screen displayed
by "system condition > print > job history > printer" and in the print job history report.
The history of the latest 100 jobs are printed out. When the number of recorded print jobs is less than 100, all the recorded
jobs are printed out.
The difference to PJH-P2 is the number of jobs printed out.

PJH-P-2
***

Print out the print job history with detailed information. (for all jobs)
Print out the history of all jobs stored in the copier main unit with detailed information.
[Operation]
Press the item to highlight it, and press the OK key to perform printing.
1
[Remarks]
The print job history is printed out with detailed information which is not displayed/output in the job history screen displayed
by "system condition > print > job history > printer" and in the print job history report.
The history of all the recorded jobs (up to 5000 jobs in the BW3/CL2 or later machine) are printed out.
The difference to PJH-P1 is the number of jobs printed out.

DRUM-ROT

DRUM-ROT (Use it to rotate the photosensitive drum idly for a specific period of time.)
Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.

KEY-HIST

Use it to obtain a printout of the history of key inputs made on the control panel.
1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key so that the machine generates the printout.

Use it to obtain a printout of the history of jams and errors.

1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key so that the machine generates the printout.

Use it to move data received in memory mode to a Box.

1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key to move the data.

HIST-PRT

TRS-DATA

<SYSTEM>
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
DOWNLOAD

Description

level

Switch to download mode

*
1) Select this item.
2) If OK button is pressed, the machine will move to download mode and wait a command (connection). (At this time, "STANDBY" or "STANDBY" is displayed next to the display of "DOWNLOAD")
3) Execute downloading via SST. ("CONNECTED" is displayed during the communication with PC.)
4) After completing the communication, "HOLD" will be displayed. (The power can be turned off at this time.)

**
1) Select this item.
2) If OK button is pressed, a display will be changed and the machine will move to download mode. ("Download Mode" is displayed
on the top of the display.)
CHK-TYPE

Specify the partition number for executing HD-CHECK or HD-CLEAR.

Operation
1) Select this item.
2) Select the partition number using ten-key.
*
0: All HDD (*1)
1: Image accumulation area
2: General-purpose files (User setting data/All log data/PDL spool data) storage area
3: PDL relevant files storage area
4: Firmware storage area (*1)
**
1: FSTDEV (Compressed image data (Box, etc)), IMG_MNG (Document control table, profile), FSTCDEV (Job archiving
(Changing)), THUMDEV (Thumbnail)
2: APL_GEL (General-purpose data), TMP_GEN (General-purpose data (Temporary file)), TMP_FAX (For FAX (Temporary
file)), TMP_PSS (For PDL spool (Temporary file))
3: PDLDEV (PDL relevant files)
4: BOOTDEV (Firmware (System/MEAP/Key/License/PDF Dic./RUI content/Voice Dic.))
(*1)
5: APL_MEAP (MEAP application)
6: APL_SEND (Address book, Filter) (*1)
7: BOOTDEV2 (Firmware (BOOTDEV) backup) (*1)

3) Press OK key.
*1: Initialization cannot be done by means of HD-CLEAR (Initialization can be done only via SST)

16-37

Chapter 16
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
HD-CHECK

HD-CLEAR

DEBUG-1
***

DEBUG-2
***

Description

level

Check the partition specified in CHK-TYPE and perform the recovery work.
1) Select this item.
2) Press OK key.
3) Display the result (1: OK, 2: NG (hardware), 3: NG (software), Equivalent/Substitutional sectors displayed)

Initialize the partition specified in CHK-TYPE.

1) Select this item.
2) Press OK key.
Initialization is started after turning the power off and turning it back on, and it takes approx. 5 min. Never turn the power off during
initialization.

Use it to set the type of log to store/timing of storage to the HDD.

settings
0: HOOKLOG is saved; every time Reboot/Exception is detected [default]
1: HOOKLOG is saved; every time Reboot/Exception/Ecode is detected
2: SUBLOG is saved; every time Reboot/Exception/Ecode is detected
3: SUBLOG is saved in the overwrite mode; every time Reboot/Exception/Ecode is detected
- Do not use for servicing (For the analysis of the cause of trouble)
- Obey the instruction by the quality support section for usage.

Use it to print out logs stored on the HDD.

<Procedure>
1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key.
3) See that the log is printed. (about 2 sheets of A4)
- Do not use for servicing (For the analysis of the cause of trouble)
- Obey the instruction by the quality support section for usage.

16.5.2 FEEDER
16.5.2.1 FEEDER Table
0003-6073

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

FEEDER > FUNCTION
Sub item
MTR-CHK

Description

level

Use it to select a motor when checking the DF motor on its own.

Select [MTR-ON] to execute the item.
1: pickup motor; 2: read motor

TRY-A4

Use it to execute automatic adjustment (A4 Width) for DF original paper width detection.

TRY-A5R

Use it to execute automatic adjustment (A5R width) for DF original paper width detection.

TRY-LTR

Use it to execute automatic adjustment (LTR width) for DF original paper width detection.

TRY-LTRR

Use it to execute automatic adjustment (LTR-R width) for DF original paper width detention.

FEED-CHK

Use it to check the parameters in use when checking paper movement in the DF.
Select [FEED-ON] to execute the item.
1: simplex operation
2: duplex operating
3: simplex operation w/ stamp
4: duplex operation w/ stamp

Use it to select a component when checking the DF solenoid on its own.

Use [SL-ON] to execute the item.
1: lock solenoid
2: stamp solenoid

SL-ON

Use it to start the operation selected by [SL-CHK].

Press the OK key to start the operation.

MTR-ON

Use it to start the operation selected by [MTR-ON].

Press the OK key to start the operation.
Press the OK key once again to stop the operation.

Use it to clean the roller.

Press the OK key to start the operation.
Press the OK key once again to stop the operation.

Use it to start the operation selected by [FEED-ON].

Press the OK key to start the operation.
Press the OK key once again to stop the operation.

SL-CHK

ROLL-CLN

FEED-ON

16.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode)

16.6.1 COPIER
16.6.1.1 COPIER Table
0003-7794

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

<BODY>

16-38

Chapter 16

COPIER > OPTION > BODY

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
MODEL-SZ

PASCAL

CONFIG

TEMP-TBL

W/SCNR

RUI-DSP

NW-SPEED
*

DEVL-PTH

DFDST-L1

DFDST-L2

DST-POS

Description
Use it to switch the default magnification display function and the ADF original size detection function.
Caution The new settings become valid only when the main power switch has been turned off and then on.
0: AB (6R5E)
1: INCH (5R4E)
2: A (3R3E)
3: AB/INCH (6R5E)
Use it to enable/disable the use of gradation data and contrast potential obtained by auto gradation correction (full correction).
Caution The new settings become valid only when the power switch has been turned off and then on.
0: disable
1: enable
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1]
Use it to select multiple pieces of firmware stored on the hard disk, and to switch the machine's country, language, destination, and
paper size configuration settings.
Caution The new settings become valid when the main power switch has been turned off and then on.
1) Select the item whose setting you want to change, and press the +/- key.
2) See that each press on the +/- key changes the setting.
3) When all items are as you want, press the OK key.
4) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
Settings XXYYZZAA
XX: country (e.g., JP for Japan)
YY: language (e.g., ja for Japanese)
ZZ: destination (e.g., 00 for Canon)
AA: paper size configuration (e.g., 00 for AB)
Use it to adjust the fixing assembly control temperature.
0: OFF
1: +5 deg C
2: -5 deg C
The new settings become valid only when the main power switch has been turned off and then on.
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
Use it to specify the presence/absence of a reader unit in the case of a copier model.
The new settings become valid when the main power switch has been turned off and then on.
0: printer model
1: model w/ leader
[at time of shipment: 1/after RAM initialization: 0]

level

Use it to permit or not to permit the selection of copier functions on the RUI screen.
0: disable display of copier screen on RUI
1: enable display of copier screen on RUI
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to select a data transfer speed for connection to a network for service work.
0: Auto
1: 100Base-TX
2: 10Base-T
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to set a threshold level of the number of prints in response to which the toner consumption sequence is forced to go on.
When an image with a low color ratio is copied/printed continuously, if the density is below the threshold, the toner consumption
sequence is forced to go on while the job is under way as soon as the selected number of copies/prints is exceeded.
0: disable the sequence
1: 125 sheets (approx.)
2: 250 sheets (approx.)
3: 500 sheets (approx.)
[at tine of shipment/after RAM initialization: 2]

Use it to adjust the dust detection level (sheet-to-sheet correction) used when the DF is in use.
A higher setting enables the detection of smaller particles of dust.
Range of adjustment 0 to 255
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 205]

Use it to adjust the dust detection level (post-job) valid when the DF is in use.
A higher setting enables the detection of smaller particles of dust.
Range of adjustment 0 to 255
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 205]

Use it to switch the original reading position when the DF is in use.

Use it to set the original read position in the presence of dust on the glass surface.
0: No. 1 position + No. 2 position
1: No. 1 position
2: No. 2 position
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
The No. 2 position corresponds to an empty space, permitting stray dust to show in images.

16-39

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
CCD-LUT

2T-RL-TM

ENVP-INT

FX-SPD2

LPW-TIME

Description
Use it to enable/disable the use of GAIN correction data for the CIS unit.
(data corrected in FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ2 of level 2)
0: disable the use
1: enable the use (1-point correction)
2: enable the use (3-point correction)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
Use it to set the length of time during which the secondary transfer outside roller is moved away from the ITB.
0: 0 sec
1: 30 sec
2: 60 sec
3: 5 min
4: 30 min
5: 60 min
6: 120 min
7: off
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1]
The machine moves the secondary transfer outside roller away from the ITB if its engine is not started up within a specific period
of time. Use this mode to set the length of time.
If white spots tend to occur in halftone images in a high humidity environment, select '0' A higher setting is better for FCOT (first
copy time); however, it can lead to image faults (halftone images).

level

Use it to set the intervals at which logs are obtained for the machine inside temperature/humidify and fixing temperature.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ENV-PRT and COPIER>DISPLAY>ENVRNT)
0 to 480 (min)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 60]
Reference If 0, no log is obtained.

fine adjustment of the fixing roller speed (for half-speed mode)

A higher setting will increase the fixing roller speed.
-5 to +5 (at time of shipment/RAM initialization: 0)

Setting the automatic adjustment start time (in the 24-hour power-on mode).
This setting is not enabled unless the power is turned OFF and ON after the setting is made.
Setting values: 00:00 to 24:00 (in 24-hour clock time; 2-digit input for hour only is accepted.)
[Default/ value after the RAM clear is done: 03:00]
This product considers that it is in the 24-hour power-on mode in the case of the following settings and starts the automatic
adjustment process at the specified start time.
- Service Mode> COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN = "1"
- Service Mode> COPIER> OPTION> USER> SL

BASE-SW
**

Use it to switch from MEAP-full model to base model.

setting
0: off (based model)
1: on (full model)

SC-L-CNT
**

Use it to change the threshold level of the paper size (large/small) for the scan counter.
setting
0: count B4 as small size (default)
1: count B4 as large size

REPORT-Z
**

Switching the attribute flag attached to a report image.

0: For PDL text mode [default: 0]
1: For PDL photo mode
2: For SCAN text mode
3: For SCAN photo mode

Switching the attribute flag attached to a color iFAX/e-mail reception image.

0: For PDL text mode [default: 0]
1: For PDL photo mode
2: For SCAN text mode
3: For SCAN photo mode

Switching the attribute flag attached to a BMLinkS reception image.

0: For SCAN photo mode [default: 0]
1: For PDL photo mode
2: For SCAN text mode
3: For SCAN photo mode

IFXEML-Z
**

BMLNKS-Z
**

LDAP-ADD
**

Use it to indicate whether or not to add a LDAP search switch.

Indicates whether or not to add 'Object Class' and 'SrchNameRow' (Search Name Row) to the pull-down list showing the normal set
of conditions (name, group, organization unit, e-mail).
settings
0: do not add; 1: add
The addresses to be searched are limited to e-mail addresses.

Don't support iR C3180/2580 Series.

SJOB-CL
**

16-40

Switch for enabling scan job cancellation by logout

To enable scan jobs to be canceled upon completion of the scanning operation if logout is initiated.
When the user asks for the item to be provided
0: Canceling is disabled. [default]
1: Canceling is enabled.

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
IFX-CHIG
***

DNSTRANS
***

RMT-CNSL
***

TCPDLACK
***

Description

level

Setting of character count for ignoring IFAX received mail text

When the text of a mail during IFAX reception is shorter than the number of characters set, it is ignored, and the text is neither printed
nor sent.
If the mail text has been lost as a result of setting the value to a number other than "0", and there is no attached TIFF file, a blank
page (except the header and footer) will be printed and sent.
* Kanji are treated as 2-byte characters, and the carriage return and other control codes are also included in the character count.
Settings
0 to 999 (unit: number of characters)
0: The mail text is not ignored.
[Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 0]

Switching the priority of DNS transfer

Determine the priority of protocol (IPv4/IPv6) used for DNS inquiry based on the DNStrans value.
Setting range
0: ipv4, 1: ipv6
Method of Adjustment
When DNS query is first executed for IPv6 in the environment where both IPv6 and IPv4 are used and the DNS server only supports
IPv4, timeout occurs and it takes time. In such a case, execute this mode to set priority to IPv4.

Meap Remote Console switch

When the service personnel take the Function Composer log in the field, turn on this switch and execute logging with Remote
Console.
0: OFF [default]
1: ON

Enabled/disabled switch for Delayed Ack function

Turning the switch to 0 disables the delayed Ack function of TCP.
Setting range
0 to 1
[Value at factory shipping/default: 1]

In the case that Delayed Ack causes deteriorated performance of network data transferring in the 10M environment and so on, disable
Delayed Ack.
SHUT-O-Y/M/
C/K
***

Setting the threshold value of the Y/M/C/Kst cumulative supply block (Operation condition for the shutter open/close sequence)
Change the threshold value level of the cumulative supply block that is the operation condition for the shutter open/close sequence.
Level 0 (number of cumulative supply block: 70) [default]
Level 1 (number of cumulative supply block: 100)
Level 2 (number of cumulative supply block: 130)
Level 3 (number of cumulative supply block: 150)
Level 4 (number of cumulative supply block: 250) [non-executable]

At the occurrence of dropping

1. Change the block number in accordance with the frequency of dropping (set level 1 to 3 when the dropping is severe).
2. The operation is non-executable for the color without dropping (set to level 4).

COPIER > OPTION > BODY

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
CONTRAST

SPCL-PPR

SCANSLCT

DH-SW

SENS-CNF

RAW-DATA

RMT-LANG

Description

level

Use it to set auto/manual setting of target contrast potential.

0: manual
1: Auto
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1]

Fixing rise setting at recovery from low-power mode.

Used when fixing of Bk image is insufficient at recovery from low-power mode.
0: OFF [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
1: ON
Enabling it (ON) increases FCOT (first copy time) by about 20 sec.

Use it to enable/disable the function the machine uses to compute the scan area based on the selected paper size.
0: OFF (determine scan based on original size)
1: ON (determine scan area based on paper size)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to execute Dhalf correction.

0: enable Dhalf control
1: disable Dhalf control
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1]

Use it to select the original sensor configuration.

0: AB-configuration [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
1: Inch-configuration

Use it to specify how received data should be printed out.

0: normal operation
1: print as is
[at timeofshipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
If received images have a fault, use it to isolate the cause between data itself and image processing.
Use it to select a language code by means of the +/- key of the remote UI used through the Web.

16-41

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
IFAX-LIM

SMTPTXPN

SMTPRXPN

POP3PN

ORG-LGL

ORG-LTR

ORG-LTRR

ORG-LDR

ORG-B5

UI-COPY
**

UI-BOX

UI-SEND

UI-FAX

UI-EXT

Y-PTN

SCR-SLCT

TMC-SLCT

DEVL-VTH

16-42

Description
Use it to limit the number of output lines for a large volume of data coming through i-fax.
0: no limit
0 to 999 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 500]

level

Use it to change the SMTP transmission port number.

0 to 65535 (increments of '1')
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 25]

Use it to change the SMTP reception port number.

0 to 65535 (in increments of '1') [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 25]

Use it to change the POP reception port number.

0 to 65535 (in increments of '1')
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 110]

Use it to set a special paper whose size may not be recognized by the DF.
0: LEGAL [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: FOOLSCAP
2: A-FOOLSCAP
3: FORIO
4: G-LEGAL
5: OFFICIO
6: E-OFFICIO
7: A-OFFICIO
8: B-OFFICIO
9: A-LEAGAL
10: M-OFFICIO

Use it to set a special paper whose size may not be recognized by the DF.
0: LTR [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: G-LTR
2: A-LTR
3: EXECUTIVE

Use it to set a special paper whose size may not be recognized by the DF.
0: LTR-R [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: G-LTR-R
2: A-LTR-R
3: OFFICIO
4: E-OFFICIO
5: EXECTIVE-R

Use it to set a special paper whose size may not be recognized by the DF.
0: LDR [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: A-LTR

Use it to set a special paper whose size may not be recognized by the DF.
0: B5 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: K-LEAGAL

Make a setting to switch the display in the copy screen in the control panel.
Setting range
0: Hide the copy screen.
1: Do not hide the copy screen.
Standard value
1

Use it to enable/disable the display of the box screen on the control panel.
0: do not display
1: display (default)
2: do not display (however, permit storage of PDF job in box) **

Use it to enable/disable the display of the transmission screen on the control panel.
0: disable
1: enable [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]

Use it to enable/disable the display of the environment screen on the control panel.
0: disable
1: enable [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]

Use it to enable/disable the display of the extended screen on the control panel.
setting 0: disable
1: enable [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]

Use it to set dots before development.

0: disable [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: normal
2: many

Use it to specify how halftone must be processed in photo mode.

0: use error diffusion
1: use low-number screen [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
2: use high-number screen

Use it to switch between coefficients for error diffusion.

0: standard
1: Texture Feel Smooth (less coarse)/stability low
2: Texture Feel Rough (more coarse)/stability high

Use it to set the video count for operation of toner forced consumption sequence.
Avoid its use as much as possible if operation is normal.

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
FTPTXPN

Description

level

Use it to select a name for the target SEND port (FTP).

0 through 65535 (16-bit) [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 21]

Use it to enable/disable the anti-condensation function for specific calendar months.

0: enable [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: disable

DWNSQ-SW

Not used

PRN-FLG

Use it to select a flag for the PDL image area.

(Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal.)

Use it to select a flag for the copy image area.

(Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal.)

T-LW-LVL

Use it to switch between the display timing for the toner replacement warning message.
(Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal.)

NWERR-SW

Use it to enable/disable network-related error messages.

0: disable
enable [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]

Use it to adjust the speed of the fixing roller. (when the normal-speed mode)
-5 to +5 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: +2]
A higher setting will increase the speed of the fixing roller.

Use it to change the activation ratio of the sub heater.

0: no change
1: +1 sec
2: -1 sec

Use it to set the TOT synchronous type command communication port.

0: OFF
1: ON

Use it to set the TOT asynchronous type status communication port.

0: OFF
1: ON

Use it to set the global support function for book mode original detection.
0: normal
1: AB-configuration/Inch-configuration mixed detection

Use it to set the toner forced consumption sequence for last rotation.
0: disable
1: enable [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]

Setting the display of the user screen selection switch.

0: Not displayed [default/ value after the RAM clear is done]
1: Displayed

SLPOFF 01 to
12

SCN-FLG

FX-SPD

FX-SUB

STS-PORT

CMD-PORT

MODELSZ2

LST-TNSW

UISW-DSP

COPIER > OPTION > BODY

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
ITB-CLN

NS-CMD5

NS-GSAPI

NS-NTLM

NS-PLNWS

NS-PLN

NS-LGN

Description

level

Selecting the ITB cleaning operation mode (when a patch image is created in full-color mode).
0: OFF (ordinary cleaning) [default/ value after RAM clear is done]
1: ON (only in the case of remaining toner near end detection control; ITB is rotated half turn.)
2: ON (ITB is rotated half turn.)
3: ON (ITB is rotated two turns.)

Use it to set CRAM-MD5 authentication under SMTP authentication.

0: dependent on SMTP server
1: disable

Use it to set GSSAPI authentication under SMTP authentication.

0: dependent on SMTP server
1: disable

Use it to set NTLM authentication under SMTP authentication.

0: dependent on SMTP server
1: disable it

Use it to set PLAIN LOGIN authentication under SMTP authentication.

<environment in which communication packets are subjected to coding>
0: dependent on SMTP server
1: disable

Use it to set PLAIN LOGIN under SMTP authentication.

<environment in which communication packages are not subjected to coding>
0: dependent on SMTP server
1: disable

Use it to set LOGIN authentication under SMTP authentication.

0: dependent on SMTP server
1: disable

16-43

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
T-CRG-SW

EX-MTR1

level

Use it to fine-adjust the speed of the No. 1 delivery motor and the buffer motor.
-1 to +1
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to fine-adjust the speed of the accessory delivery motor.

-1 to +1
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

MEAP-PN
**

Use it to change the HTTP port number of a MEAP application.

0 to 65535 (default: 8000)

LPM-PTRN

Use it to set the operation temperature used upon return (low-temperature mode).
0: normal
1: 180 deg C
2: 185 deg C
3: 190 deg C

Use it to set a toner deposit amount.

0: normal
1: smaller amount

Use it to set end edge correction for BkLUT for Tmic PDL and BkLUT for Copy under Tmic.
0: PDL ON, Copy OFF PDL ON, Copy OFF [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: PDL OFF, Copy OFF
2: PDL ON, Copy ON
3: PDL OFF, Copy ON

SVMD-ENT
**

Use it to see how to start service mode:

0: User Mode key -> 2 and 8 keys at the same time -> User Mode key (default)
1: User Mode key -> 4 and 9 keys at the same time -> User Mode key

DH-MODE

Use it to select patch image read data (high density side) for patch image detection gradation correction (other than full correction).
0: use patch image read data used for patch image read data [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: do not use patch image reading data used for full correction

EX-MTR2

TNR-DWN

TMIC-BK

TBLD-TMG

2T-R-TMG

SSH-SW

Use it to set the ITB cleaning execution timing for normal speed/full color mode.
When making copies/points in normal speed/full-color mode, the ITB cleaning blade is brought into contact later than normal.
0: do not delay [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: delay
Use this mode item to correct color displacement occurring when copies/prints are made in full-color/normal speed mode. Its use,
however, will lower productivity.
Use it to set the timing at which the secondary transfer outside roller cleaning is executed in normal speed/mono color mode.
Use it to change the timing at which the secondary transfer outside roller is brought into contact in normal-speed/mono color
mode.
0: do not delay [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: delay
Use this mode item to correct exposure displacement when copies/prints are made in mono color/normal speed mode.

Use it to enable/disable the SSH server function.

0: off (default)
1: on

Use it to turning the SSH server function ON or OFF.

0: off (default)
1: on

Use it to enable/disable regeneration of the SSH server key.

0: off (default)
1: on

U-NAME

Use it to set user names permitting connection to the SSH server.

8 characters max. (alphanumeric)

U-PASWD

Use it to set user passwords permitting connection to the SSH server.

8 characters max. (alphanumeric)

HP-SW

ITB HP marking (2 pc.) switching for full color image formation.

0: switch at cumulative count of 5 secondary transfers (setting at time of factory shipment/RAM initialization)
1: do not switch
2: switch at cumulative count of 10 secondary transfers
3: switch at cumulative count of 3 secondary transfers
If a nip trace is noted, set it to '3', at the risk, however, of a drop in productivity.

Changing the fixing roller life warning level.

When the fixing roller life counter (COUNTER> MISC> FX-UP-RL) reaches the values given below, a warning message is
indicated.
0: 100000 [default/ value after RAM clear is done]
1: 120000
2: 140000

Switching on/off the idle rotation of the developing cylinder.

0: ON (idle rotation is set on)[selected at factory / after RAM clear]
1: OFF (idle rotation is set off)
Avoid switching as much as possible while the machine works normally.

RMT-LGIN

RE-PKEY

FXWRNLVL

DV-RT-MD

16-44

Description
Use it to permit/not permit replacement of a toner cartridge by the user in the presence of toner.
0: do not permit replacement [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: permit replacement
- Toner can start to leak when the toner cartridge is removed. Advise the user to take care when removing the cartridge.
- Fitting a toner cartridge will cause the machine to always indicate a 100% full toner cartridge message regardless of the amount
of toner inside the cartridge (existing or new), resetting the previous message. Inform the user that the machine may indicate the
Add Toner message while the indication is not 0% if this has been done.

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
FXERRLVL

Description

level

Changing the fixing roller life error level.

When the fixing roller life counter (COUNTER> MISC> FX-UP-RL) reaches the setting value of FXWRNLVL + the setting
value of this item, the E008 error occurs.
0: +20000 [default; value after RAM clear is done]
1: +40000
2: +60000

DA-CNCT
**

Use it to set the DA.

0: off (default)
1: on

FXMSG-SW

Turning ON/OFF the fixing unit replacement message.

0: Not displayed
1: Displayed

Selecting an initial rotation mode.

0: Normal mode [selected at factory/ after RAM clear]
1: Bk special mode

BK-SPD

Switching the Bk print mode.

(Avoid switching as much as possible while the machine works normally.)

BND-RDCT

Switching the drum cleaning control mode.

(Avoid switching as much as possible while the machine works normally.)

CHNG-STS
**

Use it to set the TOT status connection port number.

1 to 65535 (default: 20010)

CHNG-CMD
**

Use it to set the TOT command connection port number.

1 to 65535 (default: 20000)

ACR-SKIP

Turning ON/OFF ACR control when printing a high-density image.

0: ON [default/ value after RAM clear is done]
1: OFF

Setting the counter for drum cleaning control in the duplex mode.
0: 2 counts up when outputting 1 double-sided copy (A4 size) [default/ value after RAM clear is done]
1: 4 counts up when outputting 1 double-sided copy (A4 size)

MEAP-DSP
**

Use it to enable/disable a shift from the MEAP to native screen.

0: off (shift to native seen; default)
1: on (do not shift to native screen)

ANIM-SW
**

Use it to enable/disable display of the Error/Jam screen with a MEAP application in operation.
0: off (display warning screen; default)
1: on (do not display warning screen)

HDD-TMP

Setting the temperature used as a criterion for low temperature failure when using SAMSUNG's HDD.
0 to 30 (in deg C) [default: 2]

Switching display/non-display of the low temperature failure E code when using the SAMSUNG's HDD.
0: Displayed [default]
1: Not displayed

HDD-SW

Setting the time to determine low temperature failure when using the SAMSUNG's HDD.
0 to 200 (in minutes) [default: 10]

I-BLD-MD

Switching ITB cleaning blade control (when entering into the standby mode).
0: Separate the ITB cleaning blade [default/ value after RAM clear is done]
1: Contact the ITB cleaning blade
2: Separate the ITB cleaning blade (every time the specified number of jobs is completed)

MEAP-SSL
**

Use it to set the HTTPS port for MEAP.

0 to 65535 (default: 8443)

CKT-LANG
*

Switching languages for the Chinese, Korean, and Taiwanese models.

0: Step 1 (Some messages are displayed in English)
1: Step 2

MIX-FLG
**

Selecting the image area flag in the case of image composition

0: Image processing equivalent to PDL text mode [default]
1: Image processing equivalent to PDL photo mode
2: Image processing equivalent to SCAN text mode
3: Image processing equivalent to SCAN photo mode

BK-MD-SW

DUP-C-SW

HDD-TIM

INTR-MD
**

Setting the reduced-execution mode for image stabilization control (upon initial multiple rotations performed first thing in the
morning).
0: Always executed whenever startup conditions for morning initial multiple rotations are satisfied [default/ value after RAM clear
is done]
1: Executed once in 4 times when startup conditions for morning initial multiple rotations are satisfied
2: Executed once in 5 times when startup conditions for morning initial multiple rotations are satisfied
3: Executed once in 8 times when startup conditions for morning initial multiple rotations are satisfied

Note: While the use of this mode reduces toner consumption, there is a possibility that an image density failure might occur.
KSIZE-SW
**

Switching the handling of the paper type (K-size paper) for the use of China
0: Not handled [default]
1: Handled

LPD-PORT
**

Set a LPD port number.

Setting range
1 to 65535
Standard value
515
Reference
LDP port is the network port for TCP/IP communication at printing via network.

(China, Korea and Taiwan only)

16-45

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
ORG-A4R
**

ORG-B4
**

PDF-RDCT
**

REDU-CNT
***

REBOOTSW
***

Description

level

Use it to set a special paper size not recognized when the ADF is in use.
With machines for INCH/AB configuration, image formation is executed correctly by setting the
size of the special paper that fails to be recognized at original pickup from the ADF.
Settings
0: A4R (default) 1: FOLIO-R
When detecting the A4R original in the ADF, it converts to the original size that was set in this
item to execute image formation using the original size after conversion.

Setting of special sheet sizes which cannot be recognized when ADF is used
This enables images to be formed properly by setting from the service mode the special sheet sizes which cannot be recognized
when documents are fed from ADF.
When ADF has detected B4 in a machine for an inch/AB series market, B4 is converted into a document size which has been set
in the service mode, and the images are formed using the post-conversion document size.
Settings
0: The document size is converted into JIS B4-R.
1: The document size is converted into FOLIO-R.
[Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 0]

Set whether or not to reduce and send the image for reception transfer (transmission in the PDF
format).
Reduce and send the image when converting the image received by FAX or iFAX into the PDF
format and performing transmission by e-mail or file.
Setting range
0: Convert the image into the PDF format, but do not reduce it for reception transfer.
1: Convert the image into the PDF format, and reduce it for reception transfer.
Standard value
0

Control the switching of the density adjustment method.

Control whether or not to perform density adjustment considering toner volume restriction.
Setting range
0 to 1
Standard value
1

Set whether or not to perform reboot when the E240 error occurs.
In the current specifications, reboot is performed when the E240 error occurs.
(Reasons: Continuous rotation deteriorates the durability performance of the engine. It cannot be also denied that it may cause an
error to the engine.)
However, when reboot is performed automatically, jobs in the PDL disappear, which has been causing complaints in the field.
Therefore, this mode is used to set whether or not to automatically perform reboot when the E240 error occurs.

Setting range
0: Perform reboot automatically when the E240 error occurs.
1: Do not perform reboot automatically when the E240 error occurs.
Standard value
0
VP-ART
***

VP-TXT
***

UI-PRINT
***

WUEV-SW
***

WUEV-INT
***

WUEV-POT
***

16-46

Change the line art processing.

Change the outline processing for line art in the scalable PDF.
Setting range
0 to 99
Standard value
1

Change the vector processing for characters.

Change the vector processing for characters in the scalable PDF.
Setting range
0 to 99
Standard value
1

Set whether or not to display the print job screen in the control panel.
This is a switch to set whether or not to display the print job screen in the control panel.
This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel.
Setting range
0: Do not display the print job screen.
1: Display the print job screen.
Standard value
1

Set whether or not to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation.

Set whether or not to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation to the DS application on network when the copier main unit
entered the sleep mode or recovered from the sleep mode.
Setting range
0: Provide a notice.
1: Do not provide a notice.
Standard value
0

Set the interval to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation.

Setting range
60 to 65535
Standard value
600

Set a port number for the destination to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation.
Setting range
1 to 65535
Standard value
11427

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
WUEV-RTR
***

SJB-UNW
***

UI-RSCAN
***

UI-EPRNT
***

UI-WEB
***

WEBV-SW
***

FX-S-ROT

CARD-RNG
***

WUEN-LIV
***

Description

level

Set a range to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation.

Set the number of routers that can be used for a notice of the sleep mode operation.
Setting range
0 to 254
Standard value
3

Switch the number of reserved jobs for secure print jobs.

Switch the number of reserved jobs for secure print jobs to 50 or 90.
Setting range
0: 50
1: 90
Standard value
0

Set whether or not to display the remote scan screen in the control panel.
This mode is used to set whether or not to display the remote scan screen in the control panel.
This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel.
Setting range
0: Do not display the screen.
1: Display the screen.
Standard value
1

Set whether or not to display the expansion printing screen in the control panel.
This mode is used to set whether or not to display the expansion printing screen (EFI print screen) in the control panel.
This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel.
Setting range
0: Do not display the screen.
1: Display the screen.
Standard value
1

Set whether or not to display the Web browser screen in the control panel.
This mode is used to set whether or not to display the Web browser screen in the control panel.
This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel.
Setting range
0: Do not display the screen.
1: Display the screen.
Standard value
1

Set whether or not to use the WEBDAV function.

When 1 (ON) is set to this mode, the WEBDAV function is unavailable. (WEBDAV related information disappears from the
following items.
- User mode -> Setting of destination list specifications -> Registration of destinations -> File -> "WEBDAV" in the protocol
- User mode -> "Use the chunk split transmission for WEBDAV transmission" in the setting of specifications for transmission
[Reference]
The WEBDAV function is installed in the main unit as standards, but there are cases when this function is not used in order to
reduce the memory usage.
Setting range:
0: Use the WEBDAV function.
1: Do not use the WEBDAV function.
Factory setting value: 0
When changing into 1, it takes 1 to 2 minutes before the display of WEBDAV is off. After that, return to user mode, check to
see that the display of WEBDAV in the above user mode is off and then turn off the power.
If turning off the power before the display of WEBDAV is off, the display of WEBDAV is not off by turning on

Prevent deformation of the fixing roller (machine's Sleep 1)

This item is not changed.
Settings
0: practice [default]
1: don't paractice

Set the number of cards available.

Set the number of cards available when using a card reader.
Setting range
1 to 1000
Standard value
1000
[Reference]
In the current condition, the starting number of the card is specified by COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD, and the fixed
number of cards is specified starting from that number. (ex. fixed at 1000 cards)

Set the activation interval after a sleep notice was provided from network.
Set the interval from when sleep activation was performed to the copier main unit from network without sending a job to when
the machine enters the sleep mode next.
Setting range
10 to 600
Standard value
15
(Unit: second) *10 seconds to 10 minutes

16-47

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
COMP-PRT
***

FX-S2ROT

SHT-DCSW
***

DHCP-12

DHCP-81

PT3-INEX
***

USB-RCNT
***

MIBCOUNT
***

MEAP-PRI
***

Description

level

When performing printing for "printing of a page number / printing of the number of copies /
printing of a date / bookbinding / printing of a tint block (hereinafter called 'combined printing') with the copying number of 2 or
more, printing is prioritized in memory allocation for image processing for a certain memory model (option) or document size.
This causes a lack of memory for image processing of scanning, SEND transmission (excluding FAX), and PDL input operation,
and such operation cannot be performed until printing is completed.
This mode is used to perform equal memory allocation to all jobs so that operation such as scanning, SEND transmission
(excluding FAX), and PDL input can be performed before printing is completed (so that such operation is performed little by
little).
Setting range
0: Prioritize printing.
1: Perform equal memory allocation.
Standard value
0

Prevent deformation of the fixing roller (machine's Sleep 2)

This item is not changed.
Settings
0: practice [default]
1: don't paractice

Skip the DCON termination processing when executing shutdown.

Setting range
0: Execute shutdown after the DCON fan control is terminated.
1: Execute shutdown before the DCON fan control is terminated.
Standard value
0

DHCP-Option 12 request ON/OFF selector switch

This uses DHCP option 55 to enable host name (option 12) inquiries when the DHCP-12 switch is set to ON. It is used to prevent
option 12 and option 81 from being included in DHCP packets in conditions where the packets passing over the network are being
monitored. (Supported through separate business negotiations, etc.)
{ DHCP = Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol }
Settings
0: OFF
1: ON
[Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 1]

DHCP-option 81 request ON/OFF selector switch

When the DHCP-81 switch is set to ON and the user mode dynamic DNS setting is ON, this enables dynamic changes in the IP
address using DHCP option 81. It is used to prevent option 12 and option 81 from being included in DHCP packets in conditions
where the packets passing over the network are being monitored. (Supported through separate business negotiations, etc.)
Settings
0: OFF
1: ON
[Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 1]

Enable switch for paper brand Type 3 import/export

To enable the paper brand Type 3 information to be handled by the following functions:
- Import/export using remote UI
- Distribution of equipment information
- Import/export from iWEMC
0: Not enabled
1: Enabled
(Default: 0)

Auto-connection setting at disconnection of USB device (USB RECONNECT)

Setting range
0 to 1
0: Non auto-connect
1: Auto-connect
Standard value
0

Charging counter MIB switch

Change the scope range of the charging counter MIB.
Setting range
0: Display all charging counter MIB information.
1: Display all charging counter MIB information that is displayed in LUI.
2: Do not display charging counter MIB information.
Method of Adjustment
When the charging counter MIB is not disclosed, request a serviceman to change the counter value.
[Value after execution of RAM clear: 0]

Changing the task priority of MEAP

The task priority of MEAP increased when this mode is on.
0: OFF
1: ON
Default: 1
Use this mode when increasing the MEAP performance.
- Enable to logout even during the process of PDL job.
- Display the VxWorks task list from the Console menu, and check the task priority of JVM.

16-48

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
PDLEVCT1
***

Description
PDL continuous job event decimation
To increase the speed of the PDL continuous jobs, install a decimation function for the events to be sent to PDL-PIPIT on the
CPCA.
The UI display has some mismatch regarding event processing, therefore it shall be allowed for the service technician to turn off
the Event Decimation function with Service Switch.
This item displays the CPCA event to be decimated and the Status.
Setting range
0: No event decimation
1: Decimates job status change/job list change.
Status of interaction/executing/complete are excluded.
2: Decimates job status change/job list change.
Status of interaction is excluded.
[Value of factory shipping/default: 0]

level

Use when there occurs a complaint of the UI display.

PROXYRES
***

Switch whether to perform proxy response to the inquiry from Windows.

Switch the setting to notice accurate status instead of performing the proxy response to the inquiry from Windows during sleep.
0: not perform the proxy response
1: perform the proxy response [default]

Switch the setting when noticing the accurate status to the inquiry from Windows.
FUR-CLN
***

Setting of toner discharge (cleaning) mode of the fur brush

This mode is used when a fault in cleaning the photosensitive drum occurs in the high-FC ratio, high CV user machine.
In the case that the drum has its life of 20% or more, it is executed in synchronization with ATR control.
Setting value
0: Normal mode [Factory settings/After RAM clear]
1: Toner discharge (cleaning) mode

<USER>
COPIER > OPTION > USER
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
COPY-LIM

Description

level

Use it to change the upper limit imposed on the number of copies to make.
1 to 999
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 999]

Use it to enable/disable the sleep function.

0: OFF
1: ON
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1]
To set up the sleep function, use [timer setting] in user mode.

Use it to set the software counter 1 on the user mode screen.

101: total 1
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1 (fixed; cannot be changed)]

Use it to change the type of software counter 2 on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or dealer.
0 to 999
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 108]
The type of counter may be changed to suit the needs of the user and dealer.

Use it to change the type of soft counter 3 on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.
0 to 999
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization; 232]
The type of counter may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.

Use it to change the type of software counter 4 on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.
0 to 999
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 324]
The type of counter may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.

Use it to change the type of software counter 5 on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.
0 to 999
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
The type of counter may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.

Use it to change the type of software counter 6 on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.
0 to 999
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
The type of counter may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.

CONTROL

Not used

B4-L-CNT

Use it to set so that soft counters 1 through will count B4 as being of large size or small size.
0: small size
1: large size
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to disable the copy job reservation function when the card reader or the coin vendor is in use.
0: enable copy job reservation function
1: disable copy job reservation function
[at time of shipment/after initialization: 0]

Setting 180-degree image rotation in the case of landscape image on PDL tabbed paper.
0: Not rotated
1: Rotated
[Default/ value after RAM clear is done: 0]

Selecting the display with or without the print pause function switch.
0: Without the print pause function
1: With the print pause function ([Stop] and [Resume] buttons for print output are displayed on the user screen.)
[Default/ value after RAM clear is done: 0]

SLEEP

COUNTER 1

COUNTER 2

COUNTER 3

COUNTER 4

COUNTER 5

COUNTER 6

COPY-JOB

TAB-ROT

PR-PSESW
**

16-49

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > USER
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
IDPRN-SW

level
1

CPRT-DSP

not used

CNT-SW

Switching items for counters (available only for the use of Japan)
*, **
0: Counter 1 - total 1; counter 2 - total (B/W 1); counter 3 - copy (full color + mono color/1); counter 4 - print (full color + mono
color/1);
*, **
1: Counter 1 - total 2; counter 2 - copy (full color + mono color/2); counter 3 - total A (full color + mono color/2); counter 4 copy (B/W 2); counter 5 - total A (B/W 2)
**
2: Counter 1 - total 1; counter 2 - total (B/W 1); counter 3 - copy (full color + mono color/1); counter 4 - print (full color + mono
color/1); counter 5 - total (mono color 1)
**
3: Counter 1 total 1; counter 2 - total (full color + mono color/ small); counter 3 - total (full color + mono color/ large); counter
4 - total (B/W/ small); counter 5 - total (B/W/ large); counter 6 - scan (total 1)
**
4: Counter 1 - total 1; counter 2 - total (full color + mono color/ small), counter 3 - total (full color + mono color/ large); color 4
- total (B/W/ small); counter 5 - total (B/W/ large); counter 6 - total (mono color/ sm

REMPNL
**

Turning ON/OFF the remote operation function.

0: OFF
1: ON
The remote operation function is available only if the remote operation kit (option) is installed.

BCNT-AST

Use it to set a count for Box printing in relation to the NE controller.

0: count box print job as PDL job
1: count box print job as copy job
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Use it to set the default color mode for COPY.

0: ACS
1: full color
2: black-and-white
JPN [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 2]
UL [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
EUR [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 2]
other destination [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 2]

Use it to set the default color mode for BOX.

0: ACS
1: full color
2: black-and-white
JPN [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 2]
UL [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
EUR [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 2]
other destinations [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 2]

Use it to enable/disable the message used to prompt removal of originals.

0: disable
1: enable
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

COUNTER 7
**

Use it to change the type of software counter 7 on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.
0 to 999
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
The type of counter may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.

COUNTER 8
**

Use it to change the type of software counter 8 on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.
0 to 999
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
The type of counter may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer.

LDAP-SW
**

Switching the LDAP server search condition.

0: "Includes the following"
1: "Does not include the following"
2: "Is identical to the following"
3: "Is not identical to the following"
4: "Starts with the following"
5: "Does not start with the following"
[Default/ value after RAM clear is done: 4]

Set whether or not to delete the 'from' address for mail transmission.
Setting range
0: Do not delete the 'from' address.
1: Delete the 'from' address.
Standard value
0

Set whether or not to display the "speaker/head set switching" button in the voice reading setting (user mode).
Setting range
0: Do not display the button.
1: Display the button.
Standard value
0

DFLT-CPY

DFLT-BOX

DOC-REM

FROM-OF
***

SPEAKER
**

16-50

Description
Use it to switch between types of count jobs for group counters.
0: count the following for PRINT: box print, report print, send local print, PDL print.
1: count the following for PRINT: report printout, send local print, PDL print
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > USER
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
FILE-OF
***

MAIL-OF
***

IFAX-OF
***

LDAP-DEF
***

HDCR-DSW
***

Description
Set whether or not to prohibit transmission to a file address.
This mode is used to prohibit transmission to a file address by prohibiting input of a file address from an address book.
Setting range
0: Do not prohibit transmission to a file address.
1: Prohibit transmission to a file address.
Standard value
0
Remarks
- In case of changing the setting from 0 to 1 while FILE addresses have been registered, it is desirable to delete the FILE addresses
manually. (Without deleting them, they can be used.)
- In case the setting is 1, the import (registration) of the FILE address from RUI and machine information delivery is not accepted.
Thus, if there are many FILE addresses, set 1 for this mode and make the files exported with RUI and machine information
delivery to 'Overwrite import (register the imported addresses after deleting the current data)'. By doing so, they can be deleted
at once.
Set whether or not to prohibit transmission to an e-mail address.
This mode is used to prohibit transmission to an e-mail address by prohibiting input of an e-mail address from an address book.
Setting range
0: Do not prohibit transmission to an e-mail address.
1: Prohibit transmission to an e-mail address.
Standard value
0
Remarks
- In case of changing the setting from 0 to 1 while the e-mail addresses are registered, it is desirable to delete the e-mail addresses
manually. (Without deleting them, they can be used.)
- In case the setting is 1, the import (registration) of the e-mail addresses from RUI and machine information delivery is not
accepted. Thus, if there are many e-mail addresses, set 1 for this mode to enable 'Overwrite import (register the imported
addresses after deleting the current data)' by RUI and machine information delivery. By doing so, they can be deleted at once.

Set whether or not to prohibit transmission to an i-FAX address.

This mode is used to prohibit transmission to an i-FAX address by prohibiting input of an i-FAX address from an address book.
Setting range
0: Do not prohibit transmission to an i-FAX address.
1: Prohibit transmission to an i-FAX address.
Standard value
0
Remarks
- In case of changing the setting from 0 to 1 while the iFAX addresses have been registered, it is desirable to delete the iFAX
addresses manually. (Without deleting them, they can be used.)
- In case the setting is 1, the import (registration) of the iFAX addresses from RUI and machine information delivery is not
accepted. Thus, if there are many iFAX addresses, set 1 for this mode to enable 'Overwrite import (register the imported addresses
after deleting the current data)' by RUI and machine information delivery. By doing so, they can be deleted at once.

level

Switch the default setting of the LDAP searching condition.

Change the default setting of a searching attribute condition specified for LDAP searching.
Setting range
0 to 6
0: "Name"
1: "E-mail"
2: "FAX"
3: "Organization"
4: "Unit of organization"
5: User setting 1
6: User setting 2
Standard value
0
Refer to COPIER > OPTION> USER > LDAP-SW for the details of LDAP.

Selection of whether to display 'all HDD data clear ON/OFF' item in user mode
To select whether to display the 'all HDD data clear ON/OFF' item in the user mode.
This mode takes effect only when the all HDD data clear function (licensed) is activated.
When the user asks for the item to be provided.
0: The item is not displayed.[default]
1: The item is displayed.

COPIER > OPTION > USER

*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
SIZE-DET

DATE-DSP

MB-CCV

Description
Use it to turn on/off the original size detection function.
0: off (The scanner will not go on when the copyboard is opened/closed, thereby preventing the glare of the lamp.
1: ON [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]

level

Use it to change the date indication.

0: YYMM/DD
1: DD/MM'YY
2: MM/DD/YY

Use it to limit the individuals holding control cards for mail boxes.
0: do not limit[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
1: limit

16-51

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > USER
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
TRY-STP

MF-LG-ST

CNT-DISP

NW-SCAN

Description

level

Use it to specify how output is made when the tray becomes full.
0: normal mode (cut operation when the finisher tray becomes full)
1: cut based on height detection

Use it to set the extra-length key mode.

0: normal
1: enable display of the Extra Length key in extension mode.

Use it to enable/disable indication of the serial number of the machine in response to a press on the Counter Check key.
0: enable
1: disable

Use it to permit/not permit the network scan function.

0: do not permit
1: permit (invalid if UFR board or open I/F board is not connected)

FX-LIM
*

not used

HDCR-DSP

*
Use it to enable/disable display and operation of HDD initialization for user mode.
setting
0: do not display and do not initialize [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: for '0', initialize once
2: at random (data), initialize once
3: at random (data), initialize 3 times
**
Use it to set how HDD full deletion mode may operate.
1: for '0', initialize once [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
2: at random (data), initialize once
3: at random (data), initialize 3 times

Use it to set intervals for job interruption.

0: standard (at time of interrupt mode, generate next job in succession)
1: start next job after delivery of last of interrupt job
2: start next job after delivery of last sheet of group of jobs

JOB-INVL

LGSW-DSP

Use it to enable/disable display of 'log indication on/off setup' on the Additional Function screen.
0: disable display of 'log display on/off setup'
1: enable 'log display on/off setup'

Don't support iR C3180/2580 Series.

PCL-COPY

Use it to set PCL command (COPIES Menu/Pinatubo/Hood) compatibility mode.

0: control on page basis according to COPIES command value set on individual pages [at time of shipment/after RAM
initialization]
1: Menu/Pinatubo/Hood compatibility mode
2: reserved

Use it to set the CCV count pulse for reception/report output.

0: do not generate count pulse [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: generate count pulse

DPT-ID-7
**

Use it to select the 7-character input method for group ID registration and authentication.
0: normal (default)
1: use 7-character input

RUI-RJT
**

Use it to enable/disable connection of the HTTP port at 3 failed attempts at authentication by the RUI.
0: make invalid (default)
1: keep valid

SND-RATE

Use it to set a compression rate for SEND-RATE (i.e., when 'high' is selected under SEND for compression rate).
0: rate of compression 1/16 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: rate of compression 1/20
2: rate of compression 1/24
A higher rate of compression means a lower image level.

PRJOB-CP

CMT-S06

16-52

Use it to specify whether a password should be removed from the export file (file transmission address).
0: do not remove password from export file (default)
1: remove password from export file

CMT-S07
*

Deleting the display of RUI address and transmission password source in the edit screen.
0: Not delete
1: Delete [default]

FREG-SW
**

Use it to enable/disable display of the free area of the MEAP counter (SEND).
0: do not display (default)
1: display

IFAX-SZL
**

Use it to limit transmission size for i-fax transmission.

0: keep transmission size limit valid (using server/not using server)
1: keep transmission size limit invalid (only when not using server; default)

IFAX-PGD
**

Use it o enable/disable page-based division transmission (only when the transmission data size upper limit is exceeded).
0: do not permit page-based division transmission in i-fax simple mode (default)
1: enable page-based division transmission in i-fax simple mode

MEAPSAFE
**

Use it to enable/disable switchover to safe mode for MEAP.

0: off (default)
1: on (safe mode)

AFN-PSWD
**

Use it to limit access to user mode.

0: off (shift to user mode screen without prompting for password; default)
1: on (shift to user mode after password match)

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > USER
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item

Description

level

PTJAM-RC
**

Use it to enable/disable PDL jam recovery.

0: off (disable recovery)
1: on (enable recovery; default)

PDL-NCSW
***

PDL print job card control mode setting

To place the PDL print jobs under the control of the card reader.
When the user asks for the item to be provided
0: PDL printing is performed regardless of whether a card is inserted. [default]
1: PDL printing is not performed when a card has not been inserted or the department ID does not match; PDL printing is
performed when a card has been inserted and when the department ID matches.

SLP-SLCT
**

Use it enable/disable use of an existing network-based application.

0: do not use (default)
1: use

When set to '1', no shift takes place to sleep mode 3.

PS-MODE
**

Use it to set PS compatibility mode.

0: not compatible (default)
1: offer PS type 3 halftone command compatibility (dither reverse)
2: compatible with priority on resolution
3: reserved
4: compatible for EFI landscape/portrait mix
5 to 65535: reserved

Use it to enable/disable the use of the connection serialization function.

0: off (disable connection serialization function; default)
1: on (enable connection serialization function)

2C-CT-SW
**

Switching the counter used for 2-color mode

0: Mono-color counter
1: Full-color counter [Default/ value after RAM clear is done]

JA-FUNC
***

Job archive function ON/OFF

When ON, the job archive function is activated.
*The settings cannot be changed in service mode, but only referenced.
Settings can only be made from a job archive-enabled MEAP programme.
Setting values
0: OFF
1: ON
[Factory settings and after RAM clear: 0]

Designates job archive jobs.

When the job archive function is activated, the job archive operates when a job is run, in accordance with the job type designation.
*The settings cannot be changed in service mode, but only referenced.
Settings can only be made from a job archive-enabled MEAP programme.
Setting values
0: None
3: FAX/IFAX only
0xFFFFFFFF: all jobs
[Factory settings and after RAM clear: 0]

Job archive restriction settings

When the job archive function is activated, spec. restrictions are applied against those functions for what spec. restrictions are set.
*The settings cannot be changed in service mode, but only referenced.
Settings can only be made from a job archive-enabled MEAP programme.
Setting values
0, 1
32 spec. restrictions by bit setting.
Bit0: Image file acquisition function (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Bit1: Form registration merge function (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Bit2: Document edit function (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Other bits are not set, but will be added as and when needed. (4 byte needed)
[Factory settings and after RAM clear: 0]

Switch a setting of domain complement for email transmission.

Set whether or not to complement the domain information (ex.: @canon.co.jp) specified in the
user mode.
<In Case a User Sends a Mail to xxx@canon.co.jp>
By setting 'canon@co.jp' to the domain in the user mode and set 1 for this mode, the address is
complemented to 'xxx@canon.co.jp' when performing the email transmission by just entering
'xxx'.
Setting range
0: Do not complement the domain information for the destination address.
1: Complement the domain information for the destination address.
Standard value
0

Specifies job archive record resolution.

For jobs other than PC-FAX, FAX Rx, IFAX Rx, etc., the resolution is converted to the programmed resolution and an archive
image is recorded.
*The settings cannot be changed in service mode, but only referenced. Settings can only be made from a job archiveenabled
MEAP programme.
Setting values
0 : No not convert resolution.
1: 100 x 100 dpi
2: 200 x 200 dpi
3: 300 x 300 dpi
[Factory settings and after RAM clear: 3]

CNCT-RLZ

JA-JOB
***

JA-RESTR
***

DOM-ADD

JA-DPI
***

16-53

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > USER
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
JA-COMPR
***

N-MAILOF

Description

level

Specifies job archive record compression rate.

For jobs other than PC-FAX, FAX Rx, IFAX Rx, etc., the compression rate is converted to the programmed compression rate and
an archive image is recorded.
Setting values
0: Do not convert compression rate (use same compression table as original image).
1: 1/4 compression
2: 1/8 compression
3: 1/16 compression
4: 1/32 compression
5: 1/64 compression
[Factory settings and after RAM clear: 3]

Switches new email destination prohibition ON/OFF.

Sets whether to prohibit new email destinations (selection is disabled).
Setting values
0: Do not prohibit
1: Prohibit
[Factory settings and after RAM clear: 0]

Don't support iR C3180/2580 Series.

N-FAXOF

Switches new FAX destination prohibition ON/OFF.

Sets whether to prohibit new FAX destinations (selection is disabled).
Setting values
0: Do not prohibit
1: Prohibit
[Factory settings and after RAM clear: 0]

Don't support iR C3180/2580 Series.

N-IFAXOF

Switches new IFAX destination prohibition ON/OFF.

Sets whether to prohibit new IFAX destinations (selection is disabled).
Setting values
0: Do not prohibit
1: Prohibit
[Factory settings and after RAM clear: 0]

Don't support iR C3180/2580 Series.

N-FILEOF

Switches new FILE destination prohibition ON/OFF.

Sets whether to prohibit new FILE destinations (selection is disabled).
Setting values
0: Do not prohibit
1: Prohibit
[Factory settings and after RAM clear: 0]

Don't support iR C3180/2580 Series.

FREE-DSP
***

CLR-TIM
***

JA-FORMT
***

SNMP-COA
***

16-54

Charging/non-charging indication switch

When a vendor does not have a hardware switch that changes charging/non-charging indication, a software switch is needed. If
such is a case, this mode can be used whether to display the software switch.
0: not display (default)
1: display

Select the timing to perform a complete removal processing in the security kit.
When a complete removal processing is performed, job processing performance sometimes decreases for certain data. This is
because the page data which has been already processed is being removed during job processing and it slows down the accessing
process to CPU and HDD. If the execution of this process is delayed so that the process is performed after the job is completed,
the job processing capability can be improved.
Setting range
0: Remove data during job processing.
1: Remove data after a job is completed.
Standard value
0

Image format during job archive recording

This selects the image format during job archive recording. More specifically, it selects whether the images handled as
PacketJPEG are to be recorded as PacketJPEG or converted into RasterJPEG and recorded.
MEMO:
This item can be set only from a MEAP application which supports job archives. Its setting cannot be changed from the service
mode. It can only be referenced. It is used when checking the unit settings.
Settings
0: PacketJPEG for a unit that supports PacketJPEG
1: RasterJPEG
[Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 0]
SNMP access restriction switch for internal community name (administrative privilege)
Restrict the SNMP access regarding the internally obtained community name (administrative privilege).
Setting range
0: OFF
1: ON (Read only)
2: ON (Read/Write available) [default]
Usually the SNMP community name can be set using the following item; [Additional Functions]>[System Settings]>[Network
Settings]>[SNMP Settings]. There is an internal community name (administrative privilege) in addition to the community name
that is set in the above item, and it is used at the time of access using the Canon utility software such as NetSpot.
In the case that the SNMP access using an internal community name needs to be restricted in view of security, set this item to 0
or 1.

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > USER
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
SNMP-COU
***

Description

level

SNMP access restriction switch for internal community name (user privilege)
Restrict the SNMP access regarding the internally obtained community name (user privilege).
Setting range
0: OFF
1: ON (Read only)
2: ON (Read/Write available) [default]
Usually the SNMP community name can be set using the following item; [Additional Functions]>[System Settings]>[Network
Settings]>[SNMP Settings]. There is an internal community name (user privilege) in addition to the community name that is set
in the above item, and it is used at the time of access using the Canon utility software such as NetSpot.
In the case that the SNMP access using an internal community name needs to be restricted in view of security, set this item to 0
or 1.

<CST>
COPIER > OPTION > CST
Sub item
ENV1/ENV2

Description
Use it to register the size of the envelope cassette.
21: ISO-C5 [after RAM initialization: 21]
22: COM10
23: MONARCH
24: DL
25: ISO-B5
26: YOKEI No. 4

U1-NAME to U4-NAME Use it to enable/disable indication of paper names identified according to paper size groups (U1 through U4).
0: indicate U1, U2, U3, or U4 on touch panel (default)
1: indicate paper names as selected in service mode (CST-U1, -U2, -U3, -U4).
CST-U1/U2/U3/U4

level

Use it to select paper names for paper size groups (U1 through U4).
24: Foolscap (CST-U2, default)
25: Australian Foolscap
26: Officio
27: Ecuadorian Officio
28: Bolivian Officio
29: Argentine LTR (U4, default)
30: Argentine LTR-R
31: Government LTR (U1, default)
32: Government LTR-R
34: Government LGL (U3, default)
35: Folio
36: Argentine Officio
37: Mexican Officio
38: Executive

<ACC>
COPIER > OPTION > ACC
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
COIN

DK-P

CARD-SW

OUT-TRAY

MIN-PRC

MAX-PRC

Description

level

Use it to enable/disable the coin vendor function.

0: Not use the coin vendor [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: Use the coin vendor
2: Remote counter

Use it to set the paper size for the paper deck (option).
0: A4 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
1: not supported
2: LTR

Use it to switch between UI screens for support of the coin vendor function.
0: coin [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
1: card
2: coin & card

use it to specify the presence/absence of a No. 3 delivery tray.

0: absent [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]
1: present

Coin manager minimum value setting

This determines the minimum value handled by the coin manager which is connected. For instance, the service technician inputs
"10" if the minimum value supported by the Japanese yen coin manager is 10 yen.
This item takes effect only when 4 is set for ACC>COIN.
Additional note
When a number from 1 to 4 (Euros, pounds, Swiss francs, dollars) is set for COPIER>OPTION>ACC>UNIT-PRC, a fractional
monetary unit can be input. For instance, an input of "50" signifies 50 cents ($0.50).
Setting range: 0 to 9999
[Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 10]

Coin manager maximum value setting

This determines the maximum value handled by the coin manager which is connected. An error screen is displayed if a value
lower than the smallest unit is input when inputting the charge amount using initial settings/registration. For instance, the service
technician inputs "8900" if the maximum value supported by the Japanese yen coin manager is 8900 yen.
This item takes effect only when 4 is set for ACC>COIN.
Additional note
When a number from 1 to 4 (Euros, pounds, Swiss francs, dollars) is set for COPIER>OPTION>ACC>UNIT-PRC, a fractional
monetary unit can be input. For instance, an input of "50" signifies 50 cents ($0.50).
Setting range: 0 to 9999
[Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 0]

16-55

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > ACC
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
MIC-TUN

Description

level

Manual tuning of microphone used for voice recognition

This allows the audio intake level sensitivity to be adjusted manually for the input device connected by the user. This item is
operated and the adjustment made if the sensitivity of the microphone is not increased enough with automatic tuning.
Reference:
See below for automatic tuning.
Initial settings/registration > system control > voice control settings > microphone tuning
Setting range: 0 to 255
[Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 128]

Use it to set a limit to the number of sheets that may be saddle-bound.

0: 5 (w/o white band)
1: 10 (w/o while band)
2: 10 (w/ white band)
3: 15 (w/ white band)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]

SC-TYPE

Use it to select the type of coin vendor model

(not used normally)

CC-SPSW

Use it to select the control card (CC IV/CC V) I/F support level.
setting 0: do not support [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: support (priority on speed)
2: support (priority on upper limit)
- If it is set to '1', the machine may not be ale to make an accurate stop based on an upper limit, as it puts priority on the
maintenance of engine performance.
- If it is set to '2', the machine will be able to use proper control based on an upper limit, but may suffer from a drop in engine
performance depending on which source of paper it uses.

Setting the currency unit for the coin vendor.

0: Yen [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: Euro
2: Pound
3: Swiss franc
4: US dollar

Pickup/ delivery notification setting for charged output

This mode prevents prints from being output for free if some kind of network trouble interferes with the pickup/ delivery
notification (if Ack is not returned after DA) by continuing to output the notification.
Setting values
2 to 10
[Factory settings and after RAM clear: 6]
E.g.
If the value is 5, if Ack is not returned after DA, 5 sheets will be picked up. -> If iR-DA communication is disrupted for
some reason, the device will still operate for 5 sheets (printed out without charging).
If the setting values are too low, the demerit is that engine performance will suffer.
And, depending on the model, the reference value can be changed (because of the relationship with engine speed).
- When the setting values are low, the number of sheets that can be output without reducing the tariff becomes lower.
Engine performance may suffer.
- When the setting values are high, the number of sheets that can be output without reducing the tariff increases.
Engine performance does not suffer.

STPL-LMT

UNIT-PRC

DA-PUCT
***

<INT-FACE>
COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE
Sub item
IMG-CONT

Description
Use it to make settings for connection to an EFI controller.
0: normal operation
1: not used
2: not used
3: EFI controller in use
4: not used
5: not used

level

If set to '1', the following returns to its initial setting:

- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>IP address
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>sub net mask
- system control setup>network setup>IP address setup>gateway address
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>Ethernet driver setup>communication system
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>Ethernet driver setup>Ethernet type
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>start-up time
Moreover, the following user mode settings will be set to OFF.
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>DHCP in use
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>RARP in use
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>BOOTP in use
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>Ethernet driver setup>auto detection
- system control setup>network setup>spool function in use
- If set to '3' or '4', the following settings will be OFF in addition to the foregoing:
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>RAW setup
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>LPD setup
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IPP print
- system control setup>network setup>SMB setup
You will have to newly make settings for the foregoing items, as they will not return to their initial settings even when '0: normal mode' is selected.
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>sub net mask
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>gateway address
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>Ethernet driver setup>communication method
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>Ethernet driver setup>Ethernet type
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>startup
Moreover, the following user mode settings will be OFF:
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>DHCP in use

16-56

Chapter 16
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>RARP in use
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>BOOTP in use
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>Ethernet driver setup>auto detection
- system control setup>network setup>spool function in use
- If '3' or '4' is set, the following settings will be OFF in addition to the foregoing items:
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>RAW setup
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>LPD setup
- system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IPP print
- system control setup>network setup>SMB setup
You will have to newly make settings for the foregoing items, as they will not return to their initial settings even when '0: normal mode' is selected.
COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
CNT-TYPE

Description
Switch the EFI controller connection.
Switching the EFI controller type.
Setting range
0: External Tower-Type Controller
1: Back Mounting-Type Controller

level

Don't support iR C3180/2580 Series.

AP-OPT

AP-ACCNT

Use it to enable/disable printing from PrintMe (application bundled with the PS print server unit).
0: permit printing by specific account
1: permit printing by any account [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
2: do not permit printing (permitting only for specific group ID)
Use it to set a group ID for a print job (CPCA) from PintMe (application bundled with the PS print server unit).
0 to 9999999 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

AP-CODE

Use it to set a path code for a print job (CPCA) from PrintMe (application bundled with the PS print server unit).
0 to 9999999 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

NWCT-TM
**

Set the time of timeout for network connection maintenance. (Keep Alive setting)
Set the time during which network connection is kept between the application in the PC and the
iR main unit (Keep Alive).
Setting range
1 to 5 (Unit: minute)
Standard value
5
Remark
When the setting time is timed out, the network connection is disconnected. Therefore, when the
network connection is disabled due to any reason, it shortens the down time of the machine.

<COMBO>
COPIER > OPTION > COMBO
Sub item
PPR/COL/MODSLCT

2TR-SW1/SW2/
SW3/SW4/SW5

Description

level

Use it to select paper type, pickup mode, and color mode for which the secondary transfer bias should be applied (during a
specific period of time after the leading edge of paper reaches the secondary transfer roller).
Use it if white spots occur along the image leading edge for a specific type of paper, pickup mode, or color mode.
PPR-SLCT
1: plain paper
2: heavy paper
3: tracing paper
4: transparency
5: postcard/envelope
6: label sheet
7: special paper
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1]
COL-SLCT
1: mono color mode
2: full color mode
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1]
MOD-SLCT
1: single-sided
2: 2nd side of double-sided (from cassette)
3: 2nd side of double-sided (from manual feeder)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1]
When you press any of 2TR-SW1 through 2TR-SW5 after setting up a value for PPR-SLCT, COL-SLCT, or MOD-SLCT,
the machine will register PPR-SLCT,COL-SLCT, or MOD-SLCT for the corresponding SW, thus enabling the switch.

Use it to enable the combination of paper type, pickup mode, and color mode you have selected using PPR-SLCT, COL-SLCT
and MOD-SLCT.

<LCNS-TR>
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item

Description

level

EX: ST-XXXX 1 ( ) {0 to 0}
[1] [2]
[1]: for state indication, 0: not installed (default); 1: installed
[2]: for invalidation execution, 0: execute (input accepted only if '0')
Procedure (invalidation of transfer)
1) Select SET-XXXX, and type in '0'; then, press the OK key.
2) See that a transfer license number (24 characters) is indicated for TR-XXXX.
ST-SEND
**

Use it to display the installation state/invalidate transfer of the SEND function as part of transfer invalidation.

16-57

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item

Description

level

EX: ST-XXXX 1 ( ) {0 to 0}
[1] [2]
[1]: for state indication, 0: not installed (default); 1: installed
[2]: for invalidation execution, 0: execute (input accepted only if '0')
Procedure (invalidation of transfer)
1) Select SET-XXXX, and type in '0'; then, press the OK key.
2) See that a transfer license number (24 characters) is indicated for TR-XXXX.
TR-SEND
**

Use it to obtain a transfer license key for the SEND function as part of transfer invalidation.

ST-ENPDF
**

Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation of the SEND encryption PDF transmission function as part
of transfer invalidation.

TR-ENPDF
**

Use it to obtain a transfer license key for the SEND encryption PDF transmission function as part of transfer invalidation.

ST-SPDF
**

Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation of the SEND searchable PDF transmission function as part
of transfer invalidation.

TR-SPDF
**

Use it to obtain a transfer license key for the SEND searchable PDF transmission function as part of transfer invalidation.

ST-EXPDF
**

Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation of the PDF expansion (composite function of encryption PDF
+ searchable PDF) as part of transfer invalidation.

TR-EXPDF
**

Use it to obtain a transfer license key for the PDF expansion kit (composite function of encryption PDF + searchable PDF) as part
of transfer invalidation.

ST-LIPS
**

Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation of LIPS as part of transfer invalidation.
Be sure to set ST-PS-K to 0 when setting ST-LIPS to 0 (i.e., when disabling transfer).
Machine's operation cannot be guaranteed if ST-LIPS is set to 0 and ST-PS-K is set to 1.

16-58

2
2
2
2
2

TR-LIPS
**

Use it to obtain a transfer license key as part of transfer invalidation.

ST-PDFDR
**

Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation of the PDF direct transmission mechanism as part of transfer
invalidation.

TR-PDFDR
**

Use it to obtain a transfer license key as part of transfer invalidation.

ST-SCR
**

Use it to display the installation sate/execute transfer invalidation of the encryption secured printing function as part of transfer
invalidation.

TR-SCR
**

Use it to obtain a transfer license key for the encryption secured printing as part of transfer invalidation.

ST-HDCLR
**

Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation of HDD encryption or full deletion as part of transfer
invalidation.

TR-HDCLR
**

Use it to obtain a transfer license key for HDD encryption/full deletion as part of transfer invalidation.

ST-BRDIM
**

Use it to display/execute transfer invalidation of Bar DIMM as part of transfer invalidation.

TR-BRDIM
**

Use it to obtain a transfer license key for bar DIMM as part of transfer invalidation.

ST-VNC
**

Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation for VNC as part of transfer invalidation.

TR-VNC
**

Use it to obtain a transfer license key for VNC as part of transfer invalidation.

ST-WEB
**

Use it to display the installation sate/execute transfer invalidation for a WEB browser as part of transfer invalidation.

TR-WEB
**

Use it to obtain a transfer license key for a WEB browser as part of transfer invalidation.

ST-HRPDF
**

Displaying the high-compressed PDF installation status with transfer disabled, and disabling transfer.

TR-HRPDF
**

Obtaining a transfer license key for high-compressed PDF with transfer disabled.

ST-PS-K
**

Displaying the PS Kanji-kit installation status with transfer disabled, and disabling transfer.

OF-PS-K
**

Obtaining a transfer license key PS Kanji-kit with transfer disabled.

ST-TRSND
***

Display the installation status of the trial SEND function in transfer invalidation.
Setting range
0: Do not provide the trial SEND function. (not installed)
1: Provide the trial SEND function. (installed)
Standard value
0

TR-TRSND
***

Obtain a transfer license key of the trial SEND function in transfer invalidation.
Obtain a transfer license key to use the trial SEND function by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-WTMRK
***

Display the installation status of the main unit tint block function in transfer invalidation.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item

Description

level

EX: ST-XXXX 1 ( ) {0 to 0}
[1] [2]
[1]: for state indication, 0: not installed (default); 1: installed
[2]: for invalidation execution, 0: execute (input accepted only if '0')
Procedure (invalidation of transfer)
1) Select SET-XXXX, and type in '0'; then, press the OK key.
2) See that a transfer license number (24 characters) is indicated for TR-XXXX.
TR-WTMRK
***

Obtain a transfer license key of the main unit tint block function in transfer invalidation.
Obtain a transfer license key to use the main unit tint block function by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-TSPDF
***

Display the installation status of the PDF transmission function with a time stamp in transfer invalidation.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0
Remarks
This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available.

TR-TSPDF
***

ST-USPDF
***

TR-USPDF
***

ST-DVPDF
***

TR-DVPDF
***

ST-SCPDF
***

TR-SCPDF
***

ST-AMS
***

Obtain a transfer license key of the PDF transmission function with a time stamp in transfer invalidation.
Obtain a transfer license key to use the PDF transmission function with a time stamp by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits
Remarks
This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available.
Display the installation status of the PDF transmission function with a user signature in transfer invalidation.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0
Remarks
This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available.
Obtain a transfer license key of the PDF transmission function with a user signature in transfer invalidation.
Obtain a transfer license key to use the PDF transmission function with a user signature by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits
Remarks
This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available.
Display the installation status of the PDF transmission function with a device signature in transfer invalidation.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0
Remarks
This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available.
Obtain a transfer license key of the PDF transmission function with a device signature in transfer invalidation.
Obtain a transfer license key to use the PDF transmission function with a device signature by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits
Remarks
This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available.

Display the installation status of the scalable PDF transmission function in transfer invalidation.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0
Remarks
This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available.

Obtain a transfer license key of the scalable PDF transmission function in transfer invalidation.
Obtain a transfer license key to use the scalable PDF transmission function by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits
Remarks
This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available.

Display the installation status of ACQ in transfer invalidation.

Display the installation status of AMS (Access Management System).
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

16-59

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item

Description

level

EX: ST-XXXX 1 ( ) {0 to 0}
[1] [2]
[1]: for state indication, 0: not installed (default); 1: installed
[2]: for invalidation execution, 0: execute (input accepted only if '0')
Procedure (invalidation of transfer)
1) Select SET-XXXX, and type in '0'; then, press the OK key.
2) See that a transfer license number (24 characters) is indicated for TR-XXXX.
TR-AMS
***

Obtain a transfer license key of ACQ in transfer invalidation.

Obtain a transfer license key to use AMS (Access Management System) by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-ERDS
***

Display the installation status of the third party expansion function for ERDS in transfer invalidation.
Display the installation status of the third party expansion function (the function which sends a charging counter to a third party's
charging server) for ERDS.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

Obtain a transfer license key of the third party expansion function for ERDS in transfer invalidation.
Obtain a transfer license key to use the third party expansion function (the function which sends a charging counter to a third party's
charging server) by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

Display the installation status of PS in transfer invalidation.

Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

TR-PS
***

Obtain a transfer license key of PS in transfer invalidation.

Obtain a transfer license key to use PS by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-PCL
***

Display the installation status of PCL in transfer invalidation.

Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

TR-PCL
***

Obtain a transfer license key of PCL in transfer invalidation.

Obtain a transfer license key to use PCL by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-PSLI5
***

Display the installation status of PS, LIPS4, and LIPS LX in transfer invalidation.
Display the installation status of the combined options of PS, LIPS4, and LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas).
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

TR-PSLI5
***

Obtain a transfer license key of PS, LIPS4, and LIPS LX in transfer invalidation.
Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of PS, LIPS4, and LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-LIPS5
***

Display the installation status of LIPS LX and LIPS4 in transfer invalidation.

Display the installation status of the combined options of LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) and LIPS4.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

TR-LIPS5
***

Obtain a transfer license key of LIPS LX and LIPS4 in transfer invalidation.

Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) and LIPS4 by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-LIPS4
***

Display the installation status of LIPS4 in transfer invalidation.

Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

Obtain a transfer license key of LIPS4 in transfer invalidation.

Obtain a transfer license key to use LIPS4 by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

TR-ERDS
***

ST-PS
***

TR-LIPS4
***

16-60

Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item

Description

level

EX: ST-XXXX 1 ( ) {0 to 0}
[1] [2]
[1]: for state indication, 0: not installed (default); 1: installed
[2]: for invalidation execution, 0: execute (input accepted only if '0')
Procedure (invalidation of transfer)
1) Select SET-XXXX, and type in '0'; then, press the OK key.
2) See that a transfer license number (24 characters) is indicated for TR-XXXX.
ST-PSPCL
***

Display the installation status of PS and PCL in transfer invalidation.

Display the combined options of PS and PCL.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

TR-PSPCL
***

Obtain a transfer license key of PS and PCL in transfer invalidation.

Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of PS and PCL by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-PCLUF
***

Display the installation status of PCL and UFR in transfer invalidation.

Display the combined options of PCL and UFR.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

TR-PCLUF
***

Obtain a transfer license key of PCL and UFR in transfer invalidation.

Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of PCL and UFR by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-PSLIP
***

Display the installation status of PS and LIPS in transfer invalidation.

Display the combined options of PS and LIPS.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

TR-PSLIP
***

Obtain a transfer license key of PS and LIPS in transfer invalidation.

Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of PS and LIPS by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-PSPCU
***

Display the installation status of PS, PCL, and UFR in transfer invalidation.
Display the combined options of PS, PCL, and UFR.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

TR-PSPCU
***

Obtain a transfer license key of PS, PCL, and UFR in transfer invalidation.
Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of PS, PCL, and UFR by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-LXUFR
***

Display the installation status of LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) in transfer invalidation.
Setting range
0: Unavailable (not installed)
1: Available (installed)
Standard value
0

TR-LXUFR
***

Obtain a transfer license key of LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) in transfer invalidation.
Obtain a transfer license key to use LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) by other MFP machine.
Standard value
Transfer license key: 24 digits

ST-HDCR2
***

Display of installation status of all hard disk data erasure subsequent to disabling transmission
This displays the installation status of all hard disk data erasure.
Settings
0: OFF (not installed)
1: ON (installed)
[Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 0]

Acquisition of all hard disk data erasure transmission license key subsequent to disabling transmission
This acquires the transmission license key in order for all hard disk data erasure to be used by another MFP.

TR-HDCR2
***

16.6.1.2 Software Counter Specifications

0010-1685

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

000's: remote copy
100's: total copies
200's: copies
300's: prints
400's: copier + prints
500's: scan
600's: box
700's: received prints

16-61

Chapter 16
800's: report prints
Guide to the Table
- yes: counter valid for the machine
- 4C: full color
- mono: mono color (Y, M, C/R, G, B/aged mono)
- Bk: black mono
- L: large-sized (B4 or smaller)
- S: small-size (paper of B4 or smaller)
- 1/2: under "count of," the number of counts given to large-size paper.
You may change the following in service mode so that the paper as large as and larger than B4 is counted as large-size paper:
COPIER>OPTION>USER>B4_L_CNT.
- copy: local copy + remote copy
- copy A: local copy + remote copy + box print
- print: PDL print + report print + box print
- print A: PDL print + report print
- scan: black-and-white scan + color scan
T-16-1
yes/no

No.

Description

000

no indication

yes

002

remote copy (full color 1)

yes

003

remote copy (full color 2)

yes

004

remote copy (mono color 1)

yes

005

remote copy (mono color 2)

yes

006

remote copy (black-and-white 1)

yes

007

remote copy (blank-and-white 2)

yes

008

remote copy (full color, large)

yes

009

remove copy (full color, small)

yes

010

remote copy (mono color, large)

yes

011

remote copy (mono color, small)

yes

012

remote copy (black-and-white, large)

yes

013

remote copy (black-and-white, small)

yes

014

remote copy (full color + mono color, large)

yes

015

remote copy (full color + mono color, small)

yes

016

remote copy (full color + mono color 2)

yes

017

remote copy (full color + mono color 1)

yes

018

remote copy (full color, large, double-sided)

yes

019

remote copy (full color, small, double-sided)

yes

020

remote copy (mono color, large, double-sided)

yes

021

remote copy (mono color, small, double-sided)

yes

022

remote copy (black-and-white, large, double-sided)

yes

023

remote copy (black-and-white, small, double-sided)

T-16-2

16-62

yes/no

No.

Description

yes

101

total 1

yes

102

total 2

yes

103

total (large)

yes

104

total (small)

yes

105

total (full color 1)

yes

106

total (full color 2)

yes

108

total (black-and -white 1)

yes

109

total (black-and -white 2)

yes

110

total (mono color, large)

yes

111

total (mono color, small)

yes

112

total (black-and-white, large)

yes

113

total (black-and-white, small)

yes

114

total 1 (double-sided)

yes

115

total 2 (double-sided)

yes

116

large (double-sided)

yes

117

small (double-side)

yes

118

total (mono color 1)

yes

119

total (mono color 2)

yes

120

total (full color, large)

yes

121

total (full color, small)

yes

122

total (full color + moo color, large)

yes

123

total (full color + mono color, small)

yes

124

total (full color + mono color 2)

yes

125

total (full color + mono color 1)

Chapter 16
T-16-3
yes/no

No.

Description

yes

201

copy (total 1)

yes

202

copy (total 2)

yes

203

copy (large)

yes

204

copy (small)

yes

205

copy A (total 1)

yes

206

copy A (total 2)

yes

207

copy A (large)

yes

208

copy A (small)

yes

209

local copy (total 1)

yes

210

local copy (total 2)

yes

211

local copy (large)

yes

212

local copy (small)

yes

213

remote copy (total 1)

yes

214

remote copy (total 2)

yes

215

remote copy (large)

yes

216

remote copy (small)

yes

217

copy (full color 1)

yes

218

copy (full color 2)

yes

219

copy (mono color 1)

yes

220

copy (mono color 2)

yes

221

copy (black-and-white 1)

yes

222

copy (black-and-white 2)

yes

223

copy (full color, large)

yes

224

copy (full color, small)

yes

225

copy (mono color, large)

yes

226

copy (moo color, small)

yes

227

copy (black-and-white, large)

yes

228

copy (black-and-write, small)

yes

229

copy (full color + mono color, large)

yes

230

copy (full color + mono color, small)

yes

231

copy (full color + mono color/2)

yes

232

copy (full color + mono color/1)

yes

233

copy (full color, large, double-sided)

yes

234

copy (full color, small, double-sided)

yes

235

copy (mono color, large, double-sided)

yes

236

copy (mono color, small, double-sided)

yes

237

copy (black-and-white, large, double-sided)

yes

238

copy (black-and-white, small, double-sided)

yes

245

copy A (full color 1)

yes

246

copy A (full color 2)

yes

247

copy A (mono color 1)

yes

248

copy A (mono color 2)

yes

249

copy A (black-and-white 1)

yes

250

copy A (black-and-white 2)

yes

251

copy A (full color, large)

yes

252

copy A (full color, mall)

yes

253

copy A (mono color, large)

yes

254

copy A (mono color, small)

yes

255

copy A (black-and-white, large)

yes

256

copy A (black-and-white, small)

yes

257

copy A (full color + mono color, large)

yes

258

copy A (full color + mono color, small)

yes

259

copy A (full color + mono color 2)

yes

260

copy A (full color + mono color 1)

yes

261

copy A (full color, large, double-sided)

yes

262

copy A (full color, small, double-sided)

yes

263

copy A (mono color, large, double-sided)

yes

264

copy A (mono color, large, double-sided)

yes

265

copy A (black-and-white, large, double-sided)

yes

266

copy A (black-and-white, small, double-sided)

yes

273

local copy (full color 1)

yes

274

local copy (full color 2)

yes

275

local copy (mono color 1)

yes

276

local copy (mono color 2)

16-63

Chapter 16
yes/no

No.

Description

yes

277

yes

278

local copy (black-and-white 2)

yes

279

local copy (full color, large)

yes

280

local copy (full color, small)

yes

281

local copy (mono color, large)

yes

282

local copy (mono color, small)

local copy (black-and-white 1)

yes

283

local copy (black-and-white, large)

yes

284

local copy (black-and-white, small)

yes

285

local copy (full color + mono color, large)

yes

286

local copy (full color + mono color, small)

yes

287

local copy (full color + mono color 2)

yes

288

local copy (full color + mono color 1)

yes

289

local copy (full color, large, double-sided)

yes

290

local copy (full color, small, double-sided)

yes

291

local copy (mono color, large, double-sided)

yes

292

local copy (mono color, small, double-sided)

yes

293

local copy (black-and-white, large, double-sided)

yes

294

local copy (black-and-white, small, doubles-sided)

T-16-4

16-64

yes/no

No.

yes

301

print (total 1)

Description

yes

302

print (total 2)

yes

303

print (large)

yes

304

print (small)

yes

305

print A (total 1)

yes

306

print A (total 2)

yes

307

print A (large)

yes

308

print A (small)

yes

309

print (full color 1)

yes

310

print (full color 2)

yes

311

print (mono color 1)

yes

312

print (mono color 2)

yes

313

print (black-and-white 1)

yes

314

print (black-and-white 2)

yes

315

print (full color, large)

yes

316

print (full color, small)

yes

317

print (mono color, large)

yes

318

print (mono color, small)

yes

319

print (black-and-white, large)

yes

320

print (black-and-large, small)

yes

321

print (full color + mono color, large)

yes

322

print (full color + mono color, small)

yes

323

print (full color + mono color/2)

yes

324

print (full color + mono color/1)

yes

325

print (full color, large, double-sided)

yes

326

print (full color, small, double-sided)

yes

327

print (mono color, large, double-sided)

yes

328

print (mono color, small, double sided)

yes

329

print (black-and-white, large, double-sided)

yes

330

print (black-and -white, small, double-sided)

yes

331

PDL print (total 1)

yes

332

PDL print (total 2)

yes

333

PDL print (large)

yes

334

PDL print (small)

yes

335

PDL print (full color 1)

yes

336

PDL print (full color 2)

yes

339

PDL print (black-and-white 1)

yes

340

PDL print (black-and-white 2)

yes

341

PDL print (full color, large)

yes

342

PDL print (full color, small)

yes

345

PDL print (black-and-white, large)

yes

346

PDL print (black-and-white, small)

yes

351

PDL print (full color, large, double-sided)

Chapter 16
yes/no

No.

yes

352

Description
PDL print (full color, small, double-sided)

yes

355

PDL print (black-and-white, large, double-sided)

yes

356

PDL print (black-and-white, small, double-sided)

T-16-5
yes/no

No.

yes

401

copy + print (full color, large)

Description

yes

402

copy + print (full color, small)

yes

403

copy + print (black-and-white, large)

yes

404

copy + print (black-and-white, small)

yes

405

copy + print (black-an-white 2)

yes

406

copy + print (black-and-white 1)

yes

407

copy + print (full color + mono color, large)

yes

408

copy + print (full color + mono color, small)

yes

409

copy + print (full color + mono color/2)

yes

410

copy + print (full color + mono color/1)

yes

411

copy + print (large)

yes

412

copy + print (small)

yes

413

copy + print (2)

yes

414

copy + print (1)

yes

415

copy + print (mono color, large)

yes

416

copy + print (mono color, small)

yes

417

copy + print (full color, large, double-sided)

yes

418

copy + print (full color, small, double-sided)

yes

419

copy + print (mono color, large, double-sided)

yes

420

copy + print (mono color, small, double-sided)

yes

421

copy + print (black-and-white, large, double-sided)

yes

422

copy + print (back-and-white, small, double-sided)

T-16-6
yes/no

No.

Description

yes

501

scan (total 1)

502

scan (total 2)

503

scan (large)

504

scan (small)

yes

505

black-and-white (total 1)

506

black-and-white (total 2)

507

black-and-white (large)

508

black-and-white scan (small)

yes

509

color scan (total 1)

510

color scan (total 2)

511

color scan (large)

512

color scan (small)

T-16-7
yes/no

No.

yes

601

box print (total 1)

Description

yes

602

box print (total 2)

yes

603

box print (large)

yes

604

box print (small)

yes

605

box print (full color 1)

yes

606

box print (full color 2)

yes

607

box print (mono color 1)

yes

608

box print (mono color 2)

yes

609

box print (black-and-white 1)

yes

610

box print (black-and-white 2)

yes

611

box print (full color, large)

yes

612

box print (full color, small)

yes

613

box print (mono to color, large)

yes

614

box print (mono color, small)

yes

615

box print (black-and-white, large)

16-65

Chapter 16
yes/no

No.

Description

yes

616

box print (black-and-white, small)

yes

617

box print (full color + moo color, large)

yes

618

box print (full color + mono color, small)

yes

619

box print (full color + mono color 2)

yes

620

box print (full color + mono color 1)

yes

621

box print (full color, large, double-sided)

yes

622

box print (full color, small, double-sided)

yes

623

box print (mono color, large, double-sided)

yes

624

box print (mono color, small, double-sided)

yes

625

box print (black-and-white, large, double-sided)

yes

626

box print (back-and-white, small, double-sided)

T-16-8
yes/no

No.

yes

701

reception print (total 1)

Description

yes

702

reception print (total 2)

yes

703

reception print (large)

yes

704

reception print (small)

705

reception print (full color 1)

706

reception print (full color 2)

707

reception print (grayscale 1)

708

reception print (grayscale 2)

yes

709

reception print (black-and-white 1)

yes

710

reception print (black-and-white 2)

711

reception print (full color, large)

712

reception print (full color, small)

713

reception print (grayscale, large)

714

reception print (grayscale, small)

yes

715

reception print (black-and-white, large)

yes

716

reception print (black-and-white, small)

717

reception print (full color + grayscale, large)

718

reception print (full color + grayscale, small)

719

reception print (full color + grayscale 2)

720

reception print (full color, grayscale 1)

721

reception print (full color, large, double-sided)

722

reception print (full color, small, double-sided)

723

reception print (grayscale, large, double-sided)

724

reception print (grayscale, small, double-sided)

yes

725

reception print (black-and-white, large, double-sided)

yes

726

reception print (black-and-white, small, double-sided)

T-16-9

16-66

yes/no

No.

Description

yes

801

report print (total 1)

yes

802

report print (total 2)

yes

803

report print (large)

yes

804

report print (small)

805

report print (full color 1)

806

report print (full color 2)

807

report print (grayscale 1)

808

report print (grayscale 2)

yes

809

report print (black-and-white 1)

yes

810

report print (black-and-white 2)

811

report print (full color, large)

812

report print (full color, small)

813

report print (grayscale, large)

814

report print (grayscale, small)

yes

815

report print (black-and-white, large)

yes

816

report print (black-and-white, small)

817

report print (full color + grayscale, large)

818

report print (full color + grayscale, small)

819

report print (full color + grayscale 2)

820

report print (full color + grayscale 1)

Chapter 16
yes/no

No.

Description

821

report print (full color, large, double-sided)

822

report print (full color, small, double-sided)

823

report print (grayscale, large, double-sided)

824

report print (grayscale, small, double-sided)

yes

825

report print (black-and-white, large, double-sided)

yes

826

report print (black-and-white, small, double-sided)

T-16-10
yes/no

No.

901

copy scan total 1 (color)

Description

902

copy scan total 1 (black-and-white)

903

copy scan total 2 (color)

904

copy scan total 2 (black-and-white)

905

copy scan total 3 (color)

906

copy scan total 3 (black-and-white)

907

copy scan total 4 (color)

908

copy scan total 4 (black-and-white)

909

local copy scan (color)

910

local coy scan (black-and-white)

911

remote copy scan (color)

912

remote copy scan (black-and-white)

913

transmission scan total 1 (color)

914

transmission scan total 1 (black-and-white)

yes

915

transmission scan total 2 (color)

yes

916

transmission scan total 2 (black-and-white)

yes

917

transmission scan total 3 (color)

yes

918

transmission scan total 3 (black-and-white)

919

transmission scan total 4 (color)

920

transmission scan total 4 (black-and-white)

yes

921

transmission scan total 5 (color)

yes

922

transmission scan total 5 (black-and-white)

yes

929

transmission scan total 6 (color)

yes

930

transmission scan total 6 (black-and-white)

931

transmission scan total 7 (color)

932

transmission scan total 7 (black-and-white)

933

transmission scan total 8 (color)

934

transmission scan total 8 (black-and-white)

935

universal transmission scan total (color)

936

universal transmission scan total (black-and-white)

yes

937

box scan (color)

yes

938

box scan (black-and-white)

yes

939

remote scan (color)

yes

940

remote scan (black-and-white)

941

transmission scan/fax (color)

942

transmission scan/fax (black-and-white)

943

transmission scan/i fax (color)

944

transmission scan/i fax (black-and-white)

yes

945

transmission scan/e-mail (color)

yes

946

transmission scan/e-mail (black-and-white)

947

transmission scan/FTP (color)

948

transmission scan/FTP (black-and-white)

949

transmission scan/SMB (color)

950

transmission scan/SMB (black-and-white)

951

transmission scan/IPX (color)

952

transmission scan/IPX (white-and-white)

953

transmission scan/database (color)

954

transmission scan/database (black-and-white)

955

transmission scan/local print (color)

956

transmission scan/local print (black-and-white)

957

transmission scan/box (color)

958

transmission scan/box (black-and-white)

16-67

Chapter 16

16.6.2 SORTER
16.6.2.1 SORTER Table
0003-6077

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

SORTER > OPTION
Sub item
BLNK-SW

Description
Use it to set the marking width (W) for both sides of the crease for the saddle stitcher in use.
0: normal width (5 mm)
1: large width (10 mm)
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1]

level

F-16-22
SORTER > OPTION
Sub item
MD-SPRTN

Description
Use it to limit the finisher functions.
0: normal
1: enable functional separation
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

level
1

16.6.3 BOARD
16.6.3.1 BOARD Table
0003-6078

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

BOARD > OPTION
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
SURF-OFF *

MENU-1 to 4

Description

level

Use it to enable/disable the UFR board function.

0: enable operation as copier model without E code indication in absence of UFR board
1: check presence of UFR board; if absent, indicate E code
[at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0]

Indication of Levels 1 Through 4 for the Printer Setup Menu

0: do no indicate [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: indicate

16.7 TEST (Test Print Mode)

16.7.1 COPIER
16.7.1.1 COPIER Table
0003-7800

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

<PG>

16-68

Chapter 16

COPIER > TEST > PG

Sub item
PG

TXPH

THRU

DENS-Y/M/C/K

COLOR-Y/M/C/K

F/M-SW

PG-PICK

2-SIDE

PG-QTY

Description

level

Enter the number (TYPE) of the test print you want, and press the Start key to start printing. (Be sure to set it back to '0' after
printing.)
0: normal print (0 to 100; see the table below)
- PG>TYPE input No./test print
0 image from CCD (normal print)
1 for R&D
2 for R&D
3 for R&D
4 16-gradation
5 full halftone
6 grid
7 for R&D
8 for R&D
9 for R&D
10 MCYBk horizontal stripe
11 for R&D
12 YMCBk 64-gradation
13 for R&D
14 full color 16-gradation
15 to 100 for R&D

Use it to set image mode for test print output.

0: T-MIC (no end edge correction)
1: SC1 (no end edge correction)
2: SC2 (no end edge correction)
3: T-MIC (end edge correction for Bk only)
4: SC2 (end edge correction for Bk only)
Reference The setting made here is valid only for test printing.

Use it to switch between image correction tables for text print output.
0: on (use)
1: off (do not use)

Use it to adjust the density of individual colors for text printing (TYPE=5).
0 to 255: a higher setting darkens image

Use it to set output of individual colors for each TYPE; e.g., to generate M mono, set 'COLOR-M=1', and set '0'. to all other
colors.
0: do not generate
1: generate

Use it to switch between full color and mono color for PG output.
0: full color output
1: mono color output

Use it to select a source of paper for text print output.

1: cassette 1
2: cassette 2
3: cassette 3
4: cassette 4
5: side deck
6: manual feeder
7 and 8: not used

Use it to set mode for text printing.

0: single-sided [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: double-sided

Use it to set a copy count for text printing.

1 to 999 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 1]

<NETWORK>
COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item

Description

level

PING

Use it to check the connection of the machine to a network (only if TCP/IP).

Use it when checking the connection to the network at time of installation if a fault occurs in the connection to the network.

IPV6-ADR
***

Destination address of PING (IPv6)

Set the destination address of PING issued in "COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING-IP6".
IPv6 address
Hexadecimal characters (0-9, a-f) and separators (:)(.), 39 characters at maximum
It should be a consistent character string as an address of IPv6.
Usage
PING is issued to check continuity in the network in the IPv6 environment.
Set the destination address of IPv6 in this mode.

PING-IP6
***

Issue of PING to the specified IPv6 address

Issue PING to the address specified from MFP to check continuity in the network in the IPv6 environment.

BML-DISP
**

Switching the display of system condition in BMLinks-compatible

0: Normal system condition [Default]
1: Device configuration only

1) Turn off the main power switch.

2) Connect the network cable to the machine and turn on the main power switch.
3) Inform the user's system administrator that the installation work for the machine is over, and ask him/her to make necessary network settings.
4) Advise the system administrator that you will be checking the network connection, and obtain the remote host address (IP address of a PC terminal on the user's
network) for PING.
5) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, using the keypad on the control panel, enter the IP address you obtained in step 4), and press the OK key and then the Start key.

16-69

Chapter 16
- The machine will indicate 'OK' if the connection to the network is correct. (end of work)
- If the machine indicates 'NG', check the connection of the network cable; if it is normal, go to step 6). If a fault has been found in the connection of the network
cable, correct it, and go back to step 5).
6) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the loopback address* (127.0.0.1), and press the OK key and
then the Start key.
- If the machine indicates 'NG', suspect a fault in the TCP/IP settings of the machine; go back to step 3), and check the settings.
- If the machine indicates 'OK', the TCP/IP settings of the machine are likely to be correct. Suspect, on the other hand, a fault in the connection of the network
interface board (NIC) or the board itself. Go on to step 7).
* A loopback address will return before it reaches the NIC, offering a means to check the TCP/IP settings of the machine itself.
7) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the local host address (IP address of the machine), and press
the OK key.
- If the machine indicates 'NG', suspect a fault in the connection of the NIC or the NIC itself. Check its connection, or replace it as necessary.
- If the machine indicates 'OK', the network settings of the machine and the NIC are likely to be correct. Suspect a fault in the user's network environment; ask the
system administrator for corrective action.

IP address input

Result (OK/NG)

F-16-23

16.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode)

16.8.1 COPIER
16.8.1.1 COPIER Table
0003-7801

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

<TOTAL>
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
SERVICE1

SERVICE2

COPY

PDL-PRT

FAX-PRT

RMT-PRT

BOX-PRT

16-70

Description

level

Total Counter 1 for Service Work

It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the printer unit.
(It increases its count regardless of the size of paper, large or small.)
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

Total Counter 2 for Service Work

It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the printer unit.
(It increases its count by 2 if the paper is large size and by 1 if the paper is small size.)
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

Total Copy Counter

It increases its count when copying operation has been executed and paper is delivered outside the printer.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

PDL Print Counter

It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing in keeping with the charge counter when
in PDL print mode.
It does not increase its count in the case of blank paper. It increases its count by 1 for large and small sheets alike.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

Fax Reception Print Counter

It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing to suit the charge counter in fax
reception mode.
It does not increase its count in the case of blank paper. It increases its count by 1 for large and small sheets alike. Its count may
be reset.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

Remote Print Counter

It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing in keeping with the charge counter in
remote print mode.
It does not increase its count the case of blank paper. It increases its count by 1 for large and small sheets alike. Its count may be
reset.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

Box Print Counter

It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing in keeping with the charge counter in
box print mode.
It does not increase its count in the case of blank paper. It increases its count by 1 for large and small sheets alike. Its count may
be reset.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

Chapter 16
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
RPT-PRT

2-SIDE

SCAN

Description

level

Report Print Counter

It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing in keeping with the charge counter in
report print mode.
It does not increase its count in the case of blank paper. It increases its count by 1 for large and small sheets alike. Its count may
be reset.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

Double-Sided Copy/Print Counter

It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing in keeping with the charge counter,
indicating the number of double-sided copies/prints.
It does not increase its count in the case of blank paper. It increases its count by 1 for large and small sheets alike. Its count may
be reset.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

Scan Counter
It increases its count at the end of reading operation, indicating the number of scans.
It increases its count by 1 for large and small sheets alike. It may be initialized.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

<PICK-UP>
COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP
Sub item
C1/2/3/4

MF

DK

2-SIDE

Description

level

Cassette 1/2/3/4 Pickup Total Counter

It indicates the number of sheets picked up from the cassette 1/2/3/4.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

Manual Feed Pickup Total Counter

It indicates the number of sheets picked up from the manual feed pickup unit.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

Deck Pickup Total Counter

It indicates the number of sheets picked up from the deck pickup unit.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

Duplex Pickup Total Counter

It indicates the number of sheets used for duplexing.
When the count exceeds '99999999', it returns to '00000000'.

<FEEDER>
COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
Sub item
FEED

Description
Total counter indicating the number of originals picked up by the ADF

level
1

<JAM>
COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
Sub item

Description

level

TOTAL

copier total jam counter

FEEDER

feeder total jam counter

SORTER

finisher total jam counter

2-SIDE

duplex unit jam counter

1
1

MF

manual feed pickup jam counter

C1/2/3/4

cassette 1/2/3/4 jam counter

DK

side paper deck jam counter

<MISC>
COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
FX-UP-RL

DV-UNT-K

Description

level

Fixing roller passing sheet count (The count is stored in DC controller PCB.)
- If the fixing roller or fixing unit is replaced, clear the count.
- If the DC controller PCB is replaced, input the count stored in it before the replacement.
<How to input>
1) Select the item to highlight.
2) Select the count [1], highlight it, and input the value stored in the PCB before its replacement using ten-key.
3) Press OK button.

Developing unit passing sheet count (The count is stored in DC controller PCB.)
- If the development unit (Bk) is replaced, clear the count.
- If the DC controller PCB is replaced, input the value stored in the PCB before its replacement.
<How to input>
1) Select the item to highlight.
2) Select the count [1], highlight it, and input the value stored in the PCB before its replacement using ten-key.
3) Press OK button.
Do not clear or input the value except the cases described above. If do it, fogging might occur due to the failure of image density
or drum might be damaged due to the carrier. If the value is cleared or newly input by mistake, clear the count after replacing
the developing unit (Bk).

16-71

Chapter 16
COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
*: iR C3100 Series **: iR C3180/3170/2580/2570 Series ***: iR C3180/2580 Series
Sub item
DRM-CNTR

Description
Drum sheet count (The count is stored in DC controller PCB.)
Count the number of the sheet used since initialization of the drum unit (FUNCTION > INSTALL > DRM-LIFE execution).
<How to input>
1) Select the item to highlight.
2) Select the count [1], highlight it, and input the value stored in the PCB before its replacement using ten-key.
3) Press OK button.

ALLPW-ON
***

Non-all-night startup counter (Clear at replacing the power supply)

HDD-ON
***

HDD startup counter (Clear at replacing the HDD)

level

1
1

<DRBL-1>
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
Sub item

Description

level

LSR-DRV

It indicates the number of sheets in relation to the number of times the laser has been turned on. (for 4C, increase by 4; for
Bk, increase by 1)

LSR-MTR

It indicates the number of times the laser scanner motor has been turned on.

T-CLN-BD

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past through the transfer cleaning unit. (The count is held by the controller.)

TR-BLT

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the intermediate transfer belt. (The count is held by the controller.)

TR-ROLL

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the secondary transfer outside roller. (The count is held by the
controller.)

2TR-ROLL

It indicates the number of times the secondary transfer outside roller has been turned on. (The count is held by the controller.)

2TR-CL

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the secondary transfer clutch. (The count is held by the controller.)

ITB-CL

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the ITB cleaning clutch. (The count is held by the controller.)

EL-NDL

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the separation static eliminator. (The count is held by the controller.)

DV-UNT-C/M/Y

It indicates the number of times the C/M/Y developing assembly has rotated.

C1/2-PU-RL

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past through the cassette 1/2 pickup roller. (The count is held by the
controller.)

M-PU-RL

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the manual feed roller. (The count is held by the controller.)

FX-LW-RL

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the fixing roller. (The count is held by the controller.)

FX-UNIT

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the fixing unit. (The count is held by the controller.)

FX-UP-FR

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the fixing upper frame unit. (The count is held by the controller.)

<DRBL-2>
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2
Sub item

16-72

Description

level

DF-PU-RL

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the ADF pickup roller.

DF-SP-PD

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the ADF separation pad.

DF-FD-RL

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the DF feed roller.
It increase its count by 1 for a single-sided original.
It increases its count by 3 for a double-sided original.

LNT-TAPE

It indicates the number of times the DF dust-collecting tape has been moved. (increase of 1 per original)

PD-PU-RL

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the paper deck pickup roller.

C3/4-PU-RL

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the cassette 3/4 pickup roller.

SORT

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the sort path. (increase of 1 also for large size)

FIN-STPR

It indicates the number of stapling operations of the stacker assembly.

SADDLE

It indicates the number of sheets that have moved past the saddle assembly.

SDL-STPL

It indicates the number of stapler operations in the saddle assembly.

PUNCH

It indicates the number of punching operations.

PNCH-HRS

It indicates the number of puncher swing operations.

FN-BFFRL

It indicates the number sheets that have moved past the buffer roller.

TY-TQLMT

It indicates the number of tray switching operations.

Chapter 17 Upgrading

Contents

Contents
17.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1.1 Outline of the Version Upgrade ............................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1.2 Overview of Upgrading Work ................................................................................................................................................. 17-1
17.1.3 Outline of the Functions and Operations ................................................................................................................................. 17-2
17.1.4 Upgrading Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 17-5
17.1.5 Function/Operation Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 17-6
17.1.6 Points to Note at Time of Downloading .................................................................................................................................. 17-9
17.1.7 Outline of the Service Support Tool ........................................................................................................................................ 17-9
17.1.8 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use ........................................................................................................ 17-12

17.2 Making Preparations ................................................................................................................................................17-15

17.2.1 Registering the System software............................................................................................................................................ 17-15
17.2.2 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)............................................................................................................ 17-18
17.2.3 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB)........................................................................................................................ 17-21
17.2.4 Making connections ............................................................................................................................................................... 17-24
17.2.5 Making Connections (SST in use) ......................................................................................................................................... 17-28
17.2.6 Making Connections (USB device in use)............................................................................................................................. 17-30
17.2.7 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)............................................................................................................ 17-30
17.2.8 Installing the System Software (SST -> USB) ...................................................................................................................... 17-32
17.2.9 Making Connections (SST in use) ......................................................................................................................................... 17-34
17.2.10 Making Connections (USB device in use)........................................................................................................................... 17-35

17.3 Formatting the HDD ................................................................................................................................................17-35

17.3.1 Formatting All Partitions ....................................................................................................................................................... 17-35
17.3.2 Formatting the HDD for All Partition.................................................................................................................................... 17-36
17.3.3 Formatting Selected Partitions ............................................................................................................................................... 17-37
17.3.4 Formatting the HDD for Selected Partitions.......................................................................................................................... 17-38
17.3.5 Formatting Procedure............................................................................................................................................................. 17-40
17.3.6 Formatting Procedure............................................................................................................................................................. 17-45
17.3.7 Formatting All Partitions ....................................................................................................................................................... 17-46
17.3.8 Formatting Selected Partitions ............................................................................................................................................... 17-47
17.3.9 Formatting the Partitions........................................................................................................................................................ 17-48

17.4 Downloading System Software................................................................................................................................17-49

17.4.1 Batch Downloading ............................................................................................................................................................... 17-49
17.4.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-49
17.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-49
17.4.1.3 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-52
17.4.1.4 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-52

17.4.2 Downloading the System Software (Single).......................................................................................................................... 17-57

17.4.2.1 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-57

17.4.3 Downloading the System Software........................................................................................................................................ 17-60

17.4.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-60
17.4.3.2 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-60
17.4.3.3 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-61
17.4.3.4 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-65

17.4.4 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module ...................................................................................................................... 17-69

17.4.4.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-69
17.4.4.2 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-71
17.4.4.3 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-72
17.4.4.4 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-77

17.4.5 Downloading the SDICT ....................................................................................................................................................... 17-78

17.4.5.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-78
17.4.5.2 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................17-78

Contents

17.4.6 Downloading the MEAPCONT............................................................................................................................................. 17-78

17.4.6.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-78
17.4.6.2 Downloading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................... 17-78

17.4.7 Downloading the KEY........................................................................................................................................................... 17-78

17.4.7.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-78
17.4.7.2 Downloading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................... 17-78

17.4.8 Downloading the TTS............................................................................................................................................................ 17-78

17.4.8.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-78
17.4.8.2 Downloading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................... 17-78

17.4.9 Downloading the BROWSER................................................................................................................................................ 17-79

17.4.9.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-79
17.4.9.2 Downloading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................... 17-79

17.4.10 Downloading the BOOT Software....................................................................................................................................... 17-80

17.4.10.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-80
17.4.10.2 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-80
17.4.10.3 Downloading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................ 17-81
17.4.10.4 Downloading Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17-86

17.4.11 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software......................................................................................................................... 17-88

17.4.11.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-88
17.4.11.2 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-88
17.4.11.3 Downloading Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17-90
17.4.11.4 Downloading Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17-95

17.4.12 Downloading the FAX Software ......................................................................................................................................... 17-95

17.4.12.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-95
17.4.12.2 Downloading Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17-96
17.4.12.3 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-100
17.4.12.4 Downloading Procedure ....................................................................................................................................................................... 17-102

17.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data........................................................................................................... 17-102

17.5.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-102
17.5.2 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-103
17.5.3 Uploading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................... 17-103
17.5.4 Downloading Procedure....................................................................................................................................................... 17-107
17.5.5 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-107
17.5.6 Uploading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................... 17-108
17.5.7 Downloading Procedure....................................................................................................................................................... 17-110
17.5.8 Uploading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................... 17-111
17.5.9 Downloading Procedure....................................................................................................................................................... 17-116

17.6 Version Upgrade using USB ................................................................................................................................. 17-120

17.6.1 Overview of Menus and Functions ...................................................................................................................................... 17-120
17.6.2 Points to Note....................................................................................................................................................................... 17-121
17.6.3 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto).............................................................................................................. 17-122
17.6.4 Downloading the System Software (Confirmation execution when version is downed the same version) ........................ 17-122
17.6.5 Downloading the System Software (all overwriting) .......................................................................................................... 17-123
17.6.6 Formatting the HDD ............................................................................................................................................................ 17-124
17.6.7 Other Functions.................................................................................................................................................................... 17-125
17.6.8 Overview of Menus and Functions ...................................................................................................................................... 17-127
17.6.9 Points to Note....................................................................................................................................................................... 17-128
17.6.10 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto)............................................................................................................ 17-129
17.6.11 Downloading the System Software (auto or selective)...................................................................................................... 17-129
17.6.12 Downloading the System Software (overwriting) ............................................................................................................. 17-130
17.6.13 Formatting the HDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 17-132
17.6.14 Other Functions.................................................................................................................................................................. 17-132

Chapter 17

17.1 Outline
17.1.1 Outline of the Version Upgrade
0003-8570

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The version upgrade of this machine and the accessories can be done by downloading from a personal computer (PC) in which the service support tool (SST) is
installed or by replacing DIMM-ROM. The table below shows a list of firmware and the associated way of upgrading.
T-17-1
Firmware

Main
Body

Way of Version Upgrade

SST

ROMDIMM
replacement

System (system software)

Yes

No

Language (language module)

Yes

No

RUI (remote UI)

Yes

No

Boot (boot program)

Yes

Yes

DCON (DC controller)

Yes

No

RCON (reader controller)

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Fin_P1 (Finisher-P1)

Yes

No

Fin_QR (Finisher-Q1/ Saddle

Finisher-Q2)

Yes

No

Accessor G3FAX (super G3FAX board-N1)

y

Notes

It also controls ADF reading.

The special service tool

(Downloader PCB: FY9-2034)
is necessary.

17.1.2 Overview of Upgrading Work

0010-0070

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The machine and its system software options may be upgraded as follows:
- downloading from a PC to which the Service Support Tool (SST) has been installed
- downloading from a USB device
- replacing the DIMM-ROM
To upgrade the various system software, go through the following:
T-17-2
Item

Machine

Option

System software

System (main controller)

Method
SST

USB

DIMM-ROM
Replacement

Yes

Yes

No

Language (language module)

Yes

Yes

No

RUI (remote user interface)

Yes

Yes

No

Boot (boot program)

Yes

Yes

Yes

MEAPCONT (MEAP library)

Yes

Yes

No

SDICT (OCR dictionary)

Yes

Yes

No

KEY (encryption communication

key)

Yes

Yes

No
No

TTS (voice dictionary)

Yes

Yes

BROWSER (Web browser)

Yes

Yes

No

DCON (DC controller)

Yes

Yes

No

RCON (reader controller)

Yes

Yes

No

G3FAX (Multi Port Fax Board-F1) Yes

Yes

Yes

Fin_T (Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle

Finisher-Q2/Q4)

No

No

Yes

Remarks

The main controller is also used to

control the G3 fax board (1-line).

The reader controller is also used

to control the ADF.
The work requires a special service
tool (downloader PCB; FY92034).

17-1

Chapter 17

17.1.3 Outline of the Functions and Operations

0009-9836

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

When connected to a PC (to which the SST and system software have been installed) and USB device (to which system software has been copied), the machine
provides the following functions:
iRC - - - PC for service work
USB device

Initializing the HDD

HDD setting information

System software

Downloading
system software

HDD

Flash ROM
Uploading backup data *1
Backup data

Downloading backup data *1

Back up RAM
F-17-1

*1: Not when USB is in use.

17-2

Chapter 17
To use these functions, the machine must be in download mode, which may be either of the following:
- Normal Mode (download mode B)
Turn on the main power while holding down the keys 1+7; then, make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD.
- Safe Mode (download mode A)
Turn on the main power while holding down the keys 2+8.

on keypad, 2+8

Main power
switch ON

on keypad, 1+7

Safe mode
program

Boot ROM

Boot program

HDD

SYSTEM program
In service mode
COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
Normal mode
program

Safe mode
(Download mode A)

Normal mode
(Download mode B)
F-17-2

17-3

Chapter 17

Use safe mode for the following:

- after replacing the HDD
- when the system fails to start up normally
The following shows combinations of download modes and functions:
T-17-3
Download mode
Function
Formatting the HDD

Normal mode
(download mode B)
-

All
BOOTDEV

Downloading the system software System

*1
Language
RUI
Boot
G3FAX
G4FAX
Dcon
Rcon
SDICT
MEAPCONT
KEY
TTS
BROWSER

System
Language
RUI
Boot
Dcon
Rcon
SDICT
MEAPCONT
KEY
TTS
BROWSER

Uploading/downloading of backup data *2

SramRCON
SramDCON

Meapback
-

*1: Not all software to download may be selected for downloading while USB is in use.
*2: Not when USB device is in use.

17-4

Safe mode
(download mode A)

Chapter 17
Installing the System Software
When downloaded, the system software is stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD. At the end of downloading, the main power switch must be turned off
and then back on, thus restarting the machine and writing the system software to both system area and flash ROM from the temporary storage area. When the main
power switch is turned off and then back on once again, the machine will start up using the new system software.
1) The system software is downloaded.
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[

Status of reception
(sample)

- - Do
Download
wnload Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG
-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG
-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG
-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - Complete

HDD

- - - Do
Download
wnload Mode - - [ iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - xx%

System
Software

System
Software
Temporary
storage area

2) The main power switch is turned off and then on.

HDD

3) Writing takes place.

<<<<< do
download
wnload shell >>>>>
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg
+++ Switch OFF the po
power
er then ON. +++

System
Software
Temporary
storage area
System area

Boot
ROM
4) The main motor switch
is turned off and then on.

FLASH
ROM

5) The machine starts up using

the new version.
F-17-3

17.1.4 Upgrading Overview

0017-8327

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
The machine and its system software options may be upgraded as follows:
- downloading from a PC to which the Service Support Tool (SST) has been installed
- downloading from a USB device
- replacing the DIMM-ROM
To upgrade the various system software, go through the following:
T-17-4
Item

Machine

System software

System (main controller)

Method
SST

USB

DIMM-ROM
Replacement

Yes

Yes

No

Language (language module)

Yes

Yes

No

RUI (remote user interface)

Yes

Yes

No

Boot (boot program)

Yes

Yes

Yes

MEAPCONT (MEAP library)

Yes

Yes

No

SDICT (OCR dictionary)

Yes

Yes

No

KEY (encryption communication

key)

Yes

Yes

No
No

TTS (voice dictionary)

Yes

Yes

BROWSER (Web browser)

Yes

Yes

No

DCON (DC controller)

Yes

Yes

No

RCON (reader controller)

Yes

Yes

No

Remarks

The main controller is also used to

control the G3 fax board (1-line).

The reader controller is also used

to control the ADF.

17-5

Chapter 17
Item

System software

Method
SST

Option

USB

DIMM-ROM
Replacement

G3FAX (Multi Port Fax Board-F1) Yes

Yes

Yes

Fin_T (Finisher-Q1/Q3, Saddle

Finisher-Q2/Q4)

No

No

Yes

Remarks

The work requires a special service

tool (downloader PCB; FY92034).

17.1.5 Function/Operation Overview

0017-8328

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
When connected to a PC (to which the SST and system software have been installed) and USB device (to which system software has been copied), the machine
provides the following functions:
iRC - - - PC for service work
USB device

Initializing the HDD

HDD setting information

System software

Downloading
system software

HDD

Flash ROM
Uploading backup data *1
Backup data

Downloading backup data *1

Back up RAM
F-17-4

*1: *1: Not when USB is in use.

In case of using these functions, it is necessary to set the copier in the download mode.
There are two types of download:
- Safe Mode (Download Mode A)
(By pressing 2+8, turning on the main power.)
- Normal Mode (Download Mode B)
(By pressing 1+7, turning on the main power; then, in the service mode, select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD.)

17-6

Chapter 17

on keypad, 2+8

Main power
switch ON

on keypad, 1+7

Safe mode
program

Boot ROM

Boot program

HDD

SYSTEM program
In service mode
COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
Normal mode
program

Safe mode
(Download mode A)

Normal mode
(Download mode B)
F-17-5

Use safe mode for the following:

- after replacing the HDD
- when the system fails to start up normally

17-7

Chapter 17

The following shows combinations of download modes and functions:

T-17-5
Download Mode
Function

Normal Mode
(Download Mode B)

HDD Format

ALL
BOOTDEV

Download of the system software

*1

System
Language
RUI
Boot
Dcon
Rcon
SDICT
MEAPCONT
KEY
TTS
ASR
BROWSER
TSTAMP *
HELP
WebDAV
G3FAX
G4FAX *

System
Language
RUI
Boot
Dcon
Rcon
SDICT
MEAPCONT
KEY
TTS
ASR
BROWSER
TSATMP *
HELP
WebDAV
-

Upload/download of the backup

data *2

SramRCON
SramDCON

Meapback
-

* only 100V machine

*1 Not all software to download may be selected for downloading while USB is in use.
*2 Not when USB device is in use.

17-8

Safe Mode
(Download Mode A)

Chapter 17
Installing the System Software
When downloaded, the system software is stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD. At the end of downloading, the main power switch must be turned off
and then back on, thus restarting the machine and writing the system software to both system area and flash ROM from the temporary storage area. When the main
power switch is turned off and then back on once again, the machine will start up using the new system software.
1) The system software is downloaded.
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[

Status of reception
(sample)
- - - Do
Download
wnload Mode - - [ iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - xx%

System
Software

- - Do
Download
wnload Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG
-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG
-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG
-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - Complete

HDD
System
Software
Temporary
storage area

2) The main power switch is turned off and then on.

3) Writing takes place.

<<<<< do
download
wnload shell >>>>>
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg
+++ Switch OFF the po
power
er then ON. +++

HDD
System
Software
Temporary
storage area
System area

Boot
ROM
4) The main motor switch
is turned off and then on.

FLASH
ROM

5) The machine starts up using

the new version.
F-17-6

17.1.6 Points to Note at Time of Downloading

0017-8329

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Do Not Turn Off the Power During Download/Write Operation

Do not turn off the power while the system software is being downloaded/written. Otherwise, the machine may fail to start up when its power is turned back on. (If
such is the case, execute HDD formatting, and download the system software. In the case of a boot ROM, replace the DIMM-ROM.)

Points to Note About Upgrading the DC Controller/Reader Controller

The DC controller/reader controller may be downloaded in either in normal mode or in safe mode. If done in safe mode, however, the controller version information
cannot be obtained, causing the data retained by the SST to be written over. It is a good idea, therefore, to use normal mode (so that the software will not be replaced
with software of a previous version).

17.1.7 Outline of the Service Support Tool

0001-1613

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The service supporrt tool (SST, hereafter) provides the following functions:

17-9

Chapter 17

iR XXXX
PC for service work

SST
Initializing the HDD
HDD setting information

System software

Downloading
system software

HDD

Flash ROM
Uploading backup data
Backup data

Downloading backup data

Back up RAM
F-17-7

To use the SST, you must first set the machine to download mode.
The machine's download mode consists of 2 types.
1. Normal Mode(Download mode B)
(With pressing 1+7, turn on the main power switch and select service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DOWNLOAD.)
2. Safe Mode(Download mode A)
(With pressing 2+8, turn on the main power switch.)

17-10

Chapter 17

on keypad, 2+8

Safe mode
program

Main power
switch ON

on keypad, 1+7

Boot ROM

Boot program

HDD

SYSTEM program
In service mode
COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
normal mode
program

Download mode A

Download mode B
F-17-8

Use safe mode for the following:

- after replacing the HDD.
- if the system fails to operate normally.

The following shows combinations of functions that may be used in association with the SST and the download mode:
T-17-6

Function

Download mode

Normal mode
(download mode B)
Formatting the HDD

Downloading system software

Safe mode
(download mode A)

ALL
BOOTDEV

DOSDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
DOSDEV5

-System
-Language
-RUI
-Boot
-G3FAX
-Dcon
-Rcon

-System
-Language
-RUI
-Boot
-

17-11

Chapter 17

Function

Download mode

Normal mode
(download mode B)
Downloading/
Uploading back up data

-DconSRAM
-RconSRAM

Safe mode
(download mode A)
-

17.1.8 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use

0001-1615

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The machine communicates with the SST using the Ethernet protocol(TCP/IP).
The machine offers 2 sets of network settings:
1. user enviroment network settings
(Additional Function> system contorol settings> network settings)
2. service network settings
(IP address: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0)
The netework settings are dependent on how the machine is started up.
The user enviroment settings are retained while the service settings are selected.

You need not change the user enviroment network settings before or after the SST.

17-12

Chapter 17

iR XXXX

User network enviroment

Ethernet I/F

User enviromsnt network settings

Service network settings

Power OFF
Power ON in response to 1+7 or 2+8 on keypad

iR XXXX

Service PC

Ethernet I/F

User enviroment network settings

(settings are retained)

SST in use

Service network settings

IP address: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Power OFF
Normal power ON

iR XXXX

User network enviroment

Ethernet I/F

User envorment network settings

(settings retained)

Service network settings

F-17-9

If you start up the machine by pressing 1+7, the machine indicates 'FIXIP' in the upper right of the LCD to distinguish its state from normal.

17-13

Chapter 17

Copy

Send

Mail Box

Options

Auto-Color Select
eady to copy
Department*S

100 %
1:1

Copy atio

Finisher

Two-sided

Paper Select

A
Text/Photo/Map
Special Features

Interrupt

System Monitor

I-Fax Memory X is on
F-17-10

Attension when installed option board

-Normal Power ON
The Ethernet interface is disabled if a TokenRing board is installed.
-Power ON in response to 1+7 or 2+8
The Ethernet interface is enabled if a TokenRing board is installed, and the TokenRing board is disabled.
You need not remove the TokenRing board when connecting the SST.

17-14

Chapter 17

iR XXXX

User network enviroment

(TokenRIng)

TokenRIng I/F
enabled
Ethernet I/F
disabled

Power OFF
Power ON in response to 1+7 or 2+8 on keypad

iR XXXX
Service PC
TokenRIng I/F
disabled
Ethernet I/F
enabled

SST in use

F-17-11

17.2 Making Preparations

17.2.1 Registering the System software
0001-1617

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

Register the System software stored on the system CD to the SST.

[Before starting the work]
Keep the following on hand:
-PC to which SST v1.73 or later has been installed.
-system CD for iRC3100
(if the machine supports the Netware, prepare the system CD for iRC3100N)
[Registering the System software]
1) Start up the PC.
2) Set the system CD to the PC.
3) Start up the SST.
4) Click [next] under Controlling Data.

17-15

Chapter 17

F-17-12

5) Click [Registering Firmware].

F-17-13

6) Click [Register from selected folder].

17-16

Chapter 17

F-17-14

7) Select the drive in which you have set the system CD, and click [Search].

F-17-15

8) When the list of system software items contained on the system CD has appeared, click [Register All] after it becomes enabled.

17-17

Chapter 17

F-17-16

9) When the result of the registration have appeared, click [OK].

F-17-17

17.2.2 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)

0009-9959

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Here, you will be copying the system software found on the System CD to the SST.
[Preparatory Work]
Requirements
- PC to which the SST (version 3.21 or later) has been installed
- System CD of the iR C3170/C2570 Series
[Installing the System Software]
1) Turn on the PC.
2) Set the System CD in the PC.
3) Start up the SST.
4) Click [Register Firmware].

17-18

Chapter 17

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Model List
Select a model to connect

CONNECT
MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

c:

System Management

START
CANCEL

EXIT

F-17-18

17-19

Chapter 17
5) Select the drive in which the System CD has been set, and click [SEARCH].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Registerd Firms
Registered fir mware

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Regist Firm
S e l e c t a d r i ve a n d fo l d e r.

CONNECT
e:

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e
e:

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
System Management

iRC2570C-XXxx-BOOT
iRC2570-USen
iRC2570-XXen0107-RUI
iRC2570-XXen0111-TTS
iRC2570-XXen-LANG
iRC2570-XXxx0100-BROWS

REGISTER

SEARCH

CANCEL

EXIT

F-17-19

6) A list of system software found on the System CD appears. Remove the check marks from the folders and software files you do not need, and click [REGISTER].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Registerd Firms
Registered fir mware

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

CONNECT
R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
System Management

REGISTER
CANCEL

EXIT

F-17-20

17-20

Found Firm
T h e f i r m wa r e l i s t e d b e l ow i s fo u n d .
U n c h e cke d f i r m wa r e i s r e g i s t e r e d .

iRC3170
SYSTEM
USenv0112
LANGUAGE
XXenv0112
RUI
XXenv0107
MEAPCONT
XXxxv0105
BOOT
XXxxv0103
BROWSER
XXxxv0100
G3FAX
XXenv6102

Chapter 17
7) When a message has appeared to indicate that the system software has been installed, click [OK].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Registerd Firms
Registered fir mware

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Found Firm
F i r m wa r e r e g i s t ra t i o n c o m p l e t e d .
> > > B a t c h R e g i s t ra t i o n R e s u l t s

CONNECT
TTS
XXenv0111
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
XXxxv0002
KEY
XXxcv0101
XXxpv0101
SDICT

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
System Management

O K
CANCEL

EXIT

iRC3170
SYSTEM
USenv0112 >>> With no
LANGUAGE
XXenv0112 >>> Regist
RUI
XXenv0107 >>> Regist
MEAPCONT
XXxxv0105 >>> Regist
BOOT
XXxxv0103 >>> Regist
BROWSER
XXxxv0100 >>> Regist
G3FAX
XXxxv6102 >>> Regist
DCON
XXxxv0102 >>> Regist
TTS
XXxxv0111 >>> Regist
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
XXxxv0002 >>> Regist
KEY
XXenv0111
OK!

F-17-21

17.2.3 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB)

0010-4491

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Here, you will be copying the system software from the SST to a USB device.
[Preparatory Work]
Requirements
- PC to which the SST (version 3.21 or later) has been installed
- USB device *
*: USB Requirements
Interface

USB 1.1 or higher

Capacity

1 GB or more recommended (A set of system software is in excess of 512 MB.)

Format

FAT (FAT16), FAT32 (It must not be NTFS or HFS.)

single partition (There must not be multiple partitions.)

You will not be able to use a security-protected USB device. Be sure to remove the protection before use.
[Copying the System Software]
1) Start up the PC.
2) Connect the USB device to the USB port of the PC.
3) Start up the SST.

17-21

Chapter 17
4) Click the USB icon on the Target Selection screen.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

E x p o r t F ir mwa re

Export Firm Selection

S e l e c t t h e d e s t i n a t e d r i ve .

Series
Version

MFP

R e g is te r F ir mwa re

Firmware registration status

USB

D e le te F ir mwa re
D e le te B a ck u p D a ta
USB

c:

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

START

Select the destinate drive.

CANCEL

EXIT

F-17-22

5) Select the drive to which the USB device has been connected.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

E x p o r t F ir mwa re

Export Firm Selection

Select the series.

Series
Version

MFP

R e g is te r F ir mwa re

USB

D e le te F ir mwa re
D e le te B a ck u p D a ta
USB

d:
Valid drive
DriveType:1
FileSystem:FAT
TotalSize:1,001MB
FreeSpace:1,001MB

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

START
CANCEL

EXIT

F-17-23

17-22

Firmware registration status

Chapter 17
6) Select the appropriate series and version of the system software you want to copy.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

E x p o r t F ir mwa re
MFP

R e g is te r F ir mwa re

USB

D e le te F ir mwa re
D e le te B a ck u p D a ta
USB

d:

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

START

Valid drive
DriveType:1
FileSystem:FAT
TotalSize:1,001MB
FreeSpace:1,001MB

CANCEL

EXIT

Export Firm Selection

C l i ck t h e < S t a r t > bu t t o n t o s t a r t
f i l e c o py.

Series

iRC3170

Version

USen0112(US)

Firmware registration status

iRC3170
BOOT
Y XXxxv0103
BROWSER
Y XXxxv0100
DCON
Y XXxxv0102
LANGUAGE
Y XXenv0112
N XXjav0112
MEAPCONT
Y XXxxv0105
RUI
Y XXenv0107
N XXjav0107
SDICT
N XXxxv0107
SYSTEM
N JPenv0112

F-17-24

MEMO:
The notations that appear in the column under "Firmware registration status" mean the following:
Y: exists in the SST.
N: does not exist in the SST.
7) Click [START] so that copying to the USB device starts.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

E x p o r t F ir mwa re
MFP

R e g is te r F ir mwa re

USB

D e le te F ir mwa re
D e le te B a ck u p D a ta
USB

d:
Valid drive
DriveType:1
FileSystem:FAT
TotalSize:1,001MB
FreeSpace:1,001MB

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

START
CANCEL

EXIT

Export Firm Selection

C l i ck t h e < S t a r t > bu t t o n t o s t a r t
f i l e c o py.

Series

iRC3170

Version

USen0112(US)

Firmware registration status

iRC3170
BOOT
Y XXxxv0103
BROWSER
Y XXxxv0100
DCON
Y XXxxv0102
LANGUAGE
Y XXenv0112
N XXjav0112
MEAPCONT
Y XXxxv0105
RUI
Y XXenv0107
N XXjav0107
SDICT
N XXxxv0107
SYSTEM
N JPenv0112

F-17-25

17-23

Chapter 17
8) When done, click [OK].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

E x p o r t F ir mwa re
MFP

R e g is te r F ir mwa re

USB

D e le te F ir mwa re
D e le te B a ck u p D a ta
USB

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

d:
Valid drive
DriveType:1
FileSystem:FAT
TotalSize:1,001MB
FreeSpace:1,001MB

CANCEL

EXIT

Export Firm Selection

F i l e c o py h a s b e e n c o m p l e t e d .

Series

iRC3170

Version

USen0112(US)

Firmware registration status

iRC3170
BOOT
Y XXxxv0103
BROWSER
Y XXxxv0100
DCON
Y XXxxv0102
LANGUAGE
Y XXenv0112
N XXjav0112
MEAPCONT
Y XXxxv0105
RUI
Y XXenv0107
N XXjav0107
SDICT
N XXxxv0107
SYSTEM
N JPenv0112

F-17-26

17.2.4 Making connections

0001-1621

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
You will be connecting the PC to the machine.
[Before starting the work]
Keep the following on hand:
-PC to which SST v1.73 or later has been installed and iRC3100 system software has been registered.
-Twisted pair Cross cable
10BASE-T: category 3 or 5
100BASE-T: category 5
[Procedure]
1) Start up the PC.
2) Check the network settings of the PC.
-Type 'IPCONFIG' to the command prompt, and press the Enter key.
-Check to see that the network settings are as follows:
IP address:
172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: any
Do not use the following settings.
-172.16.1.0
-172.16.1.100
-172.16.1.255
If the settings are not as indicatred, change the PC network settings:

F-17-27

3) Check to see that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is OFF; then, turn off the main power switch of the machine.
4) Connect the PC and the machine with a cross cable.

17-24

Chapter 17

IP address 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
IP address 172.16.1.100
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Cross cable
10Base-T category 3 or 5
100Base-TX category 5
F-17-28

5) While holding down the keys suited to the download mode you are going to use, turn on the main power switch of the machine.
-if Normal mode
Turn on the main power switch in response to 1+7 on keypad.
Enter sorce mode, make the following selection in service mode:
COPIER> FUNXTION> SYSTEM> DOWNLOAD
-if Safe mode
Turn on the main power switch in response to 2+8 on keypad.
6) Start up the SST.
7) Click [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.

F-17-29

8) Select the model of the machine.

17-25

Chapter 17

F-17-30

9) Select the unit you want, and click [Connect].

F-17-31

10) Click [Set host name].

17-26

Chapter 17

F-17-32

11) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click [OK].

F-17-33

12) Click [OK] so that the machine makes a connection.

17-27

Chapter 17

F-17-34

13) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click [OK].

F-17-35

17.2.5 Making Connections (SST in use)

0009-9960

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[Requirements]
- PC to which the SST (version 3.21 or later) has been installed and the system software for the iR C3170/C2570 Series has been copied
- twisted-pair cross cable
10Base-T: Category 3 or 5
100Base-TX: Category 5
[Procedure]
1) Start up the PC.
2) Check the network settings of the PC.
2-1) Start the command prompt, and type in "IPCONFIG," and press the Return key.
2-2) Check to be sure that the network settings appearing on the screen are as follows; if not, change the PC network settings:
IP address: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: any

17-28

Chapter 17

Do not use the following IP addresses:

- 172.16.1.0
- 172.16.1.100
- 172.16.1.255
3) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off; then, turn off the main power switch.
3-1) Hold down the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more.
3-2) Go through the shut-down instructions appearing on the control panel screen so that the main power switch may be turned off.
3-3) Turn off the main power switch.
4) Connect the PC to the machine with a cross cable.

IP sddress: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
IP address: 172.16.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Cross cable
10Base-T: category 3 or 5
100Base-TX: category 5
F-17-36

5) Set the machine to the appropriate mode:

- Normal Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 1 and 7.
When the machine has started, make the following selections in service mode:
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; then, click [OK].
- Safe Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 2 and 8. In response, the machine will start up in safe mode.

17-29

Chapter 17

17.2.6 Making Connections (USB device in use)

0010-4669

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[Requirements]
- USB device to which the system software for the iR C3170/C2570 Series has been copied.
[Procedure]
1) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory on the control panel is off; then, turn off the main power switch as follows:
1-1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
1-2) Go through the shut-down instructions.
1-3) Turn off the main power switch.
2) Connect the USB device [2] to the USB port [1].

[1]

[2]
F-17-37

3) If a network cable is connected to the machine, disconnect it.

4) Set the machine to the appropriate download mode:
- Normal Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 1 and 7.
When the machine has started up, make the following selections in service mode, and press [OK]:
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD.
- Safe Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 2 and 8 so that the machine will start up in safe mode.
5) See the following menu appearing on the control panel screen, indicating that the machine has recognized the presence of a USB device.

F-17-38

The machine may not recognize certain types of USB device or USB device from certain manufacturers. The machine looks for a USB deivce for a maximum of
60 sec after its main power is turned on, not indicating the menu if it fails to detect one. (If such is the case, obtain an appropriate USB device.)
The SST cannot be run while the USB device is in use. (The machine will not communicate with the SST when it detects the presence of a USB device.)

17.2.7 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)

0017-8330

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Here, you will be copying the system software found on the System CD to the SST.
[Preparatory Work]
Requirements
- PC installed with SST version 3.34 or later
- System CD for this machine
[Installing the System Software]
1) Turn on the PC.
2) Set the System CD in the PC.
3) Start up the SST.

17-30

Chapter 17
4) Click [Register Firmware].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Model List
Select a model to connect

CONNECT
MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

c:

System Management

START
CANCEL

EXIT

F-17-39

5) Select the drive in which the System CD has been set, and click [SEARCH].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Registerd Firms
Registered fir mware

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Regist Firm
S e l e c t a d r i ve a n d fo l d e r.

CONNECT
e:

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e
e:

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e

iRC3180-XXxx-BOOT
iRC3180-JPja
iRC3180-XXen-TTS
iRC3180-XXjaXXXX-RUI
iRC3180-XXja-LANG
iRC3180-XXxxXXXX-BROWS

D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
System Management

REGISTER

SEARCH
Model Configuration Info
iRC3180_v101_FirmID.rec

CANCEL

EXIT

F-17-40

MEMO:
'XXXX' on the screen indicates the system software version (Same in the subsequent figures).
6) A list of system software found on the System CD appears. Remove the check marks from the folders and software files you do not need, and click [REGISTER].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Registerd Firms
Registered fir mware

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

CONNECT
iRC3180
BOOT

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e
XXxxvXXXX

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
System Management

REGISTER

Found Firm
T h e f i r m wa r e l i s t e d b e l ow i s fo u n d .
U n c h e cke d f i r m wa r e i s r e g i s t e r e d .

iRC3180
BOOT
XXxxvXXXX
SYSTEM
JPjavXXXX
TTS
XXenvXXXX
RUI
XXjavXXXX
LANGUAGE
XXjavXXXX
BROWSER
XXxxvXXXX
DCON
XXxxvXXXX
Model Configuration Info
iRC3180_vXXXX_FirmID.rec

CANCEL

EXIT

F-17-41

7) When a message has appeared to indicate that the system software has been installed, click [OK].

17-31

Chapter 17

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Registerd Firms
Registered fir mware

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Found Firm
F i r m wa r e r e g i s t ra t i o n c o m p l e t e d .
> > > B a t c h R e g i s t ra t i o n R e s u l t s

iRC3180
BOOT

CONNECT

XXxxvXXXX >>> Regist

SYSTEM
USenvXXXX >>> Regist
TTS
XXenvXXXX >>> Regist
RUI
XXenvXXXX >>> Regist
LANGUAGE
XXenvXXXX >>> Regist
BROWSER
XXxxvXXXX >>> Regist
DCON
XXxxvXXXX >>> Regist
MEAPCONT
XXxxvXXXX >>> Regist

XXenvXXXX
iRC3180
RCON

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e
XXxxvXXXX

iRCXXXX
HDFormat
XXxxvXXXX
KEY
XXxcvXXXX

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
System Management

O K

Model Configuration Info : Update

OK

CANCEL

EXIT

F-17-42

17.2.8 Installing the System Software (SST -> USB)

0017-8331

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Here, you will be copying the system software from the SST to a USB device.
[Preparatory Work]
Requirements
- PC installed with SST version 3.34 or later
- USB device (*)
*: USB Requirements
Interface

USB 1.1 or higher (USB 2.0 or recommended)

Capacity

1 GB or more recommended
(A set of system software is in excess of 512 MB.)

Format

FAT (FAT16), FAT32 (It must not be NTFS or HFS.)

single partition (There must not be multiple partitions.)

You will not be able to use a security-protected USB device. Be sure to remove the protection before use.
[Copying the System Software]
1) Start up the PC.
2) Connect the USB device to the USB port of the PC.
3) Start up the SST.
4) Click the USB icon on the Target Selection screen.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

E x p o r t F i r m wa r e

Export Firm Selection

S e l e c t t h e d e s t i n a t e d r i ve .

Series
Version

MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

c:

System Management

START

Select the destinate drive.

CANCEL

EXIT

F-17-43

5) Select the drive to which the USB device has been connected.

17-32

Firmware registration status

Chapter 17

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

E x p o r t F i r m wa r e

Export Firm Selection

Select the series.

Series
Version

MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

Firmware registration status

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

d:

System Management

START

Valid drive
DriveType:1
FileSystem:FAT
TotalSize:1,001MB
FreeSpace:1,001MB

CANCEL

EXIT

F-17-44

6) Select the appropriate 'Series' and 'Version' of the system software you want to copy.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

E x p o r t F i r m wa r e
MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

d:

System Management

START

Valid drive
DriveType:1
FileSystem:FAT
TotalSize:1,001MB
FreeSpace:1,001MB

CANCEL

EXIT

Export Firm Selection

Click the <Star t> button to star t
f i l e c o py.

Series

iRC3180

Version

USenXXXX(US)

Firmware registration status

iRC3180
BOOT
Y XXxxvXXXX
BROWSER
Y XXxxvXXXX
DCON
Y XXxxvXXXX
LANGUAGE
Y XXenvXXXX
N XXjavXXXX
MEAPCONT
Y XXxxvXXXX
RUI
Y XXenvXXXX
N XXjavXXXX
SDICT
N XXxxvXXXX
SYSTEM
N USenvXXXX

F-17-45

MEMO:
The notations that appear in the column under "Firmware registration status" mean the following:
Y: exists in the SST.
N: does not exist in the SST.
7) Click [START] so that copying to the USB device starts.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.334E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

E x p o r t F ir mwa re
MFP

R e g is te r F ir mwa re

USB

D e le te F ir mwa re
D e le te B a ck u p D a ta
USB

d:
Valid drive
DriveType:1
FileSystem:FAT
TotalSize:1,001MB
FreeSpace:1,001MB

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

START
CANCEL

EXIT

Export Firm Selection

C l i ck t h e < S t a r t > bu t t o n t o s t a r t
f i l e c o py.

Series

iRC3180

Version

USenXXXX(US)

Firmware registration status

iRC3180
BOOT
Y XXxxvXXXX
BROWSER
Y XXxxvXXXX
DCON
Y XXxxvXXXX
LANGUAGE
Y XXenvXXXX
N XXjavXXXX
MEAPCONT
Y XXxxvXXXX
RUI
Y XXenvXXXX
N XXjavXXXX
SDICT
N XXxxvXXXX
SYSTEM
N USenvXXXX

F-17-46

8) When done, click [OK].

17-33

Chapter 17

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

E x p o r t F i r m wa r e
MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

d:
Valid drive
DriveType:1
FileSystem:FAT
TotalSize:1,001MB
FreeSpace:1,001MB

System Management

CANCEL

EXIT

Export Firm Selection

F i l e c o py h a s b e e n c o m p l e t e d .

Series

iRC3180

Version

USenXXXX(US)

Firmware registration status

iRC3180
BOOT
Y XXxxvXXXX
BROWSER
Y XXxxvXXXX
DCON
Y XXxxvXXXX
LANGUAGE
Y XXenvXXXX
N XXjavXXXX
MEAPCONT
Y XXxxvXXXX
RUI
Y XXenvXXXX
N XXjavXXXX
SDICT
N XXxxvXXXX
SYSTEM
N USenvXXXX

F-17-47

17.2.9 Making Connections (SST in use)

0017-8332

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
[Requirements]
- PC to which the SST (version 3.34 or later) has been installed and the system software has been copied
- twisted-pair cross cable
10Base-T: Category 3 or 5
100Base-TX: Category 5
[Procedure]
1) Start up the PC.
2) Connect the PC to the machine with a cross cable.
3) Check the network settings of the PC.
3-1) Start the command prompt, and type in "IPCONFIG," and press the Return key.
3-2) Check to be sure that the network settings appearing on the screen are as follows; if not, change the PC network settings:
IP address: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: any

Do not use the following IP addresses:

- 172.16.1.0
- 172.16.1.100
- 172.16.1.255
4) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off; then, turn off the main power switch.
4-1) Hold down the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more.
4-2) Go through the shut-down instructions appearing on the control panel screen so that the main power switch may be turned off.
4-3) Turn off the main power switch.

IP sddress: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

IP address: 172.16.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Cross cable
10Base-T: category 3, 5 or later
100Base-TX: category 5 or later
F-17-48

5) Set the machine to the appropriate mode:

- Normal Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 1 and 7.
When the machine has started, make the following selections in service mode:
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; then, click [OK].

17-34

Chapter 17
- Safe Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 2 and 8. In response, the machine will start up in safe mode.

17.2.10 Making Connections (USB device in use)

0017-8333

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
[Requirements]
- USB device to which the system software has been copied.
[Procedure]
1) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory on the control panel is off; then, turn off the main power switch as follows:
1-1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
1-2) Go through the shut-down instructions.
1-3) Turn off the main power switch.
2) Connect the USB device [2] to the USB port [1].

[2]

[1]
F-17-49

3) If a network cable is connected to the machine, disconnect it.

4) Set the machine to the appropriate download mode:
- Normal Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 1 and 7.
When the machine has started up, make the following selections in service mode, and press [OK]:
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD.
- Safe Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 2 and 8 so that the machine will start up in safe mode.
5) See the following menu appearing on the control panel screen, indicating that the machine has recognized the presence of a USB device.

F-17-50

The machine may not recognize certain types of USB device or USB device from certain manufacturers. The machine looks for a USB deivce for a maximum of
60 sec after its main power is turned on, not indicating the menu if it fails to detect one. (If such is the case, obtain an appropriate USB device.)
The SST cannot be run while the USB device is in use. (The machine will not communicate with the SST when it detects the presence of a USB device.)

17.3 Formatting the HDD

17.3.1 Formatting All Partitions
0001-1640

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

17-35

Chapter 17
You will be settin up partitions on the HDD and formatting (initializing) them for use by the main controller.

HDD

DOSDEV
FSTDEV
Formatting All partitions
(only if in safe mode)

DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5

HDD offerd as service part

(partitions are not set up)

HDD after formatting

F-17-51

17.3.2 Formatting the HDD for All Partition

0009-9961

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

When formatting the HDD for all partition, there will be partitions on the HDD and all these partitions will be formatted (initialized) and the main controller will
be made ready for use.
All the information needed to set up the partition is found in the partition settings file (on the SST, 'HDFormat' in the folder 'iRCXXXX').

17-36

Chapter 17

HDD

[4]
iRCXXXX
HDFormat

FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND

[2]

APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV
BOOTDEV2

[1]

[3]
F-17-52

[1] HDD (service part; without partitions)

[2] Formatting for full partition (only in safe mode)
[3] HDD after formatting
[4] Partition settings information file

17.3.3 Formatting Selected Partitions

0001-1642

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
You will be formatting (initializing) partitions that you have selected.

17-37

Chapter 17

HDD

FSTPDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2

May be formatted in normal mode

DOSDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV

May be formatted in safe mode*

DOSDEV5
Partitions on HDD

*After formatting,requires downloading

of the following: System,Language,RUI

F-17-53

Formatting Partitions Using the SST

T-17-7

Name of partition selected by the SST

Partition that is formatted

FSTDEV

FSTDEV, FSTPDEV, DOSDEV, DOSDEV2

DOSDEV3

DOSDEV3

PDLDEV

PDLDEV

DOSDEV4

DOSDEV4

DOSDEV5

DOSDEV5

BOOTDEV

BOOTDEV

Reference:
-4 partitions (FSTDEV, FSTPDEV, DOSDEV, DOSDEV2) are formatted at the same time.
-Formatting of DOSDEV4 requires the use of the SST.
The actual formatting of FSTDEV and PDLDEV takes place when the machine is started up the next time, and it takes as long as the following:
Formatting of FSTDEV: 2 min (approx.)
Formatting of PDLDEV: 5 min (approx.)
Formatting of All partitions: 7 min (approx.)
-The times vary according to the state of the HDD, and the progress of formatting is indicated by means of a progress bar.

17.3.4 Formatting the HDD for Selected Partitions

0009-9962

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

When formatting the HDD for selected partitions, only those selected partitions will be initialized.

17-38

Chapter 17

FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX

HDD

APL_SEND

[1]

APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV

[2]

BOOTDEV
BOOTDEV2

[1]

F-17-54

[1] Formatting not possible

[2] Formatting possible in safe mode

MEMO:
Partition-based formatting is possible in service mode ( COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > HD-CLEAR ), with the exception of BOOTDEV.

17-39

Chapter 17

17.3.5 Formatting Procedure

0001-1646

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
1) Click [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.

F-17-55

2) Select [HDForamt], and click [Connect].

F-17-56

3) Click [Set host name].

17-40

Chapter 17

F-17-57

4) The machiine's IP address is entered automatically; click [OK].

F-17-58

5) Click [OK] to start connection.

17-41

Chapter 17

F-17-59

6) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click [OK].

F-17-60

7) Click [Format].

17-42

Chapter 17

F-17-61

8) Select the partition you want to format from the list, and click [start].
When formatting all partitions, click [start] under All partitions (enabled if in safe mode).

-If formatting in Normal Mode

F-17-62

-If formatting in Safe Mode

17-43

Chapter 17

F-17-63

9) When the machine indicates the message for confirmation for the last time, click [Start].

F-17-64

10) After the machine indicates the message to the indicate the end of formatting, click [OK].

17-44

Chapter 17

F-17-65

11) Click [To Unit Selectioin Screen].

-If you have formatted all partitions or BOOTDEV, you must download the following:
System, Language, RUI
(If you fail to download these, an error(E602) will ocur when the main power switch is turned ON.)
-The actual formattin of FSTDEV and PDLDEV takes place when the machine is started up the next time, and it takes as long as the following:
Formatting of FSTDEV: 2 min (approx.)
Formatting of PDLDEV: 5 min (approx.)
Formatting of All partitions: 7 min (approx.)
-The times vary according to the state of the HDD, and the progress of formatting is indicated by means of a progress bar.
-You must not turn off the machine's main power switch while the progress bar is shown.

17.3.6 Formatting Procedure

0009-9963

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Start up the SST.
2) Select the model [1] ('iRC3170') and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)
Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

REGISTER

REMOVE

CONTROL
C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection

C l i ck t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i ck t h e
< S TA RT > bu t t o n .

iRC3170
CONNECT
MFP

R e g is te r F ir mwa re

iRC3170
ALL
ALL_HDF
Single

[1]
[2]

USB

D e le te F ir mwa re
D e le te B a ck u p D a ta
USB

c:

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

START
CANCEL
EXIT

F-17-66

3) Click [Format HDD].

17-45

Chapter 17

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)

172.16.1.100
iRC3170
SAFE
Clear
SelectableFirmware
Selec t the fir mware to be
downloaded. then c lick the [Star t]
button.

Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USen01 02n

SelectableFir mware

Hold
USen01 02i

iRC3170
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
TTS
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxx3003
DCON

Upload Data

XXxx0101
RUI
XXja0101
XXen0101
MEAPCONT

Download Data
Restore Backup System

XXxx0102
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXja0102
XXen0102
BOOTROM
XXxx0102C
G3FAX
XXxx6101

Start
Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-67

4) Specify BOOTDEV partition or full partition (ALL), and click [Start].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3170
SAFE
Clear
Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

HDDFormat
Select the par tition. then click
[Star t] button.

Download Firmware
Upload Data

Safe Mode
ALL
BOOTDEV
Normal Mode

Download Data
Restore Backup System
Format HDD
ALL:

Start
Cansel
Return to Main Menu

F-17-68

5) Click [Execute Formatting].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3170
SAFE
Clear
Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

HDDFormat
Execute for matting ?

Download Firmware
Upload Data

Safe Mode
ALL
BOOTDEV
Normal Mode

Download Data
Restore Backup System
Format HDD
ALL:

Start
Cancel
Return to Main Menu

Confirmation

E xe c u te Fo r ma ttin g

Cansel

F-17-69

6) When formatting has ended, click [OK] to return to the Menu screen.
7) Move on to download the system software.

Whenever you have executed HDD formatting, be sure to download the system software; otherwise, an error (E602) will occur when the main power is turned on.

17.3.7 Formatting All Partitions

0017-8334

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
When formatting the HDD for all partition, there will be partitions on the HDD and all these partitions will be formatted (initialized) and the main controller will
be made ready for use.
All the information needed to set up the partition is found in the partition settings file (on the SST, 'HDFormat' in the folder 'iRCXXXX').

17-46

Chapter 17

HDD

[4]
iRCXXXX
HDFormat

FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP

[2]

APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV

[1]

[3]
F-17-70

[1] HDD (service part; without partitions)

[2] Formatting for full partition (only in safe mode)
[3] HDD after formatting
[4] Partition settings information file

17.3.8 Formatting Selected Partitions

0017-8335

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
When formatting the HDD for selected partitions, only those selected partitions will be initialized.

FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX

HDD

APL_SEND
APL_MEAP

[1]

APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV

[2]

F-17-71

[1] Formatting not possible

17-47

Chapter 17
[2] Formatting possible in safe mode
MEMO:
Partition-based formatting is possible in service mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > HD-CLEAR), with the exception of BOOTDEV.

17.3.9 Formatting the Partitions

0017-8336

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
1) Start up the SST.
2) Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)
Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

REGISTER

REMOVE

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection

C l i c k t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i c k t h e
< S TA RT > b u t t o n .

[1]

iRC3180
CONNECT
MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

iRC3180
ALL
ALL_HDF

[2]

Single

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

System Management

c:

START
CANCEL
EXIT

F-17-72

3) Click [Format HDD].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3180
SAFE
Clear
SelectableFirmware
S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e
d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ]
bu t t o n .

Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USenXXXXn

SelectableFir mware

Hold
USenXXXXi

iRC3380
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
HELP
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
TSTMP
TTS
WebDAV
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxxXXXX
DCON

Upload Data

XXxxXXXX
RUI
XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
MEAPCONT

Download Data
Restore Backup System

XXxxXXXX
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
BOOTROM
XXxxXXXXC

Start
Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-73

4) Specify BOOTDEV partition or full partition (ALL), and click [Start].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3180
SAFE
Clear
Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

HDDFormat
S e l e c t t h e p a r t i t i o n . t h e n c l i ck
[ S t a r t ] bu t t o n .

Download Firmware
Upload Data

Safe Mode
ALL
BOOTDEV
Normal Mode

Download Data
Restore Backup System
Format HDD
ALL:

Start
Cansel
Return to Main Menu

F-17-74

5) Click [Execute Formatting].

17-48

Chapter 17

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)

172.16.1.100
iRC3180
SAFE
Clear
Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

HDDFormat
E xe c u t e fo r m a t t i n g ?

Download Firmware
Upload Data

Safe Mode
ALL
BOOTDEV
Normal Mode

Download Data
Restore Backup System
Format HDD
ALL:

Start
Cancel
Return to Main Menu

Confirmation

E xe c u t e Fo r m a t t i n g

Cansel

F-17-75

6) When formatting has ended, click [OK] to return to the Menu screen.
7) Move on to download the system software.

Whenever you have executed HDD formatting, be sure to download the system software; otherwise, an error (E602) will occur when the main power is turned on.

17.4 Downloading System Software

17.4.1 Batch Downloading
17.4.1.1 Outline
0017-8337

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
You can collectively download various system software files at one time. The groups of system software files that may be downloaded in a batch are identified in
the batch download information file, which is found on the System CD. Copy the file to the SST to enable the batch downloading mechanism.
<Batch Download Information File>
ALL: for downloading in normal mode
Use it to collectively download all system software files that are found.
Use it as when upgrading the system software.
ALL_HDF: for downloading in safe mode
Use it to collectively download system software files other than the following:
- BOOT
- DCON
- RCON
Use it when reinstalling the system software as after formatting the HDD.
The foregoing 3 system software files may be downloaded using different steps.

17.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure

0017-8338

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Here, the discussions are in reference to batch downloading in safe mode.
1) Start up the SST.
2) Select the model [1] and the batch download information file [2] ('ALL_HDF').

17-49

Chapter 17

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

Model List

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Select a model to connect

CONNECT
MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

iRC3180

[1]

iRC3180
ALL
ALL_HDF
Single

[2]

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

System Management

c:

START
CANCEL
EXIT

F-17-76

3) Make sure of the network settings, and click [Start Batch Download].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)
Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Batch List
iPR_C1 v1.12 rev.0
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFormat
Job
1.Wait
2.iRC3180_SYSTEM_USenXXXX
3.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX
4.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXjaXXXX
5.iRC3180_RUI_XXenXXXX
6.iRC3180_RUI_XXjaXXXX
7.iRC3180_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX
8.iRC3180_SDICT_XXjaXXXX Not register
9.iRC3180_TTS_XXenXXXX
10.iRC3180_TTS_XXjaXXXX Not register
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcXXXX
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpXXXX
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3180_BOOT_XXxxXXXX
17.iRC3180_DCON_XXxxXXXX

REGISTER

REMOVE

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Model List
Check the interface and click the
<START> button.

iRC3180
iRC3180
ALL
ALL_HDF
Single

CONNECT
R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
System Management

Star t Batch Download

Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

CANCEL

Confirm
Overwrite

EXIT

F-17-77

4) Click [Resume].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)
Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Batch List

REGISTER

REMOVE

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

i R C 3 1 8 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat
Job
1.Wait
2.iRC3180_SYSTEM_USenXXXX
3.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX
4.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXjaXXXX
5.iRC3180_RUI_XXenXXXX
6.iRC3180_RUI_XXjaXXXX
7.iRC3180_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX
8.iRC3180_SDICT_XXjaXXXX Not registered
9.iRC3180_TTS_XXenXXXX
10.iRC3180_TTS_XXjaXXXX Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcXXXX
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpXXXX
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3180_BOOT_XXxxXXXX
17.iRC3180_DCON_XXxxXXXX

Click < RESUME > button to restart

batch download.

Resume
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-78

MEMO:
Refer to the Batch download results screen [1] for the progress of downloading.

17-50

Chapter 17

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Batch List

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

i R C 3 1 8 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat
Job
1.Wait
2.iRC3180_SYSTEM_USenXXXX Not regist
3.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX
4.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXjaXXXX Not reg
5.iRC3180_RUI_XXenXXXX
6.iRC3180_RUI_XXjaXXXX Not registered
7.iRC3180_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX
8.iRC3180_SDICT_XXjaXXXX Not registered
9.iRC3180_TTS_XXenXXXX
10.iRC3180_TTS_XXjaXXXX Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcXXXX
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpXXXX
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3180_BOOT_XXxxXXXX
17.iRC3180_DCON_XXxxXXXX

Processing batch download...

To pause or finish this process,
Click < PAUSE > or < FINISH >
button in 5 seconds.

Results
1.
3.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX_XXenvXXX
5.iRC3180_RUI_XXenXXXX_XXenvXXXX : OK
7.iRC3180_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX_XXxxvXXX
9.iRC3180_TTS_XXenvXXXX : OK

[1]

Resume
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-79

5) The Download End screen appears for the system software files to be stored on the HDD. To stop downloading, click [Finish]; if you want to download BOOT,
DCON, and RCON, on the other hand, click [Resume], and go to the next step.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Batch List

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

i R C 3 1 8 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat
Job
1.Wait
2.iRC3180_SYSTEM_USenXXXX
3.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX
4.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXjaXXXX
5.iRC3180_RUI_XXenXXXX
6.iRC3180_RUI_XXjaXXXX
7.iRC3180_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX
8.iRC3180_SDICT_XXjaXXXX Not registered
9.iRC3180_TTS_XXenXXXX
10.iRC3180_TTS_XXjaXXXX Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcXXXX
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpXXXX
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3180_BOOT_XXxxXXXX
17.iRC3180_DCON_XXxxXXXX

Click < RESUME > button to restart

batch download.

Results
1.
2.iRC3180_SYSTEM_USenvXXXX : OK
3.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX_XXenvXXX
4.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXjaXXXX_XXjavXXXX
5.iRC3380_RUI_XXenXXXX_XXenvXXXX : OK
6.iRC3180_RUI_XXjaXXXX_XXjavXXXX : OK
7.iRC3180_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX_XXxxvXXX
9.iRC3180_TTS_XXenvXXXX : OK
10.iRC3180_TTS_XXjavXXXX : OK
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcvXXXX : OK
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpvXXXX : OK

Resume
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-80

6) Turn off the machine's main power switch, and start it up in normal mode (turn on the main power switch while holding down the 1 and 7 keys; then, start download mode in service mode).
Click [Resume].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Batch List

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

i R C 3 1 8 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat
Job
2.iRC3180_SYSTEM_USenXXXX
3.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX
4.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXjaXXXX
5.iRC3180_RUI_XXenXXXX
6.iRC3180_RUI_XXjaXXXX
7.iRC3180_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX
8.iRC3180_SDICT_XXjaXXXX Not registered
9.iRC3180_TTS_XXenXXXX
10.iRC3180_TTS_XXjaXXXX Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcXXXX
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpXXXX
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3180_BOOT_XXxxXXXX
17.iRC3180_DCON_XXxxXXXX
18.iRC3180_RCON_XXxxXXXX Not register

Click < RESUME > button to restart

batch download.

Results
1.
2.iRC3180_SYSTEM_USenvXXXX : OK
3.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX_XXenvXXX
4.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXjaXXXX_XXjavXXXX
5.iRC3180_RUI_XXenXXXX_XXenvXXXX : OK
6.iRC3180_RUI_XXjaXXXX_XXjavXXXX : OK
7.iRC3180_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX_XXxxvXXX
9.iRC3180_TTS_XXenvXXXX : OK
10.iRC3180_TTS_XXjavXXXX : OK
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcvXXXX : OK
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpvXXXX : OK

Resume
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-81

7) Click [Resume] to start downloading BOOT, DCON, and RCON.

17-51

Chapter 17

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Batch List

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

i R C 3 1 8 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat
Job
2.iRC3180_SYSTEM_USenXXXX
3.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX
4.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXjaXXXX
5.iRC3180_RUI_XXenXXXX
6.iRC3180_RUI_XXjaXXXX
7.iRC3180_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX
8.iRC3180_SDICT_XXjaXXXX Not registered
9.iRC3380_TTS_XXenXXXX
10.iRC3180_TTS_XXjaXXXX Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcXXXX
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpXXXX
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3180_BOOT_XXxxXXXX
17.iRC3180_DCON_XXxxXXXX
18.iRC3180_RCON_XXxxXXXX Not register

Click < RESUME > button to restart

batch download.

Results
1.
2.iRC3180_SYSTEM_USenvXXXX : OK
3.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX_XXenvXXX
4.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXjaXXXX_XXjavXXXX
5.iRC3180_RUI_XXen0101_XXenvXXXX : OK
6.iRC3180_RUI_XXja0101_XXjavXXXX : OK
7.iRC3180_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX_XXxxvXXX
9.iRC3180_TTS_XXenvXXXX : OK
10.iRC3180_TTS_XXjavXXXX : OK
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcvXXXX : OK
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpvXXXX : OK
13.HDD
14.OFF 1+7

Resume
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-82

8) Click [OK].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)

Batch List

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

i R C 3 1 8 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat
Job
2.iPR_C1_SYSTEM_USenXXXX
3.iPR_C1_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX
4.iPR_C1_LANGUAGE_XXjaXXXX
5.iPR_C1_RUI_XXenXXXX
6.iPR_C1_RUI_XXjaXXXX Not registered
7.iPR_C1_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX
8.iPR_C1_SDICT_XXjaXXXX
9.iPR_C1_TTS_XXenXXXX
10.iPR_C1_TTS_XXjaXXXX Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcXXXX
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpXXXX
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iPR_C1_BOOT_XXxxXXXX
17.iPR_C1_DCON_XXxxXXXX
18.iPR_C1_RCON_XXxxXXXX Not registere

All of the batch download

processes have been completed.

Results
1.
3.iRC3180_LANGUAGE_XXenXXXX_XXenvXXX
5.iRC3180_RUI_XXenXXXX_XXenvXXXX : OK
7.iRC3180_MEAPCONT_XXxxXXXX_XXxxvXXX
9.iRC3180_TTS_XXenvXXXX : OK
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcvXXXX : OK
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpvXXXX : OK
13.HDD
14.OFF 1+7
15.
16.iRC3180_BOOT_XXxxXXXX_XXxxvXXXX : O
17.iRC3180_DCON_XXxxXXXX_XXxxvXXXX : O

OK
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-83

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD formatting, and
download the system software once again.

17.4.1.3 Outline
0010-5263

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

You can collectively download various system software files at one time. The groups of system software files that may be downloaded in a batch are identified in
the batch download information file, which is found on the System CD. Copy the file to the SST to enable the batch downloading mechanism.
<Batch Download Information File>
ALL: for downloading in normal mode
Use it to collectively download all system software files that are found.
Use it as when upgrading the system software.
ALL_HDF: for downloading in safe mode
Use it to collectively download system software files other than the following:
- BOOT
- DCON
- RCON
Use it when reinstalling the system software as after formatting the HDD.
The foregoing 3 system software files may be downloaded using different steps.

17.4.1.4 Downloading Procedure

0010-5264

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Here, the discussions are in reference to batch downloading in safe mode.
1) Start up the SST.
2) Select the model [1] ('iRC3170') and the batch download information file [2] ('ALL_HDF').

17-52

Chapter 17

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

CONNECT
MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

Model List
Select a model to connect

iRC3170

[1]

iRC3170
ALL
ALL_HDF
Single

[2]

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

c:

System Management

START
CANCEL
EXIT

F-17-84

17-53

Chapter 17
3) Make sure of the network settings, and click [Start Batch Download].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)
Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Batch List
iRC2570/3170 v 1.12 rev .0
(iRC3170)
Copy /PDL-Boot HDFormat
Job
1.Wait
2.iRC3170_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0112
4.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0107
6.iRC3170_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered
7.iRC3170_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105
8.iRC3170_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered
9.iRC3170_TTS_XXen0111
10.iRC3170_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxc0101
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxp0101
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3170_BOOT_XXxx0103
17.iRC3170_DCON_XXxx0102

REGISTER

REMOVE

CONTROL
C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Model List
Check the interface and click the
< START > button.

iRC3170
iRC3170
ALL
ALL_HDF
Single

CONNECT
R e g is te r F ir mwa re
D e le te F ir mwa re
D e le te B a ck u p D a ta
S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

Star t Batch Download

Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

CANCEL

Confirm
Overwrite

EXIT

F-17-85

4) Click [Resume].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)
Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Batch List

REGISTER

REMOVE

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

Job
1.Wait
2.iRC3170_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0112
4.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0107
6.iRC3170_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered
7.iRC3170_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105
8.iRC3170_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered
9.iRC3170_TTS_XXen0111
10.iRC3170_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxc0101
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxp0101
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3170_BOOT_XXxx0103
17.iRC3170_DCON_XXxx0102

i R C 2 5 7 0 / 3 1 7 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
(iRC3170)
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

Click < RESUME > button to restart

batch download.

Resume
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-86

17-54

Chapter 17

MEMO:
Refer to the Batch Download List screen [1] for the progress of downloading.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Batch List

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

Job
1.Wait
2.iRC3170_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0112
4.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0107
6.iRC3170_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered
7.iRC3170_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105
8.iRC3170_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered
9.iRC3170_TTS_XXen0111
10.iRC3170_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxc0101
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxp0101
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3170_BOOT_XXxx0103
17.iRC3170_DCON_XXxx0102

[1]

i R C 2 5 7 0 / 3 1 7 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
(iRC3170)
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

Results
1.
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0112_XXenv0112
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK

Processing batch download...

To pause or finish this process,
Click < PAUSE > or < FINISH >
button in 5 seconds.

Resume
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-87

5) The Download End screen appears for the system software files to be stored on the HDD. To stop downloading, click [Finish]; if you want to download BOOT,
DCON, and RCON, on the other hand, click [Resume], and go to the next step.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Batch List

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

Job
1.Wait
2.iRC3170_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0112
4.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0107
6.iRC3170_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered
7.iRC3170_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105
8.iRC3170_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered
9.iRC3170_TTS_XXen0111
10.iRC3170_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxc0101
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxp0101
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3170_BOOT_XXxx0103
17.iRC3170_DCON_XXxx0102

i R C 2 5 7 0 / 3 1 7 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
(iRC3170)
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

Click < RESUME > button to restart

batch download.

Results
1.
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK
7.iRC3170_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105
9.iRC3170_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK

Resume
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-88

6) Turn off the machine's main power switch, and start it up in normal mode (turn on the main power switch while holding down the 1 and 7 keys; then, start download mode in service mode).
Click [Resume].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Batch List

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

Job
1.Wait
2.iRC3170_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0112
4.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0107
6.iRC3170_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered
7.iRC3170_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105
8.iRC3170_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered
9.iRC3170_TTS_XXen0111
10.iRC3170_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxc0101
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxp0101
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3170_BOOT_XXxx0103
17.iRC3170_DCON_XXxx0102

i R C 2 5 7 0 / 3 1 7 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
(iRC3170)
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

Click < RESUME > button to restart

batch download.

Results
1.
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK
7.iRC3170_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105
9.iRC3170_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK
13.HDD

Resume
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-89

7) Click [Resume] to start downloading BOOT, DCON, and RCON.

17-55

Chapter 17

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Batch List

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

Job
1.Wait
2.iRC3170_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0112
4.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0107
6.iRC3170_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered
7.iRC3170_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105
8.iRC3170_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered
9.iRC3170_TTS_XXen0111
10.iRC3170_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxc0101
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxp0101
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3170_BOOT_XXxx0103
17.iRC3170_DCON_XXxx0102

i R C 2 5 7 0 / 3 1 7 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
(iRC3170)
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

Click < RESUME > button to restart

batch download.

Resume
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-90

17-56

Results
1.
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK
7.iRC3170_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105
9.iRC3170_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK
13.HDD
14.OFF 1+7

Chapter 17
8) Click [OK].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Batch List

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result
Batch download results

Batch download list

Job
1.Wait
2.iRC3170_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0112
4.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0107
6.iRC3170_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered
7.iRC3170_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105
8.iRC3170_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered
9.iRC3170_TTS_XXen0111
10.iRC3170_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxc0101
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxp0101
13.Wait
14.Wait
15.Wait
16.iRC3170_BOOT_XXxx0103
17.iRC3170_DCON_XXxx0102

i R C 2 5 7 0 / 3 1 7 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0
(iRC3170)
Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

All of the batch download

processes have been completed.

Results
1.
3.iRC3170_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112
5.iRC3170_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK
7.iRC3170_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105
9.iRC3170_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK
11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK
12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK
13.HDD
14.OFF 1+7
15.
16.iRC3170_BOOT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0103 : OK
17.iRC3170_DCON_XXxx0101_XXxxv0102 : OK

OK
Confirm firmware versions
Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm

Pause

Confirm
Overwrite

Finish

F-17-91

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD formatting, and
download the system software once gain.

17.4.2 Downloading the System Software (Single)

17.4.2.1 Downloading Procedure
0017-8339

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
Here is the downloading procedure of the SYSTEM as a sample. (Same for other system software)
1) Start up the SST.
2) Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)
Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

REGISTER

REMOVE

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection

C l i c k t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i c k t h e
< S TA RT > b u t t o n .

[1]

iRC3180
CONNECT
MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

iRC3180
ALL
ALL_HDF
Single

[2]

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

c:

System Management

START
CANCEL
EXIT

F-17-92

3) Select the version of the System software you want to download, and click [Start].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3180
NORMAL
Clear
SelectableFirmware
S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e
d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ]
bu t t o n .

Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USenXXXXn

SelectableFir mware
iRC3180
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
HELP
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
USenvXXXX
TTS
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Hold
JPjaXXXXi

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxxXXXX

Upload Data

DCON
XXxxXXXX
RUI

Download Data

XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
MEAPCONT

Restore Backup System

XXxxXXXX
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
BOOTROM
XXxxXXXXC
G3FAX

Start

XXxxXXXX

Cancel
Return to Main Menu

F-17-93

4) When downloading has ended, click [OK] to go back to the previous screen.

17-57

Chapter 17

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)

172.16.1.100
iRC3180
NORMAL
Clear
SelectableFirmware

Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

D ow n l o a d i n g c o m p l e t e

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USenXXXXn

SelectableFir mware

Hold
USenXXXXi

iRC3180
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
HELP
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
USenvXXXX
TSTMP
TTS
WebDAV
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxxXXXX
DCON

Upload Data

XXxxXXXX
RUI
XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
MEAPCONT

Download Data
Restore Backup System

XXxxXXXX
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
BOOTROM
XXxxXXXXC
G3FAX

XXxxXXXX

Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-94

5) Start up the machine. The subsequent procedure differs depending on the download mode.
If the machine is in normal mode,
5-1) Click [Shutdown].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.334E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3180
NORMAL
Clear
SelectableFirmware
S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e
d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ]
bu t t o n .

Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USenXXXXn

SelectableFir mware

Hold
USenXXXXi

iRC3180
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
HELP
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
TSTMP
TTS
WebDAV
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxxXXXX

Upload Data

DCON
XXxxXXXX
RUI

Download Data

XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
MEAPCONT

Restore Backup System

XXxxXXXX
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
BOOTROM
XXxxXXXXC
G3FAX

Start

XXxxXXXX

Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-95

5-2) Click [Start Shutdown] so that the machine starts the shut-down sequence.
Message

Have you finished downloading and want to

star t shutdown sequence for restar ting
machine ?

Start Shutdown
Cancel

F-17-96

5-3) Click [OK], and turn off and then back on the machine's main power switch.
Message

Follow the instructions shown on the machine

for shutdown process.
Click [OK] button to return to Main Menu.

F-17-97

If the machine is in safe mode,

5-1) Turn off and then back on the machine's main power switch.
6) When the machine starts up, it will write the system software to its HDD and flash ROM while showing the progress of writing on the control panel screen. When
done, it will indicate a message asking you to turn off and then back on the power. In response, turn off and then back on the main power.

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD
formatting, and download the system software once again.

17-58

Chapter 17

MEMO:
You can remove the downloaded system software before it is written to the HDD or flash ROM. To do so, go through the following before restarting the machine:
1) Click [Clear] [1].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3180
NORMAL
Clear
SelectableFirmware
D ow n l o a d i n g c o m p l e t e

Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

[1]

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USenXXXXn

SelectableFir mware

Hold
USenXXXXi

iRC3180
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
HELP
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
TSTMP
TTS
WebDAV
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxxXXXX
DCON

Upload Data

XXxxXXXX
RUI
XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
MEAPCONT

Download Data
Restore Backup System

XXxxXXXX
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
BOOTROM
XXxxXXXXC

Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-98

2) Click [Execute Clear] so that the system software that has been stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD will be removed.
Message

Do you want to clear whole firmware

downloaded to the machine?

Execute Clear
Cancel

F-17-99

3) Click [OK]. Return to the previous page.

Message

The downloaded firmware has been deleted.

F-17-100

MEMO:
After connecting, the following device information [1] is displayed on the right upper area of the SST screen.
- IP address
- Product name
- Download mode
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3180
NORMAL

[1]

Clear
SelectableFirmware
Select the fir mware to be
downloaded. then click the [Star t]
button.

Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USenXXXXn

SelectableFirmware
iRC3180
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
HELP
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
TSTMP
TTS
WebDAV
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Hold
USenXXXXi

D ow n l o a d F i r m wa r e

RCON
XXxxXXXX

Upload Data

DCON
XXxxXXXX
RUI

D ow n l o a d D a t a
R e s t o r e B a ck u p S y s t e m
Fo r m a t H D D

XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
MEAPCONT
XXxxXXXX
LANGUAGE
XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
BOOTROM
XXxxXXXXC

Star t
Shutdown
Retur n to Main Menu

F-17-101

17-59

Chapter 17

17.4.3 Downloading the System Software

17.4.3.1 Outline
0001-1623

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
iRC3100

PC for service

SST
Main controller block

iRC3100
System
(System-Main)
(System-Sub)
(ICC Profile)

HDD
Download
BOOTDEV

iRC3100N

(System-Main)
(System-Sub)
(ICC Profile)

System
(System-Main)
(System-Sub)
(ICC Profile)
F-17-102

The system software comes in 3 types.

In the case of Japan, appropriate model must be selected with reference to the presence/absence of support for NetWare.
T-17-8

Country

SST installation model

NetWare

Remarks

100V

iRC3100

Not supported

Installed at time of shipment to iRC3100 (100V)

iRC3100N

Supported

Installed at time of shipment to iRC3100F(100V)/

3100N(100V)/3100i(100V)

iRC3100

Supported

Installed at time of shipment to iR3100 (120/

230V)/3100N(120/230V)

120/230V

The machine's System software consists of multiple files.

The SST handles these files in group, and transfers them in succession at time of downloading.
T-17-9
Notation

Function

System-Main

Program for main CPU

System-Sub

Program for sub CPU

ICC Profile

color correction information file for PDL functions

17.4.3.2 Outline
0009-9861

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The system software comes in 2 types (one for use inside Japan and the other, outside Japan).

17-60

Chapter 17

17.4.3.3 Downloading Procedure

0001-1626

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[Makin Checks in Advance (only in Japan)]
-Chcek the type of system software installed to the machine (support/non-support of NetWare) in service mode.
COPIER> DISPLAY> ACC-STS> NETWARE
1: Netware supported
0: Netware not supported
-Select the type of system software to download using the name of the model in SST.
Name of model iRC3100: NetWare not supported
iRC3100N: NetWare supported
[Procedure]
1) Click [To Next] under Downloading/Uploading.

F-17-103

2) Select the SYSTEM of the iRC3100, and click [Connect].

(In Japan and if NetWare is supported, be sure to select the SYSTEM of the iRC3100N.)

F-17-104

3) Click [Set host name].

17-61

Chapter 17

F-17-105

4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click [OK].

F-17-106

5) Click [OK] to start connection.

17-62

Chapter 17

F-17-107

6) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click [OK].

F-17-108

7) Click [System Software Download].

17-63

Chapter 17

F-17-109

8) Select the version to download, and click [Start].

F-17-110

9) When the results of the downloading are indicated, and click [OK].

17-64

Chapter 17

F-17-111

10) Click [To Unit Selection Screen].

Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown.
Otherwise writing to the HDD will be suspended, preventing the machine to start up.

F-17-112

If the machine fails to start up, execute foramtting BOOTDEV using HDForamt and download the following:
System, Language, RUI

17.4.3.4 Downloading Procedure

0009-9898

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Start up the SST.
2) Select the model [1] ('iRC3170') and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].

17-65

Chapter 17

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

REGISTER

REMOVE

CONTROL
C l i c k a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection

C l i ck t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i ck t h e
< S TA RT > bu t t o n .

[1]

iRC3170
CONNECT
MFP

Re g is te r F ir mwa re

iRC3170
ALL
ALL_HDF
Single

[2]

USB

De le te F ir mwa re
D ele te B a ck u p D a ta
USB

c:

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

START
CANCEL
EXIT

F-17-113

3) Select the version of the System software you want to download, and click [Start].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3170
NORMAL
Clear
SelectableFirmware
Selec t the fir mware to be
downloaded. then c lick the [Star t]
button.

Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USen01 02n

SelectableFir mware
iRC3170
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
USenv0112
TTS
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Hold
USen01 02i

Download Firmware

XXxx3003

Upload Data

DCON
XXxx0101
RUI

Download Data

XXja0101
XXen0101
MEAPCONT

Restore Backup System

XXxx0102
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXja0102
XXen0102
BOOTROM
XXxx0102C
G3FAX

Start
Cancel
Return to Main Menu

F-17-114

17-66

RCON

XXxx6101

Chapter 17
4) When downloading has ended, click [OK] to go back to the previous screen.
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3170
NORMAL
Clear
SelectableFirmware

Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

Downloading c omplete

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USen01 02n

SelectableFir mware

Hold
USen01 02i

iRC3170
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
USenv0112
TTS
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxx3003
DCON

Upload Data

XXxx0101
RUI
XXja0101
XXen0101
MEAPCONT

Download Data
Restore Backup System

XXxx0102
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXja0102
XXen0102
BOOTROM
XXxx0102C
G3FAX

XXxx6101

Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-115

5) Start up the machine. The subsequent procedure differs depending on the download mode.
If the machine is in normal mode,
5-1) Click [Shutdown].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3170
NORMAL
Clear
SelectableFirmware
Selec t the fir mware to be
downloaded. then c lick the [Star t]
button.

Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USen01 02n

SelectableFir mware

Hold
USen01 02i

iRC3170
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
USenv0112
TTS
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxx3003

Upload Data

DCON
XXxx0101
RUI

Download Data

XXja0101
XXen0101
MEAPCONT

Restore Backup System

XXxx0102
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXja0102
XXen0102
BOOTROM
XXxx0102C
G3FAX

Start

XXxx6101

Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-116

5-2) Click [Start Shutdown] so that the machine starts the shut-down sequence.
Message

Have you finished downloading and want to

star t shutdown sequence for restar ting
machine ?

Start Shutdown
Cancel

F-17-117

5-3) Click [OK], and turn off and then back on the machine's main power switch.
Message

Follow the instructions shown on the machine

for shutdown process.
Click [OK] button to return to Main Menu.

F-17-118

If the machine is in safe mode,

5-1) Turn off and then back on the machine's main power switch.
6) When the machine starts up, it will write the system software to its HDD and flash ROM while showing the progress of writing on the control panel screen. When
done, it will indicate a message asking you to turn off and then back on the power. In response, turn off and then back on the main power.

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD

17-67

Chapter 17
formatting, and download the system software once again.

17-68

Chapter 17

MEMO:
You can remove the downloaded system software before it is written to the HDD or flash ROM. To do so, go through the following before restarting the machine:
1) Click [Clear] [1].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3170
NORMAL
Clear
SelectableFirmware
Downloading c omplete

Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

[1]

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USen01 02n

SelectableFir mware

Hold
USen01 02i

iRC3170
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
TTS
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxx3003
DCON

Upload Data

XXxx0101
RUI
XXja0101
XXen0101
MEAPCONT

Download Data
Restore Backup System

XXxx0102
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXja0102
XXen0102
BOOTROM
XXxx0102C
G3FAX

XXxx6101

Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-119

2) Click [Execute Clear] so that the system software that has been stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD will be removed.
Message

Do you want to clear whole firmware

downloaded to the machine?

Execute Clear
Cancel

F-17-120

3) Click [OK].
Message

The downloaded firmware has been deleted.

F-17-121

MEMO:
When a connection is made, the upper right area of the SST screen will indicate the following device information [1]:
- IP address
- product name
- download mode
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3170
NORMAL

[1]

Clear
SelectableFirmware
Select the fir mware to be
d o w n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ]
bu t t o n .

Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USen01 02n

SelectableFirmware
iRC3170
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
TTS
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Hold
USen01 02i

Download Fir mware

RCON
XXxx3003

Upload Data

DCON
XXxx0101
RUI

Download Data
Restore Backup System
For mat HDD

Star t

XXja0101
XXen0101
MEAPCONT
XXxx0102
LANGUAGE
XXja0102
XXen0102
BOOTROM
XXxx0102C
G3FAX
XXxx6101

Shutdown
Retur n to Main Menu

F-17-122

17.4.4 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module

17.4.4.1 Outline
0001-1648

iR C3100 / iR C3100N

17-69

Chapter 17

iR XXXX

Network
LCD

RUI(en)
Version
check

System
RUI(it)

System Language

Language-XXen

RUI-XXen

Language-XXit

RUI-XXit

Language-XXja

RUI-XXja

Language

RUI(ja)

RUI

Network PC

F-17-123
T-17-10
Language used on control panel LCD

Check the versions of system software and language files.

1) if the versions are correct
Selections may be made in Additional Function;
Common settings>Language Switch

2) if the versions are not correct

'E744' will be indicated.
Turn off and then on the main power switch so that the
system language will be used.

T-17-11
Language used in RUI
Select on the RUI.
A specific language may be selected for a specific PC.

17-70

<Language Code>

<Language>

de

German

en

English

fr

French

it

Italian

Chapter 17
Language used in RUI
ja

Japanese

PC for service

iR XXXX

SST
Main controller block

iR XXXX

HDD

Language
XXen
XXja

Download

BOOTDEV
Language-XXen
Language-XXja

RUI
XXen
XXja

RUI-XXen
RUI-XXja
F-17-124

17.4.4.2 Outline
0009-9868

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

iRC ----

Network
LCD

RUI(en)

Version check

System
RUI(it)

System Language

Language-XXen

RUI-XXen

Language-XXit

RUI-XXit

Language-XXja

RUI-XXja

Language

RUI(ja)

RUI

Network PC

F-17-125
Control Panel LCD Display Language
Check the version of System and Language.
1. If correct, You can switch languages by making the following selections in user mode: common
settings>display language change.
2. If not correct, 'E744' will be indicated, and System Language will be used when the main power is turned
off and then on.

17-71

Chapter 17

RUI Display Language

Select using the RUI.
You can select a different language for a different PC.

<Language Code>

<Language>

de

German

en

English

fr

French

it

Italian

ja

Japanese

iRC ----

PC for service

SST
Main controller block

iRC ---Language
XXen
XXja

HDD
Download

BOOTDEV
Language-XXen
Language-XXja

RUI
XXen
XXja

RUI-XXen
RUI-XXja
F-17-126

17.4.4.3 Downloading Procedure

0001-1650

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[Procedure]
Downloading may take place when the machine is in normal or in safe mode.
Both Language and RUI files mey be downloaded in common among models.
(here,the iRC3100 is selected)
[describes downloading of the Language]
1) Click [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.

17-72

Chapter 17

F-17-127

2) Select [Language] for the iRC3100, and click [Connect].

F-17-128

3) Click [Set host name].

17-73

Chapter 17

F-17-129

4) The machiine's IP address is entered automatically; click [OK].

F-17-130

5) Click [OK] to start conncection.

17-74

Chapter 17

F-17-131

6) When the machine has made a connection and bring up the following screen, click [OK].

F-17-132

7) Click [Language Download].

17-75

Chapter 17

F-17-133

8) Select the version to download, and click [Start].

F-17-134

9) When the results of the downloading are indicated. click [OK].

17-76

Chapter 17

F-17-135

10) Click [To Unit Selection Screen].

Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown.
Otherwise writing to the HDD will be suspended, preventing the machine to start up.

F-17-136

If the machine fails to start up, execute foramtting BOOTDEV using HDForamt and download the following:
System, Language, RUI

17.4.4.4 Downloading Procedure

0009-9901

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Select the Language file or the RUI version to download.
2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD
formatting, and download the system software once again.

17-77

Chapter 17

17.4.5 Downloading the SDICT

17.4.5.1 Outline
0009-9890

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The file SDICT is a dictionary file used to convert image data read by the reader unit into appropriate character code (OCR processing). The SDICT data is used
in common among all iR color controllers, and is stored under 'iRCXXXX' in the SST. Its functions are used by the PDF generation function extension kit.

17.4.5.2 Downloading Procedure

0009-9905

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Select the version of the SDICT file to download.
2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD
formatting, and download the system software once again.

17.4.6 Downloading the MEAPCONT

17.4.6.1 Outline
0009-9891

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

MEAPCONT is a standard library used in conjunction with a MEAP application.

17.4.6.2 Downloading Procedure

0009-9910

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Select the version of MEAPCONT to download.
2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD
formatting, and download the system software once again.

17.4.7 Downloading the KEY

17.4.7.1 Outline
0009-9892

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The file KEY is a certificate and a key used for encrypted communications over the network. The KEY data is used in common among new iR color controllers,
and is stored in "iRCXXXX" on the SST.

The file KEY is either of 2 types: XXxc and XXxp. Be sure to download both types.

17.4.7.2 Downloading Procedure

0009-9913

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Select the version of the KEY file to download.
2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD
formatting, and download the system software once again.

17.4.8 Downloading the TTS

17.4.8.1 Outline
0009-9893

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

TTS is voice dictionary data when the voice guidance board is installed.

17.4.8.2 Downloading Procedure

0009-9911

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Select the version of the TTS file to download.
2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"

17-78

Chapter 17

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD
formatting, and download the system software once again.

17.4.9 Downloading the BROWSER

17.4.9.1 Outline
0010-2245

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The file BROWSER contains data used for indications on the Web browser, which is an optional function.

17.4.9.2 Downloading Procedure

0010-2246

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Select the version of the BROWSER file to download.
2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD
formatting, and download the system software once again.

17-79

Chapter 17

17.4.10 Downloading the BOOT Software

17.4.10.1 Outline
0001-1652

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The boot ROM differs according to the machine's functions:
T-17-12

Boot ROM type

Service mode indication

Country

Machine function

Copy

xx.yyC

Worldwide

Copy

LIPS

xx.yyL

Japan

Copy+LIPS

PSPCL

xx.yyN

Outside Japan

Copy+PSPCL

PC for service

Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)

Select a function suited to

the tpe of boot ROM.
iRC3100

may be upgraded by
DIMM replacement

SST
Japan
iRC3100
Boot (COPY)
iRC3100L
Boot (LIPS)

Download

Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)

Outside Japan
iRC3100
Boot (COPY)
iRC3100N

Only if boot of same type

Main controller block

Boot (PSPCL)

F-17-137

-If you fail to downloading files, you must replace the boot ROM.
-You are not required to check the type of boot ROM mounted to the machine when downloading.

17.4.10.2 Outline
0009-9870

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The file BOOT is used in common among various types of boot ROMs, and it is not possible to change the type of a boot ROM through downloading.

17-80

Chapter 17

PC for service

Boot ROM
iRC ----

(Flash ROM DIMM)

may be upgraded by
DIMM replacement

C Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)

SST

iRC ----

P Boot ROM

Download
Boot

(Flash ROM DIMM)

(100V machine only)

N Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)

(other than 100V machine)

Main controller block

F-17-138

17.4.10.3 Downloading Procedure

0001-1657

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
Downloading may take place in normal mode (1+7 on keypad) or in safe mode (2+8 on keypad).
1) Click [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.

F-17-139

2) Select [BOOT] for the iRC3100 (if a LIPS model, select iRC3100L), and click [Connect].

17-81

Chapter 17

F-17-140

3) Click [Set host name].

F-17-141

4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click [OK].

17-82

Chapter 17

F-17-142

5) Click [OK] to start connection.

F-17-143

6) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click [OK].

17-83

Chapter 17

F-17-144

If the wrong type of boot ROM has been selected, the following screen will appear; select the correct model:

F-17-145

7) Click [BootROM Download].

17-84

Chapter 17

F-17-146

8) Select the version to download, and click [Start].

F-17-147

9) When the results of the downloading are indicated, and click [OK].

17-85

Chapter 17

F-17-148

10) Click [To Unit Selection Screen].

[after Downloading]
When you upgrade the boot ROM, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch so that the new version will be validated.

Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown.
Otherwise writing to the HDD will be suspended, preventing the machine to start up.

F-17-149

If the machine fails to start up, replace the boot ROM.

17.4.10.4 Downloading Procedure

0009-9914

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

1) Select the version of the BOOT file to download.
2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"

17-86

Chapter 17
Turning Off the Power
Do not turn off the power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine can fail to start up. If such is the case, replace the DIMM ROM.

17-87

Chapter 17

17.4.11 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software

17.4.11.1 Outline
0001-1660

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The DC controller/Reader controller files are downloaded by way of the main controller block.

Both DC controller PCB and the Reader controller PCB are wquipped with booy ROMs, permitting retries if downloading fails.
iR XXXX
PC for service

SST

Reader unit

Printer unit

Flash ROM
iR XXXX
Dcon
Rcon

Signal cable

Download

Main controller
block

Downloading
possible only
in normal mode

CPU
Boot ROM
Reader controller PCB

Power cable
Flash ROM

CPU
Boot ROM

Power supply
controller signal

Power supply
unit

DC controller PCB

F-17-150

Unless the DC controller has started up normally, not permitting downloading of Reader controller files.
(Because the power supply control signal will not be validated, not supplying the reader unit with power.)

17.4.11.2 Outline
0009-9872

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The file DCON/RCON is downloaded by way of the main controller block.

The machine has a separate boot ROM so that downloading may be tried multiple times following a failed downloading attempt for the DC controller PCB/reader
controller PCB.

17-88

Chapter 17

iRC ---PC for service

SST

Reader unit

Printer unit

Flash ROM
iRC ----

Download

Main controller
block

Dcon

Signal cable

CPU
Boot ROM

Rcon

Reader controller PCB

Power cable
Flash ROM

CPU
Boot ROM

Power supply
control sugnal

Power supply
unit

DC controller PCB

F-17-151

You will not be able to download the RCON file unless the DC controller has started up normally (as the power control signal would remain disabled, and the reader
unit will not be supplied with power).

17-89

Chapter 17

17.4.11.3 Downloading Procedure

0001-1662

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[Making Checks in Advance]

Power cable for Reader

Signal cable

No error code must be indicated.

In the case of downloading Rcon files,
the version of DC-CON must be indicated
in service mode.
F-17-152

[Procedure]
The following describes downloading of DC controller files.
Both DC controller and Reader controller files are common among models.
1) Click [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.

F-17-153

2) Select [DCON], and click [Connect].

17-90

Chapter 17

F-17-154

3) Click [Set host name].

F-17-155

4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click [OK].

17-91

Chapter 17

F-17-156

5) Click [OK] to start connection.

F-17-157

6) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click [OK].

17-92

Chapter 17

F-17-158

7) Click [DCON Download].

F-17-159

8) Select the version to download, and click [Start].

17-93

Chapter 17

F-17-160

9) When the results of the downloading are indicated, and click [OK].

F-17-161

10) Click [To Unit Selection Screen].

[after Downloading]
When you have downloaded DC controller or Reader controller files, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch.
You cannot download the DC controller and Reader controller files in succession.

Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown.
Otherwise, writing to `DCON/RCON' can fail, indicated by the error code.
DCON: E733
RCON: E732

17-94

Chapter 17

F-17-162

If an error code is indicated, be sure to download the appropriate system software.

17.4.11.4 Downloading Procedure

0009-9915

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Here, downloading may take place in either normal mode or safe mode. Safe mode, however, will not permit collection of version information so that the DCON/
RCON file installed to the SST will necessarily be overwritten, creating a possibility of downgrading. The use of normal mode, therefore, is recommended.
1) Select the version of the DCON or RCON file to download. (In the case of RCON, select the file in 'iRC3100'.)
2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD
formatting, and download the system software once again.

17.4.12 Downloading the FAX Software

17.4.12.1 Outline
0001-1664

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The G3fax files are downloaded by way of the main controller block.
PC for service

iR XXXX
G3Fax
(Flash ROM DIMM)

Upgrading may be
by DIMM replacement

SST

iR XXXX

Downloading

G3Fax
CPU

(Flash ROM DIMM)

G3Fax
Main controller
block

G3Fax Board

Downloading possible
only in normal mode
F-17-163

17-95

Chapter 17

If downloading fails, the flash ROM DIMM must be replaced.

17.4.12.2 Downloading Procedure

0001-1665

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[Procedure]
Use normal mode for downloading.
1) Click [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.

F-17-164

2) Select [G3FAX], and click [Connect].

F-17-165

3) Click [Set host name].

17-96

Chapter 17

F-17-166

4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click [OK].

F-17-167

5) Click [OK] to start connection.

17-97

Chapter 17

F-17-168

6) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click [OK].

F-17-169

7) Click [G3FAX Download].

17-98

Chapter 17

F-17-170

8) Select the version to download, and click [Start].

F-17-171

9) When the results of the downloading are indicated, and click [OK].

17-99

Chapter 17

F-17-172

10) Click [To Unit Selection Screen].

[after Downloading]
When you have downloaded G3FAX filess, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch.

You cannnot download G3FAX files twice in succession.

(Once downloading ends, the G3FAX board will be reset, leaving download mode.)
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown.
Writing to the flash ROM DIMM of the G3 fax board will fail, preventing the G3FAX board functions from operating normally.

F-17-173

If the G3fax board fails to operate, be sure to replace the flash ROM DIMM onthe G3fax board.

17.4.12.3 Outline
0010-0083

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Downloading the system software for a multiport fax board (2-line) is by way of the main controller block.

17-100

Chapter 17

Service PC

iRC ---G3Fax
(Flash ROM DIMM)

Upgrading is also possible

by replacing the DIMM.

SST
Download

G3Fax

iRC ---CPU

(Flash ROM DIMM)

G3Fax
Main controller
unit

Multi Port Fax Board (2-line)

Downloading is possible only in normal mode.

F-17-174

17-101

Chapter 17

17.4.12.4 Downloading Procedure

0010-0084

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The machine must be in normal mode when downloading G3FAX.

1) Select the version of G3FAX to download.
2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the fax board can fail to start up. If the fax board fails to start up, replace
its DIMM ROM.
MEMO:
You will not be able to download G3FAX twice in succession. (Once downloading takes place, the board will be reset to end download mode.)

17.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data

17.5.1 Outline
0001-1666

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
The machine's backup data is stored on the SRAM, DC controller PCB, and Reader controller PCB.
Any backup data is selected with reference to its file name used when uploading it.
T-17-13

Backup data

File name selected at time of uploading

DC controller PCB

SramDCON.bin

Reder controller PCB

SramRCON.bin

For R&D

Sublog.txt

- Be sure not to download or upload the [Sublog.txt] in the field.

- When replacing the DC controller PCB or the Reder controller PCB, it is a good idea to upload its data in advance, and download it after replacement so that parts
counter reading and the like may be retained.

Reader unit

Reader controller PCB

PC for service

EEPROM

SST
iR XXXX
System

CPU

SramRCON.bin

Printer unit
Upload / download
Main controller PCB
(main)

Possible only in normal mode

Sublog.txt
SramDCON
SramRCON

Sub controller PCB

CPU

SRAM

CPU

SramDCON.bina

DC controller PCB

F-17-175

17-102

Main controller block

Chapter 17

17.5.2 Outline
0009-9876

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

The file MeapBack is a MEAP application and its data stored on the HDD.
The file SramDCON is data stored in the SRAM of the DC controller PCB.
The file SramRCON is data stored in the EEPROM of the reader controller PCB.
Backup data

File to select for downloading

For R&D

SramImg.bin (do not select this file)

MEAP application

MeapBack.bin (may be uploaded/downloaded in safe mode)

For R&D

Sublog.txt (do not select this file)

Reader controller PCB backup

SramRCON (may be uploaded/downloaded in normal mode)

DC controller PCB backup

SramDCON (may be uploaded/downloaded in normal mode)

MEMO:
- If you are planning to replace the HDD or execute ALL or APL_MEAP formatting, it will be a good idea to upload the MeapBack file in advance and then download after the work by way of temporarily keeping away the MEAP application.
- If you are planning to replace the DC controller PCB, you can upload the SramDCON file in advance, and download it after replacement so that the service mode
and other settings may be inherited.
- If you are planning to replace the DC controller PCB, you can upload the SramDCON file in advance, and download it after replacement so that the service mode
and other settings may be inherited.

17.5.3 Uploading Procedure

0009-9878

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

- When uploading the data, do not select 'SramImg.bin' or 'Sublog.txt'.

- The machine must be in normal mode for uploading/downloading SramDCON or SramRCON.
- The machine must be in safe mode when uploading/downloading MeapBack.
[In the Case of MeapBack]
1) Start up the SST.
2) Select the model [1] ('iRC3170') and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)
Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

REGISTER

REMOVE

CONTROL
C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection

C l i ck t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i ck t h e
< S TA RT > bu t t o n .

iRC3170
CONNECT
MFP

R e g is te r F ir mwa re

iRC3170
ALL
ALL_HDF
Single

[1]
[2]

USB

D e le te F ir mwa re
D e le te B a ck u p D a ta
USB

c:

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

START
CANCEL
EXIT

F-17-176

3) Click [Upload Data].

17-103

Chapter 17

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)

172.16.1.100
iRC3170
SAFE
Clear
SelectableFirmware
Selec t the fir mware to be
downloaded. then c lick the [Star t]
button.

Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USen01 02n

SelectableFir mware
iRC3170
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
TTS
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Hold
USen01 02i

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxx3003

Upload Data

DCON
XXxx0101
RUI

Download Data

XXja0101
XXen0101
MEAPCONT

Restore Backup System

XXxx0102
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXja0102
XXen0102
BOOTROM
XXxx0102C
G3FAX

Start
Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-177

17-104

XXxx6101

Chapter 17
4) Select 'MeapBack.bin', and click [Start].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3170
SAFE
Clear
FileSave

Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

SelectableDate
Select the data to be uploaded.
then click the [Start] button.

File Name
SramImg.bin
MeapBack.bin
Sublog.txt

Download Firmware
Memo

Upload Data
Download Data

backup of meap

Restore Backup System

c:

Format HDD

Start
Cansel
Return to Main Menu

F-17-178

5) Type in the name of the file to store and, as necessary, a brief description; then, click [Save].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3170
SAFE
Clear
FileSave
Enter desired file name. then click
the [Save] button.

Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

File Name
MeapBack.bin

Download Firmware

Memo
Memo

SelectableDate
Uploading complete

SramImg.bin
MeapBack.bin
Sublog.txt

Upload Data
Download Data

backup of meap

Restore Backup System

c:

Format HDD

Save
Discard
Return to Main Menu

F-17-179

6) Click [OK].

17-105

Chapter 17

The file SramRCON, SramDCON, or MeapBack may only be downloaded to their source machine.

Reader controller PCB

Service PC

EEPROM

SST
iRC ----

Printer unit

System

Uploading/Downloading
Main controller PCB

Meapback (safe mode only)

SramRCON (normal mode only)
SramDCON (normal mode only)

DC controller PCB
HDD
SRAM

Meapback.bin

Main controller unit

F-17-180

17-106

Chapter 17

17.5.4 Downloading Procedure

0009-9879

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

- The machine must be in normal mode for uploading/downloading the file SramDCON or SramRCON.
- The machine must be in safe mode for uploading/downloading the file MeapBack.
[In the Case of MeapBack]
1) Start up the SST.
2) Select the model [1] ('iRC3170') and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)
Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

REGISTER

REMOVE

CONTROL
C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection

C l i ck t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i ck t h e
< S TA RT > bu t t o n .

[1]

iRC3170
CONNECT
MFP

R e g is te r F ir mwa re

iRC3170
ALL
ALL_HDF
Single

[2]

USB

D e le te F ir mwa re
D e le te B a ck u p D a ta
USB

c:

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

START
CANCEL
EXIT

F-17-181

3) Click [Download Data].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3170
SAFE
Clear
SelectableFirmware
Selec t the fir mware to be
downloaded. then c lick the [Star t]
button.

Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USen01 02n

SelectableFir mware
iRC3170
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
TTS
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Hold
USen01 02i

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxx3003

Upload Data

DCON
XXxx0101
RUI

Download Data

XXja0101
XXen0101
MEAPCONT

Restore Backup System

XXxx0102
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXja0102
XXen0102
BOOTROM
XXxx0102C
G3FAX

Start

XXxx6101

Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-182

4) Select the data to download, and click [Start].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3170
SAFE
Clear
SelectableFile
Selec t the file to be downloaded.
then c lick the [Star t] button.

c:

Control
C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e
exe c u t e d .

DownloadedFile

Download Firmware
Upload Data

MeapBack.bin.upd

Download Data
Restore Backup System
Format HDD

Start

Series:iRC2570
Serial No:F641G002
DataType:backup of meap
Date:2005/04/18 20:13:33
Memo:Memo

Cansel
Return to Main Menu

F-17-183

5) When downloading has ended, click [OK] to return to the previous screen.

17.5.5 Outline
0017-8340

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

17-107

Chapter 17

The file MeapBack is a MEAP application and its data stored on the HDD.
The file SramDCON is data stored in the SRAM of the DC controller PCB.
The file SramRCON is data stored in the EEPROM of the reader controller PCB.
T-17-14
Backup data

File to select for downloading

For R&D

SramImg.bin (do not select this file)

MEAP application

MeapBack.bin (may be uploaded/downloaded in safe mode)

For R&D

Sublog.txt (do not select this file)

Reader controller PCB backup

SramRCON (may be uploaded/downloaded in normal mode)

DC controller PCB backup

SramDCON (may be uploaded/downloaded in normal mode)

Points to Note When Uploading/Downloading MeapBack

If you need to re-install the system software to correct a fault, you may upload MeapBack and then download it back after formatting the HDD (by temporarily
putting aside the MEAP application).
1) Upload MeapBack.
2) Execute HDD all format.
3) Re-install the system software.
At this time, be sure that the system software is the same as that existed before formatting the HDD. Otherwise, you will not be able to download MeapBack
you have uploaded.
4) Download MeapBack.
You will not be able to download MeapBack you have uploaded unless you are downloading it to the machine you have uploaded it from.
MEMO:
- If you are planning to replace the HDD or execute ALL or APL_MEAP formatting, it will be a good idea to upload the MeapBack file in advance and then
download after the work by way of temporarily keeping away the MEAP application.
- If you are planning to replace the Reader controller PCB, you can upload the SramRCON file in advance, and download it after replacement so that the service
mode and other settings may be inherited.
- If you are planning to replace the DC controller PCB, you can upload the SramDCON file in advance, and download it after replacement so that the service mode
and other settings may be inherited.

17.5.6 Uploading Procedure

0017-8341

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- When uploading the data, do not select 'SramImg.bin' or 'Sublog.txt'.

- The machine must be in normal mode for uploading/downloading SramDCON or SramRCON.
- The machine must be in safe mode when uploading/downloading MeapBack.
[In the Case of MeapBack]
1) Start up the SST.
2) Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)
Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

REGISTER

REMOVE

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection

C l i c k t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i c k t h e
< S TA RT > b u t t o n .

iRC3180
CONNECT
MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

c:

System Management

START
CANCEL
EXIT

F-17-184

3) Click [Upload Data].

17-108

[1]

iRC3180
ALL
ALL_HDF
Single

[2]

Chapter 17

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)

172.16.1.100
iRC3180
SAFE
Clear
SelectableFirmware
S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e
d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ]
bu t t o n .

Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USenXXXXn

SelectableFir mware
iRC3180
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
HELP
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
TSTMP
TTS
WebDAV
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Hold
USenXXXXi

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxxXXXX
DCON

Upload Data

XXxxXXXX
RUI
XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
MEAPCONT

Download Data
Restore Backup System

XXxxXXXX
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
BOOTROM
XXxxXXXXC

Start
Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-185

4) Select 'MeapBack.bin', and click [Start].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3180
SAFE
Clear
FileSave

Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

SelectableDate
Select the data to be uploaded.
then click the [Start] button.

File Name
SramImg.bin
MeapBack.bin
Sublog.txt

Download Firmware
Memo

Upload Data
Download Data

backup of meap

Restore Backup System

c:

Format HDD

Start
Cansel
Return to Main Menu

F-17-186

5) Type in the name of the file to store and, as necessary, a brief description; then, click [Save].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3180
SAFE
Clear
FileSave
Enter desired file name. then click
the [Save] button.

Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

File Name
MeapBack.bin

Download Firmware

Memo
Memo

SelectableDate
Uploading complete

SramImg.bin
MeapBack.bin
Sublog.txt

Upload Data
Download Data

backup of meap

Restore Backup System

c:

Format HDD

Save
Discard
Return to Main Menu

F-17-187

6) Click [OK].

The file SramRCON, SramDCON, or MeapBack may only be downloaded to their source machine.

17-109

Chapter 17

Reader controller PCB

Service PC

EEPROM

SST
iRC ----

Printer unit
Uploading/Downloading

System

Main controller PCB

Meapback (safe mode only)

SramRCON (normal mode only)
SramDCON (normal mode only)

DC controller PCB
HDD
Meapback.bin

SRAM

Main controller unit

F-17-188

17.5.7 Downloading Procedure

0017-8342

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

- The machine must be in normal mode for uploading/downloading the file SramDCON or SramRCON.
- The machine must be in safe mode for uploading/downloading the file MeapBack.
[In the Case of MeapBack]
1) Start up the SST.
2) Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.34E)
Interface
Network
IP Address
172.16.1.100
Target Selection
Select the target.
MFP

REGISTER

REMOVE

CONTROL
C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection

C l i c k t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i c k t h e
< S TA RT > b u t t o n .

iRC3180
CONNECT
MFP

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e

USB

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e
D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB

c:

System Management

START
CANCEL
EXIT

F-17-189

3) Click [Download Data].

17-110

[1]

iRC3180
ALL
ALL_HDF
Single

[2]

Chapter 17

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)

172.16.1.100
iRC3180
SAFE
Clear
SelectableFirmware
S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e
d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ]
bu t t o n .

Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version
SYSTEM
Active
USenXXXXn

SelectableFir mware
iRC3180
BOOT
BROWSER
DCON
G3FAX
HELP
LANGUAGE
MEAPCONT
RUI
SYSTEM
TSTMP
TTS
WebDAV
iRCXXXX
HDFormat
KEY
SDICT

Hold
USenXXXXi

Download Firmware

RCON
XXxxXXXX

Upload Data

DCON
XXxxXXXX
RUI

Download Data

XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
MEAPCONT

Restore Backup System

XXxxXXXX
LANGUAGE

Format HDD

XXjaXXXX
XXenXXXX
BOOTROM
XXxxXXXXC
G3FAX

Start

XXxxXXXX

Shutdown
Return to Main Menu

F-17-190

4) Select the data to download, and click [Start].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.34E)
172.16.1.100
iRC3180
SAFE
Clear
SelectableFile
S e l e c t t h e f i l e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d .
t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n .

c:

Control
Click the button of the task to be
exe c u t e d .

DownloadedFile

Download Firmware
Upload Data

MeapBack.bin.upd

Download Data
Restore Backup System
Format HDD

Start

Series:iRC3180
iRC3180
Serial No:XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
DataType:backup of meap
Date:2007/ 07/ 3 17:14:33
Memo:Memo

Cansel
Return to Main Menu

F-17-191

5) When downloading has ended, click [OK] to return to the previous screen.

17.5.8 Uploading Procedure

0003-2764

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[Procedure]
Use normal mode (Power ON 1+7 on keypad) for uploading.
1) Click the [To Next] under Downloading/Uploading.

F-17-192

2) Select [SYSTEM] under iRC3100, and click [Connect].

17-111

Chapter 17

F-17-193

3) Click [Set host name].

F-17-194

4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click [OK].

17-112

Chapter 17

F-17-195

5) Click [OK] to start connection.

F-17-196

6) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click [OK].

17-113

Chapter 17

F-17-197

7) Click [Upload the Backup Data].

F-17-198

8) Select the data to upload, and click [Start Storing].

-DC controller PCB: SramDCON.bin
-Reader controller PCB: SramRCON.bin

17-114

Chapter 17

F-17-199

9) When uploading has ended, enter a file name to use, and click [Save].

F-17-200

10) When the file has been saved, click [OK].

17-115

Chapter 17

F-17-201

10) Click [To Unit Selection Screen].

17.5.9 Downloading Procedure

0003-2767

iR C3100 / iR C3100N
[Procedure]
Use normal mode (Power ON 1+7 on keypad) for downloading.
1) Click the [To Next] under Downloading/Uploading.

F-17-202

2) Select [SYSTEM] under iRC3100, and click [Connect].

17-116

Chapter 17

F-17-203

3) Click [Set host name].

F-17-204

4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click [OK].

17-117

Chapter 17

F-17-205

5) Click [OK] to start connection.

F-17-206

6) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click [OK].

17-118

Chapter 17

F-17-207

7) Click [Download the Backup Data].

F-17-208

8) Select the file to download, and click [Start Writing].

17-119

Chapter 17

F-17-209

9) When uploading has ended, click [OK].

F-17-210

10) Click [To Unit Selection Screen].

17.6 Version Upgrade using USB

17.6.1 Overview of Menus and Functions
0017-8343

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

17-120

Chapter 17

F-17-211

Downloading the System Software

[1]: Upgrade (AUTO)
Use it to download/write the system software. (auto)
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
Use it to download the system software. (Confirmation execution when version is downed the same version)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
Use it to download the system software. (all overwrite)
Formatting the HDD (only in safe mode)
[4]: Format HDD (in the presence of BOOTDEV)
Use it to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition.
[4]: Format HDD (ALL) (in the absence of BOOTDEV)
Use it to format the HDD for full partition.
Other Functions
[5]: Backup
Do not use it. (for use by R&D only)
[6]: Restore former version (in the presence of a backup of the system software)
Use it to restore the backup of the system software.
[7]: Clear downloaded files
Use it to remove the system software immediately before downloading (before writing).
[Stop]: Shutdown (in normal mode)
Use it to execute shut-down instructions.
To select/execute a function, use the keys on the control panel.

17.6.2 Points to Note

0017-8344

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine while downloading or writing is under way. Doing so could prevent the machine from starting up. If this is the case, execute HDD
formatting (menu [4]), and download the system software. If the machine fails to start up because of failed downloading of BOOT the DIMM ROM must be replaced.

Downgrading
Be sure that the system software in the USB device is of the latest version.
The following files of the system software do not permit collection of version information. As such, they necessarily overwrite the system software on the HDD:
- KEY (in both normal and safe mode)
- TTS (in both normal and safe mode)
- BROWSER (in both normal and safe mode)
- WebDAV (in both normal and safe mode)
- TSTAMP (in both normal and safe mode)
- HELP (in both normal and safe mode)
- DCON (in safe mode only)
- RCON (in safe mode only)
- G3FAX (in safe mode only)
The following is recommended for normal downloading (i.e., downloading of the system software, not after HDD replacement or formatting):
download mode: normal
download menu: [1]: Upgrade (Auto)

Turning Off the Power After Normal Mode

When ending download mode, be sure to execute the HDD shut-down instructions. On the Initial Menu screen, press [stop] > [0]; then, go through the shut-down
instructions, and turn off the main power switch.

17-121

Chapter 17

17.6.3 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto)

0017-8345

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
[1]: Upgrade (AUTO)
The system software on the HDD and that in the USB device are compared. If the latter is new, it will be downloaded to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
At the end of the downloading, the machine restarts on its own to write the downloaded system software to the system area of the HDD and the flash ROM.
<Procedure>
1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power.
2) Connect the USB device to the sub port.
3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe).
4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[1] -> [0]: execute download / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen

F-17-212

5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of the downloading, the machine restarts on its own to start writing to
the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM.
_E[h

HDD

F-17-213

6) At the end of writing to the HDD, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off the power, remove the USB device, and
turn the power back on.

F-17-214

17.6.4 Downloading the System Software (Confirmation execution when version is downed the same version)
0017-8346

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
The system software on the HDD is compared against that in the USB device. Those system files that are newer will then be downloaded to the temporary storage
area of the HDD. If the system software in the USB is of the same or older version, a message will appear on the screen, offering a choice. Unlike menu item
[1], the machine will not restart on its own. When you turn it off and then back on manually, it will start to write the system software when it starts up.

17-122

Chapter 17

<Procedure>
1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power.
2) Connect the USB device to the USB port.
3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe).
4) Go through the instructions indicated on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[2] -> [0]: execute download / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen

F-17-215

MEMO:
If the system software in the USB device is found to be of the same or older version, a message will appear asking you if you want to overwrite. Go though the
instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[0]: overwrite / other than [0]: do not overwrite

F-17-216

5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of downloading, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press
the appropriate key. If the machine is in normal mode, it starts the shut-down instructions.

F-17-217

6) When a message appears asking you to turn off the power, turn off the main power switch, remove the USB device, and turn on the main power switch.
7) Upon start-up, the machine starts to write the system software to the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM. At the end of writing to the HDD, a message
will appear asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off and then back on the main power switch.

F-17-218

17.6.5 Downloading the System Software (all overwriting)

0017-8347

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
The system software in the USB device will overwrite the software on the HDD regardless of the version of the latter. Unlike menu item [1], however, the

17-123

Chapter 17
machine will not restart on its own at the end of downloading. When the power is turned off and then back on manually, the machine starts writing the system
software.
<Procedure>
1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power.
2) Connect the USB device to the USB port.
3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe).
4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[3] -> [0]: execute download / other that [0]: go back to Menu screen

F-17-219

5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of downloading, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press
the appropriate key. If the machine is in normal mode, the shut-down sequence will start.

F-17-220

6) When a message appears asking you to turn off the power, turn off the main power, remove the USB device, and turn the main power switch back on.
7) Upon start-up, the machine starts writing the system software to the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM. At the end of writing, a message will appear
asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off and then on the main switch.

F-17-221

17.6.6 Formatting the HDD

0017-8348

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

This function is available only when the machine is in safe mode.

[4]: Format HDD (in the presence of BOOTDEV)
Use it to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition.
[4]: Format HDD (ALL) (in the absence of BOOTDEV, as when replacing with new HDD)
Use it to format the HDD for full partition.
<Procedure>
Go through the following to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition:
1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power.

17-124

Chapter 17
2) Connect the USB device to the USB port.
3) Start up the machine in safe mode.
4) Follow the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[4] -> [0]: go to Partition Selection screen / other that [0]: go back to Menu screen

F-17-222

5) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[1] -> [0]: execute BOOTDEV formatting / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen
[C]: go back to Menu screen

F-17-223

6) At the end of formatting, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press any key to go back to the Men screen.

F-17-224

7) Start downloading the system software. For instructions, see "Downloading the System Software."

17.6.7 Other Functions

0017-8349

iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci
[5]: Backup

This function is for R&D purposes only. Do not use it.

[6]: Restore former version (in the presence of backup of system software)
Use it to restore the backup of the system software while saving the system software that is current as a backup.
<Procedure>
1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power.
2) Connect the USB device to the USB port.
3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe).
4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[6] -> [0]: initialize / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen
After execution, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then on the power.

17-125

Chapter 17

F-17-225

5) Turn off the main power switch, remove the USB memory, and turn on the main power switch.
[7]: Clear downloaded files
Use it to remove the system software files that have been saved in the temporary storage area of the HDD. Use it if you want to remove the files without writing
them to the HDD after downloading (menu [2] and [3]).
<Procedure>
1) The power supply is turned off after the download of the system software by menu [2] or [3] is completed, and it starts in a safe mode with the USB memory
connected.
2) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press an appropriate key.
[7] -> [0]: execute / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen
Upon execution, the Menu screen will return.

F-17-226

[Stop]: Shutdown (in normal mode only)

Use it to start up the shut-down sequence.
<Procedure>
1) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press an appropriate key.
[Stop] -> [0]: execute / other than [0]: go to Menu screen
The shut-down sequence will be executed, and a message will appear asking you to turn off the power.

F-17-227

2) Turn off the main power switch, and remove the USB device.

17-126

Chapter 17

17.6.8 Overview of Menus and Functions

0010-4693

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

F-17-228

Downloading the System Software

[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
Use it to download/write the system software. (auto)
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
Use it to download the system software. (auto or selective)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
Use it to download the system software. (overwrite)
Formatting the HDD (only in safe mode)
[4]: Format HDD (in the presence of BOOTDEV)
Use it to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition.
[4]: Format HDD (ALL) (in the absence of BOOTDEV)
Use it to format the HDD for full partition.
Other Functions
[5]: Backup
Do not use it. (for use by R&D only)
[6]: Restore former version (in the presence of a backup of the system software)
Use it to restore the backup of the system software.
[7]: Clear downloaded files
Use it to remove the system software immediately before downloading (before writing).
[Stop]: Shutdown (in normal mode)
Use it to execute shut-down instructions.
To select/execute a function, use the keys on the control panel.

17-127

Chapter 17

17.6.9 Points to Note

0010-4750

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

Turning Off the Power

Do not turn off the machine while downloading or writing is under way. Doing so could prevent the machine from starting up. If this is the case, execute HDD
formatting (menu [4]), and download the system software. If the machine fails to start up because of failed downloading of BOOT, G3FAX, or G4FAX, the DIMM
ROM must be replaced.

Downgrading
Be sure that the system software in the USB device is of the latest version.
The following files of the system software do not permit collection of version information. As such, they necessarily overwrite the system software on the HDD:
- KEY (in both normal and safe mode)
- TTS (in both normal and safe mode)
- BROWSER (in both normal and safe mode)
- DCON (in safe mode only)
- RCON (in safe mode only)
The following is recommended for normal downloading (i.e., downloading of the system software, not after HDD replacement or formatting):
download mode: normal
download menu: [1]: Upgrade (Auto)

Turning Off the Power After Normal Mode

When ending download mode, be sure to execute the HDD shut-down instructions. On the Initial Menu screen, press [stop]>[0]; then, go through the shut-down
instructions, and turn off the main power switch.

F-17-229

17-128

Chapter 17

17.6.10 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto)

0010-4695

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[1]: Upgrade (AUTO)
The system software on the HDD and that in the USB device are compared. If the latter is new, it will be downloaded to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
At the end of the downloading, the machine restarts on its own to write the downloaded system software to the system area of the HDD and the flash ROM.
<Procedure>
1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power.
2) Connect the USB device to the sub port.
3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe).
4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[1] -> [0]: execute download / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen

F-17-230

5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of the downloading, the machine restarts on its own to start writing to
the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM.
- Screen Showing the Progress of Downloading

- Screen Showing the Progress of Writing to the HDD

F-17-231

6) At the end of writing to the HDD, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off the power, remove the USB device, and
turn the power back on.

F-17-232

17.6.11 Downloading the System Software (auto or selective)

0010-4698

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
The system software on the HDD is compared against that in the USB device. Those system files that are newer will then be downloaded to the temporary storage
area of the HDD. If the system software in the USB is of the same or older version, however, a message will appear on the screen, offering a choice. Unlike menu
item [1], the machine will not restart on its own. When you turn it off and then back on manually, it will start to write the system software when it starts up.
<Procedure>
1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power.
2) Connect the USB device to the USB port.
3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe).
4) Go through the instructions indicated on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[2] -> [0]: execute download / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen

17-129

Chapter 17

F-17-233

MEMO:
If the system software in the USB device is found to be of the same or older version, a message will appear asking you if you want to overwrite. Go though the
instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[0]: overwrite / other than [0]: do not overwrite

F-17-234

5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of downloading, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press
the appropriate key. If the machine is in normal mode, it starts the shut-down instructions.

F-17-235

6) When a message appears asking you to turn off the power, turn off the main power switch, remove the USB device, and turn on the main power switch.
7) Upon start-up, the machine starts to write the system software to the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM. At the end of writing to the HDD, a message
will appear asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off and then back on the main power switch.

F-17-236

17.6.12 Downloading the System Software (overwriting)

0010-4703

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
The system software in the USB device will overwrite the software on the HDD regardless of the version of the latter. Unlike menu item [1], however, the machine
will not restart on its own at the end of downloading. When the power is turned off and then back on manually, the machine starts writing the system software.
<Procedure>
1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power.
2) Connect the USB device to the USB port.
3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe).
4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[3] -> [0]: execute download / other that [0]: go back to Menu screen

17-130

Chapter 17

F-17-237

5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of downloading, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press
the appropriate key. If the machine is in normal mode, the shut-down sequence will start.

F-17-238

6) When a message appears asking you to turn off the power, turn off the main power, remove the USB device, and turn the main power switch back on.
7) Upon start-up, the machine starts writing the system software to the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM. At the end of writing, a message will appear
asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off and then on the main switch.

F-17-239

17-131

Chapter 17

17.6.13 Formatting the HDD

0010-4705

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

This function is available only when the machine is in safe mode.

[4]: Format HDD (in the presence of BOOTDEV)
Use it to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition.
[4]: Format HDD (ALL) (in the absence of BOOTDEV, as when replacing with new HDD)
Use it to format the HDD for full partition.
<Procedure>
Go through the following to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition:

1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power.
2) Connect the USB device to the USB port.
3) Start up the machine in safe mode.
4) Follow the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[4] -> [0]: go to Partition Selection screen / other that [0]: go back to Menu screen

F-17-240

5) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[1] -> [0]: execute BOOTDEV formatting / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen
[C]: go back to Menu screen

F-17-241

6) At the end of formatting, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press any key to go back to the Men screen.

F-17-242

7) Start downloading the system software. For instructions, see "Downloading the System Software."

17.6.14 Other Functions

0010-4739

iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i

[5]: Backup

This function is for R&D purposes only. Do not use it.

[6]: Restore former version (in the presence of backup of system software)
Use it to restore the backup of the system software while saving the system software that is current as a backup.

17-132

Chapter 17

<Procedure>
1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power.
2) Connect the USB device to the USB port.
3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe).
4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key.
[6] -> [0]: initialize / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen
After execution, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then on the power.

F-17-243

5) Turn off the main power switch, remove the USB memory, and turn on the main power switch.
[7]: Clear downloaded files
Use it to remove the system software files that have been saved in the temporary storage area of the HDD. Use it if you want to remove the files without writing
them to the HDD after downloading (menu [2] and [3]).
<Procedure>
1) When you have downloaded the system software using menu item [2] or [3], go to step 2) without turning off and then on the power. (If you already have turned
off the power, start up the machine in safe mode.)
2) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press an appropriate key.
[7] -> 10: execute / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen
Upon execution, the Menu screen will return.

F-17-244

[Stop]: Shutdown (in normal mode only)

Use it to start up the shut-down sequence.
<Procedure>
1) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press an appropriate key.
[Stop]->[0]: execute/ other than [0]: go to Menu screen
The shut-down sequence will be executed, and a message will appear asking you to turn off the power.

F-17-245

2) Turn off the main power switch, and remove the USB device.

17-133

Chapter 18 Service Tools

Contents

Contents
18.1 Service Tools..............................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.1.1 Special Tools............................................................................................................................................................................ 18-1
18.1.2 Solvents and Oils ..................................................................................................................................................................... 18-2

Chapter 18

18.1 Service Tools

18.1.1 Special Tools
0001-9022

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

In addition to the standard tooles set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:
T-18-1
Tool name

Tool No.

Ctgr

Appearance

Remarks

Digital multimeter

FY9-2002

Cover switch

TKN-0093

Tester extension pin

FY9-3038

Used as a probe extension

when making electrical
checks.

Tester extension pin (Lshaped)

FY9-3039

Used as a probe extension

when making electrical
checks.

Use for electrical checks;

for adjustment of laser
power in combination with
the laser power checker.

CA1 test Sheet

FY9-9030

Used for adjusting/

checking images.

D-10 test sheet

FY9-9129

Used for adjusting images.

Loupe

CK-0056

Used for checking images.

18-1

Chapter 18

[Ctgr]
A: Must be kept by each service engineer.
B: Must be kept by each group of about five engineers.
C: Must be kept by each warkshop.

18.1.2 Solvents and Oils

0001-9171

iR C3100 / iR C3100N / iR C2570 / iR C3170 / iR C3170i / iR C2570i / iR C3180C / iR C3180Ci

T-18-2

Item

Uses

Composition

Remarks

Alcohol

Cleaning; e.g.,
glass, plastic,
ruber; external
covers.

-Fluoride-family hydrocarbon
-Alcohol
-Surface activating
-Water

-Do not bring ner fire.

-Procure locally.
-Substitute:
IPA(isopropy alcohol)

Solvent

Cleaning; e.g.,
metal; oil or toner
stain.

-Fluoride-family hydrocarbon
-Chlorine-family hydrocarbon
-Alcohol

-Do not bring ner fire.

-Procure locally.
-Substitute:
MEK

Heat-resisting
grease

Lubrication; e.g.,
fixing drive areas.

-Mineral oil-family lithium soap -MO-138S

-Molybdenum disulfide
-Tool No: CK-0427 (500 g/can)

Lubricating oil

18-2

-Mineral oil
(paraffin-family)

-Tool No: CK-0524 (100 cc)

Lubricating oil

Lubrication; e.g., -Silicone oil

drive areas, friction
areas.

Lubricating oil
(EM-50L)

Lubrication; e.g.,
gears.

-Special oil
-Tool No: HY9-0007
-Special solid lubricating agent
-Lithium soap

Libricating oil

Lubrication; e.g.,
scanner rail.

-Silicone oil

-Tool No: 9-6011 (50 cc)

Conducting
grease

Lubrication; e.g.,
edge of secondary
transfer roller

-Fluorine poly wthyl

-Polytetra fluorune ethylene

-Tool No: FY9-6008 (75 g)

Lubricant

Lubrication; e.g.,
ITB Cleaning
Brade

Fluorine graphite

-Tool No: TKN-0480

-Tool No: CK-0551 (20 g)

Sep 8 2007